Notes by Leah EdelsteinKeshet: All rights reserved
University of British Columbia
January 2, 2010
ii Leah EdelsteinKeshet
Contents
Preface xvii
1 Areas, volumes and simple sums 1
1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 Areas of simple shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2.1 Example 1: Finding the area of a polygon using triangles:
a “dissection” method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2.2 Example 2: How Archimedes discovered the area of a
circle: dissect and “take a limit” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.3 Simple volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.3.1 Example 3: The Tower of Hanoi: a tower of disks . . . . 8
1.4 Summations and the “Sigma” notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.4.1 Manipulations of sums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.5 Summation formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.5.1 Example 3, revisited: Volume of a Tower of Hanoi . . . . 12
1.6 Summing the geometric series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.7 Prelude to inﬁnite series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1.7.1 The inﬁnite geometric series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.7.2 Example: A geometric series that converges. . . . . . . . 16
1.7.3 Example: A geometric series that diverges . . . . . . . . 16
1.8 Application of geometric series to the branching structure of the lungs 16
1.8.1 Assumptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1.8.2 A simple geometric rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.8.3 Total number of segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.8.4 Total volume of airways in the lung . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.8.5 Total surface area of the lung branches . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.8.6 Summary of predictions for speciﬁc parameter values . . 22
1.8.7 Exploring the problem numerically . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.8.8 For further independent study . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.9 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2 Areas 27
2.1 Areas in the plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2.2 Computing the area under a curve by rectangular strips . . . . . . . . 29
iii
iv Contents
2.2.1 First approach: Numerical integration using a spreadsheet 29
2.2.2 Second approach: Analytic computation using Riemann
sums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2.2.3 Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2.3 The area of a leaf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2.4 Area under an exponential curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
2.5 Extensions and other examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
2.6 The deﬁnite integral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
2.6.1 Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
2.6.2 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
2.7 The area as a function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
2.8 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
3 The Fundamental Theorem of Calculus 43
3.1 The deﬁnite integral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
3.2 Properties of the deﬁnite integral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
3.3 The area as a function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
3.4 The Fundamental Theorem of Calculus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
3.4.1 Fundamental theorem of calculus: Part I . . . . . . . . . 47
3.4.2 Example: an antiderivative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
3.4.3 Fundamental theorem of calculus: Part II . . . . . . . . . 48
3.5 Review of derivatives (and antiderivatives) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
3.6 Examples: Computing areas with the Fundamental Theoremof Calculus 50
3.6.1 Example 1: The area under a polynomial . . . . . . . . . 50
3.6.2 Example 2: Simple areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
3.6.3 Example 3: The area between two curves . . . . . . . . . 52
3.6.4 Example 4: Area of land . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
3.7 Qualitative ideas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
3.7.1 Example: sketching A(x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
3.8 Some ﬁne print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
3.8.1 Function unbounded I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
3.8.2 Function unbounded II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
3.8.3 Example: Function discontinuous or with distinct parts . 57
3.8.4 Function undeﬁned . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
3.8.5 Inﬁnite domain (“improper integral”) . . . . . . . . . . . 58
3.9 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
4 Applications of the deﬁnite integral to velocities and rates 61
4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
4.2 Displacement, velocity and acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
4.2.1 Geometric interpretations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
4.2.2 Displacement for uniform motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
4.2.3 Uniformly accelerated motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
4.2.4 Nonconstant acceleration and terminal velocity . . . . . 64
4.3 From rates of change to total change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
4.3.1 Tree growth rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Contents v
4.3.2 Radius of a tree trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
4.3.3 Birth rates and total births . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
4.4 Production and removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
4.5 Present value of a continuous income stream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
4.6 Average value of a function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
4.7 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
5 Applications of the deﬁnite integral to calculating volume, mass, and length 81
5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
5.2 Mass distributions in one dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
5.2.1 A discrete distribution: total mass of beads on a wire . . . 82
5.2.2 A continuous distribution: mass density and total mass . . 82
5.2.3 Example: Actin density inside a cell . . . . . . . . . . . 84
5.3 Mass distribution and the center of mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
5.3.1 Center of mass of a discrete distribution . . . . . . . . . . 85
5.3.2 Center of mass of a continuous distribution . . . . . . . . 85
5.3.3 Example: Center of mass vs average mass density . . . . 86
5.3.4 Physical interpretation of the center of mass . . . . . . . 87
5.4 Miscellaneous examples and related problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
5.4.1 Example: A glucose density gradient . . . . . . . . . . . 87
5.4.2 Example: A circular colony of bacteria . . . . . . . . . . 89
5.5 Volumes of solids of revolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
5.5.1 Volumes of cylinders and shells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
5.5.2 Computing the Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
5.6 Length of a curve: Arc length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
5.6.1 How the alligator gets its smile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
5.6.2 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
5.7 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
6 Techniques of Integration 107
6.1 Differential notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
6.2 Antidifferentiation and indeﬁnite integrals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
6.2.1 Integrals of derivatives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
6.3 Simple substitution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
6.3.1 Example: Simple substitution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
6.3.2 How to handle endpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
6.3.3 Examples: Substitution type integrals . . . . . . . . . . . 113
6.3.4 When simple substitution fails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
6.3.5 Checking your answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
6.4 More substitutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
6.4.1 Example: perfect square in denominator . . . . . . . . . 116
6.4.2 Example: completing the square . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
6.4.3 Example: factoring the denominator . . . . . . . . . . . 117
6.5 Trigonometric substitutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
6.5.1 Example: simple trigonometric substitution . . . . . . . . 118
6.5.2 Example: using trigonometric identities (1) . . . . . . . . 119
vi Contents
6.5.3 Example: using trigonometric identities (2) . . . . . . . . 119
6.5.4 Example: converting to trigonometric functions . . . . . 120
6.5.5 Example: The centroid of a two dimensional shape . . . . 122
6.5.6 Example: tan and sec substitution . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
6.6 Partial fractions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
6.6.1 Example: partial fractions (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
6.6.2 Example: partial fractions (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
6.6.3 Example: partial fractions (3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
6.7 Integration by parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
6.8 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
7 Discrete probability and the laws of chance 133
7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
7.2 Dealing with data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
7.3 Simple experiments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
7.3.1 Experiment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
7.3.2 Outcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
7.3.3 Empirical probability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
7.3.4 Theoretical Probability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
7.3.5 Random variables and probability distributions . . . . . . 135
7.3.6 The cumulative distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
7.4 Examples of experimental data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
7.4.1 Example1: Tossing a coin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
7.4.2 Example 2: grade distributions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
7.5 Mean and variance of a probability distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
7.6 Bernoulli trials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
7.6.1 The Binomial distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
7.6.2 The Binomial theorem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
7.6.3 The binomial distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
7.6.4 The normalized binomial distribution . . . . . . . . . . . 145
7.7 HardyWeinberg genetics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
7.7.1 Random nonassortative mating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
7.8 Random walker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
7.9 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
8 Continuous probability distributions 153
8.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
8.2 Basic deﬁnitions and properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
8.2.1 Example: probability density and the cumulative function 156
8.3 Mean and median . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
8.3.1 Example: Mean and median . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
8.3.2 How is the mean different from the median? . . . . . . . 160
8.3.3 Example: a nonsymmetric distribution . . . . . . . . . . 161
8.4 Applications of continuous probability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
8.4.1 Radioactive decay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
8.4.2 Discrete versus continuous probability . . . . . . . . . . 165
Contents vii
8.4.3 Example: Student heights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
8.4.4 Example: Age dependent mortality . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
8.4.5 Example: Raindrop size distribution . . . . . . . . . . . 169
8.5 Moments of a probability density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
8.5.1 Deﬁnition of moments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
8.5.2 Relationship of moments to mean and variance of a prob
ability density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
8.5.3 Example: computing moments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
8.6 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
9 Differential Equations 177
9.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
9.2 Unlimited population growth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
9.2.1 A simple model for population growth . . . . . . . . . . 178
9.2.2 Separation of variables and integration . . . . . . . . . . 179
9.3 Terminal velocity and steady states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
9.3.1 Ignoring friction: the uniformly accelerated case . . . . . 181
9.3.2 Including friction: the case of terminal velocity . . . . . . 181
9.3.3 Steady state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
9.4 Related problems and examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
9.4.1 Blood alcohol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
9.4.2 Chemical kinetics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
9.5 Emptying a container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
9.5.1 Conservation of mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
9.5.2 Conservation of energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
9.5.3 Putting it together . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
9.5.4 Solution by separation of variables . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
9.5.5 How long will it take the tank to empty? . . . . . . . . . 191
9.6 Density dependent growth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
9.6.1 The logistic equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
9.6.2 Scaling the equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
9.6.3 Separation of variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
9.6.4 Application of partial fractions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
9.6.5 The solution of the logistic equation . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
9.6.6 What this solution tells us . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
9.7 Extensions and other population models: the “Law of Mortality” . . . 195
9.7.1 Aging and Survival curves for a cohort: . . . . . . . . . . 196
9.7.2 Gompertz Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
9.8 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
10 Inﬁnite series, improper integrals, and Taylor series 199
10.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
10.2 Convergence and divergence of series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
10.3 Improper integrals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
10.3.1 Example: A decaying exponential: convergent improper
integral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
viii Contents
10.3.2 Example: The improper integral of 1/x diverges . . . . . 203
10.3.3 Example: The improper integral of 1/x
2
converges . . . . 204
10.3.4 When does the integral of 1/x
p
converge? . . . . . . . . 204
10.3.5 Integral comparison tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
10.4 Comparing integrals and series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
10.4.1 The harmonic series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
10.5 From geometric series to Taylor polynomials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
10.5.1 Example 1: A simple expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
10.5.2 Example 2: Another substitution . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
10.5.3 Example 3: An expansion for the logarithm . . . . . . . . 210
10.5.4 Example 4: An expansion for arctan . . . . . . . . . . . 211
10.6 Taylor Series: a systematic approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
10.6.1 Taylor series for the exponential function, e
x
. . . . . . . 213
10.6.2 Taylor series of trigonometric functions . . . . . . . . . . 214
10.7 Application of Taylor series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
10.7.1 Example 1: using a Taylor series to evaluate an integral . 216
10.7.2 Example 2: Series solution of a differential equation . . . 217
10.8 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
11 Appendix 221
11.1 How to prove the formulae for sums of squares and cubes . . . . . . . 221
11.2 Riemann Sums: Extensions and other examples . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
11.2.1 A general interval: a ≤ x ≤ b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
11.2.2 Using left (rather than right) endpoints . . . . . . . . . . 224
11.3 Physical interpretation of the center of mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
11.4 The shell method for computing volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
11.4.1 Example: Volume of a cone using the shell method . . . . 229
11.5 More techniques of integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
11.5.1 Secants and other “hard integrals” . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
11.5.2 A special case of integration by partial fractions . . . . . 231
11.6 Analysis of data: a student grade distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
11.6.1 Deﬁning an average grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
11.6.2 Fraction of students that scored a given grade . . . . . . . 232
11.6.3 Frequency distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
11.6.4 Average/mean of the distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
11.6.5 Cumulative function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
11.6.6 The median . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
11.7 Factorial notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
11.8 Appendix: Permutations and combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
11.8.1 Permutations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
11.9 Appendix: Tests for convergence of series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
11.9.1 The ratio test: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
11.9.2 Series comparison tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
11.9.3 Alternating series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
11.10 Adding and multiplying series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
11.11 Using series to solve a differential equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Contents ix
Index 243
x Contents
List of Figures
1.1 Planar regions whose areas are given by elementary formulae. . . . . . . 2
1.2 Dissecting n nsided polygon into n triangles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.3 Archimedes’ approximation of the area of a circle . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.4 3dimensional shapes whose volumes are given by elementary formulae . 7
1.5 Computing the volume of a set of disks. (This structure is sometimes
called the tower of Hanoi after a mathematical puzzle by the same name.) 8
1.6 Branched structure of the lung airways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1.7 Volume and surface area of the lung airways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2.1 Areas of regions in the plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2.2 Increasing the number of strips improves the approximation . . . . . . . 28
2.3 Approximating an area by a set of rectangles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2.4 The area of a leaf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2.5 The area corresponding to the deﬁnite integral of the function f(x) . . . 37
2.6 More areas related to deﬁnite integrals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
2.7 The area A(x) considered as a function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
3.1 Deﬁnite integrals for functions that take on negative values, and proper
ties of the deﬁnite integral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
3.2 How the area changes when the interval changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3.3 The area of a symmetric region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
3.4 The areas A
1
and A
2
in Example 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
3.5 The “area function” corresponding to a function f(x) . . . . . . . . . . . 54
3.6 Sketching the antiderivative of f(x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
3.7 Sketches of a functions and its antiderivative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
3.8 Splitting up a region to compute an integral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
3.9 Integrating in the y direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
4.1 Displacement and velocity as areas under curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
4.2 Terminal velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
4.3 Tree growth rates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
4.4 The rate of change of a tree radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
4.5 The tree radius as a function of time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
4.6 Rates of hormone production and removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
4.7 Approximating hormone production/removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
xi
xii List of Figures
4.8 The yearly day length cycle and average day length . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
5.1 Discrete mass distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
5.2 Continuous mass distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
5.3 The actin cortex of a ﬁsh keratocyte cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
5.4 A glucose gradient in a test tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
5.5 A bacterial colony . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
5.6 Volumes of simple 3D shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
5.7 Dissecting a solid of revolution into disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
5.8 Volume of one of the disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
5.9 Generating a sphere by rotating a semicircle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
5.10 A paraboloid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
5.11 Dissecting a curve into small arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
5.12 Elements of arclength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
5.13 Using the spreadsheet to compute and graph arclength . . . . . . . . . . 100
5.14 Alligator mississippiensis and its teeth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
5.15 Analysis of distance between successive teeth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
6.1 Slope of a straight line, m = ∆y/∆x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
6.2 Figure illustrating differential notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
6.3 A helpful triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
6.4 A semicircular shape. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
6.5 As in Figure 6.3 but for example 6.5.6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
7.1 A plot of data from a coin tossing experiment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
7.2 The Binomial distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
7.3 The Normal (Gaussian) distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
7.4 Normal probability density and its cumulative function . . . . . . . . . . 146
7.5 Hardy Weinberg mating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
7.6 A random walker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
8.1 Probability density and its cumulative function in Example 8.2.1 . . . . . 157
8.2 Median for Example 8.3.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
8.3 Mean versus median . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
8.4 Median and median for a nonsymmetric probability density . . . . . . . 162
8.5 Reﬁning a histogramby increasing the number of bins leads (eventually)
to the idea of a continuous probability density. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
8.6 Raindrop radius and volume probability distributions . . . . . . . . . . . 169
9.1 Terminal velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
9.2 Blood alcohol level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
9.3 Emptying a container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
9.4 Height of ﬂuid versus time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
9.5 Solutions to the logistic equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
9.6 Gompertz Law of Mortality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
10.1 Approximating a function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
List of Figures xiii
10.2 Convergence and divergence of an inﬁnite series . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
10.3 Improper integrals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
10.4 The harmonic series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
10.5 Taylor polynomials for sin(x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
11.1 Rectangles attached to left or right endpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
11.2 Rectangles with left or right corners on the graph of y = x
2
. . . . . . . 227
11.3 Center of mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
11.4 A cone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
11.5 Student grade distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
11.6 Cumulative grade function and the median . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
11.7 Permutations and combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
xiv List of Figures
List of Tables
1.1 Typical structure of branched airway passages in lungs. . . . . . . . . . . 18
1.2 Volume, surface area, scale factors, and other derived quantities . . . . . 22
1.3 Areas of planar regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.4 Volumes of 3D shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1.5 Surface areas of 3D shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1.6 Useful summation formulae . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.1 Heights and areas of rectangular strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.1 Common functions and their antiderivatives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
5.1 Arc length calculated using spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
5.2 Alligator teeth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
7.1 Data from a cointossing experiment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
7.2 A Bernoulli trial with n = 3 repetitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
7.3 Probability of X successes in a Bernoulli trial with n = 3 repetitions . . 141
7.4 Pascal’s triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
7.5 Hardy Weinberg gene probabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
7.6 Mating table for HardyWeinberg genetics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
11.1 Student test scores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
xv
xvi List of Tables
Preface
Integral calculus arose originally to solve very practical problems that merchants,
landowners, and ordinary people faced on a daily basis. Among such pressing problems
were the following: How much should one pay for a piece of land? If that land has an
irregular shape, i.e. is not a simple geometrical shape, how should its area (and therefore,
its cost) be calculated? How much olive oil or wine, are you getting when you purchase
a barrelfull? Barrels come is a variety of shapes and sizes. If the barrel is not close
to cylindrical, what is its volume (and thus, a reasonable price to pay)? In most such
transactions, the need to accurately measure an area or a volume went well beyond the
available results of geometry. (It was known how to compute areas of rectangles, triangles,
and polygons. Volumes of cylinders and cubes were also known, but these were at best
crude approximations to actual shapes and objects encountered in commerce.) This led to
motivation for the development of the topic we now call integral calculus.
Essentially, the approach is based on the idea of “divide and conquer”: that is, cut up
the geometric shape into smaller pieces, and approximate those pieces by regular shapes
that can be quantiﬁed using simple geometry. In computing the area of an irregular shape,
add up the areas of the (approximately regular) little parts in your “dissection”, to arrive at
an approximation of the desired area of the shape. Depending on how ﬁne the dissection
(i.e. how many little parts), this approximation could be quite crude, or fairly accurate.
The idea of applying a limit to obtain the true dimensions of the object was a ﬂash of
inspiration that led to modern day calculus. Similar ideas apply to computing the volume
of a 3D object by successive subdivisions.
It is the aim of a calculus course to develop the language to deal with such concepts,
to make such concepts systematic, and to ﬁnd convenient and relevant shortcuts that can
be used to solve a variety of problems that have common features. More than that, it is
the purpose of this course to show that ideas developed in the original context of geometry
(ﬁnding areas or volumes of 2D or 3D shapes) can be generalized and extended to a variety
of applications that have little to do with geometry.
One area of application is that of computing total change given some timedependent
rate of change. We encounter many cases where a process changes at a rate that varies
over time: the rate of production of hormone changes over a day, the rate of ﬂow of water
in a river changes over the seasons, or the rate of motion of a vehicle (i.e. its velocity)
changes over its path. Computing the total change over some time span turns out to be
closely related to the same underlying concept of “divide and conquer”: namely, subdivide
(the time interval) and add up approximate changes over each of the smaller subintervals.
The same idea applies to quantities that are distributed not in time but rather over space.
xvii
xviii Preface
We show the connection between material that is spatially distributed in a nonuniformway
(e.g. a density that varies from point to point) and total amount of material (obtained by
the same process of integration).
A theme that unites much of the approach is that integral calculus has both analytic
(i.e. pencil and paper) calculations  but these apply to a limited set of cases, and analogous
numerical (i.e. computerenabled) calculations. The two go handinhand, with concepts
that are closely linked. A set of computer labs using a spreadsheet tool are an important
part of this course. The importance of seeing calculus from these two distinct but related
perspectives is stressed: on the one hand, analytic computations can be very powerful and
helpful, but at the same time, many interesting problems are too challenging to be handled
by integration techniques. Here is where the same ideas, used in the context of simple
computer algorithms, comes in handy. For this reason, the importance of understanding the
concepts (not just the technical results, or the “formulae” for integrals) is vital: Ideas used to
develop the analytic techniques on which calculus is based can be adapted to develop good
working methods for harnessing computer power to solve problems. This is particularly
useful in cases where the analytic methods are not sufﬁcient or too technically challenging.
This set of lecture notes grewout of many years of teaching of Mathematics 103. The
material is organized as follows: In Chapter 1 we develop the basic formulae for areas and
volumes of elementary shapes, and showhowto set up summations that describe compound
objects made up of many such shapes. An example to motivate these ideas is the volume
and surface area of a branching structure. In Chapter 2, we turn attention to the classic
problem of deﬁning and computing the area of a twodimensional region, leading to the
notion of the deﬁnite integral. In Chapter 3, we discuss the linchpin of Integral Calculus,
namely the Fundamental Theorem that connects derivatives and integrals. This allows us
to ﬁnd a great shortcut to the analytic computations described in Chapter 2. Applications
of these ideas to calculating total change from rates of change, and to computing volumes
and masses are discussed in Chapters 4 and 5.
To expand our reach to other cases, we discuss the techniques on integration in Chap
ter 6. Here, we ﬁnd that the chain rule of calculus reappears (in the form of substitution
integrals), and a variety of miscellaneous tricks are devised to simplify integrals. Among
these, the most important is integration by parts, a technique that has independent applica
tions in many areas of science.
We study the ideas of probability in Chapters 7 and 8. Here we rediscover the con
nection between discrete sums and continuous integration, and apply the techniques to
computing expected values for random variables. The connection between the mean (in
probability) and the center of mass (of a density distributed in space) is illustrated.
Many scientiﬁc problems are phrased in terms of rules about rates of change. Quite
often such rules take the form of differential equations. In an earlier differential calculus
course, the student will have made acquaintance with the topic of such equations and qual
itative techniques associated with interpreting their solutions. With the methods of integral
calculus in hand, we can solve some types of differential equations analytically. This is
discussed in Chapter 9.
The course concludes with the development of some notions of inﬁnite sums and con
vergence in Chapter 10. Of prime importance, the Taylor series is developed and discussed
in this concluding chapter.
Chapter 1
Areas, volumes and
simple sums
1.1 Introduction
This introductory chapter has several aims. First, we concentrate here a number of basic
formulae for areas and volumes that are used later in developing the notions of integral
calculus. Among these are areas of simple geometric shapes and formulae for sums of
certain common sequences. An important idea is introduced, namely that we can use the
sum of areas of elementary shapes to approximate the areas of more complicated objects,
and that the approximation can be made more accurate by a process of reﬁnement.
We show using examples how such ideas can be used in calculating the volumes or
areas of more complex objects. In particular, we conclude with a detailed exploration of
the structure of branched airways in the lung as an application of ideas in this chapter.
1.2 Areas of simple shapes
One of the main goals in this course will be calculating areas enclosed by curves in the
plane and volumes of three dimensional shapes. We will ﬁnd that the tools of calculus will
provide important and powerful techniques for meeting this goal. Some shapes are simple
enough that no elaborate techniques are needed to compute their areas (or volumes). We
brieﬂy survey some of these simple geometric shapes and list what we know or can easily
determine about their area or volume.
The areas of simple geometrical objects, such as rectangles, parallelograms, triangles,
and circles are given by elementary formulae. Indeed, our ability to compute areas and
volumes of more elaborate geometrical objects will rest on some of these simple formulae,
summarized below.
Rectangular areas
Most integration techniques discussed in this course are based on the idea of carving up
irregular shapes into rectangular strips. Thus, areas of rectangles will play an important
part in those methods.
1
2 Chapter 1. Areas, volumes and simple sums
• The area of a rectangle with base b and height h is
A = b · h
• Any parallelogramwith height h and base b also has area, A = b·h. See Figure 1.1(a)
and (b)
(a)
(c)
(e) (f)
(d)
(b)
b
h
b
h
h
b
b
h
r
b
h
b
θ
h
Figure 1.1. Planar regions whose areas are given by elementary formulae.
Areas of triangular shapes
A few illustrative examples in this chapter will be based on dissecting shapes (such as regu
lar polygons) into triangles. The areas of triangles are easy to compute, and we summarize
this review material below. However, triangles will play a less important role in subsequent
integration methods.
• The area of a triangle can be obtained by slicing a rectangle or parallelogramin half,
as shown in Figure 1.1(c) and (d). Thus, any triangle with base b and height h has
area
A =
1
2
bh.
1.2. Areas of simple shapes 3
• In some cases, the height of a triangle is not given, but can be determined from other
information provided. For example, if the triangle has sides of length b and r with
enclosed angle θ, as shown on Figure 1.1(e) then its height is simply h = r sin(θ),
and its area is
A = (1/2)br sin(θ)
• If the triangle is isosceles, with two sides of equal length, r, and base of length b,
as in Figure 1.1(f) then its height can be obtained from Pythagoras’s theorem, i.e.
h
2
= r
2
−(b/2)
2
so that the area of the triangle is
A = (1/2)b
r
2
−(b/2)
2
.
1.2.1 Example 1: Finding the area of a polygon using
triangles: a “dissection” method
Using the simple ideas reviewed so far, we can determine the areas of more complex ge
ometric shapes. For example, let us compute the area of a regular polygon with n equal
sides, where the length of each side is b = 1. This example illustrates how a complex shape
(the polygon) can be dissected into simpler shapes, namely triangles
1
.
h
θ
1
1/2
θ/2
Figure 1.2. An equilateral nsided polygon with sides of unit length can be dis
sected into n triangles. One of these triangles is shown at right. Since it can be further
divided into two Pythagorean triangles, trigonometric relations can be used to ﬁnd the
height h in terms of the length of the base 1/2 and the angle θ/2.
Solution
The polygon has n sides, each of length b = 1. We dissect the polygon into n isosceles
triangles, as shown in Figure 1.2. We do not know the heights of these triangles, but the
angle θ can be found. It is
θ = 2π/n
since together, n of these identical angles make up a total of 360
◦
or 2π radians.
1
This calculation will be used again to ﬁnd the area of a circle in Section 1.2.2. However, note that in later
chapters, our dissections of planar areas will focus mainly on rectangular pieces.
4 Chapter 1. Areas, volumes and simple sums
Let h stand for the height of one of the triangles in the dissected polygon. Then
trigonometric relations relate the height to the base length as follows:
opp
adj
=
b/2
h
= tan(θ/2)
Using the fact that θ = 2π/n, and rearranging the above expression, we get
h =
b
2 tan(π/n)
Thus, the area of each of the n triangles is
A =
1
2
bh =
1
2
b
b
2 tan(π/n)
.
The statement of the problem speciﬁes that b = 1, so
A =
1
2
1
2 tan(π/n)
.
The area of the entire polygon is then n times this, namely
A
ngon
=
n
4 tan(π/n)
.
For example, the area of a square (a polygon with 4 equal sides, n = 4) is
A
square
=
4
4 tan(π/4)
=
1
tan(π/4)
= 1,
where we have used the fact that tan(π/4) = 1.
As a second example, the area of a hexagon (6 sided polygon, i.e. n = 6) is
A
hexagon
=
6
4 tan(π/6)
=
3
2(1/
√
3)
=
3
√
3
2
.
Here we used the fact that tan(π/6) = 1/
√
3.
1.2.2 Example 2: How Archimedes discovered the area of a
circle: dissect and “take a limit”
As we learn early in school the formula for the area of a circle of radius r, A = πr
2
.
But how did this convenient formula come about? and how could we relate it to what we
know about simpler shapes whose areas we have discussed so far. Here we discuss how
this formula for the area of a circle was determined long ago by Archimedes using a clever
“dissection” and approximation trick. We have already seen part of this idea in dissecting
a polygon into triangles, in Section 1.2.1. Here we see a terriﬁcally important second step
that formed the “leap of faith” on which most of calculus is based, namely taking a limit as
the number of subdivisions increases
2
.
First, we recall the deﬁnition of the constant π:
2
This idea has important parallels with our later development of integration. Here it involves adding up the
areas of triangles, and then taking a limit as the number of triangles gets larger. Later on, we do much the same,
but using rectangles in the dissections.
1.2. Areas of simple shapes 5
Deﬁnition of π
In any circle, π is the ratio of the circumference to the diameter of the circle. (Comment:
expressed in terms of the radius, this assertion states the obvious fact that the ratio of 2πr
to 2r is π.)
Shown in Figure 1.3 is a sequence of regular polygons inscribed in the circle. As the
number of sides of the polygon increases, its area gradually becomes a better and better
approximation of the area inside the circle. Similar observations are central to integral
calculus, and we will encounter this idea often. We can compute the area of any one of
these polygons by dissecting into triangles. All triangles will be isosceles, since two sides
are radii of the circle, whose length we’ll call r.
r
r
b
h
Figure 1.3. Archimedes approximated the area of a circle by dissecting it into triangles.
Let r denote the radius of the circle. Suppose that at one stage we have an n sided
polygon. (If we knew the side length of that polygon, then we already have a formula for
its area. However, this side length is not known to us. Rather, we know that the polygon
should ﬁt exactly inside a circle of radius r.) This polygon is made up of n triangles, each
one an isosceles triangle with two equal sides of length r and base of undetermined length
that we will denote by b. (See Figure 1.3.) The area of this triangle is
A
triangle
=
1
2
bh.
The area of the whole polygon, A
n
is then
A = n · (area of triangle) = n
1
2
bh =
1
2
(nb)h.
We have grouped terms so that (nb) can be recognized as the perimeter of the polygon
(i.e. the sum of the n equal sides of length b each). Now consider what happens when we
increase the number of sides of the polygon, taking larger and larger n. Then the height
of each triangle will get closer to the radius of the circle, and the perimeter of the polygon
will get closer and closer to the perimeter of the circle, which is (by deﬁnition) 2πr. i.e. as
n →∞,
h →r, (nb) →2πr
so
A =
1
2
(nb)h →
1
2
(2πr)r = πr
2
6 Chapter 1. Areas, volumes and simple sums
We have used the notation “→” to mean that in the limit, as n gets large, the quantity of
interest “approaches” the value shown. This argument proves that the area of a circle must
be
A = πr
2
.
One of the most important ideas contained in this little argument is that by approximating a
shape by a larger and larger number of simple pieces (in this case, a large number of trian
gles), we get a better and better approximation of its area. This idea will appear again soon,
but in most of our standard calculus computations, we will use a collection of rectangles,
rather than triangles, to approximate areas of interesting regions in the plane.
Areas of other shapes
We concentrate here the area of a circle and of other shapes.
• The area of a circle of radius r is
A = πr
2
.
• The surface area of a sphere of radius r is
S
ball
= 4πr
2
.
• The surface area of a right circular cylinder of height h and base radius r is
S
cyl
= 2πrh.
Units
The units of area can be meters
2
(m
2
), centimeters
2
(cm
2
), square inches, etc.
1.3 Simple volumes
Later in this course, we will also be computing the volumes of 3D shapes. As in the case
of areas, we collect below some basic formulae for volumes of elementary shapes. These
will be useful in our later discussions.
1. The volume of a cube of side length s (Figure 1.4a), is
V = s
3
.
2. The volume of a rectangular box of dimensions h, w, l (Figure 1.4b) is
V = hwl.
3. The volume of a cylinder of base area A and height h, as in Figure 1.4(c), is
V = Ah.
This applies for a cylinder with ﬂat base of any shape, circular or not.
1.3. Simple volumes 7
r
(a) (b)
(c) (d)
s
w
l
h
A
h
Figure 1.4. 3dimensional shapes whose volumes are given by elementary formulae
4. In particular, the volume of a cylinder with a circular base of radius r, (e.g. a disk) is
V = h(πr
2
).
5. The volume of a sphere of radius r (Figure 1.4d), is
V =
4
3
πr
3
.
6. The volume of a spherical shell (hollow sphere with a shell of some small thickness,
τ) is approximately
V ≈ τ · (surface area of sphere) = 4πτr
2
.
7. Similarly, a cylindrical shell of radius r, height h and small thickness, τ has volume
given approximately by
V ≈ τ · (surface area of cylinder) = 2πτrh.
Units
The units of volume are meters
3
(m
3
), centimeters
3
(cm
3
), cubic inches, etc.
8 Chapter 1. Areas, volumes and simple sums
1.3.1 Example 3: The Tower of Hanoi: a tower of disks
In this example, we consider how elementary shapes discussed above can be used to de
termine volumes of more complex objects. The Tower of Hanoi is a shape consisting of a
number of stacked disks. It is a simple calculation to add up the volumes of these disks, but
if the tower is large, and comprised of many disks, we would want some shortcut to avoid
long sums
3
.
Figure 1.5. Computing the volume of a set of disks. (This structure is sometimes
called the tower of Hanoi after a mathematical puzzle by the same name.)
(a) Compute the volume of a tower made up of four disks stacked up one on top of
the other, as shown in Figure 1.5. Assume that the radii of the disks are 1, 2, 3, 4 units and
that each disk has height 1.
(b) Compute the volume of a tower made up of 100 such stacked disks, with radii
r = 1, 2, . . . , 99, 100.
Solution
(a) The volume of the fourdisk tower is calculated as follows:
V = V
1
+V
2
+V
3
+V
4
,
where V
i
is the volume of the i’th disk whose radius is r = i, i = 1, 2 . . . 4. The height of
each disk is h = 1, so
V = (π1
2
) + (π2
2
) + (π3
2
) + (π4
2
) = π(1 + 4 + 9 + 16) = 30π.
(b) The idea will be the same, but we have to calculate
V = π(1
2
+ 2
2
+ 3
2
+. . . + 99
2
+ 100
2
).
It would be tedious to do this by adding up individual terms, and it is also cumbersome
to write down the long list of terms that we will need to add up. This motivates inventing
some helpful notation, and ﬁnding some clever way of performing such calculations.
3
Note that the idea of computing a volume of a radially symmetric 3D shape by dissection into disks will form
one of the main themes in Chapter 5. Here, the sums of the volumes of disks is exactly the same as the volume of
the tower. Later on, the disks will only approximate the true 3D volume, and a limit will be needed to arrive at a
“true volume”.
1.4. Summations and the “Sigma” notation 9
1.4 Summations and the “Sigma” notation
We introduce the following notation for the operation of summing a list of numbers:
S = a
1
+a
2
+a
3
+. . . +a
N
≡
N
¸
k=1
a
k
.
The Greek symbol Σ (“Sigma”) indicates summation. The symbol k used here is
called the “index of summation” and it keeps track of where we are in the list of summands.
The notation k = 1 that appears underneath Σ indicates where the sum begins (i.e. which
term starts off the series), and the superscript N tells us where it ends. We will be interested
in getting used to this notation, as well as in actually computing the value of the desired
sum using a variety of shortcuts.
Example 4a: Summation notation
Suppose we want to form the sum of ten numbers, each equal to 1. We would write this as
S = 1 + 1 + 1 +. . . 1 ≡
10
¸
k=1
1.
The notation . . . signiﬁes that we have left out some of the terms (out of laziness, or in cases
where there are too many to conveniently write down.) We could have just as well written
the sum with another symbol (e.g. n) as the index, i.e. the same operation is implied by
10
¸
n=1
1.
To compute the value of the sum we use the elementary fact that the sum of ten ones is just
10, so
S =
10
¸
k=1
1 = 10.
Example 4b: Sum of squares
Expand and sum the following:
S =
4
¸
k=1
k
2
.
Solution
S =
4
¸
k=1
k
2
= 1 + 2
2
+ 3
2
+ 4
2
= 1 + 4 + 9 + 16 = 30.
(We have already seen this sum in part (a) of The Tower of Hanoi.)
10 Chapter 1. Areas, volumes and simple sums
Example 4c: Common factors
Add up the following list of 100 numbers (only a few of them are shown):
S = 3 + 3 + 3 + 3 +. . . + 3.
Solution
There are 100 terms, all equal, so we can take out a common factor
S = 3 + 3 + 3 + 3 +. . . + 3 =
100
¸
k=1
3 = 3
100
¸
k=1
1 = 3(100) = 300.
Example 4d: Finding the pattern
Write the following terms in summation notation:
S =
1
3
+
1
9
+
1
27
+
1
81
.
Solution
We recognize that there is a pattern in the sequence of terms, namely, each one is 1/3 raised
to an increasing integer power, i.e.
S =
1
3
+
1
3
2
+
1
3
3
+
1
3
4
.
We can represent this with the “Sigma” notation as follows:
S =
4
¸
n=1
1
3
n
.
The “index” n starts at 1, and counts up through 2, 3, and 4, while each term has the formof
(1/3)
n
. This series is a geometric series, to be explored shortly. In most cases, a standard
geometric series starts off with the value 1. We can easily modify our notation to include
additional terms, for example:
S =
5
¸
n=0
1
3
n
= 1 +
1
3
+
1
3
2
+
1
3
3
+
1
3
4
+
1
3
5
.
Learning how to compute the sum of such terms will be important to us, and will be de
scribed later on in this chapter.
1.4.1 Manipulations of sums
Since addition is commutative and distributive, sums of lists of numbers satisfy many con
venient properties. We give a few examples below:
1.5. Summation formulas 11
Example 5a: Simple operations
Simplify the following expression:
10
¸
k=1
2
k
−
10
¸
k=3
2
k
.
Solution
10
¸
k=1
2
k
−
10
¸
k=3
2
k
= (2 + 2
2
+ 2
3
+ · · · + 2
10
) −(2
3
+ · · · + 2
10
) = 2 + 2
2
.
We could have arrived at this conclusion directly from
10
¸
k=1
2
k
−
10
¸
k=3
2
k
=
2
¸
k=1
2
k
= 2 + 2
2
= 2 + 4 = 6.
The idea is that all but the ﬁrst two terms in the ﬁrst sum will cancel. The only remaining
terms are those corresponding to k = 1 and k = 2.
Example 5b: Expanding
Expand the following expression:
5
¸
n=0
(1 + 3
n
).
Solution
5
¸
n=0
(1 + 3
n
) =
5
¸
n=0
1 +
5
¸
n=0
3
n
.
1.5 Summation formulas
In this section we introduce a few examples of useful sums and give formulae that provide
a shortcut to dreary calculations.
The sum of consecutive integers (Gauss’ formula)
We ﬁrst show that the sum of the ﬁrst N integers is:
S = 1 + 2 + 3 +. . . +N =
N
¸
k=1
k =
N(N + 1)
2
. (1.1)
12 Chapter 1. Areas, volumes and simple sums
The following trick is due to Gauss. By aligning two copies of the above sum, one
written backwards, we can easily add them up one by one vertically. We see that:
S = 1 + 2 + . . . + (N −1) + N
+
S = N + (N −1) + . . . + 2 + 1
2S = (1 + N) + (1 +N) + . . . + (1 +N) + (1 +N)
Thus, there are N times the value (N + 1) above, so that
2S = N(1 +N), so S =
N(1 +N)
2
.
Thus, Gauss’ formula is conﬁrmed.
Example: Adding up the ﬁrst 1000 integers
Suppose we want to add up the ﬁrst 1000 integers. This formula is very useful in what
would otherwise be a huge calculation. We ﬁnd that
S = 1 + 2 + 3 +. . . + 1000 =
1000
¸
k=1
k =
1000(1 + 1000)
2
= 500(1001) = 500500.
Two other useful formulae are those for the sums of consecutive squares and of
consecutive cubes:
The sum of the ﬁrst N consecutive square integers
S
2
= 1
2
+ 2
2
+ 3
2
+. . . +N
2
=
N
¸
k=1
k
2
=
N(N + 1)(2N + 1)
6
. (1.2)
The sum of the ﬁrst N consecutive cube integers
S
3
= 1
3
+ 2
3
+ 3
3
+. . . +N
3
=
N
¸
k=1
k
3
=
N(N + 1)
2
2
. (1.3)
In the Appendix, we show how the formula for the sum of square integers can be
proved by a technique called mathematical induction.
1.5.1 Example 3, revisited: Volume of a Tower of Hanoi
Armed with the formula for the sum of squares, we can now return to the problem of com
puting the volume of a tower of 100 stacked disks of heights 1 and radii r = 1, 2, . . . , 99, 100.
We have
V = π(1
2
+2
2
+3
2
+. . .+99
2
+100
2
) = π
100
¸
k=1
k
2
= π
100(101)(201)
6
= 338, 350π cubic units.
1.6. Summing the geometric series 13
Examples: Evaluating the sums
Compute the following two sums:
(a) S
a
=
20
¸
k=1
(2 −3k + 2k
2
), (b) S
b
=
50
¸
k=10
k.
Solutions
(a) We can separate this into three individual sums, each of which can be handled by alge
braic simpliﬁcation and/or use of the summation formulae developed so far.
S
a
=
20
¸
k=1
(2 −3k + 2k
2
) = 2
20
¸
k=1
1 −3
20
¸
k=1
k + 2
20
¸
k=1
k
2
.
Thus, we get
S
a
= 2(20) −3
20(21)
2
+ 2
(20)(21)(41)
6
= 5150.
(b) We can express the second sum as a difference of two sums:
S
b
=
50
¸
k=10
k =
50
¸
k=1
k
−
9
¸
k=1
k
.
Thus
S
b
=
50(51)
2
−
9(10)
2
= 1275 −45 = 1230.
1.6 Summing the geometric series
Consider a sum of terms that all have the form r
k
, where r is some real number and k is
an integer power. We refer to a series of this type as a geometric series. We have already
seen one example of this type in a previous section. Below we will show that the sum of
such a series is given by:
S
N
= 1 +r +r
2
+r
3
+. . . +r
N
=
N
¸
k=0
r
k
=
1 −r
N+1
1 −r
(1.4)
where r = 1. We call this sum a (ﬁnite) geometric series. We would like to ﬁnd
an expression for terms of this form in the general case of any real number r, and ﬁnite
number of terms N. First we note that there are N + 1 terms in this sum, so that if r = 1
then
S
N
= 1 + 1 + 1 +. . . 1 = N + 1
(a total of N + 1 ones added.) If r = 1 we have the following trick:
S = 1 + r + r
2
+ . . . + r
N
−
rS = r + r
2
+ . . . + r
N+1
14 Chapter 1. Areas, volumes and simple sums
Subtracting leads to
S −rS = (1 +r +r
2
+. . . +r
N
) −(r +r
2
+. . . +r
N
+r
N+1
)
Most of the terms on the right hand side cancel, leaving
S(1 −r) = 1 −r
N+1
.
Now dividing both sides by 1 −r leads to
S =
1 −r
N+1
1 −r
,
which was the formula to be established.
Example: Geometric series
Compute the following sum:
S
c
=
10
¸
k=0
2
k
.
Solution
This is a geometric series
S
c
=
10
¸
k=0
2
k
=
1 −2
10+1
1 −2
=
1 −2048
−1
= 2047.
1.7 Prelude to inﬁnite series
So far, we have looked at several examples of ﬁnite series, i.e. series in which there are
only a ﬁnite number of terms, N (where N is some integer). We would like to investigate
how the sum of a series behaves when more and more terms of the series are included. It
is evident that in many cases, such as Gauss’s series (1.1), or sums of squared or cubed
integers (e.g., Eqs. (1.2) and (1.3)), the series simply gets larger and larger as more terms
are included. We say that such series diverge as N → ∞. Here we will look speciﬁcally
for series that converge, i.e. have a ﬁnite sum, even as more and more terms are included
4
.
Let us focus again on the geometric series and determine its behaviour when the
number of terms is increased. Our goal is to ﬁnd a way of attaching a meaning to the
expression
S
n
=
∞
¸
k=0
r
k
,
when the series becomes an inﬁnite series. We will use the following deﬁnition:
4
Convergence and divergence of series is discussed in fuller depth in Chapter 10 in the context of Taylor Series.
However, these concepts are so important that it was felt necessary to introduce some preliminary ideas early in
the term.
1.7. Prelude to inﬁnite series 15
1.7.1 The inﬁnite geometric series
Deﬁnition
An inﬁnite series that has a ﬁnite sum is said to be convergent. Otherwise it is divergent.
Deﬁnition
Suppose that S is an (inﬁnite) series whose terms are a
k
. Then the partial sums, S
n
, of this
series are
S
n
=
n
¸
k=0
a
k
.
We say that the sum of the inﬁnite series is S, and write
S =
∞
¸
k=0
a
k
,
provided that
S = lim
n→∞
n
¸
k=0
a
k
.
That is, we consider the inﬁnite series as the limit of the partial sums as the number of
terms n is increased. In this case we also say that the inﬁnite series converges to S.
We will see that only under certain circumstances will inﬁnite series have a ﬁnite
sum, and we will be interested in exploring two questions:
1. Under what circumstances does an inﬁnite series have a ﬁnite sum.
2. What value does the partial sum approach as more and more terms are included.
In the case of a geometric series, the sum of the series, (1.4) depends on the number
of terms in the series, n via r
n+1
. Whenever r > 1, or r < −1, this term will get bigger in
magnitude as n increases, whereas, for 0 < r < 1, this term decreases in magnitude with
n. We can say that
lim
n→∞
r
n+1
= 0 provided r < 1.
These observations are illustrated by two speciﬁc examples below. This leads to the fol
lowing conclusion:
The sum of an inﬁnite geometric series,
S = 1 +r +r
2
+. . . +r
k
+. . . =
∞
¸
k=0
r
k
,
exists provided r < 1 and is
S =
1
1 − r
. (1.5)
Examples of convergent and divergent geometric series are discussed below.
16 Chapter 1. Areas, volumes and simple sums
1.7.2 Example: A geometric series that converges.
Consider the geometric series with r =
1
2
, i.e.
S
n
= 1 +
1
2
+
1
2
2
+
1
2
3
+. . . +
1
2
n
=
n
¸
k=0
1
2
k
.
Then
S
n
=
1 −(1/2)
n+1
1 −(1/2)
.
We observe that as n increases, i.e. as we retain more and more terms, we obtain
lim
n→∞
S
n
= lim
n→∞
1 −(1/2)
n+1
1 −(1/2)
=
1
1 −(1/2)
= 2.
In this case, we write
∞
¸
n=0
1
2
n
= 1 +
1
2
+ (
1
2
)
2
+. . . = 2
and we say that “the (inﬁnite) series converges to 2”.
1.7.3 Example: A geometric series that diverges
In contrast, we now investigate the case that r = 2: then the series consists of terms
S
n
= 1 + 2 + 2
2
+ 2
3
+. . . + 2
n
=
n
¸
k=0
2
k
=
1 −2
n+1
1 −2
= 2
n+1
−1
We observe that as n grows larger, the sum continues to grow indeﬁnitely. In this case, we
say that the sum does not converge, or, equivalently, that the sum diverges.
It is important to remember that an inﬁnite series, i.e. a sum with inﬁnitely many
terms added up, can exhibit either one of these two very different behaviours. It may
converge in some cases, as the ﬁrst example shows, or diverge (fail to converge) in other
cases. We will see examples of each of these trends again. It is essential to be able to
distinguish the two. Divergent series (or series that diverge under certain conditions) must
be handled with particular care, for otherwise, we may ﬁnd contradictions or seemingly
reasonable calculations that have meaningless results.
1.8 Application of geometric series to the branching
structure of the lungs
In this section, we will compute the volume and surface area of the branched airways of
lungs
5
. We use the summation formulae to arrive at the results, and we also illustrate how
the same calculation could be handled using a simple spreadsheet.
5
This section provides an example of how to set up a biologically relevant calculation based on geometric
series. It is further studied in the homework problems. A similar example is given as an exercise for the student
in Lab 1 of this calculus course.
1.8. Application of geometric series to the branching structure of the lungs 17
Our lungs pack an amazingly large surface area into a conﬁned volume. Most of
the oxygen exchange takes place in tiny sacs called alveoli at the terminal branches of the
airways passages. The bronchial tubes conduct air, and distribute it to the many smaller
and smaller tubes that eventually lead to those alveoli. The principle of this efﬁcient organ
for oxygen exchange is that these very many small structures present a very large surface
area. Oxygen from the air can diffuse across this area into the bloodstream very efﬁciently.
The lungs, and many other biological “distribution systems” are composed of a
branched structure. The initial segment is quite large. It bifurcates into smaller segments,
which then bifurcate further, and so on, resulting in a geometric expansion in the number of
branches, their collective volume, length, etc. In this section, we apply geometric series to
explore this branched structure of the lung. We will construct a simple mathematical model
and explore its consequences. The model will consist in some wellformulated assumptions
about the way that “daughter branches” are related to their “parent branch”. Based on these
assumptions, and on tools developed in this chapter, we will then predict properties of the
structure as a whole. We will be particularly interested in the volume V and the surface
area S of the airway passages in the lungs
6
.
2
l
0
r
0
Segment 0
1
Figure 1.6. Air passages in the lungs consist of a branched structure. The index
n refers to the branch generation, starting from the initial segment, labeled 0. All segments
are assumed to be cylindrical, with radius r
n
and length
n
in the n’th generation.
1.8.1 Assumptions
• The airway passages consist of many “generations” of branched segments. We label
the largest segment with index “0”, and its daughter segments with index “1”, their
successive daughters “2”, and so on down the structure from large to small branch
segments. We assume that there are M “generations”, i.e. the initial segment has un
dergone M subdivisions. Figure 1.6 shows only generations 0, 1, and 2. (Typically,
for human lungs there can be up to 2530 generations of branching.)
• At each generation, every segment is approximated as a cylinder of radius r
n
and
length
n
.
6
The surface area of the bronchial tubes does not actually absorb much oxygen, in humans. However, as an
example of summation, we will compute this area and compare how it grows to the growth of the volume from
one branching layer to the next.
18 Chapter 1. Areas, volumes and simple sums
radius of ﬁrst segment r
0
0.5 cm
length of ﬁrst segment
0
5.6 cm
ratio of daughter to parent length α 0.9
ratio of daughter to parent radius β 0.86
number of branch generations M 30
average number daughters per parent b 1.7
Table 1.1. Typical structure of branched airway passages in lungs.
• The number of branches grows along the “tree”. On average, each parent branch
produces b daughter branches. In Figure 1.6, we have illustrated this idea for b = 2.
A branched structure in which each branch produces two daughter branches is de
scribed as a bifurcating tree structure (whereas trifurcating implies b = 3). In real
lungs, the branching is slightly irregular. Not every level of the structure bifurcates,
but in general, averaging over the many branches in the structure b is smaller than 2.
In fact, the rule that links the number of branches in generation n, here denoted x
n
with the number (of smaller branches) in the next generation, x
n+1
is
x
n+1
= bx
n
. (1.6)
We will assume, for simplicity, that b is a constant. Since the number of branches
is growing down the length of the structure, it must be true that b > 1. For human
lungs, on average, 1 < b < 2. Here we will take b to be constant, i.e. b = 1.7. In
actual fact, this simpliﬁcation cannot be precise, because we have just one segment
initially (x
0
= 1), and at level 1, the number of branches x
1
should be some small
integer, not a number like “1.7”. However, as in many mathematical models, some
accuracy is sacriﬁced to get intuition. Later on, details that were missed and are
considered important can be corrected and reﬁned.
• The ratios of radii and lengths of daughters to parents are approximated by “pro
portional scaling”. This means that the relationship of the radii and lengths satisfy
simple rules: The lengths are related by
n+1
= α
n
, (1.7)
and the radii are related by
r
n+1
= βr
n
, (1.8)
with α and β positive constants. For example, it could be the case that the radius of
daughter branches is 1/2 or 2/3 that of the parent branch. Since the branches decrease
in size (while their number grows), we expect that 0 < α < 1 and 0 < β < 1.
Rules such as those given by equations (1.7) and (1.8) are often called selfsimilar growth
laws. Such concepts are closely linked to the idea of fractals, i.e. theoretical structures
produced by iterating such growth laws indeﬁnitely. In a real biological structure, the
1.8. Application of geometric series to the branching structure of the lungs 19
number of generations is ﬁnite. (However, in some cases, a ﬁnite geometric series is well
approximated by an inﬁnite sum.)
Actual lungs are not fully symmetric branching structures, but the above approxi
mations are used here for simplicity. According to physiological measurements, the scale
factors for sizes of daughter to parent size are in the range 0.65 ≤ α, β ≤ 0.9. (K. G.
Horsﬁeld, G. Dart, D. E. Olson, and G. Cumming, (1971) J. Appl. Phys. 31, 207217.) For
the purposes of this example, we will use the values of constants given in Table 1.1.
1.8.2 A simple geometric rule
The three equations that govern the rules for successive branching, i.e. equations (1.6), (1.7),
and (1.8), are examples of a very generic “geometric progression” recipe. Before returning
to the problem at hand, let us examine the implications of this recursive rule, when it is
applied to generating the whole structure. Essentially, we will see that the rule linking two
generations implies an exponential growth. To see this, let us write out a few ﬁrst terms in
the progression of the sequence {x
n
}:
initial value: x
0
ﬁrst iteration: x
1
= bx
0
second iteration: x
2
= bx
1
= b(bx
0
) = b
2
x
0
third iteration: x
3
= bx
2
= b(b
2
x
0
) = b
3
x
0
.
.
.
By the same pattern, at the n’th generation, the number of segments will be
n’th iteration: x
n
= bx
n−1
= b(bx
n−2
) = b(b(bx
n−3
)) = . . . = (b · b · · · b)
. .. .
n factors
x
0
= b
n
x
0
.
We have arrived at a simple, but important result, namely:
The rule linking two generations,
x
n
= bx
n−1
(1.9)
implies that the n’th generation will have grown by a factor b
n
, i.e.,
x
n
= b
n
x
0
. (1.10)
This connection between the rule linking two generations and the resulting number of
members at each generation is useful in other circumstances. Equation (1.9) is sometimes
called a recursion relation, and its solution is given by equation (1.10). We will use the
same idea to ﬁnd the connection between the volumes, and surface areas of successive
segments in the branching structure.
20 Chapter 1. Areas, volumes and simple sums
1.8.3 Total number of segments
We used the result of Section 1.8.2 and the fact that there is one segment in the 0’th gener
ation, i.e. x
0
= 1, to conclude that at the n’th generation, the number of segments is
x
n
= x
0
b
n
= 1 · b
n
= b
n
.
For example, if b = 2, the number of segments grows by powers of 2, so that the tree
bifurcates with the pattern 1, 2, 4, 8, etc.
To determine how many branch segments there are in total, we add up over all gen
erations, 0, 1, . . . M. This is a geometric series, whose sum we can compute. Using equa
tion (1.4), we ﬁnd
N =
M
¸
n=0
b
n
=
1 −b
M+1
1 −b
.
Given b and M, we can then predict the exact number of segments in the structure. The
calculation is summarized further on for values of the branching parameter, b, and the
number of branch generations, M, given in Table 1.1.
1.8.4 Total volume of airways in the lung
Since each lung segment is assumed to be cylindrical, its volume is
v
n
= πr
2
n
n
.
Here we mean just a single segment in the n’th generation of branches. (There are b
n
such
identical segments in the n’th generation, and we will refer to the volume of all of them
together as V
n
below.)
The length and radius of segments also follow a geometric progression. In fact, the
same idea developed above can be used to relate the length and radius of a segment in the
n’th, generation segment to the length and radius of the original 0’th generation segment,
namely,
n
= α
n−1
⇒
n
= α
n
0
,
and
r
n
= βr
n−1
⇒ r
n
= β
n
r
0
.
Thus the volume of one segment in generation n is
v
n
= πr
2
n
n
= π(β
n
r
0
)
2
(α
n
0
) = (αβ
2
)
n
(πr
2
0
0
)
. .. .
v
0
.
This is just a product of the initial segment volume v
0
= πr
2
0
0
, with the n’th power of a
certain factor(α, β). (That factor takes into account that both the radius and the length are
being scaled down at every successive generation of branching.) Thus
v
n
= (αβ
2
)
n
v
0
.
1.8. Application of geometric series to the branching structure of the lungs 21
The total volume of all (b
n
) segments in the n’th layer is
V
n
= b
n
v
n
= b
n
(αβ
2
)
n
v
0
= (bαβ
2
. .. .
a
)
n
v
0
.
Here we have grouped terms together to reveal the simple structure of the relationship:
one part of the expression is just the initial segment volume, while the other is now a
“scale factor” that includes not only changes in length and radius, but also in the number of
branches. Letting the constant a stand for that scale factor, a = (bαβ
2
) leads to the result
that the volume of all segments in the n’th layer is
V
n
= a
n
v
0
.
The total volume of the structure is obtained by summing the volumes obtained at
each layer. Since this is a geometric series, we can use the summation formula. i.e.,
Equation (1.4). Accordingly, total airways volume is
V =
30
¸
n=0
V
n
= v
0
30
¸
n=0
a
n
= v
0
1 −a
M+1
1 −a
.
The similarity of treatment with the previous calculation of number of branches is appar
ent. We compute the value of the constant a in Table 1.2, and ﬁnd the total volume in
Section 1.8.6.
1.8.5 Total surface area of the lung branches
The surface area of a single segment at generation n, based on its cylindrical shape, is
s
n
= 2πr
n
n
= 2π(β
n
r
0
)(α
n
0
) = (αβ)
n
(2πr
0
0
)
. .. .
s0
,
where s
0
is the surface area of the initial segment. Since there are b
n
branches at generation
n, the total surface area of all the n’th generation branches is thus
S
n
= b
n
(αβ)
n
s
0
= (bαβ
....
c
)
n
s
0
,
where we have let c stand for the scale factor c = (bαβ). Thus,
S
n
= c
n
s
0
.
This reveals the similar nature of the problem. To ﬁnd the total surface area of the airways,
we sum up,
S = s
0
M
¸
n=0
c
n
= s
0
1 −c
M+1
1 −c
.
We compute the values of s
0
and c in Table 1.2, and summarize ﬁnal calculations of the
total airways surface area in section 1.8.6.
22 Chapter 1. Areas, volumes and simple sums
volume of ﬁrst segment v
0
= πr
2
0
0
4.4 cm
3
surface area of ﬁrst segment s
0
= 2πr
0
0
17.6 cm
2
ratio of daughter to parent segment volume (αβ
2
) 0.66564
ratio of daughter to parent segment surface area (αβ) 0.774
ratio of net volumes in successive generations a = bαβ
2
1.131588
ratio of net surface areas in successive generations c = bαβ 1.3158
Table 1.2. Volume, surface area, scale factors, and other derived quantities. Be
cause a and c are bases that will be raised to large powers, it is important to that their
values are fairly accurate, so we keep more signiﬁcant ﬁgures.
1.8.6 Summary of predictions for speciﬁc parameter values
By setting up the model in the above way, we have revealed that each quantity in the struc
ture obeys a simple geometric series, but with distinct “bases” b, a and c and coefﬁcients
1, v
0
, and s
0
. This approach has shown that the formula for geometric series applies in
each case. Now it remains to merely “plug in” the appropriate quantities. In this section,
we collect our results, use the sample values for a model “human lung” given in Table 1.1,
or the resulting derived scale factors and quantities in Table 1.2 to ﬁnish the task at hand.
Total number of segments
N =
M
¸
n=0
b
n
=
1 −b
M+1
1 −b
=
1 −(1.7)
31
1 −1.7
= 1.9898 · 10
7
≈ 2 · 10
7
.
According to this calculation, there are a total of about 20 million branch segments overall
(including all layers, form top to bottom) in the entire structure!
Total volume of airways
Using the values for a and v
0
computed in Table 1.2, we ﬁnd that the total volume of all
segments in the n’th generation is
V = v
0
30
¸
n=0
a
n
= v
0
1 −a
M+1
1 −a
= 4.4
(1 −1.131588
31
)
(1 −1.131588)
= 1510.3 cm
3
.
Recall that 1 litre = 1000 cm
3
. Then we have found that the lung airways contain about 1.5
litres.
1.8. Application of geometric series to the branching structure of the lungs 23
Total surface area of airways
Using the values of s
0
and c in Table 1.2, the total surface area of the tubes that make up
the airways is
S = s
0
M
¸
n=0
c
n
= s
0
1 −c
M+1
1 −c
= 17.6
(1 −1.3158
31
)
(1 −1.3158)
= 2.76 · 10
5
cm
2
.
There are 100 cm per meter, and (100)
2
= 10
4
cm
2
per m
2
. Thus, the area we have
computed is equivalent to about 28 square meters!
1.8.7 Exploring the problem numerically
Up to now, all calculations were done using the formulae developed for geometric series.
However, sometimes it is more convenient to devise a computer algorithm to implement
“rules” and perform repetitive calculations in a problem such as discussed here. The ad
vantage of that approach is that it eliminates tedious calculations by hand, and, in cases
where summation formulae are not know to us, reduces the need for analytical computa
tions. It can also provide a shortcut to visual summary of the results. The disadvantage is
that it can be less obvious how each of the values of parameters assigned to the problem
affects the ﬁnal answers.
A spreadsheet is an ideal tool for exploring iterated rules such as those given in the
lung branching problem
7
. In Figure 1.7 we show the volumes and surface areas associated
with the lung airways for parameter values discussed above. Both layer by layer values and
cumulative sums leading to total volume and surface area are shown in each of (a) and (c).
In (b) and (d), we compare these results to similar graphs in the case that one parameter, the
branching number, b is adjusted from 1.7 (original value) to 2. The contrast between the
graphs shows how such a small change in this parameter can signiﬁcantly affect the results.
1.8.8 For further independent study
The following problems can be used for further independent exploration of these ideas.
1. In our model, we have assumed that, on average, a parent branch has only “1.7”
daughter branches, i.e. that b = 1.7. Suppose we had assumed that b = 2. What
would the total volume V be in that case, keeping all other parameters the same?
Explain why this is biologically impossible in the case M = 30 generations. For
what value of M would b = 2 lead to a reasonable result?
2. Suppose that the ﬁrst 5 generations of branching produce 2 daughters each, but then
from generation 6 on, the branching number is b = 1.7. How would you set up this
variant of the model? How would this affect the calculated volume?
3. In the problem we explored, the net volume and surface area keep growing by larger
and larger increments at each “generation” of branching. We would describe this as
“unbounded growth”. Explain why this is the case, paying particular attention to the
scale factors a and c.
7
See Lab 1 for a similar problem that is also investigated using a spreadsheet.
24 Chapter 1. Areas, volumes and simple sums
Cumulative volume to layer n
Vn = Volume of layer n


V
0.5 30.5
0.0
1500.0
Cumulative volume to layer n
Vn = Volume of layer n
0.5 30.5
0.0
1500.0
(a) (b)
Cumulative surface area to n’th layer
surface area of n’th layer
0.5 30.5
0.0
250000.0
Cumulative surface area to n’th layer
surface area of n’th layer
0.5 30.5
0.0
250000.0
(c) (d)
Figure 1.7. (a) V
n
, the volume of layer n (red bars), and the cumulative volume
down to layer n (yellow bars) are shown for parameters given in Table 1.1. (b) Same as (a)
but assuming that parent segments always produce two daughter branches (i.e. b = 2). The
graphs in (a) and (b) are shown on the same scale to accentuate the much more dramatic
growth in (b). (c) and (d): same idea showing the surface area of n’th layer (green) and
the cumulative surface area to layer n (blue) for original parameters (in c), as well as for
the value b = 2 (in d).
4. Suppose we want a set of tubes with a large surface area but small total volume.
Which single factor or parameter should we change (and how should we change it) to
correct this feature of the model, i.e. to predict that the total volume of the branching
tubes remains roughly constant while the surface area increases as branching layers
are added.
5. Determine how the branching properties of real human lungs differs from our as
sumed model, and use similar ideas to reﬁne and correct our estimates. You may
want to investigate what is known about the actual branching parameter b, the num
ber of generations of branches, M, and the ratios of lengths and radii that we have
assumed. Alternately, you may wish to ﬁnd parameters for other species and do a
1.9. Summary 25
comparative study of lungs in a variety of animal sizes.
6. Branching structures are ubiquitous in biology. Many species of plants are based
on a regular geometric sequence of branching. Consider a tree that trifurcates (i.e.
produces 3 new daughter branches per parent branch, b = 3). Explain (a) What
biological problem is to be solved in creating such a structure (b) What sorts of
constraints must be satisﬁed by the branching parameters to lead to a viable structure.
This is an openended problem.
1.9 Summary
In this chapter, we collected useful formulae for areas and volumes of simple 2D and 3D
shapes. A summary of the most important ones is given below. Table 1.3 lists the areas of
simple shapes, Table 1.4 the volumes and Table 1.5 the surface areas of 3D shapes.
We used areas of triangles to compute areas of more complicated shapes, including
regular polygons. We used a polygon with N sides to approximate the area of a circle, and
then, by letting N go to inﬁnity, we were able to prove that the area of a circle of radius r
is A = πr
2
. This idea, and others related to it, will form a deep underlying theme in the
next two chapters and later on in this course.
We introduced some notation for series and collected useful formulae for summation
of such series. These are summarized in Table 1.6. We will use these extensively in our
next chapter.
Finally, we investigated geometric series and studied a biological application, namely
the branching structure of lungs.
Object dimensions area, A
triangle base b, height h
1
2
bh
rectangle base b, height h bh
circle radius r πr
2
Table 1.3. Areas of planar regions
26 Chapter 1. Areas, volumes and simple sums
Object dimensions volume, V
box base b, height h, width w hwb
circular cylinder radius r, height h πr
2
h
sphere radius r
4
3
πr
3
cylindrical shell* radius r, height h, thickness τ 2πrhτ
spherical shell* radius r, thickness τ 4πr
2
τ
Table 1.4. Volumes of 3D shapes. * Assumes a thin shell, i.e. small τ.
Object dimensions surface area, S
box base b, height h, width w 2(bh +bw +hw)
circular cylinder radius r, height h 2πrh
sphere radius r 4πr
2
Table 1.5. Surface areas of 3D shapes
Sum Notation Formula Comment
1 + 2 + 3 +. . . +N
¸
N
k=1
k
N(1+N)
2
Gauss’ formula
1
2
+ 2
2
+ 3
2
+. . . +N
2
¸
N
k=1
k
2
N(N+1)(2N+1)
6
Sum of squares
1
3
+ 2
3
+ 3
3
+. . . +N
3
¸
N
k=1
k
3
N(N+1)
2
2
Sum of cubes
1 +r +r
2
+r
3
. . . r
N
¸
N
k=0
r
k 1−r
N+1
1−r
Geometric sum
Table 1.6. Useful summation formulae.
Chapter 2
Areas
2.1 Areas in the plane
A longstanding problem of integral calculus is how to compute the area of a region in
the plane. This type of geometric problem formed part of the original motivation for the
development of calculus techniques, and we will discuss it in many contexts in this course.
We have already seen examples of the computation of areas of especially simple geometric
shapes in Chapter 1. For triangles, rectangles, polygons, and circles, no advanced methods
(beyond simple geometry) are needed. However, beyond these elementary shapes, such
methods fail, and a new idea is needed. We will discuss such ideas in this chapter, and in
Chapter 3.
x
y
a b
A
y=f(x)
Figure 2.1. We consider the problem of determining areas of regions such
bounded by the x axis, the lines x = a and x = b and the graph of some function, y = f(x).
We now consider the problem of determining the area of a region in the plane that
has the following special properties: The region is formed by straight lines on three sides,
and by a smooth curve on one of its edges, as shown in Figure 2.1. You might imagine
that the shaded portion of this ﬁgure is a plot of land bounded by fences on three sides, and
by a river on the fourth side. A farmer wishing to purchase this land would want to know
exactly how large an area is being acquired. Here we set up the calculation of that area.
27
28 Chapter 2. Areas
More speciﬁcally, we use a cartesian coordinate system to describe the region: we
require that it falls between the xaxis, the lines x = a and x = b, and the graph of a
function y = f(x). This is required for the process described below to work
8
. We will ﬁrst
restrict attention to the case that f(x) > 0 for all points in the interval a ≤ x ≤ b as we
concentrate on “real areas”. Later, we generalize our results and lift this restriction.
We will approximate the area of the region shown in Figure 2.1 by dissecting it into
smaller regions (rectangular strips) whose areas are easy to determine. We will refer to this
type of procedure as a Riemann sum. In Figure 2.2, we illustrate the basic idea using a
region bounded by the function y = f(x) = x
2
on 0 ≤ x ≤ 1. It can be seen that the
y=f(x)=x^2
x
N=10 rectangles
0.0 1.0
0.0
1.0
y=f(x)=x^2
x
N=20 rectangles
0.0 1.0
0.0
1.0
y=f(x)=x^2
x
N=40 rectangles
0.0 1.0
0.0
1.0
y=f(x)=x^2
True area of region
x
N > infinity
0.0 1.0
0.0
1.0
Figure 2.2. The function y = x
2
for 0 ≤ x ≤ 1 is shown, with rectangles that
approximate the area under its curve. As we increase the number of rectangular strips, the
total area of the strips becomes a better and better approximation of the desired “true”
area. Shown are the intermediate steps N = 10, N = 20, N = 40 and the true area for
N →∞
approximation is fairly coarse when the number of rectangles is small
9
. However, if the
number of rectangles is increased, (as shown in subsequent panels of this same ﬁgure), we
8
Not all planar areas have this property. Later examples indicate how to deal with some that do not.
9
That is, the area of the rectangles is very different from the area of the region of interest.
2.2. Computing the area under a curve by rectangular strips 29
obtain a better and better approximation of the true area. In the limit as N, the number of
rectangles, approaches inﬁnity, the area of the desired region is obtained. This idea will
form the core of this chapter. The reader will note a similarity with the idea we already en
countered in obtaining the area of a circle, though in that context, we had used a dissection
of the circle into approximating triangles.
With this idea in mind, in Section 2.2, we compute the area of the region shown in
Figure 2.2 in two ways. First, we use a simple spreadsheet to do the computations for us.
This is meant to illustrate the “numerical approach”.
Then, as the alternate analytic approach , we set up the Riemann sum corresponding
to the function shown in Figure 2.2. We will ﬁnd that carefully setting up the calculation
of areas of the approximating rectangles will be important. Making a cameo appearance
in this calculation will be the formula for the sums of square integers developed in the
previous chapter. A new feature will be the limit N → ∞that introduces the ﬁnal step of
arriving at the smooth region shown in the ﬁnal panel of Figure 2.2.
2.2 Computing the area under a curve by rectangular
strips
2.2.1 First approach: Numerical integration using a
spreadsheet
The same tool that produces Figure 2.2 can be used to calculate the areas of the steps for
each of the panels in the ﬁgure. To do this, we ﬁx N for a given panel, (e.g. N = 10, 20,
or 40), ﬁnd the corresponding value of ∆x, and set up a calculation which adds up the
areas of steps, i.e.
¸
x
2
∆x in a given panel. The ideas are analogous to those described in
Section 2.2.2, but a spreadsheet does the number crunching for us.
Using a spreadsheet, for example, we ﬁnd the following results at each stage: For
N = 10 strips, the area is 0.3850 units
2
, for N = 20 strips it is 0.3588, for N = 40 strips,
the area is 0.3459. If we increase N greatly, e.g. set N = 1000 strips, which begins to
approximate the limit of N →∞, then the area obtained is 0.3338 units
210
.
This example illustrates that areas can be computed “numerically”  indeed many of
the laboratory exercises that accompany this course will be based on precisely this idea.
The advantage of this approach is that it requires only elementary “programming”  i.e.
the assembly of a simple algorithm, i.e. a set of instructions. Once assembled, we can use
essentially the same algorithmto explore various functions, intervals, number of rectangles,
etc. Lab 2 in this course will motivate the student to explore this numerical integration
approach, and later labs will expand and generalize the idea to a variety of settings.
In our second approach, we set up the problem analytically. We will ﬁnd that results
are similar. However, we will get deeper insight by understanding what happens in the limit
as the number of strips N gets very large.
10
Note that all these values are approximations, correct to 4 decimal places. Compare with the exact calcula
tions in Section 2.2.2
30 Chapter 2. Areas
2.2.2 Second approach: Analytic computation using Riemann
sums
In this section we consider the detailed steps involved in analytically computing the area of
the region bounded by the function
y = f(x) = x
2
, 0 ≤ x ≤ 1.
By this we mean that we use “penandpaper” calculations, rather than computational aids
to determine that area.
We set up the rectangles (as shown in Figure 2.2, with detailed labeling in Fig
ures 2.3), determine the heights and areas of these rectangle, sum their total area, and
then determine how this value behaves as the rectangles get more numerous (and thinner).
1
y
y=f(x)=x
2
f(x)
Δx
0
f(x )
y
x
x x ... ...
1 k−1 k N
x x
0
y=f(x)
k
f(x )
N
Figure 2.3. The region under the graph of y = f(x) for 0 ≤ x ≤ 1 will be
approximated by a set of N rectangles. A rectangle (shaded) has base width ∆x and
height f(x). Since 0 ≤ x ≤ 1, and the all rectangles have the same base width, it follows
that ∆x = 1/N. In the panel on the right, the coordinates of base corners and two typical
heights of the rectangles have been labeled. Here x
0
= 0, x
N
= 1 and x
k
= k∆x.
The interval of interest in this problem is 0 ≤ x ≤ 1. Let us subdivide this interval
into N equal subintervals. Then each has width 1/N. (We will refer to this width as ∆x, as
shown in Figure 2.3, as it forms a difference of successive x coordinates.) The coordinates
of the endpoints of these subintervals will be labeled x
0
, x
1
, . . . , x
k
, . . . , x
N
, where the
value x
0
= 0 and x
N
= 1 are the endpoints of the original interval. Since the points are
equally spaced, starting at x
0
= 0, the coordinate x
k
is just k steps of size 1/N along
the x axis, i.e. x
k
= k(1/N) = k/N. In the right panel of Figure 2.3, some of these
coordinates have been labeled. For clarity, we show only the ﬁrst few points, together with
a representative pair x
k−1
and x
k
inside the region.
Let us look more carefully at one of the rectangles. Suppose we look at the rectangle
labeled k. Such a representative kth rectangle is shown shaded in Figures 2.3. The height
of this rectangle is determined by the value of the function, since one corner of the rectangle
is “glued” to the curve. The choice shown in Figure 2.3 is to afﬁx the right corner of each
2.2. Computing the area under a curve by rectangular strips 31
rectangle (k) right x coord (x
k
) height f(x
k
) area a
k
1 (1/N) (1/N)
2
(1/N)
2
∆x
2 (2/N) (2/N)
2
(2/N)
2
∆x
3 (3/N) (3/N)
2
(3/N)
2
∆x
.
.
.
k (k/N) (k/N)
2
(k/N)
2
∆x
.
.
.
N (N/N) = 1 (N/N)
2
= 1 (1)∆x
Table 2.1. The label, position, height, and area a
k
of each rectangular strip is
shown above. Each rectangle has the same base width, ∆x = 1/N. We approximate the
area under the curve y = f(x) = x
2
by the sum of the values in the last column, i.e. the
total area of the rectangles.
rectangle on the curve. This implies that the height of the kth rectangle is obtained from
substituting x
k
into the function, i.e. height = f(x
k
). The base of every rectangle is the
same, i.e. base = ∆x = 1/N. This means that the area of the kth rectangle, shown shaded,
is
a
k
= height ×base = f(x
k
)∆x
We now use three facts:
f(x
k
) = x
2
k
, ∆x =
1
N
, x
k
=
k
N
.
Then the area of the k’th rectangle is
a
k
= height ×base = f(x
k
)∆x =
k
N
2
. .. .
f(x
k
)
1
N
. .. .
∆x
.
A list of rectangles, and their properties are shown in Table 2.1. This may help the
reader to see the pattern that emerges in the summation. (In general this table is not needed
in our work, and it is presented for this example only, to help visualize how heights of
rectangles behave.) The total area of all rectangular strips (a sum of the values in the right
column of Table 2.1) is
A
N strips
=
N
¸
k=1
a
k
=
N
¸
k=1
f(x
k
)∆x =
N
¸
k=1
k
N
2
1
N
. (2.1)
The expressions shown in Eqn. (2.1) is a Riemann sum. A recurring theme underlying
integral calculus is the relationship between Riemann sums and deﬁnite integrals, a concept
introduced later on in this chapter.
32 Chapter 2. Areas
We now rewrite this sum in a more convenient form so that summation formulae
developed in Chapter 1 can be used. In this sum, only the quantity k changes from term to
term. All other quantities are common factors, so that
A
N strips
=
1
N
3
N
¸
k=1
k
2
.
The formula (1.2) for the sum of square integers can be applied to the summation, resulting
in
A
N strips
=
1
N
3
N(N + 1)(2N + 1)
6
=
(N + 1)(2N + 1)
6N
2
. (2.2)
In the box below, we use Eqn. (2.2) to compute that approximate area for values of N
shown in the ﬁrst three panels of Fig 2.2. Note that these are comparable to the values we
obtained “numerically” in Section 2.2.1. (We plug in the value of N into (2.2) and use a
calculator to obtain the results below.)
If N = 10 strips (Figure 2.2a), the width of each strip is 0.1 unit. According to equa
tion 2.2, the area of the 10 strips (shown in red) is
A
10 strips
=
(10 + 1)(2 · 10 + 1)
6 · 10
2
= 0.385.
If N = 20 strips (Figure 2.2b), ∆x = 1/20 = 0.05, and
A
20 strips
=
(20 + 1)(2 · 20 + 1)
6 · 20
2
= 0.35875.
If N = 40 strips (Figure 2.2c), ∆x = 1/40 = 0.025 and
A
40 strips
=
(40 + 1)(2 · 40 + 1)
6 · 40
2
= 0.3459375.
We will deﬁne the true area under the graph of the function y = f(x) over the given
interval to be:
A = lim
N→∞
A
N strips
.
This means that the true area is obtained by letting the number of rectangular strips, N, get
very large, (while the width of each one, ∆x = 1/N gets very small.)
In the example discussed in this section, the true area is found by taking the limit as
N gets large in equation (2.2), i.e.,
A = lim
N→∞
1
N
2
(N + 1)(2N + 1)
6
=
1
6
lim
N→∞
(N + 1)(2N + 1)
N
2
.
To evaluate this limit, note that when N gets very large, we can use the approximations,
(N + 1) ≈ N and (2N + 1) ≈ 2N so that (simplifying and cancelling common factors)
lim
N→∞
(N + 1)(2N + 1)
N
2
= lim
N→∞
(N)
N
(2N)
N
= 2.
2.3. The area of a leaf 33
The result is:
A =
1
6
(2) =
1
3
≈ 0.333. (2.3)
Thus, the true area of the region (Figure 2.2d) is is 1/3 units
2
.
2.2.3 Comments
Many student who have had calculus before in highschool, ask “why do we bother with
such tedious calculations, when we could just use integration?”. Indeed, our development
of Riemann sums foreshadows and anticipates the idea of a deﬁnite integral, and in short
order, some powerful techniques will help to shortcut such technical calculations. There
are two reasons why we linger on Riemann sums. First, in order to understand integration
adequately, we must understand the underlying “technology” and concepts; this proves
vital in understanding how to use the methods, and when things can go wrong. It also helps
to understand what integrals represent in applications that occur later on. Second, even
though we will shortly have better tools for analytical calculations, the ideas of setting up
area approximations using rectangular strips is very similar to the way that the spreadsheet
computations are designed. (However, the summation is handled automatically using the
spreadsheet, and no “formulae” are needed.) In Section 2.2.1, we gave only few details of
the steps involved. The student will ﬁnd that understanding the ideas of Section 2.2.2 will
go handinhand with understanding the numerical approach of Section 2.2.1.
The ideas outlined above can be applied to more complicated situations. In the next
section we consider a practical problem in which a similar calculation is carried out.
2.3 The area of a leaf
Leaves act as solar energy collectors for plants. Hence, their surface area is an important
property. In this section we use our techniques to determine the area of a rhododendron
leaf, shown in Figure 2.4. For simplicity of treatment, we will ﬁrst consider a function
designed to mimic the shape of the leaf in a simple system of units: we will scale distances
by the length of the leaf, so that its proﬁle is contained in the interval 0 ≤ x ≤ 1. We later
ask how to modify this treatment to describe similarly curved leaves of arbitrary length and
width, and leaves that are less symmetric. As shown in Figure 2.4, a simple parabola, of
the form
y = f(x) = x(1 −x),
provides a convenient approximation to the top edge of the leaf. To check that this is the
case, we observe that at x = 0 and x = 1, the curve intersects the x axis. At 0 < x < 1,
the curve is above the axis. Thus, the area between this curve and the x axis, is one half of
the leaf area.
We set up the computation of approximating rectangular strips as before, by sub
dividing the interval of interest into N rectangular strips. We can set up the calculation
systematically, as follows:
length of interval = 1 −0 = 1
34 Chapter 2. Areas
1
x
y
0
y=f(x)=x(1−x)
x
y
x =0
0
x
1
x
2
x =1
n
k
y =f(x )
k
Δ x
k’th
rectangle
(enlarged)
x
k
Figure 2.4. In this ﬁgure we show how the area of a leaf can be approximated by
rectangular strips.
number of segments, N
width of rectangular strips, ∆x =
1
N
the k’th x value, x
k
= k
1
N
=
k
N
height of k’th rectangular strip, f(x
k
) = x
k
(1 −x
k
)
The representative k’th rectangle is shown shaded in Figure 2.4: Its area is
a
k
= base ×height = ∆x · f(x
k
) =
1
N
. .. .
∆x
·
k
N
(1 −
k
N
)
. .. .
f(x
k
)
.
The total area of these rectangular strips is:
A
N strips
=
N
¸
k=1
a
k
=
N
¸
k=1
∆x · f(x
k
) =
N
¸
k=1
1
N
·
k
N
(1 −
k
N
)
.
2.4. Area under an exponential curve 35
Simplifying the result (so we can use summation formulae) leads to:
A
N strips
=
1
N
N
¸
k=1
k
N
(1 −
k
N
)
=
1
N
2
N
¸
k=1
k −
1
N
3
N
¸
k=1
k
2
.
Using the summation formulae (1.1) and(1.2) from Chapter 1 results in:
A
N strips
=
1
N
2
N(N + 1)
2
−
1
N
3
(2N + 1)N(N + 1)
6
.
Simplifying, and regrouping terms, we get
A
N strips
=
1
2
(N + 1)
N
−
1
6
(2N + 1)(N + 1)
N
2
.
This is the area for a ﬁnite number, N, of rectangular strips. As before, the true area is
obtained as the limit as N goes to inﬁnity, i.e. A = lim
N→∞
A
N strips
. We obtain:
A = lim
N→∞
1
2
(N + 1)
N
− lim
N→∞
1
6
(2N + 1)(N + 1)
N
2
=
1
2
−
1
6
· 2 =
1
6
.
Taking the limit leads to
A =
1
2
−
1
6
· 2 =
1
2
−
1
3
=
1
6
.
Thus the area of the entire leaf (twice this area) is 1/3.
Remark:
The function in this example can be written as y = x − x
2
. For part of this expression,
we have seen a similar calculation in Section 2.2. This example illustrates an important
property of sums, namely the fact that we can rearrange the terms into simpler expressions
that can be summed individually.
In the homework problems accompanying this chapter, we investigate how to de
scribe leaves with arbitrary lengths and widths, as well as leaves with shapes that are ta
pered, broad, or less symmetric than the current example.
2.4 Area under an exponential curve
In the precious examples, we considered areas under curves described by a simple quadratic
functions. Each of these led to calculations in which sums of integers or square integers
appeared. Here we demonstrate an example in which a geometric sum will be used. Recall
that we derived Eqn. (1.4) in Chapter 1, for a ﬁnite geometric sum.
We will ﬁnd the area under the graph of the function y = f(x) = e
2x
over the
interval between x = 0 and x = 2. In evaluating a limit in this example, we will also use
the fact that the exponential function has a linear approximation as follows:
e
z
≈ 1 +z
36 Chapter 2. Areas
(See Linear Approximations in an earlier calculus course.)
As before, we subdivide the interval into N pieces, each of width 2/N. Proceeding
systematically as before, we write
length of interval = 2 −0 = 2
number of segments = N
width of rectangular strips, ∆x =
2
N
the k’th x value, x
k
= k
2
N
=
2k
N
height of k’th rectangular strip, f(x
k
) = e
x
k
= e
2(2k/N)
= e
4k/N
We observe that the length of the interval (here 2) has affected the details of the calculation.
As before, the area of the k’th rectangle is
a
k
= base ×height = ∆x ×f(x
k
) =
2
N
e
4k/N
,
and the total area of all the rectangles is
A
N strips
=
2
N
N
¸
k=1
e
4k/N
=
2
N
N
¸
k=1
r
k
=
2
N
N
¸
k=0
r
k
−r
0
,
where r = e
4/N
. This is a ﬁnite geometric series. Because the series starts with k = 1 and
not with k = 0, the sum is
A
N strips
=
2
N
¸
(1 −r
N+1
)
(1 −r)
−1
.
After some simpliﬁcation and using r = e
4/N
, we ﬁnd that
A
N strips
=
2
N
e
4/N
1 −e
4
1 −e
4/N
= 2
1 −e
4
N(e
−4/N
−1)
.
We need to determine what happens when N gets very large. We can use the linear approx
imation
e
−4/N
≈ 1 −4/N
to evaluate the limit of the term in the denominator, and we ﬁnd that
A = lim
N→∞
2
1 −e
4
N(e
−4/N
−1)
= lim
N→∞
2
1 −e
4
−N(1 + 4/N −1)
= 2
e
4
−1
4
≈ 26.799.
2.5 Extensions and other examples
More general interval
To calculate the area under the curve y = f(x) = x
2
over the interval 2 ≤ x ≤ 5 using
N rectangles, the width of each one would be ∆x = (5 − 2)/N = 3/N, (i.e., length of
2.6. The deﬁnite integral 37
interval divided by N). Since the interval starts at x
0
= 2, and increments in units of (3/N),
the k’th coordinate is x
k
= 2 + k(3/N) = 2 + (3k/N). The area of the k’th rectangle is
then A
K
= f(x
k
) × ∆x = [(2 + (3k/N))
2
](3/N), and this is to be summed over k. A
similar algebraic simpliﬁcation, summation formulae, and limit is needed to calculate the
true area.
Other examples
In the Appendix 11.2 we discuss a number of other examples with several modiﬁcations:
First, in Appendix 11.2.1, we show how to set up a Riemann sum for a more complicated
quadratic function on a general interval, a ≤ x ≤ b.
Second, we show how Riemann sums can be set up for left, rather than right endpoint
approximations. The results are entirely analogous.
2.6 The deﬁnite integral
We now introduce a central concept that will form an important theme in this course, that
of the deﬁnite integral. We begin by deﬁning a new piece of notation relevant to the topic
in this chapter, namely the area associated with the graph of a function. For a function y =
x
y
a b
A
y=f(x)
Figure 2.5. The shaded area A corresponds to the deﬁnite integral I of the func
tion f(x) over the interval a ≤ x ≤ b.
f(x) > 0 that is bounded and continuous
11
on an interval [a, b] (also written a ≤ x ≤ b),
we deﬁne the deﬁnite integral,
I =
b
a
f(x) dx (2.4)
to be the area A of the region under the graph of the function between the endpoints a and
b. See Figure 2.5.
2.6.1 Remarks
1. The deﬁnite integral is a number.
11
A function is said to be bounded if its graph stays between some pair of horizontal lines. It is continuous if
there are no “breaks” in its graph.
38 Chapter 2. Areas
2. The value of the deﬁnite integral depends on the function, and on the two end points
of the interval.
3. From previous remarks, we have a procedure to calculate the value of the deﬁnite
integral by dissecting the region into rectangular strips, summing up the total area of
the strips, and taking a limit as N, the number of strips gets large. (The calculation
may be nontrivial, and might involve sums that we have not discussed in our simple
examples so far, but in principle the procedure is welldeﬁned.)
(a) (b)
(c) (d)
0 1 0
2 4 0 2
1
x
x
y
y
Figure 2.6. Examples (14) relate areas shown above to deﬁnite integrals.
2.6.2 Examples
We have calculated the areas of regions bounded by particularly simple functions. To
practice notation, we write down the corresponding deﬁnite integral in each case. Note
that in many of the examples below, we need no elaborate calculations, but merely use
previously known or recently derived results, to familiarize the reader with the newnotation
just deﬁned.
Example (1)
The area under the function y = f(x) = x over the interval 0 ≤ x ≤ 1 is triangular,
with base and height 1. The area of this triangle is thus A = (1/2)base× height= 0.5
(Figure 2.6a). Hence,
1
0
xdx = 0.5.
2.7. The area as a function 39
Example (2)
In Section 2.2, we also computed the area under the function y = f(x) = x
2
on the interval
0 ≤ x ≤ 1 and found its area to be 1/3 (See Eqn. (2.3) and Fig. 2.6(b)). Thus
1
0
x
2
dx = 1/3 0.333.
Example (3)
A constant function of the form y = 1 over an interval 2 lex ≤ 4 would produce a rectan
gular region in the plane, with base (42)=2 and height 1 (Figure 2.6(c)). Thus
4
2
1 dx = 2.
Example (4)
The function y = f(x) = 1 − x/2 (Figure 2.6(d)) forms a triangular region with base 2
and height 1, thus
2
0
(1 − x/2) dx = 1.
2.7 The area as a function
In Chapter 3, we will elaborate on the idea of the deﬁnite integral and arrive at some very
important connection between differential and integral calculus. Before doing so, we have
to extend the idea of the deﬁnite integral somewhat, and thereby deﬁne a new function,
A(x).
y
a
y=f(x)
A(x)
b x
Figure 2.7. We deﬁne a new function A(x) to be the area associated with the
graph of some function y = f(x) from the ﬁxed endpoint a up to the endpoint x, where
a ≤ x ≤ b.
We will investigate how the area under the graph of a function changes as one of the
endpoints of the interval moves. We can think of this as a function that gradually changes
40 Chapter 2. Areas
(i.e. the area accumulates) as we sweep across the interval (a, b) from left to right in
Figure 2.1. The function A(x) represents the area of the region shown in Figure 2.7.
Extending our deﬁnition of the deﬁnite integral, we might be tempted to use the
notation
A(x) =
x
a
f(x) dx.
However, there is a slight problem with this notation: the symbol x is used in slightly
confusing ways, both as the argument of the function and as the variable endpoint of the
interval. To avoid possible confusion, we will prefer the notation
A(x) =
x
a
f(s) ds.
(or some symbol other than s used as a placeholder instead of x.)
An analogue already seen is the sum
N
¸
k=1
k
2
where N denotes the “end” of the sum, and k keeps track of where we are in the process
of summation. The symbol s, sometimes called a “dummy variable” is analogous to the
summation symbol k.
In the upcoming Chapter 3, we will investigate properties of this new “area function”
A(x) deﬁned above. This will lead us to the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus, and will
provide new and powerful tools to replace the dreary summations that we had to perform
in much of Chapter 2. Indeed, we are about to discover the amazing connection between a
function, the area A(x) under its curve, and the derivative of A(x).
2.8 Summary
In this chapter, we showed how to calculate the area of a region in the plane that is bounded
by the x axis, two lines of the form x = a and x = b, and the graph of a positive function
y = f(x). We also introduced the terminology “deﬁnite integral” (Section 2.6) and the
notation (2.4) to represent that area.
One of our main efforts here focused on how to actually compute that area by the
following set of steps:
• Subdivide the interval [a, b] into smaller intervals (width ∆x).
• Construct rectangles whose heights approximate the height of the function above the
given interval.
• Add up the areas of these approximating rectangles. (Here we often used summation
formulae from Chapter 1.) The resulting expression, such as Eqn. (2.1), for example,
was denoted a Riemann sum.
• Find out what happens to this total area in the limit when the width ∆x goes to zero
(or, in other words, when the number of rectangles N goes to inﬁnity).
2.8. Summary 41
We showed both the analytic approach, using Riemann sums and summation formu
lae to ﬁnd areas, as well as numerical approximations using a spreadsheet tool to arrive at
similar results. We then used a variety of examples to illustrate the concepts and arrive at
computed areas.
As a ﬁnal important point, we noted that the area “under the graph of a function” can
itself be considered a function. This idea will emerge as particularly important and will lead
us to the key concept linking the geometric concept of areas with the analytic properties
of antiderivatives. We shall see this link in the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus, in
Chapter 3.
42 Chapter 2. Areas
Chapter 3
The Fundamental
Theorem of Calculus
In this chapter we will formulate one of the most important results of calculus, the Funda
mental Theorem. This result will link together the notions of an integral and a derivative.
Using this result will allow us to replace the technical calculations of Chapter 2 by much
simpler procedures involving antiderivatives of a function.
3.1 The deﬁnite integral
In Chapter 2, we deﬁned the deﬁnite integral, I, of a function f(x) > 0 on an interval [a, b]
as the area under the graph of the function over the given interval a ≤ x ≤ b. We used the
notation
I =
b
a
f(x)dx
to represent that quantity. We also set up a technique for computing areas: the procedure
for calculating the value of I is to write down a sum of areas of rectangular strips and to
compute a limit as the number of strips increases:
I =
b
a
f(x)dx = lim
N→∞
N
¸
k=1
f(x
k
)∆x, (3.1)
where N is the number of strips used to approximate the region, k is an index associated
with the k’th strip, and ∆x = x
k+1
− x
k
is the width of the rectangle. As the number of
strips increases (N →∞), and their width decreases (∆x →0), the sum becomes a better
and better approximation of the true area, and hence, of the deﬁnite integral, I. Example
of such calculations (tedious as they were) formed the main theme of Chapter 2 .
We can generalize the deﬁnite integral to include functions that are not strictly pos
itive, as shown in Figure 3.1. To do so, note what happens as we incorporate strips cor
responding to regions of the graph below the x axis: These are associated with negative
values of the function, so that the quantity f(x
k
)∆x in the above sum would be negative
for each rectangle in the “negative” portions of the function. This means that regions of the
graph below the x axis will contribute negatively to the net value of I.
43
44 Chapter 3. The Fundamental Theorem of Calculus
If we refer to A
1
as the area corresponding to regions of the graph of f(x) above the
x axis, and A
2
as the total area of regions of the graph under the x axis, then we will ﬁnd
that the value of the deﬁnite integral I shown above will be
I = A
1
−A
2
.
Thus the notion of “area under the graph of a function” must be interpreted a little carefully
when the function dips below the axis.
x
y
y=f(x)
x
y
y=f(x)
(a) (b)
x
y
a
y=f(x)
x
y
a
y=f(x)
b c
(c) (d)
Figure 3.1. (a) If f(x) is negative in some regions, there are terms in the sum (3.1)
that carry negative signs: this happens for all rectangles in parts of the graph that dip
below the x axis. (b) This means that the deﬁnite integral I =
b
a
f(x)dx will correspond
to the difference of two areas, A
1
−A
2
where A
1
is the total area (dark) of positive regions
minus the total area (light) of negative portions of the graph. Properties of the deﬁnite
integral: (c) illustrates Property 1. (d) illustrates Property 2.
3.2 Properties of the deﬁnite integral
The following properties of a deﬁnite integral stemfromits deﬁnition, and the procedure for
calculating it discussed so far. For example, the fact that summation satisﬁes the distributive
3.3. The area as a function 45
property means that an integral will satisfy the same the same property. We illustrate some
of these in Fig 3.1.
1.
a
a
f(x)dx = 0,
2.
c
a
f(x)dx =
b
a
f(x)dx +
c
b
f(x)dx,
3.
b
a
Cf(x)dx = C
b
a
f(x)dx,
4.
b
a
(f(x) +g(x))dx =
b
a
f(x) +
b
a
g(x)dx,
5.
b
a
f(x)dx = −
a
b
f(x)dx.
Property 1 states that the “area” of a region with no width is zero. Property 2 shows
how a region can be broken up into two pieces whose total area is just the sum of the
individual areas. Properties 3 and 4 reﬂect the fact that the integral is actually just a sum,
and so satisﬁes properties of simple addition. Property 5 is obtained by noting that if
we perform the summation “in the opposite direction”, then we must replace the previous
“rectangle width” given by ∆x = x
k+1
−x
k
by the new “width” which is of opposite sign:
x
k
−x
k+1
. This accounts for the sign change shown in Property 5.
3.3 The area as a function
In Chapter 2, we investigated how the area under the graph of a function changes as one of
the endpoints of the interval moves. We deﬁned a function that represents the area under
the graph of a function f, from some ﬁxed starting point, a to an endpoint x.
A(x) =
x
a
f(t) dt.
This endpoint is considered as a variable
12
, i.e. we will be interested in the way that this
area changes as the endpoint varies (Figure 3.2(a)). We will now investigate the interesting
connection between A(x) and the original function, f(x).
We would like to study how A(x) changes as x is increased ever so slightly. Let
∆x = h represent some (very small) increment in x. (Caution: do not confuse h with
height here. It is actually a step size along the x axis.) Then, according to our deﬁnition,
A(x + h) =
x+h
a
f(t) dt.
12
Recall that the “dummy variable” t inside the integral is just a “place holder”, and is used to avoid confusion
with the endpoint of the integral (x in this case). Also note that the value of A(x) does not depend in any way on
t, so any letter or symbol in its place would do just as well.
46 Chapter 3. The Fundamental Theorem of Calculus
a x
y
y=f(x)
A(x)
a x
y
y=f(x)
x+h
A(x+h)
(a) (b)
a x
y
y=f(x)
x+h
A(x+h)−A(x)
a
y
y=f(x)
h
f(x)
(c) (d)
Figure 3.2. When the right endpoint of the interval moves by a distance h, the area
of the region increases from A(x) to A(x + h). This leads to the important Fundamental
Theorem of Calculus, given in Eqn. (3.2).
In Figure 3.2(a)(b), we illustrate the areas represented by A(x) and by A(x + h), respec
tively. The difference between the two areas is a thin sliver (shown in Figure 3.2(c)) that
looks much like a rectangular strip (Figure 3.2(d)). (Indeed, if h is small, then the approx
imation of this sliver by a rectangle will be good.) The height of this sliver is speciﬁed
by the function f evaluated at the point x, i.e. by f(x), so that the area of the sliver is
approximately f(x) · h. Thus,
A(x +h) −A(x) ≈ f(x)h
or
A(x +h) −A(x)
h
≈ f(x).
As h gets small, i.e. h →0, we get a better and better approximation, so that, in the limit,
lim
h→0
A(x +h) −A(x)
h
= f(x).
The ratio above should be recognizable. It is simply the derivative of the area function, i.e.
f(x) =
dA
dx
= lim
h→0
A(x +h) −A(x)
h
. (3.2)
3.4. The Fundamental Theorem of Calculus 47
We have just given a simple argument in support of an important result, called the
Fundamental Theorem of Calculus, which is restated below..
3.4 The Fundamental Theorem of Calculus
3.4.1 Fundamental theorem of calculus: Part I
Let f(x) be a bounded and continuous function on an interval [a, b]. Let
A(x) =
x
a
f(t) dt.
Then for a < x < b,
dA
dx
= f(x).
In other words, this result says that A(x) is an “antiderivative” of the original function,
f(x)
13
.
Proof
See above argument. and Figure 3.2.
3.4.2 Example: an antiderivative
Recall the connection between functions and their derivatives. Consider the following two
functions:
g
1
(x) =
x
2
2
, g
2
=
x
2
2
+ 1.
Clearly, both functions have the same derivative:
g
1
(x) = g
2
(x) = x.
We would say that x
2
/2 is an “antiderivative” of x and that (x
2
/2) + 1 is also an “an
tiderivative” of x. In fact, any function of the form
g(x) =
x
2
2
+C where C is any constant
is also an “antiderivative” of x.
This example illustrates that adding a constant to a given function will not affect
the value of its derivative, or, stated another way, antiderivatives of a given function are
deﬁned only up to some constant. We will use this fact shortly: if A(x) and F(x) are both
antiderivatives of some function f(x), then A(x) = F(x) +C.
13
We often write “antiderivative”, with no hyphen.
48 Chapter 3. The Fundamental Theorem of Calculus
3.4.3 Fundamental theorem of calculus: Part II
Let f(x) be a continuous function on [a, b]. Suppose F(x) is any antiderivative of f(x).
Then for a ≤ x ≤ b,
A(x) =
x
a
f(t) dt = F(x) −F(a).
Proof
Fromcomments above, we knowthat a function f(x) could have many different antideriva
tives that differ from one another by some additive constant. We are told that F(x) is an
antiderivative of f(x). But from Part I of the Fundamental Theorem, we know that A(x) is
also an antiderivative of f(x). It follows that
A(x) =
x
a
f(t) dt = F(x) +C, where C is some constant. (3.3)
However, by property 1 of deﬁnite integrals,
A(a) =
a
a
f(t) = F(a) +C = 0.
Thus,
C = −F(a).
Replacing C by −F(a) in equation 3.3 leads to the desired result. Thus
A(x) =
x
a
f(t) dt = F(x) −F(a).
Remark 1: Implications
This theorem has tremendous implications, because it allows us to use a powerful new
tool in determining areas under curves. Instead of the drudgery of summations in order to
compute areas, we will be able to use a shortcut: ﬁnd an antiderivative, evaluate it at the
two endpoints a, b of the interval of interest, and subtract the results to get the area. In the
case of elementary functions, this will be very easy and convenient.
Remark 2: Notation
We will often use the notation
F(t)
x
a
= F(x) −F(a)
to denote the difference in the values of a function at two endpoints.
3.5. Review of derivatives (and antiderivatives) 49
3.5 Review of derivatives (and antiderivatives)
By remarks above, we see that integration is related to “antidifferentiation”. This moti
vates a review of derivatives of common functions. Table 3.1 lists functions f(x) and their
derivatives f
(x) (in the ﬁrst two columns) and functions f(x) and their antiderivatives
F(x) in the subsequent two columns. These will prove very helpful in our calculations of
basic integrals.
function derivative function antiderivative
f(x) f
(x) f(x) F(x)
Cx C C Cx
x
n
nx
n−1
x
m x
m+1
m+1
sin(ax) a cos(ax) cos(bx) (1/b) sin(bx)
cos(ax) −a sin(ax) sin(bx) −(1/b) cos(bx)
tan(ax) a sec
2
(ax) sec
2
(bx) (1/b) tan(bx)
e
kx
ke
kx
e
kx
e
kx
/k
ln(x)
1
x
1
x
ln(x)
arctan(x)
1
1 +x
2
1
1 +x
2
arctan(x)
arcsin(x)
1
√
1 −x
2
1
√
1 −x
2
arcsin(x)
Table 3.1. Common functions and their derivatives (on the left two columns) also
result in corresponding relationships between functions and their antiderivatives (right two
columns). In this table, we assume that m = −1, b = 0, k = 0. Also, when using ln(x) as
antiderivative for 1/x, we assume that x > 0.
As an example, consider the polynomial
p(x) = a
0
+a
1
x +a
2
x
2
+a
3
x
3
+. . .
This polynomial could have many other terms (or even an inﬁnite number of such terms,
as we discuss much later, in Chapter 10). Its antiderivative can be found easily using the
“power rule” together with the properties of addition of terms. Indeed, the antiderivative is
F(x) = C +a
0
x +
a
1
2
x
2
+
a
2
3
x
3
+
a
3
4
x
4
+. . .
50 Chapter 3. The Fundamental Theorem of Calculus
This can be checked easily by differentiation
14
.
3.6 Examples: Computing areas with the
Fundamental Theorem of Calculus
3.6.1 Example 1: The area under a polynomial
Consider the polynomial
p(x) = 1 +x +x
2
+x
3
.
(Here we have taken the ﬁrst few terms from the example of the last section with coefﬁ
cients all set to 1.) Then, computing
I =
1
0
p(x) dx
leads to
I =
1
0
(1 +x +x
2
+x
3
) dx = (x +
1
2
x
2
+
1
3
x
3
+
1
4
x
4
)
1
0
= 1 +
1
2
+
1
3
+
1
4
≈ 2.083.
3.6.2 Example 2: Simple areas
Determine the values of the following deﬁnite integrals by ﬁnding antiderivatives and using
the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus:
1. I =
1
0
x
2
dx,
2. I =
1
−1
(1 −x
2
) dx,
3. I =
1
−1
e
−2x
dx,
4. I =
π
0
sin
x
2
dx,
Solutions
1. An antiderivative of f(x) = x
2
is F(x) = (x
3
/3), thus
I =
1
0
x
2
dx = F(x)
1
0
= (1/3)(x
3
)
1
0
=
1
3
(1
3
−0) =
1
3
.
14
In fact, it is very good practice to perform such checks.
3.6. Examples: Computing areas with the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus 51
2. An antiderivative of f(x) = (1 −x
2
) is F(x) = x −(x
3
/3), thus
I =
1
−1
(1−x
2
) dx = F(x)
1
−1
=
x −(x
3
/3)
1
−1
=
1 −(1
3
/3)
−
(−1) −((−1)
3
/3)
= 4/3
See comment below for a simpler way to compute this integral.
3. An antiderivative of e
−2x
is F(x) = (−1/2)e
−2x
. Thus,
I =
1
−1
e
−2x
dx = F(x)
1
−1
= (−1/2)(e
−2x
)
1
−1
= (−1/2)(e
−2
−e
2
).
4. An antiderivative of sin(x/2) is F(x) = −cos(x/2)/(1/2) = −2 cos(x/2). Thus
I =
π
0
sin
x
2
dx = −2 cos(x/2)
π
0
−2(cos(π/2) −cos(0)) = −2(0 −1) = 2.
Comment: The evaluation of Integral 2. in the examples above is tricky only in that signs
can easily get garbled when we plug in the endpoint at 1. However, we can simplify our
work by noting the symmetry of the function f(x) = 1 − x
2
on the given interval. As
shown in Fig 3.3, the areas to the right and to the left of x = 0 are the same for the interval
−1 ≤ x ≤ 1. This stems directly from the fact that the function considered is even
15
.
Thus, we can immediately write
I =
1
−1
(1 − x
2
) dx = 2
1
0
(1 −x
2
) dx = 2
x −(x
3
/3)
1
0
= 2
1 −(1
3
/3)
= 4/3
Note that this calculation is simpler since the endpoint at x = 0 is trivial to plug in.
2
−1 0 1
x
y=1−x
Figure 3.3. We can exploit the symmetry of the function f(x) = 1 − x
2
in the
second integral of Examples 3.6.2. We can integrate over 0 ≤ x ≤ 1 and double the result.
We state the general result we have obtained, which holds true for any function with
even symmetry integrated on a symmetric interval about x = 0:
If f(x) is an even function, then
a
−a
f(x) dx = 2
a
−a
f(x) dx (3.4)
15
Recall that a function f(x) is even if f(x) = f(−x) for all x. A function is odd if f(x) = −f(−x).
52 Chapter 3. The Fundamental Theorem of Calculus
3.6.3 Example 3: The area between two curves
The deﬁnite integral is an area of a somewhat special type of region, i.e., an axis, two
vertical lines (x = a and x = b) and the graph of a function. However, using additive
(or subtractive) properties of areas, we can generalize to computing areas of other regions,
including those bounded by the graphs of two functions.
(a) Find the area enclosed between the graphs of the functions y = x
3
and y = x
1/3
in the ﬁrst quadrant.
(b) Find the area enclosed between the graphs of the functions y = x
3
and y = x in
the ﬁrst quadrant.
(c) What is the relationship of these two areas? What is the relationship of the func
tions y = x
3
and y = x
1/3
that leads to this relationship between the two areas?
A
A
y=x
y=x
y=x
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2
y
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2
x
1
2
3
1/3
Figure 3.4. In Example 3, we compute the areas A
1
and A
2
shown above.
Solution
(a) The two curves, y = x
3
and y = x
1/3
, intersect at x = 0 and at x = 1 in the ﬁrst
quadrant. Thus the interval that we will be concerned with is 0 < x < 1. On this
interval, x
1/3
> x
3
, so that the area we want to ﬁnd can be expressed as:
A
1
=
1
0
x
1/3
−x
3
dx.
Thus,
A
1
=
x
4/3
4/3
1
0
−
x
4
4
1
0
=
3
4
−
1
4
=
1
2
.
(b) The two curves y = x
3
and y = x also intersect at x = 0 and at x = 1 in the
ﬁrst quadrant, and on the interval 0 < x < 1 we have x > x
3
. The area can be
represented as
A
2
=
1
0
x −x
3
dx.
3.7. Qualitative ideas 53
A
2
=
x
2
2
1
0
−
x
4
4
1
0
=
1
2
−
1
4
=
1
4
.
(c) The area calculated in (a) is twice the area calculated in (b). The reason for this is that
x
1/3
is the inverse of the function x
3
, which means geometrically that the graph of
x
1/3
is the mirror image of the graph of x
3
reﬂected about the line y = x. Therefore,
the area A
1
between y = x
1/3
and y = x
3
is twice as large as the area A
2
between
y = x and y = x
3
calculated in part (b): A
1
= 2A
2
(see Figure 3.4).
3.6.4 Example 4: Area of land
Find the exact area of the piece of land which is bounded by the y axis on the west, the x
axis in the south, the lake described by the function y = f(x) = 100 + (x/100)
2
in the
north and the line x = 1000 in the east.
Solution
The area is
A =
1000
0
100 +
x
100
2
dx. =
1000
0
100 +
1
10000
x
2
dx.
Note that the multiplicative constant (1/10000) is not affected by integration. The result is
A = 100x
1000
0
+
x
3
3
1000
0
·
1
10000
=
4
3
10
5
.
3.7 Qualitative ideas
In some cases, we are given a sketch of the graph of a function, f(x), fromwhich we would
like to construct a sketch of the associated function A(x). This sketching skill is illustrated
in the ﬁgures shown in this section.
Suppose we are given a function as shown in the top left hand panel of Figure 3.5.
We would like to assemble a sketch of
A(x) =
x
a
f(t)dt
which corresponds to the area associated with the graph of the function f. As x moves
from left to right, we show how the “area” accumulated along the graph gradually changes.
(See A(x) in bottom panels of Figure 3.5): We start with no area, at the point x = a
(since, by deﬁnition A(a) = 0) and gradually build up to some net positive amount, but
then we encounter a portion of the graph of f below the x axis, and this subtracts from
the amount accrued. (Hence the graph of A(x) has a little peak that corresponds to the
point at which f = 0.) Every time the function f(x) crosses the x axis, we see that A(x)
has either a maximum or minimum value. This ﬁts well with our idea of A(x) as the
antiderivative of f(x): Places where A(x) has a critical point coincide with places where
dA/dx = f(x) = 0.
54 Chapter 3. The Fundamental Theorem of Calculus
(a)
x
f(x)
x
A(x)
(b)
x
f(x)
x
A(x)
(c)
x
f(x)
x
A(x)
(d)
x
f(x)
x
A(x)
Figure 3.5. Given a function f(x), we here show how to sketch the corresponding
“area function” A(x). (The relationship is that f(x) is the derivative of A(x)
Sketching the function A(x) is thus analogous to sketching a function g(x) when we
are given a sketch of its derivative g
(x). Recall that this was one of the skills we built up in
learning the connection between functions and their derivatives in a ﬁrst semester calculus
course.
Remarks
The following remarks may be helpful in gaining conﬁdence with sketching the “area”
function A(x) =
x
a
f(t) dt, from the original function f(x):
1. The endpoint of the interval, a on the x axis indicates the place at which A(x) = 0.
This follows from Property 1 of the deﬁnite integral, i.e. from the fact that A(a) =
a
a
f(t) dt = 0.
2. Whenever f(x) is positive, A(x) is an increasing function  this follows from the fact
that the area continues to accumulate as we “sweep across” positive regions of f(x).
3.7. Qualitative ideas 55
a
x
x
f(x)
g(x)
+
−
+
−
+
a
Figure 3.6. Given a function f(x) (top, solid line), we assemble a plot of the
corresponding function g(x) =
x
a
f(t)dt (bottom, solid line). g(x) is an antiderivative
of f(x). Whether f(x) is positive (+) or negative () in portions of its graph, determines
whether g(x) is increasing or decreasing over the given intervals. Places where f(x)
changes sign correspond to maxima and minima of the function g(x) (Two such places are
indicated by dotted vertical lines). The box in the middle of the sketch shows conﬁgurations
of tangent lines to g(x) based on the sign of f(x). Where f(x) = 0, those tangent lines
are horizontal. The function g(x) is drawn as a smooth curve whose direction is parallel to
the tangent lines shown in the box. While the function f(x) has many antiderivatives (e.g.,
dashed curve parallel to g(x)), only one of these satisﬁes g(a) = 0 as required by Property
1 of the deﬁnite integral. (See dashed vertical line at x = a). This determines the height of
the desired function g(x).
3. Wherever f(x), changes sign, the function A(x) has a local minimum or maximum.
This means that either the area stops increasing (if the transition is from positive to
negative values of f), or else the area starts to increase (if f crosses from negative to
positive values).
4. Since dA/dx = f(x) by the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus, it follows that (tak
56 Chapter 3. The Fundamental Theorem of Calculus
ing a derivative of both sides) d
2
A/dx
2
= f
(x). Thus, when f(x) has a local
maximum or minimum, (i.e. f
(x) = 0), it follows that A
(x) = 0. This means that
at such points, the function A(x) would have an inﬂection point.
Given a function f(x), Figure 3.6 shows in detail how to sketch the corresponding function
g(x) =
x
a
f(t)dt.
3.7.1 Example: sketching A(x)
Consider the f(x) whose graph is shown in the top part of Figure 3.7. Sketch the corre
sponding function g(x) =
x
a
f(x)dx.
x
+
−
+
f(x)
g(x)
a
a
x
Figure 3.7. The original functions, f(x) is shown above. The corresponding
functions g(x) is drawn below.
Solution
See Figure 3.7
3.8 Some ﬁne print
The Fundamental Theorem has a number of restrictions that must be satisﬁed before its
results can be applied. In this section we look at some examples in which care must be
used.
3.8. Some ﬁne print 57
3.8.1 Function unbounded I
Consider the deﬁnite integral
2
0
1
x
dx.
The function f(x) =
1
x
is undeﬁned at x = 0, and unbounded on any interval that contains
the point x = 0. Hence, we cannot evaluate this integral using the Fundamental theorem,
and indeed, we say that “this integral does not exist”.
3.8.2 Function unbounded II
Consider the deﬁnite integral
1
−1
1
x
2
dx.
This function is also undeﬁned (and hence not continuous) at x = 0. The Fundamental
Theorem of Calculus cannot be applied. Technically, although one can “go through the
motions” of computing an antiderivative, evaluating it at both endpoints, and getting a
numerical answer, the result so obtained would be simply wrong. We say that his integral
does not exist.
3.8.3 Example: Function discontinuous or with distinct parts
Suppose we are given the integral
I =
2
−1
x dx.
This function is actually made up of two distinct parts, namely
f(x) =
x if x > 0
−x if x < 0.
The integral I must therefore be split up into two parts, namely
I =
2
−1
x dx =
0
−1
(−x) dx +
2
0
x dx.
We ﬁnd that
I = −
x
2
2
0
−1
+
x
2
2
2
0
= −
¸
0 −
1
2
+
¸
4
2
−0
= 2.5
3.8.4 Function undeﬁned
Now let us examine the integral
1
−1
x
1/2
dx.
58 Chapter 3. The Fundamental Theorem of Calculus
x
y
y= x
−1 2 0
Figure 3.8. In this example, to compute the integral over the interval −1 ≤ x ≤ 2,
we must split up the region into two distinct parts.
We see that there is a problem here. Recall that x
1/2
=
√
x. Hence, the function is not
deﬁned for x < 0 and the interval of integration is inappropriate. Hence, this integral does
not make sense.
3.8.5 Inﬁnite domain (“improper integral”)
Consider the integral
I =
b
0
e
−rx
dx, where r > 0, and b > 0 are constants.
Simple integration using the antiderivative in Table 3.1 (for k = −r) leads to the result
I =
e
−rx
−r
b
0
= −
1
r
e
−rb
−e
0
=
1
r
1 −e
−rb
.
This is the area under the exponential curve between x = 0 and x = b. Now consider what
happens when b, the upper endpoint of the integral increases, so that b → ∞. Then the
value of the integral becomes
I = lim
b→∞
b
0
e
−rx
dx = lim
b→∞
1
r
1 −e
−rb
=
1
r
(1 −0) =
1
r
.
(We used the fact that e
−rb
→0 as b →∞.) We have, in essence, found that
I =
∞
0
e
−rx
dx =
1
r
. (3.5)
An integral of the form (3.5) is called an improper integral. Even though the domain
of integration of this integral is inﬁnite, (0, ∞), observe that the value we computed is
ﬁnite, so long as r = 0. Not all such integrals have a bounded ﬁnite value. Learning to
distinguish between those that do and those that do not will form an important theme in
Chapter 10.
3.9. Summary 59
Regions that need special treatment
So far, we have learned how to compute areas of regions in the plane that are bounded
by one or more curves. In all our examples so far, the basis for these calculations rests on
imagining rectangles whose heights are speciﬁed by one or another function. Up to now, all
the rectangular strips we considered had bases (of width ∆x) on the x axis. In Figure 3.9
we observe an example in which it would not be possible to use this technique. We are
Δ y
x=g(y)
x
y y
x
Figure 3.9. The area in the region shown here is best computed by integrating
in the y direction. If we do so, we can use the curved boundary as a single function that
deﬁnes the region. (Note that the curve cannot be expressed in the form of a function in the
usual sense, y = f(x), but it can be expressed in the form of a function x = f(y).)
asked to ﬁnd the area between the curve y
2
−y +x = 0 and the y axis. However, one and
the same curve, y
2
− y + x = 0 forms the boundary from both the top and the bottom of
the region. We are unable to set up a series of rectangles with bases along the x axis whose
heights are described by this curve. This means that our deﬁnite integral (which is really
just a convenient way of carrying out the process of area computation) has to be handled
with care.
Let us consider this problem from a “new angle”, i.e. with rectangles based on the y
axis, we can achieve the desired result. To do so, let us express our curve in the form
x = g(y) = y −y
2
.
Then, placing our rectangles along the interval 0 < y < 1 on the y axis (each having base
of width ∆y) leads to the integral
I =
1
0
g(y) dy =
1
0
(y −y
2
)dy =
y
2
2
−
y
3
3
1
0
=
1
2
−
1
3
=
1
6
.
3.9 Summary
In this chapter we ﬁrst recapped the deﬁnition of the deﬁnite integral in Section 3.1, recalled
its connection to an area in the plane under the graph of some function f(x), and examined
its basic properties.
If one of the endpoints, x of the integral is allowed to vary, the area it represents,
A(x), becomes a function of x. Our construction in Figure 3.2 showed that there is a con
nection between the derivative A
(x) of the area and the function f(x). Indeed, we showed
that A
(x) = f(x) and argued that this makes A(x) an antiderivative of the function f(x).
60 Chapter 3. The Fundamental Theorem of Calculus
This important connection between integrals and antiderivatives is the crux of In
tegral Calculus, forming the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus. Its signiﬁcance is that
ﬁnding areas need not be as tedious and labored as the calculation of Riemann sums that
formed the bulk of Chapter 2. Rather, we can take a shortcut using antidifferentiation.
Motivated by this very important result, we reviewed some common functions and
derivatives, and used this to relate functions and their antiderivatives in Table 3.1. We
used these antiderivatives to calculate areas in several examples. Finally, we extended the
treatment to include qualitative sketches of functions and their antiderivatives.
As we will see in upcoming chapters, the ideas presented here have a much wider
range of applicability than simple area calculations. Indeed, we will shortly show that the
same concepts can be used to calculate net changes in continually varying processes, to
compute volumes of various shapes, to determine displacement from velocity, mass from
densities, as well as a host of other quantities that involve a process of accumulation. These
ideas will be investigated in Chapters 4, and 5.
Chapter 4
Applications of the
deﬁnite integral to
velocities and rates
4.1 Introduction
In this chapter, we encounter a number of applications of the deﬁnite integral to practical
problems. We will discuss the connection between acceleration, velocity and displacement
of a moving object, a topic we visited in an earlier, Differential Calculus Course. Here
we will show that the notion of antiderivatives and integrals allows us to deduce details of
the motion of an object from underlying Laws of Motion. We will consider both uniform
and accelerated motion, and recall how air resistance can be described, and what effect it
induces.
An important connection is made in this chapter between a rate of change (e.g. rate
of growth) and the total change (i.e. the net change resulting from all the accumulation and
loss over a time span). We show that such examples also involve the concept of integration,
which, fundamentally, is a cumulative summation of inﬁnitesimal changes. This allows us
to extend the utility of the mathematical tools to a variety of novel situations. We will see
examples of this type in Sections 4.3 and 4.4.
Several other important ideas are introduced in this chapter. We encounter for the
ﬁrst time the idea of spatial density, and see that integration can also be used to “add up”
the total amount of material distributed over space. In Section 5.2.2, this idea is applied to
the density of cars along a highway. We also consider mass distributions and the notion of
a center of mass.
Finally, we also show that the deﬁnite integral is useful for determining the average
value of a function, as discussed in Section 4.6. In all these examples, the important step
is to properly set up the deﬁnite integral that corresponds to the desired net change. Com
putations at this stage are relatively straightforward to emphasize the process of setting up
the appropriate integrals and understanding what they represent.
61
62 Chapter 4. Applications of the deﬁnite integral to velocities and rates
4.2 Displacement, velocity and acceleration
Recall from our study of derivatives that for x(t) the position of some particle at time t,
v(t) its velocity, and a(t) the acceleration, the following relationships hold:
dx
dt
= v,
dv
dt
= a.
(Velocity is the derivative of position and acceleration is the derivative of velocity.) This
means that position is an antiderivative of velocity and velocity is an antiderivative of
acceleration.
Since position, x(t), is an antiderivative of velocity, v(t), by the Fundamental The
orem of Calculus, it follows that over the time interval T
1
≤ t ≤ T
2
,
T2
T1
v(t) dt = x(t)
T2
T1
= x(T
2
) −x(T
1
). (4.1)
The quantity on the right hand side of Eqn. (4.1) is a displacement,, i.e., the difference
between the position at time T
1
and the position at time T
2
. In the case that T
1
= 0, T
2
= T,
we have
T
0
v(t) dt = x(T) −x(0),
as the displacement over the time interval 0 ≤ t ≤ T.
Similarly, since velocity is an antiderivative of acceleration, the Fundamental Theo
rem of Calculus says that
T2
T1
a(t) dt = v(t)
T2
T1
= v(T
2
) −v(T
1
). (4.2)
as above, we also have that
T
0
a(t) dt = v(t)
T
0
= v(T) −v(0)
is the net change in velocity between time 0 and time T, (though this quantity does not
have a special name).
4.2.1 Geometric interpretations
Suppose we are given a graph of the velocity v(t), as shown on the left of Figure 4.1. Then
by the deﬁnition of the deﬁnite integral, we can interpret
T2
T1
v(t) dt as the “area” associ
ated with the curve (counting positive and negative contributions) between the endpoints
T
1
and T
2
. Then according to the above observations, this area represents the displacement
of the particle between the two times T
1
and T
2
.
Similarly, by previous remarks, the area under the curve a(t) is a geometric quantity
that represents the net change in the velocity, as shown on the right of Figure 4.1.
Next, we consider two examples where either the acceleration or the velocity is con
stant. We use the results above to compute the displacements in each case.
4.2. Displacement, velocity and acceleration 63
T T
v
1 2
t
displacement
This area represents
a
net velocity change
This area represents
T
1
T
2
t
Figure 4.1. The total area under the velocity graph represents net displacement,
and the total area under the graph of acceleration represents the net change in velocity
over the interval T
1
≤ t ≤ T
2
.
4.2.2 Displacement for uniform motion
We ﬁrst examine the simplest case that the velocity is constant, i.e. v(t) = v = constant.
Then clearly, the acceleration is zero since a = dv/dt = 0 when v is constant. Thus, by
direct antidifferentiation,
T
0
v dt = vt
T
0
= v(T −0) = vT.
However, applying result (4.1) over the time interval 0 ≤ t ≤ T also leads to
T
0
v dt = x(T) −x(0).
Therefore, it must be true that the two expressions obtained above must be equal, i.e.
x(T) −x(0) = vT.
Thus, for uniform motion, the displacement is proportional to the velocity and to the time
elapsed. The ﬁnal position is
x(T) = x(0) +vT.
This is true for all time T, so we can rewrite the results in terms of the more familiar (lower
case) notation for time, t, i.e.
x(t) = x(0) +vt. (4.3)
4.2.3 Uniformly accelerated motion
In this case, the acceleration a is a constant. Thus, by direct antidifferentiation,
T
0
a dt = at
T
0
= a(T − 0) = aT.
64 Chapter 4. Applications of the deﬁnite integral to velocities and rates
However, using Equation (4.2) for 0 ≤ t ≤ T leads to
T
0
a dt = v(T) −v(0).
Since these two results must match, v(T) −v(0) = aT so that
v(T) = v(0) +aT.
Let us refer to the initial velocity V (0) as v
0
. The above connection between velocity and
acceleration holds for any ﬁnal time T, i.e., it is true for all t that:
v(t) = v
0
+at. (4.4)
This just means that velocity at time t is the initial velocity incremented by an increase (over
the given time interval) due to the acceleration. From this we can ﬁnd the displacement and
position of the particle as follows: Let us call the initial position x(0) = x
0
. Then
T
0
v(t) dt = x(T) −x
0
. (4.5)
But
I =
T
0
v(t) dt =
T
0
(v
0
+at) dt =
v
0
t +a
t
2
2
T
0
=
v
0
T +a
T
2
2
. (4.6)
So, setting Equations (4.5) and (4.6) equal means that
x(T) −x
0
= v
0
T +a
T
2
2
.
But this is true for all ﬁnal times, T, i.e. this holds for any time t so that
x(t) = x
0
+ v
0
t +a
t
2
2
. (4.7)
This expression represents the position of a particle at time t given that it experienced a
constant acceleration. The initial velocity v
0
, initial position x
0
and acceleration a allowed
us to predict the position of the object x(t) at any later time t. That is the meaning of
Eqn. (4.7)
16
.
4.2.4 Nonconstant acceleration and terminal velocity
In general, the acceleration of a falling body is not actually uniform, because frictional
forces impede that motion. A better approximation to the rate of change of velocity is
given by the differential equation
dv
dt
= g −kv. (4.8)
16
Of course, Eqn. (4.7) only holds so long as the object is accelerating. Once the a falling object hits the ground,
for example, this equation no longer holds.
4.2. Displacement, velocity and acceleration 65
We will assume that initially the velocity is zero, i.e. v(0) = 0.
This equation is a mathematical statement that relates changes in velocity v(t) to the
constant acceleration due to gravity, g, and drag forces due to friction with the atmosphere.
A good approximation for such drag forces is the term kv, proportional to the velocity,
with k, a positive constant, representing a frictional coefﬁcient. Because v(t) appears both
in the derivative and in the expression kv, we cannot apply the methods developed in the
previous section directly. That is, we do not have an expression that depends on time whose
antiderivative we would calculate. The derivative of v(t) (on the left) is connected to the
unknown v(t) on the right.
Finding the velocity and then the displacement for this type of motion requires special
techniques. In Chapter 9, we will develop a systematic approach, called Separation of
Variables to ﬁnd analytic solutions to equations such as (4.8).
Here, we use a special procedure that allows us to determine the velocity in this case.
We ﬁrst recall the following result from ﬁrst term calculus material:
The differential equation and initial condition
dy
dt
= −ky, y(0) = y
0
(4.9)
has a solution
y(t) = y
0
e
−kt
. (4.10)
Equation (4.8) implies that
a(t) = g −kv(t),
where a(t) is the acceleration at time t. Taking a derivative of both sides of this equation
leads to
da
dt
= −k
dv
dt
= −ka.
We observe that this equation has the same form as equation (4.9) (with a replacing y),
which implies (according to 4.10) that a(t) is given by
a(t) = C e
−kt
= a
0
e
−kt
.
Initially, at time t = 0, the acceleration is a(0) = g (since a(t) = g −kv(t), and v(0) = 0).
Therefore,
a(t) = g e
−kt
.
Since we now have an explicit formula for acceleration vs time, we can apply direct inte
gration as we did in the examples in Sections 4.2.2 and 4.2.3. The result is:
T
0
a(t) dt =
T
0
g e
−kt
dt = g
T
0
e
−kt
dt = g
¸
e
−kt
−k
T
0
= g
(e
−kT
−1)
−k
=
g
k
1 −e
−kT
.
In the calculation, we have used the fact that the antiderivative of e
−kt
is e
−kt
/k. (This can
be veriﬁed by simple differentiation.)
66 Chapter 4. Applications of the deﬁnite integral to velocities and rates
t
velocity v(t)
0.0 30.0
0.0
50.0
Figure 4.2. Terminal velocity (m/s) for acceleration due to gravity g=9.8 m/s
2
,
and k = 0.2/s. The velocity reaches a near constant 49 m/s by about 20 s.
As before, based on equation (4.2) this integral of the acceleration over 0 ≤ t ≤ T
must equal v(T) − v(0). But v(0) = 0 by assumption, and the result is true for any ﬁnal
time T, so, in particular, setting T = t, and combining both results leads to an expression
for the velocity at any time:
v(t) =
g
k
1 −e
−kt
. (4.11)
We will study the differential equation (4.8) again in Section 9.3.2, in the context of a more
detailed discussion of differential equations
From our result here, we can also determine how the velocity behaves in the long
term: observe that for t →∞, the exponential term e
−kt
→0, so that
v(t) →
g
k
(1 − very small quantity) ≈
g
k
.
Thus, when drag forces are in effect, the falling object does not continue to accelerate
indeﬁnitely: it eventually attains a terminal velocity. We have seen that this limiting
velocity is v = g/k. The object continues to fall at this (approximately constant) speed as
shown in Figure 4.2. The terminal velocity is also a steady state value of Eqn. (4.8), i.e. a
value of the velocity at which no further change occurs.
4.3 From rates of change to total change
In this section, we examine several examples in which the rate of change of some process is
speciﬁed. We use this information to obtain the total change
17
that occurs over some time
period.
17
We will use the terminology “total change” and “net change” interchangeably in this section.
4.3. From rates of change to total change 67
Changing temperature
We must carefully distinguish between information about the time dependence of some
function, from information about the rate of change of some function. Here is an example
of these two different cases, and how we would handle them
(a) The temperature of a cup of juice is observed to be
T(t) = 25(1 −e
−0.1t
)
◦
Celcius
where t is time in minutes. Find the change in the temperature of the juice between
the times t = 1 and t = 5.
(b) The rate of change of temperature of a cup of coffee is observed to be
f(t) = 8e
−0.2t
◦
Celcius per minute
where t is time in minutes. What is the total change in the temperature between
t = 1 and t = 5 minutes ?
Solutions
(a) In this case, we are given the temperature as a function of time. To determine what
net change occurred between times t = 1 and t = 5, we ﬁnd the temperatures at
each time point and subtract: That is, the change in temperature between times t = 1
and t = 5 is simply
T(5) −T(1) = 25(1−e
−0.5
) −25(1−e
−0.1
) = 25(0.94 −0.606) = 7.47
◦
Celcius.
(b) Here, we do not know the temperature at any time, but we are given information
about the rate of change. (Carefully note the subtle difference in the wording.)
To get the total change, we would sum up all the small changes, f(t)∆t (over N
subintervals of duration ∆t = (5 − 1)/N = 4/N) for t starting at 1 and ending
at 5 min. We obtain a sum of the form
¸
f(t
k
)∆t where t
k
is the k’th time point.
Finally, we take a limit as the number of subintervals increases (N → ∞). By now,
we recognize that this amounts to a process of integration. Based on this variation
of the same concept we can take the usual shortcut of integrating the rate of change,
f(t), from t = 1 to t = 5. To do so, we apply the Fundamental Theorem as before,
reducing the amount of computation to ﬁnding antiderivatives. We compute:
I =
5
1
f(t) dt =
5
1
8e
−0.2t
dt = −40e
−0.2t
5
1
= −40e
−1
+ 40e
−0.2
,
I = 40(e
−0.2
−e
−1
) = 40(0.8187 −0.3678) = 18.
Only in the second case did we need to use a deﬁnite integral to ﬁnd a net change, since we
were given the way that the rate of change depended on time. Recognizing the subtleties
of the wording in such examples will be an important skill that the reader should gain.
68 Chapter 4. Applications of the deﬁnite integral to velocities and rates
2
0 1 2 3
1
rate
Growth
4 year
Figure 4.3. Growth rates of two trees over a four year period. Tree 1 initially has
a higher growth rate, but tree 2 catches up and grows faster after year 3.
4.3.1 Tree growth rates
The rate of growth in height for two species of trees (in feet per year) is shown in Figure 4.3.
If the trees start at the same height, which tree is taller after 1 year? After 4 years?
Solution
In this problem we are provided with a sketch, rather than a formula for the growth rate of
the trees. Our solution will thus be qualitative (i.e. descriptive), rather than quantitative.
(This means we do not have to calculate anything; rather, we have to make some important
observations about the behaviour shown in Fig 4.3.)
We recognize that the net change in height of each tree is of the form
H
i
(T) −H
i
(0) =
T
0
g
i
(t)dt, i = 1, 2.
where i = 1 for tree 1, i = 2 for tree 2, g
i
(t) is the growth rate as a function of time
(shown for each tree in Figure 4.3) and H
i
(t) is the height of tree “i” at time t. But, by the
Fundamental Theorem of Calculus, this deﬁnite integral corresponds to the area under the
curve g
i
(t) from t = 0 to t = T. Thus we must interpret the net change in height for each
tree as the area under its growth curve. We see from Figure 4.3 that at t = 1 year, the area
under the curve for tree 1 is greater, so it has grown more. At t = 4 years the area under
the second curve is greatest so tree 2 has grown the most by that time.
4.3.2 Radius of a tree trunk
The trunk of a tree, assumed to have the shape of a cylinder, grows incrementally, so that its
crosssection consists of “rings”. In years of plentiful rain and adequate nutrients, the tree
grows faster than in years of drought or poor soil conditions. Suppose the rainfall pattern
4.3. From rates of change to total change 69
time, t
f(t)
0.0 14.0
0.0
3.0
Figure 4.4. Rate of change of radius, f(t) for a growing tree over a period of 14 years.
has been cyclic, so that, over a period of 14 years, the growth rate of the radius of the tree
trunk (in cm/year) is given by the function
f(t) = 1.5 + sin(πt/5),
as shown in Figure 4.4. Let the height of the tree trunk be approximately constant over this
ten year period, and assume that the density of the trunk is approximately 1 gm/cm
3
.
(a) If the radius was initially r
0
at time t = 0, what will the radius of the trunk be at
time t later?
(b) What is the ratio of the mass of the tree trunk at t = 10 years and t = 0 years?
(i.e. ﬁnd the ratio mass(10)/mass(0).)
Solution
(a) Let R(t) denote the trunk’s radius at time t. The rate of change of the radius of the tree
is given by the function f(t), and we are told that at t = 0, R(0) = r
0
. A graph of this
growth rate over the ﬁrst ﬁfteen years is shown in Figure 4.4. The net change in the radius
is
R(t) −R(0) =
t
0
f(s) ds =
t
0
(1.5 + sin(πs/5)) ds.
Integrating the above, we get
R(t) −R(0) =
1.5t −
cos(πs/5)
π/5
t
0
.
Here we have used the fact that the antiderivative of sin(ax) is −(cos(ax)/a).
Thus, using the initial value, R(0) = r
0
(which is a constant), and evaluating the
integral, leads to
R(t) = r
0
+ 1.5t −
5 cos(πt/5)
π
+
5
π
.
70 Chapter 4. Applications of the deﬁnite integral to velocities and rates
(The constant at the end of the expression stems from the fact that cos(0) = 1.) A graph
of the radius of the tree over time (using r
0
= 1) is shown in Figure 4.5. This function
is equivalent to the area associated with the function shown in Figure 4.4. Notice that
Figure 4.5 conﬁrms that the radius keeps growing over the entire period, but that its growth
rate (slope of the curve) alternates between higher and lower values.
time, t
R(t)
0.0 14.0
0.0
25.0
Figure 4.5. The radius of the tree, R(t), as a function of time, obtained by inte
grating the rate of change of radius shown in Fig. 4.4.
After ten years we have
R(10) = r
0
+ 15 −
5
π
cos(2π) +
5
π
.
But cos(2π) = 1, so
R(10) = r
0
+ 15.
(b) The mass of the tree is density times volume, and since the density in this example
is constant, 1 gm/cm
3
, we need only obtain the volume at t = 10. Taking the trunk to be
cylindrical means that the volume at any given time is
V (t) = π[R(t)]
2
h.
The ratio we want is then
V (10)
V (0)
=
π[R(10)]
2
h
πr
2
0
h
=
[R(10)]
2
r
2
0
=
r
0
+ 15
r
0
2
.
In this problem we used simple antidifferentiation to compute the desired total change.
We also related the graph of the radial growth rate in Fig. 4.4 to that of the resulting radius
at time t, in Fig. 4.5.
4.4. Production and removal 71
4.3.3 Birth rates and total births
After World War II, the birth rate in western countries increased dramatically. Suppose that
the number of babies born (in millions per year) was given by
b(t) = 5 + 2t, 0 ≤ t ≤ 10,
where t is time in years after the end of the war.
(a) How many babies in total were born during this time period (i.e in the ﬁrst 10 years
after the war)?
(b) Find the time T
0
such that the total number of babies born from the end of the war
up to the time T
0
was precisely 14 million.
Solution
(a) To ﬁnd the number of births, we would integrate the birth rate, b(t) over the given
time period. The net change in the population due to births (neglecting deaths) is
P(10)−P(0) =
10
0
b(t) dt =
10
0
(5+2t) dt = (5t+t
2
)
10
0
= 50+100 = 150[million babies].
(b) Denote by T the time at which the total number of babies born was 14 million. Then,
[in units of million]
I =
T
0
b(t) dt = 14 =
T
0
(5 + 2t) dt = 5T +T
2
equating I = 14 leads to the quadratic equation, T
2
+ 5T − 14 = 0, which can be
written in the factored form, (T − 2)(T + 7) = 0. This has two solutions, but we
reject T = −7 since we are looking for time after the War. Thus we ﬁnd that T = 2
years, i.e it took two years for 14 million babies to have been born.
While this problem involves simple integration, we had to solve for a quantity (T) based
on information about behaviour of that integral. Many problems in real application involve
such slight twists on the ideas of integration.
4.4 Production and removal
The process of integration can be used to convert rates of production and removal into net
amounts present at a given time. The example in this section is of this type. We investigate
a process in which a substance accumulates as it is being produced, but disappears through
some removal process. We would like to determine when the quantity of material increases,
and when it decreases.
72 Chapter 4. Applications of the deﬁnite integral to velocities and rates
Circadean rhythm in hormone levels
Consider a hormone whose level in the blood at time t will be denoted by H(t). We will
assume that the level of hormone is regulated by two separate processes: one might be
the secretion rate of specialized cells that produce the hormone. (The production rate of
hormone might depend on the time of day, in some cyclic pattern that repeats every 24
hours or so.) This type of cyclic pattern is called circadean rhythm. A competing process
might be the removal of hormone (or its deactivation by some enzymes secreted by other
cells.) In this example, we will assume that both the production rate, p(t), and the removal
rate, r(t), of the hormone are timedependent, periodic functions with somewhat different
phases.
12 6 6 0 0
(noon)
3 3 9 9
r(t)
hour
hormone production/removal rates
t
p(t)
Figure 4.6. The rate of hormone production p(t) and the rate of removel r(t) are
shown here. We want to use these graphs to deduce when the level of hormone is highest
and lowest.
A typical example of two such functions are shown in Figure 4.6. This ﬁgure shows
the production and removal rates over a period of 24 hours, starting at midnight. Our ﬁrst
task will be to use properties of the graph in Figure 4.6 to answer the following questions:
1. When is the production rate, p(t), maximal?
2. When is the removal rate r(t) minimal?
3. At what time is the hormone level in the blood highest?
4. At what time is the hormone level in the blood lowest?
5. Find the maximal level of hormone in the blood over the period shown, assuming
that its basal (lowest) level is H = 0.
Solutions
1. We see directly from Fig. 4.6 that production rate is maximal at about 9:00 am.
4.4. Production and removal 73
2. Similarly, removal rate is minimal at noon.
3. To answer this question we note that the total amount of hormone produced over a
time period a ≤ t ≤ b is
P
total
=
b
a
p(t)dt.
The total amount removed over time interval a ≤ t ≤ b is
R
total
=
b
a
r(t)dt.
This means that the net change in hormone level over the given time interval (amount
produced minus amount removed) is
H(b) −H(a) = P
total
−R
total
=
b
a
(p(t) −r(t))dt.
We interpret this integral as the area between the curves p(t) and r(t). But we
must use caution here: For any time interval over which p(t) > r(t), this integral
will be positive, and the hormone level will have increased. Otherwise, if r(t) <
p(t), the integral yields a negative result, so that the hormone level has decreased.
This makes simple intuitive sense: If production is greater than removal, the level
of the substance is accumulating, whereas in the opposite situation, the substance is
decreasing. With these remarks, we ﬁnd that the hormone level in the blood will be
greatest at 3:00 pm, when the greatest (positive) area between the two curves has
been obtained.
4. Similarly, the least hormone level occurs after a period in which the removal rate has
been larger than production for the longest stretch. This occurs at 3:00 am, just as
the curves cross each other.
5. Here we will practice integration by actually ﬁtting some cyclic functions to the
graphs shown in Figure 4.6. Our ﬁrst observation is that if the length of the cycle
(also called the period) is 24 hours, then the frequency of the oscillation is ω =
(2π)/24 = π/12. We further observe that the functions shown in the Figure 4.7
have the form
p(t) = A(1 + sin(ωt)), r(t) = A(1 + cos(ωt)).
Intersection points occur when
p(t) = r(t)
A(1 + sin(ωt)) = A(1 + cos(ωt)),
sin(ωt) = cos(ωt)),
⇒tan(ωt) = 1.
This last equality leads to ωt = π/4, 5π/4. But then, the fact that ω = π/12 implies
that t = 3, 15. Thus, over the time period 3 ≤ t ≤ 15 hrs, the hormone level is
74 Chapter 4. Applications of the deﬁnite integral to velocities and rates
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
5 10 15 20
t
Figure 4.7. The functions shown above are trigonometric approximations to the
rates of hormone production and removal from Figure 4.6
increasing. For simplicity, we will take the amplitude A = 1. (In general, this would
just be a multiplicative constant in whatever solution we compute.) Then the net
increase in hormone over this period is calculated from the integral
H
total
=
15
3
[p(t) −r(t)] dt =
15
3
[(1 + sin(ωt)) −(1 + cos(ωt))] dt
In the problem set, the reader is asked to compute this integral and to show that the
amount of hormone that accumulated over the time interval 3 ≤ t ≤ 15, i.e. between
3:00 am and 3:00 pm is 24
√
2/π.
4.5 Present value of a continuous income stream
Here we discuss the value of an annuity, which is a kind of savings account that guarantees
a continuous stream of income. You would like to pay P dollars to purchase an annuity that
will pay you an income f(t) every year from now on, for t > 0. In some cases, we might
want a constant income every year, in which case f(t) would be constant. More generally,
we can consider the case that at each future year t, we ask for income f(t) that could vary
from year to year. If the bank interest rate is r, how much should you pay now?
Solution
If we invest P dollars (the “principal” i.e., the amount deposited) in the bank with interest
r (compounded continually) then the amount A(t) in the account at time t (in years), will
4.5. Present value of a continuous income stream 75
grow as follows:
A(t) = P
1 +
r
n
nt
,
where r is the yearly interest rate (e.g. 5%) and n is the number of times per year that
interest is compound (e.g. n = 2 means interest compounded twice per year, n = 12
means monthly compounded interest, etc.) Deﬁne
h =
r
n
. Then n =
r
h
.
Then at time t, we have that
A(t) = P(1 +h)
1
h
rt
= P
(1 +h)
1
h
rt
≈ Pe
rt
for large n or small h.
Here we have used the fact that when h is small (i.e. frequent intervals of compounding)
the expression in square brackets above can be approximated by e, the base of the natural
logarithms. Recall that
e = lim
h→0
(1 +h)
1
h
.
(This result was obtained in a ﬁrst semester calculus course by selecting the base of expo
nentials such that the derivative of e
x
is just e
x
itself.) Thus, we have found that the amount
in the bank at time t will grow as
A(t) = Pe
rt
, (assuming continually compounded interest). (4.12)
Having established the exponential growth of an investment, we return to the question
of how to set up an annuity for a continuous stream of income in the future. Rewriting
Eqn. (4.12), the principle amount that we should invest in order to have A(t) to spend at
time t is
P = A(t)e
−rt
.
Suppose we want to have f(t) spending money for each year t. We refer to the present
value of year t as the quantity
P = f(t)e
−rt
.
(i.e. We must pay P now, in the present, to get f(t) in a future year t.) Summing over all
the years, we ﬁnd that the present value of the continuous income stream is
P =
L
¸
t=1
f(t)e
−rt
· 1
....
“∆t
≈
L
0
f(t)e
−rt
dt,
where L is the expected number of years left in the lifespan of the individual to whom this
annuity will be paid, and where we have approximated a sum of payments by an integral
(of a continuous income stream). One problemis that we do not know in advance how long
76 Chapter 4. Applications of the deﬁnite integral to velocities and rates
the lifespan L will be. As a crude approximation, we could assume that this income stream
continues forever, i.e. that L ≈ ∞. In such an approximation, we have to compute the
integral:
P =
∞
0
f(t)e
−rt
dt. (4.13)
The integral in Eqn. (4.13) is an improper integral (i.e. integral over an unbounded do
main), as we have already encountered in Section 3.8.5. We shall have more to say about
the properties of such integrals, and about their technical deﬁnition, existence, and proper
ties in Chapter 10. We refer to the quantity
P =
∞
0
f(t)e
−rt
dt, (4.14)
as the present value of a continuous income stream f(t).
Example: Setting up an annuity
Suppose we want an annuity that provides us with an annual payment of 10, 000 from the
bank, i.e. in this case f(t) = $10, 000 is a function that has a constant value for every year.
Then from Eqn (4.14),
P =
∞
0
10000e
−rt
dt = 10000
∞
0
e
−rt
dt.
By a previous calculation in Section 3.8.5, we ﬁnd that
P = 10000 ·
1
r
,
e.g. if interest rate is 5% (and assumed constant over future years), then
P =
10000
0.05
= $200, 000.
Therefore, we need to pay $200,000 today to get 10, 000 annually for every future year.
4.6 Average value of a function
In this ﬁnal example, we apply the deﬁnite integral to computing the average height of
a function over some interval. First, we deﬁne what is meant by average value in this
context.
18
Given a function
y = f(x)
over some interval a ≤ x ≤ b, we will deﬁne average value of the function as follows:
18
In Chapters 5 and 8, we will encounter a different type of average (also called mean) that will represent an
average horizontal position or center of mass. It is important to avoid confusing these distinct notions.
4.6. Average value of a function 77
Deﬁnition
The average value of f(x) over the interval a ≤ x ≤ b is
¯
f =
1
b −a
b
a
f(x)dx.
Example 1
Find the average value of the function y = f(x) = x
2
over the interval 2 < x < 4.
Solution
¯
f =
1
4 −2
4
2
x
2
dx =
1
2
x
3
3
4
2
=
1
6
4
3
−2
3
=
28
3
Example 2: Day length over the year
Suppose we want to know the average length of the day during summer and spring. We
will assume that day length follows a simple periodic behaviour, with a cycle length of 1
year (365 days). Let us measure time t in days, with t = 0 at the spring equinox, i.e. the
date in spring when night and day lengths are equal, each being 12 hrs. We will refer to
the number of daylight hours on day t by the function f(t). (We will also call f(t) the
daylength on day t.
A simple function that would describe the cyclic changes of day length over the
seasons is
f(t) = 12 + 4 sin
2πt
365
.
This is a periodic function with period 365 days as shown in Figure 4.8. Its maximal value
is 16h and its minimal value is 8h. The average day length over spring and summer, i.e.
over the ﬁrst (365/2) ≈ 182 days is:
¯
f =
1
182
182
0
f(t)dt
=
1
182
182
0
12 + 4 sin(
πt
182
)
dt
=
1
182
12t −
4 · 182
π
cos(
πt
182
)
182
0
=
1
182
12 · 182 −
4 · 182
π
[cos(π) −cos(0)]
= 12 +
8
π
≈ 14.546 hours (4.15)
78 Chapter 4. Applications of the deﬁnite integral to velocities and rates
summer winter
<=================> <=================>
0.0 365.0
0.0
16.0
summer winter
<=================> <=================>
0.0 365.0
0.0
16.0
Figure 4.8. We show the variations in day length (cyclic curve) as well as the
average day length (height of rectangle) in this ﬁgure.
Thus, on average, the day is 14.546 hrs long during the spring and summer.
In Figure 4.8, we show the entire day length cycle over one year. It is left as an
exercise for the reader to show that the average value of f over the entire year is 12 hrs.
(This makes intuitive sense, since overall, the short days in winter will average out with the
longer days in summer.)
Figure 4.8 also shows geometrically what the average value of the function repre
sents. Suppose we determine the area associated with the graph of f(x) over the interval of
interest. (This area is painted red (dark) in Figure 4.8, where the interval is 0 ≤ t ≤ 365,
i.e. the whole year.) Now let us draw in a rectangle over the same interval (0 ≤ t ≤ 365)
having the same total area. (See the big rectangle in Figure 4.8, and note that its area
matches with the darker, red region.) The height of the rectangle represents the average
value of f(t) over the interval of interest.
4.7 Summary
In this chapter, we arrived at a number of practical applications of the deﬁnite integral.
1. In Section 4.2, we found that for motion at constant acceleration a, the displace
ment of a moving object can be obtained by integrating twice: the deﬁnite integral
of acceleration is the velocity v(t), and the deﬁnite integral of the velocity is the
displacement.
v(t) = v
0
+
t
0
a ds. x(t) = x(0) +
t
0
v(s) ds.
(Here we use the “dummy variable” s inside the integral, but the meaning is, of
course, the same as in the previous presentation of the formulae.) We showed that at
4.7. Summary 79
any time t, the position of an object initially at x
0
with velocity v
0
is
x(t) = x
0
+v
0
t +a
t
2
2
.
2. We extended our analysis of a moving object to the case of nonconstant acceleration
(Section 4.2.4), when air resistance tends to produce a drag force to slow the motion
of a falling object. We found that in that case, the acceleration gradually decreases,
a(t) = ge
−kt
. (The decaying exponential means that a → 0 as t increases.) Again,
using the deﬁnite integral, we could compute a velocity,
v(t) =
t
0
a(s) ds =
g
k
(1 −e
−kt
).
3. We illustrated the connection between rates of change (over time) and total change
(between on time point and another). In general, we saw that if r(t) represents a rate
of change of some process, then
b
a
r(s) ds = Total change over the time interval a ≤ t ≤ b.
This idea was discussed in Section 4.3.
4. In the concluding Section 4.6, we discussed the average value of a function f(x)
over some interval a ≤ x ≤ b,
¯
f =
1
b −a
b
a
f(x)dx.
In the next few chapters we encounters a vast assortment of further examples and
practical applications of the deﬁnite integral, to such topics as mass, volumes, length,
etc. In some of these we will be called on to “dissect” a geometric shape into pieces
that are not simple rectangles. The essential idea of an integral as a sum of many
(inﬁnitesimally) small pieces will, nevertheless be the same.
80 Chapter 4. Applications of the deﬁnite integral to velocities and rates
Chapter 5
Applications of the
deﬁnite integral to
calculating volume,
mass, and length
5.1 Introduction
In this chapter, we consider applications of the deﬁnite integral to calculating geometric
quantities such as volumes of geometric solids, masses, centers of mass, and lengths of
curves.
The idea behind the procedure described in this chapter is closely related to those we
have become familiar with in the context of computing areas. That is, we ﬁrst imagine an
approximation using a ﬁnite number of pieces to represent a desired result. Then, a limiting
process of reﬁnement leads to the desired result. The technology of the deﬁnite integral,
developed in Chapters 2 and 3 applies directly. This means that we need not rederive
the link between Riemann Sums and the deﬁnite integral, we can use these as we did in
Chapter 4.
In the ﬁrst parts of this chapter, we will calculate the total mass of a continuous
density distribution. In this context, we will also deﬁne the concept of a center of mass.
We will ﬁrst motivate this concept for a discrete distribution made up of a number of ﬁnite
masses. Then we show how the same concept can be applied in the continuous case. The
connection between the discrete and continuous representation will form an important link
with our study of analogous concepts in probability, in Chapters 7 and 8.
In the second part of this chapter, we will consider howto dissect certain three dimen
sional solids into a set of simpler parts whose volumes are easy to compute. We will use
familiar formulae for the volumes of disks and cylindrical shells, and carefully construct
a summation to represent the desired volume. The volume of the entire object will then
be obtained by summing up volumes of a stack of disks or a set of embedded shells, and
considering the limit as the thickness of the dissection cuts gets thinner. There are some im
portant differences between material in this chapter and in previous chapters. Calculating
volumes will stretch our imagination, requiring us to visualize 3dimensional (3D) objects,
and how they can be subdivided into shells or slices. Most of our effort will be aimed at
understanding how to set up the needed integral. We provide a number of examples of this
procedure, but ﬁrst we review the basics of elementary volumes that will play the dominant
role in our calculations.
81
82Chapter 5. Applications of the deﬁnite integral to calculating volume, mass, and length
5.2 Mass distributions in one dimension
We start our discussion with a number of example of mass distributed along a single dimen
sion. First, we consider a discrete collection of masses and then generalize to a continuous
density. We will be interested in computing the total mass (by summation or integration)
as well as other properties of the distribution.
In considering the example of mass distributions, it becomes an easy step to develop
the analogous concepts for continuous distributions. This allows us to recapitulate the link
between ﬁnite sums and deﬁnite integrals that we developed in earlier chapters. Examples
in this chapter also further reinforce the idea of density (in the context of mass density).
Later, we will ﬁnd that these ideas are equally useful in the context of probability, explored
in Chapters 7 and 8.
5.2.1 A discrete distribution: total mass of beads on a wire
5
m
1
m
2
m
3
m
4
m
5
x
1
x
2
x
3
x
4
x
Figure 5.1. A discrete distribution of masses along a (one dimensional) wire.
In Figure 5.1 we see a number of beads distributed along a thin wire. We will label
each bead with an index, i = 1 . . . n (there are ﬁve beads so that n = 5). Each bead has a
certain position (that we will think of as the value of x
i
) and a mass that we will call m
i
.
We will think of this arrangement as a discrete mass distribution: both the masses of the
beads, and their positions are of interest to us. We would like to describe some properties
of this distribution.
The total mass of the beads, M, is just the sum of the individual masses, so that
M =
n
¸
i=1
m
i
. (5.1)
5.2.2 A continuous distribution: mass density and total mass
We now consider a continuous mass distribution where the mass per unit length (“density”)
changes gradually from one point to another. For example, the bar in Figure 5.2 has a
density that varies along its length.
The portion at the left is made of lighter material, or has a lower density than the
portions further to the right. We will denote that density by ρ(x) and this carries units of
mass per unit length. (The density of the material along the length of the bar is shown in
the graph.) How would we ﬁnd the total mass?
Suppose the bar has length L and let x (0 ≤ x ≤ L) denote position along that bar.
Let us imagine dividing up the bar into small pieces of length ∆x as shown in Figure 5.2.
5.2. Mass distributions in one dimension 83
x
mass distribution
ρ( ) x
...
Δ x
m
1
m
2
m
n
x
1
x
2
x
n
...
Figure 5.2. Top: A continuous mass distribution along a one dimensional bar,
discussed in Example 5.3.3. The density of the bar (mass per unit length), ρ(x) is shown
on the graph. Bottom: the discretized approximation of this same distribution. Here we
have subdivided the bar into n smaller pieces, each of length ∆x. The mass of each piece
is approximately m
k
= ρ(x
k
)∆x where x
k
= k∆x. The total mass of the bar (“sum of
all the pieces”) will be represented by an integral (5.2) as we let the size, ∆x, of the pieces
become inﬁnitesimal.
The coordinates of the endpoints of those pieces are then
x
0
= 0, . . . , x
k
= k∆x, . . . , x
N
= L
and the corresponding masses of each of the pieces are approximately
m
k
= ρ(x
k
)∆x.
(Observe that units are correct, that is mass
k
=(mass/length)· length. Note that ∆x has units
of length.) The total mass is then a sum of masses of all the pieces, and, as we have seen in
an earlier chapter, this sum will approach the integral
M =
L
0
ρ(x)dx (5.2)
as we make the size of the pieces smaller.
84Chapter 5. Applications of the deﬁnite integral to calculating volume, mass, and length
We can also deﬁne a cumulative function for the mass distribution as
M(x) =
x
0
ρ(s)ds. (5.3)
Then M(x) is the total mass in the part of the interval between the left end (assumed at
0) and the position x. The idea of a cumulative function becomes useful in discussions of
probability in Chapter 8.
5.2.3 Example: Actin density inside a cell
Biologists often describe the density of protein, receptors, or other molecules in cells. One
example is shown in Fig. 5.3. Here we show a keratocyte, which is a cell from the scale
of a ﬁsh. A band of actin ﬁlaments (protein responsible for structure and motion of the
2
nucleus
actin cortex
actin cortex
b
c
d
−1
1
−1 0 1
x
=1−x
ρ
Figure 5.3. A cell (keratocyte) shown in (a) has a dense distribution of actin
in a band called the actin cortex. In (b) we show a schematic sketch of the actin cortex
(shaded). In (c) that band of actin is scaled and straightened out so that it occupies a
length corresponding to the interval −1 ≤ x ≤ 1. We are interested in the distribution
of actin ﬁlaments across that band. That distribution is shown in (d). Note that actin is
densest in the middle of the band. (a) Credit to Alex Mogilner.
cell) are found at the edge of the cell in a band called the actin cortex. It has been found
experimentally that the density of actin is greatest in the middle of the band, i.e. the position
corresponding to the midpoint of the edge of the cell shown in Fig. 5.3a. According to
Alex Mogilner
19
, the density of actin across the cortex in ﬁlaments per edge µm is well
approximated by a distribution of the form
ρ(x) = α(1 −x
2
) −1 ≤ x ≤ 1,
where x is the fraction of distance
20
from midpoint to the end of the band (Fig. 5.3c and d).
Here ρ(x) is an actin ﬁlament density in units of ﬁlaments per µm. That is, ρ is the number
19
Alex Mogilner is a professor of mathematics who specializes in cell biology and the actin cytoskeleton
20
Note that 1µm (read “ 1 micrometer” or “micron”) is 10
−6
meters, and is appropriate for measuring lengths
of small objects such as cells.
5.3. Mass distribution and the center of mass 85
of actin ﬁbers per unit length.
We can ﬁnd the total number of actin ﬁlaments, N in the band by integration, i.e.
N =
1
−1
α(1 −x
2
) dx = α
1
−1
(1 −x
2
) dx.
The integral above has already been computed (Integral 2.) in the Examples 3.6.2 of Chap
ter 3 and was found to be 4/3. Thus, we have that there are N = 4α/3 actin ﬁlaments in
the band.
5.3 Mass distribution and the center of mass
It is useful to describe several other properties of mass distributions. We ﬁrst deﬁne the
“center of mass”, ¯ x which is akin to an average x coordinate.
5.3.1 Center of mass of a discrete distribution
The center of mass ¯ x of a mass distribution is given by:
¯ x =
1
M
n
¸
i=1
x
i
m
i
.
This can also be written in the form
¯ x =
¸
n
i=1
x
i
m
i
¸
n
i=1
m
i
.
5.3.2 Center of mass of a continuous distribution
We can generalize the concept of the center of mass for a continuous mass density. Our
usual approach of subdividing the interval 0 ≤ x ≤ L and computing a Riemann sum leads
to
¯ x =
1
M
n
¸
i=1
x
i
ρ(x
i
)∆x.
As ∆x → dx, this becomes an integral. Based on this, it makes sense to deﬁne the center
of mass of the continuous mass distribution as follows:
¯ x =
1
M
L
0
xρ(x)dx .
We can also write this in the form
¯ x =
L
0
xρ(x)dx
L
0
ρ(x)dx
.
86Chapter 5. Applications of the deﬁnite integral to calculating volume, mass, and length
5.3.3 Example: Center of mass vs average mass density
Here we distinguish between two (potentially confusing) quantities in the context of an
example.
A long thin bar of length L is made of material whose density varies along the length
of the bar. Let x be distance fromone end of the bar. Suppose that the mass density is given
by
ρ(x) = ax, 0 ≤ x ≤ L.
This type of mass density is shown in a panel in Fig. 5.2.
(a) Find the total mass of the bar.
(b) Find the average mass density along the bar.
(c) Find the center of mass of the bar.
(d) Where along the length of the bar should you cut to get two pieces of equal mass?
Solution
(a) From our previous discussion, the total mass of the bar is
M =
L
0
ax dx =
ax
2
2
L
0
=
aL
2
2
.
(b) The average mass density along the bar is computed just as one would compute the
average value of a function: integrate the function over an interval and divide by the
length of the interval. An example of this type appeared in Section 4.6. Thus
¯ ρ =
1
L
L
0
ρ(x) dx =
1
L
aL
2
2
=
aL
2
A bar having a uniform density ¯ ρ = aL/2 would have the same total mass as the bar
in this example. (This is the physical interpretation of average mass density.)
(c) The center of mass of the bar is
¯ x =
L
0
xp(x) dx
M
=
1
M
L
0
ax
2
dx =
a
M
x
3
3
L
0
=
2a
aL
2
L
3
3
=
2
3
L.
Observe that the center of mass is an “average x coordinate”, which is not the same
as the average mass density.
(d) We can use the cumulative function deﬁned in Eqn. (5.3) to ﬁgure out where half of
the mass is concentrated. Suppose we cut the bar at some position x = s. Then the
mass of this part of the bar is
M
1
=
s
0
ρ(x) dx =
as
2
2
,
5.4. Miscellaneous examples and related problems 87
We ask for what values of s is it true that M
1
is exactly half the total mass? Using
the result of part (a), we ﬁnd that for this to be true, we must have
M
1
=
M
2
, ⇒
as
2
2
=
1
2
aL
2
2
Solving for s leads to
s =
1
√
2
L =
√
2
2
L.
Thus, cutting the bar at a distance (
√
2/2)L from x = 0 results in two equal masses.
Remark: the position that subdivides the mass into two equal pieces is analogous to
the idea of a median. This concept will appear again in the context of probability in
Chapter 8.
5.3.4 Physical interpretation of the center of mass
The center of mass has a physical interpretation: it is the point at which the mass would
“balance”. In the Appendix 11.3 we discuss this in detail.
5.4 Miscellaneous examples and related problems
The idea of mass density can be extended to related problems of various kinds. We give
some examples in this section.
Up to now, we have seen examples of mass distributed in one dimension: beads on a
wire, actin density along the edge of a cell, (in Chapter 4), or a bar of varying density. For
the continuous distributions, we determined the total mass by integration. Underlying the
integral we computed was the idea that the interval could be “dissected” into small parts
(of width ∆x), and a sum of pieces transformed into an integral. In the next examples, we
consider similar ideas, but instead of dissecting the region into 1dimensional intervals, we
have slightly more interesting geometries.
5.4.1 Example: A glucose density gradient
A cylindrical testtube of radius r, and height h, contains a solution of glucose which has
been prepared so that the concentration of glucose is greatest at the bottom and decreases
gradually towards the top of the tube. (This is called a density gradient). Suppose that the
concentration c as a function of the depth x is c(x) = 0.1 + 0.5x grams per centimeter
3
.
(x = 0 at the top of the tube, and x = h at the bottom of the tube.) In Figure 5.4 we show a
schematic version of what this gradient might look like. (In reality, the transition between
high and low concentration would be smoother than shown in this ﬁgure.) Determine the
total amount of glucose in the tube (in gm). Neglect the “rounded” lower portion of the
tube: i.e. assume that it is a simple cylinder.
88Chapter 5. Applications of the deﬁnite integral to calculating volume, mass, and length
x=0
r
x=h
Δ x
Figure 5.4. A testtube of radius r containing a gradient of glucose. A diskshaped
slice of the tube with small thickness ∆x has approximately constant density.
Solution
We assume a simple cylindrical tube and consider imaginary “slices” of this tube along
its vertical axis, here labeled as the “x” axis. Suppose that the thickness of a slice is ∆x.
Then the volume of each of these (disk shaped) slices is πr
2
∆x. The amount of glucose in
the slice is approximately equal to the concentration c(x) multiplied by the volume of the
slice, i.e. the small slice contains an amount πr
2
∆xc(x) of glucose. In order to sum up the
total amount over all slices, we use a deﬁnite integral. (As before, we imagine ∆x → dx
becoming “inﬁnitesimal” as the number of slices increases.) The integral we want is
G = πr
2
h
0
c(x) dx.
Even though the geometry of the testtube, at ﬁrst glance, seems more complicated than
the onedimensional highway described in Chapter 4, we observe here that the integral
that computes the total amount is still a sum over a single spatial variable, x. (Note the
resemblance between the integrals
I =
L
0
C(x) dx and G = πr
2
h
0
c(x) dx,
here and in the previous example.) We have neglected the complication of the rounded bot
tomportion of the testtube, so that integration over its length (which is actually summation
of disks shown in Figure 5.4) is a onedimensional problem.
In this case the total amount of glucose in the tube is
G = πr
2
h
0
(0.1 + 0.5x)dx = πr
2
0.1x +
0.5x
2
2
h
0
= πr
2
0.1h +
0.5h
2
2
.
Suppose that the height of the testtube is h = 10 cm and its radius is r = 1 cm.
Then the total mass of glucose is
G = π
0.1(10) +
0.5(100)
2
= π (1 + 25) = 26π gm.
5.4. Miscellaneous examples and related problems 89
In the next example, we consider a circular geometry, but the concept of dissecting
and summing is the same. Our task is to determine how to set up the problem in terms
of an integral, and, again, we must imagine which type of subdivision would lead to the
summation (integration) needed to compute total amount.
5.4.2 Example: A circular colony of bacteria
A circular colony of bacteria has radius of 1 cm. At distance r from the center of the
colony, the density of the bacteria, in units of one million cells per square centimeter, is
observed to be b(r) = 1−r
2
(Note: r is distance from the center in cm, so that 0 ≤ r ≤ 1).
What is the total number of bacteria in the colony?
(one ring)
Δ r
Side view
Top−down view
r
b(r)
b(r)=1−r
r
2
Figure 5.5. A colony of bacteria with circular symmetry. A ring of small thickness
∆r has roughly constant density. The superimposed curve on the left is the bacterial density
b(r) as a function of the radius r.
Solution
Figure 5.5 shows a rough sketch of a ﬂat surface with a colony of bacteria growing on it.
We assume that this distribution is radially symmetric. The density as a function of distance
from the center is given by b(r), as shown in Figure 5.5. Note that the function describing
density, b(r) is smooth, but to accentuate the strategy of dissecting the region, we have
shown a topdown view of a ring of nearly constant density on the right in Figure 5.5. We
see that this ring occupies the region between two circles, e.g. between a circle of radius r
and a slightly bigger circle of radius r + ∆r. The area of that “ring”
21
would then be the
area of the larger circle minus that of the smaller circle, namely
A
ring
= π(r +∆r)
2
−πr
2
= π(2r∆r + (∆r)
2
).
However, if we make the thickness of that ring really small (∆r → 0), then the quadratic
term is very very small so that
A
ring
≈ 2πr∆r.
21
Students commonly make the error of writing A
ring
= π(r + ∆r − r)
2
= π(∆r)
2
. This trap should be
avoided! It is clear that the correct expression has additional terms, since we really are computing a difference of
two circular areas.
90Chapter 5. Applications of the deﬁnite integral to calculating volume, mass, and length
Consider all the bacteria that are found inside a “ring” of radius r and thickness ∆r
(see Figure 5.5.) The total number within such a ring is the product of the density, b(r) and
the area of the ring, i.e.
b(r) · (2πr∆r) = 2πr(1 −r
2
)∆r.
To get the total number in the colony we sum up over all the rings from r = 0 to r = 1
and let the thickness, ∆r → dr become very small. But, as with other examples, this is
equivalent to calculating a deﬁnite integral, namely:
B
total
=
1
0
(1 −r)(2πr) dr = 2π
1
0
(1 −r
2
)rdr = 2π
1
0
(r −r
3
)dr.
We calculate the result as follows:
B
total
= 2π
r
2
2
−
r
4
4
1
0
= (πr
2
−π
r
4
2
)
1
0
= π −
π
2
=
π
2
.
Thus the total number of bacteria in the entire colony is π/2 million which is approximately
1.57 million cells.
5.5 Volumes of solids of revolution
We now turn to the problem of calculating volumes of 3D solids. Here we restrict attention
to symmetric objects denoted solids of revolution. The outer surface of these objects is
generated by revolving some curve around a coordinate axis. In Figure 5.7 we show one
such curve, and the surface it forms when it is revolved about the y axis.
5.5.1 Volumes of cylinders and shells
Before starting the calculation, let us recall the volumes of some of the geometric shapes
that are to be used as elementary pieces into which our shapes will be carved. See Fig
ure 5.6.
1. The volume of a cylinder of height h having circular base of radius r, is
V
cylinder
= πr
2
h.
2. The volume of a circular disk of thickness τ, and radius r (shown on the left in
Figure 5.6 ), is a special case of the above,
V
disk
= πr
2
τ.
3. The volume of a cylindrical shell of height h, with circular radius r and small
thickness τ (shown on the right in Figure 5.6) is
V
shell
= 2πrhτ.
(This approximation holds for τ << r.)
5.5. Volumes of solids of revolution 91
r
h
τ
r
τ
disk shell
Figure 5.6. The volumes of these simple 3D shapes are given by simple formulae.
We use them as basic elements in computing more complicated volumes. Here we will
present examples based on disks. In Appendix 11.4 we give an example based on shells.
y
x x
x
y
y
Figure 5.7. A solid of revolution is formed by revolving a region in the xyplane
about the yaxis. We show how the region is approximated by rectangles of some given
width, and how these form a set of approximating disks for the 3D solid of revolution.
5.5.2 Computing the Volumes
Consider the curve in Figure 5.7 and the surface it forms when it is revolved about the
y axis. In the same ﬁgure, we also show how a set of approximating rectangular strips
associated with the planar region (grey rectangles) lead to a set of stacked disks (orange
shapes) that approximate the volume of the solid (greenish object in Fig. 5.7). The total
volume of the disks is not the same as the volume of the object but if we make the thickness
of these disks very small, the approximation of the true volume is good. In the limit, as
the thickness of the disks becomes inﬁnitesimal, we arrive at the true volume of the solid
of revolution. The reader should recognize a familiar theme. We used the same concept in
92Chapter 5. Applications of the deﬁnite integral to calculating volume, mass, and length
computing areas using Riemann sums based on rectangular strips in Chapter 2.
Fig. 5.8 similarly shows a volume of revolution obtained by revolving the graph of
the function y = f(x) about the x axis. We note that if this surface is cut into slices, the
radius of the crosssections depend on the position of the cut. Let us imagine a stack of
disks approximating this volume. One such disk has been pulled out and labeled for our
inspection. We note that its radius (in the y direction) is given by the height of the graph
of the function, so that r = f(x). The thickness of the disk (in the x direction) is ∆x. The
volume of this single disk is then v = π[f(x)]
2
∆x. Considering this disk to be based at
the k’th coordinate point in the stack, i.e. at x
k
, means that its volume is
v
k
= π[f(x
k
)]
2
∆x.
Summing up the volumes of all such disks in the stack leads to the total volume of disks
V
disks
=
¸
k
π[f(x
k
)]
2
∆x.
When we increase the number of disks, making each one thinner so that ∆x → 0, we
disk thickness:
disk radius:
x Δ
x
y
x
y=f(x)
r=f(x)
Figure 5.8. Here the solid of revolution is formed by revolving the curve y = f(x)
about the y axis. A typical disk used to approximate the volume is shown. The radius of the
disk (parallel to the y axis) is r = y = f(x). The thickness of the disk (parallel to the x
axis) is ∆x. The volume of this disk is hence v = π[f(x)]
2
∆x
arrive at a deﬁnite integral,
V =
b
a
π[f(x)]
2
dx.
In most of the examples discussed in this chapter, the key step is to make careful observation
of the way that the radius of a given disk depends on the function that generates the surface.
5.5. Volumes of solids of revolution 93
(By this we mean the function that speciﬁes the curve that forms the surface of revolution.)
We also pay attention to the dimension that forms the disk thickness, ∆x.
Some of our examples will involve surfaces revolved about the x axis, and others
will be revolved about the y axis. In setting up these examples, a diagram is usually quite
helpful.
Example 1: Volume of a sphere
k
y
x
f(x )
k
Δ x
Δ x
x
Figure 5.9. When the semicircle (on the left) is rotated about the x axis, it gen
erates a sphere. On the right, we show one disk generated by the revolution of the shaded
rectangle.
We can think of a sphere of radius R as a solid whose outer surface is formed by
rotating a semicircle about its long axis. A function that describe a semicircle (i.e. the
top half of the circle, y
2
+x
2
= R
2
) is
y = f(x) =
R
2
−x
2
.
In Figure 5.9, we show the sphere dissected into a set of disks, each of width ∆x. The disks
are lined up along the x axis with coordinates x
k
, where −R ≤ x
k
≤ R. These are just
integer multiples of the slice thickness ∆x, so for example,
x
0
= −R, x
1
= −R+∆x, . . . , x
k
= −R +k∆x .
The radius of the disk depends on its position
22
. Indeed, the radius of a disk through the x
axis at a point x
k
is speciﬁed by the function r
k
= f(x
k
). The volume of the k’th disk is
V
k
= πr
2
k
∆x.
By the above remarks, using the fact that the function f(x) determines the radius, we have
V
k
= π[f(x
k
)]
2
∆x,
22
Note that the radius is oriented along the y axis, so sometimes we may write this as r
k
= y
k
= f(x
k
)
94Chapter 5. Applications of the deﬁnite integral to calculating volume, mass, and length
V
k
= π
¸
R
2
−x
2
k
2
∆x = π(R
2
−x
2
k
)∆x.
The total volume of all the disks is
V =
¸
k
V
k
=
¸
k
π[f(x
k
)]
2
∆x = π
¸
k
(R
2
−x
2
k
)∆x.
as ∆x →0, this sum becomes a deﬁnite integral, and represents the true volume. We start
the summation at x = −R and end at x
N
= R since the semicircle extends fromx = −R
to x = R. Thus
V
sphere
=
R
R
π[f(x
k
)]
2
dx = π
R
R
(R
2
−x
2
) dx.
We compute this integral using the Fundamental Theorem of calculus, obtaining
V
sphere
= π
R
2
x −
x
3
3
R
−R
.
Observe that this is twice the volume obtained for the interval 0 < x < R,
V
sphere
= 2π
R
2
x −
x
3
3
R
0
= 2π
R
3
−
R
3
3
.
We often use such symmetry properties to simplify computations. After simpliﬁcation, we
arrive at the familiar formula
V
sphere
=
4
3
πR
3
.
Example 2: Volume of a paraboloid
Consider the curve
y = f(x) = 1 −x
2
.
If we rotate this curve about the y axis, we will get a paraboloid, as shown in Figure 5.10.
In this section we show how to compute the volume by dissecting into disks stacked up
along the y axis.
Solution
The object has the y axis as its axis of symmetry. Hence disks are stacked up along the
y axis to approximate this volume. This means that the width of each disk is ∆y. This
accounts for the dy in the integral below. The volume of each disk is
V
disk
= πr
2
∆y,
where the radius, r is now in the direction parallel to the x axis. Thus we must express
radius as
r = x = f
−1
(y),
5.5. Volumes of solids of revolution 95
2
y
x x
y
y=f(x)=1−x
Figure 5.10. The curve that generates the shape of a paraboloid (left) and the
shape of the paraboloid (right).
i.e, we invert the relationship to obtain x as a function of y. From y = 1 − x
2
we have
x
2
= 1 −y so x =
√
1 −y. The radius of a disk at height y is therefore r = x =
√
1 −y.
The shape extends from a smallest value of y = 0 up to y = 1. Thus the volume is
V = π
1
0
[f(y)]
2
dy = π
1
0
[
1 −y]
2
dy.
It is helpful to note that once we have identiﬁed the thickness of the disks (∆y), we are
guided to write an integral in terms of the variable y, i.e. to reformulate the equation
describing the curve. We compute
V = π
1
0
(1 −y) dy = π
y −
y
2
2
1
0
= π
1 −
1
2
=
π
2
.
The above example was set up using disks. However, there are other options. In
Appendix 11.4 we show yet another method, comprised of cylindrical shells to compute
the volume of a cone. In some cases, one method is preferable to another, but here either
method works equally well.
Example 3
Find the volume of the surface formed by rotating the curve
y = f(x) =
√
x, 0 ≤ x ≤ 1
(a) about the x axis. (b) about the y axis.
Solution
(a) If we rotate this curve about the x axis, we obtain a bowl shape; dissecting this
surface leads to disks stacked along the x axis, with thickness ∆x → dx, with radii
in the y direction, i.e. r = y = f(x), and with x in the range 0 ≤ x ≤ 1. The
96Chapter 5. Applications of the deﬁnite integral to calculating volume, mass, and length
volume will thus be
V = π
1
0
[f(x)]
2
dx = π
1
0
[
√
x]
2
dx = π
1
0
x dx = π
x
2
2
1
0
=
π
2
.
(b) When the curve is rotated about the y axis, it forms a surface with a sharp point at the
origin. The disks are stacked along the y axis, with thickness ∆y →dy, and radii in
the x direction. We must rewrite the function in the form
x = g(y) = y
2
.
We now use the interval along the y axis, i.e. 0 < y < 1 The volume is then
V = π
1
0
[f(y)]
2
dy = π
1
0
[y
2
]
2
dy = π
1
0
y
4
dy = π
y
5
5
1
0
=
π
5
.
5.6 Length of a curve: Arc length
Analytic geometry provides a simple way to compute the length of a straight line segment,
based on the distance formula
23
. Recall that, given points P
1
= (x
1
, y
1
) and P
2
= (x
2
, y
2
),
the length of the line joining those points is
d =
(x
2
−x
1
)
2
+ (y
2
−y
1
)
2
.
Things are more complicated for “curves” that are not straight lines, but in many cases, we
are interested in calculating the length of such curves. In this section we describe how this
can be done using the deﬁnite integral “technology”.
The idea of dissection also applies to the problem of determining the length of a
curve. In Figure 5.11, we see the general idea of subdividing a curve into many small
“arcs”. Before we look in detail at this construction, we consider a simple example, shown
in Figure 5.12. In the triangle shown, by the Pythagorean theorem we have the length of
the sloped side related as follows to the side lengths ∆x, ∆y:
∆
2
= ∆x
2
+∆y
2
,
∆ =
∆x
2
+∆y
2
=
1 +
∆y
2
∆x
2
∆x =
1 +
∆y
∆x
2
∆x.
We now consider a curve given by some function
y = f(x) a < x < b,
as shown in Figure 5.11(a). We will approximate this curve by a set of line segments, as
shown in Figure 5.11(b). To obtain these, we have selected some step size ∆x along the
x axis, and placed points on the curve at each of these x values. We connect the points
with straight line segments, and determine the lengths of those segments. (The total length
23
The reader should recall that this formula is a simple application of Pythagorean theorem.
5.6. Length of a curve: Arc length 97
x
y
y=f(x)
x
y
y=f(x)
x
y
y=f(x)
x
y
Δ
Δ
Figure 5.11. Top: Given the graph of a function, y = f(x) (at left), we draw
secant lines connecting points on its graph at values of x that are multiples of ∆x (right).
Bottom: a small part of this graph is shown, and then enlarged, to illustrate the relationship
between the arc length and the length of the secant line segment.
y
x
x
y
Δ
Δ
Δ l
Figure 5.12. The basic idea of arclength is to add up lengths ∆l of small line
segments that approximate the curve.
of the segments is only an approximation of the length of the curve, but as the subdivision
gets ﬁner and ﬁner, we will arrive at the true total length of the curve.)
We show one such segment enlarged in the circular inset in Figure 5.11. Its slope,
shown at right is given by ∆y/∆x. According to our remarks, above, the length of this
98Chapter 5. Applications of the deﬁnite integral to calculating volume, mass, and length
segment is given by
∆ =
1 +
∆y
∆x
2
∆x.
As the step size is made smaller and smaller ∆x →dx, ∆y →dy and
∆ →
1 +
dy
dx
2
dx.
We recognize the ratio inside the square root as as the derivative, dy/dx. If our curve is
given by a function y = f(x) then we can rewrite this as
d =
1 + (f
(x))
2
dx.
Thus, the length of the entire curve is obtained from summing (i.e. adding up) these small
pieces, i.e.
L =
b
a
1 + (f
(x))
2
dx. (5.4)
Example 1
Find the length of a line whose slope is −2 given that the line extends fromx = 1 to x = 5.
Solution
We could ﬁnd the equation of the line and use the distance formula. But for the purpose of
this example, we apply the method of Equation (5.4): we are given that the slope f
(x) is
2. The integral in question is
L =
5
1
1 + (f
(x))
2
dx =
5
1
1 + (−2)
2
dx =
1
5
√
5 dx.
We get
L =
√
5
5
1
dx =
√
5x
5
1
=
√
5[5 −1] = 4
√
5.
Example 2
Find an integral that represents the length of the curve that forms the graph of the function
y = f(x) = x
3
, 1 < x < 2.
Solution
We ﬁnd that
dy
dx
= f
(x) = 3x
2
.
5.6. Length of a curve: Arc length 99
Thus, the integral is
L =
2
1
1 + (3x
2
)
2
dx =
2
1
1 + 9x
4
dx.
At this point, we will not attempt to ﬁnd the actual length, as we must ﬁrst develop tech
niques for ﬁnding the antiderivative for functions such as
√
1 + 9x
4
.
Using the spreadsheet to calculate arclength
Most integrals for arclength contain square roots and functions that are not easy to integrate,
simply because their antiderivatives are difﬁcult to determine. However, now that we know
the idea behind determining the length of a curve, we can apply the ideas developed have
to approximate the length of a curve “numerically”. The spreadsheet is a simple tool for
doing the necessary summations.
As an example, we show here how to calculate the length of the curve
y = f(x) = 1 −x
2
for 0 ≤ x ≤ 1
using a simple numerical procedure implemented on the spreadsheet.
Let us choose a step size of ∆x = 0.1 along the x axis, for the interval 0 ≤ x ≤ 1.
We calculate the function, the slopes of the little segments (change in y divided by change
in x), and from this, compute the length of each segment
∆ =
1 + (∆y/∆x)
2
∆x
and the accumulated length along the curve from left to right, L which is just a sum of
such values. The Table 5.6 shows steps in the calculation of the ratio ∆y/∆x, the value
of ∆, the cumulative sum, and, ﬁnally the total length L. The ﬁnal value of L = 1.4782
represents the total length of the curve over the entire interval 0 < x < 1.
In Figure 5.13(a) we show the actual curve y = 1 − x
2
. with points placed on it
at each multiple of ∆x. In Figure 5.13(b), we show (in blue) how the lengths of the little
straightline segments connecting these points changes across the interval. (The segments
on the left along the original curve are nearly ﬂat, so their length is very close to ∆x. The
segments on the right part of the curve are much more sloped, and their lengths are thus
bigger.) We also show (in red) how the total accumulated length L depends on the position
x across the interval. This function represents the total arclength of the curve y = 1 −x
2
,
from x = 0 up to a given x value. At x = 1 this function returns the value y = L, as it has
added up the full length of the curve for 0 ≤ x ≤ 1.
5.6.1 How the alligator gets its smile
The American alligator, Alligator mississippiensis has a set of teeth best viewed at some
distance. The regular arrangement of these teeth, i.e. their spacing along the jaw is im
portant in giving the reptile its famous bite. We will concern ourselves here with how that
pattern of teeth is formed as the alligator develops from its embryonic stage to that of an
100Chapter 5. Applications of the deﬁnite integral to calculating volume, mass, and length
y = f(x) =1x^2
0.0 1.0
0.0
1.5
y = f(x) =1x^2
cumulative length L
length increment
Arc Length
0.0 1.0
0.0
1.5
Figure 5.13. The spreadsheet can be used to compute approximate values of
integrals, and hence to calculate arclength. Shown here is the graph of the function y =
f(x) = 1 − x
2
for 0 ≤ x ≤ 1, together with the length increment and the cumulative
arclength along that curve.
5.6. Length of a curve: Arc length 101
x y = f(x) ∆y/∆x ∆ L =
¸
∆
0. 0 1.0000 0.1 0.1005 0.0000
0.1 0.9900 0.3 0.1044 0.1005
0.2 0.9600 0.5 0.1118 0.2049
0.3 0.9100 0.7 0.1221 0.3167
0.4 0.8400 0.9 0.1345 0.4388
0.5 0.7500 1.1 0.1487 0.5733
0.6 0.6400 1.3 0.1640 0.7220
0.7 0.5100 1.5 0.1803 0.8860
0.8 0.3600 1.7 0.1972 1.0663
0.9 0.1900 1.9 0.2147 1.2635
1. 0 0.0000 2.1 0.2326 1.4782
Table 5.1. For the function y = f(x) = 1 −x
2
, and 0 ≤ x ≤ 1, we show how to
calculate an approximation to the arclength using the spreadsheet.
adult. As is the case in humans, the teeth on an alligator do not form or sprout simultane
ously. In the development of the baby alligator, there is a sequence of initiation of teeth,
one after the other, at welldeﬁned positions along the jaw.
Paul Kulesa, a former student of James D Muray, set out to understand the pattern of
development of these teeth, based on data in the literature about what happens at distinct
stages of embryonic growth. Of interest in his research were several questions, including
what determines the positions and timing of initiation of individual teeth, and what mecha
nisms lead to this pattern of initiation. One theory proposed by this group was that chemical
signals that diffuse along the jaw at an early stage of development give rise to instructions
that are interpreted by jaw cells: where the signal is at a high level, a tooth will start to
initiate.
While we will not address the details of the mechanism of development here, we
will ﬁnd a simple application of the ideas of arclength in the developmental sequence of
teething. Shown in Figure 5.14 is a smiling baby alligator (no doubt thinking of some
future tasty meal). A close up of its smile (at an earlier stage of development) reveals the
shape of the jaw, together with the sites at which teeth are becoming evident. (One of these
sites, called primordia, is shown enlarged in an inset in this ﬁgure.)
Paul Kulesa found that the shape of the alligator’s jaw can be described remarkably
well by a parabola. A proper choice of coordinate system, and some experimentation leads
to the equation of the best ﬁt parabola
y = f(x) = −ax
2
+b
where a = 0.256, and b = 7.28 (in units not speciﬁed).
We show this curve in Figure 5.15(a). Also shown in this curve is a set of points at
which teeth are found, labelled by order of appearance. In Figure 5.15(b) we see the same
curve, but we have here superimposed the function L(x) given by the arc length along the
102Chapter 5. Applications of the deﬁnite integral to calculating volume, mass, and length
curve from the front of the jaw (i.e. the top of the parabola), i.e.
L(x) =
x
0
1 + [f
(s)]
2
ds.
This curve measures distance along the jaw, from front to back. The distances of the teeth
from one another, or along the curve of the jaw can be determined using this curve if we
know the x coordinates of their positions.
The table below gives the original data, courtesy of Dr. Kulesa, showing the order
of the teeth, their (x, y) coordinates, and the value of L(x) obtained from the arclength
formula. We see from this table that the teeth do not appear randomly, nor do they ﬁll in
the jaw in one sweep. Rather, they appear in several stages.
In Figure 5.15(c), we show the pattern of appearance: Plotting the distance along the
jaw of successive teeth reveals that the teeth appear in waves of nearly equallyspaced sites.
(By equally spaced, we refer to distance along the parabolic jaw.) The ﬁrst wave (teeth 1, 2,
3) are followed by a second wave (4, 5, 6, 7), and so on. Each wave forms a linear pattern
of distance from the front, and each successive wave ﬁlls in the gaps in a similar, equally
spaced pattern.
The true situation is a bit more complicated: the jaw grows as the teeth appear as
shown in 5.15(c). This has not been taken into account in our simple treatment here, where
we illustrate only the essential idea of arc length application.
Tooth number position distance along jaw
x y L(x)
1 1.95 6.35 2.1486
2 3.45 4.40 4.7000
3 4.54 2.05 7.1189
4 1.35 6.95 1.4000
5 2.60 5.50 3.2052
6 3.80 3.40 5.4884
7 5.00 1.00 8.4241
8 3.15 4.80 4.1500
9 4.25 2.20 6.3923
10 4.60 1.65 7.3705
11 0.60 7.15 0.6072
12 3.45 4.05 4.6572
13 5.30 0.45 9.2644
Table 5.2. Data for the appearance of teeth, in the order in which they appear
as the alligator develops. We can use arclength computations to determine the distances
between successive teeth.
5.6. Length of a curve: Arc length 103
Figure 5.14. Alligator mississippiensis and its teeth
104Chapter 5. Applications of the deﬁnite integral to calculating volume, mass, and length
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Alligator teeth
6.0 6.0
0.0
8.0
jaw y = f(x)
arc length L(x) along jaw
0.0 5.5
0.0
10.0
(a) (b)
Distance along jaw
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
teeth in order of appearance
0.0 13.0
0.0
10.0
(c) (d)
Figure 5.15. (a) The parabolic shape of the jaw, showing positions of teeth and
numerical order of emergence. (b) Arc length along the jaw from front to back. (c) Distance
of successive teeth along the jaw. (d) Growth of the jaw.
5.7. Summary 105
5.6.2 References
1. P.M. Kulesa and J.D. Murray (1995). Modelling the Wavelike Initiation of Teeth
Primordia in the Alligator. FORMA. Cover Article. Vol. 10, No. 3, 259280.
2. J.D. Murray and P.M. Kulesa (1996). On A Dynamic ReactionDiffusion Mechanism
for the Spatial Patterning of Teeth Primordia in the Alligator. Journal of Chemical
Physics. J. Chem. Soc., Faraday Trans., 92 (16), 29272932.
3. P.M. Kulesa, G.C. Cruywagen, S.R. Lubkin, M.W.J. Ferguson and J.D. Murray (1996).
Modelling the Spatial Patterning of Teeth Primordia in the Alligator. Acta Biotheo
retica, 44, 153164.
5.7 Summary
Here are the main points of the chapter:
1. We introduced the idea of a spatially distributed mass density ρ(x) in Section 5.2.2.
Here the deﬁnite integral represents
b
a
ρ(x) dx = Total mass in the interval a ≤ x ≤ b.
2. In this chapter, we deﬁned the center of mass of a (discrete) distribution of n masses
by
¯
X =
1
M
n
¸
i=0
x
i
m
i
. (5.5)
We developed the analogue of this for a continuous mass distribution (distributed in
the interval 0 ≤ x ≤ L). We deﬁned the center of mass of a continuous distribution
by the deﬁnite integral
¯ x =
1
M
L
0
xρ(x)dx . (5.6)
Importantly, the quantities m
i
in the sum (5.5) carry units of mass, whereas the
analogous quantities in (5.6) are ρ(x)dx. [Recall that ρ(x) is a mass per unit length
in the case of mass distributed along a bar or straight line.]
3. We deﬁned a cumulative function. In the discrete case, this was deﬁned as In the
continuous case, it is
M(x) =
x
0
ρ(s)ds.
4. The mean is an average x coordinate, whereas the median is the x coordinate that
splits the distribution into two equal masses (Geometrically, the median subdivides
the graph of the distribution into two regions of equal areas). The mean and median
are the same only in symmetric distributions. They differ for any distribution that is
asymmetric. The mean (but not the median) is inﬂuenced more strongly by distant
portions of the distribution.
106Chapter 5. Applications of the deﬁnite integral to calculating volume, mass, and length
5. In the later parts of this chapter, we showed how to compute volumes of various
objects that have radial symmetry (“solids of revolution”). We showed that if the
surface is generated by rotating the graph of a function y = f(x) about the x axis
(for a ≤ x ≤ b), then its volume can be described by an integral of the form
V =
b
a
π[f(x)]
2
dx.
We used this idea to show that the volume of a sphere of radius R is V
sphere
=
(4/3)πR
3
In the Chapters 7 and 8, we ﬁnd applications of the ideas of density and center of
mass to the context of a probability distribution and its mean.
Chapter 6
Techniques of
Integration
In this chapter, we expand our repertoire for antiderivatives beyond the “elementary” func
tions discussed so far. A review of the table of elementary antiderivatives (found in Chap
ter 3) will be useful. Here we will discuss a number of methods for ﬁnding antiderivatives.
We refer to these collected “tricks” as methods of integration. As will be shown, in some
cases, these methods are systematic (i.e. with clear steps), whereas in other cases, guess
work and trial and error is an important part of the process.
A primary method of integration to be described is substitution. A close relationship
exists between the chain rule of differential calculus and the substitution method. A second
very important method is integration by parts. Aside from its usefulness in integration
per se, this method has numerous applications in physics, mathematics, and other sciences.
Many other techniques of integration used to forma core of methods taught in such courses
in integral calculus. Many of these are quite technical. Nowadays, with sophisticated
mathematical software packages (including Maple and Mathematica), integration can be
carried our automatically via computation called “symbolic manipulation”, reducing our
need to dwell on these technical methods.
6.1 Differential notation
We begin by familiarizing the reader with notation that appears frequently in substitution
integrals, i.e. differential notation. Consider a straight line
y = mx +b.
Recall that the slope of the line, m, is
m =
change in y
change in x
=
∆y
∆x
.
This relationship can also be written in the form
∆y = m∆x.
107
108 Chapter 6. Techniques of Integration
y
x Δ
Δ
x
y
Figure 6.1. The slope of the line shown here is m = ∆y/∆x. This means that the
small quantities ∆y and ∆x are related by ∆y = m∆x.
If we take a very small step along this line in the x direction, call it dx (to remind us of an
“inﬁnitesimally small” quantity), then the resulting change in the y direction, (call it dy) is
related by
dy = mdx.
Now suppose that we have a curve deﬁned by some arbitrary function, y = f(x)
which need not be a straight line.For a given point (x, y) on this curve, a step ∆x in the x
direction is associated with a step ∆y in the y direction. The relationship between the step
y=f(x)
x
y
x+ Δx
y+Δ y
x
y
x+dx
y+dy
secant
tangent
Figure 6.2. On this ﬁgure, the graph of some function is used to illustrate the
connection between differentials dy and dx. Note that these are related via the slope of a
tangent line, m
t
to the curve, in contrast with the relationship of ∆y and ∆x which stems
from the slope of the secant line m
s
on the same curve.
sizes is:
∆y = m
s
∆x,
where now m
s
is the slope of a secant line (shown connecting two points on the curve in
Figure 6.2). If the sizes of the steps are small (dx and dy), then this relationship is well
approximated by the slope of the tangent line, m
t
as shown in Figure 6.2 i.e.
dy = m
t
dx = f
(x)dx.
6.1. Differential notation 109
The quantities dx and dy are called differentials. In general, they link a small step on the
x axis with the resulting small change in height along the tangent line to the curve (shown
in Figure 6.2). We might observe that the ratio of the differentials, i.e.
dy
dx
= f
(x),
appears to link our result to the deﬁnition of the derivative. We remember, though, that the
derivative is actually deﬁned as a limit:
f
(x) = lim
∆x→0
∆y
∆x
.
When the step size ∆x is quite small, it is approximately true that
∆y
∆x
≈
dy
dx
.
This notation will be useful in substitution integrals.
Examples
We give some examples of functions, their derivatives, and the differential notation that
goes with them.
1. The function y = f(x) = x
3
has derivative f
(x) = 3x
2
. Thus
dy = 3x
2
dx.
2. The function y = f(x) = tan(x) has derivative f
(x) = sec
2
(x). Therefore
dy = sec
2
(x) dx.
3. The function y = f(x) = ln(x) has derivative f
(x) =
1
x
so
dy =
1
x
dx.
With some practice, we can omit the intermediate step of writing down a derivative
and go directly from function to differential notation. Given a function y = f(x) we will
often write
df(x) =
df
dx
dx
and occasionally, we use just the symbol df to mean the same thing. The following exam
ples illustrate this idea with speciﬁc functions.
d(sin(x)) = cos(x) dx, d(x
n
) = nx
n−1
dx, d(arctan(x)) =
1
1 +x
2
dx.
Moreover, some of the basic rules of differentiation translate directly into rules for
handling and manipulating differentials. We give a list of some of these elementary rules
below.
110 Chapter 6. Techniques of Integration
Rules for derivatives and differentials
1.
d
dx
C = 0, dC = 0.
2.
d
dx
(u(x) +v(x)) =
du
dx
+
dv
dx
d(u +v) = du +dv.
3.
d
dx
u(x)v(x) = u
dv
dx
+v
du
dx
d(uv) = u dv +v du.
4.
d
dx
(Cu(x)) = C
du
dx
, d(Cu) = C du
6.2 Antidifferentiation and indeﬁnite integrals
In Chapters 2 and 3, we deﬁned the concept of the deﬁnite integral, which represents a
number. It will be useful here to consider the idea of an indeﬁnite integral, which is a
function, namely an antiderivative.
If two functions, F(x) and G(x), have the same derivative, say f(x), then they differ
at most by a constant, that is F(x) = G(x) +C, where C is some constant.
Proof
Since F(x) and G(x) have the same derivative, we have
d
dx
F(x) =
d
dx
G(x),
d
dx
F(x) −
d
dx
G(x) = 0,
d
dx
(F(x) −G(x)) = 0.
This means that the function F(x) −G(x) should be a constant, since its derivative is zero.
Thus
F(x) −G(x) = C,
so
F(x) = G(x) +C,
as required. F(x) and G(x) are called antiderivatives of f(x), and this conﬁrms, once
more, that any two antiderivatives differ at most by a constant.
In another terminology, which means the same thing, we also say that F(x) (or G(x))
is the integral of the function f(x), and we refer to f(x) as the integrand. We write this as
follows:
F(x) =
f(x) dx.
This notation is sometimes called “an indeﬁnite integral” because it does not denote a
speciﬁc numerical value, nor is an interval speciﬁed for the integration range. An indeﬁnite
6.3. Simple substitution 111
integral is a function with an arbitrary constant. (Contrast this with the deﬁnite integral
studied in our last chapters: in the case of the deﬁnite integral, we speciﬁed an interval, and
interpreted the result, a number, in terms of areas associated with curves.) We also write
f(x) dx = F(x) +C,
if we want to indicate the form of all possible functions that are antiderivatives of f(x). C
is referred to as a constant of integration.
6.2.1 Integrals of derivatives
Suppose we are given an integral of the form
df
dx
dx,
or alternately, the same thing written using differential notation,
df.
How do we handle this? We reason as follows. The df/dx (a quantity that is, itself, a
function) is the derivative of the function f(x). That means that f(x) is the antiderivative
of df/dx. Then, according to the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus,
df
dx
dx = f(x) +C.
We can write this same result using the differential of f, as follows:
df = f(x) +C.
The following examples illustrate the idea with several elementary functions.
Examples
1.
d(cos x) = cos x +C.
2.
dv = v +C.
3.
d(x
3
) = x
3
+C.
6.3 Simple substitution
In this section, we observe that the forms of some integrals can be simpliﬁed by making a
judicious substitution, and using our familiarity with derivatives (and the chain rule). The
idea rests on the fact that in some cases, we can spot a “helper function”
u = f(x),
112 Chapter 6. Techniques of Integration
such that the quantity
du = f
(x)dx
appears in the integrand. In that case, the substitution will lead to eliminating x entirely in
favour of the new quantity u, and simpliﬁcation may occur.
6.3.1 Example: Simple substitution
Suppose we are given the function
f(x) = (x + 1)
10
.
Then its antiderivative (indeﬁnite integral) is
F(x) =
f(x) dx =
(x + 1)
10
dx.
We could ﬁnd an antiderivative by expanding the integrand (x + 1)
10
into a degree 10
polynomial and using methods already known to us; but this would be laborious. Let us
observe, however, that if we deﬁne
u = (x + 1),
then
du =
d(x + 1)
dx
dx =
dx
dx
+
d(1)
dx
dx = (1 + 0)dx = dx.
Now replacing (x + 1) by u and dx by the equivalent du we get:
F(x) =
u
10
du.
An antiderivative to this can be easily found, namely,
F(x) =
u
11
11
=
(x + 1)
11
11
+C.
In the last step, we converted the result back to the original variable, and included the
arbitrary integration constant. A very important point to remember is that we can always
check our results by differentiation:
Check
Differentiate F(x) to obtain
dF
dx
=
1
11
(11(x + 1)
10
) = (x + 1)
10
.
6.3. Simple substitution 113
6.3.2 How to handle endpoints
We consider how substitution type integrals can be calculated when we have endpoints, i.e.
in evaluating deﬁnite integrals. Consider the example:
I =
2
1
1
x + 1
dx.
This integration can be done by making the substitution u = x+1 for which du = dx. We
can handle the endpoints in one of two ways:
Method 1: Change the endpoints
We can change the integral over entirely to a deﬁnite integral in the variable u as follows:
Since u = x + 1, the endpoint x = 1 corresponds to u = 2, and the endpoint x = 2
corresponds to u = 3, so changing the endpoints to reﬂect the change of variables leads to
I =
3
2
1
u
du = ln u
3
2
= ln 3 −ln 2 = ln
3
2
.
In the last steps we have plugged in the new endpoints (appropriate to u).
Method 2: Change back to x before evaluating at endpoints
Alternately, we could rewrite the antiderivative in terms of x.
1
u
du = ln u = ln x + 1
and then evaluate this function at the original endpoints.
2
1
1
x + 1
dx = ln x + 1
2
1
= ln
3
2
Here we plugged in the original endpoints (as appropriate to the variable x).
6.3.3 Examples: Substitution type integrals
Find a simple substitution and determine the antiderivatives (indeﬁnite or deﬁnite integrals)
of the following functions:
1. I =
2
x + 2
dx.
2. I =
1
0
x
2
e
x
3
dx
3. I =
1
(x + 1)
2
+ 1
dx.
114 Chapter 6. Techniques of Integration
4. I =
(x + 3)
x
2
+ 6x + 10 dx.
5. I =
π
0
cos
3
(x) sin(x) dx.
6. I =
1
ax +b
dx
7. I =
1
b +ax
2
dx.
Solutions
1. I =
2
x + 2
dx. Let u = x + 2. Then du = dx and we get
I =
2
u
du = 2
1
u
du = 2 lnu = 2 lnx + 2 +C.
2. I =
1
0
x
2
e
x
3
dx. Let u = x
3
. Then du = 3x
2
dx. Here we use method 2 for
handling endpoints.
e
u
du
3
=
1
3
e
u
=
1
3
e
x
3
+C.
Then
I =
1
0
x
2
e
x
3
dx =
1
3
e
x
3
1
0
=
1
3
(e −1).
(We converted the antiderivative to the original variable, x, before plugging in the
original endpoints.)
3. I =
1
(x + 1)
2
+ 1
dx. Let u = x + 1, then du = dx so we have
I =
1
u
2
+ 1
du = arctan(u) = arctan(x + 1) +C.
4. I =
(x+3)
x
2
+ 6x + 10 dx. Let u = x
2
+6x+10. Then du = (2x+6) dx =
2(x + 3) dx. With this substitution we get
I =
√
u
du
2
=
1
2
u
1/2
du =
1
2
u
3/2
3/2
=
1
3
u
3/2
=
1
3
(x
2
+ 6x + 10)
3/2
+C.
5. I =
π
0
cos
3
(x) sin(x) dx. Let u = cos(x). Then du = −sin(x) dx. Here we use
method 1 for handling endpoints. For x = 0, u = cos 0 = 1 and for x = π, u =
cos π = −1, so changing the integral and endpoints to u leads to
I =
−1
1
u
3
(−du) = −
u
4
4
−1
1
= −
1
4
((−1)
4
−1
4
) = 0.
6.3. Simple substitution 115
Here we plugged in the new endpoints that are relevant to the variable u.
6.
1
ax +b
dx. Let u = ax + b. Then du = a dx, so dx = du/a. Substitute the
above equations into the ﬁrst equation and simplify to get
I =
1
u
du
a
=
1
a
1
u
du =
1
a
lnu +C.
Substitute u = ax + b back to arrive at the solution
I =
1
ax +b
dx =
1
a
ln ax +b (6.1)
7. I =
1
b +ax
2
dx =
1
b
1
1 + (a/b)x
2
dx. This can be brought to the form of
an arctan type integral as follows: Let u
2
= (a/b)x
2
, so u =
a/b x and du =
a/b dx. Now substituting these, we get
I =
1
b
1
1 +u
2
du
a/b
=
b/a
1
b
1
1 +u
2
du
I =
1
√
ba
arctan(u) du =
1
√
ba
arctan(
a/b x) +C.
6.3.4 When simple substitution fails
Not every integral can be handled by simple substitution. Let us see what could go wrong:
Example: Substitution that does not work
Consider the case
F(x) =
1 +x
2
dx =
(1 +x
2
)
1/2
dx.
A “reasonable” guess for substitution might be
u = (1 +x
2
).
Then
du = 2x dx,
and dx = du/2x. Attempting to convert the integral to the form containing u would lead
to
I =
√
u
du
2x
.
We have not succeeded in eliminating x entirely, so the expression obtained contains a
mixture of two variables. We can proceed no further. This substitution did not simplify the
integral and we must try some other technique.
116 Chapter 6. Techniques of Integration
6.3.5 Checking your answer
Finding an antiderivative can be tricky. (To a large extent, methods described in this chap
ter are a “collection of tricks”.) However, it is always possible (and wise) to check for
correctness, by differentiating the result. This can help uncover errors.
For example, suppose that (in the previous example) we had incorrectly guessed that
the antiderivative of
(1 +x
2
)
1/2
dx
might be
F
guess
(x) =
1
3/2
(1 +x
2
)
3/2
.
The following check demonstrates the incorrectness of this guess: Differentiate F
guess
(x)
to obtain
F
guess
(x) =
1
3/2
(3/2)(1 +x
2
)
(3/2)−1
· 2x = (1 +x
2
)
1/2
· 2x
The result is clearly not the same as (1 + x
2
)
1/2
, since an “extra” factor of 2x appears
from application of the chain rule: this means that the trial function F
guess
(x) was not the
correct antiderivative. (We can similarly check to conﬁrm correctness of any antiderivative
found by following steps of methods here described. This can help to uncover sign errors
and other algebraic mistakes.)
6.4 More substitutions
In some cases, rearrangement is needed before the form of an integral becomes apparent.
We give some examples in this section. The idea is to reduce each one to the form of an
elementary integral, whose antiderivative is known.
Standard integral forms
1. I =
1
u
du = ln u + C.
2. I =
u
n
du =
u
n+1
n + 1
.
3. I =
1
1 +u
2
du = arctan(u) +C.
However, ﬁnding which of these forms is appropriate in a given case will take some in
genuity and algebra skills. Integration tends to be more of an art than differentiation, and
recognition of patterns plays an important role here.
6.4.1 Example: perfect square in denominator
Find the antiderivative for
I =
1
x
2
−6x + 9
dx.
6.4. More substitutions 117
Solution
We observe that the denominator of the integrand is a perfect square, i.e. that x
2
−6x+9 =
(x −3)
2
. Replacing this in the integral, we obtain
I =
1
x
2
−6x + 9
dx =
1
(x −3)
2
dx.
Now making the substitution u = (x −3), and du = dx leads to a power type integral
I =
1
u
2
du =
u
−2
du = −u
−1
= −
1
(x −3)
+C.
6.4.2 Example: completing the square
A small change in the denominator will change the character of the integral, as shown by
this example:
I =
1
x
2
−6x + 10
dx.
Solution
Here we use “completing the square” to express the denominator in the formx
2
−6x+10 =
(x −3)
2
+ 1. Then the integral takes the form
I =
1
1 + (x −3)
2
dx.
Now a substitution u = (x −3) and du = dx will result in
I =
1
1 +u
2
du = arctan(u) = arctan(x −3) +C.
Remark: in cases where completing the square gives rise to a constant other than 1 in the
denominator, we use the technique illustrated in Example 6.3.3 Eqn. (6.1) to simplify the
problem.
6.4.3 Example: factoring the denominator
A change in one sign can also lead to a drastic change in the antiderivative. Consider
I =
1
1 −x
2
dx.
In this case, we can factor the denominator to obtain
I =
1
(1 −x)(1 +x)
dx.
118 Chapter 6. Techniques of Integration
We will show shortly that the integrand can be simpliﬁed to the sum of two fractions, i.e.
that
I =
1
(1 −x)(1 +x)
dx =
A
(1 −x)
+
B
(1 +x)
dx,
where A, B are constants. The algebraic technique for ﬁnding these constants, and hence of
forming the simpler expressions, called Partial fractions, will be discussed in an upcoming
section. Once these constants are found, each of the resulting integrals can be handled by
substitution.
6.5 Trigonometric substitutions
Trigonometric functions provide a rich set of interconnected functions that show up in
many problems. It is useful to remember three very important trigonometric identities that
help to simplify many integrals. These are:
Essential trigonometric identities
1. sin
2
(x) + cos
2
(x) = 1
2. sin(A +B) = sin(A) cos(B) + sin(B) cos(A)
3. cos(A +B) = cos(A) cos(B) −sin(A) sin(B).
In the special case that A = B = x, the last two identities above lead to:
Double angle trigonometric identities
1. sin(2x) = 2 sin(x) cos(x).
2. cos(2x) = cos
2
(x) −sin
2
(x).
From these, we can generate a variety of other identities as special cases. We list the most
useful below. The ﬁrst two are obtained by combining the doubleangle formula for cosines
with the identity sin
2
(x) + cos
2
(x) = 1.
Useful trigonometric identities
1. cos
2
(x) =
1 + cos(2x)
2
.
2. sin
2
(x) =
1 −cos(2x)
2
.
3. tan
2
(x) + 1 = sec
2
(x).
6.5.1 Example: simple trigonometric substitution
Find the antiderivative of
I =
sin(x) cos
2
(x) dx.
6.5. Trigonometric substitutions 119
Solution
This integral can be computed by a simple substitution, similar to Example 5 of Section 6.3.
We let u = cos(x) and du = −sin(x)dx to get the integral into the form
I = −
u
2
du =
−u
3
3
=
−cos
3
(x)
3
+C.
We need none of the trigonometric identities in this case. Simple substitution is always the
easiest method to use. It should be the ﬁrst method attempted in each case.
6.5.2 Example: using trigonometric identities (1)
Find the antiderivative of
I =
cos
2
(x) dx.
Solution
This is an example in which the “Useful trigonometric identity” 1 leads to a simpler inte
gral. We write
I =
cos
2
(x) dx =
1 + cos(2x)
2
dx =
1
2
(1 + cos(2x)) dx.
Then clearly,
I =
1
2
x +
sin(2x)
2
+C.
6.5.3 Example: using trigonometric identities (2)
Find the antiderivative of
I =
sin
3
(x) dx.
Solution
We can rewrite this integral in the form
I =
sin
2
(x) sin(x) dx.
Now using the trigonometric identity sin
2
(x) + cos
2
(x) = 1, leads to
I =
(1 − cos
2
(x)) sin(x) dx.
This can be split up into
I =
sin(x) dx −
sin(x) cos
2
(x) dx.
120 Chapter 6. Techniques of Integration
The ﬁrst part is elementary, and the second was shown in a previous example. Therefore
we end up with
I = −cos(x) +
cos
3
(x)
3
+C.
Note that it is customary to combine all constants obtained in the calculation into a single
constant, C at the end.
Aside fromintegrals that, themselves, contain trigonometric functions, there are other
cases in which use of trigonometric identities, though at ﬁrst seemingly unrelated, is cru
cial. Many expressions involving the form
√
1 ±x
2
or the related form
√
a ±bx
2
will be
simpliﬁed eventually by conversion to trigonometric expressions!
6.5.4 Example: converting to trigonometric functions
Find the antiderivative of
I =
1 −x
2
dx.
Solution
The simple substitution u = 1 − x
2
will not work, (as shown by a similar example in
Section 6.3). However, converting to trigonometric expressions will do the trick. Let
x = sin(u), then dx = cos(u)du.
(In Figure 6.3, we show this relationship on a triangle. This diagram is useful in reversing
the substitutions after the integration step.) Then 1 − x
2
= 1 −sin
2
(u) = cos
2
(u), so the
x
1
1−x
2
u
Figure 6.3. This triangle helps to convert the (trigonometric) functions of u to the
original variable x in Example 6.5.4.
substitutions lead to
I =
cos
2
(u) cos(u) du =
cos
2
(u) du.
From a previous example, we already know how to handle this integral. We ﬁnd that
I =
1
2
u +
sin(2u)
2
=
1
2
(u + sin(u) cos(u)) +C.
6.5. Trigonometric substitutions 121
(In the last step, we have used the double angle trigonometric identity. We will shortly see
why this simpliﬁcation is relevant.)
We now desire to convert the result back to a function of the original variable, x.
We note that x = sin(u) implies u = arcsin(x). To convert the term cos(u) back to an
expression depending on x we can use the relationship 1 − sin
2
(u) = cos
2
(u), to deduce
that
cos(u) =
1 −sin
2
(u) =
1 −x
2
.
It is sometimes helpful to use a Pythagorean triangle, as shown in Figure 6.3, to
rewrite the antiderivative in terms of the variable x. The idea is this: We construct the
triangle in such a way that its side lengths are related to the “angle” u according to the
substitution rule. In this example, x = sin(u) so the sides labeled x and 1 were chosen so
that their ratio (“opposite over hypotenuse” coincides with the sine of the indicated angle,
u, thereby satisfying x = sin(u). We can then determine the length of the third leg of
the triangle (using the Pythagorean formula) and thus all other trigonometric functions
of u. For example, we note that the ratio of “adjacent over hypotenuse” is cos(u) =
√
1 −x
2
/1 =
√
1 −x
2
. Finally, with these reverse substitutions, we ﬁnd that,
I =
1 −x
2
dx =
1
2
arcsin(x) +x
1 −x
2
+C.
Remark: In computing a deﬁnite integral of the same type, we can circumvent the
need for the conversion back to an expression involving x by using the appropriate method
for handling endpoints. For example, the integral
I =
1
0
1 −x
2
dx
can be transformed to
I =
π/2
0
cos
2
(u) cos(u) du,
by observing that x = sin(u) implies that u = 0 when x = 0 and u = π/2 when x = 1.
Then this means that the integral can be evaluated directly (without changing back to the
variable x) as follows:
I =
π/2
0
cos
2
(u) cos(u) du =
1
2
u +
sin(2u)
2
π/2
0
=
1
2
π
2
+
sin(π)
2
=
π
4
where we have used the fact that sin(π) = 0.
Some subtle points about the domains of deﬁnition of inverse trigonometric functions
will not be discussed here in detail. (See material on these functions in a ﬁrst term calculus
course.) Sufﬁce it to say that some integrals of this type will be undeﬁned if this endpoint
conversion cannot be carried out (e.g. if the interval of integration had been 0 ≤ x ≤ 2,
we would encounter an impossible relation 2 = sin(u). Since no value of u satisﬁes this
relation, such a deﬁnite integral has no meaning, i.e. “does not exist”.)
122 Chapter 6. Techniques of Integration
6.5.5 Example: The centroid of a two dimensional shape
We extend the concept of centroid (center of mass) for a region that has uniform density
in 2D, but where we consider the distribution of mass along the x (or y) axis. Consider
the semicircle shape of uniform thickness, shown in Figure 6.4, and suppose it is balanced
along its horizontal edge. Find the x coordinate ¯ c at which the shape balances.
x
y
y= 9 − x
2
Figure 6.4. A semicircular shape.
Solution
The semicircle is one quarter of a circle of radius 3. Its edge is described by the equation
y = f(x) =
9 −x
2
.
We will assume that the density per unit area is uniform. However, the mass per unit
length along the x axis is not uniform, due to the shape of the object. We apply the idea of
integration: If we cut the shape at increments of ∆x along the x axis, we get a collection
of pieces whose mass is each proportional to f(x)∆x. Summing up such contributions and
letting the widths ∆x →dx get small, we arrive at the integral for mass. The total mass of
the shape is thus
M =
3
0
f(x) dx =
3
0
9 −x
2
dx.
Furthermore, if we compute the integral
I =
3
0
xf(x) dx =
3
0
x
9 −x
2
dx,
we obtain the x coordinate of the center of mass,
¯ x =
I
M
.
It is evident that the mass is proportional to the area of one quarter of a circle of radius 3:
M =
1
4
π(3)
2
=
9
4
π.
6.5. Trigonometric substitutions 123
(We could also see this by performing a trigonometric substitution integral.) The second
integral can be done by simple substitution. Consider
I =
3
0
xf(x) dx =
3
0
x
9 −x
2
dx.
Let u = 9 − x
2
. Then du = −2x dx. The endpoints are converted as follows: x = 0 ⇒
u = 9 −0
2
= 9 and x = 3 ⇒u = 9 −3
2
= 0 so that we get the integral
I =
0
9
√
u
1
−2
du.
We can reverse the endpoints if we switch the sign, and this leads to
I =
1
2
9
0
u
1/2
du =
1
2
u
3/2
3/2
9
0
.
Since 9
3/2
= (9
1/2
)
3
= 3
3
, we get I = (3
3
)/3 = 3
2
= 9. Thus the x coordinate of the
center of mass is
¯ x =
I
M
=
9
(9/4)π
=
4
π
.
We can similarly ﬁnd the y coordinate of the center of mass: To do so, we would express
the boundary of the shape in the formx = f(y) and integrate to ﬁnd
¯ y =
3
0
yf(y) dy.
For the semicircle, y
2
+x
2
= 9, so x = f(y) =
9 −y
2
. Thus
¯ y =
3
0
y
9 −y
2
dy.
This integral looks identical to the one we wrote down for ¯ x. Thus, based on this similarity
(or based on the symmetry of the problem) we will ﬁnd that
¯ y =
4
π
.
6.5.6 Example: tan and sec substitution
Find the antiderivative of
I =
1 +x
2
dx.
Solution
We aim for simpliﬁcation by the identity 1 + tan
2
(u) = sec
2
(u), so we set
x = tan(u), dx = sec
2
(u)du.
124 Chapter 6. Techniques of Integration
Then the substitution leads to
I =
1 + tan
2
(u) sec
2
(u) du =
sec
2
(u) sec
2
(u) du =
sec
3
(u) du.
This integral will require further work, and will be partly calculated by Integration by Parts
in Appendix 11.5. In this example, the triangle shown in Figure 6.5 shows the relationship
between x and u and will help to convert other trigonometric functions of u to functions of
x.
x
u
1+x
2
1
Figure 6.5. As in Figure 6.3 but for example 6.5.6.
6.6 Partial fractions
In this section, we show a simple algebraic trick that helps to simplify an integrand when
it is in the form of some rational function such as
f(x) =
1
(ax +b)(cx +d)
.
The idea is to break this up into simpler rational expressions by ﬁnding constants A, B
such that
1
(ax + b)(cx +d)
=
A
(ax +b)
+
B
(cx +d)
.
Each part can then be handled by a simple substitution, as shown in Example 6.3.3, Eqn. (6.1).
We give several examples below.
6.6.1 Example: partial fractions (1)
Find the antiderivative of
I =
1
x
2
−1
.
Factoring the denominator, x
2
− 1 = (x − 1)(x + 1), suggests breaking up the integrand
into the form
1
x
2
−1
=
A
(x + 1)
+
B
(x −1)
.
6.6. Partial fractions 125
The two sides are equal provided:
1
x
2
−1
=
A(x −1) +B(x + 1)
x
2
−1
.
This means that
1 = A(x −1) +B(x + 1)
must be true for all x values. We now ask what values of A and B make this equation hold
for any x. Choosing two “easy” values, namely x = 1 and x = −1 leads to isolating one
or the other unknown constants, A, B, with the results:
1 = −2A, 1 = 2B.
Thus B = 1/2, A = −1/2, so the integral can be written in the simpler form
I =
1
2
−1
(x + 1)
dx +
1
(x −1)
dx
.
(A common factor of (1/2) has been taken out.) Now a simple substitution will work for
each component. (Let u = x + 1 for the ﬁrst, and u = x −1 for the second integral.) The
result is
I =
1
x
2
−1
=
1
2
(−lnx + 1 + ln x −1) +C.
6.6.2 Example: partial fractions (2)
Find the antiderivative of
I =
1
x(1 −x)
dx.
This example is similar to the previous one. We set
1
x(1 −x)
=
A
x
+
B
(1 −x)
.
Then
1 = A(1 −x) +Bx.
This must hold for all x values. In particular, convenient values of x for determining the
constants are x = 0, 1. We ﬁnd that
A = 1, B = 1.
Thus
I =
1
x(1 −x)
dx =
1
x
dx +
1
1 −x
dx.
Simple substitution now gives
I = ln x −ln 1 −x +C.
126 Chapter 6. Techniques of Integration
6.6.3 Example: partial fractions (3)
Find the antiderivative of
I =
x
x
2
+x −2
.
The rational expression above factors into x
2
+ x − 2 = (x − 1)(x + 2), leading to the
expression
x
x
2
+x −2
=
A
(x −1)
+
B
(x + 2)
.
Consequently, it follows that
A(x + 2) +B(x −1) = x.
Substituting the values x = 1, −2 into this leads to A = 1/3 and B = 2/3. The usual
procedure then results in
I =
x
x
2
+x −2
=
1
3
ln x −1 +
2
3
ln x + 2 +C.
Another example of the technique of partial fractions is provided in Appendix 11.5.2.
6.7 Integration by parts
The method described in this section is important as an additional tool for integration. It
also has independent theoretical stature in many applications in mathematics and physics.
The essential idea is that in some cases, we can exchange the task of integrating a function
with the job of differentiating it.
The idea rests on the product rule for derivatives. Suppose that u(x) and v(x) are
two differentiable functions. Then we know that the derivative of their product is
d(uv)
dx
= v
du
dx
+u
dv
dx
,
or, in the differential notation:
d(uv) = v du +u dv,
Integrating both sides, we obtain
d(uv) =
v du +
u dv
i.e.
uv =
v du +
u dv.
We write this result in the more suggestive form
u dv = uv −
v du.
The idea here is that if we have difﬁculty evaluating an integral such as
u dv, we may be
able to “exchange it” for a simpler integral in the form
v du. This is best illustrated by
the examples below.
6.7. Integration by parts 127
Example: Integration by parts (1)
Compute
I =
2
1
ln(x) dx.
Solution
Let u = ln(x) and dv = dx. Then du = (1/x) dx and v = x.
ln(x) dx = xln(x) −
x(1/x) dx = xln(x) −
dx = xln(x) −x.
We now evaluate this result at the endpoints to obtain
I =
2
1
ln(x) dx = (xln(x) − x)
2
1
= (2 ln(2) −2) −(1 ln(1) −1) = 2 ln(2) −1.
(Where we used the fact that ln(1) = 0.)
Example: Integration by parts (2)
Compute
I =
1
0
xe
x
dx.
Solution
At ﬁrst, it may be hard to decide how to assign roles for u and dv. Suppose we try u = e
x
and dv = xdx. Then du = e
x
dx and v = x
2
/2. This means that we would get the integral
in the form
I =
x
2
2
e
x
−
x
2
2
e
x
dx.
This is certainly not a simpliﬁcation, because the integral we obtain has a higher power of
x, and is consequently harder, not easier to integrate. This suggests that our ﬁrst attempt
was not a helpful one. (Note that integration often requires trial and error.)
Let u = x and dv = e
x
dx. This is a wiser choice because when we differentiate u,
we reduce the power of x (from 1 to 0), and get a simpler expression. Indeed, du = dx,
v = e
x
so that
xe
x
dx = xe
x
−
e
x
dx = xe
x
−e
x
+C.
To ﬁnd a deﬁnite integral of this kind on some interval (say 0 ≤ x ≤ 1), we compute
I =
1
0
xe
x
dx = (xe
x
−e
x
)
1
0
= (1e
1
−e
1
) −(0e
0
−e
0
) = 0 +e
0
= e
0
= 1.
Note that all parts of the expression are evaluated at the two endpoints.
128 Chapter 6. Techniques of Integration
Example: Integration by parts (2b)
Compute
I
n
=
x
n
e
x
dx.
Solution
We can calculate this integral by repeated application of the idea in the previous example.
Letting u = x
n
and dv = e
x
dx leads to du = nx
n−1
and v = e
x
. Then
I
n
= x
n
e
x
−
nx
n−1
e
x
dx = x
n
e
x
−n
x
n−1
e
x
dx.
Each application of integration by parts, reduces the power of the termx
n
inside an integral
by one. The calculation is repeated until the very last integral has been simpliﬁed, with
no remaining powers of x. This illustrates that in some problems, integration by parts is
needed more than once.
Example: Integration by parts (3)
Compute
I =
arctan(x) dx.
Solution
Let u = arctan(x) and dv = dx. Then du = (1/(1 +x
2
)) dx and v = x so that
I = xarctan(x) −
1
1 +x
2
x dx.
The last integral can be done with the simple substitution w = (1 +x
2
) and dw = 2x dx,
giving
I = xarctan(x) −(1/2)
(1/w)dw.
We obtain, as a result
I = xarctan(x) −
1
2
ln(1 +x
2
).
Example: Integration by parts (3b)
Compute
I =
tan(x) dx.
6.7. Integration by parts 129
Solution
We might try to ﬁt this into a similar pattern, i.e. let u = tan(x) and dv = dx. Then
du = sec
2
(x) dx and v = x, so we obtain
I = xtan(x) −
xsec
2
(x) dx.
This is not really a simpliﬁcation, and we see that integration by parts will not necessarily
work, even on a seemingly related example. However, we might instead try to rewrite the
integral in the form
I =
tan(x) dx =
sin(x)
cos(x)
dx.
Now we ﬁnd that a simple substitution will do the trick, i.e. that w = cos(x) and dw =
−sin(x) dx will convert the integral into the form
I =
1
w
(−dw) = −lnw = −ln cos(x).
This example illustrates that we should always try substitution, ﬁrst, before attempting
other methods.
Example: Integration by parts (4)
Compute
I
1
=
e
x
sin(x) dx.
We refer to this integral as I
1
because a related second integral, that we’ll call I
2
will appear
in the calculation.
Solution
Let u = e
x
and dv = sin(x) dx. Then du = e
x
dx and v = −cos(x) dx. Therefore
I
1
= −e
x
cos(x) −
(−cos(x))e
x
dx = −e
x
cos(x) +
cos(x)e
x
dx.
We now have another integral of a similar form to tackle. This seems hopeless, as we
have not simpliﬁed the result, but let us not give up! In this case, another application of
integration by parts will do the trick. Call I
2
the integral
I
2
=
cos(x)e
x
dx,
so that
I
1
= −e
x
cos(x) +I
2
.
Repeat the same procedure for the new integral I
2
, i.e. Let u = e
x
and dv = cos(x) dx.
Then du = e
x
dx and v = sin(x) dx. Thus
I
2
= e
x
sin(x) −
sin(x)e
x
dx = e
x
sin(x) −I
1
.
130 Chapter 6. Techniques of Integration
This appears to be a circular argument, but in fact, it has a purpose. We have determined
that the following relationships are satisﬁed by the above two integrals:
I
1
= −e
x
cos(x) +I
2
I
2
= e
x
sin(x) −I
1
.
We can eliminate I
2
, obtaining
I
1
= −e
x
cos(x) +I
2
= −e
x
cos(x) +e
x
sin(x) −I
1
.
that is,
I
1
= −e
x
cos(x) +e
x
sin(x) −I
1
.
Rearranging (taking I
1
to the left hand side) leads to
2I
1
= −e
x
cos(x) +e
x
sin(x),
and thus, the desired integral has been found to be
I
1
=
e
x
sin(x) dx =
1
2
(−e
x
cos(x) +e
x
sin(x)) =
1
2
e
x
(sin(x) −cos(x)) +C.
(At this last step, we have included the constant of integration.) Moreover, we have also
found that I
2
is related, i.e. using I
2
= e
x
sin(x) −I
1
we now know that
I
2
=
cos(x)e
x
dx =
1
2
e
x
(sin(x) + cos(x)) +C.
6.8 Summary
In this chapter, we explored a number of techniques for computing antiderivatives. We here
summarize the most important results:
1. Substitution is the ﬁrst method to consider. This method works provided the change
of variable results in elimination of the original variable and leads to a simpler, more
elementary integral.
2. When using substitution on a deﬁnite integral, endpoints can be converted to the
new variable (Method 1) or the resulting antiderivative can be converted back to its
original variable before plugging in the (original) endpoints (Method 2).
3. The integration by parts formula for functions u(x), v(x) is
u dv = uv −
v du.
Integration by parts is useful when u is easy to differentiate (but not easy to integrate).
It is also helpful when the integral contains a product of elementary functions such
as x
n
and a trigonometric or an exponential function. Sometimes more than one
application of this method is needed. Other times, this method is combined with
substitution or other simpliﬁcations.
6.8. Summary 131
4. Using integration by parts on a deﬁnite integral means that both parts of the formula
are to be evaluated at the endpoints.
5. Integrals involving
√
1 ±x
2
can be simpliﬁed by making a trigonometric substitu
tion.
6. Integrals with products or powers of trigonometric functions can sometimes be sim
pliﬁed by application of trigonometric identities or simple substitution.
7. Algebraic tricks, and many associated manipulations are often applied to twist and
turn a complicated integral into a set of simpler expressions that can each be handled
more easily.
8. Even with all these techniques, the problem of ﬁnding an antiderivative can be very
complicated. In some cases, we resort to handbooks of integrals, use symbolic ma
nipulation software packages, or, if none of these work, calculate a given deﬁnite
integral numerically using a spreadsheet.
Table of elementary antiderivatives
1.
1
u
du = ln u +C.
2.
u
n
du =
u
n+1
n + 1
+C
3.
1
1 +u
2
= arctan(u) +C
4.
1
√
1 −x
2
= arcsin(u) +C
5.
sin(u) du = −cos(u) +C
6.
cos(u) du = sin(u) +C
7.
sec
2
(u) du = tan(u) +C
Additional useful antiderivatives
1.
tan(u) du = ln  sec(u) +C.
2.
cot(u) du = ln  sin(u) +C
3.
sec(u) = ln sec(u) + tan(u) +C
132 Chapter 6. Techniques of Integration
Chapter 7
Discrete probability and
the laws of chance
7.1 Introduction
In this chapter we lay the groundwork for calculations and rules governing simple discrete
probabilities
24
. Such skills are essential in understanding problems related to random pro
cesses of all sorts. In biology, there are many examples of such processes, including the
inheritance of genes and genetic diseases, the random motion of cells, the ﬂuctuations in
the number of RNA molecules in a cell, and a vast array of other phenomena.
To gain experience with probability, it is important to see simple examples. In this
chapter, we discuss experiments that can be easily reproduced and tested by the reader.
7.2 Dealing with data
Scientists studying phenomena in the real world, collect data of all kinds, some resulting
from experimental measurement or ﬁeld observations. Data sets can be large and complex.
If an experiment is repeated, and comparisons are to be made between multiple data sets,
it is unrealistic to compare each and every numerical value. Some shortcuts allow us to
summarize trends or descriptions of data sets in simple values such as averages (means),
medians, and similar quantities. In doing so we lose the detailed information that the data
set contains, in favor of simplicity of one or several “simple” numerical descriptors such
as the mean and the median of a distribution. We have seen related ideas in Chapter 5
in the context of mass distributions. The idea of a center of mass is closely related to that
of the mean of a distribution. Here we revisit such ideas in the context of probability. An
additional example of real data is described in Appendix 11.6. There, we show how grade
distributions on a test can be analyzed by similar methods.
24
I am grateful to Robert Israel for comments regarding the organization of this chapter
133
134 Chapter 7. Discrete probability and the laws of chance
7.3 Simple experiments
7.3.1 Experiment
We will consider “experiments” such as tossing a coin, rolling a die, dealing cards, applying
treatment to sick patients, and recording how many are cured. In order for the ideas of
probability to apply, we should be able to repeat the experiment as many times as desired
under exactly the same conditions. The number of repetitions will often be denoted N.
7.3.2 Outcome
Whenever we perform the experiment, exactly one outcome happens. In this chapter we
will deal with discrete probability, where there is a ﬁnite list of possible outcomes.
Consider the following experiment: We toss a coin and see how it lands. Here there
are only two possible results: “heads” (H) or “tails” (T). A fair coin is one for which these
results are equally likely. This means that if we repeat this experiment many many times,
we expect that on average, we get H roughly 50% of the time and T roughly 50% of the
time. This will lead us to deﬁne a probability of 1/2 for each outcome.
Similarly, consider the experiment of rolling a dice: A sixsided die can land on any
of its six faces, so that a “single experiment” has six possible outcomes. For a fair die, we
anticipate getting each of the results with an equal probability, i.e. if we were to repeat
the same experiment many many times, we would expect that, on average, the six possible
events would occur with similar frequencies, each 1/6 of the times. We say that the events
are random and unbiased for “fair” dice.
We will often be interested in more complex experiments. For example, if we toss a
coin ﬁve times, an outcome corresponds to a ﬁveletter sequence of “Heads” (H) and “Tails”
(T), such as THTHH. We are interested in understanding how to quantify the probability
of each such outcome in fair (as well as unfair) coins. If we toss a coin ten times, how
probable is it that we get eight out of ten heads? For dice, we could ask how likely are
we to roll a 5 and a 6 in successive experiments? A 5 or a 6? For such experiments we
are interested in quantifying how likely it is that a certain event is obtained. Our goal in
this chapter is to make more precise our notion of probability, and to examine ways of
quantifying and computing probabilities. To motivate this investigation, we ﬁrst look at
results of a real experiment performed in class by students.
7.3.3 Empirical probability
We can arrive at a notion of probability by actually repeating a real experiment N times,
and counting how many times each outcome happens. Let us use the notation x
i
to refer to
the number of times that outcome i was obtained. An example of this sort is illustrated in
Section 7.4.1. We deﬁne the empirical probability p
i
of outcome i to be
p
i
= x
i
/N,
i.e p
i
is the fraction of times that the result i is obtained out of all the experiments. We ex
pect that if we repeated the experiment many more times, this empirical probability would
7.3. Simple experiments 135
approach, as a limit, the actual probability of the outcome. So if in a cointossing experi
ment, repeated 1000 times, the outcome HHTHH is obtained 25 times, then we would say
that the empirical probability p
HHTHH
is 25/1000.
7.3.4 Theoretical Probability
For theoretical probability, we make some reasonable basic assumptions on which we base
a calculation of the probabilities. For example, in the case of a “fair coin”, we can argue by
symmetry that every sequence of n heads and tails has the same probability as any other.
We then use two fundamental rules of probability to calculate the probability as illustrated
below.
Rules of probability
1. In discrete probability, 0 ≤ p
i
≤ 1 for each outcome i.
2. For discrete probability
¸
i
p
i
= 1, where the sum is over all possible outcomes.
About Rule 1: p
i
= 0 implies that the given outcome never happens, whereas p
i
= 1
implies that this outcome is the only possibility (and always happens). Any value inside
the range (0,1) means that the outcome occurs some of the time. Rule 2 makes intuitive
sense: it means that we have accounted for all possibilities, i.e. the fractions corresponding
to all of the outcomes add up to 100% of the results.
In a case where there are M possible outcomes, all with equal probability, it follows
that p
i
= 1/M for every i.
7.3.5 Random variables and probability distributions
A random variable is a numerical quantity X that depends on the outcome of an exper
iment. For example, suppose we toss a coin n times, and let X be the number of heads
that appear. If, say, we toss the coin n = 4 times, then the number of heads, X could take
on any of the values {x
i
} = {0, 1, 2, 3, 4} (i.e., no heads, one head, . . . four heads). In the
case of discrete probability there are a discrete number of possible values for the random
variable to take on.
We will be interested in the probability distribution of X. In general if the possible
values x
i
are listed in increasing order for i = 0, ..., n, we would like to characterize their
probabilities p(x
i
), where p(x
i
) =Prob(X = x
i
)
25
.
Even though p(x
i
) is a discrete quantity taking on one of a discrete set of values,
we should still think of this mathematical object as a function: it associates a number
(the probability) p with each allowable value of the random variable x
i
for i = 0, . . . , n.
In what follows, we will be interested in characterizing such function, termed probability
distributions and their properties.
25
Read: p(x
i
) is the probability that the random variable X takes on the value x
i
136 Chapter 7. Discrete probability and the laws of chance
7.3.6 The cumulative distribution
Given a probability distribution, we can also deﬁne a cumulative function as follows:
The cumulative function corresponding to the probability distribution p(x
i
) is deﬁned as
F(x
i
) = Prob(X ≤ x
i
).
For a given numerical outcome x
i
, the value of F(x
i
) is hence
F(x
i
) =
i
¸
j=0
p(x
j
).
The function F merely sums up all the probabilities of outcomes up to and including x
i
,
hence is called “cumulative”. This implies that F(x
n
) = 1 where x
n
is the largest value
attainable by the randomvariable. For example, in the rolling of a die, if we list the possible
outcomes in ascending order as {1, 2, . . . , 6}, then F(6) stands for the probability of rolling
a 6 or any lower value, which is clearly equal to 1 for a sixsided die.
7.4 Examples of experimental data
7.4.1 Example1: Tossing a coin
We illustrate ideas with an example of real data obtained by repeating an “experiment”
many times. The experiment, actually carried out by each of 121 students in this calcu
lus course, consisted of tossing a coin n = 10 times and recording the number, x
i
, of
“Heads” that came up. Each student recorded one of eleven possible outcomes, x
i
=
{0, 1, 2, . . . , 10} (i.e. no heads, one, two, etc, up to ten heads out of the ten tosses). By
pooling together such data, we implicitly assume that all coins and all tossers are more
or less identical and unbiased, so the “experiment” has N = 121 replicates (one for each
student). Table 7.1 shows the result of this experiment. Here n
i
is the number of students
who got x
i
heads. We refer to this as the frequency of the given result. Also, so n
i
/N is
the fraction of experiments that led to the given result, and we deﬁne the empirical proba
bility assigned to x
i
as this fraction, that is p(x
i
) = n
i
/N. In column (3) we display the
cumulative number of students who got any number up to and including x
i
heads, and then
in column (5) we compute the cumulative (empirical) probability F(x
i
).
In Figure 7.1 we show what this distribution looks like on a bar graph. The horizontal
axis is x
i
, the number of heads obtained, and the vertical axis is p(x
i
). Because in this
example, only discrete integer values (0, 1, 2, etc) can be obtained in the experiment,
it makes sense to represent the data as discrete points, as shown on the bottom panel in
Fig. 7.1. We also show the cumulative function F(x
i
), superimposed as an xyplot on a
graph of p(x
i
). Observe that F starts with the value 0 and climbs up to value 1, since the
probabilities of any of the events (0, 1, 2, etc heads) must add up to 1.
7.5. Mean and variance of a probability distribution 137
Number frequency cumulative empirical cumulative
of heads (number of students) number probability function
x
i
n
i
i
¸
0
n
j
p(x
i
) = n
i
/N F(x
i
) =
i
¸
0
p(x
j
)
0 0 0 0.00 0.00
1 1 1 0.0083 0.0083
2 2 3 0.0165 0.0248
3 10 13 0.0826 0.1074
4 27 40 0.2231 0.3306
5 26 66 0.2149 0.5455
6 34 100 0.2810 0.8264
7 14 114 0.1157 0.9421
8 7 121 0.0579 1.00
9 0 121 0.00 1.00
10 0 121 0.00 1.00
Table 7.1. Results of a real cointossing experiment carried out by 121 students
in this mathematics course. Each student tossed a coin 10 times. We recorded the “fre
quency”, i.e. the number of students n
i
who each got x
i
= 0, 1, 2, . . . , 10 heads. The
fraction of the class that got each outcome, n
i
/N, is identiﬁed with the (empirical) prob
ability of that outcome, p(x
i
). We also compute the cumulative function F(x
i
) in the last
column. See Figure 7.1 for the same data presented graphically.
7.4.2 Example 2: grade distributions
Another example of real data is provided in Appendix 11.6. There we discuss distributions
of grades on a test. Many of the ideas described here apply in the same way. For space
constraints, that example is provided in an Appendix, rather than here.
7.5 Mean and variance of a probability distribution
We next discuss some very important quantities related to the randomvariable. Such quan
tities provide numerical descriptions of the average value of the random variable and the
ﬂuctuations about that average. We deﬁne each of these as follows:
The mean (or average or expected value), ¯ x of a probability distribution is
¯ x =
n
¸
i=0
x
i
p(x
i
) .
The expected value is a kind of “average value of x”, where values of x are weighted
by their frequency of occurrence. This idea is related to the concept of center of mass
deﬁned in Section 5.3.1 (x positions weighted by masses associated with those positions).
138 Chapter 7. Discrete probability and the laws of chance
number of heads (i)
empirical probability of i heads in 10 tosses
0.0 10.0
0.0
0.4
Cumulative function
number of heads (i) 0.0 10.0
0.0
1.0
Figure 7.1. The data from Table 7.1 is shown plotted on this graph. A total of
N = 121 people were asked to toss a coin n = 10 times. In the bar graph (left), the
horizontal axis reﬂects i, the number, of heads (H) that came up during those 10 coin
tosses. The vertical axis reﬂects the fraction p(x
i
) of the class that achieved that particular
number of heads. In the lower graph, the same data is shown by the discrete points. We
also show the cumulative function that sums up the values from left to right. Note that the
cumulative function is a “step function” .
The mean is a point on the x axis, representing the “average” outcome of an experiment.
(Recall that in the distributions we are describing, the possible outcomes of some observa
tion or measurement process are depicted on the x axis of the graph.) The mean is not the
same as the average value of a function, discussed in Section 4.6. (In that case, the average
is an average y coordinate, or average height of the function.)
26
We also deﬁne quantities that represents the width of the distribution. We deﬁne the
variance, V and standard deviation, σ as follows:
The variance, V , of a distribution is
V =
n
¸
i=0
(x
i
− ¯ x)
2
p(x
i
).
where ¯ x is the mean. The standard deviation, σ is
σ =
√
V .
The variance is related to the square of the quantity represented on the x axis, and since
the standard deviation its square root, σ carries the same units as x. For this reason, it is
26
Note to the instructor: students often mix these two distinct meanings of the word average, and they should
be helped to overcome this difﬁculty with terminology.
7.5. Mean and variance of a probability distribution 139
common to associate the value of σ, with a typical “width” of the distribution. Having a
low value of σ means that most of the experimental results are close to the mean, whereas
a large σ signiﬁes that there is a large scatter of experimental values about the mean.
In the problem sets, we show that the variance can also be expressed in the form
V = M
2
− ¯ x
2
,
where M
2
is the second moment of the distribution. Moments of a distribution are deﬁned
as the values obtained by summing up products of the probability weighted by powers of
x.
The j’th moment, M
j
of a distribution is
M
j
=
n
¸
i=0
(x
i
)
j
p(x
i
).
Example 7.1 (Rolling a die) Suppose you toss a die, and let the random variable be X be
the number obtained on the die, i.e. (1 to 6). If this die is fair, then it is equally likely to get
any of the six possible outcomes, so each has probability 1/6. In this case
x
i
= i, i = 1, 2 . . . 6 p(x
i
) = 1/6.
We calculate the various quantities as follows: The mean is
¯ x =
6
¸
i=1
i ·
1
6
=
1
6
·
6 · 7
2
=
7
2
= 3.5.
The second moment, M
2
is
M
2
=
6
¸
i=1
i
2
·
1
6
=
1
6
·
6 · 7 · 13
6
=
91
6
.
We can now obtain the variance,
V =
91
6
−
7
2
2
=
35
12
,
and the standard deviation,
σ =
35/12 ≈ 1.7078.
Example 7.2 (Expected number of heads (empirical)) For the empirical probability dis
tribution shown in Figure 7.1, the mean (expected value) is calculated from results in Ta
ble 7.1 as follows:
¯ x =
10
¸
k=0
x
i
p(x
i
) = 0(0)+1(0.0083)+2(0.0165)+. . .+8(0.0579)+9(0)+10(0) = 5.2149
140 Chapter 7. Discrete probability and the laws of chance
Thus, the mean number of heads in this set of experiments is about 5.2. This is close to
what we would expect intuitively in a fair coin, namely that, on average, 5 out of 10 tosses
(i.e. 50%) would result in heads. To compute the variance we form the sum
V =
10
¸
k=0
(x
k
− ¯ x)
2
p(x
k
) =
10
¸
k=0
(k −5.2149)
2
p(k).
Here we have used the mean calculated above and the fact that x
k
= k. We obtain
V = (0 −5.2149)
2
(0) + (1 −5.2149)
2
(0.0083) +. . . + (7 −5.2149)
2
(0.1157)
+ (8 −5.2149)
2
(0.0579) + (9 −5.2149)
2
(0) + (10 −5.2149)
2
(0) = 2.053
(Because there was no replicate of the experiment that led to 9 or 10 heads out of 10
tosses, these values do not contribute to the calculation.) The standard deviation is then
σ =
√
V = 1.4328.
7.6 Bernoulli trials
A Bernoulli trial is an experiment in which there are two possible outcomes. A typical
example, motivated previously, is tossing a coin (the outcome being H or T). Traditionally,
we refer to one of the outcomes of a Bernoulli trial as ”success” S and the other ”failure”
27
,
F.
Let p be the probability of success and q = 1 − p the probability of failure in a
Bernoulli trial. We now consider how to calculate the probability of some number of
“successes” in a set of repetitions of a Bernoulli trial. In short, we are interested in the
probability of tossing some number of Heads in n coin tosses.
7.6.1 The Binomial distribution
Suppose we repeat a Bernoulli trial n times; we will assume that each trial is identical and
independent of the others. This implies that the probability p of success and q of failure
is the same in each trial. Let X be the number of successes. Then X is said to have a
Binomial distribution with parameters n and p.
Let us consider how to calculate the probability distribution of X, i.e. the probability
that X = k where k is some number of successes between none (k = 0) and all (k = n).
Recall that the notation for this probability is Prob(X = k) for k = 0, 1, . . . , n. Also note
that
X = k means that in the n trials there are k successes and n − k failures. Consider
the following example for the case of n = 3, where we list all possible outcomes and their
probabilities:
In constructing Table 7.2, we use a multiplication principle applied to computing
the probability of a compound experiment. We state this, together with a useful addition
principle below.
27
For example “Heads you win, Tails you lose”.
7.6. Bernoulli trials 141
Result probability number of heads
SSS p
3
X = 3
SSF p
2
q X = 2
SFS p
2
q X = 2
SFF pq
2
X = 1
FSS p
2
q X = 2
FSF pq
2
X = 1
FFS pq
2
X = 1
FFF q
3
X = 0
Table 7.2. A list of all possible results of three repetitions ( n = 3) of a Bernoulli
trial. S=“success” and F=“failure. (Substituting H for S, and T for F gives the same
results for a coin tossing experiment repeated 3 times).
Multiplication principle: if e
1
, . . . , e
k
are independent events, then
Prob(e
1
and e
2
and . . . e
k
) = Prob(e
1
)Prob(e
2
) . . . Prob(e
k
)
Addition principle: if e
1
, ..., e
k
are mutually exclusive events, then
Prob(e
1
or e
2
or . . . e
k
) = Prob(e
1
) + Prob(e
2
) +. . . + Prob(e
k
).
Based on the results in Table 7.2 and on the two principles outline above, we can compute
the probability of obtaining 0, 1, 2, or 3 successes out of 3 trials. The results are shown
in Table 7.3. In constructing Table 7.3, we have considered all the ways of obtaining 0
Probability of X heads
Prob(X = 0) = q
3
Prob(X = 1) = 3pq
2
Prob(X = 2) = 3p
2
q
Prob(X = 3) = p
3
Table 7.3. The probability of obtaining X successes out of 3 Bernoulli trials,
based on results in Table 7.2 and the addition principle of probability.
successes (there is only one such way, namely SSS, and its probability is p
3
), all the ways
of obtaining only one success (here we must allow for SFF, FSF, FFS, each having the
same probability pq
2
) etc. Since these results are mutually exclusive (only one such result
is possible for any given replicate of the 3trial experiment), the addition principle is used
to compute the probability Prob(SFF or FSF or FFS).
142 Chapter 7. Discrete probability and the laws of chance
In general, for each replicate of an experiment consisting of n Bernoulli trials, the
probability of an outcome that has k successes and n − k failures (in some speciﬁc order)
is p
k
q
(n−k)
. To get the total probability of X = k, we need to count how many possible
outcomes consist of k successes and n − k failures. As illustrated by the above example,
there are, in general, many such ways, since the order in which S and F appear can differ
from one outcome to another. In mathematical terminology, there can be many permuta
tions (i.e. arrangements of the order) of S and F that have the same number of successes
in total. (See Section 11.8 for a review.) In fact, the number of ways that n trials can lead
to k successes is C(n, k), the binomial coefﬁcient, which is, by deﬁnition, the number of
ways of choosing k objects out of a collection of n objects. That binomial coefﬁcient is
C(n, k) = (n choose k) =
n!
(n −k)!k!
.
(See Section 11.7 for the deﬁnition of factorial notation “!” used here.) We have arrived at
the following result for n Bernoulli trials:
The probability of k successes in n Bernoulli trials is
Prob(X = k) = C(n, k)p
k
q
n−k
.
In the above example, with n = 3, we ﬁnd that
Prob(X = 2) = C(3, 2)p
2
q = 3p
2
q.
7.6.2 The Binomial theorem
The name binomial coefﬁcient comes from the binomial theorem: which accounts for the
expression obtained by expanding a binomial.
(a +b)
n
=
n
¸
k=0
C(n, k)a
k
b
n−k
.
Let us consider a few examples. A familiar example is
(a +b)
2
= (a +b) · (a +b) = a
2
+ab +ba +b
2
= a
2
+ 2ab +b
2
.
The coefﬁcients C(2, 2) = 1, C(2, 1) = 2, and C(2, 0) = 1 appear in front of the three
terms, representing, respectively, the number of ways of choosing 2 a’s, 1 a, and no a’s out
of the n factors of (a + b). [Respectively, these account for the terms a
2
, ab and b
2
in the
resulting expansion.] Similarly, the product of three terms is
(a +b)
3
= (a +b) · (a +b) · (a +b) = (a +b)
3
= a
3
+ 3a
2
b + 3ab
2
+b
3
whereby coefﬁcients are of the form C(3, k) for k = 3, 2, 1, 0. More generally, an expan
sion of n terms leads to
(a +b)
n
= a
n
+C(n, 1)a
n−1
b +C(n, 2)a
n−2
b
2
+. . . +C(n, k)a
k
b
n−k
+. . . +C(n, n −2)a
2
b
n−2
+C(n, n −1)ab
n−1
+b
n
=
n
¸
k=0
C(n, k)a
k
b
n−k
7.6. Bernoulli trials 143
1
1 1
1 2 1
1 3 3 1
1 4 6 4 1
1 5 10 10 5 1
Table 7.4. Pascal’s triangle contains the binomial coefﬁcients of the C(n, k).
Each term in Pascal’s triangle is obtained by adding the two diagonally above it. The top
of the triangle represents C(0, 0). The next row represents C(1, 0) and C(1, 1). For row
number n, terms along the row are the binomial coefﬁcients C(n, k), starting with k = 0
at the beginning of the row and and going to k = n at the end of the row.
The binomial coefﬁcients are symmetric, so that C(n, k) = C(n, n −k). They are entries
that occur in Pascal’s triangle, shown in Table 7.4.
7.6.3 The binomial distribution
The binomial distribution
p=1/2 q=1/2
0.5 10.5
0.0
0.4
The binomial distribution
p=1/4 q=3/4
0.5 10.5
0.0
0.4
Figure 7.2. The binomial distribution is shown here for n = 10. We have plotted
Prob(X = k) versus k for k = 0, 1, . . . 10. This distribution is the same as the probability
of getting X heads out of 10 coin tosses for a fair coin. In the ﬁrst panel, the probability
of success and failure are the same, i.e. p = q = 0.5. The distribution is then symmetric.
In the second panel, the probability of success is p = 1/4, so q = 3/4 and the resulting
distribution is skewed.
What does the binomial theorem say about the binomial distribution? First, since
there are only two possible outcomes in each Bernoulli trial, it follows that
p +q = 1, and hence (p +q)
n
= 1.
144 Chapter 7. Discrete probability and the laws of chance
Using the binomial theorem, we can expand the latter to obtain
(p +q)
n
=
n
¸
k=0
C(n, k)p
k
q
n−k
=
n
¸
k=0
Prob(X = k) = 1.
That is, the sum of these terms represents the sum of probabilities of obtaining k =
0, 1, . . . , n successes. (And since this accounts for all possibilities, it follows that the sum
adds up to 1.)
We can compute the mean and variance of the binomial distribution using the follow
ing tricks. We will write out an expansion for a product of the form (px +q)
n
. Here x will
be an abstract quantity introduced for convenience (i.e., for making the trick work):
(px + q)
n
=
n
¸
k=0
C(n, k)(px)
k
q
n−k
=
n
¸
k=0
C(n, k)p
k
q
n−k
x
k
.
Taking the derivative of the above with respect to x leads to:
n(px +q)
n−1
· p =
n
¸
k=0
C(n, k)p
k
q
n−k
kx
k−1
,
which, (plugging in x = 1) implies that
np =
n
¸
k=0
k · C(n, k)p
k
q
n−k
=
n
¸
k=0
k · Prob(X = k) =
¯
X. (7.1)
Thus, we have found that
The mean of the binomial distribution is
¯
X = np where n is the number of trials and p is
the probability of success in one trial.
We continue to compute other quantities of interest. Multiply both sides of Eqn. 7.1
by x to obtain
nx(px +q)
n−1
p =
n
¸
k=0
C(n, k)p
k
q
n−k
kx
k
.
Take the derivative again. The result is
n(px +q)
n−1
p + n(n −1)x(px +q)
n−2
p
2
=
n
¸
k=0
C(n, k)p
k
q
n−k
k
2
x
k−1
.
Plug in x = 1 to get
np +n(n −1)p
2
=
n
¸
k=0
k
2
C(n, k)p
k
q
n−k
= M
2
.
Thereby we have calculated the second moment of the distribution, the variance, and the
standard deviation. In summary, we found the following results:
7.6. Bernoulli trials 145
The second moment M
2
, the Variance V and the standard deviation σ of a binomial distri
bution are
M
2
= np +n
2
p
2
−np
2
,
V = M
2
−
¯
X
2
= np −np
2
= np(1 −p) = npq,
σ =
√
npq.
7.6.4 The normalized binomial distribution
We can “normalize” (i.e. rescale) the binomial random variable so that it has a convenient
mean and width. To do so, deﬁne the new random variable
˜
X to be:
˜
X = X −
¯
X. Then
˜
X
has mean 0 and standard deviation σ. Now deﬁne
Z =
(X −
¯
X)
σ
Then Z has mean 0 and standard deviation 1. In the limit as n → ∞, we can approximate
Z with a continuous distribution, called the standard normal distribution.
The Normal distribution
4.0 4.0
0.0
0.4
Figure 7.3. The Normal (or Gaussian) distribution is given by equation (7.2) and
has the distribution shown in this ﬁgure.
As the number of Bernoulli trials grows, i.e. as we toss our imaginary coin in longer
and longer sets (n → ∞), a remarkable thing happens to the binomial distribution: it
becomes smoother and smoother, until it grows to resemble a continuous distribution that
looks like a “Bell curve”. That curve is known as the Gaussian or Normal distribution. If
we scale this curve vertically and horizontally (stretch vertically and compress horizontally
by the factor
√
N/2) and shift its peak to x = 0, then we ﬁnd a distribution that describes
the deviation from the expected value of 50% heads. The resulting function is of the form
p(x) =
1
√
2π
e
−x
2
/2
(7.2)
146 Chapter 7. Discrete probability and the laws of chance
We will study properties of this (and other) such continuous distributions in a later
section. We show a typical example of the Normal distribution in Figure 7.3. Its cumulative
distribution is then shown (without and with the original distribution superimposed) in
Figure 7.4.
The cumulative distribution
4.0 4.0
0.0
1.0
The cumulative distribution
The normal distribution
4.0 4.0
0.0
1.0
Figure 7.4. The Normal probability density with its corresponding cumulative function.
7.7 HardyWeinberg genetics
In this section, we investigate how the ideas developed in this chapter apply to genetics.
We ﬁnd that many of the simple concepts presented here will be useful in calculating the
probability of inheriting genes from one generation to the next.
Each of us has two entire sets of chromosomes: one set is inherited from our mother,
and one set comes from our father. These chromosomes carry genes, the unit of genetic
material that “codes” for proteins and ultimately, through complicated biochemistry and
molecular biology, determines all of our physical traits.
We will investigate how a single gene (with two “ﬂavors”, called alleles) is passed
from one generation to the next. We will consider a particularly simple situation, when the
single gene determines some physical trait (such as eye color). The trait (say blue or green
eyes) will be denoted the phenotype and the actual pair of genes (one on each parentally
derived chromosome) will be called the genotype.
Suppose that the gene for eye color comes in two forms that will be referred to as
A and a. For example, A might be an allele for blue eyes, whereas a could be an allele
for brown eyes. Consider the following “experiment”: select a random individual from the
population of interest, and examine the region in one of their chromosomes determining
eye colour. Then there are two possible mutually exclusive outcomes, A or a; according to
our previous deﬁnition, the experiment just described is a Bernoulli trial.
The actual eye color phenotype will depend on both inherited alleles, and hence, we
are interested in a “repeated Bernoulli trial” with n = 2. In principle, each chromosome
will come with one or the other allele, so each individual would have one of the following
pairs of combinations AA, Aa, aA, or aa. The order Aa or aA is synonymous, so only the
7.7. HardyWeinberg genetics 147
Genotype: aA AA aa Aa
Probability: pq p
2
q
2
pq
Genotype: aA or Aa AA aa
Probability: 2pq p
2
q
2
Table 7.5. If the probability of ﬁnding allele A is p and the probability of ﬁnding
allele A is q, then the eye color gene probabilities are as shown in the top table. However,
because genotype Aa is equivalent to genotype aA, we have combined these outcomes in
the revised second table.
number of alleles of type A (or equivalently of type a) is important.
Suppose we know that the fraction of all genes for eye color of type A in the popu
lation is p, and the fraction of all genes for eye color of type a is q, where p +q = 1. (We
have used the fact that there are only two possibilities for the gene type, of course.) Then
we can interpret p and q as probabilities that a gene selected at random from the population
will turn out to be type a (respectively A), i.e., Prob(A) = p, Prob(a)=q.
Now suppose we draw at random two alleles out of the (large) population. If the
population size is N, then, on average we would expect Np
2
individuals of type AA, Nq
2
of type aa and 2Npq individuals of the mixed type. Note that the sum of the probabilities
of all the genotypes is
p
2
+ 2pq +q
2
= (p +q)
2
= 1.
(We have seen this before in the discussion of Bernoulli trials, and in the deﬁnition of
properties of probability.)
7.7.1 Random nonassortative mating
We now examine what happens if mates are chosen randomly and offspring arise from
such parents. The father and mother each pass down one or another copy of their alleles to
the progeny. We investigate how the proportion of genes of various types is arranged, and
whether it changes in the next generation. In Table 7.6, we show the possible genotypes of
the mother and father, and calculate the probability that mating of such individuals would
occur under the assumption that choice of mate is random  i.e., does not depend at all
on “eye color”. We assume that the allele donated by the father (carried in his sperm) is
independent of the allele found in the mother’s egg cell
28
. This means that we can use the
multiplicative property of probability to determine the probability of a given combination
of parental alleles. (i.e. Prob(x and y)=Prob(x)·Prob(y)).
For example, the probability that a couple chosen at random will consist of a woman
of genotype aA and a man of genotype aa is a product of the fraction of females that are of
type aA and the fraction of males that are of type aa. But that is just (2pq)(p
2
), or simply
2p
3
q. Now let us examine the distribution of possible offspring of various parents.
28
Recall that the sperm and the egg each have one single set of chromosomes, and their union produces the
zygote that carries the doubled set of chromosomes.
148 Chapter 7. Discrete probability and the laws of chance
In Table 7.6, we note, for example, that if the couple are both of type aA, each parent
can “donate” either a or A to the progeny, so we expect to see children of types aa, aA, AA
in the ratio 1:2:1 (regardless of the values of p and q).
We can now group together and summarize all the progeny of a given genotype, with
the probabilities that they are produced by one or another such random mating. Using this
table, we can then determine the probability of each of the three genotypes in the next
generation.
Mother: AA aA aa
p
2
2pq q
2
Father:
AA AA
1
2
aA
1
2
AA Aa
p
2
p
4
2pqp
2
p
2
q
2
aA
1
2
aA
1
2
AA
1
4
aa
1
2
aA
1
4
AA
1
2
aa
1
2
Aa
2pq 2pqp
2
4p
2
q
2
2pqq
2
aa Aa
1
2
aA
1
2
aa aa
q
2
p
2
q
2
2pqq
2
q
4
Table 7.6. The frequency of progeny of various types in HardyWeinberg genetics
can be calculated as shown in this “mating table”. The genotype of the mother is shown
across the top and the father’s genotype is shown on the left column. The various progeny
resulting from mating are shown as entries in bold face. The probabilities of the given
progeny are directly under those entries. (We did not simplify the expressions  this is to
emphasize that they are products of the original parental probabilities.)
Example 7.3 (Probability of AA progeny) Find the probability that a random(Hardy Wein
berg) mating will give rise to a progeny of type AA.
Solution 1
Using Table 7.6, we see that there are only four ways that a child of type AA can result
from a mating: either both parents are AA, or one or the other parent is Aa, or both parents
are Aa. Thus, for children of type AA the probability is
Prob(child of type AA) = p
4
+
1
2
(2pqp
2
) +
1
2
(2pqp
2
) +
1
4
(4p
2
q
2
).
Simplifying leads to
Prob(child of type AA) = p
2
(p
2
+ 2qp +q
2
) = p
2
(p +q)
2
= p
2
.
7.7. HardyWeinberg genetics 149
In the problem set, we also ﬁnd that the probability of a child of type aA is 2qp, the
probability of the child being type aa is q
2
. We thus observe that the frequency of genotypes
of the progeny is exactly the same as that of the parents. This type of genetic makeup is
termed HardyWeinberg genetics.
Alternate solution
1/2
child
AA
mother father
Aa AA Aa AA
A or A A or A
2pq p
2pq p
2
2
(pq+p ) ( pq + p )
2 2 .
1/2 1 1
Figure 7.5. A tree diagram to aid the calculation of the probability that a child
with genotype AA results from random assortative (Hardy Weinberg) mating.
In Figure 7.5, we show an alternate solution to the same problem using a tree dia
gram. Reading from the top down, we examine all the possibilities at each branch point.
A child AA cannot have any parent of genotype aa, so both father and mother’s genotype
could only have been one of AA or Aa. Each arrow indicating the given case is accom
panied by the probability of that event. (For example, a random individual has probability
2pq of having genotype Aa, as shown on the arrows from the father and mother to these
genotypes.) Continuing down the branches, we ask with what probability the given parent
would have contributed an allele of type A to the child. For a parent of type AA, this is
certainly true, so the given branch carries probability 1. For a parent of type Aa, the proba
bility that A is passed down to the child is only 1/2. The combined probability is computed
as follows: we determine the probability of getting an A from father (of type AA OR Aa):
This is Prob(A from father)=(1/2)2pq + 1 · p
2
) = (pq + p
2
) and multiply it by a similar
probability of getting A from the mother (of type AA OR Aa). (We must multiply, since
we need A from the father AND A from the mother for the genotype AA.) Thus,
Prob(child of type AA) =(pq +p
2
)(pq +p
2
) = p
2
(q + p)
2
= p
2
· 1 = p
2
.
It is of interest to investigate what happens when one of the assumptions we made is
150 Chapter 7. Discrete probability and the laws of chance
relaxed, for example, when the genotype of the individual has an impact on survival or on
the ability to reproduce. While this is beyond our scope here, it forms an important theme
in the area of genetics.
7.8 Random walker
In this section we discuss an application of the binomial distribution to the process of a
randomwalk. A shown in Figure 7.6(a), we consider a straight (1 dimensional) path and an
erratic walker who takes steps randomly to the left or right. We will assume that the walker
never stops. With probability p, she takes a step towards the right, and with probability q
she takes a step towards the left. (Since these are the only two choices, it must be true that
p +q = 1.) In Figure 7.6(b) we show the walker’s position, x plotted versus the number of
steps (n) she has taken. (We may as well assume that the steps occur at regular intervals of
time, so that the horizontal axis of this plot can be thought of as a time axis.)
(a)
p q
0 −1 1
n
x
x
(b)
Figure 7.6. A random walker in 1 dimension takes a step to the right with proba
bility p and a step to the left with probability q.
The process described here is classic, and often attributed to a drunken wanderer. In
our case, we could consider this motion as a 1D simpliﬁcation of the random tumbles and
swims of a bacterium in its turbulent environment. it is usually the case that a goal of this
swim is a search for some nutrient source, or possibly avoidance of poor environmental
conditions. We shall see that if the probabilities of left and right motion are unequal (i.e.
the motion is biased in one direction or another) this swimmer tends to drift along towards
a preferred direction.
In this problem, each step has only two outcomes (analogous to a trial in a Bernoulli
experiment). We could imagine the walker tossing a coin to determine whether to move
7.8. Random walker 151
right or left. We wish to characterize the probability of the walker being at a certain posi
tion at a given time, and to ﬁnd her expected position after n steps. Our familiarity with
Bernoulli trials and the binomial distribution will prove useful in this context.
Example
(a) What is the probability of a run of steps as follows: RLRRRLRLLLL
(b) Find the probability that the walker moves k steps to the right out of a total run of n
consecutive steps.
(c) Suppose that p = q = 1/2. What is the probability that a walker starting at the origin
returns to the origin on her 10’th step?
Solution
(a) The probability of the run RLRRRLRLLL is the product pqpppqpqqq = p
5
q
5
. Note
the similarity to the question “What is the probability of tossing HTHHHTHTTT?”
(b) This problem is identical to the problem of k heads in n tosses of a coin. The proba
bility of such an event is given by a term in the binomial distribution:
P(k out of n moves to right)=C(n, k)p
k
q
n−k
.
(c) The walker returns to the origin after 10 steps only if she has taken 5 steps to the left
(total) and 5 steps to the right (total). The order of the steps does not matter. Thus
this problem reduces to the problem (b) with 5 steps out of 10 taken to the right. The
probability is thus
P(back at 0 after 10 steps) = P(5 out of 10 steps to right)
=C(10, 5)p
5
q
5
= C(10, 5)
1
2
10
=
10!
5!5!
1
1024
= 0.24609
Mean position
We now ask how to determine the expected position of the walker after n steps, i.e. how
the mean value of x depends on the number of steps and the probabilities associated with
each step. After 1 step, with probability p the position is x = +1 and with probability q,
the position is x = −1. The expected (mean) position after 1 move is thus
x
1
= p(+1) +q(−1) = p −q
But the process follows a binomial distribution, and thus the mean after n steps is
x
n
= n(p −q).
152 Chapter 7. Discrete probability and the laws of chance
7.9 Summary
In this chapter, we introduced the notion of discrete probability of elementary events. We
learned that a probability is always a number between 0 and 1, and that the sum of (dis
crete) probabilities of all possible (discrete) outcomes is 1. We then described how to
combine probabilities of elementary events to calculate probabilities of compound inde
pendent events in a variety of simple experiments. We deﬁned the notion of a Bernoulli
trial, such as tossing of a coin, and studied this in detail.
We investigated a number of ways of describing results of experiments, whether in
tabular or graphical form, and we used the distribution of results to deﬁne simple numerical
descriptors. The mean is a number that, more or less, describes the location of the “center”
of the distribution (analogous to center of mass), deﬁned as follows:
The mean (expected value) ¯ x of a probability distribution is
¯ x =
n
¸
i=0
x
i
p(x
i
).
The standard deviation is, roughly speaking, the “width” of the distribution.
The standard deviation, σ is
σ =
√
V
where V is the variance,
V =
n
¸
i=0
(x
i
− ¯ x)
2
p(x
i
).
While the chapter was motivated by results of a real experiment, we then investigated
theoretical distributions, including the binomial. We found that the distribution of events in
a repetition of a Bernoulli trial (e.g. coin tossed n times) was a binomial distribution, and
we computed the mean of that distribution.
Suppose that the probability of one of the events, say event e
1
in a Bernoulli trial is p (and
hence the probability of the other event e
2
is q = 1 −p), then
P(k occurrences of given event out of n trials) =
n!
k!(n −k)!
p
k
q
n−k
.
This is called the binomial distribution. The mean of the binomial distribution, i.e. the
mean number of events e
1
in n repeated Bernoulli trials is
¯ x = np.
Chapter 8
Continuous probability
distributions
8.1 Introduction
In Chapter 7, we explored the concepts of probability in a discrete setting, where outcomes
of an experiment can take on only one of a ﬁnite set of values. Here we extend these
ideas to continuous probability. In doing so, we will see that quantities such as mean and
variance that were previously deﬁned by sums will now become deﬁnite integrals. Here
again, we will see the concepts of integral calculus in the context of practical examples and
applications.
We begin by extending the idea of a discrete random variable to the continuous case.
We call x a continuous random variable in a ≤ x ≤ b if x can take on any value in this
interval. An example of a random variable is the height of a person, say an adult male,
selected randomly from a population. (This height typically takes on values in the range
0.5 ≤ x ≤ 3 meters, say, so a = 0.5 and b = 3.)
If we select a male subject at randomfroma large population, and measure his height,
we might expect to get a result in the proximity of 1.71.8 meters most often  thus, such
heights will be associated with a larger value of probability than heights in some other
interval of equal length, e.g. heights in the range 2.7 < x < 2.8 meters, say. Unlike
the case of discrete probability, however, the measured height can take on any real number
within the interval of interest. This leads us to redeﬁne our idea of a continuous probability,
using a continuous function in place of the discrete bargraph seen in Chapter 7.
8.2 Basic deﬁnitions and properties
Here we extend previous deﬁnitions from Chapter 7 to the case of continuous probability.
One of the most important differences is that we now consider a probability density, rather
than a value of the probability per se
29
. First and foremost, we observe that now p(x)
will no longer be a probability, but rather “ a probability per unit x”. This idea is analo
29
This leap from discrete values that are the probability of an outcome (as seen in Chapter 7) to a probability
density is challenging for many students. Reinforcing the analogy with discrete masses versus distributed mass
density (discussed in Chapter 5) may be helpful.
153
154 Chapter 8. Continuous probability distributions
gous to the connection between the mass of discrete beads and a continuous mass density,
encountered previously in Chapter 5.
Deﬁnition
A function p(x) is a probability density provided it satisﬁes the following properties:
1. p(x) ≥ 0 for all x.
2.
b
a
p(x) dx = 1 where the possible range of values of x is a ≤ x ≤ b.
The probability that a random variable x takes on values in the interval a
1
≤ x ≤ a
2
is deﬁned as
a2
a1
p(x) dx.
The transition to probability density means that the quantity p(x) does not carry the same
meaning as our previous notation for probability of an outcome x
i
, namely p(x
i
) in the
discrete case. In fact, p(x)dx, or its approximation p(x)∆x is now associated with the
probability of an outcome whose values is “close to x”.
Unlike our previous discrete probability, we will not ask “what is the probability that
x takes on some exact value?” Rather, we ask for the probability that x is within some
range of values, and this is computed by performing an integral
30
.
Having generalized the idea of probability, we will now ﬁnd that many of the asso
ciated concepts have a natural and straightforward generalization as well. We ﬁrst deﬁne
the cumulative function, and then show how the mean, median, and variance of a contin
uous probability density can be computed. Here we will have the opportunity to practice
integration skills, as integrals replace the sums in such calculations.
Deﬁnition
For experiments whose outcome takes on values on some interval a ≤ x ≤ b, we deﬁne a
cumulative function, F(x), as follows:
F(x) =
x
a
p(s) ds.
Then F(x) represents the probability that the randomvariable takes on a value in the range
(a, x)
31
. The cumulative function is simply the area under the probability density (between
the left endpoint of the interval, a, and the point x).
The above deﬁnition has several implications:
30
Remark: the probability that x is exactly equal to b is the integral
b
b
p(x) dx. But this integral has a value
zero, by properties of the deﬁnite integral.
31
By now, the reader should be comfortable with the use of “s” as the “dummy variable” in this formula, where
x plays the role of right endpoint of the interval of integration.
8.2. Basic deﬁnitions and properties 155
Properties of continuous probability
1. Since p(x) ≥ 0, the cumulative function is an increasing function.
2. The connection between the probability density and its cumulative function can be
written (using the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus) as
p(x) = F
(x).
3. F(a) = 0. This follows from the fact that
F(a) =
a
a
p(s) ds.
By a property of the deﬁnite integral, this is zero.
4. F(b) = 1. This follows from the fact that
F(b) =
b
a
p(s) ds = 1
by Property 2 of the deﬁnition of the probability density, p(x).
5. The probability that x takes on a value in the interval a
1
≤ x ≤ a
2
is the same as
F(a
2
) −F(a
1
).
This follows from the additive property of integrals and the Fundamental Theorem
of Calculus:
a2
a
p(s) ds −
a1
a
p(s) ds =
a2
a1
p(s) ds =
a2
a1
F
(s) ds = F(a
2
) −F(a
1
)
Finding the normalization constant
Not every realvalued function can represent a probability density. For one thing, the func
tion must be positive everywhere. Further, the total area under its graph should be 1, by
Property 2 of a probability density. Given an arbitrary positive function, f(x) ≥ 0, on
some interval a ≤ x ≤ b such that
b
a
f(x)dx = A > 0,
we can always deﬁne a corresponding probability density, p(x) as
p(x) =
1
A
f(x), a ≤ x ≤ b.
It is easy to check that p(x) ≥ 0 and that
b
a
p(x)dx = 1. Thus we have converted the
original function to a probability density. This process is called normalization, and the
constant C = 1/A is called the normalization constant
32
.
32
The reader should recognize that we have essentially rescaled the original function by dividing it by the “area”
A. This is really what normalization is all about.
156 Chapter 8. Continuous probability distributions
8.2.1 Example: probability density and the cumulative
function
Consider the function f(x) = sin (πx/6) for 0 ≤ x ≤ 6.
(a) Normalize the function so that it describes a probability density.
(b) Find the cumulative distribution function, F(x).
Solution
The function is positive in the interval 0 ≤ x ≤ 6, so we can deﬁne the desired probability
density. Let
p(x) = C sin
π
6
x
.
(a) We must ﬁnd the normalization constant, C, such that Property 2 of continuous prob
ability is satisﬁed, i.e. such that
1 =
6
0
p(x) dx.
Carrying out this computation leads to
6
0
C sin
π
6
x
dx = C
6
π
−cos
π
6
x
6
0
= C
6
π
(1 −cos(π)) = C
12
π
(We have used the fact that cos(0) = 1 in a step here.) But by Property 2, for p(x)
to be a probability density, it must be true that C(12/π) = 1. Solving for C leads to
the desired normalization constant,
C =
π
12
.
Note that this calculation is identical to ﬁnding the area
A =
6
0
sin
π
6
x
dx,
and setting the normalization constant to C = 1/A.
Once we rescale our function by this constant, we get the probability density,
p(x) =
π
12
sin
π
6
x
.
This density has the property that the total area under its graph over the interval
0 ≤ x ≤ 6 is 1. A graph of this probability density function is shown as the black
curve in Figure 8.1.
8.3. Mean and median 157
(b) We now compute the cumulative function,
F(x) =
x
0
p(s) ds =
π
12
x
0
sin
π
6
s
ds
Carrying out the calculation
33
leads to
F(x) =
π
12
·
6
π
−cos
π
6
s
x
0
=
1
2
1 −cos
π
6
x
.
This cumulative function is shown as a red curve in Figure 8.1.
p(x)
F(x)
0.0 6.0
0.0
1.0
Figure 8.1. The probability density p(x) (black), and the cumulative function
F(x) (red) for Example 8.2.1. Note that the area under the black curve is 1 (by normal
ization), and thus the value of F(x), which is the cumulative area function is 1 at the right
endpoint of the interval.
8.3 Mean and median
When we are given a distribution, we often want to describe it with simpler numerical
values that characterize its “center”: the mean and the median both give this type of in
formation. We also want to describe whether the distribution is narrow or fat  i.e. how
clustered it is about its “center”. The variance and higher moments will provide that type
of information.
Recall that in Chapter 5 for mass density ρ(x), we deﬁned a center of mass,
¯ x =
b
a
xρ(x) dx
b
a
ρ(x) dx
. (8.1)
33
Notice that the integration involved in ﬁnding F(x) is the same as the one done to ﬁnd the normalization
constant. The only difference is the ultimate step of evaluating the integral at the variable endpoint x rather than
the ﬁxed endpoint b = 6.
158 Chapter 8. Continuous probability distributions
The mean of a probability density is deﬁned similarly, but the deﬁnition simpliﬁes by virtue
of the fact that
b
a
p(x) dx = 1. Since probability distributions are normalized, the denom
inator in Eqn. (8.1) is simply 1.Consequently, the mean of a probability density is given as
follows:
Deﬁnition
For a random variable in a ≤ x ≤ b and a probability density p(x) deﬁned on this interval,
the mean or average value of x (also called the expected value), denoted ¯ x is given by
¯ x =
b
a
xp(x) dx.
To avoid confusion note the distinction between the mean as an average value of x versus
the average value of the function p over the given interval. Reviewing Example 5.3.3 may
help to dispel such confusion.
The idea of median encountered previously in grade distributions also has a parallel
here. Simply put, the median is the value of x that splits the probability distribution into
two portions whose areas are identical.
Deﬁnition
The median x
med
of a probability distribution is a value of x in the interval a ≤ x
med
≤ b
such that
x
med
a
p(x) dx =
b
x
med
p(x) dx =
1
2
.
It follows from this deﬁnition that the median is the value of x for which the cumulative
function satisﬁes
F(x
med
) =
1
2
.
8.3.1 Example: Mean and median
Find the mean and the median of the probability density found in Example 8.2.1.
Solution
To ﬁnd the mean we compute
¯ x =
π
12
6
0
xsin
π
6
x
dx.
8.3. Mean and median 159
Integration by parts is required here
34
. Let u = x, dv = sin
π
6
x
dx.
Then du = dx, v = −
6
π
cos
π
6
x
. The calculation is then as follows:
¯ x =
π
12
−x
6
π
cos
π
6
x
6
0
+
6
π
6
0
cos
π
6
x
dx
=
1
2
−xcos
π
6
x
6
0
+
6
π
sin
π
6
x
6
0
=
1
2
−6 cos(π) +
6
π
sin(π) −
6
π
sin(0)
=
6
2
= 3. (8.2)
(We have used cos(π) = −1, sin(0) = sin(π) = 0 in the above.)
To ﬁnd the median, x
med
, we look for the value of x for which
F(x
med
) =
1
2
.
Using the form of the cumulative function from Example 8.2.1, we ﬁnd that
F(x)
0.5
xmed 0.0 6.0
0.0
1.0
Figure 8.2. The cumulative function F(x) (red) for Example 8.2.1 in relation
to the median, as computed in Example 8.3.1. The median is the value of x at which
F(x) = 0.5, as shown in green.
x
med
0
sin
π
6
s
ds =
1
2
⇒
1
2
1 −cos
π
6
x
med
=
1
2
.
34
Recall from Chapter 6 that
udv = vu −
vdu. Calculations of the mean in continuous probability often
involve Integration by Parts (IBP), since the integrand consists of an expression xp(x)dx. The idea of IBP is
to reduce the integration to something involving only p(x)dx, which is done essentially by “differentiating” the
term u = x, as we show here.
160 Chapter 8. Continuous probability distributions
Here we must solve for the unknown value of x
med
.
1 −cos
π
6
x
med
= 1, ⇒ cos
π
6
x
med
= 0.
The angles whose cosine is zero are ±π/2, ±3π/2 etc. We select the angle so that the
resulting value of x
med
will be inside the relevant interval (0 ≤ x ≤ 6 for this example),
i.e. π/2. This leads to
π
6
x
med
=
π
2
so the median is
x
med
= 3.
In other words, we have found that the point x
med
subdivides the interval 0 ≤ x ≤ 6 into
two subintervals whose probability is the same. The relationship of the median and the
cumulative function F(x) is illustrated in Fig 8.2.
Remark
A glance at the original probability distribution should convince us that it is symmetric
about the value x = 3. Thus we should have anticipated that the mean and median of this
distribution would both occur at the same place, i.e. at the midpoint of the interval. This
will be true in general for symmetric probability distributions, just as it was for symmetric
mass or grade distributions.
8.3.2 How is the mean different from the median?
p(x)
p(x)
x x
Figure 8.3. In a symmetric probability distribution (left) the mean and median are
the same. If the distribution is changed slightly so that it is no longer symmetric (as shown
on the right) then the median may still be the same, which the mean will have shifted to the
new “center of mass” of the probability density.
We have seen in Example 8.3.1 that for symmetric distributions, the mean and the
median are the same. Is this always the case? When are the two different, and how can we
understand the distinction?
Recall that the mean is closely associated with the idea of a center of mass, a concept
from physics that describes the location of a pivot point at which the entire “mass” would
8.4. Applications of continuous probability 161
exactly balance. It is worth remembering that
mean of p(x) = expected value of x = average value of x.
This concept is not to be confused with the average value of a function, which is an average
value of the y coordinate, i.e., the average height of the function on the given interval.
The median simply indicates a place at which the “total mass” is subdivided into two
equal portions. (In the case of probability density, each of those portions represents an
equal area, A
1
= A
2
= 1/2 since the total area under the graph is 1 by deﬁnition.)
Figure 8.3 shows how the two concepts of median (indicated by vertical line) and
mean (indicated by triangular “pivot point”) differ. At the left, for a symmetric probability
density, the mean and the median coincide, just as they did in Example 8.3.1. To the right,
a small portion of the distribution was moved off to the far right. This change did not affect
the location of the median, since the total areas to the right and to the left of the vertical
line are still equal. However, the fact that part of the mass is farther away to the right leads
to a shift in the mean of the distribution, to compensate for the change.
Simply put, the mean contains more information about the way that the distribution
is arranged spatially. This stems from the fact that the mean of the distribution is a “sum” 
i.e. integral  of terms of the formxp(x)∆x. Thus the location along the x axis, x, not just
the “mass”, p(x)∆x, affects the contribution of parts of the distribution to the value of the
mean.
8.3.3 Example: a nonsymmetric distribution
We slightly modify the function used in Example 8.2.1 to the new expression
f(x) = xsin (πx/6) for 0 ≤ x ≤ 6.
This results in a nonsymmetric probability density, shown in black in Figure 8.4. Steps in
obtaining p(x) would be similar
35
, but we have to carry out an integration by parts to ﬁnd
the normalization constant and/or to calculate the cumulative function, F(x). Further, to
compute the mean of the distribution we have to integrate by parts twice.
Alternatively, we can carry out all such computations (approximately) using the
spreadsheet, as shown in Figure 8.4. We can plot f(x) using sufﬁciently ﬁne increments
∆x along the x axis and compute the approximation for its integral by adding up the quanti
ties f(x)∆x. The area under the curve A, and hence the normalization constant (C = 1/A)
will be thereby determined (at the point corresponding to the end of the interval, x = 6).
It is then an easy matter to replot the revised function f(x)/A, which corresponds to the
normalized probability density. This is the curve shown in black in Figure 8.4. In the prob
lem sets, we leave as an exercise for the reader how to determine the median and the mean
using the same spreadsheet tool for a related (simpler) example.
8.4 Applications of continuous probability
In the next few sections, we explore applications of the ideas developed in this chapter
to a variety of problems. We treat the decay of radioactive atoms, consider distribution of
35
This is good practice, and the reader is encouraged to do this calculation.
162 Chapter 8. Continuous probability distributions
F(x)
0.5
x
med
p(x)
0.0 6.0
0.0
1.0
Figure 8.4. As in Figures 8.1 and 8.2, but for the probability density p(x) =
(π/36)xsin(πx/6). This function is not symmetric, so the mean and median are not the
same. From this ﬁgure, we see that the median is approximately x
med
= 3.6. We do not
show the mean (which is close but not identical). We can compute both the mean and the
median for this distribution using numerical integration with the spreadsheet. We ﬁnd that
the mean is ¯ x = 3.5679. Note that the “most probable value”, i.e. the point at which p(x)
is maximal is at x = 3.9, which is again different from both the mean and the median.
heights in a population, and explore howthe distribution of radii is related to the distribution
of volumes in raindrop drop sizes. The interpretation of the probability density and the
cumulative function, as well as the means and medians in these cases will form the main
focus of our discussion.
8.4.1 Radioactive decay
Radioactive decay is a probabilistic phenomenon: an atom spontaneously emits a particle
and changes into a new form. We cannot predict exactly when a given atom will undergo
this event, but we can study a large collection of atoms and draw some interesting conclu
sions.
We can deﬁne a probability density function that represents the probability per unit
time that an atom would decay at time t. It turns out that a good candidate for such a
function is
p(t) = Ce
−kt
,
where k is a constant that represents the rate of decay (in units of 1/time) of the speciﬁc
radioactive material. In principle, this function is deﬁned over the interval 0 ≤ t ≤ ∞;
that is, it is possible that we would have to wait a “very long time” to have all of the atoms
decay. This means that these integrals have to be evaluated “at inﬁnity”, leading to an
improper integral. Using this probability density for atom decay, we can characterize the
mean and median decay time for the material.
8.4. Applications of continuous probability 163
Normalization
We ﬁrst ﬁnd the constant of normalization, i.e. ﬁnd the constant C such that
∞
0
p(t) dt =
∞
0
Ce
−kt
dt = 1.
Recall that an integral of this sort, in which one of the endpoints is at inﬁnity is called an
improper integral
36
. Some care is needed in understanding how to handle such integrals,
and in particular when they “exist” (in the sense of producing a ﬁnite value, despite the
inﬁnitely long domain of integration). We will delay full discussion to Chapter 10, and
state here the deﬁnition:
I =
∞
0
Ce
−kt
dt ≡ lim
T→∞
I
T
where I
T
=
T
0
Ce
−kt
dt.
The idea is to compute an integral over a ﬁnite interval 0 ≤ t ≤ T and then take a limit as
the upper endpoint, T goes to inﬁnity (T →∞). We compute:
I
T
= C
T
0
e
−kt
dt = C
¸
e
−kt
−k
T
0
=
1
k
C(1 −e
−kT
).
Now we take the limit:
I = lim
T→∞
I
T
= lim
T→∞
1
k
C(1 −e
−kT
) =
1
k
C(1 − lim
T→∞
e
−kT
). (8.3)
To compute this limit, recall that for k > 0, T > 0, the exponential term in Eqn. 8.3 decays
to zero as T increases, so that
lim
T→∞
e
−kT
= 0.
Thus, the second term in braces in the integral I in Eqn. 8.3 will vanish as T →∞so that
the value of the improper integral will be
I = lim
T→∞
I
T
=
1
k
C.
To ﬁnd the constant of normalization C we require that I = 1, i.e.
1
k
C = 1, which means
that
C = k.
Thus the (normalized) probability density for the decay is
p(t) = ke
−kt
.
This means that the fraction of atoms that decay between time t
1
and t
2
is
k
t2
t1
e
−kt
dt.
36
We have already encountered such integrals in Sections 3.8.5 and 4.5. See also, Chapter 10 for a more detailed
discussion of improper integrals.
164 Chapter 8. Continuous probability distributions
Cumulative decays
The fraction of the atoms that decay between time 0 and time t (i.e. “any time up to time
t” or “by time t  note subtle wording”
37
) is
F(t) =
t
0
p(s) ds = k
t
0
e
−ks
ds.
We can simplify this expression by integrating:
F(t) = k
¸
e
−ks
−k
t
0
= −
e
−kt
−e
0
= 1 −e
−kt
.
Thus, the probability of the atoms decaying by time t (which means anytime up to time t)
is
F(t) = 1 −e
−kt
.
We note that F(0) = 0 and F(∞) = 1, as expected for the cumulative function.
Median decay time
As before, to determine the median decay time, t
m
(the time at which half of the atoms
have decayed), we set F(t
m
) = 1/2. Then
1
2
= F(t
m
) = 1 −e
−ktm
,
so we get
e
−ktm
=
1
2
, ⇒ e
ktm
= 2, ⇒ kt
m
= ln 2, ⇒ t
m
=
ln 2
k
.
Thus half of the atoms have decayed by this time. (Remark: this is easily recognized as the
half life of the radioactive process from previous familiarity with exponentially decaying
functions.)
Mean decay time
The mean time of decay
¯
t is given by
¯
t =
∞
0
tp(t) dt.
We compute this integral again as an improper integral by taking a limit as the top endpoint
increases to inﬁnity, i.e. we ﬁrst ﬁnd
I
T
=
T
0
tp(t) dt,
37
Note that the precise English wording is subtle, but very important here. “By time t” means that the event
could have happened at any time right up to time t.
8.4. Applications of continuous probability 165
and then set
¯
t = lim
T→∞
I
T
.
To compute I
T
we use integration by parts:
I
T
=
T
0
tke
−kt
dt = k
T
0
te
−kt
dt.
Let u = t, dv = e
−kt
dt. Then du = dt, v = e
−kt
/(−k), so that
I
T
= k
¸
t
e
−kt
(−k)
−
e
−kt
(−k)
dt
T
0
=
¸
−te
−kt
+
e
−kt
dt
T
0
=
¸
−te
−kt
−
e
−kt
k
T
0
=
¸
−Te
−kT
−
e
−kT
k
+
1
k
Now as T →∞, we have e
−kT
→0 so that
¯
t = lim
T→∞
I
T
=
1
k
.
Thus the mean or expected decay time is
¯
t =
1
k
.
8.4.2 Discrete versus continuous probability
In Chapter 5.3, we compared the treatment of two types of mass distributions. We ﬁrst
explored a set of discrete masses strung along a “thin wire”. Later, we considered a single
“bar” with a continuous distribution of density along its length. In the ﬁrst case, there was
an unambiguous meaning to the concept of “mass at a point”. In the second case, we could
assign a mass to some section of the bar between, say x = a and x = b. (To do so we had
to integrate the mass density on the interval a ≤ x ≤ b.) In the ﬁrst case, we talked about
the mass of the objects, whereas in the latter case, we were interested in the idea of density
(mass per unit distance: Note that the units of mass density are not the same as the units of
mass.)
As we have seen so far in this chapter, the same dichotomy exists in the topic of
probability. In Chapter 7, we were concerned with the probability of discrete events whose
outcome belongs to some ﬁnite set of possibilities (e.g. Head or Tail for a coin toss, allele
A or a in genetics).
The example below provides some further insight to the connection between contin
uous and discrete probability. In particular, we will see that one can arrive at the idea of
probability density by reﬁning a set of measurements and making the appropriate scaling.
We explore this connection in more detail below.
166 Chapter 8. Continuous probability distributions
8.4.3 Example: Student heights
Suppose we measure the heights of all UBC students. This would produce about 30,000
data values
38
. We could make a graph and show how these heights are distributed. For
example, we could subdivide the student body into those students between 0 and 1.5m, and
those between 1.5 and 3 meters. Our bar graph would contain two bars, with the number
of students in each height category represented by the heights of the bars, as shown in
Figure 8.5(a).
h
p(h)
Δ h
h
p(h) p(h)
h
Δ h
Figure 8.5. Reﬁning a histogram by increasing the number of bins leads (eventu
ally) to the idea of a continuous probability density.
Suppose we want to record this distribution in more detail. We could divide the
population into smaller groups by shrinking the size of the interval or “bin” into which
height is subdivided. (An example is shown in Figure 8.5(b)). Here, by a “bin” we mean a
little interval of width ∆h where h is height, i.e. a height interval. For example, we could
keep track of the heights in increments of 50 cm. If we were to plot the number of students
in each height category, then as the size of the bins gets smaller, so would the height of the
bar: there would be fewer students in each category if we increase the number of categories.
To keep the bar height from shrinking, we might reorganize the data slightly. Instead
of plotting the number of students in each bin, we might plot
number of students in the bin
∆h
.
If we do this, then both numerator and denominator decrease as the size of the bins is made
smaller, so that the shape of the distribution is preserved (i.e. it does not get ﬂatter).
We observe that in this case, the number of students in a given height category is
represented by the area of the bar corresponding to that category:
Area of bin = ∆h
number of students in the bin
∆h
= number of students in the bin.
The important point to consider is that the height of each bar in the plot represents the
number of students per unit height.
38
I am grateful to David Austin for developing this example.
8.4. Applications of continuous probability 167
This type of plot is precisely what leads us to the idea of a density distribution. As
∆h shrinks, we get a continuous graph. If we “normalize”, i.e. divide by the total area
under the graph, we get a probability density, p(h) for the height of the population. As
noted, p(h) represents the fraction of students per unit height
39
whose height is h. It is thus
a density, and has the appropriate units. In this case, p(h) ∆h represents the fraction of
individuals whose height is in the range h ≤ height ≤ h +∆h.
8.4.4 Example: Age dependent mortality
In this example, we consider an age distribution and interpret the meanings of the proba
bility density and of the cumulative function. Understanding the connection between the
verbal description and the symbols we use to represent these concepts requires practice and
experience. Related problems are presented in the homework.
Let p(a) be a probability density for the probability of mortality of a female Canadian
nonsmoker at age a, where 0 ≤ a ≤ 120. (We have chosen an upper endpoint of age
120 since practically no Canadian female lives past this age at present.) Let F(a) be the
cumulative distribution corresponding to this probability density. We would like to answer
the following questions:
(a) What is the probability of dying by age a?
(b) What is the probability of surviving to age a?
(c) Suppose that we are told that F(75) = 0.8 and that F(80) differs from F(75) by
0.11. Interpret this information in plain English. What is the probability of surviving
to age 80? Which is larger, F(75) or F(80)?
(d) Use the information in part (c) to estimate the probability of dying between the ages
of 75 and 80 years old. Further, estimate p(80) from this information.
Solution
(a) The probability of dying by age a is the same as the probability of dying any time
up to age a. Restated, this is the probability that the age of death is in the interval
0 ≤ age of death ≤ a. The appropriate quantity is the cumulative function, for this
probability density
F(a) =
a
0
p(x) dx.
Remark: note that, as customary, x is playing the role of a “dummy variable”. We
are integrating over all ages between 0 and a, so we do not want to confuse the
notation for variable of integration, x and endpoint of the interval a. Hence the
symbol x rather than a inside the integral.
39
Note in particular the units of h
−1
attached to this probability density, and contrast this with a discrete
probability that is a pure number carrying no such units.
168 Chapter 8. Continuous probability distributions
(b) The probability of surviving to age a is the same as the probability of not dying
before age a. By the elementary properties of probability discussed in the previous
chapter, this is
1 −F(a).
(c) F(75) = 0.8 means that the probability of dying some time up to age 75 is 0.8.
(This also means that the probability of surviving past this age would be 10.8=0.2.)
From the properties of probability, we know that the cumulative distribution is an
increasing function, and thus it must be true that F(80) > F(75). Then F(80) =
F(75) + 0.11 = 0.8 + 0.11 = 0.91. Thus the probability of surviving to age 80
is 10.91=0.09. This means that 9% of the population will make it to their 80’th
birthday.
(d) The probability of dying between the ages of 75 and 80 years old is exactly
80
75
p(x) dx.
However, we can also state this in terms of the cumulative function, since
80
75
p(x) dx =
80
0
p(x) dx −
75
0
p(x) dx = F(80) −F(75) = 0.11
Thus the probability of death between the ages of 75 and 80 is 0.11.
To estimate p(80), we use the connection between the probability density and the
cumulative distribution
40
:
p(x) = F
(x). (8.4)
Then it is approximately true that
p(x) ≈
F(x +∆x) −F(x)
∆x
. (8.5)
(Recall the deﬁnition of the derivative, and note that we are approximating the deriva
tive by the slope of a secant line.) Here we have information at ages 75 and 80, so
∆x = 80 −75 = 5, and the approximation is rather crude, leading to
p(80) ≈
F(80) −F(75)
5
=
0.11
5
= 0.022 per year.
Several important points merit attention in the above example. First, information contained
in the cumulative function is useful. Differences in values of F between x = a and x = b
are, after all, equivalent to an integral of the function
b
a
p(x)dx, and are the probability
of a result in the given interval, a ≤ x ≤ b. Second, p(x) is the derivative of F(x). In
the expression (8.5), we approximated that derivative by a small ﬁnite difference. Here we
see at play many of the themes that have appeared in studying calculus: the connection be
tween derivatives and integrals, the Fundamental Theoremof Calculus, and the relationship
between tangent and secant lines.
40
In Eqn. (8.4) there is no longer confusion between a variable of integration and an endpoint, so we could
revert to the notation p(a) = F
(a), helping us to identify the independent variable as age. However, we have
avoided doing so simply so that the formula in Eqn. (8.5) would be very recognizable as an approximation for a
derivative.
8.4. Applications of continuous probability 169
8.4.5 Example: Raindrop size distribution
In this example, we ﬁnd a rather nonintuitive result, linking the distribution of raindrops
of various radii with the distribution of their volumes. This reinforces the caution needed
in interpreting and handling probabilities.
During a Vancouver rainstorm, the distribution of raindrop radii is uniform for radii
0 ≤ r ≤ 4 (where r is measured in mm) and zero for larger r. By a uniform distribution
we mean a function that has a constant value in the given interval. Thus, we are saying that
the distribution looks like f(r) = C for 0 ≤ r ≤ 4.
(a) Determine what is the probability density for raindrop radii, p(r)? Interpret the
meaning of that function.
(b) What is the associated cumulative function F(r) for this probability density? Inter
pret the meaning of that function.
(c) In terms of the volume, what is the cumulative distribution F(V )?
(d) In terms of the volume, what is the probability density p(V )?
(e) What is the average volume of a raindrop?
Solution
This problemis challenging because one may be tempted to think that the uniformdistribu
tion of drop radii should give a uniform distribution of drop volumes. This is not the case,
as the following argument shows! The sequence of steps is illustrated in Figure 8.6.
V
F(r)
p(r)
F(V)
r r
V
4
4
(a)
(b)
(c) (d)
p(V)
Figure 8.6. Probability densities for raindrop radius and raindrop volume (left
panels) and for the cumulative distributions (right) of each for Example 8.4.5.
170 Chapter 8. Continuous probability distributions
(a) The probability density function is p(r) = 1/4 for 0 ≤ r ≤ 4. This means that
the probability per unit radius of ﬁnding a drop of size r is the same for all radii in
0 ≤ r ≤ 4, as shown in Fig. 8.6(a). Some of these drops will correspond to small
volumes, and others to very large volumes. We will see that the probability per unit
volume of ﬁnding a drop of given volume will be quite different.
(b) The cumulative function is
F(r) =
r
0
1
4
ds =
r
4
, 0 ≤ r ≤ 4. (8.6)
A sketch of this function is shown in Fig. 8.6(b).
(c) The cumulative function F(r) is proportional to the radius of the drop. We use the
connection between radii and volume of spheres to rewrite that function in terms of
the volume of the drop: Since
V =
4
3
πr
3
(8.7)
we have
r =
3
4π
1/3
V
1/3
.
Substituting this expression into the formula (8.6), we get
F(V ) =
1
4
3
4π
1/3
V
1/3
.
We ﬁnd the range of values of V by substituting r = 0, 4 into Eqn. (8.7) to get
V = 0,
4
3
π4
3
. Therefore the interval is 0 ≤ V ≤
4
3
π4
3
or 0 ≤ V ≤ (256/3)π. The
function F(V ) is sketched in panel (d) of Fig. 8.6.
(d) We nowuse the connection between the probability density and the cumulative distri
bution, namely that p is the derivative of F. Now that the variable has been converted
to volume, that derivative is a little more “interesting”:
p(V ) = F
(V )
Therefore,
p(V ) =
1
4
3
4π
1/3
1
3
V
−2/3
.
Thus the probability per unit volume of ﬁnding a drop of volume V in 0 ≤ V ≤
4
3
π4
3
is not at all uniform. This probability density is shown in Fig. 8.6(c) This results
from the fact that the differential quantity dr behaves very differently from dV , and
reinforces the fact that we are dealing with density, not with a probability per se. We
note that this distribution has smaller values at larger values of V .
8.5. Moments of a probability density 171
(e) The range of values of V is
0 ≤ V ≤
256π
3
,
and therefore the mean volume is
¯
V =
256π/3
0
V p(V )dV =
1
12
3
4π
1/3
256π/3
0
V · V
−2/3
dV
=
1
12
3
4π
1/3
256π/3
0
V
1/3
dV =
1
12
3
4π
1/3
3
4
V
4/3
256π/3
0
=
1
16
3
4π
1/3
256π
3
4/3
=
64π
3
≈ 67mm
3
.
8.5 Moments of a probability density
We are now familiar with some of the properties of probability distributions. On this page
we will introduce a set of numbers that describe various properties of such distributions.
Some of these have already been encountered in our previous discussion, but now we will
see that these ﬁt into a pattern of quantities called moments of the distribution.
8.5.1 Deﬁnition of moments
Let f(x) be any function which is deﬁned and positive on an interval [a, b]. We might refer
to the function as a distribution, whether or not we consider it to be a probability density.
Then we will deﬁne the following moments of this function:
zero’th moment M
0
=
b
a
f(x) dx
ﬁrst moment M
1
=
b
a
x f(x) dx
second moment M
2
=
b
a
x
2
f(x) dx
.
.
.
n’th moment M
n
=
b
a
x
n
f(x) dx.
Observe that moments of any order are deﬁned by integrating the distribution f(x)
with a suitable power of x over the interval [a, b]. However, in practice we will see that
usually moments up to the second are usefully employed to describe common attributes of
a distribution.
172 Chapter 8. Continuous probability distributions
8.5.2 Relationship of moments to mean and variance of a
probability density
In the particular case that the distribution is a probability density, p(x), deﬁned on the
interval a ≤ x ≤ b, we have already established the following :
M
0
=
b
a
p(x) dx = 1.
(This follows from the basic property of a probability density.) Thus The zero’th moment
of any probability density is 1. Further
M
1
=
b
a
x p(x) dx = ¯ x = µ.
That is, The ﬁrst moment of a probability density is the same as the mean (i.e. expected
value) of that probability density. So far, we have used the symbol ¯ x to represent the mean
or average value of x but often the symbol µ is also used to denote the mean.
The second moment, of a probability density also has a useful interpretation. From
above deﬁnitions, the second moment of p(x) over the interval a ≤ x ≤ b is
M
2
=
b
a
x
2
p(x) dx.
We will shortly see that the second moment helps describe the way that density is dis
tributed about the mean. For this purpose, we must describe the notion of variance or
standard deviation.
Variance and standard deviation
Two children of approximately the same size can balance on a teetertotter by sitting very
close to the point at which the beampivots. They can also achieve a balance by sitting at the
very ends of the beam, equally far away. In both cases, the center of mass of the distribution
is at the same place: precisely at the pivot point. However, the mass is distributed very
differently in these two cases. In the ﬁrst case, the mass is clustered close to the center,
whereas in the second, it is distributed further away. We may want to be able to describe
this distinction, and we could do so by considering higher moments of the mass distribution.
Similarly, if we want to describe how a probability density distribution is distributed
about its mean, we consider moments higher than the ﬁrst. We use the idea of the variance
to describe whether the distribution is clustered close to its mean, or spread out over a great
distance from the mean.
Variance
The variance is deﬁned as the average value of the quantity (distance from mean)
2
,
where the average is taken over the whole distribution. (The reason for the square is that
we would not like values to the left and right of the mean to cancel out.) For discrete
probability with mean, µ we deﬁne variance by
8.5. Moments of a probability density 173
V =
¸
(x
i
−µ)
2
p
i
.
For a continuous probability density, with mean µ, we deﬁne the variance by
V =
b
a
(x −µ)
2
p(x) dx.
The standard deviation
The standard deviation is deﬁned as
σ =
√
V .
Let us see what this implies about the connection between the variance and the moments
of the distribution.
Relationship of variance to second moment
From the equation for variance we calculate that
V =
b
a
(x −µ)
2
p(x) dx =
b
a
(x
2
−2µx +µ
2
) p(x) dx.
Expanding the integral leads to:
V =
b
a
x
2
p(x)dx −
b
a
2µx p(x) dx +
b
a
µ
2
p(x) dx
=
b
a
x
2
p(x)dx −2µ
b
a
x p(x) dx +µ
2
b
a
p(x) dx.
We recognize the integrals in the above expression, since they are simply moments of the
probability distribution. Using the deﬁnitions, we arrive at
V = M
2
−2µ µ + µ
2
.
Thus
V = M
2
−µ
2
.
Observe that the variance is related to the second moment, M
2
and to the mean, µ of the
distribution.
174 Chapter 8. Continuous probability distributions
Relationship of variance to second moment
Using the above deﬁnitions, the standard deviation, σ can be expressed as
σ =
√
V =
M
2
−µ
2
.
8.5.3 Example: computing moments
Consider a probability density such that p(x) = C is constant for values of x in the interval
[a, b] and zero for values outside this interval
41
. The area under the graph of this function
for a ≤ x ≤ b is A = C · (b − a) ≡ 1 (enforced by the usual property of a probability
density), so it is easy to see that the value of the constant C should be C = 1/(b −a). Thus
p(x) =
1
b −a
, a ≤ x ≤ b.
We compute some of the moments of this probability density
M
0
=
b
a
p(x)dx =
1
b −a
b
a
1 dx = 1.
(This was already known, since we have determined that the zeroth moment of any proba
bility density is 1.) We also ﬁnd that
M
1
=
b
a
x p(x) dx =
1
b −a
b
a
x dx =
1
b −a
x
2
2
b
a
=
b
2
−a
2
2(b −a)
.
This last expression can be simpliﬁed by factoring, leading to
µ = M
1
=
(b −a)(b +a)
2(b −a)
=
b +a
2
.
The value (b+a)/2 is a midpoint of the interval [a, b]. Thus we have found that the mean µ
is in the center of the interval, as expected for a symmetric distribution. The median would
be at the same place by a simple symmetry argument: half the area is to the left and half
the area is to the right of this point.
To ﬁnd the variance we calculate the second moment,
M
2
=
b
a
x
2
p(x) dx =
1
b −a
b
a
x
2
dx =
1
b −a
x
3
3
b
a
=
b
3
−a
3
3(b −a)
.
Factoring simpliﬁes this to
M
2
=
(b −a)(b
2
+ab +a
2
)
3(b −a)
=
b
2
+ab +a
2
3
.
41
As noted before, this is a uniform distribution. It has the shape of a rectangular band of height C and base
(b −a).
8.6. Summary 175
The variance is then
V = M
2
−µ
2
=
b
2
+ab +a
2
3
−
(b +a)
2
4
=
b
2
−2ab +a
2
12
=
(b −a)
2
12
.
The standard deviation is
σ =
(b −a)
2
√
3
.
8.6 Summary
In this chapter, we extended the discrete probability encountered in Chapter 7 to the case of
continuous probability density. We learned that this function is a probability per unit value
(of the variable of interest), so that
b
a
p(x)dx = probability that x takes a value in the interval (a, b).
We also deﬁned and studied the cumulative function
F(x) =
x
a
p(s)ds = probability of a value in the interval (a, x).
We noted that by the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus, F(x) is an antiderivative of p(x)
(or synonymously, p
(x) = F(x).)
The mean and median are two descriptors for some features of probability densities.
For p(x) deﬁned on an interval a ≤ x ≤ b and zero outside, the mean, (¯ x, or sometimes
called µ) is
¯ x =
b
a
xp(x)dx
whereas the median, x
med
is the value for which
F(x
med
) =
1
2
.
Both mean and median correspond to the “center” of a symmetric distribution. If the dis
tribution is nonsymmetric, a long tail in one direction will shift the mean toward that
direction more strongly than the median. The variance of a probability density is
V =
b
a
(x −µ)
2
p(x) dx,
and the standard deviation is
σ =
√
V .
This quantity describes the “width” of the distribution, i.e. how spread out (large σ) or
clumped (small σ) it is.
We deﬁned the n’th moment of a probability density as
M
n
=
b
a
x
n
p(x)dx,
176 Chapter 8. Continuous probability distributions
and showed that the ﬁrst few moments are related to mean and variance of the probability.
Most of these concepts are directly linked to the analogous ideas in discrete probability,
but in this chapter, we used integration in place of summation, to deal with the continuous,
rather than the discrete case.
Chapter 9
Differential Equations
9.1 Introduction
A differential equation is a relationship between some (unknown) function and one of its
derivatives. Examples of differential equations were encountered in an earlier calculus
course in the context of population growth, temperature of a cooling object, and speed of a
moving object subjected to friction. In Section 4.2.4, we reviewed an example of a differ
ential equation for velocity, (4.8), and discussed its solution, but here, we present a more
systematic approach to solving such equations using a technique called separation of vari
ables. In this chapter, we apply the tools of integration to ﬁnding solutions to differential
equations. The importance and wide applicability of this topic cannot be overstated.
In this course, since we are concerned only with functions that depend on a single
variable, we discuss ordinary differential equations (ODE’s), whereas later, after a mul
tivariate calculus course where partial derivatives are introduced, a wider class, of partial
differential equations (PDE’s) can be studied. Such equations are encountered in many ar
eas of science, and in any quantitative analysis of systems where rates of change are linked
to the state of the system. Most laws of physics are of this form; for example, applying
the familiar Newton’s law, F = ma, links the position of a pendulum’s mass to its accel
eration (second derivative of position).
42
Many biological processes are also described by
differential equations. The rate of growth of a population dN/dt depends on the size of
that population at the given time N(t).
Constructing the differential equation that adequately represents a system of interest
is an art that takes some thought and experience. In this process, which we call “modeling”,
many simpliﬁcations are made so that the essential properties of a given system are cap
tured, leaving out many complicating details. For example, friction might be neglected in
“modeling” a perfect pendulum. The details of age distribution might be neglected in mod
eling a growing population. Now that we have techniques for integration, we can devise a
new approach to computing solutions of differential equations.
Given a differential equation and a starting value, the goal is to make a prediction
42
Newton’s law states that force is proportional to acceleration. For a pendulum, the force is due to gravity, and
the acceleration is a second derivative of the x or y coordinate of the bob on the pendulum.
177
178 Chapter 9. Differential Equations
about the future behaviour of the system. This is equivalent to identifying the function that
satisﬁes the given differential equation and initial value(s). We refer to such a function as
the solution to the initial value problem (IVP). In differential calculus, our exploration
of differential equations was limited to those whose solution could be guessed, or whose
solution was supplied in advance. We also explored some of the fascinating geometric and
qualitative properties of such equations and their predictions.
Now that we have techniques of integration, we can ﬁnd the analytic solution to a
variety of simple ﬁrstorder differential equations (i.e. those involving the ﬁrst derivative
of the unknown function). We will describe the technique of separation of variables. This
technique works for examples that are simple enough that we can isolate the dependent
variable (e.g. y) on one side of the equation, and the independent variable (e.g. time t) on
the other side.
9.2 Unlimited population growth
We start with a simple example that was treated thoroughly in the differential calculus
semester of this course. We consider a population with per capita birth and mortality rates
that are constant, irrespective of age, disease, environmental changes, or other effects. We
ask how a population in such ideal circumstances would change over time. We build up
a simple model (i.e. a differential equation) to describe this ideal case, and then proceed
to ﬁnd its solution. Solving the differential equation is accomplished by a new technique
introduced here, namely separation of variables. This reduces the problem to integration
and algebraic manipulation, allowing us to compute the population size at any time t. By
going through this process, we essentially convert information about the rate of change and
starting level of the population to a detailed prediction of the population at later times.
43
9.2.1 A simple model for population growth
Let y(t) represent the size of a population at time t. We will assume that at time t = 0, the
population level is speciﬁed, i.e. y(0) = y
0
is some given constant. We want to ﬁnd the
population at later times, given information about birth and mortality rates, (both of which
are here assumed to be constant over time).
The population changes through births and mortality. Suppose that b > 0 is the per
capita average birth rate, and m > 0 the per capita average mortality rate. The assumption
that b, m are both constants is a simpliﬁcation that neglects many biological effects, but
will be used for simplicity in this ﬁrst example.
The statement that the population increases through births and decreases due to mor
tality, can be restated as
rate of change of y = rate of births −rate of mortality
where the rate of births is given by the product of the per capita average birth rate b and the
population size y. Similarly, the rate of mortality is given by my. Translating the rate of
43
Of course, we must keep in mind that such predictions are based on simplifying assumptions, and are to be
taken as an approximation of any real population growth.
9.2. Unlimited population growth 179
change into the corresponding derivative of y leads to
dy
dt
= by −my = (b − m)y.
Let us deﬁne the new constant,
k = b −m.
Then k is the net per capita growth rate of the population. We can distinguish two possible
cases: b > m means that there are more births then deaths, so we expect the population
to grow. b < m means that there are more deaths than births, so that the population will
eventually go extinct. There is also a marginal case that b = m, for which k = 0, where the
population does not change at all. To summarize, this simple model of unlimited growth
leads to the differential equation and initial condition:
dy
dt
= ky, y(0) = y
0
. (9.1)
Recall that a differential equation together with an initial condition is called an initial value
problem. To ﬁnd a solution to such a problem, we look for the function y(t) that describes
the population size at any future time t, given its initial size at time t = 0.
9.2.2 Separation of variables and integration
We here introduce the technique, separation of variables, that will be used in all the
examples described in this chapter. Since the differential equation (9.1) is relatively simple,
this ﬁrst example will be relatively straightforward. We would like to determine y(t) given
the differential equation
dy
dt
= ky.
Rather than integrating this equation as is
44
, we use an alternate approach, consid
ering dt and dy as “differentials” in the sense deﬁned in Section 6.1. We rearrange and
rewrite the above equation in the form
1
y
dy = k dt, (9.2)
This step of putting expressions involving the independent variable t on one side and ex
pressions involving the dependent variable y on the opposite side gives rise to the name
“separation of variables”.
Now, the LHS of Eqn. (9.2) depends only on the variable y, and the RHS only on t.
The constant k will not interfere with any integration step. Moreover, integrating each side
of Eqn. (9.2) can be carried out independently.
To determine the appropriate intervals for integration, we observe that when time
sweeps over some interval 0 ≤ t ≤ T (from initial to ﬁnal time), the value of y(t) will
44
We may be tempted to integrate both sides of this equation with respect to the independent variable t, e.g.
writing
dy
dt
dt =
ky dt + C, (where C is some constant), but this is not very useful, since the integral on
the right hand side (RHS) can only be carried out if we know the function y = y(t), which we are trying to
determine.
180 Chapter 9. Differential Equations
change over a corresponding interval y
0
≤ y ≤ y(T). Here y
0
is the given starting value
of y (prescribed by the initial condition in (9.1)). We do not yet know y(T), but our goal
is to ﬁnd that value, i.e to predict the future behaviour of y. Integrating leads to
y(T)
y0
1
y
dy =
T
0
k dt = k
T
0
dt,
ln y
y(T)
y0
= kt
T
0
,
ln y(T) −ln y(0) = k(T −0),
ln
y(T)
y
0
= kT,
y(T)
y
0
= e
kT
,
y(T) = y
0
e
kT
.
But this result holds for any arbitrary ﬁnal time, T. In other words, since this is true for any
time we chose, we can set T = t, arriving at the desired solution
y(t) = y
0
e
kt
. (9.3)
The above formula relates the predicted value of y at any time t to its initial value, and to
all the parameters of the problem. Observe that plugging in t = 0, we get y(0) = y
0
e
kt
=
y
0
e
0
= y
0
, so that the solution (9.3) satisﬁes the initial condition. We leave as an exercise
for the reader
45
to validate that the function in(9.3) also satisﬁes the differential equation in
(9.1).
By solving the initial value problem (9.1), we have determined that, under ideal con
ditions, when the net per capita growth rate t is constant, a population will grow expo
nentially with time. Recall that this validates results that we had encountered in our ﬁrst
calculus course.
9.3 Terminal velocity and steady states
Here we revisit the equation for velocity of a falling object that we ﬁrst encountered in Sec
tion 4.2.4. We wish to derive the appropriate differential equation governing that velocity,
and ﬁnd the solution v(t) as a function of time. We will ﬁrst reconsider the simplest case of
uniformly accelerated motion (i.e. where friction is neglected), as in Section 4.2.3. We then
include friction, as in Section 4.2.4 and use the new technique of separation of variables to
shortcut the method of solution.
45
This kind of check is good practice and helps to spot errors. Simply differentiate Eqn. (9.3) and show that the
result is the same as k times the original function, as required by the equation (9.1).
9.3. Terminal velocity and steady states 181
9.3.1 Ignoring friction: the uniformly accelerated case
Let v(t) and a(t) be the velocity and the acceleration, respectively of an object falling
under the force of gravity at time t. We take the positive direction to be downwards, for
convenience. Suppose that at time t = 0, the object starts from rest, i.e. the initial velocity
of the object is known to be v(0) = 0. When friction is neglected, the object will accelerate,
a(t) = g,
which is equivalent to the statement that the velocity increases at a constant rate,
dv
dt
= g. (9.4)
Because g is constant, we do not need to use separation of variables, i.e. we can integrate
each side of this equation directly
46
. Writing
dv
dt
dt =
g dt +C = g
dt +C,
where C is an integration constant, we arrive at
v(t) = gt +C. (9.5)
Here we have used (on the LHS) that v is the antiderivative of dv/dt. (equivalently, we can
simplify the integral
dv
dt
dt =
dv = v). Plugging in v(0) = 0 into Eqn. (9.5) leads to
0 = g · 0 +C = C, so the constant we need is C = 0 and the velocity satisﬁes
v(t) = gt.
We have just arrived at a result that parallels Eqn. (4.4) of Section 4.2.3 (in slightly different
notation).
9.3.2 Including friction: the case of terminal velocity
When a falling object experiences the force of friction, it cannot accelerate indeﬁnitely. In
fact, a frictional force retards the downwards motion. To a good approximation, that force
is proportional to the velocity.
A force balance for the falling object leads to
ma(t) = mg −γv(t),
where γ is the frictional coefﬁcient. For an object of constant mass, we can divide through
by m, so
a(t) = g −
γ
m
v(t).
46
It is important to note the distinction between this simple example and other cases where separation of vari
ables is required. It would not be wrong to use separation of variables to ﬁnd the solution for Eqn. (9.4), but it
would just be “overkill”, since simple integration of the each side of the equation “as is” does the job.
182 Chapter 9. Differential Equations
Let k = γ/m. Then, the velocity at any time satisﬁes the differential equation and initial
condition
dv
dt
= g −kv, v(0) = 0. (9.6)
We can ﬁnd the solution to this differential equation and predict the velocity at any time t
using separation of variables.
terminal velocity
time t
velocity v
0.0 10.0
0.0
20.0
Figure 9.1. The velocity v(t) as a function of time given by Eqn. (9.7) as found in
Section 9.3.2. Note that as time increases, the velocity approaches some constant terminal
velocity. The parameters used were g = 9.8 m/s
2
and k = 0.5.
Consider a time interval 0 ≤ t ≤ T, and suppose that, during this time interval, the
velocity changes from an initial value of v(0) = 0 to the ﬁnal value, v(T) at the ﬁnal time,
T. Then using separation of variables and integration, we get
dv
dt
= g −kv,
dv
g −kv
= dt,
v(T)
0
dv
g −kv
=
T
0
dt.
9.3. Terminal velocity and steady states 183
Substitute u = g − kv for the integral on the left hand side. Then du = −kdv, dv =
(−1/k)du, so we get an integral of the form
−
1
k
1
u
du = −
1
k
ln u.
After replacing u by g −kv, we arrive at
−
1
k
ln g −kv
v(T)
0
= t
T
0
.
We use the fact that v(0) = 0 to write this as
−
1
k
(lng −kv(T) −ln g) = T,
−
1
k
ln
g −kv(T)
g
= T,
ln
g −kv(T)
g
= −kT.
We are ﬁnished with the integration step, but the function we are trying to ﬁnd, v(T)
is still tangled up inside an expression involving the natural logarithm. Extricating it will
involve some subtle reasoning about signs because there is an absolute value to contend
with. As a ﬁrst step, we exponentiate both sides to remove the logarithm.
g −kv(T)
g
= e
−kT
⇒ g −kv(T) = ge
−kT
.
Because the constant g is positive, we could remove absolute values signs from it. To
simplify further, we have to consider the sign of the term inside the absolute value in the
numerator. In the case we are considering here, v(0) = 0. This will mean that the quantity
g −kv(T) is always be nonnegative (i.e. g −kv(T) ≥ 0). We will verify this fact shortly.
For the moment, supposing this is true, we can write
g −kv(T) = g − kv(T) = ge
−kT
,
and ﬁnally solve for v(T) to obtain our ﬁnal result,
v(T) =
g
k
(1 −e
−kT
).
Here we note that v(T) can never be larger than g/k since the term (1 − e
−kT
) is always
≤ 1. Hence, we were correct in assuming that g −kv(T) ≥ 0.
As before, the above formula relating velocity to time holds for any choice of the
ﬁnal time T, so we can write, in general,
v(t) =
g
k
(1 −e
−kt
). (9.7)
184 Chapter 9. Differential Equations
This is the solution to the initial value problem (9.6). It predicts the velocity of the
falling object through time. Note that we have arrived once more at the result obtained
in Eqn. (4.11), but using the technique of separation of variables
47
.
We graph the expression given in (9.7) in Figure 9.1. Note that as t increases, the
term e
−kt
decreases rapidly, so that the velocity approaches a constant whose value is
v(t) →
g
k
.
We call this the terminal velocity
48
.
9.3.3 Steady state
We might observe that the terminal velocity can also be found quite simply and directly
from the differential equation itself: it is the steady state of the differential equation, i.e.
the value for which no further change takes place. The steady state can be found by setting
the derivative in the differential equation, to zero, i.e. by letting
dv
dt
= 0.
When this is done, we arrive at
g −kv = 0 ⇒ v =
g
k
.
Thus, at steady state, the velocity of the falling object is indeed the same as the terminal
velocity that we have just discovered.
9.4 Related problems and examples
The example discussed in Section 9.3.2 belongs to a class of problems that share many
common features. Generally, this class is represented by linear differential equations of the
form
dy
dt
= a −by, (9.8)
with given initial condition y(0) = y
0
. Properties of this equation were studied in the
context of differential calculus in a previous semester. Now, with the same method as we
applied to the problem of terminal velocity, we can integrate this equation by separation of
variables, writing
dy
a −by
= dt
and proceeding as in the previous example. We arrive at its solution,
y(t) =
a
b
+
y
0
−
a
b
e
−bt
. (9.9)
47
It often happens that a differential equation can be solved using several different methods.
48
A similar plot of the solution of the differential equation (9.6) could be assembled using Euler’s method, as
studied in differential calculus. That is the numerical method alternative to the analytic technique discussed in this
chapter. The student may wish to review results obtained in a previous semester to appreciate the correspondence.
9.4. Related problems and examples 185
The steps are left as an exercise for the reader.
We observe that the steady state of the above equation is obtained by setting
dy
dt
= a −by = 0, i.e. y =
a
b
.
Indeed the solution given in the formula (9.9) has the property that as t increases, the
exponential term e
−bt
→ 0 so that the term in large brackets will vanish and y → a/b.
This means that from any initial value, y will approach its steady state level.
This equation has a number of important applications that arise in a variety of context.
A few of these are mentioned below.
9.4.1 Blood alcohol
Let y(t) be the level of alcohol in the blood of an individual during a party. Suppose that
the average rate of drinking is gradual and constant (i.e. small sips are continually taken,
so that the rate of input of alcohol is approximately constant). Further, assume that alcohol
is detoxiﬁed in the liver at a rate proportional to its blood level. Then an equation of the
form (9.8) would describe the blood level over the period of drinking. y(0) = 0 would
signify the absence of alcohol in the body at the beginning of the evening. The constant a
would reﬂect the rate of intake per unit volume of the individual’s blood: larger people take
longer to “get drunk” for a given amount consumed
49
. The constant b represents the rate of
decay of alcohol per unit time due to degradation by the liver, assumed constant
50
; young
healthy drinkers have a higher value of b than those who can no longer metabolize alcohol
as efﬁciently.
The solution (9.9) has several features of note: it illustrates the fact that alcohol
would increase from the initial level, but only up to a maximum of a/b, where the intake
and degradation balance. Indeed, the level y = a/b represents a steady state level (as
long as drinking continues). Of course, this level could be toxic to the drinker, and the
assumptions of the model may break down in that region! In the phase of “recovery”,
after drinking stops, the above differential equation no longer describes the level of blood
alcohol. Instead, the process of recovery is represented by
dy
dt
= −by, y(0) = y
0
. (9.10)
The level of blood alcohol then decays exponentially with rate b from its level at the mo
ment that drinking ends. We show this typical pattern in Figure 9.2.
9.4.2 Chemical kinetics
The same ideas apply to any chemical substance that is formed at a constant rate (or sup
plied at a constant rate) a, and then breaks down with rate proportional to its concentration.
We then call the constant b the “decay rate constant”.
49
Of course, we are here assuming a constant intake rate, as though the alcohol is being continually sipped
all evening at a uniform rate. Most people do not drink this way, instead quafﬁng a few large drinks over some
hour(s). It is possible to describe this, but we will not do so in this chapter.
50
This is also a simplifying assumption, as the rate of metabolism can depend on other factors, such as food
intake.
186 Chapter 9. Differential Equations
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
0 2 4 6 8 10
Blood Alcohol level
Figure 9.2. The level of alcohol in the blood is described by Eqn. (9.8) for the ﬁrst
two hours of drinking. At t = 2h, the drinking stopped (so a = 0 from then on). The level
of alcohol in the blood then decays back to zero, following Eqn. (9.10).
The variable y(t) represents the concentration of chemical at time t, and the same
differential equation describes this chemical process. As above, given any initial level of
the substance, y(t) = y
0
, the level of y will eventually approach the steady state, y = a/b.
9.5 Emptying a container
In this section we investigate a new problem in which the differential equation that de
scribes a process will be derived from basic physical principles
51
. We will look at the ﬂow
of ﬂuid leaking out of a container, and use mass balance to derive a differential equation
model. When this is done, we will also use separation of variables to predict how long it
takes for the container to be emptied.
We will assume that the container has a small hole at its base. The rate of emptying
of the container will depend on the height of ﬂuid in the container above the hole
52
. We
can derive a simple differential equation that describes the rate that the height of the ﬂuid
changes using the following physical argument.
9.5.1 Conservation of mass
Suppose that the container is a cylinder, with a constant cross sectional area A > 0, as
shown in Fig. 9.3. Suppose that the area of the hole is a. The rate that ﬂuid leaves through
the hole must balance with the rate that ﬂuid decreases in the container. This principle is
called mass balance. We will here assume that the density of water is constant, so that we
can talk about the net changes in volume (rather than mass).
51
This example is particularly instructive. First, it shows precisely how physical laws can be combined to
formulate a model, then it shows how the problem can be recast as a single ODE in one dependent variable.
Finally, it illustrates a slightly different integral.
52
As we have assumed that the hole is at h = 0, we henceforth consider the height of the ﬂuid surface, h(t) to
be the same as ”the height of ﬂuid above the hole”.
9.5. Emptying a container 187
A
v t Δ
a
a
h
Figure 9.3. We investigate the time it takes to empty a container full of ﬂuid by
deriving a differential equation model and solving it using the methods developed in this
chapter. A is the crosssectional area of the cylindrical tank, a is the crosssectional area
of the hole through which ﬂuid drains, v(t) is the velocity of the ﬂuid, and h(t) is the time
dependent height of ﬂuid remaining in the tank (indicated by the dashed line). The volume
of ﬂuid leaking out in a time span ∆t is av∆t  see small cylindrical volume indicated on
the right.
We refer to V (t) as the volume of ﬂuid in the container at time t. Note that for the
cylindrical container, V (t) = Ah(t) where A is the crosssectional area and h(t) is the
height of the ﬂuid at time t. The rate of change of V is
dV
dt
= −(rate volume lost as ﬂuid ﬂows out).
(The minus sign indicates that the volume is decreasing).
At every second, some amount of ﬂuid leaves through the hole. Suppose we are
told that the velocity of the water molecules leaving the hole is precisely v(t) in units of
cm/sec. (We will ﬁnd out how to determine this velocity shortly.) Then in one second,
those particles have moved a distance v cm/sec · 1 sec = v cm. In fact, all the particles in
a little cylinder of length v behind these molecules have also left the hole. Indeed, if we
know the area of the hole, we can determine precisely what volume of water exits through
the hole each second, namely
rate volume lost as ﬂuid ﬂows out = va.
(The small inset in Fig. 9.3 shows a little “cylindrical unit” of ﬂuid that ﬂows out of the
hole per second. The area is a and the length of that little volume is v. Thus the volume
leaving per second is va.)
So far we have a relationship between the volume of ﬂuid in the tank and the velocity
of the water exiting the hole:
dV
dt
= −av.
Now we need to determine the velocity v of the ﬂow to complete the formulation of the
problem.
188 Chapter 9. Differential Equations
9.5.2 Conservation of energy
The ﬂuid “picks up speed” because it has “dropped” by a height h from the top of the ﬂuid
surface to the hole. In doing so, a small mass of water has simply exchanged some potential
energy (due to its relative height above the hole) for kinetic energy (expressed by how fast
it is moving). Potential energy of a small mass of water (m) at height h will be mgh,
whereas when the water ﬂows out of the hole, its kinetic energy is given by (1/2)mv
2
where v is velocity. Thus, for these to balance (so that total energy is conserved) we have
1
2
mv
2
= mgh.
(Here v = v(t) is the instantaneous velocity of the ﬂuid leaving the hole and h = h(t) is
the height of the water column.) This allows us to relate the velocity of the ﬂuid leaving
the hole to the height of the water in the tank, i.e.
v
2
= 2gh ⇒ v =
2gh. (9.11)
In fact, both the height of ﬂuid and its exit velocity are constantly changing as the ﬂuid
drains, so we might write [v(t)]
2
= 2gh(t) or v(t) =
2gh(t). We have arrived at this
result using an energy balance argument.
9.5.3 Putting it together
We now combine the various pieces of information to arrive at the model, a differential
equation for a single (unknown) function of time. There are three timedependent variables
that were discussed above, the volume V (t), the height h(t), of the velocity v(t). It proves
convenient to express everything in terms of the height of water in the tank, h(t), though
this choice is to some extent arbitrary. Keeping units in an equation consistent is essential.
Checking for unit consistency can help to uncover errors in equations, including differential
equations.
Recall that the volume of the water in the tank, V (t) is related to the height of ﬂuid
h(t) by
V (t) = Ah(t),
where A > 0 is a constant, the crosssectional area of the tank. We can simplify as follows:
dV
dt
=
d(Ah(t))
dt
= A
d(h(t))
dt
.
But by previous steps and Eqn. (9.11)
dV
dt
= −av = −a
2gh.
Thus
A
d(h(t))
dt
= −a
2gh,
or simply put,
dh
dt
= −
a
A
2gh = −k
√
h. (9.12)
9.5. Emptying a container 189
where k is a constant that depends on the size and shape of the cylinder and its hole:
k =
a
A
2g.
If the area of the hole is very small relative to the crosssectional area of the tank, then
k will be very small, so that the tank will drain very slowly (i.e. the rate of change in h
per unit time will not be large). On a planet with a very high gravitational force, the same
tank will drain more quickly. A taller column of water drains faster. Once its height has
been reduced, its rate of draining also slows down. We comment that Equation (9.12) has
a minus sign, signifying that the height of the ﬂuid decreases.
Using simple principles such as conservation of mass and conservation of energy,
we have shown that the height h(t) of water in the tank at time t satisﬁes the differential
equation (9.12). Putting this together with the initial condition (height of ﬂuid h
0
at time
t = 0), we arrive at initial value problem to solve:
dh
dt
= −k
√
h, h(0) = h
0
. (9.13)
Clearly, this equation is valid only for h nonnegative. We also remark that Eqn. (9.13) is
nonlinear
53
as it involves the variable h in a nonlinear term,
√
h. Next, we use separation
of variables to ﬁnd the height as a function of time.
9.5.4 Solution by separation of variables
The equation (9.13) shows how height of ﬂuid is related to its rate of change, but we are
interested in an explicit formula for ﬂuid height h versus time t. To obtain that relationship,
we must determine the solution to this differential equation. We do this using separation of
variables. (We will also use the initial condition h(0) = h
0
that accompanies Eqn. (9.13).)
As usual, rewrite the equation in the separated form,
dh
√
h
= −kdt,
We integrate from t = 0 to t = T, during which the height of ﬂuid that started as h
0
becomes some new height h(T) to be determined.
h(T)
h0
1
√
h
dh = −k
T
0
dt.
Now integrate both sides and simplify:
h
1/2
(1/2)
h(T)
h0
= −kT
2
h(T) −
h
0
= −kT
53
In many cases, nonlinear differential equations are more challenging than linear ones. However, examples
chosen in this chapter are simple enough that we will not experience the true challenges of such nonlinearities.
190 Chapter 9. Differential Equations
h(T) = −k
T
2
+
h
0
h(T) =
h
0
−k
T
2
2
.
Since this is true for any time t, we can also write the form of the solution as
h(t) =
h
0
−k
t
2
2
. (9.14)
Eqn. (9.14) predicts ﬂuid height remaining in the tank versus time t. In Fig. 9.4 we show
some of the “solution curves”
54
, i.e. functions of the formEqn. (9.14) for a variety of initial
ﬂuid height values h
0
. We can also use our results to predict the emptying time, as shown
in the next section.
h(t)
time t
<= initial height of fluid
emptying time
V
Emptying a fluidfilled container
0.0 20.0
0.0
10.0
Figure 9.4. Solution curves obtained by plotting Eqn. (9.14) for three different
initial heights of ﬂuid in the container, h
0
= 2.5, 5, 10. The parameter k = 0.4 in
each case. The “V” points to the time it takes the tank to empty starting from a height of
h(t) = 10.
54
As before, this ﬁgure was produced by plotting the analytic solution (9.14). A numerical method alternative
would use Euler’s Method and the spreadsheet to obtain the (approximate) solution directly from the initial value
problem (9.13).
9.6. Density dependent growth 191
9.5.5 How long will it take the tank to empty?
The tank will be empty when the height of ﬂuid is zero. Setting h(t) = 0 in Eqn. 9.14
h
0
−k
t
2
2
= 0.
Solving this equation for the emptying time t
e
, we get
k
t
e
2
=
h
0
⇒ t
e
=
2
√
h
0
k
.
The time it takes to empty the tank depends on the initial height of water in the tank. Three
examples are shown in Figure 9.4 for initial heights of h
0
= 2.5, 5, 10. The emptying time
depends on the squareroot of the initial height. This means, for instance, that doubling the
height of ﬂuid initially in the tank only increases the time it takes by a factor of
√
2 ≈ 1.41.
Making the hole smaller has a more direct “proportional” effect, since we have found that
k = (a/A)
√
2g.
9.6 Density dependent growth
The simple model discussed in Section 9.2 for population growth has an unrealistic feature
of unlimited explosive exponential growth. To correct for this unrealistic feature, a common
assumption is that the rate of growth is “density dependent”. In this section, we consider
a revised differential equation that describes such growth, and use the new tools to analyze
its predictions. In place of our previous notation we will now use N to represent the size
of a population.
9.6.1 The logistic equation
The logistic equation is the simplest density dependent growth equation, and we study its
behaviour below.
Let N(t) be the size of a population at time t. Clearly, we expect N(t) ≥ 0 for all
time t, since a population cannot be negative. We will assume that the initial population is
known, N(0) = N
0
. The logistic differential equation states that the rate of change of the
population is given by
dN
dt
= rN
K −N
K
. (9.15)
Here r > 0 is called the intrinsic growth rate and K > 0 is called the carrying capacity.
K reﬂects that size of the population that can be sustained by the given environment. We
can understand this equation as a modiﬁed growth law in which the “density dependent”
term, r(K −N)/K, replaces the previous constant net growth rate k.
192 Chapter 9. Differential Equations
9.6.2 Scaling the equation
The form of the equation can be simpliﬁed if we measure the population in units of the
carrying capacity, instead of “numbers of individuals”. i.e. if we deﬁne a new quantity
y(t) =
N(t)
K
.
This procedure is called scaling. To see this, consider dividing each side of the logistic
equation (9.15) by the constant K. Then
1
K
dN
dt
=
r
K
N
K −N
K
.
We now group terms conveniently, forming
d(
N
K
)
dt
= r
N
K
1 −
N
K
.
Replacing (N/K) by y in each case, we obtain the scaled equation and initial condition
given by
dy
dt
= ry(1 −y), y(0) = y
0
. (9.16)
Now the variable y(t) measures population size in “units” of the carrying capacity, and
y
0
= N
0
/K is the scaled initial population level. Here again is an initial value problem,
like Eqn. (9.13), but unlike Eqn. (9.1), the logistic differential equation is nonlinear. That
is, the variable y appears in a nonlinear expression (in fact a quadratic) in the equation.
9.6.3 Separation of variables
Here we will solve Eqn. (9.16) by separation of variables. The idea is essentially the same
as our previous examples, but is somewhat more involved. To show an alternative method
of handling the integration, we will treat both sides as indeﬁnite integrals. Separating the
variables leads to
1
y(1 −y)
dy = r dt
1
y(1 −y)
dy =
r dt +K.
The integral on the right will lead to rt + K where K is some constant of integration that
we need to incorporate since we do not have endpoints on our integrals. But we must work
harder to evaluate the integral on the left. We can do so by partial fractions, the technique
described in Section 6.6. Details are given in Section 9.6.4.
9.6.4 Application of partial fractions
Let
I =
1
y(1 −y)
dy.
9.6. Density dependent growth 193
Then for some constants A, B we can write
I =
A
y
+
B
1 −y
dy = Aln y −Bln 1 −y.
(The minus sign in front of B stems from the fact that letting u = 1 − y would lead to
du = −dy.) We can ﬁnd A, B from the fact that
A
y
+
B
1 −y
=
1
y(1 −y)
,
so that
A(1 −y) +By = 1.
This must be true for all y, and in particular, substituting in y = 0 and y = 1 leads to
A = 1, B = 1 so that
I = ln y −ln 1 −y = ln
y
1 −y
.
9.6.5 The solution of the logistic equation
We now have to extract the quantity y from the equation
ln
y
1 −y
= rt +K.
That is, we want y as a function of t. After exponentiating both sides we need to remove
the absolute value. We will now assume that y is initially smaller than 1, and show that it
remains so. In that case, everything inside the absolute value is positive, and we can write
y(t)
(1 −y(t))
= e
rt+K
= e
K
e
rt
= Ce
rt
.
In the above step, we have simply renamed the constant, e
K
by the new name C for sim
plicity. C > 0 is now also an arbitrary constant whose value will be determined from the
initial conditions. Indeed, if we substitute t = 0 into the most recent equation, we ﬁnd that
y(0)
(1 −y(0))
= Ce
0
= C,
so that
C =
y
0
(1 −y
0
)
.
We will use this fact shortly. What remains now is some algebra to isolate the desired
function y(t)
y(t) = (1 −y(t))Ce
rt
.
y(t)
1 +Ce
rt
= Ce
rt
.
194 Chapter 9. Differential Equations
y(t) =
Ce
rt
(1 +Ce
rt
)
=
1
(1/C)e
−rt
+ 1
.
The desired function is now expressed in terms of the time t, and the constants r, C. We
can also express it in terms of the initial value of y, i.e. y
0
, by using what we know to be
true about the constant C, i.e. C = y
0
/(1 −y
0
). When we do so, we arrive at
y(t) =
1
1+y0
y0
e
−rt
+ 1
=
y
0
(y
0
+ (1 −y
0
)e
−rt
)
. (9.17)
Some typical solution curves of the logistic equation are shown in Fig. 9.5.
y(t)
time t
Solutions to Logistic equation
0.0 30.0
0.0
1.0
Figure 9.5. Solution curves for y(t) in the scaled form of the logistic equation
based on (9.18). We show the predicted behaviour of y(t) as given by Eqn. (9.17) for three
different initial conditions, y
0
= 0.1, 0.25, 0.5. Note that all solutions approach the value
y = 1.
9.6.6 What this solution tells us
We have arrived at the function that describes the scaled population as a function of time
as predicted by the scaled logistic equation, (9.16). The level of population (in units of the
carrying capacity K) follows the timedependent function
y(t) =
y
0
(y
0
+ (1 −y
0
)e
−rt
)
. (9.18)
9.7. Extensions and other population models: the “Law of Mortality” 195
We can convert this result to an equivalent expression for the unscaled total population N(t)
by recalling that y(t) = N(t)/K. Substituting this for y(t), and noting that y
0
= N
0
/K
leads to
N(t) =
N
0
(N
0
+ (K −N
0
)e
−rt
)
. (9.19)
It is left as an exercise for the reader to check this claim.
Now recall that r > 0. This means that e
−rt
is a decreasing function of time. There
fore, (9.18) implies that, after a long time, the term e
−rt
in the denominator will be negli
gibly small, and so
y(t) →
y
0
y
0
= 1,
so that y will approach the value 1. This means that
(N/K) →1 or simply N(t) →K.
The population will thus settle into a constant level, i.e., a steady state, at which no further
change will occur.
As an aside, we observe that this too, could have been predicted directly from the
differential equation. By setting dy/dt = 0, we ﬁnd that
0 = ry(1 −y),
which suggests that y = 1 is a steady state. (This is also true for the less interesting case
of no population, i.e. y = 0 is also a steady state.) Similarly, this could have been found
by setting the derivative to zero in Eqn. (9.15), the original, unscaled logistic differential
equation. Doing so leads to
dN
dt
= 0 ⇒rN
K −N
K
= 0.
If r > 0, the only values of N satisfying this steady state equation are N = 0 or N =
K. This implies that either N = 0 or N = K are steady states. The former is not too
interesting. It states the obvious fact that if there is no population, then there can be no
population growth. The latter reﬂects that N = K, the carrying capacity, is the population
size that will be sustained by the environment.
In summary, we have shown that the behaviour of the logistic equation for population
growth is more realistic than the simpler exponential growth we studied earlier. We saw
in Figure 9.5, that a small population will grow, but only up to some constant level (the
carrying capacity). Integration, and in particular the use of partial fractions allowed us to
make a full prediction of the behaviour of the population level as a function of time, given
by Eqn. (9.19).
9.7 Extensions and other population models: the
“Law of Mortality”
There are many variants of the logistic model that are used to investigate the growth or
mortality of a population. Here we extend tools to another example, the gradual decline of
196 Chapter 9. Differential Equations
a group of individuals born at the same time. Such a group is called a “cohort”.
55
. In 1825,
Gompertz suggested that the rate of mortality, m would depend on the age of the individu
als. Because we consider a group of people who were born at the same time, we can trade
”age” for ”time”. Essentially, Gompertz assumed that mortality is not constant: it is low
at ﬁrst, and increase as individuals age. Gompertz argued that mortality increases expo
nentially. This turns out to be equivalent to the assumption that the logarithm of mortality
increases linearly with time.
56
It is easy to see that these two statements are equivalent:
Suppose we assume that for some constants A > 0, µ > 0,
ln(m(t)) = A +µt. (9.20)
Then Eqn. (9.20) means that
t
ln( ) m
A
slope µ
log mortality
age,
Figure 9.6. In the Gompertz Law of Mortality, it is assumed that the log of mor
tality increases linearly with time, as depicted by Eqn. 9.20 and by the solid curve in this
diagram. Here the slope of ln(m) versus time (or age) is µ. For real populations, the
mortality looks more like the dashed curve.
m(t) = e
A+µt
= e
A
e
µt
Since Ais constant, so is e
A
. For simplicity we deﬁne Let us deﬁne m
0
= e
A
. (m
0
= m(0)
is the socalled “birth mortality” i.e. value of m at age 0.) Thus, the timedependent
mortality is
m = m(t) = m
0
e
µt
. (9.21)
9.7.1 Aging and Survival curves for a cohort:
We now study a population model having Gompertz mortality, together with the following
additional assumptions.
55
This section was formulated with help from Lu Fan
56
In actual fact, this is likely true for some range of ages. Infant mortality is generally higher than mortality
for young children, whereas mortality levels off or even decreases slightly for those oldest old who have survived
past the average lifespan.
9.8. Summary 197
1. All individuals are assumed to be identical.
2. There is “natural” mortality, but no other type of removal. This means we ignore the
mortality caused by epidemics, by violence and by wars.
3. We consider a single cohort, and assume that no new individuals are introduced (e.g.
by immigration)
57
.
We will now study the size of a “cohort”, i.e. a group of people who were born in the same
year. We will denote by N(t) the number of people in this group who are alive at time t,
where t is time since birth, i.e. age. Let N(0) = N
0
be the initial number of individuals in
the cohort.
9.7.2 Gompertz Model
All the people in the cohort were born at time (age) t = 0, and there were N
0
of them at
that time. That number changes with time due to mortality. Indeed,
The rate of change of cohort size = −[number of deaths per unit time]
= −[mortality rate] · [cohort size]
Translating to mathematical notation, we arrive at the differential equation
dN(t)
dt
= −m(t)N(t),
and using information about the size of the cohort at birth leads to the initial condition,
N(0) = N
0
. Together, this leads to the initial value problem
dN(t)
dt
= −m(t)N(t), N(0) = N
0
.
Note similarity to Eqn. (9.1), but now mortality is timedependent.
In the Problem set, we apply separation of variables and integrate over the time in
terval [0, T]: to show that the remaining population at age t is
N(t) = N
0
e
−
m
0
µ
(e
µt
−1)
.
9.8 Summary
In this chapter, we used integration methods to ﬁnd the analytical solutions to a variety of
differential equations where initial values were prescribed.
We investigated a number of population growth models:
1. Exponential growth, given by
dy
dt
= ky, with initial population level y(0) = y
0
was investigated (Eqn. (9.1)). This model had an unrealistic feature that growth is
unlimited.
57
Note that new births would contribute to other cohorts.
198 Chapter 9. Differential Equations
2. The Logistic equation
dN
dt
= rN
K−N
K
was analyzed (Eqn. (9.15)), showing that
densitydependent growth can correct for the above unrealistic feature.
3. The Gompertz equation,
dN(t)
dt
= −m(t)N(t), was solved to understand how age
dependent mortality affects a cohort of individuals.
In each of these cases, we used separation of variables to “integrate” the differential
equation, and predict the population as a function of time.
We also investigated several other physical models in this chapter, including the
velocity of a falling object subject to drag force. This led us to study a differential equation
of the form
dy
dt
= a − by. By slight reinterpretation of terms in this equation, we can use
results to understand chemical kinetics and blood alcohol levels, as well as a host of other
scientiﬁc applications.
Section 9.5, the “centerpiece” of this chapter, illustrated the detailed steps that go into
the formulation of a differential equation model for ﬂow of liquid out of a container. Here
we saw how conservation statements and simplifying assumptions are interpreted together,
to arrive at a differential equation model. Such ideas occur in many scientiﬁc problems, in
chemistry, physics, and biology.
Chapter 10
Inﬁnite series, improper
integrals, and Taylor
series
10.1 Introduction
This chapter has several important and challenging goals. The ﬁrst of these is to under
stand how concepts that were discussed for ﬁnite series and integrals can be meaningfully
extended to inﬁnite series and improper integrals  i.e. integrals of functions over an inﬁ
nite domain. In this part of the discussion, we will ﬁnd that the notion of convergence and
divergence will be important.
A second theme will be that of approximation of functions in terms of power series,
also called Taylor series. Such series can be described informally as inﬁnite polynomials
(i.e. polynomials containing inﬁnitely many terms). Understanding when these objects are
meaningful is also related to the issue of convergence, so we use the background assembled
in the ﬁrst part of the chapter to address such concepts arising in the second part.
HOA
x
y
y=f(x)
x
0
LA
Figure 10.1. The function y = f(x) (solid heavy curve) is shown together with its
linear approximation (LA, dashed line) at the point x
0
, and a better “higher order” approx
imation (HOA, thin solid curve). Notice that this better approximation stays closer to the
graph of the function near x
0
. In this chapter, we discuss how such better approximations
can be obtained.
The theme of approximation has appeared often in our calculus course. In a previous
199
200 Chapter 10. Inﬁnite series, improper integrals, and Taylor series
semester, we discussed a linear approximationto a function. The idea was to approximate
the value of the function close to a point on its graph using a straight line (the tangent line).
We noted in doing so that the approximation was good only close to the point of tangency.
Further away, the graph of the functions curves away from that straight line. This leads
naturally to the question: can we do better in making this approximation if we include
other terms to describe this “curving away”? Here we extend such linear approximation
methods. Our goal is to increase the accuracy of the linear approximation by including
higher order terms (quadratic, cubic, etc), i.e. to ﬁnd a polynomial that approximates the
given function. This idea forms an important goal in this chapter.
We ﬁrst review the idea of series introduced in Chapter 1.
10.2 Convergence and divergence of series
Recall the geometric series discussed in Section 1.6.
The sum of a ﬁnite geometric series,
S
n
= 1 +r +r
2
+. . . +r
n
=
n
¸
k=0
r
k
, is S
n
=
1 −r
n+1
1 −r
. (10.1)
We also review deﬁnitions discussed in Section 1.7
Deﬁnition: Convergence of inﬁnite series
An inﬁnite series that has a ﬁnite sum is said to be convergent. Otherwise it is divergent.
Deﬁnition: Partial sums and convergence
Suppose that S is an (inﬁnite) series whose terms are a
k
. Then the partial sums, S
n
, of
this series are
S
n
=
n
¸
k=0
a
k
.
We say that the sum of the inﬁnite series is S, and write
S =
∞
¸
k=0
a
k
, provided that S = lim
n→∞
S
n
= lim
n→∞
n
¸
k=0
a
k
.
That is, we consider the inﬁnite series as the limit of partial sums S
n
as the number of
terms n is increased. If this limit exists, we say that the inﬁnite series converges
58
to S.
This leads to the following conclusion:
58
If the limit does not exist, we say that the series diverges.
10.2. Convergence and divergence of series 201
The sum of an inﬁnite geometric series,
S = 1 +r +r
2
+. . . +r
k
+. . . =
∞
¸
k=0
r
k
=
1
1 −r
, provided r < 1. (10.2)
If this inequality is not satisﬁed, then we say that this sum does not exist (meaning that it is
not ﬁnite).
It is important to remember that an inﬁnite series, i.e. a sum with inﬁnitely many
terms added up, can exhibit either one of these two very different behaviours. It may
converge in some cases, as the ﬁrst example shows, or diverge (fail to converge) in other
cases. We will see examples of each of these trends again. It is essential to be able to
distinguish the two. Divergent series (or series that diverge under certain conditions) must
be handled with particular care, for otherwise, we may ﬁnd contradictions or “seemingly
reasonable” calculations that have meaningless results.
We can think of convergence or divergence of series using a geometric analogy. If we
start on the number line at the origin and take a sequence of steps {a
0
, a
1
, a
2
, . . . , a
k
, . . .},
we can think of S =
¸
∞
k=0
a
k
as the total distance we have travelled. S converges if that
distance remains ﬁnite and if we approach some ﬁxed number.
"divergence"
"convergence"
Figure 10.2. An informal schematic illustrating the concept of convergence and
divergence of inﬁnite series. Here we show only a few terms of the inﬁnite series: from
left to right, each step is a term in the series. In the top example, the sum of the steps gets
closer and closer to some (ﬁnite) value. In the bottom example, the steps lead to an ever
increasing total sum.
In order for the sum of ‘inﬁnitely many things’ to add up to a ﬁnite number, the
terms have to get smaller. But just getting smaller is not, in itself, enough to guarantee
convergence. (We will show this later on by considering the harmonic series.) There are
rigorous mathematical tests which help determine whether a series converges or not. We
discuss some of these tests in Appendix 11.9.
202 Chapter 10. Inﬁnite series, improper integrals, and Taylor series
10.3 Improper integrals
We will see that there is a close connection between certain inﬁnite series and improper
integrals, i.e. integrals over an inﬁnite domain. We have already encountered an example of
an improper integral in Section 3.8.5 and in the context of radioactive decay in Section 8.4.
Recall the following deﬁnition:
Deﬁnition
An improper integral is an integral performed over an inﬁnite domain, e.g.
∞
a
f(x) dx.
The value of such an integral is understood to be a limit, as given in the following deﬁnition:
∞
a
f(x) dx = lim
b→∞
b
a
f(x) dx.
i.e. we evaluate an improper integral by ﬁrst computing a deﬁnite integral over a ﬁnite
domain a ≤ x ≤ b, and then taking a limit as the endpoint b moves off to larger and larger
values. The deﬁnite integral can be interpreted as an area under the graph of the function.
The essential question being addressed here is whether that area remains bounded when we
include the “inﬁnite tail” of the function (i.e. as the endpoint b moves to larger values.) For
some functions (whose values get small enough fast enough) the answer is “yes”.
Deﬁnition
When the limit shown above exists, we say that the improper integral converges. Other
wise we say that the improper integral diverges.
With this in mind, we compute a number of classic integrals:
10.3.1 Example: A decaying exponential: convergent
improper integral
Here we recall that the improper integral of a decaying exponential converges. (We have
seen this earlier, in Section 3.8.5, and again in applications in Sections 4.5 and 8.4.1. Here
we recap this important result in the context of our discussion of improper integrals.) Sup
pose that r > 0 and let
I =
∞
0
e
−rt
dt ≡ lim
b→∞
b
0
e
−rt
dt.
Then note that b > 0 so that
I = lim
b→∞
−
1
r
e
−rt
b
0
= −
1
r
lim
b→∞
(e
−rb
−e
0
) = −
1
r
( lim
b→∞
e
−rb
. .. .
0
−1) =
1
r
.
10.3. Improper integrals 203
We have used the fact that lim
b→∞
e
−rb
= 0 since (for r, b > 0) the exponential function
is decreasing with increasing b. Thus the limit exists (is ﬁnite) and the integral converges.
In fact it converges to the value I = 1/r.
1
x
y
y=
1/x
y=1/x
2
Figure 10.3. In Sections 10.3.2 and 10.3.3, we consider two functions whose
values decrease along the x axis, f(x) = 1/x and f(x) = 1/x
2
. We show that one, but not
the other encloses a ﬁnite (bounded) area over the interval (1, ∞). To do so, we compute
an improper integral for each one. The heavy arrow is meant to remind us that we are
considering areas over an unbounded domain.
10.3.2 Example: The improper integral of 1/x diverges
We nowconsider a classic and counterintuitive result, and one of the most important results
in this chapter. Consider the function
y = f(x) =
1
x
.
Examining the graph of this function for positive x, e.g. for the interval (1, ∞), we know
that values decrease to zero as x increases
59
. The function is not only itself bounded, but
also falls to arbitrarily small values as x increases. Nevertheless, this is not enough to
guarantee that the enclosed area remains ﬁnite! We show this in the following calculation.
I =
∞
1
1
x
dx = lim
b→∞
b
a
1
x
dx = lim
b→∞
ln(x)
b
1
= lim
b→∞
(ln(b) −ln(1))
I = lim
b→∞
ln(b) = ∞
The fact that we get an inﬁnite value for this integral follows from the observation that
ln(b) increases without bound as b increases, that is the limit does not exist (is not ﬁnite).
Thus the area under the curve f(x) = 1/x over the interval 1 ≤ x ≤ ∞is inﬁnite. We say
that the improper integral of 1/x diverges (or does not converge). We will use this result
again in Section 10.4.1.
59
We do not chose the interval (0, ∞) because this function is undeﬁned at x = 0. We want here to emphasize
the behaviour at inﬁnity, not the blow up that occurs close to x = 0.
204 Chapter 10. Inﬁnite series, improper integrals, and Taylor series
10.3.3 Example: The improper integral of 1/x
2
converges
Now consider the related function
y = f(x) =
1
x
2
, and the corresponding integral I =
∞
1
1
x
2
dx
Then
I = lim
b→∞
b
1
x
−2
dx. = lim
b→∞
(−x
−1
)
b
1
= − lim
b→∞
1
b
−1
= 1.
Thus, the limit exists, and, in fact, I = 1, so, in contrast to the Example 10.3.2, this integral
converges.
We observe that the behaviours of the improper integrals of the functions 1/x and
1/x
2
are very different. The former diverges, while the latter converges. The only differ
ence between these functions is the power of x. As shown in Figure 10.3, that power affects
how rapidly the graph “falls off” to zero as x increases. The function 1/x
2
decreases much
faster than 1/x. (Consequently 1/x
2
has a sufﬁciently “slim” inﬁnite “tail”, that the area
under its graph does not become inﬁnite  not an easy concept to digest!) This observations
leads us to wonder what power p is needed to make the improper integral of a function
1/x
p
converge. We answer this question below.
10.3.4 When does the integral of 1/x
p
converge?
Here we consider an arbitrary power, p, that can be any real number. We ask when the
corresponding improper integral converges or diverges. Let
I =
∞
1
1
x
p
dx.
For p = 1 we have already established that this integral diverges (Section 10.3.2), and for
p = 2 we have seen that it is convergent (Section 10.3.3). By a similar calculation, we ﬁnd
that
I = lim
b→∞
x
1−p
(1 −p)
b
1
= lim
b→∞
1
1 −p
b
1−p
−1
.
Thus this integral converges provided that the termb
1−p
does not “blow up” as b increases.
For this to be true, we require that the exponent (1 − p) should be negative, i.e. 1 −p < 0
or p > 1. In this case, we have
I =
1
p −1
.
To summarize our result,
∞
1
1
x
p
dx converges if p > 1, diverges if p ≤ 1.
10.3. Improper integrals 205
Examples:
1/x
p
that do or do not converge
1. The integral
∞
1
1
√
x
dx, diverges.
We see this from the following argument:
√
x = x
1
2
, so p =
1
2
< 1. Thus, by the
general result, this integral diverges.
2. The integral
∞
1
x
−1.01
dx, converges.
Here p = 1.01 > 1, so the result implies convergence of the integral.
10.3.5 Integral comparison tests
The integrals discussed above can be used to make comparisons that help us to identify
when other improper integrals converge or diverge
60
. The following important result estab
lishes how these comparisons work:
Suppose we are given two functions, f(x) and g(x), both continuous on some inﬁnite
interval [a, ∞). Suppose, moreover, that, at all points on this interval, the ﬁrst function is
smaller than the second, i.e.
0 ≤ f(x) ≤ g(x).
Then the following conclusions
a
can be made:
1.
∞
a
f(x) dx ≤
∞
a
g(x) dx. (This means that the area under f(x) is smaller than
the area under g(x).)
2. If
∞
a
g(x) dx converges, then
∞
a
f(x) dx converges. (If the larger area is ﬁnite,
so is the smaller one)
3. If
∞
a
f(x) dx diverges, then
∞
a
g(x) dx diverges. (If the smaller area is inﬁnite,
so is the larger one.)
a
These statements have to be carefully noted. What is assumed and what is concluded works “one way”. That
is the order “if..then” is important. Reversing that order leads to a common error.
60
The reader should notice the similarity of these ideas to the comparisons made for inﬁnite series in the
Appendix 11.9.2. This similarity stems from the fact that there is a close connection between series and integrals,
a recurring theme in this course.
206 Chapter 10. Inﬁnite series, improper integrals, and Taylor series
Example: comparison of improper integrals
We can determine that the integral
∞
1
x
1 +x
3
dx converges
by noting that for all x > 0
0 ≤
x
1 +x
3
≤
x
x
3
=
1
x
2
.
Thus
∞
1
x
1 +x
3
dx ≤
∞
1
1
x
2
dx.
Since the larger integral on the right is known to converge, so does the smaller integral on
the left.
10.4 Comparing integrals and series
The convergence of inﬁnite series was discussed earlier, in Section 1.7 and here again in
Section 10.2. Many tests for convergence are provided in the Appendix 11.9, and will not
be discussed in detail due to time and space constraints. However, an interesting connection
exists between convergence of series and integrals. This is the topic we examine here.
Convergence of series and convergence of integrals is related. We can use the con
vergence/divergence of an integral/series to determine the behaviour of the other. Here we
give an example of this type by establishing a connection between the harmonic series and
a divergent improper integral.
10.4.1 The harmonic series
The harmonic series is a sum of terms of the form 1/k where k = 1, 2, . . .. At ﬁrst ap
pearance, this series might seem to have the desired qualities of a convergent series, simply
because the successive terms being added are getting smaller and smaller, but this appear
ance is deceptive and actually wrong
61
.
The harmonic series
∞
¸
k=1
1
k
= 1 +
1
2
+
1
3
+
1
4
+. . . +
1
k
+. . . diverges
We establish that the harmonic series diverges by comparing it to the improper integral of
the related function
62
.
y = f(x) =
1
x
.
61
We have already noticed a similar surprise in connection with the improper integral of 1/x. These two
“surprises” are closely related, as we show here using a comparison of the series and the integral.
62
This function is “related” since for integer values of x, the function takes on values that are the same as
successive terms in the series, i.e. if x = k is an integer, then f(x) = f(k) = 1/k
10.4. Comparing integrals and series 207
The harmonic series
<==== the function y=1/x
0.0 11.0
0.0
1.0
Figure 10.4. The harmonic series is a sum that corresponds to the area under the
staircase shown above. Note that we have purposely shown the stairs arranged so that they
are higher than the function. This is essential in drawing the conclusion that the sum of the
series is inﬁnite: It is larger than an area under 1/x that we already know to be inﬁnite, by
Section 10.3.2.
In Figure 10.4 we show on one graph a comparison of the area under this curve, and a
staircase area representing the ﬁrst few terms in the harmonic series. For the area of the
staircase, we note that the width of each step is 1, and the heights form the sequence
{1,
1
2
,
1
3
,
1
4
, . . .}
Thus the area of (inﬁnitely many) of these steps can be expressed as the (inﬁnite) harmonic
series,
A = 1 · 1 + 1 ·
1
2
+ 1 ·
1
3
+ 1 ·
1
4
+. . . = 1 +
1
2
+
1
3
+
1
4
+. . . =
∞
¸
k=1
1
k
.
On the other hand, the area under the graph of the function y = f(x) = 1/x for 0 ≤ x ≤ ∞
is given by the improper integral
∞
1
1
x
dx.
208 Chapter 10. Inﬁnite series, improper integrals, and Taylor series
We have seen previously in Section 10.3.2 that this integral diverges!
FromFigure 10.4 we see that the areas under the function, A
f
and under the staircase,
A
s
, satisfy
0 < A
f
< A
s
.
Thus, since the smaller of the two (the improper integral) is inﬁnite, so is the larger (the
sum of the harmonic series). We have established, using this comparison, that the the sum
of the harmonic series cannot be ﬁnite, so that this series diverges.
Other comparisons: The “p” series
More generally, we can compare series of the form
∞
¸
k=1
1
k
p
to the integral
∞
1
1
x
p
dx
in precisely the same way. This leads to the conclusion that
The “p” series,
∞
¸
k=1
1
k
p
converges if p > 1, diverges if p ≤ 1.
For example, the series
∞
¸
k=1
1
k
2
= 1 +
1
4
+
1
9
+
1
16
+. . .
converges, since p = 2 > 1. Notice, however, that the comparison does not give us a value
to which the sum converges. It merely indicates that the series does converge.
10.5 From geometric series to Taylor polynomials
In studying calculus, we explored a variety of functions. Among the most basic are poly
nomials, i.e. functions such as
p(x) = x
5
+ 2x
2
+ 3x + 2.
Our introduction to differential calculus started with such functions for a reason: these
functions are convenient and simple to handle. We found long ago that it is easy to compute
derivatives of polynominals. The same can be said for integrals. One of our ﬁrst examples,
in Section 3.6.1 was the integral of a polynomial. We needed only use a power rule to
integrate each term. An additional convenience of polynomials is that “evaluating” the
function, (i.e. plugging in an x value and determining the corresponding y value) can be
done by simple multiplications and additions, i.e. by basic operations easily handled by
an ordinary calculator. This is not the case for, say, trigonometric functions, exponential
10.5. From geometric series to Taylor polynomials 209
functions, or for that matter, most other functions we considered
63
. For this reason, being
able to approximate a function by a polynomial is an attractive proposition. This forms our
main concern in the sections that follow.
We can arrive at connections between several functions and their polynomial approx
imations by exploiting our familiarity with the geometric series. We use both the results
for convergence of the geometric series (from Section 10.2) and the formula for the sum of
that series to derive a number of interesting, (somewhat haphazard) results
64
.
Recall from Sections 1.7.1 and 10.2 that the sum of an inﬁnite geometric series is
S = 1 +r + r
2
+. . . +r
k
+. . . =
∞
¸
k=0
r
k
=
1
1 −r
, provided r < 1. (10.3)
To connect this result to a statement about a function, we need a “variable”. Let us consider
the behaviour of this series when we vary the quantity r. To emphasize that now r is our
variable, it will be helpful to change notation by substituting r = x into the above equation,
while remembering that the formula in Eqn (10.3) hold only provided r = x < 1.
10.5.1 Example 1: A simple expansion
Substitute the variable x = r into the series (10.3). Then formally, rewriting the above with
this substitution, leads to the conclusion that
1
1 −x
= 1 +x +x
2
+. . . (10.4)
We can think of this result as follows: Let
f(x) =
1
1 −x
(10.5)
Then for every x in −1 < x < 1, it is true that f(x) can be approximated by terms in the
polynomial
p(x) = 1 +x +x
2
+. . . (10.6)
In other words, by (10.3), for x < 1 the two expressions “are the same”, in the sense that
the polynomial converges to the value of the function. We refer to this p(x) as an (inﬁnite)
Taylor polynomial
65
or simply a Taylor series for the function f(x). The usefulness of this
kind of result can be illustrated by a simple example.
Example 10.1 (Using the Taylor Series (10.6) to approximate the function (10.5)) Compute
the value of the function f(x) given by Eqn. (10.5) for x = 0.1 without using a calculator.
63
For example, to ﬁnd the decimal value of sin(2.5) we would need a scientiﬁc calculator. These days the
distinction is blurred, since powerful handheld calculators are ubiquitous. Before such devices were available,
the ease of evaluating polynomials made them even more important.
64
We say “haphazard” here because we are not yet at the point of a systematic procedure for computing a
Taylor Series. That will be done in Section 10.6. Here we “take what we can get” using simple manipulations of
a geometric series.
65
A Taylor polynomial contains ﬁnitely many terms, n, whereas a Taylor series has n →∞.
210 Chapter 10. Inﬁnite series, improper integrals, and Taylor series
Solution: Plugging in the value x = 0.1 into the function directly leads to 1/(1 − 0.1) =
1/0.9, whose evaluation with no calculator requires long division
66
. Using the polynomial
representation, we have a simpler method:
p(0.1) = 1 + 0.1 + 0.1
2
+. . . = 1 + 0.1 + 0.01 +. . . = 1.11 . . .
We provide a few other examples based on substitutions of various sorts using the geomet
ric series as a starting point.
10.5.2 Example 2: Another substitution
We make the substitution r = −t, then r < 1 means that  − t = t < 1, so that the
formula (10.3) for the sum of a geometric series implies that:
1
1 −(−t)
= 1 + (−t) + (−t)
2
+ (−t)
3
+. . .
1
1 +t
= 1 −t +t
2
−t
3
+t
4
+. . . provided t < 1
This means we have produced a series expansion for the function 1/(1 + t). We can go
farther with this example by a new manipulation, whereby we integrate both sides to arrive
at a new function and its expansion, shown next.
10.5.3 Example 3: An expansion for the logarithm
We will use the results of Example 10.5.2, but we follow our substitution by integration.
On the left, we integrate the function f(t) = 1/(1 + t) (to arrive at a logarithm type
integral) and on the right we integrate the power terms of the expansion. We are permitted
to integrate the power series term by term provided that the series converges. This is an
important restriction that we emphasize: Manipulation of inﬁnite series by integration,
differentiation, addition, multiplication, or any other “term by term” computation makes
sense only so long as the original series converges.
Provided t < 1, we have that
x
0
1
1 +t
dt =
x
0
(1 −t +t
2
−t
3
+t
4
−. . .) dt
ln(1 +x) = x −
x
2
2
+
x
3
3
−
x
4
4
+. . .
This procedure has allowed us to ﬁnd a series representation for a new function, ln(1 +x).
ln(1 +x) = x −
x
2
2
+
x
3
3
−
x
4
4
+. . . =
∞
¸
k=1
(−1)
k+1
x
k
k
. (10.7)
66
This example is slightly “trivial”, in the sense that evaluating the function itself is not very difﬁcult. However,
in other cases, we will ﬁnd that the polynomial expansion is the only way to ﬁnd the desired value.
10.5. From geometric series to Taylor polynomials 211
The formula appended on the right is just a compact notation that represents the pattern of
the terms. Recall that in Chapter 1, we have gotten thoroughly familiar with such summa
tion notation
67
.
Example 10.2 (Evaluating the logarithm for x = 0.25) An expansion for the logarithm
is deﬁnitely useful, in the sense that (without a scientiﬁc calculator or log tables) it is not
possible to easily calculate the value of this function at a given point. For example, for x =
0.25, we cannot ﬁnd ln(1 + 0.25) = ln(1.25) using simple operations, whereas the value
of the ﬁrst few terms of the series are computable by simple multiplication, division, and
addition (0.25−
0.25
2
2
+
0.25
3
3
≈ 0.2239). (A scientiﬁc calculator gives ln(1.25) ≈ 0.2231,
so the approximation produced by the series is relatively good.)
When is the series for ln(1 +x) in (10.7) expected to converge? Retracing our steps
from the beginning of Example 10.5.2 we note that the value of t is not permitted to leave
the interval t < 1 so we need also x < 1 in the integration step
68
. We certainly cannot
expect the series for ln(1 + x) to converge when x > 1. Indeed, for x = −1, we have
ln(1 + x) = ln(0) which is undeﬁned. Also note that for x = −1 the right hand side of
(10.7) becomes
−
1 +
1
2
+
1
3
+
1
4
+. . .
.
This is the recognizable harmonic series (multiplied by 1). But we already know from
Section 10.4.1 that the harmonic series diverges. Thus, we must avoid x = −1, since
the expansion will not converge there, and neither is the function deﬁned. This example
illustrates that outside the interval of convergence, the series and the function become
“meaningless”.
Example 10.3 (An expansion for ln(2)) Strictly speaking, our analysis does not predict
what happens if we substitute x = 1 into the expansion of the function found in Sec
tion 10.5.3, because this value of x is outside of the permitted range −1 < x < 1 in which
the Taylor series can be guaranteed to converge. It takes some deeper mathematics (Abel’s
theorem) to prove that the result of this substitution actually makes sense, and converges,
i.e. that
ln(2) = 1 −
1
2
+
1
3
−
1
4
+. . .
We state without proof here that the alternating harmonic series converges to ln(2).
10.5.4 Example 4: An expansion for arctan
Suppose we make the substitution r = −t
2
into the geometric series formula, and recall
that we need r < 1 for convergence. Then
1
1 −(−t
2
)
= 1 + (−t
2
) + (−t
2
)
2
+ (−t
2
)
3
+. . .
67
The summation notation is not crucial and should certainly not be memorized. We are usually interested only
in the ﬁrst few terms of such a series in any approximation of practical value.
68
Strictly speaking, we should have ensured that we are inside this interval of convergence before we computed
the last example.
212 Chapter 10. Inﬁnite series, improper integrals, and Taylor series
1
1 +t
2
= 1 −t
2
+t
4
−t
6
+t
8
+. . . =
∞
¸
k=0
(−1)
n
t
2n
This series will converge provided t < 1. Now integrate both sides, and recall that the
antiderivative of the function 1/(1 +t
2
) is arctan(t). Then
x
0
1
1 +t
2
dt =
x
0
(1 −t
2
+t
4
−t
6
+t
8
+. . .) dt
arctan(x) = x −
x
3
3
+
x
5
5
−
x
7
7
+. . . =
∞
¸
k=1
(−1)
k+1
x
(2k−1)
(2k −1)
. (10.8)
Example 10.4 (An expansion for π) For a particular application of this expansion, con
sider plugging in x = 1 into Equation (10.8). Then
arctan(1) = 1 −
1
3
+
1
5
−
1
7
+. . .
But arctan(1) = π/4. Thus we have found a way of computing the irrational number π,
namely
π = 4
1 −
1
3
+
1
5
−
1
7
+. . .
= 4
∞
¸
k=1
(−1)
k+1
1
(2k −1)
.
While it is true that this series converges, the convergence is slow. (This can be seen by
adding up the ﬁrst 100 or 1000 terms of this series with a spreadsheet.) This means that it
is not practical to use such a series as an approximation for π. (There are other series that
converge to π very rapidly that are used in any practical application.)
10.6 Taylor Series: a systematic approach
In Section 10.5, we found a variety of Taylor series expansions directly from the formula
for a geometric series. Here we ask how such Taylor series can be constructed more sys
tematically, if we are given a function that we want to approximate
69
.
Suppose we have a function which we want to represent by a power series,
f(x) = a
0
+a
1
x +a
2
x
2
+a
3
x
3
+. . . =
∞
¸
k=0
a
k
x
k
.
Here we will use the function to directly determine the coefﬁcients a
k
. To determine a
0
,
let x = 0 and note that
f(0) = a
0
+a
1
0 +a
2
0
2
+a
3
0
3
+. . . = a
0
.
We conclude that
a
0
= f(0).
69
The development of this section was motivated by online notes by David Austin.
10.6. Taylor Series: a systematic approach 213
By differentiating both sides we ﬁnd the following:
f
(x) = a
1
+ 2a
2
x + 3a
3
x
2
+. . . +ka
k
x
k−1
+. . .
f
(x) = 2a
2
+ 2 · 3a
3
x +. . . + (k −1)ka
k
x
k−2
+. . .
f
(x) = 2 · 3a
3
+. . . + (k −2)(k −1)ka
k
x
k−3
+. . .
f
(k)
(x) = 1 · 2 · 3 · 4 . . . ka
k
+. . .
Here we have used the notation f
(k)
(x) to denote the k’th derivative of the function. Now
evaluate each of the above derivatives at x = 0. Then
f
(0) = a
1
, ⇒a
1
= f
(0)
f
(0) = 2a
2
, ⇒a
2
=
f
(0)
2
f
(0) = 2 · 3a
3
, ⇒a
3
=
f
(0)
2·3
f
(k)
(0) = k!a
k
, ⇒a
k
=
f
(k)
(0)
k!
This gives us a recipe for calculating all coefﬁcients a
k
. This means that if we can compute
all the derivatives of the function f(x), then we know the coefﬁcients of the Taylor series
as well. Because we have evaluated all the coefﬁcients by the substitution x = 0, we say
that the resulting power series is the Taylor series of the function about x = 0.
10.6.1 Taylor series for the exponential function, e
x
Consider the function f(x) = e
x
. All the derivatives of this function are equal to e
x
. In
particular,
f
(k)
(x) = e
x
⇒ f
(k)
(0) = 1.
So that the coefﬁcients of the Taylor series are
a
k
=
f
(k)
(0)
k!
=
1
k!
.
Therefore the Taylor series for e
x
about x = 0 is
a
0
+a
1
x+a
2
x
2
+a
3
x
3
+. . .+a
k
x
k
+. . . = 1+x+
x
2
2
+
x
3
6
+
x
4
24
+. . .+
x
k
k!
+. . . =
∞
¸
k=0
x
k
k!
This is a very interesting series. We state here without proof that this series converges for
all values of x. Further, the function deﬁned by the series is in fact equal to e
x
that is,
e
x
= 1 +x +
x
2
2
+
x
3
6
+. . . =
∞
¸
k=0
x
k
k!
214 Chapter 10. Inﬁnite series, improper integrals, and Taylor series
The implication is that the function e
x
is completely determined (for all x values)
by its behaviour (i.e. derivatives of all orders) at x = 0. In other words, the value of the
function at x = 1, 000, 000 is determined by the behaviour of the function around x = 0.
This means that e
x
is a very special function with superior “predictable features”. If a
function f(x) agrees with its Taylor polynomial on a region (−a, a), as was the case here,
we say that f is analytic on this region. It is known that e
x
is analytic for all x.
We can use the results of this example to establish the fact that the exponential func
tion grows “faster” than any power function x
n
. That is the same as saying that the ratio of
e
x
to x
n
(for any power n) increases with x. We leave this as an exercise for the reader.
We can also easily obtain a Taylor series expansion for functions related to e
x
, with
out assembling the derivatives. We start with the result that
e
u
= 1 +u +
u
2
2
+
u
3
6
+. . . =
∞
¸
k=0
u
k
k!
Then, for example, the substitution u = x
2
leads to
e
x
2
= 1 +x
2
+
(x
2
)
2
2
+
(x
2
)
3
6
+. . . =
∞
¸
k=0
(x
2
)
k
k!
10.6.2 Taylor series of trigonometric functions
In this example we determine the Taylor series for the sine function. The function and its
derivatives are
f(x) = sinx, f
(x) = cos x, f
(x) = −sin x, f
(x) = −cos x, f
(4)
(x) = sin x, . . .
After this, the cycle repeats. This means that
f(0) = 0, f
(0) = 1, f
(0) = 0, f
(0) = −1, . . .
and so on in a cyclic fashion. In other words,
a
0
= 0, a
1
= 1, a
2
= 0, a
3
= −
1
3!
, a
4
= 0, a
5
=
1
5!
, . . .
Thus,
sinx = x −
x
3
3!
+
x
5
5!
−
x
7
7!
+. . . =
∞
¸
n=0
(−1)
n
x
2n+1
(2n + 1)!
.
We state here without proof that the function sin(x) is analytic, so that the expansion
converges to the function for all x.
It is instructive to demonstrate how successive terms in a Taylor series expansion
lead to approximations that improve. Doing this kind of thing will be the subject of the last
computer laboratory exercise in this course.
10.6. Taylor Series: a systematic approach 215
sin(x)
T1
T2
T3
T4
0.0 7.0
2.0
2.0
Figure 10.5. An approximation of the function y = sin(x) by successive Taylor
polynomials, T
1
, T
2
, T
3
, T
4
. The higher Taylor polynomials do a better job of approximat
ing the function on a larger interval about x = 0.
Here we demonstrate this idea with the expansion for the function sin(x) that we just
obtained. To see this, consider the sequence of polynomials
T
1
(x) = x,
T
2
(x) = x −
x
3
3!
,
T
3
(x) = x −
x
3
3!
+
x
5
5!
,
T
4
(x) = x −
x
3
3!
+
x
5
5!
−
x
7
7!
.
Then these polynomials provide a better and better approximation to the function sin(x)
close to x = 0. The ﬁrst of these is just a linear (or tangent line) approximation that we
had studied long ago. The second improves this with a quadratic approximation, etc. Fig
ure 10.5 illustrates how the ﬁrst few Taylor polynomials approximate the function sin(x)
near x = 0. Observe that as we keep more terms, n, in the polynomial T
n
(x), the approx
imating curve “hugs” the graph of sin(x) over a longer and longer range. The student will
be asked to use the spreadsheet, together with some calculations as done in this section, to
produce a composite graph similar to Fig. 10.5 for some other function.
216 Chapter 10. Inﬁnite series, improper integrals, and Taylor series
Example 10.5 (The error in successive approximations) For a given value of x close to
the base point (at x = 0), the error in the approximation between the polynomials and
the function is the vertical distance between the graphs of the polynomial and the function
sin(x) (shown in black). For example, at x = 2 radians sin(2) = 0.9093 (as found on
a scientiﬁc calculator). The approximations are: T
1
(2) = 2, which is very inaccurate,
T
2
(2) = 2 − 2
3
/3! ≈ 0.667 which is too small, T
3
(2) ≈ 0.9333 that is much closer and
T
4
(2) ≈ .9079 that is closer still. In general, we can approximate the size of the error using
the next term that would occur in the polynomial if we kept a higher order expansion. The
details of estimating such errors is omitted from our discussion.
We also note that all polynomials that approximate sin(x) contain only odd powers
of x. This stems from the fact that sin(x) is an odd function, i.e. its graph is symmetric to
rotation about the origin, a concept we discussed in an earlier term.
The Taylor series for cos(x) could be found by a similar sequence of steps. But in
this case, this is unnecessary: We already knowthe expansion for sin(x), so we can ﬁnd the
Taylor series for cos(x) by simple differentiation term by term. (Since sin(x) is analytic,
this is permitted for all x.) We leave as an exercise for the reader to show that
cos(x) = 1 −
x
2
2
+
x
4
4!
−
x
6
6!
+. . . =
∞
¸
n=0
(−1)
n
x
2n
(2n)!
.
Since cos(x) has symmetry properties of an even function, we ﬁnd that its Taylor series is
composed of even powers of x only.
10.7 Application of Taylor series
In this section we illustrate some of the applications of Taylor series to problems that may
be difﬁcult to solve using other conventional methods. Some functions do not have an
antiderivative that can be expressed in terms of other simple functions. Integrating these
functions can be a problem, as we cannot use the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus spec
iﬁes. In some cases, we can approximate the value of the deﬁnite integral using a Taylor
series. We show this in Section 10.7.1.
Another application of Taylor series is to compute an approximate solution to a dif
ferential equation. We provide one example of that sort in Section 10.7.2 and another in
Appendix 11.11.
10.7.1 Example 1: using a Taylor series to evaluate an integral
Evaluate the deﬁnite integral
1
0
sin(x
2
) dx.
A simple substitution (e.g. u = x
2
) will not work here, and we cannot ﬁnd an antideriva
tive. Here is how we might approach the problem using Taylor series: We know that the
10.7. Application of Taylor series 217
series expansion for sin(t) is
sint = t −
t
3
3!
+
t
5
5!
−
t
7
7!
+. . .
Substituting t = x
2
, we have
sin(x
2
) = x
2
−
x
6
3!
+
x
10
5!
−
x
14
7!
+. . .
In spite of the fact that we cannot antidifferentiate the function, we can antidifferentiate the
Taylor series, just as we would a polynomial:
1
0
sin(x
2
) dx =
1
0
(x
2
−
x
6
3!
+
x
10
5!
−
x
14
7!
+. . .) dx
=
x
3
3
−
x
7
7 · 3!
+
x
11
11 · 5!
−
x
15
15 · 7!
+. . .
1
0
=
1
3
−
1
7 · 3!
+
1
11 · 5!
−
1
15 · 7!
+. . .
This is an alternating series so we know that it converges. If we add up the ﬁrst four terms,
the pattern becomes clear: the series converges to 0.31026.
10.7.2 Example 2: Series solution of a differential equation
We are already familiar with the differential equation and initial condition that describes
unlimited exponential growth.
dy
dx
= y,
y(0) = 1.
Indeed, from previous work, we know that the solution of this differential equation and ini
tial condition is y(x) = e
x
, but we will pretend that we do not know this fact in illustrating
the usefulness of Taylor series. In some cases, where separation of variables does not work,
this option would have great practical value.
Let us express the “unknown” solution to the differential equation as
y = a
0
+a
1
x +a
2
x
2
+a
3
x
3
+a
4
x
4
+. . .
Our task is to determine values for the coefﬁcients a
i
Since this function satisﬁes the condition y(0) = 1, we must have y(0) = a
0
= 1.
Differentiating this power series leads to
dy
dx
= a
1
+ 2a
2
x + 3a
3
x
2
+ 4a
4
x
3
+. . .
218 Chapter 10. Inﬁnite series, improper integrals, and Taylor series
But according to the differential equation,
dy
dx
= y. Thus, it must be true that the two Taylor
series match, i.e.
a
0
+a
1
x +a
2
x
2
+a
3
x
3
+a
4
x
4
+. . . = a
1
+ 2a
2
x + 3a
3
x
2
+ 4a
4
x
3
+. . .
This equality hold for all values of x. This can only happen if the coefﬁcients of like terms
are the same, i.e. if the constant terms on either side of the equation are equal, if the terms of
the form Cx
2
on either side are equal, and so on for all powers of x. Equating coefﬁcients,
we obtain:
a
0
= a
1
= 1, ⇒a
1
= 1,
a
1
= 2a
2
, ⇒a
2
=
a1
2
=
1
2
,
a
2
= 3a
3
, ⇒a
3
=
a2
3
=
1
2·3
,
a
3
= 4a
4
, ⇒a
4
=
a3
4
=
1
2·3·4
,
a
n−1
= na
n
, ⇒a
n
=
an−1
n
=
1
1·2·3...n
=
1
n!
.
This means that
y = 1 +x +
x
2
2!
+
x
3
3!
+. . . +
x
n
n!
+. . . = e
x
,
which, as we have seen, is the expansion for the exponential function. This agrees with the
solution we have been expecting. In the example here shown, we would hardly need to use
series to arrive at the right conclusion, but in the next example, we would not ﬁnd it as easy
to discover the solution by other techniques discussed previously.
We provide an example of a more complicated differential equation and its series
solution in Appendix 11.11.
10.8 Summary
The main points of this chapter can be summarized as follows:
1. We reviewed the deﬁnition of an improper integral
∞
a
f(x) dx = lim
b→∞
b
a
f(x) dx.
2. We computed some examples of improper integrals and discussed their convergence
or divergence. We recalled (from earlier chapters) that
I =
∞
0
e
−rt
dt converges,
whereas
I =
∞
1
1
x
dx diverges.
10.8. Summary 219
3. More generally, we showed that
∞
1
1
x
p
dx converges if p > 1, diverges if p ≤ 1.
4. Using a comparison between integrals and series we showed that the harmonic series,
∞
¸
k=1
1
k
= 1 +
1
2
+
1
3
+
1
4
+. . . +
1
k
+. . . diverges.
5. More generally, our results led to the conclusion that the “p” series,
∞
¸
k=1
1
k
p
converges if p > 1, diverges if p ≤ 1.
6. We studied Taylor series and showed that some can be found using the formula for
convergent geometric series. Two examples of Taylor series that were obtained in
this way are
ln(1 +x) = x −
x
2
2
+
x
3
3
−
x
4
4
+. . . for x < 1
and
arctan(x) = x −
x
3
3
+
x
5
5
−
x
7
7
+. . . for x < 1
7. In discussing Taylor series, we considered some of the following questions: (a) For
what range of values of x can we expect the series to converges? (b) Suppose we
approximate the function on the right by a ﬁnite number of terms on the left. How
good is that approximation? Another interesting question is: (c) If we include more
and more such terms, does that approximation get better and better? (i.e., does the
series converge to the function?) (d) Is the convergence rate rapid? Some of these
questions occupy the attention of career mathematicians, and are beyond the scope
of this introductory calculus course.
8. More generally, we showed that the Taylor series for a function about x = 0,
f(x) = a
0
+a
1
x +a
2
x
2
+a
3
x
3
+. . . =
∞
¸
k=0
a
k
x
k
.
can be found by computing the coefﬁcients
a
k
=
f
(k)
(0)
k!
9. We discussed some of the applications of Taylor series. We used Taylor series to
approximate a function, to ﬁnd an approximation for a deﬁnite integral of a function,
and to solve a differential equation.
220 Chapter 10. Inﬁnite series, improper integrals, and Taylor series
Chapter 11
Appendix
11.1 How to prove the formulae for sums of squares
and cubes
Mathematicians are concerned with rigorously establishing formulae such as sums of squared
(or cubed) integers. While it is not hard to see that these formulae “work” for a few cases,
determining that they work in general requires more work. Here we provide a taste of how
such careful arguments works. We give two examples. The ﬁrst, based on mathematical
induction provides a general method that could be used in many similar kinds of proofs.
The second argument, also for purposes of illustration uses a “trick”. Devising such tricks
is not as straightforward, and depends to some degree on serendipity or experience with
numbers.
Proof by induction (optional)
Here, we prove the formula for the sum of square integers,
N
¸
k=1
k
2
=
N(N + 1)(2N + 1)
6
,
using a technique called induction. The idea of the method is to check that the formula
works for one or two simple cases (e.g. the “sum” of just one or just two terms of the
series), and then show that whenever it works for one case (summing up to N), it has to
also work for the next case (summing up to N + 1).
First, we verify that this formula works for a few test cases:
N = 1: If there is only one term, then clearly, by inspection,
1
¸
k=1
k
2
= 1
2
= 1.
221
222 Chapter 11. Appendix
The formula indicates that we should get
S =
1(1 + 1)(2 · 1 + 1)
6
=
1(2)(3)
6
= 1,
so this case agrees with the prediction.
N = 2:
2
¸
k=1
k
2
= 1
2
+ 2
2
= 1 + 4 = 5.
The formula would then predict that
S =
2(2 + 1)(2 · 2 + 1)
6
=
2(3)(5)
6
= 5.
So far, elementary computation matches with the result predicted by the formula.
Now we show that if this formula holds for any one case, e.g. for the sum of the ﬁrst N
squares, then it is also true for the next case, i.e. for the sum of N + 1 squares. So we will
assume that someone has checked that for some particular value of N it is true that
S
N
=
N
¸
k=1
k
2
=
N(N + 1)(2N + 1)
6
.
Now the sum of the ﬁrst N +1 squares will be just a bit bigger: it will have one more term
added to it:
S
N+1
=
N+1
¸
k=1
k
2
=
N
¸
k=1
k
2
+ (N + 1)
2
.
Thus
S
N+1
=
N(N + 1)(2N + 1)
6
+ (N + 1)
2
.
Combining terms, we get
S
N+1
= (N + 1)
¸
N(2N + 1)
6
+ (N + 1)
,
S
N+1
= (N + 1)
2N
2
+N + 6N + 6
6
= (N + 1)
2N
2
+ 7N + 6
6
.
Simplifying and factoring the last term leads to
S
N+1
= (N + 1)
(2N + 3)(N + 2)
6
.
We want to check that this still agrees with what the formula predicts. To make the notation
simpler, we will let M stand for N +1. Then, expressing the result in terms of the quantity
M = N + 1 we get
S
M
=
M
¸
k=1
k
2
= (N + 1)
[2(N + 1) + 1][(N + 1) + 1]
6
= M
[2M + 1][M + 1]
6
.
This is the same formula as we started with, only written in terms of M instead of N. Thus
we have veriﬁed that the formula works. By Mathematical Induction we ﬁnd that the result
has been proved.
11.2. Riemann Sums: Extensions and other examples 223
Another method using a trick
70
There is another method for determining the sums
n
¸
k=1
k
2
or
n
¸
k=1
k
3
. Write
(k + 1)
3
−(k −1)
3
= 6k
2
+ 2,
so
n
¸
k=1
(k + 1)
3
−(k −1)
3
=
n
¸
k=0
(6k
2
+ 2).
But looking more carefully at the left hand side (LHS), we see that
n
¸
k=1
((k +1)
3
−(k −1)
3
) = 2
3
−0
3
+3
3
−1
3
+4
3
−2
3
+5
3
−3
3
... +(n+1)
3
−(n−1)
3
.
most of the terms cancel, leaving only −1 +n
3
+ (n + 1)
3
, so this means that
−1 +n
3
+ (n + 1)
3
= 6
n
¸
k=1
k
2
+
n
¸
k=1
2,
so
n
¸
k=1
k
2
= (−1 +n
3
+ (n + 1)
3
−2n)/6 = (2n
3
+ 3n
2
+n)/6.
Similarly, the formula for
n
¸
k=1
k
3
, can be obtained by starting with
(k + 1)
4
−(k −1)
4
= 4k
3
+ 4k.
11.2 Riemann Sums: Extensions and other examples
We take up some issues here that were not yet considered in the context of our examples of
Riemann sums in Chapter 2 . First, we consider an arbitrary interval a ≤ x ≤ b. Then we
comment on other ways of constructing the rectangular strip approximation (that eventually
lead to the same limit when the true area is computed.)
11.2.1 A general interval: a ≤ x ≤ b
Example 2: (Lu Fan)
Find the area under the graph of the function
y = f(x) = x
2
+ 2x + 1 a ≤ x ≤ b.
70
I want to thank Robert Israel for contributing this material
224 Chapter 11. Appendix
Here the interval is a ≤ x ≤ b. Let us leave the values of a, b general for a moment, and
consider how the calculation is set up in this case. Then we have
length of interval = b −a
number of segments = N
width of rectangular strips = ∆x =
b −a
N
the k’th x value = x
k
= a +k
(b −a)
N
height of k’th rectangular strip = f(x
k
) = x
2
k
+ 2x
k
+ 1
Combining the last two steps, the height of rectangle k is:
f(x
k
) =
a +
k(b −a)
N
2
+ 2
a +
k(b −a)
N
+ 1
and its area is
a
k
= f(x
k
) ×∆x = f(x
k
) ×
b −a
N
.
We use the last two equations to express a
k
in terms of k (and the quantities a, b, N), then
sum over k as before (A = ΣA
k
). Some algebra is needed to simplify the sums so that
summation formulae can be applied. The details are left as an exercise for the reader (see
homework problems). Evaluating the limit N →∞, we ﬁnally obtain
A = lim
N→∞
N
¸
k=1
a
k
= (a + 1)
2
(b −a) + (a + 1)(b −a)
2
+
(b −a)
3
3
.
as the area under the function f(x) = x
2
+ 2x + 1, over the interval a ≤ x ≤ b. Observe
that the solution depends on a, and b. (The endpoints of the interval inﬂuence the total
area under the curve.) For example, if the given interval happens to be 2 ≤ x ≤ 4. then,
substituting a = 2, b = 4 into the above result for A, leads to
A = (2 + 1)
2
(4 −2) + (2 + 1)(4 −2)
2
+
4 −2
3
= 18 + 12 +
2
3
=
32
3
In the next chapter, we will show that the tools of integration will lead to the same conclu
sion.
11.2.2 Using left (rather than right) endpoints
So far, we used the right endpoint of each rectangular strip to assign its height using the
given function (see Figs. 2.2, 2.3, 2.4). Restated, we “glued” the top right corner of the
rectangle to the graph of the function. This is the so called right endpoint approxima
tion. We can just as well use the left corners of the rectangles to assign their heights (left
endpoint approximation). A comparison of these for the function y = f(x) = x
2
is
shown in Figs. 11.1 and 11.2. In the case of the left endpoint approximation, we evaluate
11.2. Riemann Sums: Extensions and other examples 225
y=f(x)
a b
x
y
x x x
1
a=x
0 k−1 k N
x =b x x x
1
a=x
0 k−1 k N
x =b
x
y
x
y
Figure 11.1. The area under the curve y = f(x) over an interval a ≤ x ≤ b could
be computed by using either a left or right endpoint approximation. That is, the heights of
the rectangles are adjusted to match the function of interest either on the right or on their
left corner. Here we compare the two approaches. Usually both lead to the same result
once a limit is computer to arrive at the “true ” area.
the heights of the rectangles starting at x
0
(instead of x
1
, and ending at x
N−1
(instead of
x
N
). There are still N rectangles. To compare, sum of areas of the rectangles in the left
versus the right endpoint approximation is
Right endpoints: A
N strips
=
N
¸
k=1
f(x
k
)∆x.
Left endpoints: A
N strips
=
N−1
¸
k=0
f(x
k
)∆x.
Details of one such computation is given in the box.
226 Chapter 11. Appendix
Example of left endpoint calculation
We here look again at a simple example, using the quadratic function,
f(x) = x
2
, 0 ≤ x ≤ 1,
We now compare the right and left endpoint approximation. These are shown in panels of
Figure 11.2. Note that
∆x =
1
N
, x
k
=
k
N
,
The area of the k’th rectangle is
a
k
= f(x
k
) ×∆x = (k/N)
2
(1/N) ,
but now the sum starts at k = 0 so
A
N strips
=
N−1
¸
k=0
f(x
k
)∆x =
N−1
¸
k=0
k
N
2
1
N
=
1
N
3
N−1
¸
k=0
k
2
.
The ﬁrst rectangle corresponds to k = 0 in the left endpoint approximation (rather than
k = 1 in the right endpoint approximation). But the k = 0 rectangle makes no contribution
(as its area is zero in this example) and we have one less rectangle at the right endpoint of
the interval, since the N’th rectangle is k = N −1. Then the sum is
A
N strips
=
1
N
3
(2(N −1) + 1)(N −1)(N)
6
=
(2N −1)(N −1)
6N
2
.
The area, obtained by taking a limit for N →∞is
A = lim
N→∞
A
N strips
= lim
N→∞
(2N −1)(N −1)
6N
2
=
2
6
=
1
3
.
We see that, after computing the limit, the result for the “true area” under the curve is
exactly the same as we found earlier in this chapter using the right endpoint approximation.
11.3 Physical interpretation of the center of mass
We deﬁned the idea of a center of mass in Chapter 5. The center of mass has a physical
interpretation for a real mass distribution. Loosely speaking, it is the position at which the
mass “balances” without rotating to the left or right. In physics, we say that there is no net
torque. The analogy with children sitting on a teetertotter is relevant: many children may
sit along the length of the frame of a teeter totter, but if they distribute themselves in a way
that the center of mass is at the fulcrum of the teeter totter, they will remain precariously
balanced (until one of them ﬁdgets or gets off!). Notice that both the mass and the position
of each child is important  a light child sitting on the very edge of the teeter totter can
balance a heavier child sitting closer to the fulcrum (middle). The center of mass need
not be the same as the median position. As we have see, the median is a position that
11.3. Physical interpretation of the center of mass 227
Right endpoint approximation
0.0 10.0
0.0
100.0
Left endpoint approximation
0.0 10.0
0.0
100.0
Comparison of
Left Right
approximations
0.0 10.0
0.0
100.0
Figure 11.2. Rectangles with left or right corners on the graph of y = x
2
are
compared in this picture. The approximation shown in pink is “missing” the largest rect
angle shown in green. However, in the limit as the number of rectangles, N →∞, the true
area obtained is the same.
subdivides the distribution into two equal masses (or, more generally, produces equal sized
areas under the graph of the density function.) The center of mass assigns a greater weight
to parts of the distribution that are “far away” in the same sense. (However, for symmetric
distributions, the median and the mean are the same.)
In physics, we speak of the “moment of mass” of a distribution about a point. This
quantity is related to the tendency of the mass to contribute a torque, i.e. to make the
object rotate. Suppose we are interested in a particular point of reference x. In a discrete
mass distribution, for example, the moment of mass of each of the beads relative to point
x is given by the product of the mass and its distance away from the point  as with the
teeter totter, beads farther away will contribute more torque than beads closer to point x,
and heavier beads (i.e. greater mass) will contribute more torque than lighter beads. For
example, mass 1 contributes an amount m
1
(x − x
1
) to the total moment of mass of the
distribution about the point x. Altogether the moment of mass of the distribution about the
228 Chapter 11. Appendix
point x is deﬁned as
M
1
(x) =
n
¸
i=1
m
i
(x −x
i
).
The center of mass is a special point ¯ x such that the moment of mass about that point is
zero. (Loosely speaking the tendency to rotate to the left or the right are the same: thus the
distribution would be balanced if it “rested on that point”.)
3
x
m
1
m
2
m
3
x
1
x
2
x
Figure 11.3. A discrete set of masses m
1
, m
2
, m
3
is distributed at positions
x
1
, x
2
, x
3
. The center of mass of the distribution is the position at which the given mass
distribution would balance, here represented by the white triangle.
Thus, we identify the center of mass as the point at which
M
1
(¯ x) = 0,
or
n
¸
i=1
m
i
(¯ x −x
i
) = 0.
Now expanding the sum, we rewrite the above as
n
¸
i=1
m
i
¯ x
−
n
¸
i=1
m
i
x
i
= 0,
¯ x
n
¸
i=1
m
i
−
n
¸
i=1
m
i
x
i
= 0.
But we already know that the ﬁrst summation above is just the total mass, so that
¯ xM −
n
¸
i=1
m
i
x
i
= 0,
so, taking the second term to the other side and dividing by M leads to
¯ x =
1
M
n
¸
i=1
m
i
x
i
.
We have recovered precisely the deﬁnition of the center of mass or “average x coordinate”.
11.4. The shell method for computing volumes 229
11.4 The shell method for computing volumes
In Chapter 5, we used dissection into small disks to compute the volume of solids of revo
lution. Here we show use an alternative dissection into shells.
11.4.1 Example: Volume of a cone using the shell method
x
y
y=f(x)=1−x
y
x
x
y
y=1−x
dx
Figure 11.4. Top: The curve that generates the cone (left) and the shape of the
cone (right). Bottom: the cone showing one of the series of shells that are used in this
example to calculate its volume.
We use the shell method
71
to ﬁnd the volume of the cone formed by rotating the curve
y = 1 −x
about the y axis.
Solution
We show the cone and its generating curve in Figure 11.4, together with a representative
shell used in the calculation of total volume. The volume of a cylindrical shell of radius r,
height h and thickness τ is
V
shell
= 2πrhτ.
We will place these shells one inside the other so that their radii are parallel to the x axis
(so r = x). The heights of the shells are determined by their y value (i.e. h = y = 1 −x =
71
Note to the instructor: This material may be skipped in the interest of time. It presents an alternative to the
disk method, but there may not be enough time to cover this in detail.
230 Chapter 11. Appendix
1 −r). For the tallest shell r = 0, and for the ﬂattest shell r = 1. The thickness of the shell
is ∆r. Therefore, the volume of one shell is
V
shell
= 2πr(1 −r) ∆r.
The volume of the object is obtained by summing up these shell volumes. In the limit,
as ∆r → dr gets inﬁnitesimally small, we recognize this as a process of integration. We
integrate over 0 ≤ r ≤ 1, to obtain:
V = 2π
1
0
r(1 −r) dr = 2π
1
0
(r −r
2
) dr.
We ﬁnd that
V = 2π
r
2
2
−
r
3
3
1
0
= 2π
1
2
−
1
3
=
π
3
.
11.5 More techniques of integration
11.5.1 Secants and other “hard integrals”
In a previous section, we encountered the integral
I =
sec
3
(x) dx.
This integral can be simpliﬁed to some extent by integration by parts as follows: Let u =
sec(x), dv = sec
2
(x) dx. Then du = sec(x) tan(x)dx while v =
sec
2
(x) dx = tan(x).
The integral can be transformed to
I = sec(x) tan(x) −
sec(x) tan
2
(x) dx.
The latter can be rewritten:
I
1
=
sec(x) tan
2
(x) dx =
sec(x)(sec
2
(x) −1).
where we have use a trigonometric identity for tan
2
(x). Then
I = sec(x) tan(x) −
sec
3
(x) dx +
sec(x) dx = sec(x) tan(x) −I +
sec(x) dx
so (taking both I’s to the left hand side, and dividing by 2)
I =
1
2
sec(x) tan(x) +
sec(x) dx
.
We are now in need of an antiderivative for sec(x). No “obvious substitution” or further
integration by parts helps here, but it can be checked by differentiation that
sec(x) dx = ln  sec(x) + tan(x) +C
Then the ﬁnal result is
I =
1
2
(sec(x) tan(x) + ln  sec(x) + tan(x)) +C
11.5. More techniques of integration 231
11.5.2 A special case of integration by partial fractions
Evaluate this integral
72
:
2
1
7x + 4
6x
2
+ 7x + 2
dx
This integral involves a rational function (that is, a ratio of two polynomials). The denom
inator is a degree 2 polynomial function that has two roots and that can be factored easily;
the numerator is a degree 1 polynomial function. In this case, we can use the following
strategy. First, factor the denominator:
6x
2
+ 7x + 2 = (2x + 1)(3x + 2)
Assign A and B in the following way:
A
2x + 1
+
B
3x + 2
=
7x + 4
(2x + 1)(3x + 2)
=
7x + 4
6x
2
+ 7x + 2
(Remember, this is how we deﬁne A and B.)
Next, ﬁnd the common denominator and rewrite it as a single fraction in terms of A
and B.
A
2x + 1
+
B
3x + 2
=
3Ax + 2A + 2Bx +B
(2x + 1)(3x + 2)
Group like terms in the numerator, and note that this has to match the original fraction, so:
3Ax + 2A+ 2Bx +B
(2x + 1)(3x + 2)
=
(3A+ 2B)x + (2A +B)
(2x + 1)(3x + 2)
=
7x + 4
(2x + 1)(3x + 2)
The above equation should hold true for all x values; therefore:
3A+ 2B = 7, 2A+B = 4
Solving the system of equations leads to A = 1, B = 2. Using this result, we rewrite the
original expression in the form:
7x + 4
6x
2
+ 7x + 2
=
7x + 4
(2x + 1)(3x + 2)
=
A
2x + 1
+
B
3x + 2
=
1
2x + 1
+
2
3x + 2
Now we are ready to rewrite the integral:
I =
2
1
7x + 4
6x
2
+ 7x + 2
dx =
2
1
1
2x + 1
+
2
3x + 2
dx
Simplify:
I =
2
1
1
2x + 1
dx + 2
2
1
1
3x + 2
dx
Now the integral becomes a simple natural log integral that follows the pattern of Eqn. 6.1.
Simplify:
I =
1
2
ln 2x + 1
2
1
+
2
3
ln 3x + 2
2
1
.
72
This section was contributed by Lu Fan
232 Chapter 11. Appendix
Simplify further:
I =
1
2
(ln 5 −ln 3) +
2
3
(ln 8 −ln 5) = −
1
6
ln 5 −
1
2
ln 3 +
2
3
ln 8.
This method can be used to solve any integral that contain a fraction with a degree 1
polynomial in the numerator and a degree 2 polynomial (that has two roots) in the denom
inator.
11.6 Analysis of data: a student grade distribution
We study the distribution of student grades on a test written by 76 students and graded out
of a maximum of 50 points.
11.6.1 Deﬁning an average grade
Let N be the size of the class,and y
k
the grade of student k. Here k is the number of the
student from 1 to N, and y
k
takes any value between 0 and 50 points). Then the average
grade
¯
Y is computed by adding up the scores of all students and dividing by the number of
students as follows:
¯
Y =
1
N
N
¸
k=1
y
k
.
For example, for a class of 76 students, we would have the sum
¯
Y =
1
76
76
¸
k=1
y
k
.
11.6.2 Fraction of students that scored a given grade
Suppose that the number of students who got the grade x
i
is p
i
. If the class consists of a
total of N students, then it follows that
N =
10
¸
i=1
p
i
.
This is just saying that the sum of the number of students in every one of the categories has
to add up to the total class size. The fraction of the class that scored grade x
i
is
p
i
N
.
(Dividing by N has normalized the distribution. The value p
i
/N is the empirical probabil
ity of getting grade x
i
.) The mean or average grade is:
¯
X =
1
N
50
¸
i=0
x
i
p
i
.
11.6. Analysis of data: a student grade distribution 233
Grade Distribution
mean
31.9
0.0 50.0
0.0
25.0
Figure 11.5. Distributions of grades on a test with 50 point maximum. There were
a total of 76 students writing the test. The mean grade 31.9 is shown.
11.6.3 Frequency distribution
It is difﬁcult to visualize all the data if we list all the grades obtained. We “lump together”
scores into various categories (or “bins”) and create a distribution. For example, test scores
might be divided into ranges of bins in increments of 5 points: (15, 610, 1115, etc). We
could represent grades in each bin by some value up to a speciﬁed level of accuracy. For
example, grades in the the range 1620 can be described by the score18 up to an accuracy
of ±2. This is what we have done in Table 11.1.
We will nowreinterpret our notation somewhat. We will refer to ˜ x
i
as the score and p
i
the number of students whose test score fell within the range represented by ˜ x
i
±accuracy.
(The notation ˜ x
i
is meant to remind us that we are approximating the grade value.) For
example, consider 10 “bins” or grade categories. In that case, the index i takes on values
i = 1, 2, . . . 10. The, e.g., ˜ x
4
represents all grades in the fourth “bin”, i.e. grades between
1620. A plot of p
i
against ˜ x
i
is called a frequency distribution. The bar graph shown in
Figure 11.5 represents this distribution. Table 11.1 shows the data that produced that bar
graph.
11.6.4 Average/mean of the distribution
The frequency distribution can also be used to compute an average value: each (approxi
mate) grade value ˜ x
i
is achieved by p
i
students, which is a fraction (p
i
/N) of the whole
class. When we form the multiple (p
i
/N)˜ x
i
, we assign a “weight” to each of the cate
234 Chapter 11. Appendix
i grade ˜ x
i
number p
i
¸
p
i
¸
˜ x
i
p
i
(1/N)
¸
˜ x
i
p
i
0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0
1 3±2 1 1 3.0 0.0395
2 8±2 2 3 19 0.25
3 13±2 0 3 19 0.25
4 18±2 5 8 109 1.4342
5 23±2 10 18 339 4.4605
6 28±2 8 26 563 7.4079
7 33±2 21 47 1256 16.5263
8 38±2 19 66 1978 26.0263
9 43±2 6 72 2236 29.4211
10 48±2 4 76 2428 31.9474
Table 11.1. Distribution of grades (out of 50) for a class of 76 students. The mean
grade for this class is 31.9474.
gories according to the proportion of the class that was in that category. (The terminology
weighted average is sometimes used.)
We deﬁne the mean or average grade in the distribution by
¯ x =
M
¸
i=1
˜ x
i
p
i
N
. (11.1)
Where M is the number of bins. An equivalent way of expressing the mean (average) is:
¯ x =
1
N
M
¸
i=1
˜ x
i
p
i
=
¸
M
i=1
˜ x
i
p
i
¸
M
i=1
p
i
. (11.2)
The sum in the denominator of this last fraction is simply the total class size.
In Table 11.1, we show steps in the calculation of the mean grade for the class. This
calculation is easily handled on the same spreadsheet that recorded the frequency of grades
and that was used to plot the bar graph of that distribution. Equations 11.1 and 11.2 are
saying the same thing. We will see the second of these again in the context of a more
general probability distribution in Chapter 8.
11.6.5 Cumulative function
We can calculate a “running total” as shown on Figure 11.6, where we plot for each grade
category, the total number of students whose grade was in the given range.
11.6. Analysis of data: a student grade distribution 235
We deﬁne the cumulative function, F
i
to be:
F
i
=
i
¸
k=1
p
k
.
Then F
i
is the number of students whose grade x
k
was between x
1
and x
i
(x
1
≤
x
k
≤ x
i
). Of course, when we add up all the way to the last category, we arrive at the total
number of students in the class (assuming each student wrote the test and received a grade).
Thus
F
m
=
M
¸
k=1
p
k
= N,
Where as before, M stands for the number of “bins” used to represent the grade distribution.
(Note that each student has been counted in one of the categories correspondingto the grade
he or she achieved.) Another way of saying the same thing is that
m
¸
k=1
p
k
N
= 1.
In Figure 11.6 we show the cumulative function, i.e. we plot ˜ x
i
vs F
i
. Note that this graph
is a step function. That is,the function takes on a set of discrete values with jumps at every
5th integer
73
.
Grade Distribution
Cumulative function
0.0 50.0
0.0
80.0
Cumulative function
50%
50%
40.
30.
median 0.0 50.0
0.0
80.0
Figure 11.6. Top: The same grade distribution as in Figure 11.5, but showing
the cumulative function. The grid has been removed for easier visualization of that step
function. Bottom:The cumulative function is used to determine an approximate median
grade.
73
Note: ideally, this graph should be discontinuous, with horizontal segments only. The vertical“jumps” cannot
correspond to values of a function. However the spreadsheet tool used to plot this function does not currently
allow this graphing option.
236 Chapter 11. Appendix
11.6.6 The median
We can use the cumulative function and its features to come up with newways of summariz
ing the distribution or comparing the performance of two sections. Suppose we subdivide
a given class into exactly two equal groups based on performance on the test. Then there
would be some grade that was achieved or surpassed by the top half of the class only; the
rest of the students (i.e. the other half of the class) got scores below that level. We call that
grade the median of the distribution.
To ﬁnd the median grade using a cumulative function, we must ask what grade level
corresponds to a cumulative 1/2 of the class, i.e. to N/2 students. To determine that level,
we draw a horizontal line corresponding to N/2. As shown in Figure 11.6, because the
function f is discontinuous, we only have an approximate median of 30. We observe that
the median is not in general equal to the mean computed earlier.
11.7 Factorial notation
Let n be an integer, n ≥ 0. Then n!, called “n factorial”, is deﬁned as the following product
of integers:
n! = n(n −1)(n −2) . . . (2)(1)
Example
1! = 1
2! = 2 · 1 = 2
3! = 3 · 2 · 1 = 6
4! = 4 · 3 · 2 · 1 = 24
5! = 5 · 4 · 3 · 2 · 1 = 120
We also deﬁne
0! = 1
11.8 Appendix: Permutations and combinations
11.8.1 Permutations
A permutation is a way of arranging objects, where the order of appearance of the objects
is important.
11.9. Appendix: Tests for convergence of series 237
(c)
n distinct objects
n slots
n distinct objects
k slots
n distinct objects
k objects
n n−1 ... n−k+1
n n−1 n−2 ... 2 1
n n−1 ... n−k+1
k slots
n!
(n−k)!
n!
P(n,k)=
k! C(n,k)
(a)
(b)
Figure 11.7. This diagram illustrates the meanings of permutations and combi
nations. (a) The number of permutations (ways of arranging) n objects into n slots. There
are n choices for the ﬁrst slot, and for each of these, there are n −1 choices for the second
slot, etc. In total there are n! ways of arranging these objects. (Note that the order of
the objects is here important.) (b) The number of permutations of n objects into k slots,
P(n, k), is the product n · (n − 1) · (n − 2) . . . (n − k + 1) which can also be written as
a ratio of factorials. (c) The number of combinations of n objects in groups of k is called
C(n, k) (shown as the ﬁrst arrow in part c). Here order is not important. The step shown
in (b) is equivalent o the two steps shown in (c). This means that there is a relationship
between P(n, k) and C(n, k), namely, P(n, k) = k!C(n, k).
11.9 Appendix: Tests for convergence of series
In order for the sum of ‘inﬁnitely many things’ to add up to a ﬁnite number, the terms have
to get smaller. But just getting smaller is not, in itself, enough to guarantee convergence.
(We will show this later on by considering the harmonic series.)
There are rigorous mathematical tests which help determine whether a series con
verges or not. We discuss some of these tests here
74
.
74
Recall that ⇒ means “implies that”. This is a oneway implication: A ⇒ B says that “A implies B”
and cannot be used to conclude that B implies A. ⇔ means that each statement implies the other, a twoway
implication. Just as it is important to “obey trafﬁc signs” and avoid “driving the wrong way” on a oneway street,
it is also important to be careful about use of these mathematical statements.
238 Chapter 11. Appendix
11.9.1 The ratio test:
If
∞
¸
k=0
a
k
is a series with a
n
> 0 and lim
k→∞
a
k+1
a
k
= L, then
(a) L < 1 ⇒the series converges,
(a) L > 1 ⇒the series diverges,
(a) L = 1 ⇒the test is inconclusive.
Example 1: Reciprocal factorial series
Recall that if k > 0 is an integer then the notation k! (read “k factorial”) means
k! = k · (k −1) · (k −2) . . . 3 · 2 · 1.
Consider the series
S =
∞
¸
k=1
1
k!
= 1 +
1
2 · 1
+
1
3 · 2 · 1
+. . . +
1
k(k −1) . . . 1
,
then
a
k+1
=
1
(k + 1)!
, a
k
=
1
k!
,
a
k+1
a
k
= lim
k→∞
1
(k+1)!
1
k!
= lim
k→∞
k!
(k + 1)!
= lim
k→∞
1
k + 1
= 0.
Thus L = 0, L < 1 so this series converges by the ratio test. Later, we will see a second
method (comparison) to arrive at the same conclusion.
Example 2: Harmonic series
Does the following converge?
S =
∞
¸
k=1
1
k
= 1 +
1
2
+
1
3
+. . . +
1
k
+. . . ,
This series is the Harmonic Series. To apply the ratio test, we note that
a
k+1
=
1
k + 1
, a
k
=
1
k
,
L = lim
k→∞
a
k+1
a
k
= lim
k→∞
1
k+1
1
k
= lim
k→∞
k
k + 1
= 1.
Since L = 1, in this case, the test is inconclusive. In fact, we show in Section 10.4 that the
harmonic series diverges.
11.9. Appendix: Tests for convergence of series 239
Example 3: Geometric series
Apply the ratio test to determine the condition for convergence of the geometric series,
S =
∞
¸
k=0
r
k
.
Here
a
k+1
= r
k+1
, a
k
= r
k
,
a
k+1
a
k
= r,
L = lim
k→∞
a
k+1
a
k
= r.
So, by the ratio test, if L = r < 1 then the geometric series converges (conﬁrming a fact
we have already established).
11.9.2 Series comparison tests
We can sometimes use the convergence (or divergence) of a known series to conclude
whether a second series converges (or diverges).
Suppose we have two series,
S
a
=
∞
¸
k=0
a
k
and S
b
=
∞
¸
k=0
b
k
,
such that terms of one series are always smaller than terms of the other, i.e. satisfy
0 < a
k
< b
k
for all k = 0, 1, . . . .
Then
¸
b
k
converges ⇒
¸
a
k
converges,
¸
a
k
diverges ⇒
¸
b
k
diverges.
The idea behind the ﬁrst of these statements is that the “smaller” series
¸
a
k
is
“squeezed in” between 0 (the lower bound) and the sum of the larger series (which we
know must exist, since
¸
b
k
converges.) This means that the smaller series cannot become
unbounded. For the second statement, we have that the smaller of the two series is known
to diverge, forcing the larger also to be unbounded. One must carefully observe that “⇒”
applies only in one direction. (For example, if the smaller series converges, we cannot
conclude anything about the larger series.)
Example: Comparison with geometric series
Does the series below converge or diverge?
S =
∞
¸
k=0
1
2
k
+ 1
.
240 Chapter 11. Appendix
Solution: We compare terms in this series to a terms in a geometric series with r =
1
2
. i.e.
consider
a
k
=
1
2
k
+ 1
, b
k
=
1
2
k
.
Then clearly
0 < a
k
< b
k
for every k
(since the denominator in a
k
is larger). But we know that
¸
1
2
k
converges. Therefore, so
does
¸
1
2
k
+1
.
11.9.3 Alternating series
An alternating series is a series in which the signs of successive terms alternate. An exam
ple of this type is the series
1 −
1
2
+
1
3
−
1
4
+ . . . =
¸
(−1)
n+1
1
n
We will show that this series converges (essentially because terms nearly cancel out), and
in fact, we show in Section 10.5.3 that it converges to the number ln(2) ≈ 0.693. More
generally, we have the following result.
If S is an alternating series,
S =
∞
¸
k=1
(−1)
k
a
k
= a
1
−a
2
+a
3
−a
4
+. . .
with a
k
> 0 and such that (1) a
1
 ≥ a
2
 ≥ a
3
 ≥ . . . etc. and (2) lim
k→∞
a
k
= 0, then
the series converges. (This was established by Leibniz in 1705.)
11.10 Adding and multiplying series
We ﬁrst comment that arithmetic operations on inﬁnite series only make sense if the series
are convergent. In this discussion, we will deal only with series of the convergent type.
When this is true, then (and only then) is it true that we can exchange the order of operations
as discussed below.
If
¸
a
k
and
¸
b
k
both converge and
¸
a
k
= S
¸
b
k
= T, then
(a)
¸
(a
k
+ b
k
) converges and
¸
(a
k
+b
k
) =
¸
a
k
+
¸
b
k
= S +T.
(b)
¸
ca
k
= c
¸
a
k
= cS, where c is any constant.
(c) The product (
¸
a
k
) · (
¸
b
k
) =
¸
∞
k=0
¸
k
i=0
a
i
b
k−i
= S · T.
11.11. Using series to solve a differential equation 241
Example:
¸
1
2
k
·
¸
1
3
j
=
1 +
1
2
+
1
4
+. . .
1 +
1
3
+
1
9
+. . .
.
Both series converge, so we can write
∞
¸
j=0
∞
¸
k=0
1
2
k
1
3
j
=
1
1 −
1
2
·
1
1 −
1
3
= 2 ·
3
2
= 3.
11.11 Using series to solve a differential equation
Airy’s equation arises in the study of optics, and (with initial conditions) is as follows:
y
= xy, y(0) = 1, y
(0) = 0.
As before, we will write the solution as a series:
y = a
0
+a
1
x +a
2
x
2
+a
3
x
3
+a
4
x
4
+a
5
x
5
+. . .
Using the information from the initial conditions, we get y(0) = a
0
= 1 and y
(0) = a
1
=
0. Now we can write down the derivatives:
y
= a
1
+ 2a
2
x + 3a
3
x
2
+ 4a
4
x
3
+ 5a
5
x
4
+. . .
y
= 2a
2
+ 2 · 3x + 3 · 4x
2
+ 4 · 5x
3
+. . .
The equation then gives
y
= xy
2a
2
+ 2 · 3a
3
x + 3 · 4a
4
x
2
+ 4 · 5a
5
x
3
+. . . = x(a
0
+a
1
x +a
2
x
2
+a
3
x
3
+. . .)
2a
2
+ 2 · 3a
3
x + 3 · 4a
4
x
2
+ 4 · 5a
5
x
3
+. . . = a
0
x +a
1
x
2
+a
2
x
3
+a
3
x
4
+. . .
Again, we can equate the coefﬁcients of x, and use a
0
= 1 and a
1
= 0, to obtain
2a
2
= 0 ⇒a
2
= 0,
2 · 3a
3
= a
0
⇒a
3
=
1
2·3
,
3 · 4a
4
= a
1
⇒a
4
= 0,
4 · 5a
5
= a
2
⇒a
5
= 0,
5 · 6a
6
= a
3
⇒a
6
=
1
2·3·5·6
.
This gives us the ﬁrst few terms of the solution:
y = 1 +
x
3
2 · 3
+
x
6
2 · 3 · 5 · 6
+. . .
If we continue in this way, we can write down many terms of the series.
242 Chapter 11. Appendix
Index
3D
objects, 81
Abel’s theorem, 211
acceleration, 62
actin
cortex, 84
addition
principle, 140
age
distribution, 167
of death, 167
airways
surface area, 23
volume, 22
Airy’s equation, 241
alcohol
in the blood, 185
algorithm, 29
allele, 146, 165
alligator, 101
alternating series, 240
alveoli, 17
analytic, 214
approach, 29
annuity, 74
antidifferentiation, 49
antiderivative, 47, 110
table of, 49
applications
of integration, 61
approximation
left endpoint, 224
linear, 36, 200
right endpoint, 224
Archimedes, 4
area
as a function, 39
circle, 6
of planar region, 27
of simple shapes, 1
parallelogram, 2
polygon, 3
rectangle, 2
triangle, 2
true, 35
average, 234
mass density, 86
of probability distribution, 137
weighted, 234
average value
of a function, 76, 161
bacterial
motion, 150
balance
energy, 188
mass, 186
bank
interest rate, 74
bell
curve, 145
Bernoulli trial, 140
bifurcate, 18
bin, 166, 233
binomial
coefﬁcient, 142
distribution, 140, 143
theorem, 142
birth, 71, 178
blood alcohol, 185
branch
daughter, 18
parent, 18
243
244 Index
bronchial tubes, 17
calculus
motivation for, xvii
carrying capacity, 191
center
of mass, 81, 85, 133, 137, 157, 228
centroid, 122
chain rule, 107
change
net, 66, 71
total, 66
chemical kinetics, 185
chromosomes, 146
circadean
rhythm, 72
cohort, 196, 197
coin
fair, 134
toss, 136, 165
combination, 237
comparison
integral and series, 206
integrals, 205
tests, 239
completing the square, 117
conservation
of energy, 188
of mass, 186
converge, 14
convergence, 199
of series, 200
tests for, 201, 206, 237
convergent, 15
coordinate
system, 28
critical point, 53
cumulative
function, 84, 136, 154, 155, 235
data, 133
set, 133
decay
radioactive, 162
rate, 185
deﬁnite
integral, 37, 43
density, 61, 82
probability, 153
dice, 139
differential, 107–109
equation, 177
notation, 107, 108
differential equation
linear, 184
nonlinear, 192
displacement, 62
distribution
binomial, 140
frequency, 233
Gaussian, 145
grade, 133, 137
normal, 145
uniform, 169, 174
diverge, 14, 201
divergence, 199
of series, 200
divergent, 15
dummy
variable, 40
emptying
container, 186
time, 191
endpoints, 30, 113
energy
balance, 188
conservation, 188
kinetic, 188
potential, 188
error
approximation, 216
Euler’s method, 184
evaluate
a function, 208
even
function, 51
expected value, 137
experiment, 134
cointoss, 137
repeated, 134
exponential, 35
Index 245
decaying, 202
function, 214
growth, 19, 180
eye
color, 146, 147
factorial, 238
notation, 236
factoring
denominator, 117
failure, 140
fair
dice, 139
falling object, 181
ﬁrstorder
differential equation, 178
force
frictional, 181
of gravity, 181
formulae
areas, 25
volumes, 25
fractals, 18
frequency, 73, 136
friction, 181
frictional
coefﬁcient, 181
fulcrum, 226
function
bounded, 37
continuous, 37
even, 51
inverse, 53
Fundamental Theorem of Calculus, 40,
41, 43, 47, 62, 155, 216
Gauss, 11
formula, 11, 12
Gaussian
distribution, 145
gene, 146
genetics, 146
genotype, 146
geometric
series, 10, 209, 240
series, ﬁnite, 13
series,ﬁnite, 200
series,inﬁnite, 201
Gompertz, 196
grade
distribution, 137, 232
growth
density dependent, 191
exponential, 19, 75, 180
logistic, 191
population, 197
selfsimilar, 18
unlimited, 179, 191
growth rate
intrinsic, 191
per capita, 179
Hanoi
tower of, 8
HardyWeinberg, 146
harmonic
series, 201, 206, 211, 237
height
distribution, 166
higher order terms, 200
hormone
level of, 72
hypotenuse, 121
implication, 237
improper
integral, 58, 162–164, 203
income
stream, 74
induction, 221
mathematical, 12
inﬁnite
series, 14, 200
initial
condition, 179
initial value, 178
problem, 178, 179
integral, 110
applications of, 61
converges, 202, 204
deﬁnite, 31, 33, 37, 40, 43, 110
deﬁnite,properties of, 44
246 Index
diverges, 202, 203
does not exist, 57, 121
exists, 163
improper, 58, 76, 162–164, 199, 202,
206
indeﬁnite, 110, 192
integrand, 110
integration, 33
by partial fractions, 124
by parts, 107, 124, 126
by substitution, 111
constant, 111
numerical, 162
interest
compounded, 75
rate, 74
inverse function, 53
inverse trigonometric functions, 121
keratocyte, 84
kinetic
energy, 188
Kulesa
Paul, 101
leaf
area of, 33
leaking
container, 186
Leibniz, 240
length
of curve, 81, 96
of straight line, 96
limit, 29
linear approximation, 36
logistic
equation, 191
growth, 191
lung
branching, 16
human, 22
Maple, 107
mass
balance, 186
conservation, 186
density, 82, 165
discrete, 165
mass distribution
continuous, 82
discrete, 82
Mathematica, 107
mating
table, 148
maximum, 53, 55
mean, 76, 133, 137, 153, 158, 161, 234
continuous probability, 154
decay time, 162, 164
of a distribution, 157
of a probability distribution, 106
of binomial distribution, 144
measurement, 133
median, 87, 133, 158, 161, 236
continuous probability, 154
decay time, 162, 164
micron(µm), 84
minimum, 53, 55
model
derivation of, 186
modeling, 177
Mogilner
Alex, 84
moment, 171
j’th, 139
ﬁrst, 172
of a distribution, 171
of distribution, 139
of mass, 227
second, 139, 172
zero’th, 172
mortality, 178
age distribution, 167
constant, 178
Gompertz law of, 196
nonconstant, 196
motion
uniform, 63
uniformly accelerated, 63
multiplication
principle, 140
Murray,James D., 101
Index 247
net change, 67
Newton’s law, 177
nonlinear
differential equation, 189
normalization, 145, 155
constant, 155, 163
numerical
approach, 29
method, 184
observation, 133
ODE, 177
oscillation, 73
outcome
of experiment, 134
partial fractions, 118, 192, 231
partial sums, 15, 200
PDE, 177
pendulum, 177
perfect square, 117
period, 73
permutation, 142, 237
phenotype, 146
pi(π)
approximation for, 212
deﬁnition of, 5
polygon, 3
polynomials, 208
population
growth, 178, 197
sustainable, 195
potential
energy, 188
power
series, 199
Preface, xvii
present value, 75, 76
probability
applications of, 161
continuous, 153, 165
cumulative, 136
density, 154
discrete, 165
discrete, rules of, 135
empirical, 134, 136
symmetric, 160
theoretical, 135
product rule
for derivatives, 126
production, 71
progression
geometric, 20
mathmatical, 19
Pythagorean
theorem, 96
triangle, 121
radioactive
decay, 162
radioactive decay
cumulative, 164
raindrops, 169
random
event, 134
variable, 135
walk, 150
random variable
continuous, 153
discrete, 153
rate
birth, 178
mortality, 178
of change, 67
production, 72
removal, 72
ratio
test, 238
rational
function, 124, 231
rectangle
height of, 30
rectangular strips, 28, 43
recursion relation, 19
removal, 71
replicate, 136
rescale, 145
Riemann
sum, 28–31, 33, 40
rule
chain, 116
rules
248 Index
iterated, 23
savings account, 74
scaled
equation, 192
scaling, 192
secant, 230
separation
of variables, 65, 177–179, 182, 189,
197
series
p, 208
alternating, 240
comparison tests, 239
converges, 200
divergent, 238
diverges, 200, 208
ﬁnite geometric, 13
geometric, 10, 13, 200, 209, 239
harmonic, 201, 206, 211, 237, 238
inﬁnite, 14, 199, 200
operations on, 240
Taylor, 199, 209
term by term integration, 210
Sigma
notation, 9
size distribution, 169
sketching
antiderivative, 53
solids
of revolution, 90, 91
solution
curves, 190
of initial value problem, 179
qualitative, 68
quantitative, 68
to ODE, 180
spreadsheet, 23, 29, 190
standard deviation, 138, 172, 173
steady state, 66, 184, 195
step
function, 138, 235
strips
area of, 28
rectangular, 28, 43
substitution, 107, 111
examples, 113
trigonometric, 118, 123
success, 140
sum
geometric, 35
of N cubes, 12
of N integers, 11
of N squares, 12
of square integers, 32
Riemann, 29, 30, 40
summation
index, 9
notation, 9
sums
partial, 15, 200
surface area
cylinder, 6
survival
probability, 168
tangent line, 200
Taylor polynomial, 209
Taylor series, 199, 209
for cos(x), 216
for sin(x), 214
for e
x
, 213
teeth, 99
temperature, 67
terminal velocity, 180
torque, 226, 227
tree
growth, 68
structure, 18
trial
Bernoulli, 140
triangle
Pythagorean, 121
trigonometric, 120
trifurcate, 18
trigonometric
identities, 118
substitution, 118
unbiased, 134, 136
unbounded
function, 57
Index 249
undeﬁned
function, 58
units, 7
variance, 138, 153, 172
continuous probability, 154
velocity, 62
terminal, 66, 180, 184
volume
cube, 6
cylinder, 7, 90
cylindrical shell, 7
disk, 90
of solids, 81
rectangular box, 6
shell, 90
simple shapes, 6
sphere, 7
spherical shell, 7
zygote, 147
ii
Leah EdelsteinKeshet
Contents
Preface 1 Areas, volumes and simple sums 1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 Areas of simple shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.1 Example 1: Finding the area of a polygon using triangles: a “dissection” method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.2 Example 2: How Archimedes discovered the area of a circle: dissect and “take a limit” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3 Simple volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.1 Example 3: The Tower of Hanoi: a tower of disks . . . . 1.4 Summations and the “Sigma” notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.1 Manipulations of sums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5 Summation formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.1 Example 3, revisited: Volume of a Tower of Hanoi . . . . 1.6 Summing the geometric series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7 Prelude to inﬁnite series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.1 The inﬁnite geometric series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.2 Example: A geometric series that converges. . . . . . . . 1.7.3 Example: A geometric series that diverges . . . . . . . . 1.8 Application of geometric series to the branching structure of the lungs 1.8.1 Assumptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8.2 A simple geometric rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8.3 Total number of segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8.4 Total volume of airways in the lung . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8.5 Total surface area of the lung branches . . . . . . . . . . 1.8.6 Summary of predictions for speciﬁc parameter values . . 1.8.7 Exploring the problem numerically . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8.8 For further independent study . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii 1 1 1 3 4 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 16 16 17 19 20 20 21 22 23 23 25
2
Areas 27 2.1 Areas in the plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 2.2 Computing the area under a curve by rectangular strips . . . . . . . . 29 iii
iv 2.2.1 2.2.2
Contents First approach: Numerical integration using a spreadsheet Second approach: Analytic computation using Riemann sums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.3 Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The area of a leaf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Area under an exponential curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extensions and other examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The deﬁnite integral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.1 Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.2 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The area as a function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 30 33 33 35 36 37 37 38 39 40 43 43 44 45 47 47 47 48 49 50 50 50 52 53 53 56 56 57 57 57 57 58 59 61 61 62 62 63 63 64 66 68
2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6
2.7 2.8 3
The Fundamental Theorem of Calculus 3.1 The deﬁnite integral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2 Properties of the deﬁnite integral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3 The area as a function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4 The Fundamental Theorem of Calculus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.1 Fundamental theorem of calculus: Part I . . . . . . . . . 3.4.2 Example: an antiderivative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.3 Fundamental theorem of calculus: Part II . . . . . . . . . 3.5 Review of derivatives (and antiderivatives) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6 Examples: Computing areas with the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus 3.6.1 Example 1: The area under a polynomial . . . . . . . . . 3.6.2 Example 2: Simple areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6.3 Example 3: The area between two curves . . . . . . . . . 3.6.4 Example 4: Area of land . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 Qualitative ideas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7.1 Example: sketching A(x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8 Some ﬁne print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8.1 Function unbounded I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8.2 Function unbounded II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8.3 Example: Function discontinuous or with distinct parts . 3.8.4 Function undeﬁned . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8.5 Inﬁnite domain (“improper integral”) . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applications of the deﬁnite integral to velocities and rates 4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 Displacement, velocity and acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.1 Geometric interpretations . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.2 Displacement for uniform motion . . . . . . . . 4.2.3 Uniformly accelerated motion . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.4 Nonconstant acceleration and terminal velocity 4.3 From rates of change to total change . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.1 Tree growth rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
Contents 4.3.2 Radius of a tree trunk . . . . . 4.3.3 Birth rates and total births . . . Production and removal . . . . . . . . . . . Present value of a continuous income stream Average value of a function . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
v 68 71 71 74 76 78
4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 5
Applications of the deﬁnite integral to calculating volume, mass, and length 81 5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 5.2 Mass distributions in one dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 5.2.1 A discrete distribution: total mass of beads on a wire . . . 82 5.2.2 A continuous distribution: mass density and total mass . . 82 5.2.3 Example: Actin density inside a cell . . . . . . . . . . . 84 5.3 Mass distribution and the center of mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 5.3.1 Center of mass of a discrete distribution . . . . . . . . . . 85 5.3.2 Center of mass of a continuous distribution . . . . . . . . 85 5.3.3 Example: Center of mass vs average mass density . . . . 86 5.3.4 Physical interpretation of the center of mass . . . . . . . 87 5.4 Miscellaneous examples and related problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 5.4.1 Example: A glucose density gradient . . . . . . . . . . . 87 5.4.2 Example: A circular colony of bacteria . . . . . . . . . . 89 5.5 Volumes of solids of revolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 5.5.1 Volumes of cylinders and shells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 5.5.2 Computing the Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 5.6 Length of a curve: Arc length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 5.6.1 How the alligator gets its smile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 5.6.2 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 5.7 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Techniques of Integration 6.1 Differential notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2 Antidifferentiation and indeﬁnite integrals . . . . . . . 6.2.1 Integrals of derivatives . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3 Simple substitution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3.1 Example: Simple substitution . . . . . . . 6.3.2 How to handle endpoints . . . . . . . . . 6.3.3 Examples: Substitution type integrals . . . 6.3.4 When simple substitution fails . . . . . . . 6.3.5 Checking your answer . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4 More substitutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.1 Example: perfect square in denominator . 6.4.2 Example: completing the square . . . . . . 6.4.3 Example: factoring the denominator . . . 6.5 Trigonometric substitutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.1 Example: simple trigonometric substitution 6.5.2 Example: using trigonometric identities (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 107 110 111 111 112 113 113 115 116 116 116 117 117 118 118 119
6
. . . . . .6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 120 122 123 124 124 125 126 126 130 133 133 133 134 134 134 134 135 135 136 136 136 137 137 140 140 142 143 145 146 147 150 152 153 153 153 156 157 158 160 161 161 162 165 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .vi 6. . . . . . 7. . .5.2 The Binomial theorem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 How is the mean different from the median? . 6. . . . .1 Radioactive decay . . . . . . . 7. . . . . .3 Example: a nonsymmetric distribution . . .1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . 7. . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . 8. . . . . . . . 8. . .6. . . . . . . . . . . . . Partial fractions . . .6. . .1 Example: partial fractions (1) . . .8 Random walker . . . .7. . . . . . . . . . . 6. 7. . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6. . . . . 8 Continuous probability distributions 8. . .5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Mean and median . . 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Discrete versus continuous probability . . .3. . . 8.2.2 Dealing with data . . . . 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7. . . .6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 The binomial distribution . . Summary . .4 Examples of experimental data . . . . .5 Example: The centroid of a two dimensional shape 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8. . .9 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8. . . .4 Example: converting to trigonometric functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . 7.3 Example: partial fractions (3) . . . . . . 7. Integration by parts .5 Random variables and probability distributions 7. . . . .4. . . . . .4 Applications of continuous probability . . . 6. . . . . . . Contents . 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . .1 Example1: Tossing a coin . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Simple experiments . .3 Empirical probability . . . . . 7. . . . . .1 Example: Mean and median . . .1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 The normalized binomial distribution .6 6. .1 Experiment .2 Outcome .6 Example: tan and sec substitution .7 HardyWeinberg genetics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Mean and variance of a probability distribution . . . . . . .6. . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . . . . 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 6. .3. . . . . .4 Theoretical Probability . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7. . . . . . 7. 8. . . . . . . . 7. . .3. . . . . 7. .2 Example 2: grade distributions . . . .6. . . . . . . . . . . .4. . .1 The Binomial distribution . . . . 7. . . . .5. . . 6. . . .1 Example: probability density and the cumulative function 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 The cumulative distribution . .8 7 Discrete probability and the laws of chance 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Bernoulli trials . . . .1 Random nonassortative mating . . . . . . . . . 7. . . . . . . . . 7. . . . . . . 6. .2 Example: partial fractions (2) . .3. . . . .2 Basic deﬁnitions and properties .3 Example: using trigonometric identities (2) . . . . 8. . . . . . . .4. . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Introduction . . . . . . . . 8. . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 . . . . . . . . . 174 . .6 Density dependent growth . .4 Solution by separation of variables . 9. .2 Including friction: the case of terminal velocity . . . . . .1 Example: A decaying exponential: convergent improper integral . . . . .2 Separation of variables and integration . . . . .4 Related problems and examples . . .5. .6. . . . . . . . .Contents 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Aging and Survival curves for a cohort: .3 Terminal velocity and steady states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9. . . . 8. . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . .1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 A simple model for population growth . 202 . 172 . . . . . . . . . . .1 The logistic equation . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . 9. .6 What this solution tells us . 9.4. . . . 9. . . . . . . .8 Summary . . . . . 9.3 Example: computing moments .3 Separation of variables . .3. . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9. . .2 Convergence and divergence of series . . 9. . . . 9. .1 Conservation of mass . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . improper integrals. . . . . . . . . . 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 . . . . . . 8. . .4 Application of partial fractions . . . . . . . . . . . . .7. . . . . . . . .1 Blood alcohol . . . . . . 9. . . . . . . . . . . 175 .6 9 . 9. .1 Ignoring friction: the uniformly accelerated case . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9. . . 9. . . . 8. . . 10 Inﬁnite series. . . .2 Scaling the equation . . . . . 199 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Conservation of energy . . . . . . . . 9. . . . . . . . . .5 Emptying a container . . . . . . vii 166 167 169 171 171 8. . . .5. . . 9. . . . . . 9. . . . . . . . . . . .3 Putting it together . .5 Example: Raindrop size distribution . . . . . . . . . . .3 Improper integrals . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9. . . .2. . . .6.3. . . . . . . 177 177 178 178 179 180 181 181 184 184 185 185 186 186 188 188 189 191 191 191 192 192 192 193 194 195 196 197 197 Differential Equations 9. . . . . . . . .3 Example: Student heights . . . . . . 9. . . . . 202 . . . . . .7. . . . . Moments of a probability density . 9. . . 9. . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9. . .3 Steady state . . . . . . .7 Extensions and other population models: the “Law of Mortality” 9.2 Gompertz Model . . . . . . . . . . . . 9. . . .5. . .4. . . . . . . . . . . .6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6. . 8. . . . . . . . .5 8. . . . . . 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Deﬁnition of moments . . . . .5 The solution of the logistic equation .4 Example: Age dependent mortality . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . 10. . .6. . . . . . . . .4. . . 9. . . . 9. and Taylor series 10. . . . . . . . . .4. . . .2 Chemical kinetics . . .5. . . .5 How long will it take the tank to empty? . . . . . . . . . . .2 Unlimited population growth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Relationship of moments to mean and variance of a probability density . .
.5. . 11. . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . 11. . . .1 Permutations . . . . . 11. . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . . . .2 Fraction of students that scored a given grade . . 10. . . . . . . . . . 11. . .6. .1 Example 1: A simple expansion . 11. . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Frequency distribution . . . . . . . .3 Example: The improper integral of 1/x2 converges . . . . . . . . .1 Taylor series for the exponential function. . . 11. .1 Secants and other “hard integrals” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 A special case of integration by partial fractions . . . 10. 11.11 Using series to solve a differential equation . . .10 Adding and multiplying series . .2 Series comparison tests . . 11. . . . . . . . . .6. ex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . .1 Example: Volume of a cone using the shell method . . . . . . . 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Riemann Sums: Extensions and other examples .5. . . 11. . . .3 Example 3: An expansion for the logarithm . .4 Example 4: An expansion for arctan . . . . . . . . .3 Alternating series . . . . .7 Factorial notation . . . . . . . . . . . 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Integral comparison tests . . . .5 10. . . . . . . . . . . 10. . .3. . . . . . . 11. . . . 10. . .5. . .1 The harmonic series . . . . . . . . . .6. 11. . . . . . . . .8. 11. . . .2 Example 2: Another substitution . . . . . . .3 Physical interpretation of the center of mass . . . . 11. . .2 Example: The improper integral of 1/x diverges . . . .9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Appendix: Tests for convergence of series . . 10. Taylor Series: a systematic approach . . . . . . .1 The ratio test: . .6 The median . . . . . 11. . . . . .2 Using left (rather than right) endpoints . . . . . . . . . . .4 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Appendix: Permutations and combinations . . .7. . . . .viii Contents 10. Application of Taylor series . . . . . . . . 10.2 Taylor series of trigonometric functions . .7 10. . . .8 11 Appendix 11. . . . . 11. . . . . . . .7. . . .2 Example 2: Series solution of a differential equation . . . . . . .1 How to prove the formulae for sums of squares and cubes . . 11. . . . . . . . . 11. . . . .9. 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . .6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11. .4 When does the integral of 1/xp converge? . . . .6. 10. . . .4 Average/mean of the distribution . .3.6 10. . . . . 11. . . . . . . . 11. . . .3. . . .3. . . .5 Cumulative function . . . . 203 204 204 205 206 206 208 209 210 210 211 212 213 214 216 216 217 218 221 221 223 223 224 226 229 229 230 230 231 232 232 232 233 233 234 236 236 236 236 237 238 239 240 240 241 10. . . . .5 More techniques of integration . .4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9. . 10. . . . . . . Comparing integrals and series . . . . . . . . . . 11.6. . .5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11. . . .6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Deﬁning an average grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 The shell method for computing volumes .1 A general interval: a ≤ x ≤ b . . .6. . . . .6 Analysis of data: a student grade distribution . . . From geometric series to Taylor polynomials . . . . . .1 Example 1: using a Taylor series to evaluate an integral 10. 11.5.2. . . . .
Contents Index ix 243 .
x Contents .
. . . . . The rate of change of a tree radius . . . . .) 8 Branched structure of the lung airways . . .6 4. . . . . . . . . . .9 4. Tree growth rates. . .3 3. . . Splitting up a region to compute an integral . . . . . Increasing the number of strips improves the approximation . . . . .5 2. . . . . . . . . .3 4. . . . Sketches of a functions and its antiderivative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 3. . . . 24 Areas of regions in the plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 1. . . . . . . . The tree radius as a function of time . . . . . .4 1. . Approximating an area by a set of rectangles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Planar regions whose areas are given by elementary formulae. . . .2 3. . . . How the area changes when the interval changes . . . . . . . . . . .8 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Computing the volume of a set of disks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 2. . . . . . . . 27 28 30 34 37 38 39 44 46 51 52 54 55 56 58 59 63 66 68 69 70 72 74 Deﬁnite integrals for functions that take on negative values. . . Sketching the antiderivative of f (x) .6 1. . . . . . .7 3. . . . . . . . . . . xi . . . . . . . . . The area A(x) considered as a function . . . . . . . . . .2 1. . . . 3 Archimedes’ approximation of the area of a circle . The area of a symmetric region . . . . The “area function” corresponding to a function f (x) . . . . . (This structure is sometimes called the tower of Hanoi after a mathematical puzzle by the same name. . . . . . . . . . . Integrating in the y direction . . The areas A1 and A2 in Example 3 . . . . . . . . . . The area of a leaf . . . . . . . . . . . . The area corresponding to the deﬁnite integral of the function f (x) More areas related to deﬁnite integrals . . .1 2. . . . . . Displacement and velocity as areas under curves Terminal velocity . . .1 1. .4 4. . . . .1 3. . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Dissecting n nsided polygon into n triangles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 3dimensional shapes whose volumes are given by elementary formulae . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 3. . . . . . . .1 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 2. . . . . . . . . . . .5 3. . .6 3. . . . . . . . . . 17 Volume and surface area of the lung airways . .List of Figures 1.3 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rates of hormone production and removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approximating hormone production/removal . .7 2. . . . . . . . and properties of the deﬁnite integral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 2.4 2. . . . . . . .5 4. . . . .
. .1 9. Median and median for a nonsymmetric probability density . . . . . The Binomial distribution . .5 7. . . . . . . . . . . . Slope of a straight line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A semicircular shape. . . . . . . . . Continuous mass distribution . . Emptying a container . . . . .1 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 7. . . . . . . . . . . . A random walker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 8. . . . . . .10 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . A paraboloid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m = ∆y/∆x . . . . . . . . . .1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 7. . . . A helpful triangle . . . . . . . . . . . .6 10. . . . . . . . . . . . Raindrop radius and volume probability distributions . . . . .3 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure illustrating differential notation . . . . . . Solutions to the logistic equation . . . .5 8. . . . . . . . . . Dissecting a solid of revolution into disks .6 8.6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Blood alcohol level . . . . .1 . . . . . . . Generating a sphere by rotating a semicircle . . . . . . . . . . . . The actin cortex of a ﬁsh keratocyte cell . . . . . . .2. . . . Height of ﬂuid versus time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 5. . . . .7 5. . . . . . . . . . . . .xii 4. . . . . .8 5. . . .1 8. . . 182 186 187 190 194 196 Approximating a function .12 5. . . . . . . . . . . . .2 8. . . . . . . Median for Example 8.4 5. 78 Discrete mass distribution . . . . . . .1 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 6. . . . . Volumes of simple 3D shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 6. . . As in Figure 6. . . . . . . . . . . .5 9. . . . . . . . . .11 5. . . . . . . . . . .4 7. . . . Normal probability density and its cumulative function Hardy Weinberg mating . . . . 166 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 9. . . . . .5 5.15 6. . .13 5. . Elements of arclength . . .1 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 List of Figures The yearly day length cycle and average day length . . . . . . . . . .3 5. . . . . . . . . . . 169 . . . . . . . . . . . Mean versus median . . 82 83 84 88 89 91 91 92 93 95 97 97 100 103 104 108 108 120 122 124 138 143 145 146 149 150 157 159 160 162 A plot of data from a coin tossing experiment .2 5. Analysis of distance between successive teeth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 5. . . . . . . .3 6. . . . . . . . . . . . .3 but for example 6. . . . . . . . . . . The Normal (Gaussian) distribution . . . . . Gompertz Law of Mortality . . . . . . . Probability density and its cumulative function in Example 8. A glucose gradient in a test tube . . . . Volume of one of the disks . . . . . Using the spreadsheet to compute and graph arclength Alligator mississippiensis and its teeth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 9. . A bacterial colony . . . . Dissecting a curve into small arcs . .6 5. .14 5. . Reﬁning a histogram by increasing the number of bins leads (eventually) to the idea of a continuous probability density. . . . . . . 199 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 11. . .7 Convergence and divergence of an inﬁnite series Improper integrals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Student grade distribution . . . .4 11. . . . .1 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 10. . . . . . . .2 10. . . . . . . .List of Figures 10. . . . . . . .3 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rectangles with left or right corners on the graph of y = x2 Center of mass . . . . . . . Taylor polynomials for sin(x) . . . . . . . . xiii 201 203 207 215 225 227 228 229 233 235 237 Rectangles attached to left or right endpoints . Permutations and combinations . . . . . . . . . . .5 11. . . .3 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cumulative grade function and the median . . A cone . . . . . . .5 11. . . . . . The harmonic series . . . . . . . . . . .
xiv List of Figures .
3 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hardy Weinberg gene probabilities . . . .2 7. . . . . . 137 141 141 143 147 148 Student test scores . . .1 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Arc length calculated using spreadsheet . . . . . . . . Useful summation formulae . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Data from a cointossing experiment . . . . .1 3. .1 1. . . . . . .4 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Common functions and their antiderivatives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 22 25 26 26 26 Heights and areas of rectangular strips . .6 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 5. . 101 Alligator teeth . . .6 2. . . Surface areas of 3D shapes . . . . . . . . . . surface area. . . . . . . . .List of Tables 1.5 1. . . . .2 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . scale factors. . . . . . 234 xv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mating table for HardyWeinberg genetics . . . . . . . .1 Typical structure of branched airway passages in lungs. . . . . . . . . .2 1. . and other derived quantities Areas of planar regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Volumes of 3D shapes . . .4 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . Probability of X successes in a Bernoulli trial with n = 3 repetitions Pascal’s triangle . .5 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 1. A Bernoulli trial with n = 3 repetitions . . . . Volume. . . .1 7.
xvi List of Tables .
We encounter many cases where a process changes at a rate that varies over time: the rate of production of hormone changes over a day.Preface Integral calculus arose originally to solve very practical problems that merchants. is not a simple geometrical shape. Essentially.) This led to motivation for the development of the topic we now call integral calculus. what is its volume (and thus. or fairly accurate. The idea of applying a limit to obtain the true dimensions of the object was a ﬂash of inspiration that led to modern day calculus. xvii . landowners. a reasonable price to pay)? In most such transactions. how should its area (and therefore. its cost) be calculated? How much olive oil or wine. it is the purpose of this course to show that ideas developed in the original context of geometry (ﬁnding areas or volumes of 2D or 3D shapes) can be generalized and extended to a variety of applications that have little to do with geometry. One area of application is that of computing total change given some timedependent rate of change. The same idea applies to quantities that are distributed not in time but rather over space. its velocity) changes over its path. It is the aim of a calculus course to develop the language to deal with such concepts. but these were at best crude approximations to actual shapes and objects encountered in commerce. If the barrel is not close to cylindrical.e. and ordinary people faced on a daily basis. to arrive at an approximation of the desired area of the shape. Similar ideas apply to computing the volume of a 3D object by successive subdivisions. and approximate those pieces by regular shapes that can be quantiﬁed using simple geometry. In computing the area of an irregular shape. More than that. i. subdivide (the time interval) and add up approximate changes over each of the smaller subintervals. or the rate of motion of a vehicle (i.e. add up the areas of the (approximately regular) little parts in your “dissection”. the approach is based on the idea of “divide and conquer”: that is. the rate of ﬂow of water in a river changes over the seasons. Among such pressing problems were the following: How much should one pay for a piece of land? If that land has an irregular shape. this approximation could be quite crude. cut up the geometric shape into smaller pieces. triangles. are you getting when you purchase a barrelfull? Barrels come is a variety of shapes and sizes. Volumes of cylinders and cubes were also known. and polygons. the need to accurately measure an area or a volume went well beyond the available results of geometry. Computing the total change over some time span turns out to be closely related to the same underlying concept of “divide and conquer”: namely. and to ﬁnd convenient and relevant shortcuts that can be used to solve a variety of problems that have common features.e. to make such concepts systematic. (It was known how to compute areas of rectangles. Depending on how ﬁne the dissection (i. how many little parts).
the most important is integration by parts. we can solve some types of differential equations analytically. In an earlier differential calculus course.e. The material is organized as follows: In Chapter 1 we develop the basic formulae for areas and volumes of elementary shapes. used in the context of simple computer algorithms. computerenabled) calculations. In Chapter 3. we ﬁnd that the chain rule of calculus reappears (in the form of substitution integrals). Applications of these ideas to calculating total change from rates of change. and apply the techniques to computing expected values for random variables. we turn attention to the classic problem of deﬁning and computing the area of a twodimensional region. Here we rediscover the connection between discrete sums and continuous integration. The connection between the mean (in probability) and the center of mass (of a density distributed in space) is illustrated. the importance of understanding the concepts (not just the technical results.e. . and analogous numerical (i. An example to motivate these ideas is the volume and surface area of a branching structure. we discuss the techniques on integration in Chapter 6. or the “formulae” for integrals) is vital: Ideas used to develop the analytic techniques on which calculus is based can be adapted to develop good working methods for harnessing computer power to solve problems. In Chapter 2. This is particularly useful in cases where the analytic methods are not sufﬁcient or too technically challenging. many interesting problems are too challenging to be handled by integration techniques.xviii Preface We show the connection between material that is spatially distributed in a nonuniform way (e. The importance of seeing calculus from these two distinct but related perspectives is stressed: on the one hand. namely the Fundamental Theorem that connects derivatives and integrals. The course concludes with the development of some notions of inﬁnite sums and convergence in Chapter 10. Here. with concepts that are closely linked. leading to the notion of the deﬁnite integral. Quite often such rules take the form of differential equations. For this reason. pencil and paper) calculations . This is discussed in Chapter 9. a density that varies from point to point) and total amount of material (obtained by the same process of integration). and to computing volumes and masses are discussed in Chapters 4 and 5. analytic computations can be very powerful and helpful. With the methods of integral calculus in hand. the student will have made acquaintance with the topic of such equations and qualitative techniques associated with interpreting their solutions. This set of lecture notes grew out of many years of teaching of Mathematics 103. This allows us to ﬁnd a great shortcut to the analytic computations described in Chapter 2. Of prime importance. and a variety of miscellaneous tricks are devised to simplify integrals. the Taylor series is developed and discussed in this concluding chapter.but these apply to a limited set of cases. we discuss the linchpin of Integral Calculus. We study the ideas of probability in Chapters 7 and 8. but at the same time. Many scientiﬁc problems are phrased in terms of rules about rates of change. To expand our reach to other cases. A set of computer labs using a spreadsheet tool are an important part of this course. The two go handinhand. and show how to set up summations that describe compound objects made up of many such shapes. Among these. comes in handy.g. A theme that unites much of the approach is that integral calculus has both analytic (i. a technique that has independent applications in many areas of science. Here is where the same ideas.
and circles are given by elementary formulae. Indeed. We brieﬂy survey some of these simple geometric shapes and list what we know or can easily determine about their area or volume. Rectangular areas Most integration techniques discussed in this course are based on the idea of carving up irregular shapes into rectangular strips.2 Areas of simple shapes One of the main goals in this course will be calculating areas enclosed by curves in the plane and volumes of three dimensional shapes. 1. First. and that the approximation can be made more accurate by a process of reﬁnement. triangles. our ability to compute areas and volumes of more elaborate geometrical objects will rest on some of these simple formulae. The areas of simple geometrical objects. volumes and simple sums 1. In particular. Thus. We show using examples how such ideas can be used in calculating the volumes or areas of more complex objects. summarized below. such as rectangles. areas of rectangles will play an important part in those methods. we conclude with a detailed exploration of the structure of branched airways in the lung as an application of ideas in this chapter. parallelograms. Some shapes are simple enough that no elaborate techniques are needed to compute their areas (or volumes).1 Introduction This introductory chapter has several aims.Chapter 1 Areas. Among these are areas of simple geometric shapes and formulae for sums of certain common sequences. we concentrate here a number of basic formulae for areas and volumes that are used later in developing the notions of integral calculus. An important idea is introduced. We will ﬁnd that the tools of calculus will provide important and powerful techniques for meeting this goal. namely that we can use the sum of areas of elementary shapes to approximate the areas of more complicated objects. 1 .
1(a) and (b) (a) h b (b) h b (c) h b (d) h b (e) h θ (f) h b r b Figure 1. Planar regions whose areas are given by elementary formulae. Thus.1. triangles will play a less important role in subsequent integration methods. See Figure 1. volumes and simple sums • The area of a rectangle with base b and height h is A=b·h • Any parallelogram with height h and base b also has area.2 Chapter 1. any triangle with base b and height h has area 1 A = bh. as shown in Figure 1. and we summarize this review material below.1(c) and (d). However. A = b·h. 2 . Areas of triangular shapes A few illustrative examples in this chapter will be based on dissecting shapes (such as regular polygons) into triangles. Areas. The areas of triangles are easy to compute. • The area of a triangle can be obtained by slicing a rectangle or parallelogram in half.
trigonometric relations can be used to ﬁnd the height h in terms of the length of the base 1/2 and the angle θ/2.1(f) then its height can be obtained from Pythagoras’s theorem. our dissections of planar areas will focus mainly on rectangular pieces. This example illustrates how a complex shape (the polygon) can be dissected into simpler shapes.2. note that in later chapters. For example. we can determine the areas of more complex geometric shapes. For example. as shown in Figure 1.1 Example 1: Finding the area of a polygon using triangles: a “dissection” method Using the simple ideas reviewed so far. namely triangles1 . with two sides of equal length.1. Since it can be further divided into two Pythagorean triangles. An equilateral nsided polygon with sides of unit length can be dissected into n triangles. 1.2. Solution The polygon has n sides. and its area is A = (1/2)br sin(θ) • If the triangle is isosceles. r. as in Figure 1. if the triangle has sides of length b and r with enclosed angle θ. n of these identical angles make up a total of 360◦ or 2π radians.2. Areas of simple shapes 3 • In some cases.2.2. the height of a triangle is not given. but can be determined from other information provided. 1 This calculation will be used again to ﬁnd the area of a circle in Section 1.2. We do not know the heights of these triangles. h2 = r2 − (b/2)2 so that the area of the triangle is A = (1/2)b r2 − (b/2)2 . i.e.1(e) then its height is simply h = r sin(θ). We dissect the polygon into n isosceles triangles. where the length of each side is b = 1. let us compute the area of a regular polygon with n equal sides. . θ/2 θ 1 1/2 h Figure 1. It is θ = 2π/n since together. However. but the angle θ can be found. each of length b = 1. and base of length b. as shown on Figure 1. One of these triangles is shown at right.
4 Chapter 1. But how did this convenient formula come about? and how could we relate it to what we know about simpler shapes whose areas we have discussed so far. Areas. Angon = 4 tan(π/n) For example. n = 4) is Asquare = 1 4 = = 1. namely taking a limit as the number of subdivisions increases 2 . the area of a square (a polygon with 4 equal sides. and rearranging the above expression. Later on. First. Here we discuss how this formula for the area of a circle was determined long ago by Archimedes using a clever “dissection” and approximation trick. 1. The area of the entire polygon is then n times this. 4 tan(π/4) tan(π/4) where we have used the fact that tan(π/4) = 1. A = πr2 . Here it involves adding up the areas of triangles.2. and then taking a limit as the number of triangles gets larger. The statement of the problem speciﬁes that b = 1. Here we see a terriﬁcally important second step that formed the “leap of faith” on which most of calculus is based. namely n .2 Example 2: How Archimedes discovered the area of a circle: dissect and “take a limit” As we learn early in school the formula for the area of a circle of radius r. we get h= b 2 tan(π/n) b 2 tan(π/n) Thus. the area of each of the n triangles is A= 1 1 bh = b 2 2 1 2 . As a second example.2.e. 4 tan(π/6) 2 2(1/ 3) √ Here we used the fact that tan(π/6) = 1/ 3. but using rectangles in the dissections. the area of a hexagon (6 sided polygon. so A= 1 2 tan(π/n) . i. n = 6) is √ 6 3 3 3 √ = Ahexagon = = . we recall the deﬁnition of the constant π: 2 This idea has important parallels with our later development of integration. volumes and simple sums Let h stand for the height of one of the triangles in the dissected polygon. Then trigonometric relations relate the height to the base length as follows: b/2 opp = = tan(θ/2) adj h Using the fact that θ = 2π/n. we do much the same. . We have already seen part of this idea in dissecting a polygon into triangles. in Section 1.1.
we know that the polygon should ﬁt exactly inside a circle of radius r. the sum of the n equal sides of length b each). then we already have a formula for its area. Let r denote the radius of the circle. 2 2 We have grouped terms so that (nb) can be recognized as the perimeter of the polygon (i. Suppose that at one stage we have an n sided polygon. Then the height of each triangle will get closer to the radius of the circle. (nb) → 2πr so A= 1 1 (nb)h → (2πr)r = πr2 2 2 . each one an isosceles triangle with two equal sides of length r and base of undetermined length that we will denote by b. since two sides are radii of the circle.e. and we will encounter this idea often.) Shown in Figure 1. its area gradually becomes a better and better approximation of the area inside the circle.3. Archimedes approximated the area of a circle by dissecting it into triangles. We can compute the area of any one of these polygons by dissecting into triangles. Rather.) This polygon is made up of n triangles. All triangles will be isosceles.3 is a sequence of regular polygons inscribed in the circle. Now consider what happens when we increase the number of sides of the polygon.2. (If we knew the side length of that polygon. taking larger and larger n. as n → ∞. this assertion states the obvious fact that the ratio of 2πr to 2r is π. this side length is not known to us. and the perimeter of the polygon will get closer and closer to the perimeter of the circle.) The area of this triangle is 1 Atriangle = bh. However. (Comment: expressed in terms of the radius. An is then 1 1 A = n · (area of triangle) = n bh = (nb)h. i. As the number of sides of the polygon increases. Areas of simple shapes Deﬁnition of π 5 In any circle. 2 The area of the whole polygon.1. whose length we’ll call r. (See Figure 1. which is (by deﬁnition) 2πr. π is the ratio of the circumference to the diameter of the circle. h → r.e. Similar observations are central to integral calculus. r h b r Figure 1.3.
we will use a collection of rectangles. 3. circular or not. w. One of the most important ideas contained in this little argument is that by approximating a shape by a larger and larger number of simple pieces (in this case. volumes and simple sums We have used the notation “→” to mean that in the limit. l (Figure 1. As in the case of areas. the quantity of interest “approaches” the value shown. Units The units of area can be meters2 (m2 ). we collect below some basic formulae for volumes of elementary shapes. 2. The volume of a cube of side length s (Figure 1. • The area of a circle of radius r is A = πr2 . This argument proves that the area of a circle must be A = πr2 . This idea will appear again soon. a large number of triangles). . square inches. 1. • The surface area of a sphere of radius r is Sball = 4πr2 . Areas. as n gets large. to approximate areas of interesting regions in the plane. 1. as in Figure 1. we will also be computing the volumes of 3D shapes. rather than triangles. but in most of our standard calculus computations. we get a better and better approximation of its area. Areas of other shapes We concentrate here the area of a circle and of other shapes. The volume of a cylinder of base area A and height h. centimeters2 (cm2 ). is V = Ah. is V = s3 . This applies for a cylinder with ﬂat base of any shape. etc.4b) is V = hwl.4a). These will be useful in our later discussions.3 Simple volumes Later in this course.6 Chapter 1.4(c). • The surface area of a right circular cylinder of height h and base radius r is Scyl = 2πrh. The volume of a rectangular box of dimensions h.
4d).4.3. 3dimensional shapes whose volumes are given by elementary formulae 4.g. τ has volume given approximately by V ≈ τ · (surface area of cylinder) = 2πτ rh. Simple volumes 7 (a) (b) h s w l (c) r A (d) h Figure 1. cubic inches. . is V = 4 3 πr . a cylindrical shell of radius r. height h and small thickness. 7.1. The volume of a sphere of radius r (Figure 1. 5. a disk) is V = h(πr2 ). (e. The volume of a spherical shell (hollow sphere with a shell of some small thickness. In particular. Units The units of volume are meters3 (m3 ). centimeters3 (cm3 ). etc. 3 6. Similarly. τ ) is approximately V ≈ τ · (surface area of sphere) = 4πτ r2 . the volume of a cylinder with a circular base of radius r.
. + 992 + 1002 ).8 Chapter 1. The Tower of Hanoi is a shape consisting of a number of stacked disks. 99. 2. . 4 units and that each disk has height 1. where Vi is the volume of the i’th disk whose radius is r = i. 3.5. . (This structure is sometimes called the tower of Hanoi after a mathematical puzzle by the same name. 3 Note that the idea of computing a volume of a radially symmetric 3D shape by dissection into disks will form one of the main themes in Chapter 5. . volumes and simple sums 1. with radii r = 1. . Computing the volume of a set of disks. This motivates inventing some helpful notation. Assume that the radii of the disks are 1. 2. (b) Compute the volume of a tower made up of 100 such stacked disks. Figure 1. It is a simple calculation to add up the volumes of these disks.5. . we consider how elementary shapes discussed above can be used to determine volumes of more complex objects. (b) The idea will be the same. and ﬁnding some clever way of performing such calculations. The height of each disk is h = 1. and a limit will be needed to arrive at a “true volume”. and it is also cumbersome to write down the long list of terms that we will need to add up. and comprised of many disks. 100. It would be tedious to do this by adding up individual terms.1 Example 3: The Tower of Hanoi: a tower of disks In this example. but we have to calculate V = π(12 + 22 + 32 + . 4.) (a) Compute the volume of a tower made up of four disks stacked up one on top of the other. Solution (a) The volume of the fourdisk tower is calculated as follows: V = V1 + V2 + V3 + V4 . . the sums of the volumes of disks is exactly the same as the volume of the tower. Here. . so V = (π12 ) + (π22 ) + (π32 ) + (π42 ) = π(1 + 4 + 9 + 16) = 30π.3. the disks will only approximate the true 3D volume. Later on. 2 . Areas. but if the tower is large. . we would want some shortcut to avoid long sums3 . as shown in Figure 1. i = 1.
. Example 4a: Summation notation Suppose we want to form the sum of ten numbers. n=1 To compute the value of the sum we use the elementary fact that the sum of ten ones is just 10. as well as in actually computing the value of the desired sum using a variety of shortcuts. or in cases where there are too many to conveniently write down. The notation k = 1 that appears underneath Σ indicates where the sum begins (i.4.. which term starts off the series). and the superscript N tells us where it ends. . n) as the index. k=1 The notation .1.1 ≡ 1. We will be interested in getting used to this notation. k=1 The Greek symbol Σ (“Sigma”) indicates summation. signiﬁes that we have left out some of the terms (out of laziness. . (We have already seen this sum in part (a) of The Tower of Hanoi. i.g. .) We could have just as well written the sum with another symbol (e. . Example 4b: Sum of squares Expand and sum the following: 4 S= k=1 k2 . each equal to 1. We would write this as 10 S = 1 + 1 + 1 + .) . the same operation is implied by 10 1. Solution 4 S= k=1 k 2 = 1 + 22 + 32 + 42 = 1 + 4 + 9 + 16 = 30. Summations and the “Sigma” notation 9 1. so 10 S= k=1 1 = 10.4 Summations and the “Sigma” notation We introduce the following notation for the operation of summing a list of numbers: N S = a1 + a2 + a3 + . The symbol k used here is called the “index of summation” and it keeps track of where we are in the list of summands. + aN ≡ ak .e.e.
The “index” n starts at 1.4. 1. volumes and simple sums Add up the following list of 100 numbers (only a few of them are shown): S = 3 + 3 + 3 + 3 + . sums of lists of numbers satisfy many convenient properties.10 Example 4c: Common factors Chapter 1. namely. . and 4. while each term has the form of (1/3)n . to be explored shortly. This series is a geometric series. Learning how to compute the sum of such terms will be important to us. i. We give a few examples below: . Solution There are 100 terms. Example 4d: Finding the pattern Write the following terms in summation notation: S= Solution We recognize that there is a pattern in the sequence of terms. so we can take out a common factor 100 100 S = 3 + 3 + 3 + 3 + . and will be described later on in this chapter. a standard geometric series starts off with the value 1. 3 9 27 81 + 1 3 3 + 1 3 4 . We can easily modify our notation to include additional terms.+ 3 = k=1 3=3 k=1 1 = 3(100) = 300.e. S= 1 + 3 1 3 2 1 1 1 1 + + + . each one is 1/3 raised to an increasing integer power. all equal. 3. We can represent this with the “Sigma” notation as follows: 4 S= n=1 1 3 n .1 Manipulations of sums Since addition is commutative and distributive. Areas. In most cases. + 3. for example: 5 S= n=0 1 3 n =1+ 1 + 3 1 3 2 + 1 3 3 + 1 3 4 + 1 3 5 . and counts up through 2.. ..
1.. 2 (1.1.. Summation formulas Example 5a: Simple operations Simplify the following expression: 10 10 11 k=1 2k − 2k . The idea is that all but the ﬁrst two terms in the ﬁrst sum will cancel.1) . We could have arrived at this conclusion directly from 10 k=1 10 2 2k − 2k = k=3 k=1 2k = 2 + 22 = 2 + 4 = 6. Example 5b: Expanding Expand the following expression: 5 (1 + 3n ). k=3 Solution 10 10 k=1 2k − k=3 2k = (2 + 22 + 23 + · · · + 210 ) − (23 + · · · + 210 ) = 2 + 22 .5.5 Summation formulas In this section we introduce a few examples of useful sums and give formulae that provide a shortcut to dreary calculations. The sum of consecutive integers (Gauss’ formula) We ﬁrst show that the sum of the ﬁrst N integers is: N S = 1 + 2 + 3 + .+ N = k=1 k= N (N + 1) . The only remaining terms are those corresponding to k = 1 and k = 2. n=0 Solution 5 5 5 (1 + 3n ) = n=0 n=0 1+ n=0 3n .
+ 1000 = k=1 k= 1000(1 + 1000) = 500(1001) = 500500. + + .. .3) In the Appendix. 2 S = 1 + 2 + 3 + . 350π cubic units. By aligning two copies of the above sum.. . Thus. . + 2S = (1 + N ) + (1 + N ) (1 + N ) + Thus. . + N 3 = k=1 k3 = N (N + 1) 2 2 .1 Example 3. one written backwards. (1. We ﬁnd that 1000 so S= N (1 + N ) . we show how the formula for the sum of square integers can be proved by a technique called mathematical induction. 99. We see that: S= + S= 1 N + 2 + . . . 2 Two other useful formulae are those for the sums of consecutive squares and of consecutive cubes: The sum of the ﬁrst N consecutive square integers N S2 = 1 2 + 2 2 + 3 2 + . . volumes and simple sums The following trick is due to Gauss. This formula is very useful in what would otherwise be a huge calculation.5. 1. revisited: Volume of a Tower of Hanoi Armed with the formula for the sum of squares.. 100. . 2. + (N − 1) + 2 + N 1 (1 + N ) + (N − 1) + . we can now return to the problem of computing the volume of a tower of 100 stacked disks of heights 1 and radii r = 1.. . there are N times the value (N + 1) above. Example: Adding up the ﬁrst 1000 integers Suppose we want to add up the ﬁrst 1000 integers. Areas. + N 2 = k=1 k2 = N (N + 1)(2N + 1) . 6 . . . 6 (1. . so that 2S = N (1 + N ).12 Chapter 1. . we can easily add them up one by one vertically.+992+1002 ) = π k=1 k2 = π 100(101)(201) = 338. .2) The sum of the ﬁrst N consecutive cube integers N S3 = 1 3 + 2 3 + 3 3 + . We have 100 V = π(12 +22 +32 +. Gauss’ formula is conﬁrmed.
+ rN +1 . . .4) where r = 1. . 1 = N + 1 (a total of N + 1 ones added. . Solutions (a) We can separate this into three individual sums.6. . and ﬁnite number of terms N .6 Summing the geometric series Consider a sum of terms that all have the form rk . We call this sum a (ﬁnite) geometric series. each of which can be handled by algebraic simpliﬁcation and/or use of the summation formulae developed so far.. 1. First we note that there are N + 1 terms in this sum. We would like to ﬁnd an expression for terms of this form in the general case of any real number r..) If r = 1 we have the following trick: S= − rS = 1 + r r + r2 + r2 + + . we get k=1 (2 − 3k + 2k 2 ) = 2 k=1 1−3 k+2 k=1 k=1 k2 . We refer to a series of this type as a geometric series. (b) We can express the second sum as a difference of two sums: 50 50 9 Sb = k=10 k= k=1 k − k . . Summing the geometric series Examples: Evaluating the sums Compute the following two sums: 20 50 13 (a) Sa = k=1 (2 − 3k + 2k 2 ). so that if r = 1 then SN = 1 + 1 + 1 + . Sa = 2(20) − 3 20(21) 2 +2 (20)(21)(41) 6 = 5150.1. k=1 Thus Sb = 50(51) 9(10) − 2 2 = 1275 − 45 = 1230. We have already seen one example of this type in a previous section. where r is some real number and k is an integer power. (b) Sb = k=10 k. + rN . Below we will show that the sum of such a series is given by: N SN = 1 + r + r 2 + r 3 + . + r N = k=0 rk = 1 − rN +1 1−r (1. 20 20 20 20 Sa = Thus.
leaving S(1 − r) = 1 − rN +1 . .e. We will use the following deﬁnition: 4 Convergence and divergence of series is discussed in fuller depth in Chapter 10 in the context of Taylor Series. It is evident that in many cases. Solution This is a geometric series 10 Sc = k=0 2k = 1 − 210+1 1 − 2048 = = 2047. such as Gauss’s series (1. Our goal is to ﬁnd a way of attaching a meaning to the expression ∞ Sn = k=0 rk .14 Subtracting leads to Chapter 1. + rN + rN +1 ) Most of the terms on the right hand side cancel. 1−r Sc = k=0 2k . have a ﬁnite sum. these concepts are so important that it was felt necessary to introduce some preliminary ideas early in the term. (1.1).7 Prelude to inﬁnite series So far. Areas. . we have looked at several examples of ﬁnite series. Here we will look speciﬁcally for series that converge. Let us focus again on the geometric series and determine its behaviour when the number of terms is increased. We say that such series diverge as N → ∞. We would like to investigate how the sum of a series behaves when more and more terms of the series are included. 1−2 −1 1. the series simply gets larger and larger as more terms are included. + rN ) − (r + r2 + .e. . N (where N is some integer).2) and (1. i.g. Eqs. volumes and simple sums S − rS = (1 + r + r2 + . when the series becomes an inﬁnite series. even as more and more terms are included4.. or sums of squared or cubed integers (e. Example: Geometric series Compute the following sum: 10 1 − rN +1 . . . Now dividing both sides by 1 − r leads to S= which was the formula to be established.3)). However. i. series in which there are only a ﬁnite number of terms.
. ∞ S = 1 + r + r + . We will see that only under certain circumstances will inﬁnite series have a ﬁnite sum.7. Prelude to inﬁnite series 15 1. this term decreases in magnitude with n. Sn . 2. we consider the inﬁnite series as the limit of the partial sums as the number of terms n is increased. What value does the partial sum approach as more and more terms are included. and we will be interested in exploring two questions: 1. this term will get bigger in magnitude as n increases. We say that the sum of the inﬁnite series is S. Then the partial sums. We can say that lim rn+1 = 0 provided r < 1. the sum of the series. or r < −1. (1. Deﬁnition Suppose that S is an (inﬁnite) series whose terms are ak .5) Examples of convergent and divergent geometric series are discussed below.1. 1−r (1. = k=0 2 k rk .. exists provided r < 1 and is S= 1 .1 The inﬁnite geometric series Deﬁnition An inﬁnite series that has a ﬁnite sum is said to be convergent. n→∞ These observations are illustrated by two speciﬁc examples below. for 0 < r < 1.7. In the case of a geometric series.. whereas.. k=0 That is. Otherwise it is divergent. This leads to the following conclusion: The sum of an inﬁnite geometric series. Whenever r > 1. provided that S = lim n→∞ n ak . of this series are n Sn = k=0 ak .4) depends on the number of terms in the series.+ r + . and write ∞ S= k=0 ak . Under what circumstances does an inﬁnite series have a ﬁnite sum. . In this case we also say that the inﬁnite series converges to S. n via rn+1 .
can exhibit either one of these two very different behaviours. 2 Sn = 1 + Then Sn = 1 − (1/2)n+1 . we say that the sum does not converge. It is further studied in the homework problems. i. . 1 − (1/2) 1 + 2 1 2 2 + 1 2 3 + . n→∞ 1 − (1/2) 1 − (1/2) 1 2 n =1+ n=0 1 1 + ( )2 + .7. . 5 This section provides an example of how to set up a biologically relevant calculation based on geometric series. the sum continues to grow indeﬁnitely. + 1 2 n n = k=0 1 2 k .2 Example: A geometric series that converges.16 Chapter 1. i.7. i. that the sum diverges.e.. It is essential to be able to distinguish the two. and we also illustrate how the same calculation could be handled using a simple spreadsheet. We observe that as n increases. . In this case. Consider the geometric series with r = 1 .e. = 2 2 2 and we say that “the (inﬁnite) series converges to 2”. We will see examples of each of these trends again. It is important to remember that an inﬁnite series. . or. Divergent series (or series that diverge under certain conditions) must be handled with particular care.3 Example: A geometric series that diverges In contrast. or diverge (fail to converge) in other cases. as we retain more and more terms.8 Application of geometric series to the branching structure of the lungs In this section. a sum with inﬁnitely many terms added up. We use the summation formulae to arrive at the results. for otherwise.. . we will compute the volume and surface area of the branched airways of lungs5 . we obtain n→∞ lim Sn = lim In this case. we now investigate the case that r = 2: then the series consists of terms n Sn = 1 + 2 + 2 2 + 2 3 + .e. It may converge in some cases. we may ﬁnd contradictions or seemingly reasonable calculations that have meaningless results. equivalently. A similar example is given as an exercise for the student in Lab 1 of this calculus course. volumes and simple sums 1. Areas. + 2 n = k=0 2k = 1 − 2n+1 = 2n+1 − 1 1−2 We observe that as n grows larger. 1. 1. as the ﬁrst example shows. we write ∞ 1 − (1/2)n+1 1 = = 2.
we will compute this area and compare how it grows to the growth of the volume from one branching layer to the next. with radius rn and length n in the n’th generation.1. The model will consist in some wellformulated assumptions about the way that “daughter branches” are related to their “parent branch”. and on tools developed in this chapter. and many other biological “distribution systems” are composed of a branched structure. Most of the oxygen exchange takes place in tiny sacs called alveoli at the terminal branches of the airways passages.6.8.6 shows only generations 0. Air passages in the lungs consist of a branched structure. length. (Typically. We will construct a simple mathematical model and explore its consequences. and so on down the structure from large to small branch segments. and its daughter segments with index “1”. we will then predict properties of the structure as a whole. The initial segment is quite large. which then bifurcate further. 1. We assume that there are M “generations”. starting from the initial segment. In this section. the initial segment has undergone M subdivisions. We label the largest segment with index “0”. However. . as an example of summation. Based on these assumptions. we apply geometric series to explore this branched structure of the lung. The bronchial tubes conduct air. in humans. and distribute it to the many smaller and smaller tubes that eventually lead to those alveoli. r0 Segment 0 l0 1 2 Figure 1. their collective volume. and so on.1 Assumptions • The airway passages consist of many “generations” of branched segments.e. The principle of this efﬁcient organ for oxygen exchange is that these very many small structures present a very large surface area. their successive daughters “2”. every segment is approximated as a cylinder of radius rn and length n . Application of geometric series to the branching structure of the lungs 17 Our lungs pack an amazingly large surface area into a conﬁned volume. etc. i. resulting in a geometric expansion in the number of branches. We will be particularly interested in the volume V and the surface area S of the airway passages in the lungs6 . Oxygen from the air can diffuse across this area into the bloodstream very efﬁciently. The lungs. and 2. 1. Figure 1. 6 The surface area of the bronchial tubes does not actually absorb much oxygen. It bifurcates into smaller segments. The index n refers to the branch generation. for human lungs there can be up to 2530 generations of branching. All segments are assumed to be cylindrical. labeled 0.) • At each generation.8.
the number of branches x1 should be some small integer.7.7) and (1.e. theoretical structures produced by iterating such growth laws indeﬁnitely.1. averaging over the many branches in the structure b is smaller than 2. 1 < b < 2. and at level 1. For human lungs.8) are often called selfsimilar growth laws. A branched structure in which each branch produces two daughter branches is described as a bifurcating tree structure (whereas trifurcating implies b = 3). Since the branches decrease in size (while their number grows). but in general. that b is a constant.7 Table 1. In a real biological structure. the . (1.9 0.7”.8) with α and β positive constants.e. Typical structure of branched airway passages in lungs. this simpliﬁcation cannot be precise. Rules such as those given by equations (1. i. we have illustrated this idea for b = 2. In fact. • The number of branches grows along the “tree”. This means that the relationship of the radii and lengths satisfy simple rules: The lengths are related by n+1 = α n. Such concepts are closely linked to the idea of fractals. the branching is slightly irregular. not a number like “1. because we have just one segment initially (x0 = 1). For example. In real lungs. volumes and simple sums radius of ﬁrst segment length of ﬁrst segment ratio of daughter to parent length ratio of daughter to parent radius number of branch generations average number daughters per parent r0 0 α β M b 0.5 cm 5. In Figure 1. b = 1. it must be true that b > 1. the rule that links the number of branches in generation n. (1. xn+1 is xn+1 = bxn .6. (1. each parent branch produces b daughter branches. Later on.6 cm 0.18 Chapter 1. for simplicity. However. i. Here we will take b to be constant. Not every level of the structure bifurcates. Areas.7) and the radii are related by rn+1 = βrn . on average.6) We will assume. here denoted xn with the number (of smaller branches) in the next generation.86 30 1. we expect that 0 < α < 1 and 0 < β < 1. Since the number of branches is growing down the length of the structure. it could be the case that the radius of daughter branches is 1/2 or 2/3 that of the parent branch. details that were missed and are considered important can be corrected and reﬁned. • The ratios of radii and lengths of daughters to parents are approximated by “proportional scaling”. On average. as in many mathematical models. some accuracy is sacriﬁced to get intuition. In actual fact.
. we will see that the rule linking two generations implies an exponential growth.1.e. n factors We have arrived at a simple. and G. Cumming. Dart.. but the above approximations are used here for simplicity. and (1.8. To see this. we will use the values of constants given in Table 1. By the same pattern. the number of segments will be n’th iteration: xn = bxn−1 = b(bxn−2 ) = b(b(bxn−3 )) = . 1. when it is applied to generating the whole structure. G. Essentially. E. namely: The rule linking two generations. (1971) J. i. . According to physiological measurements. and surface areas of successive segments in the branching structure.) For the purposes of this example. Phys. Application of geometric series to the branching structure of the lungs 19 number of generations is ﬁnite. .1. Horsﬁeld. a ﬁnite geometric series is wellapproximated by an inﬁnite sum.8). 207217. . We will use the same idea to ﬁnd the connection between the volumes. 31.10). Appl. (1.) Actual lungs are not fully symmetric branching structures. i. Olson. G. Before returning to the problem at hand. let us examine the implications of this recursive rule. β ≤ 0.9. (However. are examples of a very generic “geometric progression” recipe. .10) (1. at the n’th generation.8. and its solution is given by equation (1. in some cases.9) This connection between the rule linking two generations and the resulting number of members at each generation is useful in other circumstances. let us write out a few ﬁrst terms in the progression of the sequence {xn }: initial value: x0 ﬁrst iteration: x1 = bx0 second iteration: x2 = bx1 = b(bx0 ) = b2 x0 third iteration: x3 = bx2 = b(b2 x0 ) = b3 x0 . Equation (1.6). but important result.e.9) is sometimes called a recursion relation. equations (1. xn = bn x0 .2 A simple geometric rule The three equations that govern the rules for successive branching. the scale factors for sizes of daughter to parent size are in the range 0. = (b · b · · · b) x0 = bn x0 .7). xn = bxn−1 implies that the n’th generation will have grown by a factor bn . (K. D. (1.65 ≤ α.
namely.1. 4. and we will refer to the volume of all of them together as Vn below. etc. so that the tree bifurcates with the pattern 1. to conclude that at the n’th generation.e. b. . n n = α n−1 ⇒ n = α 0. .8. For example. we ﬁnd M N= n=0 bn = 1 − bM+1 1−b . 8. the number of segments grows by powers of 2. M . 1. whose sum we can compute. 1. the same idea developed above can be used to relate the length and radius of a segment in the n’th. This is a geometric series. Areas. M . Using equation (1. if b = 2. .4).8. generation segment to the length and radius of the original 0’th generation segment. we add up over all generations.2 and the fact that there is one segment in the 0’th generation. v0 2 This is just a product of the initial segment volume v0 = πr0 0 .) The length and radius of segments also follow a geometric progression. Here we mean just a single segment in the n’th generation of branches. The calculation is summarized further on for values of the branching parameter. Given b and M . and the number of branch generations. (There are bn such identical segments in the n’th generation. x0 = 1. To determine how many branch segments there are in total. we can then predict the exact number of segments in the structure. with the n’th power of a certain factor(α. (That factor takes into account that both the radius and the length are being scaled down at every successive generation of branching.) Thus vn = (αβ 2 )n v0 . . In fact.3 Total number of segments We used the result of Section 1.4 Total volume of airways in the lung Since each lung segment is assumed to be cylindrical. i. β). given in Table 1. the number of segments is xn = x0 bn = 1 · bn = bn . and rn = βrn−1 ⇒ 2 vn = πrn rn = β n r0 . 0. volumes and simple sums 1. its volume is 2 vn = πrn n.8. 2.20 Chapter 1. Thus the volume of one segment in generation n is n 2 = π(β n r0 )2 (αn 0 ) = (αβ 2 )n (πr0 0 ) .
c where we have let c stand for the scale factor c = (bαβ).8. Since this is a geometric series. We compute the value of the constant a in Table 1. Accordingly. Since there are bn branches at generation n. The total volume of the structure is obtained by summing the volumes obtained at each layer. is sn = 2πrn n = 2π(β n r0 )(αn 0 ) = (αβ)n (2πr0 0 ). 1.6. To ﬁnd the total surface area of the airways. M 1 − cM+1 . we can use the summation formula.1. ..8. based on its cylindrical shape. and ﬁnd the total volume in Section 1.2. while the other is now a “scale factor” that includes not only changes in length and radius. This reveals the similar nature of the problem. Application of geometric series to the branching structure of the lungs The total volume of all (bn ) segments in the n’th layer is Vn = bn vn = bn (αβ 2 )n v0 = (bαβ 2 )n v0 .e.6. Thus.8. the total surface area of all the n’th generation branches is thus Sn = bn (αβ)n s0 = (bαβ )n s0 . we sum up. Equation (1. total airways volume is 30 30 V = n=0 Vn = v0 n=0 an = v0 1 − aM+1 1−a . S = s0 cn = s0 1−c n=0 We compute the values of s0 and c in Table 1.2.8. The similarity of treatment with the previous calculation of number of branches is apparent. s0 where s0 is the surface area of the initial segment. S n = cn s0 . i. and summarize ﬁnal calculations of the total airways surface area in section 1. a 21 Here we have grouped terms together to reveal the simple structure of the relationship: one part of the expression is just the initial segment volume. Letting the constant a stand for that scale factor.5 Total surface area of the lung branches The surface area of a single segment at generation n. but also in the number of branches.4). a = (bαβ 2 ) leads to the result that the volume of all segments in the n’th layer is Vn = an v0 .
131588 1.3158 Table 1.3 cm3 . and other derived quantities. use the sample values for a model “human lung” given in Table 1. Volume.66564 0.4 (1 − 1. .5 litres. it is important to that their values are fairly accurate.2. or the resulting derived scale factors and quantities in Table 1.7 = 1. Now it remains to merely “plug in” the appropriate quantities.9898 · 107 ≈ 2 · 107 . Because a and c are bases that will be raised to large powers.6 cm2 0. volumes and simple sums volume of ﬁrst segment surface area of ﬁrst segment ratio of daughter to parent segment volume ratio of daughter to parent segment surface area ratio of net volumes in successive generations ratio of net surface areas in successive generations 2 v0 = πr0 0 s0 = 2πr0 0 (αβ 2 ) (αβ) a = bαβ 2 c = bαβ 4. This approach has shown that the formula for geometric series applies in each case. and s0 .13158831) = 1510. but with distinct “bases” b. there are a total of about 20 million branch segments overall (including all layers. form top to bottom) in the entire structure! Total volume of airways Using the values for a and v0 computed in Table 1.8. Total number of segments M N= n=0 bn = 1 − bM+1 1−b = 1 − (1.4 cm3 17. scale factors. a and c and coefﬁcients 1. so we keep more signiﬁcant ﬁgures.22 Chapter 1.131588) Recall that 1 litre = 1000 cm3 .2. In this section.774 1. 1. Areas.7)31 1 − 1.1. v0 . According to this calculation. Then we have found that the lung airways contain about 1. surface area.6 Summary of predictions for speciﬁc parameter values By setting up the model in the above way. we have revealed that each quantity in the structure obeys a simple geometric series. (1 − 1. we collect our results. we ﬁnd that the total volume of all segments in the n’th generation is 30 V = v0 n=0 an = v0 1 − aM+1 1−a = 4.2 to ﬁnish the task at hand.
Application of geometric series to the branching structure of the lungs Total surface area of airways 23 Using the values of s0 and c in Table 1. The contrast between the graphs shows how such a small change in this parameter can signiﬁcantly affect the results.7 (original value) to 2. Suppose that the ﬁrst 5 generations of branching produce 2 daughters each. the net volume and surface area keep growing by larger and larger increments at each “generation” of branching. sometimes it is more convenient to devise a computer algorithm to implement “rules” and perform repetitive calculations in a problem such as discussed here. reduces the need for analytical computations. 1.8. paying particular attention to the scale factors a and c. In Figure 1. .8. Thus.e.76 · 105 cm2 . all calculations were done using the formulae developed for geometric series.7 we show the volumes and surface areas associated with the lung airways for parameter values discussed above.8. 7 See Lab 1 for a similar problem that is also investigated using a spreadsheet. Suppose we had assumed that b = 2.1. the area we have computed is equivalent to about 28 square meters! 1.7 Exploring the problem numerically Up to now. In our model.8 For further independent study The following problems can be used for further independent exploration of these ideas. The advantage of that approach is that it eliminates tedious calculations by hand. What would the total volume V be in that case. the branching number is b = 1. Both layer by layer values and cumulative sums leading to total volume and surface area are shown in each of (a) and (c). We would describe this as “unbounded growth”.7. b is adjusted from 1. 1.2. the branching number. keeping all other parameters the same? Explain why this is biologically impossible in the case M = 30 generations. that b = 1. i. In (b) and (d). but then from generation 6 on. Explain why this is the case. a parent branch has only “1. How would you set up this variant of the model? How would this affect the calculated volume? 3. in cases where summation formulae are not know to us.6 (1 − 1.7” daughter branches. we have assumed that.315831) = 2. (1 − 1. However.7. and. A spreadsheet is an ideal tool for exploring iterated rules such as those given in the lung branching problem7. The disadvantage is that it can be less obvious how each of the values of parameters assigned to the problem affects the ﬁnal answers.3158) There are 100 cm per meter. and (100)2 = 104 cm2 per m2 . on average. It can also provide a shortcut to visual summary of the results. we compare these results to similar graphs in the case that one parameter. the total surface area of the tubes that make up the airways is M S = s0 n=0 cn = s0 1 − cM+1 1−c = 17. For what value of M would b = 2 lead to a reasonable result? 2. In the problem we explored.
you may wish to ﬁnd parameters for other species and do a . Which single factor or parameter should we change (and how should we change it) to correct this feature of the model.0 0.5 Vn = Volume of layer n 0.0 0.5 (c) (d) Figure 1. the volume of layer n (red bars). (c) and (d): same idea showing the surface area of n’th layer (green) and the cumulative surface area to layer n (blue) for original parameters (in c).e. You may want to investigate what is known about the actual branching parameter b.0 Cumulative volume to layer n 1500.5 surface area of n’th layer 30.0 0.5 0. (a) Vn .0 Cumulative volume to layer n Vn = Volume of layer n 0. volumes and simple sums 1500. to predict that the total volume of the branching tubes remains roughly constant while the surface area increases as branching layers are added. M .5 V   (a) 250000. Areas. and the cumulative volume down to layer n (yellow bars) are shown for parameters given in Table 1. 4. and the ratios of lengths and radii that we have assumed.24 Chapter 1.5 30.e. and use similar ideas to reﬁne and correct our estimates.0 (b) Cumulative surface area to n’th layer Cumulative surface area to n’th layer surface area of n’th layer 0. (b) Same as (a) but assuming that parent segments always produce two daughter branches (i.5 30. Determine how the branching properties of real human lungs differs from our assumed model. b = 2).5 0.1. Alternately. Suppose we want a set of tubes with a large surface area but small total volume.7. the number of generations of branches. as well as for the value b = 2 (in d).0 30.0 250000. 5. i. The graphs in (a) and (b) are shown on the same scale to accentuate the much more dramatic growth in (b).
Table 1. Explain (a) What biological problem is to be solved in creating such a structure (b) What sorts of constraints must be satisﬁed by the branching parameters to lead to a viable structure. We will use these extensively in our next chapter. We introduced some notation for series and collected useful formulae for summation of such series. This is an openended problem. Areas of planar regions . Table 1. Summary comparative study of lungs in a variety of animal sizes. namely the branching structure of lungs. by letting N go to inﬁnity.9 Summary In this chapter. we were able to prove that the area of a circle of radius r is A = πr2 .5 the surface areas of 3D shapes. 1. Branching structures are ubiquitous in biology. This idea. we collected useful formulae for areas and volumes of simple 2D and 3D shapes. including regular polygons.e. produces 3 new daughter branches per parent branch. we investigated geometric series and studied a biological application. and others related to it.3. Finally. We used areas of triangles to compute areas of more complicated shapes. Consider a tree that trifurcates (i. A 1 2 bh bh πr2 Table 1.9. height h radius r area. We used a polygon with N sides to approximate the area of a circle. b = 3). These are summarized in Table 1. Many species of plants are based on a regular geometric sequence of branching.4 the volumes and Table 1. height h base b.3 lists the areas of simple shapes. A summary of the most important ones is given below. Object triangle rectangle circle dimensions base b. and then.6.1. 25 6. will form a deep underlying theme in the next two chapters and later on in this course.
thickness τ volume. height h. width w radius r. Areas. volumes and simple sums Object box circular cylinder sphere cylindrical shell* spherical shell* dimensions base b. thickness τ radius r.4. i.e.26 Chapter 1. Useful summation formulae. . . . Volumes of 3D shapes.6. + N 3 1 + r + r2 + r3 . height h. Object box circular cylinder sphere dimensions base b. S 2(bh + bw + hw) 2πrh 4πr2 Table 1. height h radius r radius r. height h.. . . width w radius r.5. V hwb πr2 h 4 3 3 πr 2πrhτ 4πr2 τ Table 1. . Surface areas of 3D shapes Sum 1 + 2 + 3 + . height h radius r surface area.. small τ . . * Assumes a thin shell.+ N 12 + 22 + 32 + . rN Notation N k=1 N k=1 N k=1 Formula N (1+N ) 2 N (N +1)(2N +1) 6 N (N +1) 2 1−r N +1 1−r 2 Comment Gauss’ formula Sum of squares Sum of cubes Geometric sum k k2 k3 N k k=0 r Table 1. + N 2 13 + 23 + 33 + .
We consider the problem of determining areas of regions such bounded by the x axis. You might imagine that the shaded portion of this ﬁgure is a plot of land bounded by fences on three sides. and by a river on the fourth side. and circles.Chapter 2 Areas 2. such methods fail. as shown in Figure 2. and by a smooth curve on one of its edges. We will discuss such ideas in this chapter. y y=f(x) A a b x Figure 2.1. and in Chapter 3. We have already seen examples of the computation of areas of especially simple geometric shapes in Chapter 1. y = f (x). A farmer wishing to purchase this land would want to know exactly how large an area is being acquired. beyond these elementary shapes. We now consider the problem of determining the area of a region in the plane that has the following special properties: The region is formed by straight lines on three sides. Here we set up the calculation of that area.1 Areas in the plane A longstanding problem of integral calculus is how to compute the area of a region in the plane. no advanced methods (beyond simple geometry) are needed. 27 . For triangles. rectangles. However. the lines x = a and x = b and the graph of some function. This type of geometric problem formed part of the original motivation for the development of calculus techniques. and a new idea is needed. and we will discuss it in many contexts in this course. polygons.1.
0 1. Areas More speciﬁcally. with rectangles that approximate the area under its curve. the area of the rectangles is very different from the area of the region of interest. We will approximate the area of the region shown in Figure 2.0 y=f(x)=x^2 N=40 rectangles y=f(x)=x^2 N > infinity True area of region 0. As we increase the number of rectangular strips. the lines x = a and x = b. However. We will ﬁrst restrict attention to the case that f (x) > 0 for all points in the interval a ≤ x ≤ b as we concentrate on “real areas”.2.0 x 1.0 0.0 x 1. Later.1 by dissecting it into smaller regions (rectangular strips) whose areas are easy to determine. we use a cartesian coordinate system to describe the region: we require that it falls between the xaxis. we generalize our results and lift this restriction. (as shown in subsequent panels of this same ﬁgure).0 0.2. It can be seen that the 1.28 Chapter 2. N = 20.0 0.0 1. the total area of the strips becomes a better and better approximation of the desired “true” area. and the graph of a function y = f (x). Later examples indicate how to deal with some that do not. if the number of rectangles is increased. we illustrate the basic idea using a region bounded by the function y = f (x) = x2 on 0 ≤ x ≤ 1. . N = 40 and the true area for N →∞ approximation is fairly coarse when the number of rectangles is small9 . The function y = x2 for 0 ≤ x ≤ 1 is shown. We will refer to this type of procedure as a Riemann sum.0 x 1.0 y=f(x)=x^2 N=10 rectangles y=f(x)=x^2 N=20 rectangles 0.0 x 1. Shown are the intermediate steps N = 10.0 1.0 0. we 8 Not 9 That all planar areas have this property. This is required for the process described below to work8 .0 0.0 Figure 2. is. In Figure 2.0 0.
2 can be used to calculate the areas of the steps for each of the panels in the ﬁgure. However. Compare with the exact calculations in Section 2.i. but a spreadsheet does the number crunching for us. and later labs will expand and generalize the idea to a variety of settings. Making a cameo appearance in this calculation will be the formula for the sums of square integers developed in the previous chapter. (e. we ﬁnd the following results at each stage: For N = 10 strips. we can use essentially the same algorithm to explore various functions. number of rectangles.e. though in that context. correct to 4 decimal places. This is meant to illustrate the “numerical approach”. we use a simple spreadsheet to do the computations for us. set N = 1000 strips. i. in Section 2. We will ﬁnd that carefully setting up the calculation of areas of the approximating rectangles will be important. as the alternate analytic approach . we had used a dissection of the circle into approximating triangles. the number of rectangles. This idea will form the core of this chapter. we set up the problem analytically. In the limit as N .3459. intervals.2.2. the assembly of a simple algorithm.2.2. we compute the area of the region shown in Figure 2. x2 ∆x in a given panel. A new feature will be the limit N → ∞ that introduces the ﬁnal step of arriving at the smooth region shown in the ﬁnal panel of Figure 2. ﬁnd the corresponding value of ∆x.e. etc.2.2. The advantage of this approach is that it requires only elementary “programming” . the area is 0. Once assembled. 2. Then.2.1 First approach: Numerical integration using a spreadsheet The same tool that produces Figure 2. To do this. we will get deeper insight by understanding what happens in the limit as the number of strips N gets very large. Using a spreadsheet. which begins to approximate the limit of N → ∞. and set up a calculation which adds up the areas of steps. then the area obtained is 0. the area of the desired region is obtained.3338 units210 . Computing the area under a curve by rectangular strips 29 obtain a better and better approximation of the true area. we ﬁx N for a given panel.2 .2.2 Computing the area under a curve by rectangular strips 2. for N = 20 strips it is 0. 20.g. i.g. This example illustrates that areas can be computed “numerically” . approaches inﬁnity. Lab 2 in this course will motivate the student to explore this numerical integration approach. e. In our second approach.3588. the area is 0. If we increase N greatly. we set up the Riemann sum corresponding to the function shown in Figure 2. 10 Note that all these values are approximations. We will ﬁnd that results are similar. The reader will note a similarity with the idea we already encountered in obtaining the area of a circle. or 40).indeed many of the laboratory exercises that accompany this course will be based on precisely this idea. a set of instructions. N = 10.e.2. for N = 40 strips. First. The ideas are analogous to those described in Section 2. With this idea in mind. for example.3850 units2 .2 in two ways.
. xk . .. Areas 2.30 Chapter 2.2 Second approach: Analytic computation using Riemann sums In this section we consider the detailed steps involved in analytically computing the area of the region bounded by the function y = f (x) = x2 . we show only the ﬁrst few points. it follows that ∆x = 1/N . rather than computational aids to determine that area. Suppose we look at the rectangle labeled k. the coordinate xk is just k steps of size 1/N along the x axis.3..3. Then each has width 1/N . . x1 .3.3. In the right panel of Figure 2. . and then determine how this value behaves as the rectangles get more numerous (and thinner). The interval of interest in this problem is 0 ≤ x ≤ 1. and the all rectangles have the same base width. since one corner of the rectangle is “glued” to the curve.2. In the panel on the right. We set up the rectangles (as shown in Figure 2. as shown in Figure 2. y 2 y=f(x)=x y y=f(x) f(x N) f(x) f(x k ) 0 Δx 1 x0 x 1 . xN Figure 2. with detailed labeling in Figures 2.3). i. xN = 1 and xk = k∆x. The choice shown in Figure 2.. where the value x0 = 0 and xN = 1 are the endpoints of the original interval. some of these coordinates have been labeled. (We will refer to this width as ∆x. . . 0 ≤ x ≤ 1. the coordinates of base corners and two typical heights of the rectangles have been labeled. x k−1 x k . Here x0 = 0. determine the heights and areas of these rectangle.. A rectangle (shaded) has base width ∆x and height f (x). as it forms a difference of successive x coordinates. Such a representative kth rectangle is shown shaded in Figures 2.3 is to afﬁx the right corner of each . The region under the graph of y = f (x) for 0 ≤ x ≤ 1 will be approximated by a set of N rectangles. xN . . Since the points are equally spaced. starting at x0 = 0. Let us subdivide this interval into N equal subintervals.) The coordinates of the endpoints of these subintervals will be labeled x0 . Let us look more carefully at one of the rectangles. The height of this rectangle is determined by the value of the function. Since 0 ≤ x ≤ 1. . sum their total area. xk = k(1/N ) = k/N . For clarity.e. together with a representative pair xk−1 and xk inside the region. By this we mean that we use “penandpaper” calculations.2.
e. height = f (xk ). k Then the area of the k’th rectangle is ak = height × base = f (xk )∆x = k N f (xk ) 2 ∆x = 1 . .e. height. N right x coord (xk ) (1/N ) (2/N ) (3/N ) (k/N ) (N/N ) = 1 height f (xk ) (1/N )2 (2/N )2 (3/N )2 (k/N )2 (N/N )2 = 1 area ak (1/N )2 ∆x (2/N )2 ∆x (3/N )2 ∆x (k/N )2 ∆x (1)∆x 31 Table 2. N 1 N ∆x . Computing the area under a curve by rectangular strips rectangle (k) 1 2 3 . A recurring theme underlying integral calculus is the relationship between Riemann sums and deﬁnite integrals.2. This may help the reader to see the pattern that emerges in the summation. (2. rectangle on the curve. (2.1. (In general this table is not needed in our work. . ∆x = 1/N . The base of every rectangle is the same. i.e. i. i. base = ∆x = 1/N . This means that the area of the kth rectangle. and area ak of each rectangular strip is shown above.2. position. is ak = height × base = f (xk )∆x We now use three facts: f (xk ) = x2 . . the total area of the rectangles.) The total area of all rectangular strips (a sum of the values in the right column of Table 2. . a concept introduced later on in this chapter. The label. N xk = k .1) is N N N AN strips = k=1 ak = k=1 f (xk )∆x = k=1 k N 2 1 N .1) is a Riemann sum. Each rectangle has the same base width.1) The expressions shown in Eqn. to help visualize how heights of rectangles behave. and it is presented for this example only. shown shaded. . k . A list of rectangles.1. and their properties are shown in Table 2. We approximate the area under the curve y = f (x) = x2 by the sum of the values in the last column. This implies that the height of the kth rectangle is obtained from substituting xk into the function.
we can use the approximations.32 Chapter 2. and A20 strips = (20 + 1)(2 · 20 + 1) = 0. k=1 The formula (1. A = lim N →∞ 1 N2 (N + 1)(2N + 1) 1 (N + 1)(2N + 1) = lim .1 unit.) In the example discussed in this section.2b). (We plug in the value of N into (2.2) N3 6 6N 2 In the box below. ∆x = 1/N gets very small. i. resulting in 1 N (N + 1)(2N + 1) (N + 1)(2N + 1) AN strips = = . note that when N gets very large.3459375. ∆x = 1/20 = 0.2.2). 6 · 402 We will deﬁne the true area under the graph of the function y = f (x) over the given interval to be: A = lim AN strips . the true area is found by taking the limit as N gets large in equation (2. N →∞ This means that the true area is obtained by letting the number of rectangular strips.05. only the quantity k changes from term to term.. N →∞ N N2 N . 6 · 102 If N = 20 strips (Figure 2.2c). (while the width of each one.35875.2) for the sum of square integers can be applied to the summation.e. (2.2. In this sum. Areas We now rewrite this sum in a more convenient form so that summation formulae developed in Chapter 1 can be used. get very large. the width of each strip is 0. the area of the 10 strips (shown in red) is A10 strips = (10 + 1)(2 · 10 + 1) = 0. 6 · 202 If N = 40 strips (Figure 2.2) and use a calculator to obtain the results below. (2.) If N = 10 strips (Figure 2. All other quantities are common factors. N . so that AN strips = 1 N3 N k2 . N →∞ 6 6 N2 To evaluate this limit. we use Eqn.1.385.2. ∆x = 1/40 = 0.025 and A40 strips = (40 + 1)(2 · 40 + 1) = 0. According to equation 2. Note that these are comparable to the values we obtained “numerically” in Section 2.2) to compute that approximate area for values of N shown in the ﬁrst three panels of Fig 2. (N + 1) ≈ N and (2N + 1) ≈ 2N so that (simplifying and cancelling common factors) N →∞ lim (N ) (2N ) (N + 1)(2N + 1) = lim = 2.2a).
2d) is is 1/3 units2 . 6 3 (2. It also helps to understand what integrals represent in applications that occur later on. the curve is above the axis.4. We later ask how to modify this treatment to describe similarly curved leaves of arbitrary length and width. we will ﬁrst consider a function designed to mimic the shape of the leaf in a simple system of units: we will scale distances by the length of the leaf. this proves vital in understanding how to use the methods. their surface area is an important property. Hence. The ideas outlined above can be applied to more complicated situations.3.2 will go handinhand with understanding the numerical approach of Section 2. the ideas of setting up area approximations using rectangular strips is very similar to the way that the spreadsheet computations are designed. First. as follows: length of interval = 1 − 0 = 1 . our development of Riemann sums foreshadows and anticipates the idea of a deﬁnite integral. in order to understand integration adequately. For simplicity of treatment. The student will ﬁnd that understanding the ideas of Section 2. Thus. provides a convenient approximation to the top edge of the leaf. the area between this curve and the x axis. the true area of the region (Figure 2.3) Thus.) In Section 2. In this section we use our techniques to determine the area of a rhododendron leaf. we observe that at x = 0 and x = 1.2.333.2.2.2. We can set up the calculation systematically. when we could just use integration?”. and when things can go wrong. 2. some powerful techniques will help to shortcut such technical calculations. we must understand the underlying “technology” and concepts. so that its proﬁle is contained in the interval 0 ≤ x ≤ 1.1. shown in Figure 2. the curve intersects the x axis. of the form y = f (x) = x(1 − x). the summation is handled automatically using the spreadsheet.3 The area of a leaf Leaves act as solar energy collectors for plants. we gave only few details of the steps involved.2. We set up the computation of approximating rectangular strips as before. As shown in Figure 2. even though we will shortly have better tools for analytical calculations. Second.4. At 0 < x < 1. by subdividing the interval of interest into N rectangular strips.3 Comments Many student who have had calculus before in highschool. a simple parabola.1. Indeed. In the next section we consider a practical problem in which a similar calculation is carried out. is one half of the leaf area. (However. To check that this is the case. The area of a leaf The result is: A= 33 1 1 (2) = ≈ 0. and in short order. 2. ask “why do we bother with such tedious calculations. and leaves that are less symmetric. and no “formulae” are needed. There are two reasons why we linger on Riemann sums.
f (xk ) = xk (1 − xk ) The representative k’th rectangle is shown shaded in Figure 2. N width of rectangular strips. N N . N N f (xk ) The total area of these rectangular strips is: N N N AN strips = k=1 ak = k=1 ∆x · f (xk ) = k=1 1 N · k k (1 − ) . xk = k 1 N 1 k = N N height of k’th rectangular strip.4. Areas y y=f(x)=x(1−x) 0 x 1 y k’th rectangle (enlarged) x 0=0 x x1 x2 xk xn =1 Δx yk =f(xk ) Figure 2. In this ﬁgure we show how the area of a leaf can be approximated by rectangular strips.34 Chapter 2. number of segments.4: Its area is ak = base × height = ∆x · f (xk ) = 1 N ∆x · k k (1 − ) . ∆x = the k’th x value.
the true area is obtained as the limit as N goes to inﬁnity. We obtain: A = lim 1 2 (N + 1) N − lim 1 6 (2N + 1)(N + 1) N2 = 1 1 1 − ·2= . Simplifying. For part of this expression.e. or less symmetric than the current example. We will ﬁnd the area under the graph of the function y = f (x) = e2x over the interval between x = 0 and x = 2.1) and(1. i. Taking the limit leads to 2. we will also use the fact that the exponential function has a linear approximation as follows: ez ≈ 1 + z .2) from Chapter 1 results in: AN strips = 1 N2 N (N + 1) 2 − 1 N3 (2N + 1)N (N + 1) 6 . In the homework problems accompanying this chapter. of rectangular strips. A = limN →∞ AN strips . A= Remark: The function in this example can be written as y = x − x2 . broad. This is the area for a ﬁnite number.4. for a ﬁnite geometric sum. 2 6 2 3 6 Thus the area of the entire leaf (twice this area) is 1/3. k=1 Using the summation formulae (1. As before. we have seen a similar calculation in Section 2. This example illustrates an important property of sums. Here we demonstrate an example in which a geometric sum will be used. Each of these led to calculations in which sums of integers or square integers appeared. In evaluating a limit in this example.4) in Chapter 1. namely the fact that we can rearrange the terms into simpler expressions that can be summed individually. N . we get 1 AN strips = 2 (N + 1) N − 1 6 (2N + 1)(N + 1) N2 . we considered areas under curves described by a simple quadratic functions.4 Area under an exponential curve In the precious examples. Recall that we derived Eqn.2. and regrouping terms. we investigate how to describe leaves with arbitrary lengths and widths.2. 2 6 6 N →∞ N →∞ 1 1 1 1 1 − ·2= − = . Area under an exponential curve Simplifying the result (so we can use summation formulae) leads to: AN strips = 1 N N 35 k=1 k k (1 − ) N N = 1 N2 N k=1 k− 1 N3 N k2 . (1. as well as leaves with shapes that are tapered.
the width of each one would be ∆x = (5 − 2)/N = 3/N . As before. (i. we subdivide the interval into N pieces. where r = e4/N . and we ﬁnd that A = lim 2 N →∞ e4 − 1 1 − e4 1 − e4 = lim 2 =2 ≈ 26.e.) As before. we ﬁnd that AN strips = 2 N e4/N We need to determine what happens when N gets very large. We can use the linear approximation e−4/N ≈ 1 − 4/N to evaluate the limit of the term in the denominator. ∆x = the k’th x value. f (xk ) = exk = e2(2k/N ) = e4k/N We observe that the length of the interval (here 2) has affected the details of the calculation. Proceeding systematically as before. This is a ﬁnite geometric series. the sum is AN strips = 2 N (1 − rN +1 ) −1 .36 Chapter 2. xk = k 2 N 2 2k = N N height of k’th rectangular strip.5 Extensions and other examples More general interval To calculate the area under the curve y = f (x) = x2 over the interval 2 ≤ x ≤ 5 using N rectangles. =2 1 − e4/N N (e−4/N − 1) After some simpliﬁcation and using r = e4/N . the area of the k’th rectangle is ak = base × height = ∆x × f (xk ) = and the total area of all the rectangles is AN strips = 2 N N 2 N e4k/N . Because the series starts with k = 1 and not with k = 0. we write length of interval = 2 − 0 = 2 number of segments = N width of rectangular strips. Areas (See Linear Approximations in an earlier calculus course. length of . each of width 2/N .799. 4 N (e−4/N − 1) N →∞ −N (1 + 4/N − 1) 2. e4k/N = k=1 2 N N rk = k=1 2 N N k=0 rk − r0 . (1 − r) 1 − e4 1 − e4 ..
Since the interval starts at x0 = 2. the k’th coordinate is xk = 2 + k(3/N ) = 2 + (3k/N ).6. b I= a f (x) dx (2. and this is to be summed over k. and increments in units of (3/N ). 2. Other examples In the Appendix 11. rather than right endpoint approximations. we deﬁne the deﬁnite integral.5. 2.2. b] (also written a ≤ x ≤ b). we show how Riemann sums can be set up for left. 11 A function is said to be bounded if its graph stays between some pair of horizontal lines. The deﬁnite integral is a number. summation formulae.6. The deﬁnite integral 37 interval divided by N).1 Remarks 1. See Figure 2. The results are entirely analogous.2 we discuss a number of other examples with several modiﬁcations: First. and limit is needed to calculate the true area. namely the area associated with the graph of a function. . in Appendix 11. f (x) > 0 that is bounded and continuous11 on an interval [a. A similar algebraic simpliﬁcation. Second. For a function y = y y=f(x) A a b x Figure 2. It is continuous if there are no “breaks” in its graph. The area of the k’th rectangle is then AK = f (xk ) × ∆x = [(2 + (3k/N ))2 ](3/N ).1.2. we show how to set up a Riemann sum for a more complicated quadratic function on a general interval.5. that of the deﬁnite integral. a ≤ x ≤ b.6 The deﬁnite integral We now introduce a central concept that will form an important theme in this course. We begin by deﬁning a new piece of notation relevant to the topic in this chapter. The shaded area A corresponds to the deﬁnite integral I of the function f (x) over the interval a ≤ x ≤ b.4) to be the area A of the region under the graph of the function between the endpoints a and b.
summing up the total area of the strips. and on the two end points of the interval. with base and height 1. The value of the deﬁnite integral depends on the function. From previous remarks. To practice notation. (The calculation may be nontrivial. 2. Examples (14) relate areas shown above to deﬁnite integrals. we write down the corresponding deﬁnite integral in each case.6a). Note that in many of the examples below. the number of strips gets large. to familiarize the reader with the new notation just deﬁned.38 Chapter 2. 1 x dx = 0. but merely use previously known or recently derived results. and taking a limit as N .) y (a) (b) 0 1 0 1 x y (c) (d) 2 4 0 2 x Figure 2. but in principle the procedure is welldeﬁned. The area of this triangle is thus A = (1/2)base× height= 0.5. and might involve sums that we have not discussed in our simple examples so far. we have a procedure to calculate the value of the deﬁnite integral by dissecting the region into rectangular strips. Hence. we need no elaborate calculations. Areas 2.2 Examples We have calculated the areas of regions bounded by particularly simple functions.6.5 (Figure 2. 0 .6. 3. Example (1) The area under the function y = f (x) = x over the interval 0 ≤ x ≤ 1 is triangular.
we have to extend the idea of the deﬁnite integral somewhat. 2.2.7. Thus 1 0 x2 dx = 1/3 0. we also computed the area under the function y = f (x) = x2 on the interval 0 ≤ x ≤ 1 and found its area to be 1/3 (See Eqn. We will investigate how the area under the graph of a function changes as one of the endpoints of the interval moves. with base (42)=2 and height 1 (Figure 2.6(d)) forms a triangular region with base 2 and height 1. We deﬁne a new function A(x) to be the area associated with the graph of some function y = f (x) from the ﬁxed endpoint a up to the endpoint x.6(b)). 2. y y=f(x) A(x) a x b Figure 2. thus 2 0 (1 − x/2) dx = 1. where a ≤ x ≤ b. Example (3) A constant function of the form y = 1 over an interval 2 lex ≤ 4 would produce a rectangular region in the plane. The area as a function Example (2) 39 In Section 2.6(c)). We can think of this as a function that gradually changes .7 The area as a function In Chapter 3. and thereby deﬁne a new function. Before doing so.2.7.333. A(x). we will elaborate on the idea of the deﬁnite integral and arrive at some very important connection between differential and integral calculus.3) and Fig. 2 Example (4) The function y = f (x) = 1 − x/2 (Figure 2. Thus 4 1 dx = 2. (2.
40
Chapter 2. Areas
(i.e. the area accumulates) as we sweep across the interval (a, b) from left to right in Figure 2.1. The function A(x) represents the area of the region shown in Figure 2.7. Extending our deﬁnition of the deﬁnite integral, we might be tempted to use the notation x A(x) =
a
f (x) dx.
However, there is a slight problem with this notation: the symbol x is used in slightly confusing ways, both as the argument of the function and as the variable endpoint of the interval. To avoid possible confusion, we will prefer the notation
x
A(x) =
a
f (s) ds.
(or some symbol other than s used as a placeholder instead of x.) An analogue already seen is the sum
N
k2
k=1
where N denotes the “end” of the sum, and k keeps track of where we are in the process of summation. The symbol s, sometimes called a “dummy variable” is analogous to the summation symbol k. In the upcoming Chapter 3, we will investigate properties of this new “area function” A(x) deﬁned above. This will lead us to the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus, and will provide new and powerful tools to replace the dreary summations that we had to perform in much of Chapter 2. Indeed, we are about to discover the amazing connection between a function, the area A(x) under its curve, and the derivative of A(x).
2.8 Summary
In this chapter, we showed how to calculate the area of a region in the plane that is bounded by the x axis, two lines of the form x = a and x = b, and the graph of a positive function y = f (x). We also introduced the terminology “deﬁnite integral” (Section 2.6) and the notation (2.4) to represent that area. One of our main efforts here focused on how to actually compute that area by the following set of steps: • Subdivide the interval [a, b] into smaller intervals (width ∆x). • Construct rectangles whose heights approximate the height of the function above the given interval. • Add up the areas of these approximating rectangles. (Here we often used summation formulae from Chapter 1.) The resulting expression, such as Eqn. (2.1), for example, was denoted a Riemann sum. • Find out what happens to this total area in the limit when the width ∆x goes to zero (or, in other words, when the number of rectangles N goes to inﬁnity).
2.8. Summary
41
We showed both the analytic approach, using Riemann sums and summation formulae to ﬁnd areas, as well as numerical approximations using a spreadsheet tool to arrive at similar results. We then used a variety of examples to illustrate the concepts and arrive at computed areas. As a ﬁnal important point, we noted that the area “under the graph of a function” can itself be considered a function. This idea will emerge as particularly important and will lead us to the key concept linking the geometric concept of areas with the analytic properties of antiderivatives. We shall see this link in the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus, in Chapter 3.
42
Chapter 2. Areas
Chapter 3
The Fundamental Theorem of Calculus
In this chapter we will formulate one of the most important results of calculus, the Fundamental Theorem. This result will link together the notions of an integral and a derivative. Using this result will allow us to replace the technical calculations of Chapter 2 by much simpler procedures involving antiderivatives of a function.
3.1
The deﬁnite integral
In Chapter 2, we deﬁned the deﬁnite integral, I, of a function f (x) > 0 on an interval [a, b] as the area under the graph of the function over the given interval a ≤ x ≤ b. We used the notation
b
I=
a
f (x)dx
to represent that quantity. We also set up a technique for computing areas: the procedure for calculating the value of I is to write down a sum of areas of rectangular strips and to compute a limit as the number of strips increases:
b N
I=
a
f (x)dx = lim
N →∞
f (xk )∆x,
k=1
(3.1)
where N is the number of strips used to approximate the region, k is an index associated with the k’th strip, and ∆x = xk+1 − xk is the width of the rectangle. As the number of strips increases (N → ∞), and their width decreases (∆x → 0), the sum becomes a better and better approximation of the true area, and hence, of the deﬁnite integral, I. Example of such calculations (tedious as they were) formed the main theme of Chapter 2 . We can generalize the deﬁnite integral to include functions that are not strictly positive, as shown in Figure 3.1. To do so, note what happens as we incorporate strips corresponding to regions of the graph below the x axis: These are associated with negative values of the function, so that the quantity f (xk )∆x in the above sum would be negative for each rectangle in the “negative” portions of the function. This means that regions of the graph below the x axis will contribute negatively to the net value of I. 43
44
Chapter 3. The Fundamental Theorem of Calculus
If we refer to A1 as the area corresponding to regions of the graph of f (x) above the x axis, and A2 as the total area of regions of the graph under the x axis, then we will ﬁnd that the value of the deﬁnite integral I shown above will be I = A1 − A2 . Thus the notion of “area under the graph of a function” must be interpreted a little carefully when the function dips below the axis.
y
y=f(x)
y
y=f(x)
x
x
y
(a)
y y=f(x)
(b)
y=f(x)
x a
(c)
x a
(d)
b
c
Figure 3.1. (a) If f (x) is negative in some regions, there are terms in the sum (3.1) that carry negative signs: this happens for all rectangles in parts of the graph that dip b below the x axis. (b) This means that the deﬁnite integral I = a f (x)dx will correspond to the difference of two areas, A1 − A2 where A1 is the total area (dark) of positive regions minus the total area (light) of negative portions of the graph. Properties of the deﬁnite integral: (c) illustrates Property 1. (d) illustrates Property 2.
3.2 Properties of the deﬁnite integral
The following properties of a deﬁnite integral stem from its deﬁnition, and the procedure for calculating it discussed so far. For example, the fact that summation satisﬁes the distributive
) Then.e. Property 2 shows how a region can be broken up into two pieces whose total area is just the sum of the individual areas. i. a b f (x)dx = a f (x)dx + b b f (x)dx.3. .1. f (x). 5. We will now investigate the interesting connection between A(x) and the original function. we will be interested in the way that this area changes as the endpoint varies (Figure 3.2(a)). Let ∆x = h represent some (very small) increment in x. a 1. a b Cf (x)dx = C a f (x)dx. x+h A(x + h) = a f (t) dt. Properties 3 and 4 reﬂect the fact that the integral is actually just a sum. a to an endpoint x. We illustrate some of these in Fig 3. b b 4. so any letter or symbol in its place would do just as well. we investigated how the area under the graph of a function changes as one of the endpoints of the interval moves. and is used to avoid confusion with the endpoint of the integral (x in this case). 3. a f (x)dx = − f (x)dx. (Caution: do not confuse h with height here. and so satisﬁes properties of simple addition. b c 2. We would like to study how A(x) changes as x is increased ever so slightly. a b (f (x) + g(x))dx = a a f (x) + a g(x)dx. Also note that the value of A(x) does not depend in any way on t. then we must replace the previous “rectangle width” given by ∆x = xk+1 − xk by the new “width” which is of opposite sign: xk − xk+1 . a c f (x)dx = 0. This endpoint is considered as a variable12. 12 Recall that the “dummy variable” t inside the integral is just a “place holder”. Property 5 is obtained by noting that if we perform the summation “in the opposite direction”. from some ﬁxed starting point. x A(x) = a f (t) dt. This accounts for the sign change shown in Property 5. b Property 1 states that the “area” of a region with no width is zero. We deﬁned a function that represents the area under the graph of a function f . according to our deﬁnition. It is actually a step size along the x axis. 3.3.3 The area as a function In Chapter 2. The area as a function 45 property means that an integral will satisfy the same the same property.
we get a better and better approximation. i.e. i. h → 0. The Fundamental Theorem of Calculus y y=f(x) A(x) y y=f(x) A(x+h) x y y=f(x) A(x+h)−A(x) a x x+h a y (a) (b) y=f(x) f(x) a h a x (c) x+h (d) Figure 3. It is simply the derivative of the area function. h As h gets small. In Figure 3.2(d)).2. so that.2(c)) that looks much like a rectangular strip (Figure 3. then the approximation of this sliver by a rectangle will be good. The difference between the two areas is a thin sliver (shown in Figure 3. the area of the region increases from A(x) to A(x + h). if h is small. given in Eqn. (Indeed. so that the area of the sliver is approximately f (x) · h. This leads to the important Fundamental Theorem of Calculus. (3.e. A(x + h) − A(x) ≈ f (x)h A(x + h) − A(x) ≈ f (x). h→0 dx h (3.) The height of this sliver is speciﬁed by the function f evaluated at the point x.e. respectively. h→0 or lim A(x + h) − A(x) = f (x). by f (x).2) . h The ratio above should be recognizable. in the limit. f (x) = A(x + h) − A(x) dA = lim .2(a)(b).46 Chapter 3. we illustrate the areas represented by A(x) and by A(x + h). i. When the right endpoint of the interval moves by a distance h. Thus.2).
4. . The Fundamental Theorem of Calculus 47 We have just given a simple argument in support of an important result.2. dA = f (x). which is restated below. f (x)13 . 3. 3. b]. with no hyphen. called the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus. 13 We often write “antiderivative”. both functions have the same derivative: g1 (x) = g2 (x) = x..4. g2 = + 1.1 Fundamental theorem of calculus: Part I Let f (x) be a bounded and continuous function on an interval [a.3. then A(x) = F (x) + C. this result says that A(x) is an “antiderivative” of the original function. In fact.4. dx In other words. stated another way.4 The Fundamental Theorem of Calculus 3. and Figure 3. Consider the following two functions: x2 x2 . Proof See above argument.2 Example: an antiderivative Recall the connection between functions and their derivatives. or. Let x A(x) = a f (t) dt. Then for a < x < b. any function of the form g(x) = x2 +C 2 where C is any constant is also an “antiderivative” of x. This example illustrates that adding a constant to a given function will not affect the value of its derivative. We will use this fact shortly: if A(x) and F (x) are both antiderivatives of some function f (x). We would say that x2 /2 is an “antiderivative” of x and that (x2 /2) + 1 is also an “antiderivative” of x. antiderivatives of a given function are deﬁned only up to some constant. g1 (x) = 2 2 Clearly.
Proof From comments above. In the case of elementary functions. We are told that F (x) is an antiderivative of f (x). we will be able to use a shortcut: ﬁnd an antiderivative. Replacing C by −F (a) in equation 3. Suppose F (x) is any antiderivative of f (x).48 Chapter 3. because it allows us to use a powerful new tool in determining areas under curves. It follows that x A(x) = a f (t) dt = F (x) + C. where C is some constant. by property 1 of deﬁnite integrals. b]. x A(x) = a f (t) dt = F (x) − F (a).3) However. this will be very easy and convenient. b of the interval of interest. C = −F (a). Instead of the drudgery of summations in order to compute areas. x . Thus x A(x) = a f (t) dt = F (x) − F (a). Thus.4. we know that A(x) is also an antiderivative of f (x). Remark 2: Notation We will often use the notation F (t)a = F (x) − F (a) to denote the difference in the values of a function at two endpoints. Remark 1: Implications This theorem has tremendous implications. evaluate it at the two endpoints a. The Fundamental Theorem of Calculus 3. we know that a function f (x) could have many different antiderivatives that differ from one another by some additive constant. (3. a A(a) = a f (t) = F (a) + C = 0. and subtract the results to get the area. But from Part I of the Fundamental Theorem.3 leads to the desired result. Then for a ≤ x ≤ b.3 Fundamental theorem of calculus: Part II Let f (x) be a continuous function on [a.
These will prove very helpful in our calculations of basic integrals. In this table. the antiderivative is a2 a3 a1 F (x) = C + a0 x + x2 + x3 + x4 + . This motivates a review of derivatives of common functions. k = 0. when using ln(x) as antiderivative for 1/x. . we see that integration is related to “antidifferentiation”. Its antiderivative can be found easily using the “power rule” together with the properties of addition of terms. as we discuss much later. . consider the polynomial p(x) = a0 + a1 x + a2 x2 + a3 x3 + . Table 3. . . This polynomial could have many other terms (or even an inﬁnite number of such terms.5 Review of derivatives (and antiderivatives) By remarks above. Indeed. As an example.1. Common functions and their derivatives (on the left two columns) also result in corresponding relationships between functions and their antiderivatives (right two columns).1 lists functions f (x) and their derivatives f (x) (in the ﬁrst two columns) and functions f (x) and their antiderivatives F (x) in the subsequent two columns. Review of derivatives (and antiderivatives) 49 3. in Chapter 10).5. function f (x) Cx xn sin(ax) cos(ax) tan(ax) ekx ln(x) arctan(x) arcsin(x) derivative f (x) C nxn−1 a cos(ax) −a sin(ax) a sec2 (ax) kekx 1 x 1 1 + x2 1 √ 1 − x2 function f (x) C xm cos(bx) sin(bx) sec2 (bx) ekx 1 x 1 1 + x2 √ 1 1 − x2 antiderivative F (x) Cx xm+1 m+1 (1/b) sin(bx) −(1/b) cos(bx) (1/b) tan(bx) ekx /k ln(x) arctan(x) arcsin(x) Table 3.3. we assume that x > 0. Also. 2 3 4 . b = 0. we assume that m = −1.
. e−2x dx.2 Example 2: Simple areas Determine the values of the following deﬁnite integrals by ﬁnding antiderivatives and using the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus: 1 1. (1 − x2 ) dx. (Here we have taken the ﬁrst few terms from the example of the last section with coefﬁcients all set to 1. thus 1 1 1 I= 0 14 In x2 dx = F (x) 0 = (1/3)(x3 ) 0 = 1 1 3 (1 − 0) = . Solutions 1.1 Example 1: The area under a polynomial Consider the polynomial p(x) = 1 + x + x2 + x3 .6. 2 3 4 3. 2.6 Examples: Computing areas with the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus 3. 3 3 fact. The Fundamental Theorem of Calculus This can be checked easily by differentiation14. I = 0 sin x 2 dx.6. I = −1 π 4. I = 0 1 x2 dx. An antiderivative of f (x) = x2 is F (x) = (x3 /3).083. it is very good practice to perform such checks. I = −1 1 3. 3.) Then. computing 1 I= 0 p(x) dx leads to 1 I= 0 1 1 1 (1 + x + x2 + x3 ) dx = (x + x2 + x3 + x4 ) 2 3 4 1 = 1+ 0 1 1 1 + + ≈ 2.50 Chapter 3.
We can integrate over 0 ≤ x ≤ 1 and double the result. in the examples above is tricky only in that signs can easily get garbled when we plug in the endpoint at 1. the areas to the right and to the left of x = 0 are the same for the interval −1 ≤ x ≤ 1. we can immediately write 1 I= −1 (1 − x2 ) dx = 2 1 0 1 (1 − x2 ) dx = 2 x − (x3 /3) 0 = 2 1 − (13 /3) = 4/3 Note that this calculation is simpler since the endpoint at x = 0 is trivial to plug in.6. Examples: Computing areas with the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus 51 2.6. we can simplify our work by noting the symmetry of the function f (x) = 1 − x2 on the given interval.2.4) that a function f (x) is even if f (x) = f (−x) for all x. Thus. An antiderivative of f (x) = (1 − x2 ) is F (x) = x − (x3 /3). We state the general result we have obtained. Comment: The evaluation of Integral 2. An antiderivative of sin(x/2) is F (x) = − cos(x/2)/(1/2) = −2 cos(x/2). However.3. y=1−x 2 −1 0 1 x Figure 3. A function is odd if f (x) = −f (−x). This stems directly from the fact that the function considered is even15 . An antiderivative of e−2x is F (x) = (−1/2)e−2x . which holds true for any function with even symmetry integrated on a symmetric interval about x = 0: If f (x) is an even function. We can exploit the symmetry of the function f (x) = 1 − x2 in the second integral of Examples 3. . As shown in Fig 3.3.3. 1 1 1 I= −1 e−2x dx = F (x) −1 = (−1/2)(e−2x ) −1 = (−1/2)(e−2 − e2 ). Thus π I= 0 sin x 2 π 0 dx = −2 cos(x/2) − 2(cos(π/2) − cos(0)) = −2(0 − 1) = 2. then a a f (x) dx = 2 −a 15 Recall f (x) dx −a (3. 3. Thus. 4. thus 1 1 1 I= −1 (1−x2 ) dx = F (x) −1 = x − (x3 /3) −1 = 1 − (13 /3) − (−1) − ((−1)3 /3) = 4/3 See comment below for a simpler way to compute this integral.
8 1 1. (a) Find the area enclosed between the graphs of the functions y = x3 and y = x1/3 in the ﬁrst quadrant. On this interval. two vertical lines (x = a and x = b) and the graph of a function.2 1. Solution (a) The two curves. intersect at x = 0 and at x = 1 in the ﬁrst quadrant.2 0 A1 A2 x 0.4 0. so that the area we want to ﬁnd can be expressed as: 1 A1 = 0 x1/3 − x3 dx.6 1. Thus the interval that we will be concerned with is 0 < x < 1.6. (b) Find the area enclosed between the graphs of the functions y = x3 and y = x in the ﬁrst quadrant.8 2 y=x1/3 y=x3 y=x Figure 3. 4 4 2 (b) The two curves y = x and y = x also intersect at x = 0 and at x = 1 in the ﬁrst quadrant. i.3 Example 3: The area between two curves The deﬁnite integral is an area of a somewhat special type of region. x4/3 A1 = 4/3 3 1 x4 − 4 0 = 0 3 1 1 − = .6 0. (c) What is the relationship of these two areas? What is the relationship of the functions y = x3 and y = x1/3 that leads to this relationship between the two areas? y 2 1.6 0. The area can be represented as 1 A2 = 0 x − x3 dx. we can generalize to computing areas of other regions. x1/3 > x3 . including those bounded by the graphs of two functions. However.2 1. The Fundamental Theorem of Calculus 3. .8 0. In Example 3.4 0. y = x3 and y = x1/3 ..0 0. using additive (or subtractive) properties of areas.2 0. and on the interval 0 < x < 1 we have x > x3 .8 1.6 1. 1 Thus.4 1.e.52 Chapter 3. an axis.4 1.4. we compute the areas A1 and A2 shown above.
This ﬁts well with our idea of A(x) as the antiderivative of f (x): Places where A(x) has a critical point coincide with places where dA/dx = f (x) = 0. from which we would like to construct a sketch of the associated function A(x). This sketching skill is illustrated in the ﬁgures shown in this section. (See A(x) in bottom panels of Figure 3. the lake described by the function y = f (x) = 100 + (x/100)2 in the north and the line x = 1000 in the east.4).5. 3 3. Solution The area is 1000 A= 0 100 + x 100 2 1000 dx.3. The reason for this is that x1/3 is the inverse of the function x3 .6.4 Example 4: Area of land Find the exact area of the piece of land which is bounded by the y axis on the west.7 Qualitative ideas In some cases. 2 4 4 (c) The area calculated in (a) is twice the area calculated in (b). As x moves from left to right. but then we encounter a portion of the graph of f below the x axis.) Every time the function f (x) crosses the x axis. by deﬁnition A(a) = 0) and gradually build up to some net positive amount. which means geometrically that the graph of x1/3 is the mirror image of the graph of x3 reﬂected about the line y = x. 10000 Note that the multiplicative constant (1/10000) is not affected by integration. Therefore. and this subtracts from the amount accrued.5): We start with no area. at the point x = a (since. f (x). Qualitative ideas x2 2 1 0 53 x4 4 1 A2 = − = 0 1 1 1 − = . Suppose we are given a function as shown in the top left hand panel of Figure 3. 3. the area A1 between y = x1/3 and y = x3 is twice as large as the area A2 between y = x and y = x3 calculated in part (b): A1 = 2A2 (see Figure 3. (Hence the graph of A(x) has a little peak that corresponds to the point at which f = 0. We would like to assemble a sketch of x A(x) = a f (t)dt which corresponds to the area associated with the graph of the function f . we show how the “area” accumulated along the graph gradually changes. . the x axis in the south.7. we see that A(x) has either a maximum or minimum value. The result is 1000 A = 100x 0 + x3 3 1000 0 · 1 10000 = 4 5 10 . we are given a sketch of the graph of a function. = 0 100 + 1 x2 dx.
we here show how to sketch the corresponding “area function” A(x).54 f(x) Chapter 3.e. a on the x axis indicates the place at which A(x) = 0. A(x) is an increasing function . This follows from Property 1 of the deﬁnite integral. Given a function f (x). from the fact that A(a) = a f (t) dt = 0. Recall that this was one of the skills we built up in learning the connection between functions and their derivatives in a ﬁrst semester calculus course. i.5. a 2. . The endpoint of the interval.this follows from the fact that the area continues to accumulate as we “sweep across” positive regions of f (x). Remarks The following remarks may be helpful in gaining conﬁdence with sketching the “area” x function A(x) = a f (t) dt. The Fundamental Theorem of Calculus f(x) x x A(x) A(x) x x (a) f(x) x (b) f(x) x A(x) A(x) x x (c) (d) Figure 3. (The relationship is that f (x) is the derivative of A(x) Sketching the function A(x) is thus analogous to sketching a function g(x) when we are given a sketch of its derivative g (x). Whenever f (x) is positive. from the original function f (x): 1.
dashed curve parallel to g(x)). g(x) is an antiderivative of f (x). The box in the middle of the sketch shows conﬁgurations of tangent lines to g(x) based on the sign of f (x). determines whether g(x) is increasing or decreasing over the given intervals. changes sign. This means that either the area stops increasing (if the transition is from positive to negative values of f ). Whether f (x) is positive (+) or negative () in portions of its graph. 3. Given a function f (x) (top. it follows that (tak . Since dA/dx = f (x) by the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus.6. those tangent lines are horizontal. (See dashed vertical line at x = a). the function A(x) has a local minimum or maximum. only one of these satisﬁes g(a) = 0 as required by Property 1 of the deﬁnite integral. 4.7. solid line). Places where f (x) changes sign correspond to maxima and minima of the function g(x) (Two such places are indicated by dotted vertical lines).. solid line).g. Wherever f (x). we assemble a plot of the x corresponding function g(x) = a f (t)dt (bottom. This determines the height of the desired function g(x). The function g(x) is drawn as a smooth curve whose direction is parallel to the tangent lines shown in the box.3. While the function f (x) has many antiderivatives (e. Where f (x) = 0. Qualitative ideas 55 f(x) + a + − − + x g(x) a x Figure 3. or else the area starts to increase (if f crosses from negative to positive values).
f (x) is shown above.8 Some ﬁne print The Fundamental Theorem has a number of restrictions that must be satisﬁed before its results can be applied. Sketch the correx sponding function g(x) = a f (x)dx.7. 3. Solution See Figure 3.7 3. This means that at such points.e.56 Chapter 3. the function A(x) would have an inﬂection point.1 Example: sketching A(x) Consider the f (x) whose graph is shown in the top part of Figure 3. f (x) = 0).7. The original functions.7. In this section we look at some examples in which care must be used.6 shows in detail how to sketch the corresponding function x g(x) = a f (t)dt. Figure 3. The corresponding functions g(x) is drawn below. Given a function f (x). when f (x) has a local maximum or minimum. it follows that A (x) = 0. Thus. f(x) + a + x − g(x) a x Figure 3. The Fundamental Theorem of Calculus ing a derivative of both sides) d2 A/dx2 = f (x). . (i.
8. evaluating it at both endpoints. Hence. namely f (x) = x if x > 0 −x if x < 0.5 2 2 3. x The function f (x) = is undeﬁned at x = 0. This function is actually made up of two distinct parts. and indeed. We say that his integral does not exist. the result so obtained would be simply wrong. . We ﬁnd that I=− x2 2 0 + −1 =− 0− 1 4 + − 0 = 2.8. and getting a numerical answer. Technically.3 Example: Function discontinuous or with distinct parts Suppose we are given the integral 2 I= −1 x dx.8.8. 0 2 The integral I must therefore be split up into two parts. and unbounded on any interval that contains the point x = 0. The Fundamental Theorem of Calculus cannot be applied. x2 This function is also undeﬁned (and hence not continuous) at x = 0.4 Function undeﬁned Now let us examine the integral 1 −1 x1/2 dx. 3. namely 2 I= −1 x dx = x2 2 2 0 (−x) dx + −1 0 x dx. 3.1 Function unbounded I Consider the deﬁnite integral 0 1 x 2 1 dx.2 Function unbounded II Consider the deﬁnite integral 1 −1 1 dx. we say that “this integral does not exist”. although one can “go through the motions” of computing an antiderivative.8.3. we cannot evaluate this integral using the Fundamental theorem. Some ﬁne print 57 3.
to compute the integral over the interval −1 ≤ x ≤ 2.58 Chapter 3. Recall that x1/2 = x.1 (for k = −r) leads to the result I= e−rx −r b 0 =− 1 −rb 1 e − e0 = 1 − e−rb . 3.) We have. In this example. so long as r = 0.8. and b > 0 are constants. where r > 0. ∞). r (3. observe that the value we computed is ﬁnite.5) is called an improper integral.8. Learning to distinguish between those that do and those that do not will form an important theme in Chapter 10. r r r (We used the fact that e−rb → 0 as b → ∞. Hence. in essence.5) An integral of the form (3. √ We see that there is a problem here. r r This is the area under the exponential curve between x = 0 and x = b. the function is not deﬁned for x < 0 and the interval of integration is inappropriate. this integral does not make sense. Now consider what happens when b. the upper endpoint of the integral increases. The Fundamental Theorem of Calculus y y= x −1 0 2 x Figure 3. Hence. we must split up the region into two distinct parts. Not all such integrals have a bounded ﬁnite value. Then the value of the integral becomes b I = lim b→∞ e−rx dx = lim 0 b→∞ 1 1 1 1 − e−rb = (1 − 0) = . so that b → ∞. found that ∞ I= 0 e−rx dx = 1 .5 Inﬁnite domain (“improper integral”) Consider the integral b I= 0 e−rx dx. Even though the domain of integration of this integral is inﬁnite. (0. Simple integration using the antiderivative in Table 3. .
To do so.9. the area it represents.3.1. we can use the curved boundary as a single function that deﬁnes the region. one and the same curve.9. becomes a function of x. and examined its basic properties. Up to now.e. This means that our deﬁnite integral (which is really just a convenient way of carrying out the process of area computation) has to be handled with care. Our construction in Figure 3. Let us consider this problem from a “new angle”.9 Summary In this chapter we ﬁrst recapped the deﬁnition of the deﬁnite integral in Section 3.) asked to ﬁnd the area between the curve y 2 − y + x = 0 and the y axis. placing our rectangles along the interval 0 < y < 1 on the y axis (each having base of width ∆y) leads to the integral 1 1 I= 0 g(y) dy = 0 (y − y 2 )dy = y2 y3 − 2 3 1 = 0 1 1 1 − = . Indeed. Then. x of the integral is allowed to vary. but it can be expressed in the form of a function x = f (y). with rectangles based on the y axis. y 2 − y + x = 0 forms the boundary from both the top and the bottom of the region. we showed that A (x) = f (x) and argued that this makes A(x) an antiderivative of the function f (x). all the rectangular strips we considered had bases (of width ∆x) on the x axis. y = f (x). We are unable to set up a series of rectangles with bases along the x axis whose heights are described by this curve.9 we observe an example in which it would not be possible to use this technique. (Note that the curve cannot be expressed in the form of a function in the usual sense. the basis for these calculations rests on imagining rectangles whose heights are speciﬁed by one or another function. we can achieve the desired result. A(x). . Summary Regions that need special treatment 59 So far. If we do so. 2 3 6 3. If one of the endpoints. i. The area in the region shown here is best computed by integrating in the y direction. We are y y x=g(y) Δy x x Figure 3. However. In Figure 3. In all our examples so far. we have learned how to compute areas of regions in the plane that are bounded by one or more curves.2 showed that there is a connection between the derivative A (x) of the area and the function f (x). let us express our curve in the form x = g(y) = y − y 2 . recalled its connection to an area in the plane under the graph of some function f (x).
mass from densities. to compute volumes of various shapes. and used this to relate functions and their antiderivatives in Table 3. the ideas presented here have a much wider range of applicability than simple area calculations. forming the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus. Indeed. Motivated by this very important result. we will shortly show that the same concepts can be used to calculate net changes in continually varying processes. Finally. We used these antiderivatives to calculate areas in several examples. These ideas will be investigated in Chapters 4. we can take a shortcut using antidifferentiation.1. Rather. The Fundamental Theorem of Calculus This important connection between integrals and antiderivatives is the crux of Integral Calculus. and 5. to determine displacement from velocity. we extended the treatment to include qualitative sketches of functions and their antiderivatives. Its signiﬁcance is that ﬁnding areas need not be as tedious and labored as the calculation of Riemann sums that formed the bulk of Chapter 2.60 Chapter 3. we reviewed some common functions and derivatives. . As we will see in upcoming chapters. as well as a host of other quantities that involve a process of accumulation.
a topic we visited in an earlier.3 and 4. the net change resulting from all the accumulation and loss over a time span).6. the important step is to properly set up the deﬁnite integral that corresponds to the desired net change. we also show that the deﬁnite integral is useful for determining the average value of a function. 61 . and what effect it induces. We encounter for the ﬁrst time the idea of spatial density.4. Differential Calculus Course. We show that such examples also involve the concept of integration. We also consider mass distributions and the notion of a center of mass. velocity and displacement of a moving object. and recall how air resistance can be described. This allows us to extend the utility of the mathematical tools to a variety of novel situations. We will consider both uniform and accelerated motion. Here we will show that the notion of antiderivatives and integrals allows us to deduce details of the motion of an object from underlying Laws of Motion. Several other important ideas are introduced in this chapter.2. rate of growth) and the total change (i. Computations at this stage are relatively straightforward to emphasize the process of setting up the appropriate integrals and understanding what they represent. We will see examples of this type in Sections 4. this idea is applied to the density of cars along a highway.1 Introduction In this chapter. fundamentally.2. We will discuss the connection between acceleration. is a cumulative summation of inﬁnitesimal changes. Finally.e. In all these examples.Chapter 4 Applications of the deﬁnite integral to velocities and rates 4. An important connection is made in this chapter between a rate of change (e. we encounter a number of applications of the deﬁnite integral to practical problems. and see that integration can also be used to “add up” the total amount of material distributed over space. which.g. as discussed in Section 4. In Section 5.
the difference between the position at time T1 and the position at time T2 .1. dt (Velocity is the derivative of position and acceleration is the derivative of velocity. (though this quantity does not have a special name). Since position. (4. we have T 0 v(t) dt = x(T ) − x(0).1) The quantity on the right hand side of Eqn. T2 T2 v(t) dt = x(t) T1 T1 = x(T2 ) − x(T1 ). i. Applications of the deﬁnite integral to velocities and rates 4. v(t) its velocity. it follows that over the time interval T1 ≤ t ≤ T2 . (4. the area under the curve a(t) is a geometric quantity that represents the net change in the velocity. the following relationships hold: dx = v. Then T by the deﬁnition of the deﬁnite integral.. by previous remarks. we can interpret T12 v(t) dt as the “area” associated with the curve (counting positive and negative contributions) between the endpoints T1 and T2 . . 4. is an antiderivative of velocity.2 Displacement. we also have that T T a(t) dt = v(t) 0 0 = v(T ) − v(0) is the net change in velocity between time 0 and time T . Then according to the above observations. as the displacement over the time interval 0 ≤ t ≤ T .1 Geometric interpretations Suppose we are given a graph of the velocity v(t). We use the results above to compute the displacements in each case. dt dv = a. we consider two examples where either the acceleration or the velocity is constant. the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus says that T2 T2 a(t) dt = v(t) T1 T1 = v(T2 ) − v(T1 ). Similarly. as shown on the right of Figure 4. x(t).e.2) as above.1. by the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus. this area represents the displacement of the particle between the two times T1 and T2 .1) is a displacement. T2 = T .2. Next. as shown on the left of Figure 4.) This means that position is an antiderivative of velocity and velocity is an antiderivative of acceleration.62 Chapter 4.. (4. velocity and acceleration Recall from our study of derivatives that for x(t) the position of some particle at time t. since velocity is an antiderivative of acceleration. In the case that T1 = 0. v(t). and a(t) the acceleration. Similarly.
t. Displacement. The total area under the velocity graph represents net displacement. the acceleration is zero since a = dv/dt = 0 when v is constant.e. the displacement is proportional to the velocity and to the time elapsed. However.1.e. Then clearly. T T a dt = at 0 0 = a(T − 0) = aT.2. the acceleration a is a constant. Thus. velocity and acceleration 63 v This area represents displacement a This area represents net velocity change t T1 T2 T1 T2 t Figure 4. for uniform motion. This is true for all time T .2. by direct antidifferentiation.3) 4. i. x(T ) − x(0) = vT.4. i. applying result (4. . and the total area under the graph of acceleration represents the net change in velocity over the interval T1 ≤ t ≤ T2 . T T v dt = vt 0 0 = v(T − 0) = vT. by direct antidifferentiation. (4. x(t) = x(0) + vt. v(t) = v = constant. The ﬁnal position is x(T ) = x(0) + vT. i. Therefore.e.3 Uniformly accelerated motion In this case. it must be true that the two expressions obtained above must be equal. Thus. so we can rewrite the results in terms of the more familiar (lower case) notation for time. Thus.2. 4.1) over the time interval 0 ≤ t ≤ T also leads to T 0 v dt = x(T ) − x(0).2 Displacement for uniform motion We ﬁrst examine the simplest case that the velocity is constant.
From this we can ﬁnd the displacement and position of the particle as follows: Let us call the initial position x(0) = x0 . v(T ) − v(0) = aT so that v(T ) = v(0) + aT.2.7) This expression represents the position of a particle at time t given that it experienced a constant acceleration. 2 But this is true for all ﬁnal times.2) for 0 ≤ t ≤ T leads to T 0 a dt = v(T ) − v(0). A better approximation to the rate of change of velocity is given by the differential equation dv = g − kv. Since these two results must match. i. 2 (4. Let us refer to the initial velocity V (0) as v0 .7) only holds so long as the object is accelerating.5) But T T I= 0 v(t) dt = 0 (v0 + at) dt = v0 t + a t2 2 = 0 v0 T + a T2 2 . it is true for all t that: v(t) = v0 + at. T (4.e. (4. Once the a falling object hits the ground. (4. using Equation (4.5) and (4. Applications of the deﬁnite integral to velocities and rates However. setting Equations (4. T . this equation no longer holds.7)16.4) This just means that velocity at time t is the initial velocity incremented by an increase (over the given time interval) due to the acceleration. (4. initial position x0 and acceleration a allowed us to predict the position of the object x(t) at any later time t. Then T 0 v(t) dt = x(T ) − x0 . 4. dt (4.8) 16 Of course. That is the meaning of Eqn.6) So. . this holds for any time t so that x(t) = x0 + v0 t + a t2 . because frictional forces impede that motion.e. (4. the acceleration of a falling body is not actually uniform. The initial velocity v0 . Eqn.64 Chapter 4.4 Nonconstant acceleration and terminal velocity In general..6) equal means that x(T ) − x0 = v0 T + a T2 . The above connection between velocity and acceleration holds for any ﬁnal time T . i. for example.
dt has a solution y(t) = y0 e−kt .3. v(0) = 0. we will develop a systematic approach.2 and 4. we do not have an expression that depends on time whose antiderivative we would calculate. The derivative of v(t) (on the left) is connected to the unknown v(t) on the right. Because v(t) appears both in the derivative and in the expression kv. called Separation of Variables to ﬁnd analytic solutions to equations such as (4. representing a frictional coefﬁcient. with k.e.8) implies that a(t) = g − kv(t). We ﬁrst recall the following result from ﬁrst term calculus material: The differential equation and initial condition dy = −ky.9) (with a replacing y). Equation (4.2. g. where a(t) is the acceleration at time t.9) (4. at time t = 0.8). the acceleration is a(0) = g (since a(t) = g − kv(t). Initially. which implies (according to 4. we use a special procedure that allows us to determine the velocity in this case. Displacement.4.10) a(t) dt = 0 0 g e−kt dt = g 0 e−kt dt = g e−kt −k T =g 0 (e−kT − 1) g = 1 − e−kT . Therefore. velocity and acceleration 65 We will assume that initially the velocity is zero. we cannot apply the methods developed in the previous section directly. we have used the fact that the antiderivative of e−kt is e−kt /k. a(t) = g e−kt . The result is: T T T y(0) = y0 (4. we can apply direct integration as we did in the examples in Sections 4. Since we now have an explicit formula for acceleration vs time. i.10) that a(t) is given by a(t) = C e−kt = a0 e−kt . In Chapter 9.2. A good approximation for such drag forces is the term kv.) . proportional to the velocity.2. and drag forces due to friction with the atmosphere. That is. a positive constant. dt dt We observe that this equation has the same form as equation (4. −k k In the calculation. Here. Finding the velocity and then the displacement for this type of motion requires special techniques. This equation is a mathematical statement that relates changes in velocity v(t) to the constant acceleration due to gravity. (This can be veriﬁed by simple differentiation. Taking a derivative of both sides of this equation leads to dv da = −k = −ka. and v(0) = 0).
v(t) = k We will study the differential equation (4.8 m/s2 .8) again in Section 9. a value of the velocity at which no further change occurs.0 0.2) this integral of the acceleration over 0 ≤ t ≤ T must equal v(T ) − v(0). Applications of the deﬁnite integral to velocities and rates 50. 17 We will use the terminology “total change” and “net change” interchangeably in this section.3 From rates of change to total change In this section.2.11) 1 − e−kt . k k Thus. The velocity reaches a near constant 49 m/s by about 20 s. As before. The terminal velocity is also a steady state value of Eqn.2/s. and k = 0. the falling object does not continue to accelerate indeﬁnitely: it eventually attains a terminal velocity. Terminal velocity (m/s) for acceleration due to gravity g=9. in particular.0 Figure 4.2.2. the exponential term e−kt → 0. We use this information to obtain the total change17 that occurs over some time period. The object continues to fall at this (approximately constant) speed as shown in Figure 4.0 t 30.e.8). we examine several examples in which the rate of change of some process is speciﬁed. and the result is true for any ﬁnal time T . when drag forces are in effect. so.0 velocity v(t) 0.66 Chapter 4. But v(0) = 0 by assumption. and combining both results leads to an expression for the velocity at any time: g (4. so that v(t) → g g (1 − very small quantity) ≈ . we can also determine how the velocity behaves in the long term: observe that for t → ∞. . based on equation (4.3. (4. i. in the context of a more detailed discussion of differential equations From our result here. 4. setting T = t. We have seen that this limiting velocity is v = g/k.
4.2t Celcius per minute where t is time in minutes.2t dt = −40e−0.2t −e −1 1 = −40e−1 + 40e−0. We obtain a sum of the form f (tk )∆t where tk is the k’th time point.8187 − 0.) To get the total change. f (t). To do so. We compute: 5 5 5 ◦ I= 1 f (t) dt = 1 8e−0.2 .94 − 0. (Carefully note the subtle difference in the wording. we apply the Fundamental Theorem as before. (b) The rate of change of temperature of a cup of coffee is observed to be f (t) = 8e−0. we take a limit as the number of subintervals increases (N → ∞). we are given the temperature as a function of time. reducing the amount of computation to ﬁnding antiderivatives. Recognizing the subtleties of the wording in such examples will be an important skill that the reader should gain. the change in temperature between times t = 1 and t = 5 is simply T (5) − T (1) = 25(1 − e−0. Here is an example of these two different cases.3.3678) = 18. and how we would handle them (a) The temperature of a cup of juice is observed to be T (t) = 25(1 − e−0. Only in the second case did we need to use a deﬁnite integral to ﬁnd a net change. Based on this variation of the same concept we can take the usual shortcut of integrating the rate of change. we would sum up all the small changes.1 ) = 25(0.2 ) = 40(0. Find the change in the temperature of the juice between the times t = 1 and t = 5. we recognize that this amounts to a process of integration. By now. From rates of change to total change Changing temperature 67 We must carefully distinguish between information about the time dependence of some function. f (t)∆t (over N subintervals of duration ∆t = (5 − 1)/N = 4/N ) for t starting at 1 and ending at 5 min.5 ) − 25(1 − e−0. from information about the rate of change of some function. since we were given the way that the rate of change depended on time. Finally. we do not know the temperature at any time.606) = 7. What is the total change in the temperature between t = 1 and t = 5 minutes ? Solutions (a) In this case. we ﬁnd the temperatures at each time point and subtract: That is. I = 40(e −0. . from t = 1 to t = 5.47◦ Celcius. (b) Here.1t )◦ Celcius where t is time in minutes. To determine what net change occurred between times t = 1 and t = 5. but we are given information about the rate of change.
by the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus. 2. this deﬁnite integral corresponds to the area under the curve gi (t) from t = 0 to t = T . rather than a formula for the growth rate of the trees.3. but tree 2 catches up and grows faster after year 3.3. 0 i = 1. If the trees start at the same height.3) and Hi (t) is the height of tree “i” at time t.3. grows incrementally. assumed to have the shape of a cylinder. descriptive). so it has grown more.1 Tree growth rates The rate of growth in height for two species of trees (in feet per year) is shown in Figure 4.68 Chapter 4. (This means we do not have to calculate anything. In years of plentiful rain and adequate nutrients. rather than quantitative. Thus we must interpret the net change in height for each tree as the area under its growth curve. gi (t) is the growth rate as a function of time (shown for each tree in Figure 4.e. Applications of the deﬁnite integral to velocities and rates 2 Growth rate 1 0 1 2 3 4 year Figure 4. where i = 1 for tree 1.3. which tree is taller after 1 year? After 4 years? Solution In this problem we are provided with a sketch. the area under the curve for tree 1 is greater. We see from Figure 4. Our solution will thus be qualitative (i. But. At t = 4 years the area under the second curve is greatest so tree 2 has grown the most by that time. so that its crosssection consists of “rings”. rather. i = 2 for tree 2. Tree 1 initially has a higher growth rate. Growth rates of two trees over a four year period.3 that at t = 1 year. the tree grows faster than in years of drought or poor soil conditions. 4. Suppose the rainfall pattern . we have to make some important observations about the behaviour shown in Fig 4. 4.3.2 Radius of a tree trunk The trunk of a tree.) We recognize that the net change in height of each tree is of the form T Hi (T ) − Hi (0) = gi (t)dt.
e. ﬁnd the ratio mass(10)/mass(0). Rate of change of radius. and evaluating the integral. leads to 5 cos(πt/5) 5 R(t) = r0 + 1.5 + sin(πt/5).4. 0 Here we have used the fact that the antiderivative of sin(ax) is −(cos(ax)/a). and we are told that at t = 0. Thus. R(0) = r0 . as shown in Figure 4. has been cyclic. (a) If the radius was initially r0 at time t = 0. t 14.0 f(t) 0. over a period of 14 years.5 + sin(πs/5)) ds. π π .0 time. Let the height of the tree trunk be approximately constant over this ten year period. The net change in the radius is t t R(t) − R(0) = Integrating the above.5t − + .0 0. R(0) = r0 (which is a constant). A graph of this growth rate over the ﬁrst ﬁfteen years is shown in Figure 4. using the initial value.3. so that.4. From rates of change to total change 69 3. we get f (s) ds = 0 0 (1. f (t) for a growing tree over a period of 14 years.0 Figure 4.5t − cos(πs/5) π/5 t . The rate of change of the radius of the tree is given by the function f (t).4.4. what will the radius of the trunk be at time t later? (b) What is the ratio of the mass of the tree trunk at t = 10 years and t = 0 years? (i. and assume that the density of the trunk is approximately 1 gm/cm3 .) Solution (a) Let R(t) denote the trunk’s radius at time t. the growth rate of the radius of the tree trunk (in cm/year) is given by the function f (t) = 1. R(t) − R(0) = 1.
(b) The mass of the tree is density times volume. Applications of the deﬁnite integral to velocities and rates (The constant at the end of the expression stems from the fact that cos(0) = 1.0 time. 4. After ten years we have R(10) = r0 + 15 − But cos(2π) = 1.4.5. This function is equivalent to the area associated with the function shown in Figure 4. Notice that Figure 4. we need only obtain the volume at t = 10. and since the density in this example is constant. t 14. obtained by integrating the rate of change of radius shown in Fig. π π . In this problem we used simple antidifferentiation to compute the desired total change. .5. 1 gm/cm3 .5 conﬁrms that the radius keeps growing over the entire period. in Fig.5. R(t).) A graph of the radius of the tree over time (using r0 = 1) is shown in Figure 4. 4. The radius of the tree.4 to that of the resulting radius at time t. 25. The ratio we want is then V (10) π[R(10)]2 h [R(10)]2 = = = 2h 2 V (0) πr0 r0 r0 + 15 r0 2 5 5 cos(2π) + .0 R(t) 0. 4.0 0.70 Chapter 4. as a function of time.0 Figure 4. so R(10) = r0 + 15. Taking the trunk to be cylindrical means that the volume at any given time is V (t) = π[R(t)]2 h. but that its growth rate (slope of the curve) alternates between higher and lower values.4. We also related the graph of the radial growth rate in Fig.
(T − 2)(T + 7) = 0. i. 4. T 2 + 5T − 14 = 0. 0 (b) Denote by T the time at which the total number of babies born was 14 million.3. b(t) over the given time period. which can be written in the factored form. While this problem involves simple integration. 0 ≤ t ≤ 10. Thus we ﬁnd that T = 2 years.4 Production and removal The process of integration can be used to convert rates of production and removal into net amounts present at a given time. Suppose that the number of babies born (in millions per year) was given by b(t) = 5 + 2t. Then.4.4. Many problems in real application involve such slight twists on the ideas of integration. (a) How many babies in total were born during this time period (i. and when it decreases. where t is time in years after the end of the war. we had to solve for a quantity (T ) based on information about behaviour of that integral. We investigate a process in which a substance accumulates as it is being produced. the birth rate in western countries increased dramatically. but disappears through some removal process. [in units of million] T T I= 0 b(t) dt = 14 = 0 (5 + 2t) dt = 5T + T 2 equating I = 14 leads to the quadratic equation. This has two solutions. We would like to determine when the quantity of material increases.3 Birth rates and total births After World War II. Production and removal 71 4. . but we reject T = −7 since we are looking for time after the War. The net change in the population due to births (neglecting deaths) is 10 10 P (10)−P (0) = 0 b(t) dt = 0 (5+2t) dt = (5t+t2 )10 = 50+100 = 150[million babies].e it took two years for 14 million babies to have been born. The example in this section is of this type.e in the ﬁrst 10 years after the war)? (b) Find the time T0 such that the total number of babies born from the end of the war up to the time T0 was precisely 14 million. we would integrate the birth rate. Solution (a) To ﬁnd the number of births.
) This type of cyclic pattern is called circadean rhythm. p(t).6.6. Find the maximal level of hormone in the blood over the period shown. and the removal rate. This ﬁgure shows the production and removal rates over a period of 24 hours. We want to use these graphs to deduce when the level of hormone is highest and lowest. Solutions 1.6 to answer the following questions: 1. .) In this example. p(t). r(t). We will assume that the level of hormone is regulated by two separate processes: one might be the secretion rate of specialized cells that produce the hormone. periodic functions with somewhat different phases. A competing process might be the removal of hormone (or its deactivation by some enzymes secreted by other cells. Our ﬁrst task will be to use properties of the graph in Figure 4. 4. At what time is the hormone level in the blood highest? 4. assuming that its basal (lowest) level is H = 0. maximal? 2. At what time is the hormone level in the blood lowest? 5.72 Chapter 4. (The production rate of hormone might depend on the time of day. of the hormone are timedependent. starting at midnight. Applications of the deﬁnite integral to velocities and rates Circadean rhythm in hormone levels Consider a hormone whose level in the blood at time t will be denoted by H(t). in some cyclic pattern that repeats every 24 hours or so. The rate of hormone production p(t) and the rate of removel r(t) are shown here. When is the removal rate r(t) minimal? 3. we will assume that both the production rate.6 that production rate is maximal at about 9:00 am. When is the production rate. A typical example of two such functions are shown in Figure 4. We see directly from Fig. hormone production/removal rates p(t) r(t) t 0 3 6 9 12 (noon) 3 6 9 0 hour Figure 4.
6. But we must use caution here: For any time interval over which p(t) > r(t). the integral yields a negative result. Here we will practice integration by actually ﬁtting some cyclic functions to the graphs shown in Figure 4. We further observe that the functions shown in the Figure 4. Intersection points occur when p(t) = r(t) A(1 + sin(ωt)) = A(1 + cos(ωt)). 15. just as the curves cross each other. To answer this question we note that the total amount of hormone produced over a time period a ≤ t ≤ b is b Ptotal = p(t)dt. With these remarks.7 have the form p(t) = A(1 + sin(ωt)). we ﬁnd that the hormone level in the blood will be greatest at 3:00 pm. Production and removal 2. a This means that the net change in hormone level over the given time interval (amount produced minus amount removed) is b H(b) − H(a) = Ptotal − Rtotal = a (p(t) − r(t))dt.4. the fact that ω = π/12 implies that t = 3. the least hormone level occurs after a period in which the removal rate has been larger than production for the longest stretch. this integral will be positive. then the frequency of the oscillation is ω = (2π)/24 = π/12. a The total amount removed over time interval a ≤ t ≤ b is b Rtotal = r(t)dt. Similarly. 73 3. This last equality leads to ωt = π/4. 5. the hormone level is . Otherwise. This makes simple intuitive sense: If production is greater than removal. if r(t) < p(t). Thus. sin(ωt) = cos(ωt)). Our ﬁrst observation is that if the length of the cycle (also called the period) is 24 hours. whereas in the opposite situation. We interpret this integral as the area between the curves p(t) and r(t). r(t) = A(1 + cos(ωt)). But then. ⇒ tan(ωt) = 1. the level of the substance is accumulating. and the hormone level will have increased. 5π/4. This occurs at 3:00 am. over the time period 3 ≤ t ≤ 15 hrs. the substance is decreasing. removal rate is minimal at noon.4. so that the hormone level has decreased. 4. when the greatest (positive) area between the two curves has been obtained. Similarly.
7. (In general. You would like to pay P dollars to purchase an annuity that will pay you an income f (t) every year from now on.5 1 0. i.. which is a kind of savings account that guarantees a continuous stream of income. More generally. For simplicity.) Then the net increase in hormone over this period is calculated from the integral 15 15 Htotal = 3 [p(t) − r(t)] dt = 3 [(1 + sin(ωt)) − (1 + cos(ωt))] dt In the problem set. Applications of the deﬁnite integral to velocities and rates 2 1.e. we ask for income f (t) that could vary from year to year. the reader is asked to compute this integral and to show that the amount of hormone that accumulated over the time interval 3 ≤ t ≤ 15. in which case f (t) would be constant. In some cases. will .e. for t > 0. we will take the amplitude A = 1.5 0 5 10 t 15 20 Figure 4. between √ 3:00 am and 3:00 pm is 24 2/π. the amount deposited) in the bank with interest r (compounded continually) then the amount A(t) in the account at time t (in years).74 Chapter 4. The functions shown above are trigonometric approximations to the rates of hormone production and removal from Figure 4.6 increasing.5 Present value of a continuous income stream Here we discuss the value of an annuity. this would just be a multiplicative constant in whatever solution we compute. we might want a constant income every year. we can consider the case that at each future year t. If the bank interest rate is r. how much should you pay now? Solution If we invest P dollars (the “principal” i. 4.
etc. We must pay P now. Present value of a continuous income stream grow as follows: 75 r nt . we return to the question of how to set up an annuity for a continuous stream of income in the future. Rewriting Eqn.g. (4. We refer to the present value of year t as the quantity P = f (t)e−rt .) Thus.4.e.e. Recall that 1 e = lim (1 + h) h . Suppose we want to have f (t) spending money for each year t.g.12) Having established the exponential growth of an investment. (i. n h Then at time t. (4. 0 where L is the expected number of years left in the lifespan of the individual to whom this annuity will be paid.12). we have found that the amount in the bank at time t will grow as A(t) = P ert .) Deﬁne A(t) = P 1 + h= r r . n where r is the yearly interest rate (e. and where we have approximated a sum of payments by an integral (of a continuous income stream). n = 2 means interest compounded twice per year. Here we have used the fact that when h is small (i. we ﬁnd that the present value of the continuous income stream is L L P = t=1 f (t)e−rt · 1 ≈ “∆t f (t)e−rt dt. in the present. 5%) and n is the number of times per year that interest is compound (e. One problem is that we do not know in advance how long . Then n = . h→0 (This result was obtained in a ﬁrst semester calculus course by selecting the base of exponentials such that the derivative of ex is just ex itself. we have that A(t) = P (1 + h) h rt = P (1 + h) h ≈ P ert 1 1 rt for large n or small h. the principle amount that we should invest in order to have A(t) to spend at time t is P = A(t)e−rt . frequent intervals of compounding) the expression in square brackets above can be approximated by e. the base of the natural logarithms. n = 12 means monthly compounded interest. to get f (t) in a future year t.) Summing over all the years.5. (assuming continually compounded interest).
5.5.e. By a previous calculation in Section 3.14) as the present value of a continuous income stream f (t).6 Average value of a function In this ﬁnal example. In such an approximation. We shall have more to say about the properties of such integrals. First. that L ≈ ∞. It is important to avoid confusing these distinct notions.000 today to get 10.76 Chapter 4. and about their technical deﬁnition. Then from Eqn (4. We refer to the quantity ∞ P = 0 f (t)e−rt dt. Example: Setting up an annuity Suppose we want an annuity that provides us with an annual payment of 10. existence. we apply the deﬁnite integral to computing the average height of a function over some interval. Applications of the deﬁnite integral to velocities and rates the lifespan L will be. we could assume that this income stream continues forever. if interest rate is 5% (and assumed constant over future years). . and properties in Chapter 10.14). in this case f (t) = $10.8.18 Given a function y = f (x) over some interval a ≤ x ≤ b. 000 is a function that has a constant value for every year. r e. as we have already encountered in Section 3. 000 from the bank.g. (4. ∞ ∞ P = 0 10000e−rt dt = 10000 0 e−rt dt. As a crude approximation. 0. 000 annually for every future year. integral over an unbounded domain). i.05 Therefore.13) is an improper integral (i. i. we have to compute the integral: ∞ P = 0 f (t)e−rt dt. we ﬁnd that 1 P = 10000 · . 4. then P = 10000 = $200. we will encounter a different type of average (also called mean) that will represent an average horizontal position or center of mass. we need to pay $200.8. we will deﬁne average value of the function as follows: 18 In Chapters 5 and 8. 000.e.13) The integral in Eqn. we deﬁne what is meant by average value in this context.e. (4. (4.
4. (We will also call f (t) the daylength on day t. Its maximal value is 16h and its minimal value is 8h.e.546 hours π 1 182 1 = 182 12t − (4. i.e.8. f (t) = 12 + 4 sin 365 This is a periodic function with period 365 days as shown in Figure 4. i.15) . A simple function that would describe the cyclic changes of day length over the seasons is 2πt . Solution ¯ f= 1 4−2 4 x2 dx = 2 1 x3 2 3 4 = 2 28 1 3 4 − 23 = 6 3 Example 2: Day length over the year Suppose we want to know the average length of the day during summer and spring.6. Let us measure time t in days. with a cycle length of 1 year (365 days). Average value of a function Deﬁnition The average value of f (x) over the interval a ≤ x ≤ b is 77 ¯ f= 1 b−a b f (x)dx. a Example 1 Find the average value of the function y = f (x) = x2 over the interval 2 < x < 4. each being 12 hrs. We will refer to the number of daylight hours on day t by the function f (t). over the ﬁrst (365/2) ≈ 182 days is: 1 ¯ f= 182 = = 1 182 182 f (t)dt 0 182 12 + 4 sin( 0 πt ) 182 dt 182 4 · 182 πt cos( ) π 182 0 4 · 182 12 · 182 − [cos(π) − cos(0)] π 8 = 12 + ≈ 14. We will assume that day length follows a simple periodic behaviour. the date in spring when night and day lengths are equal. The average day length over spring and summer. with t = 0 at the spring equinox.
but the meaning is.0 Figure 4.8. of course. on average.0 <=================> summer winter 365. where the interval is 0 ≤ t ≤ 365. the day is 14. x(t) = x(0) + 0 v(s) ds. we show the entire day length cycle over one year. red region. i. we arrived at a number of practical applications of the deﬁnite integral. Applications of the deﬁnite integral to velocities and rates 16.2.) The height of the rectangle represents the average value of f (t) over the interval of interest.0 winter 365. It is left as an exercise for the reader to show that the average value of f over the entire year is 12 hrs. we found that for motion at constant acceleration a.546 hrs long during the spring and summer. the same as in the previous presentation of the formulae. 1. Thus.7 Summary In this chapter. the displacement of a moving object can be obtained by integrating twice: the deﬁnite integral of acceleration is the velocity v(t). the short days in winter will average out with the longer days in summer. and note that its area matches with the darker.0 0.8.78 Chapter 4.8 also shows geometrically what the average value of the function represents. In Section 4.8. In Figure 4. (This area is painted red (dark) in Figure 4.0 16. the whole year. since overall. t t v(t) = v0 + 0 a ds.) We showed that at . (See the big rectangle in Figure 4. (Here we use the “dummy variable” s inside the integral. Suppose we determine the area associated with the graph of f (x) over the interval of interest.0 summer 0.e.) Figure 4.8.0 <=================> <=================> 0. We show the variations in day length (cyclic curve) as well as the average day length (height of rectangle) in this ﬁgure. 4.) Now let us draw in a rectangle over the same interval (0 ≤ t ≤ 365) having the same total area. and the deﬁnite integral of the velocity is the displacement.0 <=================> 0. (This makes intuitive sense.
a In the next few chapters we encounters a vast assortment of further examples and practical applications of the deﬁnite integral.4. This idea was discussed in Section 4. The essential idea of an integral as a sum of many (inﬁnitesimally) small pieces will. the position of an object initially at x0 with velocity v0 is x(t) = x0 + v0 t + a t2 .3. 4. etc.) Again.2. k 3. we discussed the average value of a function f (x) over some interval a ≤ x ≤ b. length. We extended our analysis of a moving object to the case of nonconstant acceleration (Section 4. . volumes. when air resistance tends to produce a drag force to slow the motion of a falling object. we saw that if r(t) represents a rate of change of some process. a(t) = ge−kt . we could compute a velocity. using the deﬁnite integral. to such topics as mass. ¯ f= 1 b−a b f (x)dx. the acceleration gradually decreases.6. t v(t) = 0 a(s) ds = g (1 − e−kt ). We found that in that case. In the concluding Section 4.4). We illustrated the connection between rates of change (over time) and total change (between on time point and another). then b a r(s) ds = Total change over the time interval a ≤ t ≤ b. In some of these we will be called on to “dissect” a geometric shape into pieces that are not simple rectangles.7. 2 79 2. In general. nevertheless be the same. Summary any time t. (The decaying exponential means that a → 0 as t increases.
Applications of the deﬁnite integral to velocities and rates .80 Chapter 4.
1 Introduction In this chapter. The technology of the deﬁnite integral. The volume of the entire object will then be obtained by summing up volumes of a stack of disks or a set of embedded shells. In this context. in Chapters 7 and 8. We provide a number of examples of this procedure. mass. but ﬁrst we review the basics of elementary volumes that will play the dominant role in our calculations. The idea behind the procedure described in this chapter is closely related to those we have become familiar with in the context of computing areas. We will use familiar formulae for the volumes of disks and cylindrical shells. The connection between the discrete and continuous representation will form an important link with our study of analogous concepts in probability. we can use these as we did in Chapter 4. Calculating volumes will stretch our imagination. we will also deﬁne the concept of a center of mass. That is. and lengths of curves. requiring us to visualize 3dimensional (3D) objects. and length 5. and how they can be subdivided into shells or slices. we will consider how to dissect certain three dimensional solids into a set of simpler parts whose volumes are easy to compute. we will calculate the total mass of a continuous density distribution. Then.Chapter 5 Applications of the deﬁnite integral to calculating volume. we consider applications of the deﬁnite integral to calculating geometric quantities such as volumes of geometric solids. and carefully construct a summation to represent the desired volume. masses. Most of our effort will be aimed at understanding how to set up the needed integral. developed in Chapters 2 and 3 applies directly. a limiting process of reﬁnement leads to the desired result. and considering the limit as the thickness of the dissection cuts gets thinner. In the second part of this chapter. In the ﬁrst parts of this chapter. we ﬁrst imagine an approximation using a ﬁnite number of pieces to represent a desired result. We will ﬁrst motivate this concept for a discrete distribution made up of a number of ﬁnite masses. centers of mass. There are some important differences between material in this chapter and in previous chapters. 81 . Then we show how the same concept can be applied in the continuous case. This means that we need not rederive the link between Riemann Sums and the deﬁnite integral.
is just the sum of the individual masses. The portion at the left is made of lighter material. Later. We would like to describe some properties of this distribution. This allows us to recapitulate the link between ﬁnite sums and deﬁnite integrals that we developed in earlier chapters. . We will label each bead with an index. In considering the example of mass distributions. .1. we will ﬁnd that these ideas are equally useful in the context of probability. the bar in Figure 5.82Chapter 5. Let us imagine dividing up the bar into small pieces of length ∆x as shown in Figure 5. Applications of the deﬁnite integral to calculating volume. n (there are ﬁve beads so that n = 5).2 A continuous distribution: mass density and total mass We now consider a continuous mass distribution where the mass per unit length (“density”) changes gradually from one point to another.2 has a density that varies along its length. i = 1 . or has a lower density than the portions further to the right.2 Mass distributions in one dimension We start our discussion with a number of example of mass distributed along a single dimension. . Each bead has a certain position (that we will think of as the value of xi ) and a mass that we will call mi .2. M .1) 5.2. mass. 5. explored in Chapters 7 and 8. Examples in this chapter also further reinforce the idea of density (in the context of mass density). it becomes an easy step to develop the analogous concepts for continuous distributions. and their positions are of interest to us. (5. we consider a discrete collection of masses and then generalize to a continuous density.) How would we ﬁnd the total mass? Suppose the bar has length L and let x (0 ≤ x ≤ L) denote position along that bar. We will denote that density by ρ(x) and this carries units of mass per unit length.1 we see a number of beads distributed along a thin wire. In Figure 5. First. (The density of the material along the length of the bar is shown in the graph. For example. We will think of this arrangement as a discrete mass distribution: both the masses of the beads. so that n M= i=1 mi . and length 5.2.1 A discrete distribution: total mass of beads on a wire m1 x1 m2 x2 m3 x3 m4 x4 m5 x5 Figure 5. A discrete distribution of masses along a (one dimensional) wire. The total mass of the beads. We will be interested in computing the total mass (by summation or integration) as well as other properties of the distribution.
. Mass distributions in one dimension 83 mass distribution ρ( x ) Δx x m1 x1 m2 x2 . The coordinates of the endpoints of those pieces are then x0 = 0. ρ(x) is shown on the graph. Bottom: the discretized approximation of this same distribution. this sum will approach the integral L M= 0 ρ(x)dx (5. .) The total mass is then a sum of masses of all the pieces. The density of the bar (mass per unit length)..2. discussed in Example 5.2. .2) as we make the size of the pieces smaller. . ∆x.. each of length ∆x. xN = L and the corresponding masses of each of the pieces are approximately mk = ρ(xk )∆x. . and. (Observe that units are correct..3. Top: A continuous mass distribution along a one dimensional bar. The mass of each piece is approximately mk = ρ(xk )∆x where xk = k∆x.. mn xn Figure 5. that is massk =(mass/length)· length.5. . The total mass of the bar (“sum of all the pieces”) will be represented by an integral (5... xk = k∆x. of the pieces become inﬁnitesimal. . .2) as we let the size. Here we have subdivided the bar into n smaller pieces.3. as we have seen in an earlier chapter. Note that ∆x has units of length.
5.84Chapter 5. or other molecules in cells.3c and d). That is. Here we show a keratocyte. According to Alex Mogilner19 .e. A band of actin ﬁlaments (protein responsible for structure and motion of the c actin cortex −1 1 b actin cortex d ρ =1−x 2 nucleus −1 0 1 x Figure 5. where x is the fraction of distance from midpoint to the end of the band (Fig. mass. which is a cell from the scale of a ﬁsh. (5. the position corresponding to the midpoint of the edge of the cell shown in Fig. In (b) we show a schematic sketch of the actin cortex (shaded).2.3. ρ is the number Mogilner is a professor of mathematics who specializes in cell biology and the actin cytoskeleton that 1µm (read “ 1 micrometer” or “micron”) is 10−6 meters. i. the density of actin across the cortex in ﬁlaments per edge µm is well approximated by a distribution of the form ρ(x) = α(1 − x2 ) 20 − 1 ≤ x ≤ 1. We are interested in the distribution of actin ﬁlaments across that band. Here ρ(x) is an actin ﬁlament density in units of ﬁlaments per µm. and is appropriate for measuring lengths of small objects such as cells.3a. That distribution is shown in (d). cell) are found at the edge of the cell in a band called the actin cortex. 5. In (c) that band of actin is scaled and straightened out so that it occupies a length corresponding to the interval −1 ≤ x ≤ 1. and length We can also deﬁne a cumulative function for the mass distribution as x M (x) = 0 ρ(s)ds. A cell (keratocyte) shown in (a) has a dense distribution of actin in a band called the actin cortex. 20 Note 19 Alex .3 Example: Actin density inside a cell Biologists often describe the density of protein. Applications of the deﬁnite integral to calculating volume. It has been found experimentally that the density of actin is greatest in the middle of the band. 5. receptors. 5. (a) Credit to Alex Mogilner.3. Note that actin is densest in the middle of the band. The idea of a cumulative function becomes useful in discussions of probability in Chapter 8. One example is shown in Fig.3) Then M (x) is the total mass in the part of the interval between the left end (assumed at 0) and the position x.
We ﬁrst deﬁne the “center of mass”. this becomes an integral. ¯ 5. x= ¯ M i=1 As ∆x → dx.5.6. L 0 ρ(x)dx . it makes sense to deﬁne the center of mass of the continuous mass distribution as follows: 1 M L x= ¯ We can also write this in the form xρ(x)dx . 1 1 85 N= −1 α(1 − x2 ) dx = α −1 (1 − x2 ) dx. 0 x= ¯ L xρ(x)dx 0 . we have that there are N = 4α/3 actin ﬁlaments in the band. x which is akin to an average x coordinate.2 Center of mass of a continuous distribution We can generalize the concept of the center of mass for a continuous mass density. i. We can ﬁnd the total number of actin ﬁlaments. Our usual approach of subdividing the interval 0 ≤ x ≤ L and computing a Riemann sum leads to n 1 xi ρ(xi )∆x.e.3 Mass distribution and the center of mass It is useful to describe several other properties of mass distributions.3. 5. n i=1 mi 5. Mass distribution and the center of mass of actin ﬁbers per unit length. i=1 x= ¯ n i=1 xi mi . The integral above has already been computed (Integral 2. Based on this.2 of Chapter 3 and was found to be 4/3.3.1 Center of mass of a discrete distribution The center of mass x of a mass distribution is given by: ¯ 1 M n x= ¯ This can also be written in the form xi mi . N in the band by integration.3. Thus.) in the Examples 3.
mass. (c) Find the center of mass of the bar. A long thin bar of length L is made of material whose density varies along the length of the bar.3 Example: Center of mass vs average mass density Here we distinguish between two (potentially confusing) quantities in the context of an example. This type of mass density is shown in a panel in Fig. 5.) (c) The center of mass of the bar is x= ¯ L 0 xp(x) dx 1 = M M L 0 ax2 dx = a x3 M 3 L = 0 2a L3 2 = L. and length 5. Suppose that the mass density is given by ρ(x) = ax.2. the total mass of the bar is L M= 0 ax dx = ax2 2 L = 0 aL2 . Suppose we cut the bar at some position x = s. (d) Where along the length of the bar should you cut to get two pieces of equal mass? Solution (a) From our previous discussion. 2 .3) to ﬁgure out where half of the mass is concentrated. 2 (b) The average mass density along the bar is computed just as one would compute the average value of a function: integrate the function over an interval and divide by the length of the interval. Let x be distance from one end of the bar.86Chapter 5. (b) Find the average mass density along the bar. aL2 3 3 Observe that the center of mass is an “average x coordinate”. Then the mass of this part of the bar is s M1 = 0 ρ(x) dx = as2 .6. (5.3. (d) We can use the cumulative function deﬁned in Eqn. 0 ≤ x ≤ L. Applications of the deﬁnite integral to calculating volume. An example of this type appeared in Section 4. Thus ρ= ¯ 1 L L ρ(x) dx = 0 1 L aL2 2 = aL 2 A bar having a uniform density ρ = aL/2 would have the same total mass as the bar ¯ in this example. which is not the same as the average mass density. (This is the physical interpretation of average mass density. (a) Find the total mass of the bar.
In the next examples.) Determine the total amount of glucose in the tube (in gm).1 Example: A glucose density gradient A cylindrical testtube of radius r. we must have M1 = Solving for s leads to M .3 we discuss this in detail. assume that it is a simple cylinder. or a bar of varying density. 2 ⇒ as2 1 aL2 = 2 2 2 √ 1 2 s= √ L= L. actin density along the edge of a cell. Remark: the position that subdivides the mass into two equal pieces is analogous to the idea of a median. we have seen examples of mass distributed in one dimension: beads on a wire. Neglect the “rounded” lower portion of the tube: i. 5. (In reality. contains a solution of glucose which has been prepared so that the concentration of glucose is greatest at the bottom and decreases gradually towards the top of the tube. We give some examples in this section.4 Physical interpretation of the center of mass The center of mass has a physical interpretation: it is the point at which the mass would “balance”. cutting the bar at a distance ( 2/2)L from x = 0 results in two equal masses.5x grams per centimeter3. and a sum of pieces transformed into an integral. we ﬁnd that for this to be true. we determined the total mass by integration. . we have slightly more interesting geometries. 5. we consider similar ideas.1 + 0. Miscellaneous examples and related problems 87 We ask for what values of s is it true that M1 is exactly half the total mass? Using the result of part (a). Up to now. the transition between high and low concentration would be smoother than shown in this ﬁgure. (in Chapter 4). In the Appendix 11.5.4. 5.4. but instead of dissecting the region into 1dimensional intervals. Suppose that the concentration c as a function of the depth x is c(x) = 0.e.4 Miscellaneous examples and related problems The idea of mass density can be extended to related problems of various kinds. (x = 0 at the top of the tube. and height h.4 we show a schematic version of what this gradient might look like. Underlying the integral we computed was the idea that the interval could be “dissected” into small parts (of width ∆x). 2 2 √ Thus. For the continuous distributions.3. This concept will appear again in the context of probability in Chapter 8. (This is called a density gradient).) In Figure 5. and x = h at the bottom of the tube.
Suppose that the height of the testtube is h = 10 cm and its radius is r = 1 cm.1(10) + 0. A diskshaped slice of the tube with small thickness ∆x has approximately constant density. i. The amount of glucose in the slice is approximately equal to the concentration c(x) multiplied by the volume of the slice.e. Suppose that the thickness of a slice is ∆x.5h2 2 . Even though the geometry of the testtube.4) is a onedimensional problem. and length x=0 r Δx x=h Figure 5. Solution We assume a simple cylindrical tube and consider imaginary “slices” of this tube along its vertical axis. In this case the total amount of glucose in the tube is h G = πr2 0 (0. (Note the resemblance between the integrals L I= 0 C(x) dx and G = πr2 0 h c(x) dx.5x)dx = πr2 0. In order to sum up the total amount over all slices.) We have neglected the complication of the rounded bottom portion of the testtube.1x + 0.5(100) 2 = π (1 + 25) = 26π gm. here labeled as the “x” axis.88Chapter 5.) The integral we want is G = πr2 0 h c(x) dx. so that integration over its length (which is actually summation of disks shown in Figure 5. x. we observe here that the integral that computes the total amount is still a sum over a single spatial variable.1 + 0. here and in the previous example. Then the total mass of glucose is G = π 0. we imagine ∆x → dx becoming “inﬁnitesimal” as the number of slices increases. seems more complicated than the onedimensional highway described in Chapter 4. . the small slice contains an amount πr2 ∆xc(x) of glucose.1h + 0 0. we use a deﬁnite integral.5x2 2 h = πr2 0. A testtube of radius r containing a gradient of glucose. mass. (As before. Then the volume of each of these (disk shaped) slices is πr2 ∆x. at ﬁrst glance.4. Applications of the deﬁnite integral to calculating volume.
This trap should be avoided! It is clear that the correct expression has additional terms. we have shown a topdown view of a ring of nearly constant density on the right in Figure 5. b(r) is smooth. e.5. The density as a function of distance from the center is given by b(r). then the quadratic term is very very small so that Aring ≈ 2πr∆r. commonly make the error of writing Aring = π(r + ∆r − r)2 = π(∆r)2 .5. The superimposed curve on the left is the bacterial density b(r) as a function of the radius r.5. 5. What is the total number of bacteria in the colony? b(r) b(r)=1−r 2 r Δr r Side view Top−down view (one ring) Figure 5. Our task is to determine how to set up the problem in terms of an integral.5 shows a rough sketch of a ﬂat surface with a colony of bacteria growing on it.4. we consider a circular geometry. the density of the bacteria. in units of one million cells per square centimeter. We assume that this distribution is radially symmetric. Note that the function describing density.5. A ring of small thickness ∆r has roughly constant density. However. again. so that 0 ≤ r ≤ 1). A colony of bacteria with circular symmetry.2 Example: A circular colony of bacteria A circular colony of bacteria has radius of 1 cm.4. since we really are computing a difference of two circular areas. namely Aring = π(r + ∆r)2 − πr2 = π(2r∆r + (∆r)2 ). Solution Figure 5. between a circle of radius r and a slightly bigger circle of radius r + ∆r. but the concept of dissecting and summing is the same. is observed to be b(r) = 1 − r2 (Note: r is distance from the center in cm.g. At distance r from the center of the colony. 21 Students . The area of that “ring”21 would then be the area of the larger circle minus that of the smaller circle. Miscellaneous examples and related problems 89 In the next example. we must imagine which type of subdivision would lead to the summation (integration) needed to compute total amount. as shown in Figure 5. if we make the thickness of that ring really small (∆r → 0). We see that this ring occupies the region between two circles. but to accentuate the strategy of dissecting the region. and.
and length Consider all the bacteria that are found inside a “ring” of radius r and thickness ∆r (see Figure 5. See Figure 5. namely: 1 1 Btotal = 0 (1 − r)(2πr) dr = 2π 1 0 0 (1 − r2 )rdr = 2π 1 0 1 0 (r − r3 )dr.1 Volumes of cylinders and shells Before starting the calculation. with circular radius r and small thickness τ (shown on the right in Figure 5.) .6. 1. and radius r (shown on the left in Figure 5.5 Volumes of solids of revolution We now turn to the problem of calculating volumes of 3D solids.57 million cells. The volume of a circular disk of thickness τ . 2 2 Thus the total number of bacteria in the entire colony is π/2 million which is approximately 1. b(r) · (2πr∆r) = 2πr(1 − r2 )∆r. i. The outer surface of these objects is generated by revolving some curve around a coordinate axis. Vdisk = πr2 τ. mass. as with other examples.e.90Chapter 5.) The total number within such a ring is the product of the density.6) is Vshell = 2πrhτ. Applications of the deﬁnite integral to calculating volume.6 ). ∆r → dr become very small. let us recall the volumes of some of the geometric shapes that are to be used as elementary pieces into which our shapes will be carved. is a special case of the above. The volume of a cylindrical shell of height h. (This approximation holds for τ << r. The volume of a cylinder of height h having circular base of radius r. 2. In Figure 5. 3. Here we restrict attention to symmetric objects denoted solids of revolution. is Vcylinder = πr2 h.5. We calculate the result as follows: Btotal = 2π r4 r2 − 2 4 = (πr2 − π r4 ) 2 =π− π π = . But.7 we show one such curve. To get the total number in the colony we sum up over all the rings from r = 0 to r = 1 and let the thickness. 5.5. 5. and the surface it forms when it is revolved about the y axis. this is equivalent to calculating a deﬁnite integral. b(r) and the area of the ring.
5. Volumes of solids of revolution 91 r τ r h τ disk shell Figure 5.6. The total volume of the disks is not the same as the volume of the object but if we make the thickness of these disks very small. We show how the region is approximated by rectangles of some given width.2 Computing the Volumes Consider the curve in Figure 5. A solid of revolution is formed by revolving a region in the xyplane about the yaxis.5. We use them as basic elements in computing more complicated volumes. we arrive at the true volume of the solid of revolution. the approximation of the true volume is good.5.4 we give an example based on shells. as the thickness of the disks becomes inﬁnitesimal. 5. y y y x x x Figure 5. The volumes of these simple 3D shapes are given by simple formulae.7). The reader should recognize a familiar theme. In the same ﬁgure. We used the same concept in . we also show how a set of approximating rectangular strips associated with the planar region (grey rectangles) lead to a set of stacked disks (orange shapes) that approximate the volume of the solid (greenish object in Fig. In Appendix 11. In the limit. and how these form a set of approximating disks for the 3D solid of revolution.7. 5.7 and the surface it forms when it is revolved about the y axis. Here we will present examples based on disks.
Let us imagine a stack of disks approximating this volume. 5. Applications of the deﬁnite integral to calculating volume. and length computing areas using Riemann sums based on rectangular strips in Chapter 2. means that its volume is vk = π[f (xk )]2 ∆x. i.8. we y y=f(x) x disk radius: r=f(x) x disk thickness: Δx Figure 5. mass. One such disk has been pulled out and labeled for our inspection. The thickness of the disk (in the x direction) is ∆x. We note that if this surface is cut into slices. Considering this disk to be based at the k’th coordinate point in the stack. the key step is to make careful observation of the way that the radius of a given disk depends on the function that generates the surface. Here the solid of revolution is formed by revolving the curve y = f (x) about the y axis. The radius of the disk (parallel to the y axis) is r = y = f (x). A typical disk used to approximate the volume is shown.e. so that r = f (x). the radius of the crosssections depend on the position of the cut. Fig. When we increase the number of disks. The volume of this single disk is then v = π[f (x)]2 ∆x. . The thickness of the disk (parallel to the x axis) is ∆x.8 similarly shows a volume of revolution obtained by revolving the graph of the function y = f (x) about the x axis. The volume of this disk is hence v = π[f (x)]2 ∆x arrive at a deﬁnite integral. We note that its radius (in the y direction) is given by the height of the graph of the function. b V = a π[f (x)]2 dx.92Chapter 5. Summing up the volumes of all such disks in the stack leads to the total volume of disks Vdisks = k π[f (xk )]2 ∆x. making each one thinner so that ∆x → 0. In most of the examples discussed in this chapter. at xk .
Volumes of solids of revolution 93 (By this we mean the function that speciﬁes the curve that forms the surface of revolution. it generates a sphere. The radius of the disk depends on its position22. We can think of a sphere of radius R as a solid whose outer surface is formed by rotating a semicircle about its long axis.9.5. Example 1: Volume of a sphere y f(x k ) x Δx xk Δx Figure 5. ∆x. we have Vk = π[f (xk )]2 ∆x. using the fact that the function f (x) determines the radius.5. we show one disk generated by the revolution of the shaded rectangle. A function that describe a semicircle (i. we show the sphere dissected into a set of disks. Indeed. a diagram is usually quite helpful. The disks are lined up along the x axis with coordinates xk . x1 = −R + ∆x. Some of our examples will involve surfaces revolved about the x axis. so sometimes we may write this as rk = yk = f (xk ) . The volume of the k’th disk is 2 Vk = πrk ∆x.e. and others will be revolved about the y axis. By the above remarks. On the right. These are just integer multiples of the slice thickness ∆x. In setting up these examples.9. the radius of a disk through the x axis at a point xk is speciﬁed by the function rk = f (xk ).. where −R ≤ xk ≤ R.. x0 = −R. y 2 + x2 = R2 ) is y = f (x) = R2 − x2 .) We also pay attention to the dimension that forms the disk thickness.. so for example. the top half of the circle. . xk = −R + k∆x . each of width ∆x. 22 Note that the radius is oriented along the y axis. When the semicircle (on the left) is rotated about the x axis. In Figure 5.
We start the summation at x = −R and end at xN = R since the semicircle extends from x = −R to x = R. we will get a paraboloid. and length 2 Vk = π R2 − x2 k ∆x = π(R2 − x2 )∆x. The volume of each disk is Vdisk = πr2 ∆y. mass. k The total volume of all the disks is V = k Vk = k π[f (xk )]2 ∆x = π k (R2 − x2 )∆x. we arrive at the familiar formula 4 Vsphere = πR3 . This accounts for the dy in the integral below. We often use such symmetry properties to simplify computations.94Chapter 5. −R Observe that this is twice the volume obtained for the interval 0 < x < R. where the radius. k as ∆x → 0. 3 Example 2: Volume of a paraboloid Consider the curve y = f (x) = 1 − x2 . x3 Vsphere = 2π R2 x − 3 R 0 = 2π R3 − R3 3 . This means that the width of each disk is ∆y. Hence disks are stacked up along the y axis to approximate this volume. We compute this integral using the Fundamental Theorem of calculus. . If we rotate this curve about the y axis. Solution The object has the y axis as its axis of symmetry. obtaining x3 Vsphere = π R2 x − 3 R . as shown in Figure 5.10. this sum becomes a deﬁnite integral. Thus R Vsphere = R π[f (xk )]2 dx = π R R (R2 − x2 ) dx. and represents the true volume. Applications of the deﬁnite integral to calculating volume. r is now in the direction parallel to the x axis. Thus we must express radius as r = x = f −1 (y). After simpliﬁcation. In this section we show how to compute the volume by dissecting into disks stacked up along the y axis.
we are guided to write an integral in terms of the variable y. It is helpful to note that once we have identiﬁed the thickness of the disks (∆y). In Appendix 11. i. The radius of a disk at height y is therefore r = x = 1 − y. Thus the volume is 1 1 x V =π 0 [f (y)]2 dy = π 0 [ 1 − y]2 dy. Volumes of solids of revolution 95 y y=f(x)=1−x2 y x Figure 5.5. i. we obtain a bowl shape. (b) about the y axis. However. r = y = f (x).10. dissecting this surface leads to disks stacked along the x axis. one method is preferable to another. In some cases.5. Example 3 Find the volume of the surface formed by rotating the curve y = f (x) = (a) about the x axis. but here either method works equally well. i. From y = 1 − x2 √ have we √ x2 = 1 − y so x = 1 − y. comprised of cylindrical shells to compute the volume of a cone.e. to reformulate the equation describing the curve.e. we invert the relationship to obtain x as a function of y. The curve that generates the shape of a paraboloid (left) and the shape of the paraboloid (right). with radii in the y direction.4 we show yet another method. Solution (a) If we rotate this curve about the x axis. with thickness ∆x → dx. and with x in the range 0 ≤ x ≤ 1.e. We compute 1 V =π 0 (1 − y) dy = π y − y2 2 1 0 =π 1− 1 2 = π . The shape extends from a smallest value of y = 0 up to y = 1. 2 The above example was set up using disks. 0≤x≤1 . The √ x. there are other options.
shown in Figure 5. as shown in Figure 5. The idea of dissection also applies to the problem of determining the length of a curve. 2 (b) When the curve is rotated about the y axis.96Chapter 5. Things are more complicated for “curves” that are not straight lines. We now consider a curve given by some function y = f (x) a < x < b.11. In this section we describe how this can be done using the deﬁnite integral “technology”. and determine the lengths of those segments. In the triangle shown. To obtain these. and radii in the x direction. 5 5.e. ∆y: ∆ ∆ = ∆x2 + ∆y 2 = 2 = ∆x2 + ∆y 2 . but in many cases. and length volume will thus be 1 V =π 0 [f (x)]2 dx = π 0 1 √ [ x]2 dx = π 0 1 x dx = π x2 2 1 = 0 π . it forms a surface with a sharp point at the origin. 1+ ∆y 2 ∆x2 ∆x = 1+ ∆y ∆x 2 ∆x. We must rewrite the function in the form x = g(y) = y 2 . with thickness ∆y → dy. 0 < y < 1 The volume is then 1 V =π 0 [f (y)]2 dy = π 0 1 [y 2 ]2 dy = π 0 1 y 4 dy = π y5 5 1 = 0 π .6 Length of a curve: Arc length Analytic geometry provides a simple way to compute the length of a straight line segment. given points P1 = (x1 . we have selected some step size ∆x along the x axis.11(b). we consider a simple example.12. by the Pythagorean theorem we have the length of the sloped side related as follows to the side lengths ∆x. Applications of the deﬁnite integral to calculating volume. Before we look in detail at this construction. as shown in Figure 5. we see the general idea of subdividing a curve into many small “arcs”. y2 ). we are interested in calculating the length of such curves. y1 ) and P2 = (x2 . mass. (The total length 23 The reader should recall that this formula is a simple application of Pythagorean theorem. The disks are stacked along the y axis. We will approximate this curve by a set of line segments. and placed points on the curve at each of these x values. . based on the distance formula23. the length of the line joining those points is d= (x2 − x1 )2 + (y2 − y1 )2 . i. We connect the points with straight line segments.11(a). In Figure 5. We now use the interval along the y axis. Recall that.
Bottom: a small part of this graph is shown. Top: Given the graph of a function.) We show one such segment enlarged in the circular inset in Figure 5.11. but as the subdivision gets ﬁner and ﬁner. y = f (x) (at left). to illustrate the relationship between the arc length and the length of the secant line segment. above. we draw secant lines connecting points on its graph at values of x that are multiples of ∆x (right). and then enlarged.11. Its slope. According to our remarks. y Δl Δx x Figure 5. Δy of the segments is only an approximation of the length of the curve. Length of a curve: Arc length 97 y y=f(x) y y=f(x) y x x y=f(x) Δy Δx x Figure 5. we will arrive at the true total length of the curve. The basic idea of arclength is to add up lengths ∆l of small line segments that approximate the curve.12. the length of this .6.5. shown at right is given by ∆y/∆x.
We get L= Example 2 Find an integral that represents the length of the curve that forms the graph of the function y = f (x) = x3 . As the step size is made smaller and smaller ∆x → dx. . dy/dx. adding up) these small pieces. mass. √ 5 1 5 dx = √ 5x 5 = 1 √ √ 5[5 − 1] = 4 5. Solution We could ﬁnd the equation of the line and use the distance formula. the length of the entire curve is obtained from summing (i. dx 1 < x < 2. i.4) Example 1 Find the length of a line whose slope is −2 given that the line extends from x = 1 to x = 5. If our curve is given by a function y = f (x) then we can rewrite this as d = 1 + (f (x)) dx. ∆y → dy and ∆ → 1+ dy dx 2 dx.e.98Chapter 5. Applications of the deﬁnite integral to calculating volume. and length segment is given by ∆ = 1+ ∆y ∆x 2 ∆x.4): we are given that the slope f (x) is 2. 2 (5. But for the purpose of this example. We recognize the ratio inside the square root as as the derivative. we apply the method of Equation (5. Solution We ﬁnd that dy = f (x) = 3x2 . The integral in question is 5 5 1 L= 1 1 + (f (x))2 dx = 1 1 + (−2)2 dx = 5 √ 5 dx.e. 2 Thus. b L= a 1 + (f (x)) dx.
Length of a curve: Arc length Thus. Let us choose a step size of ∆x = 0. We calculate the function. In Figure 5. compute the length of each segment ∆ = 1 + (∆y/∆x)2 ∆x and the accumulated length along the curve from left to right. ﬁnally the total length L. and their lengths are thus bigger. the cumulative sum. This function represents the total arclength of the curve y = 1 − x2 . In Figure 5. now that we know the idea behind determining the length of a curve. The segments on the right part of the curve are much more sloped.13(a) we show the actual curve y = 1 − x2 .1 How the alligator gets its smile The American alligator. simply because their antiderivatives are difﬁcult to determine. so their length is very close to ∆x. The ﬁnal value of L = 1.6 shows steps in the calculation of the ratio ∆y/∆x. At this point.1 along the x axis.e. we show (in blue) how the lengths of the little straightline segments connecting these points changes across the interval. and from this. for the interval 0 ≤ x ≤ 1.5. Alligator mississippiensis has a set of teeth best viewed at some distance. and.6. i. 5. We will concern ourselves here with how that pattern of teeth is formed as the alligator develops from its embryonic stage to that of an . L which is just a sum of such values. we can apply the ideas developed have to approximate the length of a curve “numerically”. However. The Table 5. The spreadsheet is a simple tool for doing the necessary summations. we show here how to calculate the length of the curve y = f (x) = 1 − x2 for 0 ≤ x ≤ 1 using a simple numerical procedure implemented on the spreadsheet.13(b). The regular arrangement of these teeth.4782 represents the total length of the curve over the entire interval 0 < x < 1. as it has added up the full length of the curve for 0 ≤ x ≤ 1. the value of ∆ .) We also show (in red) how the total accumulated length L depends on the position x across the interval. Using the spreadsheet to calculate arclength Most integrals for arclength contain square roots and functions that are not easy to integrate. As an example. At x = 1 this function returns the value y = L. from x = 0 up to a given x value. we will not attempt to ﬁnd the actual length. the slopes of the little segments (change in y divided by change in x). (The segments on the left along the original curve are nearly ﬂat. as we must ﬁrst develop tech√ niques for ﬁnding the antiderivative for functions such as 1 + 9x4 .6. the integral is 2 2 99 L= 1 1 + (3x2 )2 dx = 1 1 + 9x4 dx. their spacing along the jaw is important in giving the reptile its famous bite. with points placed on it at each multiple of ∆x.
0 1.0 1. and hence to calculate arclength.0 1. and length 1.100Chapter 5. together with the length increment and the cumulative arclength along that curve.0 0.5 Arc Length cumulative length L y = f(x) =1x^2 length increment 0. mass. . Applications of the deﬁnite integral to calculating volume.5 y = f(x) =1x^2 0.0 0.13. The spreadsheet can be used to compute approximate values of integrals. Shown here is the graph of the function y = f (x) = 1 − x2 for 0 ≤ x ≤ 1.0 Figure 5.
Of interest in his research were several questions.2049 0. there is a sequence of initiation of teeth. In the development of the baby alligator.7500 0. In Figure 5.1 1. Paul Kulesa.3 1. 0 y = f (x) 1.9 1.0000 0. A close up of its smile (at an earlier stage of development) reveals the shape of the jaw.7 1.9 1.5 0.1 ∆ 0.1.3 0. the teeth on an alligator do not form or sprout simultaneously. a tooth will start to initiate. (One of these sites. adult.14 is a smiling baby alligator (no doubt thinking of some future tasty meal).0000 0. at welldeﬁned positions along the jaw.7220 0.1345 0.2326 L= ∆ 0.3600 0.2147 0.7 0.5. and what mechanisms lead to this pattern of initiation. A proper choice of coordinate system. called primordia. Shown in Figure 5. a former student of James D Muray.8860 1. One theory proposed by this group was that chemical signals that diffuse along the jaw at an early stage of development give rise to instructions that are interpreted by jaw cells: where the signal is at a high level.4782 Table 5.1803 0. and some experimentation leads to the equation of the best ﬁt parabola y = f (x) = −ax2 + b where a = 0. and b = 7.4388 0.5100 0.9900 0.3 0. but we have here superimposed the function L(x) given by the arc length along the .9600 0.1118 0.9100 0.8 0.4 0. For the function y = f (x) = 1 − x2 .28 (in units not speciﬁed).1972 0. 0 0. together with the sites at which teeth are becoming evident.0000 ∆y/∆x 0.5 0. is shown enlarged in an inset in this ﬁgure.256.1005 0.9 2. We show this curve in Figure 5.5733 0.) Paul Kulesa found that the shape of the alligator’s jaw can be described remarkably well by a parabola.3167 0. Also shown in this curve is a set of points at which teeth are found.0663 1. we will ﬁnd a simple application of the ideas of arclength in the developmental sequence of teething.8400 0.1640 0.1 0.1900 0.7 0.1487 0.5 1.15(a). set out to understand the pattern of development of these teeth.1221 0.2635 1. Length of a curve: Arc length 101 x 0. we show how to calculate an approximation to the arclength using the spreadsheet. based on data in the literature about what happens at distinct stages of embryonic growth.1005 0. including what determines the positions and timing of initiation of individual teeth.6400 0.6 0. and 0 ≤ x ≤ 1.6.15(b) we see the same curve. one after the other.1044 0.2 0. While we will not address the details of the mechanism of development here. As is the case in humans.1 0. labelled by order of appearance.
80 5. y) coordinates.95 5.7000 7.00 3. Data for the appearance of teeth. Each wave forms a linear pattern of distance from the front. x L(x) = 0 1 + [f (s)]2 ds.40 1. the top of the parabola).80 2.15(c). (By equally spaced.3923 7.50 3. where we illustrate only the essential idea of arc length application.1486 4. showing the order of the teeth. and each successive wave ﬁlls in the gaps in a similar. and length curve from the front of the jaw (i.60 0. 5. from front to back.4000 3. or along the curve of the jaw can be determined using this curve if we know the x coordinates of their positions.3705 0.102Chapter 5.2052 5. and so on.4241 4. Rather.e. The table below gives the original data. their (x. courtesy of Dr. Tooth number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 position x 1. Kulesa.35 2.60 3. equally spaced pattern.00 4.e.35 4. and the value of L(x) obtained from the arclength formula. We see from this table that the teeth do not appear randomly.2. nor do they ﬁll in the jaw in one sweep.40 2. we show the pattern of appearance: Plotting the distance along the jaw of successive teeth reveals that the teeth appear in waves of nearly equallyspaced sites. The distances of the teeth from one another.45 4. mass. 2.6072 4.) The ﬁrst wave (teeth 1.30 y 6. we refer to distance along the parabolic jaw.2644 Table 5. This curve measures distance along the jaw.65 7.05 0. in the order in which they appear as the alligator develops.1189 1. they appear in several stages. . We can use arclength computations to determine the distances between successive teeth. 7).95 3.45 5. The true situation is a bit more complicated: the jaw grows as the teeth appear as shown in 5.45 distance along jaw L(x) 2.20 1.15(c).15 4.4884 8. Applications of the deﬁnite integral to calculating volume.54 1. 6.1500 6.60 3. i.25 4. 3) are followed by a second wave (4.05 6. This has not been taken into account in our simple treatment here. In Figure 5.15 4.6572 9.
6. Alligator mississippiensis and its teeth . Length of a curve: Arc length 103 Figure 5.14.5.
(a) The parabolic shape of the jaw.104Chapter 5.0 6.0 6.0 4 1 arc length L(x) along jaw jaw y = f(x) 5 2 8 12 6 9 3 10 7 13 0. showing positions of teeth and numerical order of emergence.0 0. mass. (c) Distance of successive teeth along the jaw.15.0 (b) 13 7 Distance along jaw 3 9 10 6 2 8 5 12 1 4 0. (b) Arc length along the jaw from front to back. and length 8. Applications of the deﬁnite integral to calculating volume.0 0.0 (c) (d) Figure 5.0 5.0 Alligator teeth 11 10.5 (a) 10. (d) Growth of the jaw. .0 0.0 teeth in order of appearance 11 13.
Faraday Trans. In this chapter. On A Dynamic ReactionDiffusion Mechanism for the Spatial Patterning of Teeth Primordia in the Alligator. Kulesa.W. . The mean and median are the same only in symmetric distributions. Modelling the Spatial Patterning of Teeth Primordia in the Alligator. whereas the median is the x coordinate that splits the distribution into two equal masses (Geometrically. Lubkin. Cover Article.D. 153164. 5. 2. S. We deﬁned a cumulative function.6. Chem.M.C.] 3. P.M. whereas the analogous quantities in (5.2 References 1. [Recall that ρ(x) is a mass per unit length in the case of mass distributed along a bar or straight line. we deﬁned the center of mass of a (discrete) distribution of n masses by n 1 ¯ xi mi . Kulesa and J. the quantities mi in the sum (5. this was deﬁned as In the continuous case. it is x M (x) = 0 ρ(s)ds. We introduced the idea of a spatially distributed mass density ρ(x) in Section 5.5) X= M i=0 We developed the analogue of this for a continuous mass distribution (distributed in the interval 0 ≤ x ≤ L).6) M 0 Importantly.7. Vol.2..5) carry units of mass. Murray (1995). 2. the median subdivides the graph of the distribution into two regions of equal areas).6) are ρ(x)dx..R. P. Ferguson and J.D.5. Summary 105 5. Modelling the Wavelike Initiation of Teeth Primordia in the Alligator. 259280. The mean is an average x coordinate. 3. 44. J. Soc. 92 (16). The mean (but not the median) is inﬂuenced more strongly by distant portions of the distribution. Journal of Chemical Physics. Kulesa (1996).2. No. (5.7 Summary Here are the main points of the chapter: 1. We deﬁned the center of mass of a continuous distribution by the deﬁnite integral L 1 x= ¯ xρ(x)dx .D. 4.J. They differ for any distribution that is asymmetric. In the discrete case. Acta Biotheoretica.M. G. (5. Murray and P. Murray (1996). Cruywagen. 3. J. Here the deﬁnite integral represents b a ρ(x) dx = Total mass in the interval a ≤ x ≤ b. 29272932. M. 10. FORMA.
we showed how to compute volumes of various objects that have radial symmetry (“solids of revolution”). then its volume can be described by an integral of the form b V = a π[f (x)]2 dx. . We used this idea to show that the volume of a sphere of radius R is Vsphere = (4/3)πR3 In the Chapters 7 and 8. we ﬁnd applications of the ideas of density and center of mass to the context of a probability distribution and its mean. In the later parts of this chapter.106Chapter 5. and length 5. Applications of the deﬁnite integral to calculating volume. We showed that if the surface is generated by rotating the graph of a function y = f (x) about the x axis (for a ≤ x ≤ b). mass.
Recall that the slope of the line. A second very important method is integration by parts. A review of the table of elementary antiderivatives (found in Chapter 3) will be useful. Many other techniques of integration used to form a core of methods taught in such courses in integral calculus. this method has numerous applications in physics. Here we will discuss a number of methods for ﬁnding antiderivatives. these methods are systematic (i. 6. m. differential notation. Aside from its usefulness in integration per se. As will be shown. whereas in other cases. integration can be carried our automatically via computation called “symbolic manipulation”.e. with clear steps). we expand our repertoire for antiderivatives beyond the “elementary” functions discussed so far. mathematics. i. A primary method of integration to be described is substitution.1 Differential notation We begin by familiarizing the reader with notation that appears frequently in substitution integrals. 107 . change in x ∆x This relationship can also be written in the form ∆y = m∆x. reducing our need to dwell on these technical methods. guesswork and trial and error is an important part of the process. and other sciences. A close relationship exists between the chain rule of differential calculus and the substitution method. in some cases. Consider a straight line y = mx + b.e.Chapter 6 Techniques of Integration In this chapter. Many of these are quite technical. with sophisticated mathematical software packages (including Maple and Mathematica). We refer to these collected “tricks” as methods of integration. is m= change in y ∆y = . Nowadays.
in contrast with the relationship of ∆y and ∆x which stems from the slope of the secant line ms on the same curve. (call it dy) is related by dy = m dx. The relationship between the step y+Δ y y secant y+dy y tangent y=f(x) x x+ Δx x x+dx Figure 6. a step ∆x in the x direction is associated with a step ∆y in the y direction.For a given point (x. Note that these are related via the slope of a tangent line. y) on this curve. mt as shown in Figure 6. call it dx (to remind us of an “inﬁnitesimally small” quantity).2 i. Now suppose that we have a curve deﬁned by some arbitrary function. If we take a very small step along this line in the x direction. where now ms is the slope of a secant line (shown connecting two points on the curve in Figure 6. y = f (x) which need not be a straight line. then the resulting change in the y direction. mt to the curve. dy = mt dx = f (x)dx.108 Chapter 6. On this ﬁgure. sizes is: ∆y = ms ∆x.e. . If the sizes of the steps are small (dx and dy).1. the graph of some function is used to illustrate the connection between differentials dy and dx. The slope of the line shown here is m = ∆y/∆x.2. then this relationship is well approximated by the slope of the tangent line. Techniques of Integration y Δy Δx x Figure 6. This means that the small quantities ∆y and ∆x are related by ∆y = m∆x.2).
6. we can omit the intermediate step of writing down a derivative and go directly from function to differential notation. and the differential notation that goes with them. The following examples illustrate this idea with speciﬁc functions. i. that the derivative is actually deﬁned as a limit: f (x) = lim ∆x→0 ∆y . their derivatives. Examples We give some examples of functions. it is approximately true that ∆y dy ≈ . 1 + x2 Moreover. dx appears to link our result to the deﬁnition of the derivative. d(xn ) = nxn−1 dx. 2. 1.1.e. We remember. ∆x When the step size ∆x is quite small. 3. they link a small step on the x axis with the resulting small change in height along the tangent line to the curve (shown in Figure 6. d(arctan(x)) = 1 dx. Therefore dy = sec2 (x) dx. we use just the symbol df to mean the same thing. The function y = f (x) = ln(x) has derivative f (x) = dy = 1 dx. dy = f (x). The function y = f (x) = tan(x) has derivative f (x) = sec2 (x). We might observe that the ratio of the differentials. We give a list of some of these elementary rules below. Given a function y = f (x) we will often write df df (x) = dx dx and occasionally. d(sin(x)) = cos(x) dx. The function y = f (x) = x3 has derivative f (x) = 3x2 .2). In general. Thus dy = 3x2 dx. ∆x dx This notation will be useful in substitution integrals. x 1 x so With some practice. some of the basic rules of differentiation translate directly into rules for handling and manipulating differentials. . Differential notation 109 The quantities dx and dy are called differentials. though.
4. namely an antiderivative. This notation is sometimes called “an indeﬁnite integral” because it does not denote a speciﬁc numerical value. which means the same thing. we deﬁned the concept of the deﬁnite integral. nor is an interval speciﬁed for the integration range. An indeﬁnite . 3. In another terminology. say f (x). d(uv) = u dv + v du. that any two antiderivatives differ at most by a constant.2 Antidifferentiation and indeﬁnite integrals In Chapters 2 and 3. It will be useful here to consider the idea of an indeﬁnite integral. dx dx d (F (x) − G(x)) = 0. dC = 0. Proof Since F (x) and G(x) have the same derivative. that is F (x) = G(x) + C. and we refer to f (x) as the integrand. as required. and this conﬁrms. have the same derivative. then they differ at most by a constant. F (x) and G(x). we also say that F (x) (or G(x)) is the integral of the function f (x).110 Chapter 6. so F (x) = G(x) + C. If two functions. 1. d du dv (u(x) + v(x)) = + dx dx dx d dv du u(x)v(x) = u +v dx dx dx d du (Cu(x)) = C . we have d d F (x) = G(x). dx 2. dx This means that the function F (x) − G(x) should be a constant. d(Cu) = C du 6. which represents a number. We write this as follows: F (x) = f (x) dx. dx dx d d F (x) − G(x) = 0. which is a function. F (x) and G(x) are called antiderivatives of f (x). since its derivative is zero. Techniques of Integration Rules for derivatives and differentials d C = 0. dx dx d(u + v) = du + dv. Thus F (x) − G(x) = C. once more. where C is some constant.
1 Integrals of derivatives Suppose we are given an integral of the form df dx.) We also write f (x) dx = F (x) + C. a number. C is referred to as a constant of integration. dx We can write this same result using the differential of f . df. That means that f (x) is the antiderivative of df /dx. and using our familiarity with derivatives (and the chain rule). The df /dx (a quantity that is. 6. dx or alternately. according to the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus. How do we handle this? We reason as follows. Examples 1. we speciﬁed an interval. The following examples illustrate the idea with several elementary functions. (Contrast this with the deﬁnite integral studied in our last chapters: in the case of the deﬁnite integral. as follows: df = f (x) + C. . if we want to indicate the form of all possible functions that are antiderivatives of f (x).2.6. itself. Simple substitution 111 integral is a function with an arbitrary constant. df dx = f (x) + C. Then. 2. we observe that the forms of some integrals can be simpliﬁed by making a judicious substitution. in terms of areas associated with curves. the same thing written using differential notation. a function) is the derivative of the function f (x). d(x3 ) = x3 + C. The idea rests on the fact that in some cases. 6. and interpreted the result. we can spot a “helper function” u = f (x).3 Simple substitution In this section. d(cos x) = cos x + C.3. 3. dv = v + C.
11 11 In the last step. and simpliﬁcation may occur. that if we deﬁne u = (x + 1). Techniques of Integration du = f (x)dx appears in the integrand. F (x) = u11 (x + 1)11 = + C. and included the arbitrary integration constant. We could ﬁnd an antiderivative by expanding the integrand (x + 1)10 into a degree 10 polynomial and using methods already known to us. but this would be laborious. In that case. Now replacing (x + 1) by u and dx by the equivalent du we get: F (x) = u10 du. Then its antiderivative (indeﬁnite integral) is F (x) = f (x) dx = (x + 1)10 dx. we converted the result back to the original variable. the substitution will lead to eliminating x entirely in favour of the new quantity u.112 such that the quantity Chapter 6. Let us observe. then du = d(x + 1) dx = dx dx d(1) + dx dx dx = (1 + 0)dx = dx. however.1 Example: Simple substitution Suppose we are given the function f (x) = (x + 1)10 . namely. A very important point to remember is that we can always check our results by differentiation: Check Differentiate F (x) to obtain dF 1 = (11(x + 1)10 ) = (x + 1)10 . dx 11 .3. 6. An antiderivative to this can be easily found.
I = 0 2 dx. I = 1 dx.3. x+1 This integration can be done by making the substitution u = x + 1 for which du = dx. 6.3. x+2 1 x2 ex dx 3 3. 2 In the last steps we have plugged in the new endpoints (appropriate to u). (x + 1)2 + 1 .3. We can handle the endpoints in one of two ways: Method 1: Change the endpoints We can change the integral over entirely to a deﬁnite integral in the variable u as follows: Since u = x + 1. 1 du = ln u = ln x + 1 u and then evaluate this function at the original endpoints. Consider the example: 2 I= 1 1 dx . Method 2: Change back to x before evaluating at endpoints Alternately. so changing the endpoints to reﬂect the change of variables leads to 3 I= 2 1 du = ln u u 3 2 3 = ln 3 − ln 2 = ln . I = 2. Simple substitution 113 6. in evaluating deﬁnite integrals. and the endpoint x = 2 corresponds to u = 3. we could rewrite the antiderivative in terms of x. i.3 Examples: Substitution type integrals Find a simple substitution and determine the antiderivatives (indeﬁnite or deﬁnite integrals) of the following functions: 1. 2 1 1 dx = ln x + 1 x+1 2 = ln 1 3 2 Here we plugged in the original endpoints (as appropriate to the variable x).2 How to handle endpoints We consider how substitution type integrals can be calculated when we have endpoints. the endpoint x = 1 corresponds to u = 2.6.e.
6. b + ax2 2 dx. Then du = (2x + 6) dx = √ du 1 u = 2 2 π 2(x + 3) dx.) x2 ex dx = 3. Let u = x2 + 6x + 10. before plugging in the original endpoints. Here we use I= 1 u3 (−du) = − u4 4 −1 1 1 = − ((−1)4 − 14 ) = 0. Techniques of Integration (x + 3) x2 + 6x + 10 dx. x. I = 5. 3 3 3 3 3 handling endpoints. 4 . Here we use method 2 for eu du 1 1 3 = eu = ex + C. I = 7. Let u = x + 1. u 2. 3 3 0 0 (We converted the antiderivative to the original variable. I = 1 du = arctan(u) = arctan(x + 1) + C. Then du = 3x2 dx. u2 + 1 1 1 (x + 3) x2 + 6x + 10 dx. I = 0 x2 ex dx. With this substitution we get I= 5. I = 0 Chapter 6. Let u = x3 . I = Solutions 1. Then du = − sin(x) dx. then du = dx so we have (x + 1)2 + 1 I= 4. For x = 0. Then du = dx and we get x+2 I= 1 2 du = 2 u 1 du = 2 ln u = 2 ln x + 2 + C.114 4. u = cos 0 = 1 and for x = π. u = cos π = −1. I = 0 u1/2 du = 1 u3/2 1 1 = u3/2 = (x2 + 6x + 10)3/2 + C. Let u = cos(x). I = 1 dx. Then I= 1 1 x3 e = (e − 1). so changing the integral and endpoints to u leads to −1 cos3 (x) sin(x) dx. 2 3/2 3 3 method 1 for handling endpoints. I = 1 dx ax + b 1 dx. Let u = x + 2. π cos3 (x) sin(x) dx.
so dx = du/a. Substitute the ax + b above equations into the ﬁrst equation and simplify to get I= 1 du 1 = u a a 1 1 du = lnu + C. we get I= 1 b 1 1 + u2 du a/b = b/a 1 b 1 du 1 + u2 1 1 I = √ arctan(u) du = √ arctan( a/b x) + C. and dx = du/2x.4 When simple substitution fails Not every integral can be handled by simple substitution.3. so u = a/b x and du = a/b dx. Simple substitution Here we plugged in the new endpoints that are relevant to the variable u.6.3. 6. Then du = a dx. so the expression obtained contains a mixture of two variables. Let u = ax + b. This can be brought to the form of 2 b + ax b 1 + (a/b)x2 an arctan type integral as follows: Let u2 = (a/b)x2 . I= u 2x We have not succeeded in eliminating x entirely. ba ba 6. This substitution did not simplify the integral and we must try some other technique. Attempting to convert the integral to the form containing u would lead to √ du . Now substituting these. Then du = 2x dx. Let us see what could go wrong: Example: Substitution that does not work Consider the case F (x) = 1 + x2 dx = (1 + x2 )1/2 dx. A “reasonable” guess for substitution might be u = (1 + x2 ). u a Substitute u = ax + b back to arrive at the solution I= 1 1 dx = ln ax + b ax + b a (6. I = 1 1 1 dx = dx. 115 1 dx.1) 7. . We can proceed no further.
rearrangement is needed before the form of an integral becomes apparent. 1 + u2 However. u un du = un+1 . suppose that (in the previous example) we had incorrectly guessed that the antiderivative of (1 + x2 )1/2 dx 1 (1 + x2 )3/2 . 6.4. n+1 1 du = arctan(u) + C.5 Checking your answer Finding an antiderivative can be tricky. and recognition of patterns plays an important role here. since an “extra” factor of 2x appears from application of the chain rule: this means that the trial function Fguess (x) was not the correct antiderivative.) might be 6. For example. 3/2 The following check demonstrates the incorrectness of this guess: Differentiate Fguess (x) to obtain 1 Fguess (x) = (3/2)(1 + x2 )(3/2)−1 · 2x = (1 + x2 )1/2 · 2x 3/2 Fguess (x) = The result is clearly not the same as (1 + x2 )1/2 . We give some examples in this section. methods described in this chapter are a “collection of tricks”.116 Chapter 6. − 6x + 9 .4 More substitutions In some cases.3. Integration tends to be more of an art than differentiation. by differentiating the result. This can help uncover errors. Techniques of Integration 6. I = 1 du = ln u + C. I = 3. Standard integral forms 1. (To a large extent. The idea is to reduce each one to the form of an elementary integral. it is always possible (and wise) to check for correctness. This can help to uncover sign errors and other algebraic mistakes. I = 2.) However.1 Example: perfect square in denominator Find the antiderivative for I= x2 1 dx. whose antiderivative is known. (We can similarly check to conﬁrm correctness of any antiderivative found by following steps of methods here described. ﬁnding which of these forms is appropriate in a given case will take some ingenuity and algebra skills.
Replacing this in the integral. as shown by this example: 1 dx. 6.3 Eqn.e.4.4. More substitutions Solution 117 We observe that the denominator of the integrand is a perfect square. Consider I= 1 dx. (1 − x)(1 + x) . and du = dx leads to a power type integral I= 1 du = u2 u−2 du = −u−1 = − 1 + C. we can factor the denominator to obtain I= 1 dx.2 Example: completing the square A small change in the denominator will change the character of the integral. 1 + u2 Remark: in cases where completing the square gives rise to a constant other than 1 in the denominator. (x − 3)2 Now making the substitution u = (x − 3). 1 − x2 In this case.6. i.3 Example: factoring the denominator A change in one sign can also lead to a drastic change in the antiderivative.4. we use the technique illustrated in Example 6. that x2 − 6x+ 9 = (x − 3)2 . (x − 3) 6. we obtain I= 1 dx = x2 − 6x + 9 1 dx.1) to simplify the problem. 1 + (x − 3)2 Now a substitution u = (x − 3) and du = dx will result in I= 1 du = arctan(u) = arctan(x − 3) + C. (6. Then the integral takes the form I= 1 dx. I= x2 − 6x + 10 Solution Here we use “completing the square” to express the denominator in the form x2 −6x+10 = (x − 3)2 + 1.3.
118
Chapter 6. Techniques of Integration
where A, B are constants. The algebraic technique for ﬁnding these constants, and hence of forming the simpler expressions, called Partial fractions, will be discussed in an upcoming section. Once these constants are found, each of the resulting integrals can be handled by substitution.
We will show shortly that the integrand can be simpliﬁed to the sum of two fractions, i.e. that A B 1 dx = + dx, I= (1 − x)(1 + x) (1 − x) (1 + x)
6.5 Trigonometric substitutions
Trigonometric functions provide a rich set of interconnected functions that show up in many problems. It is useful to remember three very important trigonometric identities that help to simplify many integrals. These are: Essential trigonometric identities 1. sin2 (x) + cos2 (x) = 1 2. sin(A + B) = sin(A) cos(B) + sin(B) cos(A) 3. cos(A + B) = cos(A) cos(B) − sin(A) sin(B). In the special case that A = B = x, the last two identities above lead to: Double angle trigonometric identities 1. sin(2x) = 2 sin(x) cos(x). 2. cos(2x) = cos2 (x) − sin2 (x). From these, we can generate a variety of other identities as special cases. We list the most useful below. The ﬁrst two are obtained by combining the doubleangle formula for cosines with the identity sin2 (x) + cos2 (x) = 1. Useful trigonometric identities 1. cos2 (x) = 2. sin2 (x) = 1 + cos(2x) . 2 1 − cos(2x) . 2
3. tan2 (x) + 1 = sec2 (x).
6.5.1 Example: simple trigonometric substitution
Find the antiderivative of I= sin(x) cos2 (x) dx.
6.5. Trigonometric substitutions Solution
119
This integral can be computed by a simple substitution, similar to Example 5 of Section 6.3. We let u = cos(x) and du = − sin(x)dx to get the integral into the form I =− u2 du = − cos3 (x) −u3 = + C. 3 3
We need none of the trigonometric identities in this case. Simple substitution is always the easiest method to use. It should be the ﬁrst method attempted in each case.
6.5.2 Example: using trigonometric identities (1)
Find the antiderivative of I= Solution This is an example in which the “Useful trigonometric identity” 1 leads to a simpler integral. We write I= Then clearly, I= 1 2 x+ sin(2x) 2 + C. cos2 (x) dx = 1 + cos(2x) 1 dx = 2 2 (1 + cos(2x)) dx. cos2 (x) dx.
6.5.3 Example: using trigonometric identities (2)
Find the antiderivative of I= Solution We can rewrite this integral in the form I= sin2 (x) sin(x) dx. sin3 (x) dx.
Now using the trigonometric identity sin2 (x) + cos2 (x) = 1, leads to I= This can be split up into I= sin(x) dx − sin(x) cos2 (x) dx. (1 − cos2 (x)) sin(x) dx.
120
Chapter 6. Techniques of Integration
The ﬁrst part is elementary, and the second was shown in a previous example. Therefore we end up with cos3 (x) I = − cos(x) + + C. 3 Note that it is customary to combine all constants obtained in the calculation into a single constant, C at the end. Aside from integrals that, themselves, contain trigonometric functions, there are other cases in which use of trigonometric identities, though at ﬁrst seemingly √ unrelated, is cru√ cial. Many expressions involving the form 1 ± x2 or the related form a ± bx2 will be simpliﬁed eventually by conversion to trigonometric expressions!
6.5.4 Example: converting to trigonometric functions
Find the antiderivative of I= Solution The simple substitution u = 1 − x2 will not work, (as shown by a similar example in Section 6.3). However, converting to trigonometric expressions will do the trick. Let x = sin(u), then dx = cos(u)du. 1 − x2 dx.
(In Figure 6.3, we show this relationship on a triangle. This diagram is useful in reversing the substitutions after the integration step.) Then 1 − x2 = 1 − sin2 (u) = cos2 (u), so the
1 u 1−x 2
x
Figure 6.3. This triangle helps to convert the (trigonometric) functions of u to the original variable x in Example 6.5.4. substitutions lead to I= cos2 (u) cos(u) du = cos2 (u) du.
From a previous example, we already know how to handle this integral. We ﬁnd that I= 1 2 u+ sin(2u) 2 = 1 (u + sin(u) cos(u)) + C. 2
6.5. Trigonometric substitutions
121
(In the last step, we have used the double angle trigonometric identity. We will shortly see why this simpliﬁcation is relevant.) We now desire to convert the result back to a function of the original variable, x. We note that x = sin(u) implies u = arcsin(x). To convert the term cos(u) back to an expression depending on x we can use the relationship 1 − sin2 (u) = cos2 (u), to deduce that cos(u) = 1 − sin2 (u) = 1 − x2 .
It is sometimes helpful to use a Pythagorean triangle, as shown in Figure 6.3, to rewrite the antiderivative in terms of the variable x. The idea is this: We construct the triangle in such a way that its side lengths are related to the “angle” u according to the substitution rule. In this example, x = sin(u) so the sides labeled x and 1 were chosen so that their ratio (“opposite over hypotenuse” coincides with the sine of the indicated angle, u, thereby satisfying x = sin(u). We can then determine the length of the third leg of the triangle (using the Pythagorean formula) and thus all other trigonometric functions of u. For example, we note that the ratio of “adjacent over hypotenuse” is cos(u) = √ √ 1 − x2 /1 = 1 − x2 . Finally, with these reverse substitutions, we ﬁnd that, I= 1 − x2 dx = 1 arcsin(x) + x 1 − x2 + C. 2
Remark: In computing a deﬁnite integral of the same type, we can circumvent the need for the conversion back to an expression involving x by using the appropriate method for handling endpoints. For example, the integral
1
I=
0
1 − x2 dx
can be transformed to
π/2
I=
0
cos2 (u) cos(u) du,
by observing that x = sin(u) implies that u = 0 when x = 0 and u = π/2 when x = 1. Then this means that the integral can be evaluated directly (without changing back to the variable x) as follows:
π/2
I=
0
cos2 (u) cos(u) du =
1 2
u+
sin(2u) 2
π/2
=
0
1 2
π sin(π) + 2 2
=
π 4
where we have used the fact that sin(π) = 0. Some subtle points about the domains of deﬁnition of inverse trigonometric functions will not be discussed here in detail. (See material on these functions in a ﬁrst term calculus course.) Sufﬁce it to say that some integrals of this type will be undeﬁned if this endpoint conversion cannot be carried out (e.g. if the interval of integration had been 0 ≤ x ≤ 2, we would encounter an impossible relation 2 = sin(u). Since no value of u satisﬁes this relation, such a deﬁnite integral has no meaning, i.e. “does not exist”.)
122
Chapter 6. Techniques of Integration
6.5.5 Example: The centroid of a two dimensional shape
We extend the concept of centroid (center of mass) for a region that has uniform density in 2D, but where we consider the distribution of mass along the x (or y) axis. Consider the semicircle shape of uniform thickness, shown in Figure 6.4, and suppose it is balanced along its horizontal edge. Find the x coordinate c at which the shape balances. ¯
y y= 9 − x 2
x
Figure 6.4. A semicircular shape.
Solution The semicircle is one quarter of a circle of radius 3. Its edge is described by the equation y = f (x) = 9 − x2 .
We will assume that the density per unit area is uniform. However, the mass per unit length along the x axis is not uniform, due to the shape of the object. We apply the idea of integration: If we cut the shape at increments of ∆x along the x axis, we get a collection of pieces whose mass is each proportional to f (x)∆x. Summing up such contributions and letting the widths ∆x → dx get small, we arrive at the integral for mass. The total mass of the shape is thus
3 3
M=
0
f (x) dx =
0
9 − x2 dx.
Furthermore, if we compute the integral
3 3
I=
0
xf (x) dx =
0
x 9 − x2 dx,
we obtain the x coordinate of the center of mass, x= ¯ I . M
It is evident that the mass is proportional to the area of one quarter of a circle of radius 3: M= 1 9 π(3)2 = π. 4 4
Thus.6 Example: tan and sec substitution Find the antiderivative of I= Solution We aim for simpliﬁcation by the identity 1 + tan2 (u) = sec2 (u).5. dx = sec2 (u)du. based on this similarity ¯ (or based on the symmetry of the problem) we will ﬁnd that y= ¯ 4 . Then du = −2x dx. so x = f (y) = 3 y= ¯ 0 y 9 − y 2 dy. Thus the x coordinate of the center of mass is I 9 4 x= ¯ = = . Trigonometric substitutions 123 (We could also see this by performing a trigonometric substitution integral. M (9/4)π π We can similarly ﬁnd the y coordinate of the center of mass: To do so. we would express the boundary of the shape in the form x = f (y) and integrate to ﬁnd 3 y= ¯ 0 yf (y) dy. Consider 3 3 I= 0 xf (x) dx = 0 x 9 − x2 dx. Thus For the semicircle. 9 − y 2 . we get I = (33 )/3 = 32 = 9.) The second integral can be done by simple substitution. y 2 + x2 = 9.6. 1 + x2 dx. 0 Since 93/2 = (91/2 )3 = 33 . −2 1 2 u3/2 3/2 9 We can reverse the endpoints if we switch the sign. Let u = 9 − x2 . so we set x = tan(u). and this leads to I= 1 2 9 u1/2 du = 0 . . π 6. The endpoints are converted as follows: x = 0 ⇒ u = 9 − 02 = 9 and x = 3 ⇒ u = 9 − 32 = 0 so that we get the integral 0 I= 9 √ 1 u du.5. This integral looks identical to the one we wrote down for x.
We give several examples below. and will be partly calculated by Integration by Parts in Appendix 11. Eqn. This integral will require further work. suggests breaking up the integrand into the form A B 1 = + .1).3 but for example 6.6. 6.1 Example: partial fractions (1) Find the antiderivative of I= x2 1 . 6. 1+x 2 u 1 x Figure 6. −1 Factoring the denominator.6 Partial fractions In this section. 2−1 x (x + 1) (x − 1) .3. Techniques of Integration sec2 (u) sec2 (u) du = sec3 (u) du. B such that A B 1 = + .124 Then the substitution leads to I= 1 + tan2 (u) sec2 (u) du = Chapter 6.5 shows the relationship between x and u and will help to convert other trigonometric functions of u to functions of x.5. (ax + b)(cx + d) The idea is to break this up into simpler rational expressions by ﬁnding constants A.3. x2 − 1 = (x − 1)(x + 1). as shown in Example 6.6. (6. (ax + b)(cx + d) (ax + b) (cx + d) Each part can then be handled by a simple substitution.5. As in Figure 6. In this example. the triangle shown in Figure 6. we show a simple algebraic trick that helps to simplify an integrand when it is in the form of some rational function such as f (x) = 1 .5.
6. x(1 − x) x (1 − x) Then 1 = A(1 − x) + Bx. 1 = 2B. In particular. and u = x − 1 for the second integral. convenient values of x for determining the constants are x = 0.) Now a simple substitution will work for each component. 1−x Simple substitution now gives I = ln x − ln 1 − x + C. I= 2−1 x 2 6.) The result is 1 1 = (− ln x + 1 + ln x − 1) + C. x(1 − x) This example is similar to the previous one. We now ask what values of A and B make this equation hold for any x. Thus B = 1/2. Partial fractions The two sides are equal provided: A(x − 1) + B(x + 1) 1 = . with the results: 1 = −2A. so the integral can be written in the simpler form I= 1 2 −1 dx + (x + 1) 1 dx . Thus I= 1 dx = x(1 − x) 1 dx + x 1 dx. (x − 1) (A common factor of (1/2) has been taken out.2 Example: partial fractions (2) Find the antiderivative of I= 1 dx. Choosing two “easy” values. namely x = 1 and x = −1 leads to isolating one or the other unknown constants. We set 1 A B = + .6. B = 1. x2 − 1 x2 − 1 This means that 1 = A(x − 1) + B(x + 1) 125 must be true for all x values. This must hold for all x values. (Let u = x + 1 for the ﬁrst. . B. A. 1. We ﬁnd that A = 1. A = −1/2.6.
uv = v du + u dv. leading to the expression x A B = + . in the differential notation: d(uv) = v du + u dv. The usual procedure then results in I= x 1 2 = ln x − 1 + ln x + 2 + C. +x−2 The rational expression above factors into x2 + x − 2 = (x − 1)(x + 2). we can exchange the task of integrating a function with the job of differentiating it. −2 into this leads to A = 1/3 and B = 2/3. Substituting the values x = 1. 6. dx dx dx or. This is best illustrated by the examples below. Techniques of Integration 6. We write this result in the more suggestive form u dv = uv − v du. we may be able to “exchange it” for a simpler integral in the form v du. Integrating both sides.126 Chapter 6.6.2.e. x2 + x − 2 3 3 Find the antiderivative of Another example of the technique of partial fractions is provided in Appendix 11. v du + u dv The idea here is that if we have difﬁculty evaluating an integral such as u dv. The idea rests on the product rule for derivatives. . we obtain d(uv) = i.5. The essential idea is that in some cases. It also has independent theoretical stature in many applications in mathematics and physics. Suppose that u(x) and v(x) are two differentiable functions. x2 + x − 2 (x − 1) (x + 2) Consequently.3 Example: partial fractions (3) x . it follows that I= x2 A(x + 2) + B(x − 1) = x. Then we know that the derivative of their product is d(uv) du dv =v +u .7 Integration by parts The method described in this section is important as an additional tool for integration.
du = dx. and get a simpler expression. v = ex so that xex dx = xex − ex dx = xex − ex + C. To ﬁnd a deﬁnite integral of this kind on some interval (say 0 ≤ x ≤ 1). Then du = (1/x) dx and v = x. I= 2 2 This is certainly not a simpliﬁcation.) Let u = x and dv = ex dx.) Example: Integration by parts (2) Compute 1 I= 0 xex dx. not easier to integrate. ln(x) dx = x ln(x) − x(1/x) dx = x ln(x) − dx = x ln(x) − x. Integration by parts Example: Integration by parts (1) Compute 2 127 I= 1 ln(x) dx. Solution At ﬁrst. Solution Let u = ln(x) and dv = dx. because the integral we obtain has a higher power of x. We now evaluate this result at the endpoints to obtain 2 2 I= 1 ln(x) dx = (x ln(x) − x) 1 = (2 ln(2) − 2) − (1 ln(1) − 1) = 2 ln(2) − 1. This means that we would get the integral in the form x2 x x2 x e − e dx. This is a wiser choice because when we differentiate u.6. (Where we used the fact that ln(1) = 0. Note that all parts of the expression are evaluated at the two endpoints. Then du = ex dx and v = x2 /2. This suggests that our ﬁrst attempt was not a helpful one. and is consequently harder. Suppose we try u = ex and dv = xdx. it may be hard to decide how to assign roles for u and dv.7. we compute 1 1 I= 0 xex dx = (xex − ex ) 0 = (1e1 − e1 ) − (0e0 − e0 ) = 0 + e0 = e0 = 1. we reduce the power of x (from 1 to 0). . (Note that integration often requires trial and error. Indeed.
1 + x2 The last integral can be done with the simple substitution w = (1 + x2 ) and dw = 2x dx. . Techniques of Integration xn ex dx. giving I = x arctan(x) − (1/2) We obtain. 2 (1/w)dw. We can calculate this integral by repeated application of the idea in the previous example. integration by parts is needed more than once. Solution Let u = arctan(x) and dv = dx.128 Example: Integration by parts (2b) Compute In = Solution Chapter 6. The calculation is repeated until the very last integral has been simpliﬁed. Example: Integration by parts (3) Compute I= arctan(x) dx. as a result I = x arctan(x) − Example: Integration by parts (3b) Compute I= tan(x) dx. with no remaining powers of x. Then In = xn ex − nxn−1 ex dx = xn ex − n xn−1 ex dx. 1 ln(1 + x2 ). This illustrates that in some problems. Each application of integration by parts. Letting u = xn and dv = ex dx leads to du = nxn−1 and v = ex . Then du = (1/(1 + x2 )) dx and v = x so that I = x arctan(x) − 1 x dx. reduces the power of the term xn inside an integral by one.
i. .e. Therefore I1 = −ex cos(x) − (− cos(x))ex dx = −ex cos(x) + cos(x)ex dx. i. but let us not give up! In this case.7. Then du = ex dx and v = sin(x) dx. that we’ll call I2 will appear in the calculation. Then du = sec2 (x) dx and v = x. let u = tan(x) and dv = dx. and we see that integration by parts will not necessarily work.6. This is not really a simpliﬁcation. We refer to this integral as I1 because a related second integral. we might instead try to rewrite the integral in the form sin(x) I = tan(x) dx = dx. i. as we have not simpliﬁed the result. Then du = ex dx and v = − cos(x) dx. Let u = ex and dv = cos(x) dx. We now have another integral of a similar form to tackle. Integration by parts Solution 129 We might try to ﬁt this into a similar pattern. This seems hopeless. so we obtain I = x tan(x) − x sec2 (x) dx. ﬁrst. Call I2 the integral I2 = so that Repeat the same procedure for the new integral I2 . w This example illustrates that we should always try substitution. before attempting other methods.e. I1 = −ex cos(x) + I2 . even on a seemingly related example. that w = cos(x) and dw = − sin(x) dx will convert the integral into the form I= 1 (−dw) = − ln w = − ln  cos(x). Thus I2 = ex sin(x) − sin(x)ex dx = ex sin(x) − I1 . However. Example: Integration by parts (4) Compute I1 = ex sin(x) dx. cos(x)ex dx. Solution Let u = ex and dv = sin(x) dx. another application of integration by parts will do the trick. cos(x) Now we ﬁnd that a simple substitution will do the trick.e.
more elementary integral. We can eliminate I2 . When using substitution on a deﬁnite integral.e. I1 = −ex cos(x) + ex sin(x) − I1 . that is. obtaining I1 = −ex cos(x) + I2 = −ex cos(x) + ex sin(x) − I1 .8 Summary In this chapter. Other times. Substitution is the ﬁrst method to consider. we explored a number of techniques for computing antiderivatives. 2. the desired integral has been found to be I1 = ex sin(x) dx = 1 1 (−ex cos(x) + ex sin(x)) = ex (sin(x) − cos(x)) + C. We here summarize the most important results: 1. it has a purpose. endpoints can be converted to the new variable (Method 1) or the resulting antiderivative can be converted back to its original variable before plugging in the (original) endpoints (Method 2). 2 2 (At this last step. The integration by parts formula for functions u(x). This method works provided the change of variable results in elimination of the original variable and leads to a simpler.) Moreover. We have determined that the following relationships are satisﬁed by the above two integrals: I1 = −ex cos(x) + I2 I2 = ex sin(x) − I1 . Sometimes more than one application of this method is needed. Integration by parts is useful when u is easy to differentiate (but not easy to integrate). we have also found that I2 is related. Rearranging (taking I1 to the left hand side) leads to 2I1 = −ex cos(x) + ex sin(x). this method is combined with substitution or other simpliﬁcations. v(x) is u dv = uv − v du. Techniques of Integration This appears to be a circular argument. and thus. but in fact. we have included the constant of integration. using I2 = ex sin(x) − I1 we now know that I2 = cos(x)ex dx = 1 x e (sin(x) + cos(x)) + C.130 Chapter 6. . 3. 2 6. It is also helpful when the integral contains a product of elementary functions such as xn and a trigonometric or an exponential function. i.
5. Even with all these techniques. 2. cot(u) du = ln  sin(u) + C sec(u) = ln  sec(u) + tan(u) + C . 6. calculate a given deﬁnite integral numerically using a spreadsheet. 6. 1 du = ln u + C. 7. 7. the problem of ﬁnding an antiderivative can be very complicated. In some cases. if none of these work. tan(u) du = ln  sec(u) + C. Using integration by parts on a deﬁnite integral means that both parts of the formula are to be evaluated at the endpoints. √ 5. 3. Algebraic tricks.6. 4. u un du = un+1 +C n+1 1 = arctan(u) + C 1 + u2 √ 1 = arcsin(u) + C 1 − x2 sin(u) du = − cos(u) + C cos(u) du = sin(u) + C sec2 (u) du = tan(u) + C Additional useful antiderivatives 1. Integrals with products or powers of trigonometric functions can sometimes be simpliﬁed by application of trigonometric identities or simple substitution. and many associated manipulations are often applied to twist and turn a complicated integral into a set of simpler expressions that can each be handled more easily. Summary 131 4. 8. or. Table of elementary antiderivatives 1. 2. use symbolic manipulation software packages.8. 3. Integrals involving 1 ± x2 can be simpliﬁed by making a trigonometric substitution. we resort to handbooks of integrals.
132 Chapter 6. Techniques of Integration .
We have seen related ideas in Chapter 5 in the context of mass distributions.2 Dealing with data Scientists studying phenomena in the real world. 7. and similar quantities. collect data of all kinds. and comparisons are to be made between multiple data sets. The idea of a center of mass is closely related to that of the mean of a distribution. we discuss experiments that can be easily reproduced and tested by the reader. Data sets can be large and complex. In biology. in favor of simplicity of one or several “simple” numerical descriptors such as the mean and the median of a distribution. Here we revisit such ideas in the context of probability. there are many examples of such processes. An additional example of real data is described in Appendix 11.6. it is important to see simple examples. If an experiment is repeated. the random motion of cells. including the inheritance of genes and genetic diseases. the ﬂuctuations in the number of RNA molecules in a cell. To gain experience with probability. 24 I am grateful to Robert Israel for comments regarding the organization of this chapter 133 . Some shortcuts allow us to summarize trends or descriptions of data sets in simple values such as averages (means). Such skills are essential in understanding problems related to random processes of all sorts. it is unrealistic to compare each and every numerical value. some resulting from experimental measurement or ﬁeld observations. we show how grade distributions on a test can be analyzed by similar methods. There. medians.Chapter 7 Discrete probability and the laws of chance 7. In this chapter. In doing so we lose the detailed information that the data set contains.1 Introduction In this chapter we lay the groundwork for calculations and rules governing simple discrete probabilities24. and a vast array of other phenomena.
We are interested in understanding how to quantify the probability of each such outcome in fair (as well as unfair) coins.3. Our goal in this chapter is to make more precise our notion of probability.3 Simple experiments 7. we should be able to repeat the experiment as many times as desired under exactly the same conditions. i. if we were to repeat the same experiment many many times. and to examine ways of quantifying and computing probabilities. we get H roughly 50% of the time and T roughly 50% of the time. the six possible events would occur with similar frequencies. and recording how many are cured. Let us use the notation xi to refer to the number of times that outcome i was obtained. we anticipate getting each of the results with an equal probability. so that a “single experiment” has six possible outcomes. In order for the ideas of probability to apply.4. an outcome corresponds to a ﬁveletter sequence of “Heads” (H) and “Tails” (T). on average.3 Empirical probability We can arrive at a notion of probability by actually repeating a real experiment N times. Similarly. we ﬁrst look at results of a real experiment performed in class by students. such as THTHH. dealing cards. Consider the following experiment: We toss a coin and see how it lands. applying treatment to sick patients. This means that if we repeat this experiment many many times. we would expect that. consider the experiment of rolling a dice: A sixsided die can land on any of its six faces. we could ask how likely are we to roll a 5 and a 6 in successive experiments? A 5 or a 6? For such experiments we are interested in quantifying how likely it is that a certain event is obtained. We will often be interested in more complex experiments. where there is a ﬁnite list of possible outcomes. This will lead us to deﬁne a probability of 1/2 for each outcome.1 Experiment We will consider “experiments” such as tossing a coin.2 Outcome Whenever we perform the experiment. To motivate this investigation.134 Chapter 7. We say that the events are random and unbiased for “fair” dice.e. this empirical probability would . and counting how many times each outcome happens. We deﬁne the empirical probability pi of outcome i to be pi = xi /N. how probable is it that we get eight out of ten heads? For dice.1. each 1/6 of the times. Discrete probability and the laws of chance 7. An example of this sort is illustrated in Section 7.e pi is the fraction of times that the result i is obtained out of all the experiments. If we toss a coin ten times. We expect that if we repeated the experiment many more times. For a fair die.3. exactly one outcome happens. In this chapter we will deal with discrete probability. we expect that on average. For example. A fair coin is one for which these results are equally likely. if we toss a coin ﬁve times. 7. 7.3. The number of repetitions will often be denoted N . Here there are only two possible results: “heads” (H) or “tails” (T). i. rolling a die.
For discrete probability i pi = 1. We then use two fundamental rules of probability to calculate the probability as illustrated below. Simple experiments 135 approach. the outcome HHTHH is obtained 25 times. i. In what follows. termed probability distributions and their properties. . suppose we toss a coin n times. 2. Even though p(xi ) is a discrete quantity taking on one of a discrete set of values. 2.e. then the number of heads. About Rule 1: pi = 0 implies that the given outcome never happens. in the case of a “fair coin”. we toss the coin n = 4 times. For example. we would like to characterize their probabilities p(xi ). . . 7. where the sum is over all possible outcomes. For example. the fractions corresponding to all of the outcomes add up to 100% of the results. . 1. So if in a cointossing experiment. 4} (i.. no heads. If. . and let X be the number of heads that appear. In discrete probability.1) means that the outcome occurs some of the time. it follows that pi = 1/M for every i.3. whereas pi = 1 implies that this outcome is the only possibility (and always happens). we will be interested in characterizing such function. In general if the possible values xi are listed in increasing order for i = 0. all with equal probability. Any value inside the range (0.7.. Rules of probability 1. four heads). as a limit.4 Theoretical Probability For theoretical probability. n. we can argue by symmetry that every sequence of n heads and tails has the same probability as any other. In the case of discrete probability there are a discrete number of possible values for the random variable to take on. we make some reasonable basic assumptions on which we base a calculation of the probabilities. 7. We will be interested in the probability distribution of X.3. 3.3. .. Rule 2 makes intuitive sense: it means that we have accounted for all possibilities.e.5 Random variables and probability distributions A random variable is a numerical quantity X that depends on the outcome of an experiment. 25 Read: p(xi ) is the probability that the random variable X takes on the value xi . . . repeated 1000 times. we should still think of this mathematical object as a function: it associates a number (the probability) p with each allowable value of the random variable xi for i = 0. then we would say that the empirical probability pHHTHH is 25/1000.. say. the actual probability of the outcome. In a case where there are M possible outcomes. X could take on any of the values {xi } = {0. where p(xi ) =Prob(X = xi )25 . n. one head. 0 ≤ pi ≤ 1 for each outcome i.
. xi = {0. In column (3) we display the cumulative number of students who got any number up to and including xi heads. of “Heads” that came up. Observe that F starts with the value 0 and climbs up to value 1. so ni /N is the fraction of experiments that led to the given result. 2.4. 2. In Figure 7. The experiment. we implicitly assume that all coins and all tossers are more or less identical and unbiased. etc heads) must add up to 1. etc) can be obtained in the experiment. Also.1 we show what this distribution looks like on a bar graph.4 Examples of experimental data 7. two. up to ten heads out of the ten tosses).1 shows the result of this experiment. The horizontal axis is xi .1 Example1: Tossing a coin We illustrate ideas with an example of real data obtained by repeating an “experiment” many times. etc. Each student recorded one of eleven possible outcomes.e.6 The cumulative distribution Given a probability distribution. then F (6) stands for the probability of rolling a 6 or any lower value.1. so the “experiment” has N = 121 replicates (one for each student). actually carried out by each of 121 students in this calculus course. only discrete integer values (0. since the probabilities of any of the events (0. hence is called “cumulative”. . Because in this example. 7. . . Table 7. no heads. We also show the cumulative function F (xi ). . we can also deﬁne a cumulative function as follows: The cumulative function corresponding to the probability distribution p(xi ) is deﬁned as F (xi ) = Prob(X ≤ xi ). one. 1. Here ni is the number of students who got xi heads.3. The function F merely sums up all the probabilities of outcomes up to and including xi . it makes sense to represent the data as discrete points. xi . the value of F (xi ) is hence i F (xi ) = j=0 p(xj ). For example. which is clearly equal to 1 for a sixsided die. if we list the possible outcomes in ascending order as {1. . 7. 1. 1. in the rolling of a die. 10} (i. Discrete probability and the laws of chance 7. This implies that F (xn ) = 1 where xn is the largest value attainable by the random variable. superimposed as an xyplot on a graph of p(xi ). that is p(xi ) = ni /N . 2. as shown on the bottom panel in Fig. consisted of tossing a coin n = 10 times and recording the number. and then in column (5) we compute the cumulative (empirical) probability F (xi ). For a given numerical outcome xi . and the vertical axis is p(xi ). 6}.136 Chapter 7. . and we deﬁne the empirical probability assigned to xi as this fraction. . . the number of heads obtained. By pooling together such data. 2. We refer to this as the frequency of the given result.
0248 0.2231 0. x of a probability distribution is ¯ n x= ¯ i=0 xi p(xi ) .0165 0. The fraction of the class that got each outcome.3. There we discuss distributions of grades on a test. . The expected value is a kind of “average value of x”. the number of students ni who each got xi = 0.4. This idea is related to the concept of center of mass deﬁned in Section 5.00 0. p(xi ). Such quantities provide numerical descriptions of the average value of the random variable and the ﬂuctuations about that average. .00 1.0083 0. rather than here. We deﬁne each of these as follows: The mean (or average or expected value).3306 0.1.6. where values of x are weighted by their frequency of occurrence. 10 heads.5 Mean and variance of a probability distribution We next discuss some very important quantities related to the random variable.0083 0.5455 0. . Each student tossed a coin 10 times.2149 0.00 0. 7. 1.0826 0. . We also compute the cumulative function F (xi ) in the last column. ni /N . Many of the ideas described here apply in the same way.0579 0.7. Mean and variance of a probability distribution Number of heads xi 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 frequency (number of students) ni 0 137 cumulative function i cumulative number i empirical probability p(xi ) = ni /N 0.00 nj 0 1 3 13 40 66 100 114 121 121 121 F (xi ) = 0 p(xj ) 0 1 2 10 27 26 34 14 7 0 0 0. 2. 7.e.2 Example 2: grade distributions Another example of real data is provided in Appendix 11. For space constraints.1 (x positions weighted by masses associated with those positions). is identiﬁed with the (empirical) probability of that outcome.1 for the same data presented graphically.5. We recorded the “frequency”.1157 0.00 1.00 0. .9421 1.2810 0.00 Table 7. i.8264 0. Results of a real cointossing experiment carried out by 121 students in this mathematics course. that example is provided in an Appendix.1074 0. See Figure 7.
The mean is a point on the x axis.0 number of heads (i) 10. discussed in Section 4. the number.0 empirical probability of i heads in 10 tosses Cumulative function 0. The vertical axis reﬂects the fraction p(xi ) of the class that achieved that particular number of heads.0 0. representing the “average” outcome of an experiment.) The mean is not the same as the average value of a function. We deﬁne the variance. The variance is related to the square of the quantity represented on the x axis. and they should be helped to overcome this difﬁculty with terminology. In the lower graph. the average is an average y coordinate.6. σ as follows: The variance.1 is shown plotted on this graph.0 0. the same data is shown by the discrete points. the possible outcomes of some observation or measurement process are depicted on the x axis of the graph. σ carries the same units as x. For this reason. Discrete probability and the laws of chance 0. of a distribution is n V = i=0 (xi − x)2 p(xi ). ¯ where x is the mean.)26 We also deﬁne quantities that represents the width of the distribution. The data from Table 7. σ is ¯ √ σ = V. We also show the cumulative function that sums up the values from left to right. The standard deviation. A total of N = 121 people were asked to toss a coin n = 10 times. it is 26 Note to the instructor: students often mix these two distinct meanings of the word average. (Recall that in the distributions we are describing. V and standard deviation. . Note that the cumulative function is a “step function” .0 Figure 7.1.4 1.0 number of heads (i) 10. of heads (H) that came up during those 10 coin tosses. the horizontal axis reﬂects i. In the bar graph (left).138 Chapter 7. and since the standard deviation its square root. (In that case. or average height of the function.0 0. V .
then it is equally likely to get any of the six possible outcomes. M2 is 6 M2 = i=1 i2 · 1 1 = · 6 6 6 · 7 · 13 6 = 91 . . i = 1.7.1 as follows: 10 x= ¯ k=0 xi p(xi ) = 0(0)+1(0. 2 The second moment. we show that the variance can also be expressed in the form V = M2 − x2 . and let the random variable be X be the number obtained on the die. Mj of a distribution is n Mj = i=0 (xi )j p(xi ).5. 6 p(xi ) = 1/6.0083)+2(0. 2 .2149 .e.0579)+9(0)+10(0) = 5. ¯ where M2 is the second moment of the distribution. Mean and variance of a probability distribution 139 common to associate the value of σ.2 (Expected number of heads (empirical)) For the empirical probability distribution shown in Figure 7. If this die is fair. . so each has probability 1/6.7078.1. i. V = and the standard deviation. The j’th moment. In this case xi = i. σ= 35/12 ≈ 1. . . 6 We can now obtain the variance.5.1 (Rolling a die) Suppose you toss a die. Example 7. (1 to 6). Moments of a distribution are deﬁned as the values obtained by summing up products of the probability weighted by powers of x. the mean (expected value) is calculated from results in Table 7. whereas a large σ signiﬁes that there is a large scatter of experimental values about the mean.+8(0. In the problem sets.0165)+. 12 Example 7. 91 − 6 7 2 2 = 35 . We calculate the various quantities as follows: The mean is 6 x= ¯ i=1 i· 1 1 = · 6 6 6·7 2 = 7 = 3. Having a low value of σ means that most of the experimental results are close to the mean. with a typical “width” of the distribution.
we will assume that each trial is identical and independent of the others. We obtain V = (0 − 5.2149)2(0) = 2. Tails you lose”.140 Chapter 7. where we list all possible outcomes and their probabilities: In constructing Table 7. We state this. 27 For example “Heads you win. these values do not contribute to the calculation. Consider the following example for the case of n = 3.053 (Because there was no replicate of the experiment that led to 9 or 10 heads out of 10 tosses. we use a multiplication principle applied to computing the probability of a compound experiment.1 The Binomial distribution Suppose we repeat a Bernoulli trial n times.2149)2(0.6 Bernoulli trials A Bernoulli trial is an experiment in which there are two possible outcomes. Also note that X = k means that in the n trials there are k successes and n − k failures. F.2. Then X is said to have a Binomial distribution with parameters n and p.4328. Let us consider how to calculate the probability distribution of X. 7.2149)2(0. To compute the variance we form the sum 10 10 V = k=0 (xk − x) p(xk ) = ¯ 2 k=0 (k − 5. is tossing a coin (the outcome being H or T). i.0083) + . Let X be the number of successes. .2149)2(0) + (10 − 5.6. . This implies that the probability p of success and q of failure is the same in each trial. .e. motivated previously.0579) + (9 − 5. We now consider how to calculate the probability of some number of “successes” in a set of repetitions of a Bernoulli trial. In short. the mean number of heads in this set of experiments is about 5. . + (7 − 5. 50%) would result in heads. . we are interested in the probability of tossing some number of Heads in n coin tosses.2149)2(0. 5 out of 10 tosses (i. . Let p be the probability of success and q = 1 − p the probability of failure in a Bernoulli trial. we refer to one of the outcomes of a Bernoulli trial as ”success” S and the other ”failure”27 .2149)2(0) + (1 − 5. Recall that the notation for this probability is Prob(X = k) for k = 0.) The standard deviation is then √ σ = V = 1. This is close to what we would expect intuitively in a fair coin. A typical example. 1. Traditionally. n.2. 7. on average. together with a useful addition principle below. namely that. Discrete probability and the laws of chance Thus.e.1157) + (8 − 5. . the probability that X = k where k is some number of successes between none (k = 0) and all (k = n).2149)2 p(k). Here we have used the mean calculated above and the fact that xk = k.
.3. FSF.6.. The results are shown in Table 7. Based on the results in Table 7. . we have considered all the ways of obtaining 0 Probability of X heads Prob(X Prob(X Prob(X Prob(X = 0) = q 3 = 1) = 3pq 2 = 2) = 3p2 q = 3) = p3 Table 7. ek ) = Prob(e1 ) + Prob(e2 ) + . or 3 successes out of 3 trials. based on results in Table 7. ek are independent events. then Prob(e1 or e2 or .3. A list of all possible results of three repetitions ( n = 3) of a Bernoulli trial. The probability of obtaining X successes out of 3 Bernoulli trials.2 and on the two principles outline above. each having the same probability pq 2 ) etc. ek are mutually exclusive events. FFS. 1. Since these results are mutually exclusive (only one such result is possible for any given replicate of the 3trial experiment). and T for F gives the same results for a coin tossing experiment repeated 3 times). Multiplication principle: if e1 . . . In constructing Table 7. S=“success” and F=“failure.. and its probability is p3 ).2.3. . . . . Bernoulli trials Result SSS SSF SFS SFF FSS FSF FFS FFF probability p3 p2 q p2 q pq 2 p2 q pq 2 pq 2 q3 number of heads X =3 X =2 X =2 X =1 X =2 X =1 X =1 X =0 141 Table 7. . Prob(ek ) Addition principle: if e1 . . . . ek ) = Prob(e1 )Prob(e2 ) . all the ways of obtaining only one success (here we must allow for SFF.2 and the addition principle of probability. 2. . namely SSS.. the addition principle is used to compute the probability Prob(SFF or FSF or FFS).7. successes (there is only one such way. then Prob(e1 and e2 and . (Substituting H for S. we can compute the probability of obtaining 0. . + Prob(ek ).
k)pk q n−k . k) for k = 3. k)ak bn−k + .6. + C(n. (See Section 11. an expansion of n terms leads to (a + b)n = an + C(n. the probability of an outcome that has k successes and n − k failures (in some speciﬁc order) is pk q (n−k) . the binomial coefﬁcient. That binomial coefﬁcient is C(n. ab and b2 in the resulting expansion. 1)an−1 b + C(n. there are. for each replicate of an experiment consisting of n Bernoulli trials. with n = 3. C(2. n (a + b)n = k=0 C(n. 2. these account for the terms a2 . . 2) = 1. . . k).] Similarly. the number of ways of choosing k objects out of a collection of n objects. since the order in which S and F appear can differ from one outcome to another.8 for a review.7 for the deﬁnition of factorial notation “!” used here. More generally. 2)p2 q = 3p2 q. 0. 0) = 1 appear in front of the three terms. the product of three terms is (a + b)3 = (a + b) · (a + b) · (a + b) = (a + b)3 = a3 + 3a2 b + 3ab2 + b3 whereby coefﬁcients are of the form C(3. As illustrated by the above example. in general.e. we need to count how many possible outcomes consist of k successes and n − k failures. 1. [Respectively. In the above example. k)ak bn−k . In mathematical terminology. .142 Chapter 7. + C(n. which is. 2)an−2 b2 + . A familiar example is (a + b)2 = (a + b) · (a + b) = a2 + ab + ba + b2 = a2 + 2ab + b2 . n − 1)abn−1 + bn n = k=0 C(n. respectively. n − 2)a2 bn−2 + C(n. the number of ways that n trials can lead to k successes is C(n. (n − k)!k! (See Section 11. arrangements of the order) of S and F that have the same number of successes in total. representing. the number of ways of choosing 2 a’s. by deﬁnition. and no a’s out of the n factors of (a + b).) In fact.) We have arrived at the following result for n Bernoulli trials: The probability of k successes in n Bernoulli trials is Prob(X = k) = C(n. k) = (n choose k) = n! . 1 a. The coefﬁcients C(2. To get the total probability of X = k. and C(2. many such ways. we ﬁnd that Prob(X = 2) = C(3. 1) = 2. k)ak bn−k . there can be many permutations (i. 7. Discrete probability and the laws of chance In general.2 The Binomial theorem The name binomial coefﬁcient comes from the binomial theorem: which accounts for the expression obtained by expanding a binomial. Let us consider a few examples.
6. The binomial distribution is shown here for n = 10. so that C(n. n − k). What does the binomial theorem say about the binomial distribution? First.5 10. i.e.4. k). 1. terms along the row are the binomial coefﬁcients C(n. 1). Each term in Pascal’s triangle is obtained by adding the two diagonally above it. The next row represents C(1. k).4 The binomial distribution The binomial distribution p=1/2 q=1/2 p=1/4 q=3/4 0.2.5.4. so q = 3/4 and the resulting distribution is skewed. Bernoulli trials 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 4 10 3 6 10 2 3 4 5 1 1 1 1 1 143 Table 7. The distribution is then symmetric.4 0.7. 7.6. In the ﬁrst panel. it follows that p + q = 1. . For row number n. and hence (p + q)n = 1. the probability of success and failure are the same. They are entries that occur in Pascal’s triangle. 0) and C(1.0 0. p = q = 0.3 The binomial distribution 0.5 Figure 7.5 10. . starting with k = 0 at the beginning of the row and and going to k = n at the end of the row. . In the second panel. 0). shown in Table 7.0 0.5 0. 10. the probability of success is p = 1/4. . The binomial coefﬁcients are symmetric. We have plotted Prob(X = k) versus k for k = 0. k) = C(n. since there are only two possible outcomes in each Bernoulli trial. Pascal’s triangle contains the binomial coefﬁcients of the C(n. This distribution is the same as the probability of getting X heads out of 10 coin tosses for a fair coin. The top of the triangle represents C(0.
k=0 np + n(n − 1)p2 = k 2 C(n. k)pk q n−k = k=0 Prob(X = k) = 1. . 7. (7. it follows that the sum adds up to 1. k=0 Thereby we have calculated the second moment of the distribution. . We continue to compute other quantities of interest.e. The result is n n(px + q)n−1 p + n(n − 1)x(px + q)n−2 p2 = Plug in x = 1 to get n C(n. k)pk q n−k kxk−1 . the sum of these terms represents the sum of probabilities of obtaining k = 0. we have found that ¯ The mean of the binomial distribution is X = np where n is the number of trials and p is the probability of success in one trial. 1. k)pk q n−k k 2 xk−1 . (plugging in x = 1) implies that n C(n. Taking the derivative of the above with respect to x leads to: n n(px + q)n−1 · p = which.. In summary. Discrete probability and the laws of chance Using the binomial theorem. That is. k)pk q n−k = k=0 ¯ k · Prob(X = k) = X. .1 by x to obtain n nx(px + q)n−1 p = k=0 C(n. we can expand the latter to obtain n n (p + q)n = k=0 C(n. k)pk q n−k = M2 . We will write out an expansion for a product of the form (px + q)n . Take the derivative again. (And since this accounts for all possibilities. k)(px)k q n−k = k=0 C(n. Multiply both sides of Eqn. Here x will be an abstract quantity introduced for convenience (i. . k=0 n np = k=0 k · C(n. n successes. we found the following results: . k)pk q n−k xk . k)pk q n−k kxk . the variance. and the standard deviation.1) Thus.) We can compute the mean and variance of the binomial distribution using the following tricks. for making the trick work): n n (px + q)n = k=0 C(n.144 Chapter 7.
The resulting function is of the form 2 1 p(x) = √ e−x /2 2π (7. until it grows to resemble a continuous distribution that looks like a “Bell curve”.2) and has the distribution shown in this ﬁgure. Then X has mean 0 and standard deviation σ. 0. i.6. Bernoulli trials 145 The second moment M2 . called the standard normal distribution.2) .e. rescale) the binomial random variable so that it has a convenient ˜ ˜ ¯ ˜ mean and width. 7. As the number of Bernoulli trials grows.7. The Normal (or Gaussian) distribution is given by equation (7. the Variance V and the standard deviation σ of a binomial distribution are M2 = np + n2 p2 − np2 . In the limit as n → ∞. To do so. we can approximate Z with a continuous distribution.e.3.4 The normalized binomial distribution We can “normalize” (i.0 4.6. √ σ = npq. That curve is known as the Gaussian or Normal distribution. then we ﬁnd a distribution that describes the deviation from the expected value of 50% heads. ¯ V = M2 − X 2 = np − np2 = np(1 − p) = npq. as we toss our imaginary coin in longer and longer sets (n → ∞).0 4. If we scale this curve vertically and horizontally (stretch vertically and compress horizontally √ by the factor N/2) and shift its peak to x = 0.4 The Normal distribution 0. Now deﬁne Z= ¯ (X − X) σ Then Z has mean 0 and standard deviation 1. deﬁne the new random variable X to be: X = X − X. a remarkable thing happens to the binomial distribution: it becomes smoother and smoother.0 Figure 7.
7 HardyWeinberg genetics In this section. or aa. Each of us has two entire sets of chromosomes: one set is inherited from our mother. so each individual would have one of the following pairs of combinations AA. Then there are two possible mutually exclusive outcomes.3. 1. we are interested in a “repeated Bernoulli trial” with n = 2.4. We ﬁnd that many of the simple concepts presented here will be useful in calculating the probability of inheriting genes from one generation to the next. through complicated biochemistry and molecular biology. so only the . according to our previous deﬁnition. Aa. A might be an allele for blue eyes. the unit of genetic material that “codes” for proteins and ultimately. we investigate how the ideas developed in this chapter apply to genetics.0 4. when the single gene determines some physical trait (such as eye color). The order Aa or aA is synonymous. and one set comes from our father. These chromosomes carry genes. aA. Discrete probability and the laws of chance We will study properties of this (and other) such continuous distributions in a later section.0 The normal distribution 4.0 The cumulative distribution The cumulative distribution 0.0 0. In principle.0 4. The actual eye color phenotype will depend on both inherited alleles. We will consider a particularly simple situation. and examine the region in one of their chromosomes determining eye colour. The trait (say blue or green eyes) will be denoted the phenotype and the actual pair of genes (one on each parentally derived chromosome) will be called the genotype. and hence. We show a typical example of the Normal distribution in Figure 7. whereas a could be an allele for brown eyes. Its cumulative distribution is then shown (without and with the original distribution superimposed) in Figure 7. each chromosome will come with one or the other allele. A or a.0 4. called alleles) is passed from one generation to the next.0 Figure 7. Consider the following “experiment”: select a random individual from the population of interest. determines all of our physical traits. Suppose that the gene for eye color comes in two forms that will be referred to as A and a.146 Chapter 7.4. The Normal probability density with its corresponding cumulative function. the experiment just described is a Bernoulli trial. We will investigate how a single gene (with two “ﬂavors”.0 1. For example. 7.
Now suppose we draw at random two alleles out of the (large) population. Note that the sum of the probabilities of all the genotypes is p2 + 2pq + q 2 = (p + q)2 = 1. and whether it changes in the next generation.7.i.e. on average we would expect N p2 individuals of type AA. we have combined these outcomes in the revised second table. does not depend at all on “eye color”. . This means that we can use the multiplicative property of probability to determine the probability of a given combination of parental alleles.7. HardyWeinberg genetics Genotype: Probability: Genotype: Probability: aA pq AA p2 aa q2 AA p2 Aa pq aa q2 147 aA or Aa 2pq Table 7. 28 Recall that the sperm and the egg each have one single set of chromosomes.. Now let us examine the distribution of possible offspring of various parents. Prob(x and y)=Prob(x)·Prob(y)). where p + q = 1.. because genotype Aa is equivalent to genotype aA. and calculate the probability that mating of such individuals would occur under the assumption that choice of mate is random .e.1 Random nonassortative mating We now examine what happens if mates are chosen randomly and offspring arise from such parents. Prob(a)=q. For example. (i. Suppose we know that the fraction of all genes for eye color of type A in the population is p. and their union produces the zygote that carries the doubled set of chromosomes. If the population size is N . and in the deﬁnition of properties of probability.5. and the fraction of all genes for eye color of type a is q. then. The father and mother each pass down one or another copy of their alleles to the progeny.7. In Table 7. number of alleles of type A (or equivalently of type a) is important. we show the possible genotypes of the mother and father.) Then we can interpret p and q as probabilities that a gene selected at random from the population will turn out to be type a (respectively A).e. But that is just (2pq)(p2 ). i. or simply 2p3 q. of course. We assume that the allele donated by the father (carried in his sperm) is independent of the allele found in the mother’s egg cell28 .) 7. then the eye color gene probabilities are as shown in the top table.6. (We have seen this before in the discussion of Bernoulli trials. If the probability of ﬁnding allele A is p and the probability of ﬁnding allele A is q. the probability that a couple chosen at random will consist of a woman of genotype aA and a man of genotype aa is a product of the fraction of females that are of type aA and the fraction of males that are of type aa. However. (We have used the fact that there are only two possibilities for the gene type. N q 2 of type aa and 2N pq individuals of the mixed type. We investigate how the proportion of genes of various types is arranged. Prob(A) = p.
or one or the other parent is Aa. 2 2 4 Simplifying leads to Prob(child of type AA) = p2 (p2 + 2qp + q 2 ) = p2 (p + q)2 = p2 . The various progeny resulting from mating are shown as entries in bold face. The frequency of progeny of various types in HardyWeinberg genetics can be calculated as shown in this “mating table”.this is to emphasize that they are products of the original parental probabilities.6. aA. that if the couple are both of type aA.) Example 7.6. for example. so we expect to see children of types aa.6. AA in the ratio 1:2:1 (regardless of the values of p and q). with the probabilities that they are produced by one or another such random mating. we see that there are only four ways that a child of type AA can result from a mating: either both parents are AA. we can then determine the probability of each of the three genotypes in the next generation. Discrete probability and the laws of chance In Table 7. We can now group together and summarize all the progeny of a given genotype. or both parents are Aa. each parent can “donate” either a or A to the progeny.3 (Probability of AA progeny) Find the probability that a random (Hardy Weinberg) mating will give rise to a progeny of type AA. (We did not simplify the expressions . Using this table. The genotype of the mother is shown across the top and the father’s genotype is shown on the left column. Mother: Father: AA p2 AA p2 AA p4 1 1 2 aA 2 AA 2 aA 2pq 1 1 2 aA 2 AA 2 aa q2 Aa p2 q 2 1 1 2 aa 2 Aa 2 2pqp aA 2pq 2pqp 1 1 1 4 aa 2 aA 4 AA 2 2 4p q 2pqq aa q2 Aa p2 q 2 1 1 2 aA 2 aa 2 2pqq aa q4 Table 7. Thus. . The probabilities of the given progeny are directly under those entries.148 Chapter 7. for children of type AA the probability is 1 1 1 Prob(child of type AA) = p4 + (2pqp2 ) + (2pqp2 ) + (4p2 q 2 ). Solution 1 Using Table 7. we note.
Each arrow indicating the given case is accompanied by the probability of that event. this is certainly true. HardyWeinberg genetics 149 In the problem set. we show an alternate solution to the same problem using a tree diagram. (For example. A child AA cannot have any parent of genotype aa. we also ﬁnd that the probability of a child of type aA is 2qp. Reading from the top down. The combined probability is computed as follows: we determine the probability of getting an A from father (of type AA OR Aa): This is Prob(A from father)=(1/2)2pq + 1 · p2 ) = (pq + p2 ) and multiply it by a similar probability of getting A from the mother (of type AA OR Aa).5.) Thus. Prob(child of type AA) =(pq + p2 )(pq + p2 ) = p2 (q + p)2 = p2 · 1 = p2 .) Continuing down the branches. For a parent of type AA. Alternate solution child AA father 2pq Aa 1/2 A or p2 AA 1 A mother 2pq p2 Aa 1 AA 1/2 A or A (pq+p 2 ) . we examine all the possibilities at each branch point.5. since we need A from the father AND A from the mother for the genotype AA. ( pq + p2 ) Figure 7. (We must multiply. A tree diagram to aid the calculation of the probability that a child with genotype AA results from random assortative (Hardy Weinberg) mating. the probability that A is passed down to the child is only 1/2. For a parent of type Aa.7. we ask with what probability the given parent would have contributed an allele of type A to the child.7. It is of interest to investigate what happens when one of the assumptions we made is . We thus observe that the frequency of genotypes of the progeny is exactly the same as that of the parents. so the given branch carries probability 1. This type of genetic makeup is termed HardyWeinberg genetics. In Figure 7. a random individual has probability 2pq of having genotype Aa. so both father and mother’s genotype could only have been one of AA or Aa. the probability of the child being type aa is q 2 . as shown on the arrows from the father and mother to these genotypes.
) In Figure 7.6. she takes a step towards the right. it must be true that p + q = 1.6(b) we show the walker’s position. (We may as well assume that the steps occur at regular intervals of time. 7. and with probability q she takes a step towards the left. Discrete probability and the laws of chance relaxed. While this is beyond our scope here. A shown in Figure 7. and often attributed to a drunken wanderer. we could consider this motion as a 1D simpliﬁcation of the random tumbles and swims of a bacterium in its turbulent environment. each step has only two outcomes (analogous to a trial in a Bernoulli experiment). or possibly avoidance of poor environmental conditions. In our case. (Since these are the only two choices. The process described here is classic.6(a). x plotted versus the number of steps (n) she has taken. for example. We will assume that the walker never stops. so that the horizontal axis of this plot can be thought of as a time axis. In this problem.8 Random walker In this section we discuss an application of the binomial distribution to the process of a random walk. We shall see that if the probabilities of left and right motion are unequal (i. We could imagine the walker tossing a coin to determine whether to move .) (a) q p x −1 (b) x n 0 1 Figure 7. With probability p. we consider a straight (1 dimensional) path and an erratic walker who takes steps randomly to the left or right. it is usually the case that a goal of this swim is a search for some nutrient source. the motion is biased in one direction or another) this swimmer tends to drift along towards a preferred direction. A random walker in 1 dimension takes a step to the right with probability p and a step to the left with probability q. it forms an important theme in the area of genetics.150 Chapter 7. when the genotype of the individual has an impact on survival or on the ability to reproduce.e.
(c) The walker returns to the origin after 10 steps only if she has taken 5 steps to the left (total) and 5 steps to the right (total). k)pk q n−k . We wish to characterize the probability of the walker being at a certain position at a given time.7. What is the probability that a walker starting at the origin returns to the origin on her 10’th step? Solution (a) The probability of the run RLRRRLRLLL is the product pqpppqpqqq = p5 q 5 . i.8. The expected (mean) position after 1 move is thus x1 = p(+1) + q(−1) = p − q But the process follows a binomial distribution.e. (c) Suppose that p = q = 1/2. and thus the mean after n steps is xn = n(p − q). Example (a) What is the probability of a run of steps as follows: RLRRRLRLLLL (b) Find the probability that the walker moves k steps to the right out of a total run of n consecutive steps. 5)p5 q 5 = C(10. Note the similarity to the question “What is the probability of tossing HTHHHTHTTT?” (b) This problem is identical to the problem of k heads in n tosses of a coin. 5) 1 2 10 = 10! 5!5! 1 = 0. Thus this problem reduces to the problem (b) with 5 steps out of 10 taken to the right. the position is x = −1. The probability is thus P(back at 0 after 10 steps) = P(5 out of 10 steps to right) =C(10. . with probability p the position is x = +1 and with probability q. After 1 step. and to ﬁnd her expected position after n steps. Random walker 151 right or left. The probability of such an event is given by a term in the binomial distribution: P(k out of n moves to right)=C(n. how the mean value of x depends on the number of steps and the probabilities associated with each step.24609 1024 Mean position We now ask how to determine the expected position of the walker after n steps. Our familiarity with Bernoulli trials and the binomial distribution will prove useful in this context. The order of the steps does not matter.
We investigated a number of ways of describing results of experiments.g. say event e1 in a Bernoulli trial is p (and hence the probability of the other event e2 is q = 1 − p). k!(n − k)! This is called the binomial distribution. coin tossed n times) was a binomial distribution. ¯ While the chapter was motivated by results of a real experiment. including the binomial. i.9 Summary In this chapter. We then described how to combine probabilities of elementary events to calculate probabilities of compound independent events in a variety of simple experiments. We learned that a probability is always a number between 0 and 1. we introduced the notion of discrete probability of elementary events.e. such as tossing of a coin. ¯ . Suppose that the probability of one of the events. The standard deviation. We found that the distribution of events in a repetition of a Bernoulli trial (e. roughly speaking. and we computed the mean of that distribution. and studied this in detail. we then investigated theoretical distributions. The standard deviation is. then P (k occurrences of given event out of n trials) = n! pk q n−k . deﬁned as follows: The mean (expected value) x of a probability distribution is ¯ n x= ¯ i=0 xi p(xi ). σ is σ= where V is the variance. and we used the distribution of results to deﬁne simple numerical descriptors. more or less.152 Chapter 7. whether in tabular or graphical form. The mean is a number that. The mean of the binomial distribution. We deﬁned the notion of a Bernoulli trial. the “width” of the distribution. the mean number of events e1 in n repeated Bernoulli trials is x = np. describes the location of the “center” of the distribution (analogous to center of mass). and that the sum of (discrete) probabilities of all possible (discrete) outcomes is 1. V = i=0 n √ V (xi − x)2 p(xi ). Discrete probability and the laws of chance 7.
7 < x < 2. say an adult male.2 Basic deﬁnitions and properties Here we extend previous deﬁnitions from Chapter 7 to the case of continuous probability. say.5 ≤ x ≤ 3 meters. we will see the concepts of integral calculus in the context of practical examples and applications.71.thus. such heights will be associated with a larger value of probability than heights in some other interval of equal length. First and foremost.8 meters most often .5 and b = 3. (This height typically takes on values in the range 0. heights in the range 2. Unlike the case of discrete probability. we might expect to get a result in the proximity of 1. say. We begin by extending the idea of a discrete random variable to the continuous case. we will see that quantities such as mean and variance that were previously deﬁned by sums will now become deﬁnite integrals.1 Introduction In Chapter 7. This idea is analo29 This leap from discrete values that are the probability of an outcome (as seen in Chapter 7) to a probability density is challenging for many students. Here we extend these ideas to continuous probability. where outcomes of an experiment can take on only one of a ﬁnite set of values.Chapter 8 Continuous probability distributions 8. but rather “ a probability per unit x”. the measured height can take on any real number within the interval of interest. One of the most important differences is that we now consider a probability density. we explored the concepts of probability in a discrete setting. rather than a value of the probability per se29 . so a = 0. This leads us to redeﬁne our idea of a continuous probability. and measure his height. We call x a continuous random variable in a ≤ x ≤ b if x can take on any value in this interval. In doing so. Reinforcing the analogy with discrete masses versus distributed mass density (discussed in Chapter 5) may be helpful.g.8 meters. selected randomly from a population.) If we select a male subject at random from a large population. 8. Here again. An example of a random variable is the height of a person. using a continuous function in place of the discrete bargraph seen in Chapter 7. e. we observe that now p(x) will no longer be a probability. however. 153 .
we ask for the probability that x is within some range of values. by properties of the deﬁnite integral. as follows: x F (x) = a p(s) ds. The above deﬁnition has several implications: b 30 Remark: the probability that x is exactly equal to b is the integral b p(x) dx. we deﬁne a cumulative function. F (x). p(x) ≥ 0 for all x. namely p(xi ) in the discrete case. . Unlike our previous discrete probability. as integrals replace the sums in such calculations. and the point x). and then show how the mean. The cumulative function is simply the area under the probability density (between the left endpoint of the interval. a1 The transition to probability density means that the quantity p(x) does not carry the same meaning as our previous notation for probability of an outcome xi . or its approximation p(x)∆x is now associated with the probability of an outcome whose values is “close to x”.154 Chapter 8. Having generalized the idea of probability. Deﬁnition For experiments whose outcome takes on values on some interval a ≤ x ≤ b. and this is computed by performing an integral30 . Deﬁnition A function p(x) is a probability density provided it satisﬁes the following properties: 1. Then F (x) represents the probability that the random variable takes on a value in the range (a. Continuous probability distributions gous to the connection between the mass of discrete beads and a continuous mass density. we will not ask “what is the probability that x takes on some exact value?” Rather. We ﬁrst deﬁne the cumulative function. Here we will have the opportunity to practice integration skills. a. The probability that a random variable x takes on values in the interval a1 ≤ x ≤ a2 is deﬁned as a2 p(x) dx. the reader should be comfortable with the use of “s” as the “dummy variable” in this formula. encountered previously in Chapter 5. 2. In fact. 31 By now. x) 31 . b a p(x) dx = 1 where the possible range of values of x is a ≤ x ≤ b. where x plays the role of right endpoint of the interval of integration. and variance of a continuous probability density can be computed. But this integral has a value zero. median. we will now ﬁnd that many of the associated concepts have a natural and straightforward generalization as well. p(x)dx.
This follows from the fact that a F (a) = a p(s) ds. It is easy to check that p(x) ≥ 0 and that a p(x)dx = 1. . This follows from the additive property of integrals and the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus: a2 a a1 a2 a2 p(s) ds − p(s) ds = a a1 p(s) ds = a1 F (s) ds = F (a2 ) − F (a1 ) Finding the normalization constant Not every realvalued function can represent a probability density. p(x). For one thing. 155 2. Since p(x) ≥ 0. 32 The reader should recognize that we have essentially rescaled the original function by dividing it by the “area” A. on some interval a ≤ x ≤ b such that b f (x)dx = A > 0. this is zero. Basic deﬁnitions and properties Properties of continuous probability 1. Thus we have converted the original function to a probability density. f (x) ≥ 0. Given an arbitrary positive function. the cumulative function is an increasing function. the total area under its graph should be 1. the function must be positive everywhere. a we can always deﬁne a corresponding probability density. 5. A b a ≤ x ≤ b. By a property of the deﬁnite integral. This follows from the fact that b F (b) = a p(s) ds = 1 by Property 2 of the deﬁnition of the probability density. F (a) = 0. The connection between the probability density and its cumulative function can be written (using the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus) as p(x) = F (x). F (b) = 1. 3. This is really what normalization is all about. Further.2. 4. by Property 2 of a probability density. The probability that x takes on a value in the interval a1 ≤ x ≤ a2 is the same as F (a2 ) − F (a1 ). This process is called normalization.8. and the constant C = 1/A is called the normalization constant32 . p(x) as p(x) = 1 f (x).
156 Chapter 8. Continuous probability distributions 8. for p(x) to be a probability density. i. Carrying out this computation leads to 6 C sin 0 π x 6 dx = C π 6 − cos x π 6 6 =C 0 6 12 (1 − cos(π)) = C π π (We have used the fact that cos(0) = 1 in a step here. Solution The function is positive in the interval 0 ≤ x ≤ 6.1. 6 (a) We must ﬁnd the normalization constant. C= π . such that Property 2 of continuous probability is satisﬁed.1 Example: probability density and the cumulative function Consider the function f (x) = sin (πx/6) for 0 ≤ x ≤ 6. so we can deﬁne the desired probability density. (b) Find the cumulative distribution function. A graph of this probability density function is shown as the black curve in Figure 8. Let π p(x) = C sin x . p(x) = π π sin x . 12 Note that this calculation is identical to ﬁnding the area 6 A= 0 sin π x 6 dx. F (x). it must be true that C(12/π) = 1. and setting the normalization constant to C = 1/A. Solving for C leads to the desired normalization constant. we get the probability density.) But by Property 2. . (a) Normalize the function so that it describes a probability density.2. such that 6 1= 0 p(x) dx. 12 6 This density has the property that the total area under its graph over the interval 0 ≤ x ≤ 6 is 1. C.e. Once we rescale our function by this constant.
i. Mean and median (b) We now compute the cumulative function. The probability density p(x) (black). Recall that in Chapter 5 for mass density ρ(x). 1. We also want to describe whether the distribution is narrow or fat .0 F(x) p(x) 0.1. we deﬁned a center of mass. . 8. which is the cumulative area function is 1 at the right endpoint of the interval. x= ¯ b xρ(x) dx a .0 0. and the cumulative function F (x) (red) for Example 8. Note that the area under the black curve is 1 (by normalization). and thus the value of F (x).e. The only difference is the ultimate step of evaluating the integral at the variable endpoint x rather than the ﬁxed endpoint b = 6.1. b ρ(x) dx a (8.1) 33 Notice that the integration involved in ﬁnding F (x) is the same as the one done to ﬁnd the normalization constant. The variance and higher moments will provide that type of information.2.0 Figure 8.0 6. we often want to describe it with simpler numerical values that characterize its “center”: the mean and the median both give this type of information.3. how clustered it is about its “center”. This cumulative function is shown as a red curve in Figure 8. x 157 F (x) = 0 p(s) ds = π 12 x x sin 0 π s 6 ds Carrying out the calculation33 leads to F (x) = π π 6 − cos · s 12 π 6 = 0 1 π 1 − cos x 2 6 .1.3 Mean and median When we are given a distribution.8.
the denominator in Eqn.3. Solution To ﬁnd the mean we compute x= ¯ π 12 6 x sin 0 π x 6 dx.1.3 may help to dispel such confusion.Consequently. .158 Chapter 8. but the deﬁnition simpliﬁes by virtue b of the fact that a p(x) dx = 1.2. the median is the value of x that splits the probability distribution into two portions whose areas are identical. Deﬁnition The median xmed of a probability distribution is a value of x in the interval a ≤ xmed ≤ b such that xmed b p(x) dx = a xmed p(x) dx = 1 . (8. To avoid confusion note the distinction between the mean as an average value of x versus the average value of the function p over the given interval. Simply put. Since probability distributions are normalized. denoted x is given by ¯ b x= ¯ a xp(x) dx. the mean or average value of x (also called the expected value). The idea of median encountered previously in grade distributions also has a parallel here. the mean of a probability density is given as follows: Deﬁnition For a random variable in a ≤ x ≤ b and a probability density p(x) deﬁned on this interval. Reviewing Example 5.1 Example: Mean and median Find the mean and the median of the probability density found in Example 8. Continuous probability distributions The mean of a probability density is deﬁned similarly. 2 F (xmed ) = 8.1) is simply 1. 2 It follows from this deﬁnition that the median is the value of x for which the cumulative function satisﬁes 1 .3.
we look for the value of x for which F (xmed ) = 1 . Mean and median Integration by parts is required here34 . 2 Using the form of the cumulative function from Example 8.5 0.3. Let u = x. as computed in Example 8. as shown in green.0 Figure 8.0 F(x) 0.) To ﬁnd the median.1 in relation to the median. The median is the value of x at which F (x) = 0. dv = sin π x dx. 2 34 Recall from Chapter 6 that udv = vu − vdu.2.2. .8. which is done essentially by “differentiating” the term u = x. 2 (8. xmed .3. we ﬁnd that 1. xmed sin 0 π s 6 ds = 1 2 ⇒ 1 π 1 − cos xmed 2 6 = 1 .2. sin(0) = sin(π) = 0 in the above.0 x med 6.0 0.1. as we show here.5. The calculation is then as follows: 6 x= ¯ = π 12 1 2 −x 6 π cos x π 6 π x 6 6 6 159 + 0 6 π 6 cos 0 6 0 π x dx 6 −x cos + 0 6 π sin x π 6 1 = 2 6 6 −6 cos(π) + sin(π) − sin(0) π π = 6 = 3.2) (We have used cos(π) = −1. since the integrand consists of an expression xp(x)dx.1. Calculations of the mean in continuous probability often involve Integration by Parts (IBP). 6 6 Then du = dx. v = − π cos π x . The cumulative function F (x) (red) for Example 8. The idea of IBP is to reduce the integration to something involving only p(x)dx.
8. which the mean will have shifted to the new “center of mass” of the probability density. The relationship of the median and the cumulative function F (x) is illustrated in Fig 8. Thus we should have anticipated that the mean and median of this distribution would both occur at the same place. Remark A glance at the original probability distribution should convince us that it is symmetric about the value x = 3. We select the angle so that the resulting value of xmed will be inside the relevant interval (0 ≤ x ≤ 6 for this example).3.2 How is the mean different from the median? p(x) p(x) x x Figure 8. Continuous probability distributions Here we must solve for the unknown value of xmed .3. If the distribution is changed slightly so that it is no longer symmetric (as shown on the right) then the median may still be the same.e.e.1 that for symmetric distributions. In a symmetric probability distribution (left) the mean and median are the same. i.160 Chapter 8. we have found that the point xmed subdivides the interval 0 ≤ x ≤ 6 into two subintervals whose probability is the same. i.3. Is this always the case? When are the two different. This leads to π π xmed = 6 2 so the median is xmed = 3.2. just as it was for symmetric mass or grade distributions. 1 − cos π xmed = 1. We have seen in Example 8. 6 ⇒ cos π xmed = 0. π/2. This will be true in general for symmetric probability distributions. and how can we understand the distinction? Recall that the mean is closely associated with the idea of a center of mass. In other words. a concept from physics that describes the location of a pivot point at which the entire “mass” would . ±3π/2 etc. the mean and the median are the same. 6 The angles whose cosine is zero are ±π/2. at the midpoint of the interval.
we explore applications of the ideas developed in this chapter to a variety of problems.3.1. A1 = A2 = 1/2 since the total area under the graph is 1 by deﬁnition. This change did not affect the location of the median. The median simply indicates a place at which the “total mass” is subdivided into two equal portions. not just the “mass”. (In the case of probability density. which corresponds to the normalized probability density. and hence the normalization constant (C = 1/A) will be thereby determined (at the point corresponding to the end of the interval. However. to compensate for the change. . This results in a nonsymmetric probability density. Further.4. affects the contribution of parts of the distribution to the value of the mean. but we have to carry out an integration by parts to ﬁnd the normalization constant and/or to calculate the cumulative function.3 shows how the two concepts of median (indicated by vertical line) and mean (indicated by triangular “pivot point”) differ. 8.3 Example: a nonsymmetric distribution We slightly modify the function used in Example 8. each of those portions represents an equal area. We treat the decay of radioactive atoms. F (x). 8. x = 6).1 to the new expression f (x) = x sin (πx/6) for 0 ≤ x ≤ 6. It is then an easy matter to replot the revised function f (x)/A. At the left. Thus the location along the x axis. the mean contains more information about the way that the distribution is arranged spatially.e. for a symmetric probability density. consider distribution of 35 This is good practice.3.4. In the problem sets.4 Applications of continuous probability In the next few sections.4. the average height of the function on the given interval. the fact that part of the mass is farther away to the right leads to a shift in the mean of the distribution. integral . The area under the curve A. Applications of continuous probability exactly balance.of terms of the form xp(x)∆x. This is the curve shown in black in Figure 8. It is worth remembering that mean of p(x) = expected value of x = average value of x.. p(x)∆x. a small portion of the distribution was moved off to the far right. we leave as an exercise for the reader how to determine the median and the mean using the same spreadsheet tool for a related (simpler) example.) Figure 8. x. Steps in obtaining p(x) would be similar35 . To the right.4. since the total areas to the right and to the left of the vertical line are still equal. just as they did in Example 8. which is an average value of the y coordinate.2. and the reader is encouraged to do this calculation.8. i. Alternatively. as shown in Figure 8. 161 This concept is not to be confused with the average value of a function. shown in black in Figure 8. the mean and the median coincide. We can plot f (x) using sufﬁciently ﬁne increments ∆x along the x axis and compute the approximation for its integral by adding up the quantities f (x)∆x. to compute the mean of the distribution we have to integrate by parts twice. This stems from the fact that the mean of the distribution is a “sum” i. we can carry out all such computations (approximately) using the spreadsheet.e. Simply put.
0 0.6. From this ﬁgure. we see that the median is approximately xmed = 3. that is.e. which is again different from both the mean and the median. It turns out that a good candidate for such a function is p(t) = Ce−kt . and explore how the distribution of radii is related to the distribution of volumes in raindrop drop sizes. Continuous probability distributions 1. this function is deﬁned over the interval 0 ≤ t ≤ ∞.162 Chapter 8. This function is not symmetric. We cannot predict exactly when a given atom will undergo this event. We can deﬁne a probability density function that represents the probability per unit time that an atom would decay at time t. We ﬁnd that the mean is x = 3.5679. but we can study a large collection of atoms and draw some interesting conclusions. where k is a constant that represents the rate of decay (in units of 1/time) of the speciﬁc radioactive material. it is possible that we would have to wait a “very long time” to have all of the atoms decay. so the mean and median are not the same. As in Figures 8. the point at which p(x) ¯ is maximal is at x = 3.1 and 8.5 p(x) 0.4. This means that these integrals have to be evaluated “at inﬁnity”. We do not show the mean (which is close but not identical).1 Radioactive decay Radioactive decay is a probabilistic phenomenon: an atom spontaneously emits a particle and changes into a new form. In principle. Note that the “most probable value”. Using this probability density for atom decay. leading to an improper integral. but for the probability density p(x) = (π/36)x sin(πx/6). we can characterize the mean and median decay time for the material.2.9. 8. as well as the means and medians in these cases will form the main focus of our discussion. We can compute both the mean and the median for this distribution using numerical integration with the spreadsheet. heights in a population. i. The interpretation of the probability density and the cumulative function.0 xmed 6.0 Figure 8. .0 F(x) 0.4.
encountered such integrals in Sections 3. the exponential term in Eqn. T goes to inﬁnity (T → ∞). T →∞ Thus. Some care is needed in understanding how to handle such integrals.8. despite the inﬁnitely long domain of integration). 8.5 and 4. This means that the fraction of atoms that decay between time t1 and t2 is t2 k t1 36 We have already e−kt dt. recall that for k > 0. Applications of continuous probability Normalization We ﬁrst ﬁnd the constant of normalization. T →∞ k k (8.5. ﬁnd the constant C such that ∞ ∞ 163 p(t) dt = 0 0 Ce−kt dt = 1. T > 0. the second term in braces in the integral I in Eqn. C = 1. We will delay full discussion to Chapter 10.e.4. i. 8. We compute: T IT = C 0 e−kt dt = C e−kt −k T = 0 1 C(1 − e−kT ). See also. . k 1 To ﬁnd the constant of normalization C we require that I = 1. The idea is to compute an integral over a ﬁnite interval 0 ≤ t ≤ T and then take a limit as the upper endpoint. and state here the deﬁnition: ∞ T I= 0 Ce−kt dt ≡ lim IT T →∞ where IT = 0 Ce−kt dt. and in particular when they “exist” (in the sense of producing a ﬁnite value.3 will vanish as T → ∞ so that the value of the improper integral will be I = lim IT = T →∞ 1 C.3) To compute this limit. k Now we take the limit: I = lim IT = lim T →∞ T →∞ 1 1 C(1 − e−kT ) = C(1 − lim e−kT ). Thus the (normalized) probability density for the decay is p(t) = ke−kt .3 decays to zero as T increases. Recall that an integral of this sort. Chapter 10 for a more detailed discussion of improper integrals. so that lim e−kT = 0. which means k that C = k.8. in which one of the endpoints is at inﬁnity is called an improper integral36.e. i.
164 Cumulative decays Chapter 8. as expected for the cumulative function. Continuous probability distributions The fraction of the atoms that decay between time 0 and time t (i.e.note subtle wording”37) is t t F (t) = 0 p(s) ds = k 0 e−ks ds. “By time t” means that the event could have happened at any time right up to time t. 2 so we get e−ktm = 1 . . We can simplify this expression by integrating: F (t) = k e−ks −k t 0 = − e−kt − e0 = 1 − e−kt . we ﬁrst ﬁnd T IT = 0 tp(t) dt.e. 37 Note that the precise English wording is subtle. We compute this integral again as an improper integral by taking a limit as the top endpoint increases to inﬁnity. tm (the time at which half of the atoms have decayed). we set F (tm ) = 1/2. Median decay time As before. “any time up to time t” or “by time t . Thus. to determine the median decay time. k Thus half of the atoms have decayed by this time. Then 1 = F (tm ) = 1 − e−ktm . i.) Mean decay time ¯ The mean time of decay t is given by ∞ ¯ t= 0 tp(t) dt. but very important here. the probability of the atoms decaying by time t (which means anytime up to time t) is F (t) = 1 − e−kt . (Remark: this is easily recognized as the half life of the radioactive process from previous familiarity with exponentially decaying functions. 2 ⇒ ektm = 2. ⇒ ktm = ln 2. We note that F (0) = 0 and F (∞) = 1. ⇒ tm = ln 2 .
Later. Head or Tail for a coin toss. allele A or a in genetics). In the ﬁrst case.8. we compared the treatment of two types of mass distributions. In particular.2 Discrete versus continuous probability In Chapter 5.4. we were interested in the idea of density (mass per unit distance: Note that the units of mass density are not the same as the units of mass. we talked about the mass of the objects.g. In the second case. k 8. In Chapter 7. we will see that one can arrive at the idea of probability density by reﬁning a set of measurements and making the appropriate scaling. T →∞ 165 To compute IT we use integration by parts: T T IT = 0 tke−kt dt = k 0 te−kt dt. we considered a single “bar” with a continuous distribution of density along its length.) In the ﬁrst case. Then du = dt. say x = a and x = b.) As we have seen so far in this chapter. there was an unambiguous meaning to the concept of “mass at a point”. v = e−kt /(−k). we were concerned with the probability of discrete events whose outcome belongs to some ﬁnite set of possibilities (e. .3. (To do so we had to integrate the mass density on the interval a ≤ x ≤ b. the same dichotomy exists in the topic of probability. we have e−kT → 0 so that 1 ¯ t = lim IT = . we could assign a mass to some section of the bar between. Let u = t. T →∞ k Thus the mean or expected decay time is ¯ 1 t= . We ﬁrst explored a set of discrete masses strung along a “thin wire”. dv = e−kt dt.4. Applications of continuous probability and then set ¯ t = lim IT . The example below provides some further insight to the connection between continuous and discrete probability. so that IT = k t e−kt − (−k) e−kt dt (−k) T 0 T 0 T = −te−kt + e−kt dt 0 e−kt = −te−kt − k = −T e−kT e−kT 1 − + k k Now as T → ∞. We explore this connection in more detail below. whereas in the latter case.
000 data values38 . Here. ∆h If we do this. it does not get ﬂatter). Suppose we want to record this distribution in more detail. we might plot number of students in the bin . i. we might reorganize the data slightly. so would the height of the bar: there would be fewer students in each category if we increase the number of categories. This would produce about 30. For example. by a “bin” we mean a little interval of width ∆h where h is height.e. To keep the bar height from shrinking.4. a height interval. If we were to plot the number of students in each height category.5 and 3 meters. with the number of students in each height category represented by the heights of the bars.5m. we could subdivide the student body into those students between 0 and 1. (An example is shown in Figure 8. .5(b)). We could divide the population into smaller groups by shrinking the size of the interval or “bin” into which height is subdivided. Reﬁning a histogram by increasing the number of bins leads (eventually) to the idea of a continuous probability density.5(a).5. We observe that in this case. we could keep track of the heights in increments of 50 cm.166 Chapter 8. For example.e. as shown in Figure 8. We could make a graph and show how these heights are distributed. Instead of plotting the number of students in each bin. 38 I am grateful to David Austin for developing this example. and those between 1. then as the size of the bins gets smaller. then both numerator and denominator decrease as the size of the bins is made smaller. so that the shape of the distribution is preserved (i.3 Example: Student heights Suppose we measure the heights of all UBC students. The important point to consider is that the height of each bar in the plot represents the number of students per unit height. the number of students in a given height category is represented by the area of the bar corresponding to that category: Area of bin = ∆h number of students in the bin ∆h = number of students in the bin. Our bar graph would contain two bars. Continuous probability distributions 8. p(h) p(h) p(h) h Δh Δh h h Figure 8.
It is thus a density.4. Understanding the connection between the verbal description and the symbols we use to represent these concepts requires practice and experience. Remark: note that. we get a probability density. We would like to answer the following questions: (a) What is the probability of dying by age a? (b) What is the probability of surviving to age a? (c) Suppose that we are told that F (75) = 0. divide by the total area under the graph.e.11. Let p(a) be a probability density for the probability of mortality of a female Canadian nonsmoker at age a. What is the probability of surviving to age 80? Which is larger. i. so we do not want to confuse the notation for variable of integration. Solution (a) The probability of dying by age a is the same as the probability of dying any time up to age a. p(h) for the height of the population. As noted.8. Further. where 0 ≤ a ≤ 120. as customary. for this probability density a F (a) = 0 p(x) dx. If we “normalize”. x is playing the role of a “dummy variable”. Related problems are presented in the homework. and contrast this with a discrete probability that is a pure number carrying no such units.4. As ∆h shrinks. this is the probability that the age of death is in the interval 0 ≤ age of death ≤ a. Interpret this information in plain English. and has the appropriate units. p(h) represents the fraction of students per unit height39 whose height is h. we consider an age distribution and interpret the meanings of the probability density and of the cumulative function. 8. estimate p(80) from this information.4 Example: Age dependent mortality In this example. The appropriate quantity is the cumulative function. We are integrating over all ages between 0 and a. x and endpoint of the interval a. (We have chosen an upper endpoint of age 120 since practically no Canadian female lives past this age at present.8 and that F (80) differs from F (75) by 0. Restated. we get a continuous graph. 39 Note in particular the units of h−1 attached to this probability density. F (75) or F (80)? (d) Use the information in part (c) to estimate the probability of dying between the ages of 75 and 80 years old. p(h) ∆h represents the fraction of individuals whose height is in the range h ≤ height ≤ h + ∆h. . Hence the symbol x rather than a inside the integral.) Let F (a) be the cumulative distribution corresponding to this probability density. In this case. Applications of continuous probability 167 This type of plot is precisely what leads us to the idea of a density distribution.
168
Chapter 8. Continuous probability distributions
(b) The probability of surviving to age a is the same as the probability of not dying before age a. By the elementary properties of probability discussed in the previous chapter, this is 1 − F (a). (c) F (75) = 0.8 means that the probability of dying some time up to age 75 is 0.8. (This also means that the probability of surviving past this age would be 10.8=0.2.) From the properties of probability, we know that the cumulative distribution is an increasing function, and thus it must be true that F (80) > F (75). Then F (80) = F (75) + 0.11 = 0.8 + 0.11 = 0.91. Thus the probability of surviving to age 80 is 10.91=0.09. This means that 9% of the population will make it to their 80’th birthday. (d) The probability of dying between the ages of 75 and 80 years old is exactly
80
p(x) dx.
75
However, we can also state this in terms of the cumulative function, since
80 80 75
p(x) dx =
75 0
p(x) dx −
0
p(x) dx = F (80) − F (75) = 0.11
Thus the probability of death between the ages of 75 and 80 is 0.11. To estimate p(80), we use the connection between the probability density and the cumulative distribution40: p(x) = F (x). (8.4) Then it is approximately true that F (x + ∆x) − F (x) . (8.5) ∆x (Recall the deﬁnition of the derivative, and note that we are approximating the derivative by the slope of a secant line.) Here we have information at ages 75 and 80, so ∆x = 80 − 75 = 5, and the approximation is rather crude, leading to p(x) ≈ p(80) ≈ F (80) − F (75) 0.11 = = 0.022 per year. 5 5
Several important points merit attention in the above example. First, information contained in the cumulative function is useful. Differences in values of F between x = a and x = b b are, after all, equivalent to an integral of the function a p(x)dx, and are the probability of a result in the given interval, a ≤ x ≤ b. Second, p(x) is the derivative of F (x). In the expression (8.5), we approximated that derivative by a small ﬁnite difference. Here we see at play many of the themes that have appeared in studying calculus: the connection between derivatives and integrals, the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus, and the relationship between tangent and secant lines.
40 In Eqn. (8.4) there is no longer confusion between a variable of integration and an endpoint, so we could revert to the notation p(a) = F (a), helping us to identify the independent variable as age. However, we have avoided doing so simply so that the formula in Eqn. (8.5) would be very recognizable as an approximation for a derivative.
8.4. Applications of continuous probability
169
8.4.5 Example: Raindrop size distribution
In this example, we ﬁnd a rather nonintuitive result, linking the distribution of raindrops of various radii with the distribution of their volumes. This reinforces the caution needed in interpreting and handling probabilities. During a Vancouver rainstorm, the distribution of raindrop radii is uniform for radii 0 ≤ r ≤ 4 (where r is measured in mm) and zero for larger r. By a uniform distribution we mean a function that has a constant value in the given interval. Thus, we are saying that the distribution looks like f (r) = C for 0 ≤ r ≤ 4. (a) Determine what is the probability density for raindrop radii, p(r)? Interpret the meaning of that function. (b) What is the associated cumulative function F (r) for this probability density? Interpret the meaning of that function. (c) In terms of the volume, what is the cumulative distribution F (V )? (d) In terms of the volume, what is the probability density p(V )? (e) What is the average volume of a raindrop? Solution This problem is challenging because one may be tempted to think that the uniform distribution of drop radii should give a uniform distribution of drop volumes. This is not the case, as the following argument shows! The sequence of steps is illustrated in Figure 8.6.
p(r)
(a)
F(r)
(b)
4 p(V)
(c)
r F(V)
4
(d)
r
V
V
Figure 8.6. Probability densities for raindrop radius and raindrop volume (left panels) and for the cumulative distributions (right) of each for Example 8.4.5.
170
Chapter 8. Continuous probability distributions
(a) The probability density function is p(r) = 1/4 for 0 ≤ r ≤ 4. This means that the probability per unit radius of ﬁnding a drop of size r is the same for all radii in 0 ≤ r ≤ 4, as shown in Fig. 8.6(a). Some of these drops will correspond to small volumes, and others to very large volumes. We will see that the probability per unit volume of ﬁnding a drop of given volume will be quite different. (b) The cumulative function is
r
F (r) =
0
r 1 ds = , 4 4
0 ≤ r ≤ 4.
(8.6)
A sketch of this function is shown in Fig. 8.6(b). (c) The cumulative function F (r) is proportional to the radius of the drop. We use the connection between radii and volume of spheres to rewrite that function in terms of the volume of the drop: Since 4 V = πr3 (8.7) 3 we have r= 3 4π
1/3
V 1/3 .
Substituting this expression into the formula (8.6), we get F (V ) = 1 4 3 4π
1/3
V 1/3 .
We ﬁnd the range of values of V by substituting r = 0, 4 into Eqn. (8.7) to get V = 0, 4 π43 . Therefore the interval is 0 ≤ V ≤ 4 π43 or 0 ≤ V ≤ (256/3)π. The 3 3 function F (V ) is sketched in panel (d) of Fig. 8.6. (d) We now use the connection between the probability density and the cumulative distribution, namely that p is the derivative of F . Now that the variable has been converted to volume, that derivative is a little more “interesting”: p(V ) = F (V ) Therefore, p(V ) = 1 4 3 4π
1/3
1 −2/3 V . 3
Thus the probability per unit volume of ﬁnding a drop of volume V in 0 ≤ V ≤ 4 π43 3 is not at all uniform. This probability density is shown in Fig. 8.6(c) This results from the fact that the differential quantity dr behaves very differently from dV , and reinforces the fact that we are dealing with density, not with a probability per se. We note that this distribution has smaller values at larger values of V .
8.5. Moments of a probability density (e) The range of values of V is 0≤V ≤ and therefore the mean volume is ¯ V =
0 256π/3
171
256π , 3
1/3 0 256π/3
V p(V )dV = 3 4π = 1 16
1/3 0 256π/3
1 12
3 4π
V · V −2/3 dV
1/3
=
1 12
V 1/3 dV = 256π 3
4/3
1 12 =
3 4π
3 4/3 V 4
256π/3 0
3 4π
1/3
64π ≈ 67mm3 . 3
8.5
Moments of a probability density
We are now familiar with some of the properties of probability distributions. On this page we will introduce a set of numbers that describe various properties of such distributions. Some of these have already been encountered in our previous discussion, but now we will see that these ﬁt into a pattern of quantities called moments of the distribution.
8.5.1 Deﬁnition of moments
Let f (x) be any function which is deﬁned and positive on an interval [a, b]. We might refer to the function as a distribution, whether or not we consider it to be a probability density. Then we will deﬁne the following moments of this function:
b
zero’th moment M0 =
a b
f (x) dx
ﬁrst moment M1 =
a b
x f (x) dx x2 f (x) dx
a
second moment M2 = . . .
b
n’th moment Mn =
a
xn f (x) dx.
Observe that moments of any order are deﬁned by integrating the distribution f (x) with a suitable power of x over the interval [a, b]. However, in practice we will see that usually moments up to the second are usefully employed to describe common attributes of a distribution.
172
Chapter 8. Continuous probability distributions
8.5.2 Relationship of moments to mean and variance of a probability density
In the particular case that the distribution is a probability density, p(x), deﬁned on the interval a ≤ x ≤ b, we have already established the following :
b
M0 =
a
p(x) dx = 1.
(This follows from the basic property of a probability density.) Thus The zero’th moment of any probability density is 1. Further
b
M1 =
a
x p(x) dx = x = µ. ¯
That is, The ﬁrst moment of a probability density is the same as the mean (i.e. expected value) of that probability density. So far, we have used the symbol x to represent the mean ¯ or average value of x but often the symbol µ is also used to denote the mean. The second moment, of a probability density also has a useful interpretation. From above deﬁnitions, the second moment of p(x) over the interval a ≤ x ≤ b is
b
M2 =
a
x2 p(x) dx.
We will shortly see that the second moment helps describe the way that density is distributed about the mean. For this purpose, we must describe the notion of variance or standard deviation. Variance and standard deviation Two children of approximately the same size can balance on a teetertotter by sitting very close to the point at which the beam pivots. They can also achieve a balance by sitting at the very ends of the beam, equally far away. In both cases, the center of mass of the distribution is at the same place: precisely at the pivot point. However, the mass is distributed very differently in these two cases. In the ﬁrst case, the mass is clustered close to the center, whereas in the second, it is distributed further away. We may want to be able to describe this distinction, and we could do so by considering higher moments of the mass distribution. Similarly, if we want to describe how a probability density distribution is distributed about its mean, we consider moments higher than the ﬁrst. We use the idea of the variance to describe whether the distribution is clustered close to its mean, or spread out over a great distance from the mean. Variance The variance is deﬁned as the average value of the quantity (distance f rom mean)2 , where the average is taken over the whole distribution. (The reason for the square is that we would not like values to the left and right of the mean to cancel out.) For discrete probability with mean, µ we deﬁne variance by
we arrive at V = M2 − 2µ µ + µ2 . Using the deﬁnitions. since they are simply moments of the probability distribution. . µ of the distribution. For a continuous probability density. Relationship of variance to second moment From the equation for variance we calculate that b V = a (x − µ)2 p(x) dx = b a (x2 − 2µx + µ2 ) p(x) dx. The standard deviation The standard deviation is deﬁned as √ V. Observe that the variance is related to the second moment. Expanding the integral leads to: b b b V = a b x2 p(x)dx − 2µx p(x) dx + a b a µ2 p(x) dx b = a x2 p(x)dx − 2µ x p(x) dx + µ2 a a p(x) dx. Thus V = M2 − µ2 .5. we deﬁne the variance by b V = a (x − µ)2 p(x) dx. σ= Let us see what this implies about the connection between the variance and the moments of the distribution. with mean µ. M2 and to the mean.8. Moments of a probability density 173 V = (xi − µ)2 pi . We recognize the integrals in the above expression.
as expected for a symmetric distribution. the standard deviation. b] and zero for values outside this interval41 . It has the shape of a rectangular band of height C and base (b − a). 2(b − a) 2 The value (b + a)/2 is a midpoint of the interval [a. We compute some of the moments of this probability density b M0 = a p(x)dx = 1 b−a b 1 dx = 1.) We also ﬁnd that b M1 = a x p(x) dx = 1 b−a b x dx = a 1 x2 b−a 2 b = a b 2 − a2 . To ﬁnd the variance we calculate the second moment. The median would be at the same place by a simple symmetry argument: half the area is to the left and half the area is to the right of this point. b−a a ≤ x ≤ b.3 Example: computing moments Consider a probability density such that p(x) = C is constant for values of x in the interval [a. The area under the graph of this function for a ≤ x ≤ b is A = C · (b − a) ≡ 1 (enforced by the usual property of a probability density). this is a uniform distribution. Thus we have found that the mean µ is in the center of the interval. b M2 = a x2 p(x) dx = 1 b−a b a x2 dx = 1 b−a x3 3 b = a b 3 − a3 . Thus p(x) = 1 . so it is easy to see that the value of the constant C should be C = 1/(b − a). a (This was already known. since we have determined that the zeroth moment of any probability density is 1.174 Chapter 8. 8. 3(b − a) Factoring simpliﬁes this to M2 = (b − a)(b2 + ab + a2 ) b2 + ab + a2 = . Continuous probability distributions Relationship of variance to second moment Using the above deﬁnitions. leading to µ = M1 = b+a (b − a)(b + a) = . 3(b − a) 3 41 As noted before. b]. σ can be expressed as √ σ = V = M2 − µ2 . . 2(b − a) This last expression can be simpliﬁed by factoring.5.
Summary The variance is then V = M2 − µ2 = The standard deviation is σ= (b + a)2 b2 − 2ab + a2 (b − a)2 b2 + ab + a2 − = = . b). xmed is the value for which F (xmed ) = 1 . and the standard deviation is This quantity describes the “width” of the distribution.) The mean and median are two descriptors for some features of probability densities. so that b p(x)dx = probability that x takes a value in the interval (a. . σ= √ V. or sometimes x called µ) is b x= ¯ a xp(x)dx whereas the median. a We also deﬁned and studied the cumulative function x F (x) = a p(s)ds = probability of a value in the interval (a. We noted that by the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus. F (x) is an antiderivative of p(x) (or synonymously. x). a long tail in one direction will shift the mean toward that direction more strongly than the median. we extended the discrete probability encountered in Chapter 7 to the case of continuous probability density. For p(x) deﬁned on an interval a ≤ x ≤ b and zero outside. 2 3 175 8.6 Summary In this chapter. The variance of a probability density is b V = a (x − µ)2 p(x) dx.8. the mean. 3 4 12 12 (b − a) √ . If the distribution is nonsymmetric. (¯.e.6. We deﬁned the n’th moment of a probability density as b Mn = a xn p(x)dx. how spread out (large σ) or clumped (small σ) it is. i. 2 Both mean and median correspond to the “center” of a symmetric distribution. p (x) = F (x). We learned that this function is a probability per unit value (of the variable of interest).
Most of these concepts are directly linked to the analogous ideas in discrete probability. . to deal with the continuous. but in this chapter.176 Chapter 8. Continuous probability distributions and showed that the ﬁrst few moments are related to mean and variance of the probability. we used integration in place of summation. rather than the discrete case.
4. 177 . and the acceleration is a second derivative of the x or y coordinate of the bob on the pendulum. for example. The importance and wide applicability of this topic cannot be overstated.2. The rate of growth of a population dN/dt depends on the size of that population at the given time N (t). we reviewed an example of a differential equation for velocity. In this chapter. For example. the force is due to gravity. In this course. Such equations are encountered in many areas of science. and discussed its solution. For a pendulum. leaving out many complicating details. In Section 4.1 Introduction A differential equation is a relationship between some (unknown) function and one of its derivatives. since we are concerned only with functions that depend on a single variable. In this process. we present a more systematic approach to solving such equations using a technique called separation of variables. of partial differential equations (PDE’s) can be studied. Most laws of physics are of this form. friction might be neglected in “modeling” a perfect pendulum. Now that we have techniques for integration. Examples of differential equations were encountered in an earlier calculus course in the context of population growth. The details of age distribution might be neglected in modeling a growing population. many simpliﬁcations are made so that the essential properties of a given system are captured. after a multivariate calculus course where partial derivatives are introduced. we discuss ordinary differential equations (ODE’s). links the position of a pendulum’s mass to its acceleration (second derivative of position). we apply the tools of integration to ﬁnding solutions to differential equations. applying the familiar Newton’s law. a wider class. and speed of a moving object subjected to friction. but here. (4. Constructing the differential equation that adequately represents a system of interest is an art that takes some thought and experience. and in any quantitative analysis of systems where rates of change are linked to the state of the system. the goal is to make a prediction 42 Newton’s law states that force is proportional to acceleration.Chapter 9 Differential Equations 9. which we call “modeling”.8).42 Many biological processes are also described by differential equations. F = ma. whereas later. we can devise a new approach to computing solutions of differential equations. temperature of a cooling object. Given a differential equation and a starting value.
can be restated as rate of change of y = rate of births − rate of mortality where the rate of births is given by the product of the per capita average birth rate b and the population size y. m are both constants is a simpliﬁcation that neglects many biological effects.1 A simple model for population growth Let y(t) represent the size of a population at time t. our exploration of differential equations was limited to those whose solution could be guessed. allowing us to compute the population size at any time t. We will assume that at time t = 0. Now that we have techniques of integration. we must keep in mind that such predictions are based on simplifying assumptions. environmental changes. Differential Equations about the future behaviour of the system. Solving the differential equation is accomplished by a new technique introduced here.2. We consider a population with per capita birth and mortality rates that are constant.178 Chapter 9. (both of which are here assumed to be constant over time). We build up a simple model (i. 9. we essentially convert information about the rate of change and starting level of the population to a detailed prediction of the population at later times. and the independent variable (e.g. those involving the ﬁrst derivative of the unknown function). the rate of mortality is given by my. and are to be taken as an approximation of any real population growth. disease. but will be used for simplicity in this ﬁrst example. or whose solution was supplied in advance. irrespective of age. . We want to ﬁnd the population at later times.e. i. the population level is speciﬁed. By going through this process.g.2 Unlimited population growth We start with a simple example that was treated thoroughly in the differential calculus semester of this course. This technique works for examples that are simple enough that we can isolate the dependent variable (e. and m > 0 the per capita average mortality rate.e. In differential calculus. Similarly. Suppose that b > 0 is the per capita average birth rate. We refer to such a function as the solution to the initial value problem (IVP). given information about birth and mortality rates. The population changes through births and mortality. The assumption that b. y(0) = y0 is some given constant. time t) on the other side. a differential equation) to describe this ideal case. we can ﬁnd the analytic solution to a variety of simple ﬁrstorder differential equations (i. Translating the rate of 43 Of course.43 9. This reduces the problem to integration and algebraic manipulation. This is equivalent to identifying the function that satisﬁes the given differential equation and initial value(s). namely separation of variables. We will describe the technique of separation of variables. y) on one side of the equation. We also explored some of the fascinating geometric and qualitative properties of such equations and their predictions. The statement that the population increases through births and decreases due to mortality.e. or other effects. and then proceed to ﬁnd its solution. We ask how a population in such ideal circumstances would change over time.
g. (9.1) is relatively simple. To determine the appropriate intervals for integration. which we are trying to determine. b < m means that there are more deaths than births.2 Separation of variables and integration We here introduce the technique. Now. the LHS of Eqn. the value of y(t) will 44 We may be tempted to integrate both sides of this equation with respect to the independent variable t. since the integral on dt the right hand side (RHS) can only be carried out if we know the function y = y(t).9. and the RHS only on t. writing dy dt = ky dt + C. y (9.1) Recall that a differential equation together with an initial condition is called an initial value problem. There is also a marginal case that b = m. The constant k will not interfere with any integration step. for which k = 0. We rearrange and rewrite the above equation in the form 1 dy = k dt. given its initial size at time t = 0. e. dt Rather than integrating this equation as is44 . (where C is some constant). where the population does not change at all.2. so that the population will eventually go extinct.1. this ﬁrst example will be relatively straightforward. We can distinguish two possible cases: b > m means that there are more births then deaths. To ﬁnd a solution to such a problem. we observe that when time sweeps over some interval 0 ≤ t ≤ T (from initial to ﬁnal time). 9. so we expect the population to grow. (9. considering dt and dy as “differentials” in the sense deﬁned in Section 6. Moreover. dt y(0) = y0 .2) can be carried out independently. we use an alternate approach.2) This step of putting expressions involving the independent variable t on one side and expressions involving the dependent variable y on the opposite side gives rise to the name “separation of variables”. (9. We would like to determine y(t) given the differential equation dy = ky. separation of variables. . we look for the function y(t) that describes the population size at any future time t. Since the differential equation (9. integrating each side of Eqn. k = b − m.2) depends only on the variable y. but this is not very useful. To summarize. this simple model of unlimited growth leads to the differential equation and initial condition: dy = ky.2. dt Let us deﬁne the new constant. that will be used in all the examples described in this chapter. Unlimited population growth change into the corresponding derivative of y leads to dy = by − my = (b − m)y. 179 Then k is the net per capita growth rate of the population.
9.4.1)).4 and use the new technique of separation of variables to shortcut the method of solution. (9. y0 y(T ) = ekT . we get y(0) = y0 ekt = y0 e0 = y0 . Simply differentiate Eqn. T . ln y(T ) = kT. Here y0 is the given starting value of y (prescribed by the initial condition in (9. i. By solving the initial value problem (9. We do not yet know y(T ).3) and show that the result is the same as k times the original function. In other words.2. a population will grow exponentially with time. We wish to derive the appropriate differential equation governing that velocity. so that the solution (9.3 Terminal velocity and steady states Here we revisit the equation for velocity of a falling object that we ﬁrst encountered in Section 4. We leave as an exercise for the reader45 to validate that the function in(9.3) satisﬁes the initial condition. we have determined that. y0 y(T ) = y0 ekT .e to predict the future behaviour of y. and ﬁnd the solution v(t) as a function of time. and to all the parameters of the problem.3) The above formula relates the predicted value of y at any time t to its initial value. arriving at the desired solution y(t) = y0 ekt . But this result holds for any arbitrary ﬁnal time. under ideal conditions.3) also satisﬁes the differential equation in (9. . Recall that this validates results that we had encountered in our ﬁrst calculus course.2. as in Section 4. Observe that plugging in t = 0.1). y0 0 ln y(T ) − ln y(0) = k(T − 0). Integrating leads to y(T ) y0 1 dy = y T T k dt = k 0 y(T ) T 0 dt.1). but our goal is to ﬁnd that value.1). We then include friction.2. We will ﬁrst reconsider the simplest case of uniformly accelerated motion (i. (9. as required by the equation (9.3. since this is true for any time we chose. where friction is neglected). ln y = kt .e. as in Section 4. we can set T = t. 45 This kind of check is good practice and helps to spot errors. Differential Equations change over a corresponding interval y0 ≤ y ≤ y(T ). when the net per capita growth rate t is constant.180 Chapter 9.
a frictional force retards the downwards motion. where C is an integration constant. the object starts from rest. i. for convenience. To a good approximation. In fact.2 Including friction: the case of terminal velocity When a falling object experiences the force of friction. which is equivalent to the statement that the velocity increases at a constant rate. . so γ a(t) = g − v(t).4). m 46 It is important to note the distinction between this simple example and other cases where separation of variables is required. (9. where γ is the frictional coefﬁcient. it cannot accelerate indeﬁnitely.3. dv = g.3. Plugging in v(0) = 0 into Eqn. dt (9. 9. so the constant we need is C = 0 and the velocity satisﬁes v(t) = gt. Terminal velocity and steady states 181 9. Writing dv dt = dt g dt + C = g dt + C.e.e. we arrive at v(t) = gt + C.5) leads to dt 0 = g · 0 + C = C. respectively of an object falling under the force of gravity at time t. a(t) = g.5) Here we have used (on the LHS) that v is the antiderivative of dv/dt. For an object of constant mass.3 (in slightly different notation). we can simplify the integral dv dt = dv = v). but it would just be “overkill”. It would not be wrong to use separation of variables to ﬁnd the solution for Eqn.9. When friction is neglected. since simple integration of the each side of the equation “as is” does the job. that force is proportional to the velocity. we can integrate each side of this equation directly46 . Suppose that at time t = 0. A force balance for the falling object leads to ma(t) = mg − γv(t). We take the positive direction to be downwards. we can divide through by m.1 Ignoring friction: the uniformly accelerated case Let v(t) and a(t) be the velocity and the acceleration. the object will accelerate.4) Because g is constant. We have just arrived at a result that parallels Eqn.4) of Section 4. (9. we do not need to use separation of variables. the initial velocity of the object is known to be v(0) = 0. i. (equivalently.3. (9. (4.2.
the velocity at any time satisﬁes the differential equation and initial condition dv = g − kv. Consider a time interval 0 ≤ t ≤ T .6) dt We can ﬁnd the solution to this differential equation and predict the velocity at any time t using separation of variables.0 Figure 9. v(0) = 0. v(T ) at the ﬁnal time. (9.2. 20.1. The velocity v(t) as a function of time given by Eqn. (9.7) as found in Section 9.3. The parameters used were g = 9. g − kv v(T ) 0 dv = g − kv T dt. and suppose that.0 0. Then using separation of variables and integration. 0 . the velocity changes from an initial value of v(0) = 0 to the ﬁnal value. during this time interval. we get dv = g − kv. T .5. Differential Equations Let k = γ/m. the velocity approaches some constant terminal velocity. Note that as time increases.182 Chapter 9.0 velocity v terminal velocity 0. dt dv = dt.8 m/s2 and k = 0. Then.0 time t 10.
g We are ﬁnished with the integration step. To simplify further. in general. u k After replacing u by g − kv. so we get an integral of the form − 1 k 1 1 du = − ln u. we can write g − kv(T ) = g − kv(T ) = ge−kT . v(T ) 0 T =t . Because the constant g is positive. As before. we could remove absolute values signs from it.3. we exponentiate both sides to remove the logarithm. v(T ) is still tangled up inside an expression involving the natural logarithm.e.9. but the function we are trying to ﬁnd. In the case we are considering here. we have to consider the sign of the term inside the absolute value in the numerator. dv = (−1/k)du. and ﬁnally solve for v(T ) to obtain our ﬁnal result. k − 1 k ln ln g − kv(T ) g = T. As a ﬁrst step. For the moment. k (9. v(T ) = g (1 − e−kT ). the above formula relating velocity to time holds for any choice of the ﬁnal time T .7) . Terminal velocity and steady states 183 Substitute u = g − kv for the integral on the left hand side. We will verify this fact shortly. we arrive at 1 − ln g − kv k We use the fact that v(0) = 0 to write this as 1 − (ln g − kv(T ) − ln g) = T. supposing this is true. g − kv(T ) = e−kT g ⇒ g − kv(T ) = ge−kT . Hence. 0 g − kv(T ) = −kT. g − kv(T ) ≥ 0). k Here we note that v(T ) can never be larger than g/k since the term (1 − e−kT ) is always ≤ 1. so we can write. v(t) = g (1 − e−kt ). v(0) = 0. This will mean that the quantity g − kv(T ) is always be nonnegative (i. Extricating it will involve some subtle reasoning about signs because there is an absolute value to contend with. Then du = −kdv. we were correct in assuming that g − kv(T ) ≥ 0.
k Thus.6) could be assembled using Euler’s method. k 9. the velocity of the falling object is indeed the same as the terminal velocity that we have just discovered. Differential Equations This is the solution to the initial value problem (9. (9. 9.4 Related problems and examples The example discussed in Section 9. similar plot of the solution of the differential equation (9. The steady state can be found by setting the derivative in the differential equation.e. with the same method as we applied to the problem of terminal velocity.1. Now. by letting dv = 0. . i. we arrive at g − kv = 0 ⇒ v= g . y(t) = 47 It 48 A a a −bt + y0 − e .11).6).3. It predicts the velocity of the falling object through time. i. The student may wish to review results obtained in a previous semester to appreciate the correspondence. as studied in differential calculus. at steady state. Properties of this equation were studied in the context of differential calculus in a previous semester.9) often happens that a differential equation can be solved using several different methods. we can integrate this equation by separation of variables. dt When this is done. Generally.3 Steady state We might observe that the terminal velocity can also be found quite simply and directly from the differential equation itself: it is the steady state of the differential equation. so that the velocity approaches a constant whose value is v(t) → We call this the terminal velocity48 .8) dt with given initial condition y(0) = y0 .184 Chapter 9.e. We arrive at its solution.3. We graph the expression given in (9. but using the technique of separation of variables47 . the term e−kt decreases rapidly. the value for which no further change takes place. (4.7) in Figure 9. That is the numerical method alternative to the analytic technique discussed in this chapter. to zero. this class is represented by linear differential equations of the form dy = a − by. Note that as t increases. writing dy = dt a − by and proceeding as in the previous example. Note that we have arrived once more at the result obtained in Eqn. b b (9.2 belongs to a class of problems that share many common features. g .
8) would describe the blood level over the period of drinking. We observe that the steady state of the above equation is obtained by setting 185 a dy = a − by = 0.1 Blood alcohol Let y(t) be the level of alcohol in the blood of an individual during a party. 9.e. Then an equation of the form (9. The constant b represents the rate of decay of alcohol per unit time due to degradation by the liver. dt b Indeed the solution given in the formula (9. y(0) = 0 would signify the absence of alcohol in the body at the beginning of the evening. 50 This is also a simplifying assumption.4. and the assumptions of the model may break down in that region! In the phase of “recovery”. the exponential term e−bt → 0 so that the term in large brackets will vanish and y → a/b. this level could be toxic to the drinker. i. It is possible to describe this.2 Chemical kinetics The same ideas apply to any chemical substance that is formed at a constant rate (or supplied at a constant rate) a. 49 Of course. . Suppose that the average rate of drinking is gradual and constant (i. small sips are continually taken. after drinking stops. y(0) = y0 . y will approach its steady state level.10) dt The level of blood alcohol then decays exponentially with rate b from its level at the moment that drinking ends. the above differential equation no longer describes the level of blood alcohol. where the intake and degradation balance. The solution (9. young healthy drinkers have a higher value of b than those who can no longer metabolize alcohol as efﬁciently. This means that from any initial value. Related problems and examples The steps are left as an exercise for the reader. 9. Most people do not drink this way. as though the alcohol is being continually sipped all evening at a uniform rate. Of course.9. Instead.e. y = . the level y = a/b represents a steady state level (as long as drinking continues). We show this typical pattern in Figure 9. instead quafﬁng a few large drinks over some hour(s). A few of these are mentioned below.9) has several features of note: it illustrates the fact that alcohol would increase from the initial level. the process of recovery is represented by dy = −by.2. Indeed. and then breaks down with rate proportional to its concentration. but only up to a maximum of a/b.4.9) has the property that as t increases. Further. (9. assume that alcohol is detoxiﬁed in the liver at a rate proportional to its blood level. we are here assuming a constant intake rate. We then call the constant b the “decay rate constant”. assumed constant50 . but we will not do so in this chapter. This equation has a number of important applications that arise in a variety of context. such as food intake. as the rate of metabolism can depend on other factors. so that the rate of input of alcohol is approximately constant). The constant a would reﬂect the rate of intake per unit volume of the individual’s blood: larger people take longer to “get drunk” for a given amount consumed49.4.
The level of alcohol in the blood is described by Eqn. At t = 2h. 9. We can derive a simple differential equation that describes the rate that the height of the ﬂuid changes using the following physical argument.1 Conservation of mass Suppose that the container is a cylinder. y = a/b. First. we henceforth consider the height of the ﬂuid surface. it shows precisely how physical laws can be combined to formulate a model. 9. the drinking stopped (so a = 0 from then on). (9.10).5 Emptying a container In this section we investigate a new problem in which the differential equation that describes a process will be derived from basic physical principles51 . so that we can talk about the net changes in volume (rather than mass). 9. The rate that ﬂuid leaves through the hole must balance with the rate that ﬂuid decreases in the container.2 0 0 2 4 6 8 10 Figure 9.186 Chapter 9. (9. with a constant cross sectional area A > 0. We will assume that the container has a small hole at its base.8 0. following Eqn. we will also use separation of variables to predict how long it takes for the container to be emptied. The rate of emptying of the container will depend on the height of ﬂuid in the container above the hole52 . Finally. We will here assume that the density of water is constant. and use mass balance to derive a differential equation model.3. then it shows how the problem can be recast as a single ODE in one dependent variable. given any initial level of the substance. Suppose that the area of the hole is a. As above. and the same differential equation describes this chemical process. 52 As we have assumed that the hole is at h = 0. We will look at the ﬂow of ﬂuid leaking out of a container.4 0. it illustrates a slightly different integral. y(t) = y0 . the level of y will eventually approach the steady state.2. . The level of alcohol in the blood then decays back to zero.8) for the ﬁrst two hours of drinking. h(t) to be the same as ”the height of ﬂuid above the hole”.6 0.5. The variable y(t) represents the concentration of chemical at time t. When this is done. 51 This example is particularly instructive. Differential Equations 1 Blood Alcohol level 0. This principle is called mass balance. as shown in Fig.
Note that for the cylindrical container. Suppose we are told that the velocity of the water molecules leaving the hole is precisely v(t) in units of cm/sec.) Then in one second. Indeed. We refer to V (t) as the volume of ﬂuid in the container at time t. Emptying a container 187 h A a a vΔ t Figure 9. A is the crosssectional area of the cylindrical tank.9. those particles have moved a distance v cm/sec · 1 sec = v cm. and h(t) is the time dependent height of ﬂuid remaining in the tank (indicated by the dashed line). all the particles in a little cylinder of length v behind these molecules have also left the hole. (We will ﬁnd out how to determine this velocity shortly. At every second. . some amount of ﬂuid leaves through the hole. V (t) = Ah(t) where A is the crosssectional area and h(t) is the height of the ﬂuid at time t. The rate of change of V is dV = −(rate volume lost as ﬂuid ﬂows out). we can determine precisely what volume of water exits through the hole each second.) So far we have a relationship between the volume of ﬂuid in the tank and the velocity of the water exiting the hole: dV = −av. In fact.5. dt (The minus sign indicates that the volume is decreasing). Thus the volume leaving per second is va. (The small inset in Fig. v(t) is the velocity of the ﬂuid.3 shows a little “cylindrical unit” of ﬂuid that ﬂows out of the hole per second. dt Now we need to determine the velocity v of the ﬂow to complete the formulation of the problem. 9.see small cylindrical volume indicated on the right. namely rate volume lost as ﬂuid ﬂows out = va. We investigate the time it takes to empty a container full of ﬂuid by deriving a differential equation model and solving it using the methods developed in this chapter. a is the crosssectional area of the hole through which ﬂuid drains. The area is a and the length of that little volume is v. if we know the area of the hole.3. The volume of ﬂuid leaking out in a time span ∆t is av∆t .
Differential Equations 9. Checking for unit consistency can help to uncover errors in equations. i. Potential energy of a small mass of water (m) at height h will be mgh. There are three timedependent variables that were discussed above.3 Putting it together We now combine the various pieces of information to arrive at the model.e.2 Conservation of energy The ﬂuid “picks up speed” because it has “dropped” by a height h from the top of the ﬂuid surface to the hole. for these to balance (so that total energy is conserved) we have 1 mv 2 = mgh.11) dV = −av = −a 2gh.188 Chapter 9. v 2 = 2gh ⇒ v= 2gh. We can simplify as follows: d(Ah(t)) d(h(t)) dV = =A . including differential equations. V (t) is related to the height of ﬂuid h(t) by V (t) = Ah(t). h(t). its kinetic energy is given by (1/2)mv 2 where v is velocity.5. whereas when the water ﬂows out of the hole. so we might write [v(t)]2 = 2gh(t) or v(t) = 2gh(t). (9. Keeping units in an equation consistent is essential. of the velocity v(t). In doing so.12) . 2 (Here v = v(t) is the instantaneous velocity of the ﬂuid leaving the hole and h = h(t) is the height of the water column. dt dt dt But by previous steps and Eqn. dt √ 2gh = −k h. the crosssectional area of the tank. Thus. where A > 0 is a constant.11) In fact. (9. dh a =− dt A d(h(t)) = −a 2gh. dt Thus A or simply put. the height h(t). the volume V (t). 9.5. though this choice is to some extent arbitrary. both the height of ﬂuid and its exit velocity are constantly changing as the ﬂuid drains. We have arrived at this result using an energy balance argument. (9. Recall that the volume of the water in the tank. a differential equation for a single (unknown) function of time. It proves convenient to express everything in terms of the height of water in the tank. a small mass of water has simply exchanged some potential energy (due to its relative height above the hole) for kinetic energy (expressed by how fast it is moving).) This allows us to relate the velocity of the ﬂuid leaving the hole to the height of the water in the tank.
To obtain that relationship. this equation is valid only for h nonnegative. we arrive at initial value problem to solve: √ dh = −k h. dh √ = −kdt.13) Clearly. However. Once its height has been reduced. Putting this together with the initial condition (height of ﬂuid h0 at time t = 0).9.e. (9. rewrite the equation in the separated form. but we are interested in an explicit formula for ﬂuid height h versus time t. (We will also use the initial condition h(0) = h0 that accompanies Eqn. 9. On a planet with a very high gravitational force. Using simple principles such as conservation of mass and conservation of energy. nonlinear differential equations are more challenging than linear ones. Next.) As usual. the same tank will drain more quickly. h(T ) h0 1 √ dh = −k h T dt.13) is √ nonlinear53 as it involves the variable h in a nonlinear term.13). (9. Emptying a container where k is a constant that depends on the size and shape of the cylinder and its hole: k= a A 2g.5. during which the height of ﬂuid that started as h0 becomes some new height h(T ) to be determined. We also remark that Eqn. then k will be very small. 0 Now integrate both sides and simplify: h1/2 (1/2) 2 h(T ) h0 = −kT h0 = −kT h(T ) − 53 In many cases. we use separation of variables to ﬁnd the height as a function of time. h We integrate from t = 0 to t = T .12). signifying that the height of the ﬂuid decreases.13) shows how height of ﬂuid is related to its rate of change.4 Solution by separation of variables The equation (9.12) has a minus sign. we have shown that the height h(t) of water in the tank at time t satisﬁes the differential equation (9. A taller column of water drains faster. . h. so that the tank will drain very slowly (i. its rate of draining also slows down. the rate of change in h per unit time will not be large). We do this using separation of variables. dt h(0) = h0 . (9. we must determine the solution to this differential equation. We comment that Equation (9. examples chosen in this chapter are simple enough that we will not experience the true challenges of such nonlinearities.5. 189 If the area of the hole is very small relative to the crosssectional area of the tank.
Differential Equations h0 T 2 2 h0 − k . Solution curves obtained by plotting Eqn. h0 = 2.14) Eqn.4 in each case.0 Figure 9.14) for three different initial heights of ﬂuid in the container.e. (9. functions of the form Eqn. (9. 10.14) for a variety of initial ﬂuid height values h0 . The parameter k = 0. 54 As before. .4 we show some of the “solution curves”54 . (9. In Fig. 9.14) predicts ﬂuid height remaining in the tank versus time t.0 0.0 emptying time V time t 20. this ﬁgure was produced by plotting the analytic solution (9.0 <= initial height of fluid h(t) Emptying a fluidfilled container 0. we can also write the form of the solution as h(t) = h0 − k t 2 2 . (9.5. i. as shown in the next section.4. 5.190 h(T ) = −k h(T ) = T + 2 Chapter 9. The “V” points to the time it takes the tank to empty starting from a height of h(t) = 10. Since this is true for any time t. 10.13).14). A numerical method alternative would use Euler’s Method and the spreadsheet to obtain the (approximate) solution directly from the initial value problem (9. We can also use our results to predict the emptying time.
15) Here r > 0 is called the intrinsic growth rate and K > 0 is called the carrying capacity. The logistic differential equation states that the rate of change of the population is given by dN = rN dt K −N K . we expect N (t) ≥ 0 for all time t. We can understand this equation as a modiﬁed growth law in which the “density dependent” term. we get k te = 2 h0 ⇒ te = √ 2 h0 . that doubling the √ height of ﬂuid initially in the tank only increases the time it takes by a factor of 2 ≈ 1. .6. The emptying time depends on the squareroot of the initial height. since we have found that √ k = (a/A) 2g. Three examples are shown in Figure 9. replaces the previous constant net growth rate k.41.5 How long will it take the tank to empty? The tank will be empty when the height of ﬂuid is zero.5. 10. r(K − N )/K. for instance.6 Density dependent growth The simple model discussed in Section 9. (9. 9. In place of our previous notation we will now use N to represent the size of a population. 9. Let N (t) be the size of a population at time t.14 h0 − k t 2 2 = 0.4 for initial heights of h0 = 2. We will assume that the initial population is known. and we study its behaviour below. Clearly. Setting h(t) = 0 in Eqn. This means.2 for population growth has an unrealistic feature of unlimited explosive exponential growth. 9. Density dependent growth 191 9. we consider a revised differential equation that describes such growth. In this section. since a population cannot be negative. 5. k The time it takes to empty the tank depends on the initial height of water in the tank. a common assumption is that the rate of growth is “density dependent”. To correct for this unrealistic feature.9.5. N (0) = N0 . Solving this equation for the emptying time te .6. and use the new tools to analyze its predictions. K reﬂects that size of the population that can be sustained by the given environment. Making the hole smaller has a more direct “proportional” effect.1 The logistic equation The logistic equation is the simplest density dependent growth equation.
forming d( N ) K =r dt N K 1− N K .6.15) by the constant K. (9. but unlike Eqn. 9. but is somewhat more involved. The idea is essentially the same as our previous examples. and y0 = N0 /K is the scaled initial population level.4.2 Scaling the equation The form of the equation can be simpliﬁed if we measure the population in units of the carrying capacity. Then 1 dN r = N K dt K We now group terms conveniently. That is. y(1 − y) . K This procedure is called scaling.6. Here again is an initial value problem.4 Application of partial fractions Let I= 1 dy. Replacing (N/K) by y in each case. To show an alternative method of handling the integration.e. instead of “numbers of individuals”. Details are given in Section 9. 9.16) dt Now the variable y(t) measures population size in “units” of the carrying capacity. To see this. We can do so by partial fractions. consider dividing each side of the logistic equation (9. (9.6. if we deﬁne a new quantity y(t) = N (t) . K −N K . The integral on the right will lead to rt + K where K is some constant of integration that we need to incorporate since we do not have endpoints on our integrals. But we must work harder to evaluate the integral on the left. we will treat both sides as indeﬁnite integrals.192 Chapter 9. the variable y appears in a nonlinear expression (in fact a quadratic) in the equation.6. the technique described in Section 6. we obtain the scaled equation and initial condition given by dy = ry(1 − y).16) by separation of variables. y(0) = y0 . (9. the logistic differential equation is nonlinear.13).3 Separation of variables Here we will solve Eqn.1). (9.6. Separating the variables leads to 1 dy = r dt y(1 − y) 1 dy = y(1 − y) r dt + K. Differential Equations 9. like Eqn. i.
y(t) 1 + Cert = Cert . we ﬁnd that y(0) = Ce0 = C. y 1−y 193 (The minus sign in front of B stems from the fact that letting u = 1 − y would lead to du = −dy. Indeed.6. 1−y 9. C > 0 is now also an arbitrary constant whose value will be determined from the initial conditions. B from the fact that A B 1 + = . (1 − y(0)) so that C= y0 . In that case. (1 − y(t)) In the above step. (1 − y0 ) We will use this fact shortly. B = 1 so that y I = ln y − ln 1 − y = ln . We will now assume that y is initially smaller than 1. y 1−y y(1 − y) so that A(1 − y) + By = 1.5 The solution of the logistic equation We now have to extract the quantity y from the equation ln y 1−y = rt + K. What remains now is some algebra to isolate the desired function y(t) y(t) = (1 − y(t))Cert . if we substitute t = 0 into the most recent equation. Density dependent growth Then for some constants A.6. everything inside the absolute value is positive. and show that it remains so.9. This must be true for all y. That is. B we can write I= B A + dy = A ln y − B ln 1 − y. . eK by the new name C for simplicity. substituting in y = 0 and y = 1 leads to A = 1.) We can ﬁnd A. After exponentiating both sides we need to remove the absolute value. and in particular. and we can write y(t) = ert+K = eK ert = Cert . we have simply renamed the constant. we want y as a function of t.
by using what we know to be true about the constant C. and the constants r.1. (9.0 y(t) Solutions to Logistic equation 0. we arrive at y(t) = 1 1+y0 −rt y0 e +1 = y0 . 0.0 Figure 9.5. When we do so. (9.e. y0 . (9. 9. y0 = 0. The level of population (in units of the carrying capacity K) follows the timedependent function y0 . We show the predicted behaviour of y(t) as given by Eqn. 0.18) y(t) = (y0 + (1 − y0 )e−rt ) .e.16).5. C. i.5. Differential Equations Cert 1 = .194 y(t) = Chapter 9.17) for three different initial conditions.0 0. i. C = y0 /(1 − y0 ).17) Some typical solution curves of the logistic equation are shown in Fig. We can also express it in terms of the initial value of y. (y0 + (1 − y0 )e−rt ) (9.18). Solution curves for y(t) in the scaled form of the logistic equation based on (9. (1 + Cert ) (1/C)e−rt + 1 The desired function is now expressed in terms of the time t. Note that all solutions approach the value y = 1.25.0 time t 30.6.6 What this solution tells us We have arrived at the function that describes the scaled population as a function of time as predicted by the scaled logistic equation. 1. 9.
y = 0 is also a steady state. Substituting this for y(t).) Similarly. at which no further change will occur. this could have been found by setting the derivative to zero in Eqn. As an aside.e. given by Eqn.e. is the population size that will be sustained by the environment. unscaled logistic differential equation.19). This means that e−rt is a decreasing function of time. and in particular the use of partial fractions allowed us to make a full prediction of the behaviour of the population level as a function of time. It states the obvious fact that if there is no population.19) N (t) = (N0 + (K − N0 )e−rt ) It is left as an exercise for the reader to check this claim. the carrying capacity. Extensions and other population models: the “Law of Mortality” 195 We can convert this result to an equivalent expression for the unscaled total population N (t) by recalling that y(t) = N (t)/K. By setting dy/dt = 0. Here we extend tools to another example.7. a steady state. Doing so leads to dN = 0 ⇒ rN dt K −N K = 0. the term e−rt in the denominator will be negligibly small. then there can be no population growth. The former is not too interesting. (9.15). We saw in Figure 9. (9. could have been predicted directly from the differential equation. Now recall that r > 0. the original. we observe that this too. (9. The latter reﬂects that N = K. The population will thus settle into a constant level. but only up to some constant level (the carrying capacity). If r > 0.18) implies that. (9. Integration. 9. we have shown that the behaviour of the logistic equation for population growth is more realistic than the simpler exponential growth we studied earlier.. This means that (N/K) → 1 or simply N (t) → K.7 Extensions and other population models: the “Law of Mortality” There are many variants of the logistic model that are used to investigate the growth or mortality of a population. (This is also true for the less interesting case of no population. which suggests that y = 1 is a steady state. y(t) → y0 so that y will approach the value 1. i. the gradual decline of . i. that a small population will grow.9. the only values of N satisfying this steady state equation are N = 0 or N = K. In summary. we ﬁnd that 0 = ry(1 − y). after a long time. This implies that either N = 0 or N = K are steady states.5. Therefore. and so y0 = 1. and noting that y0 = N0 /K leads to N0 .
and increase as individuals age. as depicted by Eqn. we can trade ”age” for ”time”. (9. 56 In 55 This .196 Chapter 9. For real populations. 9. For simplicity we deﬁne Let us deﬁne m0 = eA . Such a group is called a “cohort”. (m0 = m(0) is the socalled “birth mortality” i. Then Eqn.20 and by the solid curve in this diagram.) Thus. together with the following additional assumptions.21) 9.e.20) means that (9.55. value of m at age 0. Here the slope of ln(m) versus time (or age) is µ. t Figure 9. Differential Equations a group of individuals born at the same time. Infant mortality is generally higher than mortality for young children.6. This turns out to be equivalent to the assumption that the logarithm of mortality increases linearly with time. the mortality looks more like the dashed curve. m would depend on the age of the individuals. this is likely true for some range of ages. so is eA . Gompertz argued that mortality increases exponentially.1 Aging and Survival curves for a cohort: We now study a population model having Gompertz mortality.7. ln(m(t)) = A + µt. In the Gompertz Law of Mortality.56 It is easy to see that these two statements are equivalent: Suppose we assume that for some constants A > 0. m(t) = eA+µt = eA eµt Since A is constant. whereas mortality levels off or even decreases slightly for those oldest old who have survived past the average lifespan. section was formulated with help from Lu Fan actual fact. Gompertz assumed that mortality is not constant: it is low at ﬁrst. In 1825. µ > 0.20) log mortality ln(m) slope µ A age. Gompertz suggested that the rate of mortality. Essentially. Because we consider a group of people who were born at the same time. it is assumed that the log of mortality increases linearly with time. (9. the timedependent mortality is m = m(t) = m0 eµt .
with initial population level y(0) = y0 dt was investigated (Eqn. (9.2 Gompertz Model All the people in the cohort were born at time (age) t = 0. we arrive at the differential equation dN (t) = −m(t)N (t).8. 9.7. and assume that no new individuals are introduced (e.9. 197 2. We consider a single cohort. The rate of change of cohort size = −[number of deaths per unit time] = −[mortality rate] · [cohort size] Translating to mathematical notation. We will denote by N (t) the number of people in this group who are alive at time t. Together.1). but now mortality is timedependent. N (0) = N0 .e. age. We will now study the size of a “cohort”. Exponential growth. Let N (0) = N0 be the initial number of individuals in the cohort. we apply separation of variables and integrate over the time interval [0. i. In the Problem set. but no other type of removal. 3. That number changes with time due to mortality. this leads to the initial value problem dN (t) = −m(t)N (t). where t is time since birth.1)). by immigration)57. and there were N0 of them at that time. This means we ignore the mortality caused by epidemics. This model had an unrealistic feature that growth is unlimited.g. dt and using information about the size of the cohort at birth leads to the initial condition. (9. by violence and by wars. Indeed. All individuals are assumed to be identical. 9. Summary 1. given by dy = ky.e. a group of people who were born in the same year. We investigated a number of population growth models: 1. dt N (0) = N0 . i. Note similarity to Eqn.8 Summary In this chapter. 57 Note that new births would contribute to other cohorts. There is “natural” mortality. we used integration methods to ﬁnd the analytical solutions to a variety of differential equations where initial values were prescribed. T ]: to show that the remaining population at age t is N (t) = N0 e− m0 µ (eµt −1) . .
and predict the population as a function of time.15)). Section 9. The Gompertz equation. The Logistic equation dN = rN K−N was analyzed (Eqn. 3.198 Chapter 9. Differential Equations 2. and biology. physics. (9. we can use dt results to understand chemical kinetics and blood alcohol levels. This led us to study a differential equation of the form dy = a − by. By slight reinterpretation of terms in this equation. In each of these cases. Such ideas occur in many scientiﬁc problems. Here we saw how conservation statements and simplifying assumptions are interpreted together. showing that dt K densitydependent growth can correct for the above unrealistic feature. illustrated the detailed steps that go into the formulation of a differential equation model for ﬂow of liquid out of a container. We also investigated several other physical models in this chapter. in chemistry. as well as a host of other scientiﬁc applications. was solved to understand how agedt dependent mortality affects a cohort of individuals. to arrive at a differential equation model. we used separation of variables to “integrate” the differential equation.5. . including the velocity of a falling object subject to drag force. dN (t) = −m(t)N (t). the “centerpiece” of this chapter.
In this chapter. also called Taylor series.1.e. The theme of approximation has appeared often in our calculus course. Notice that this better approximation stays closer to the graph of the function near x0 . polynomials containing inﬁnitely many terms). we discuss how such better approximations can be obtained.i. y LA HOA y=f(x) x0 x Figure 10. The ﬁrst of these is to understand how concepts that were discussed for ﬁnite series and integrals can be meaningfully extended to inﬁnite series and improper integrals . dashed line) at the point x0 . Such series can be described informally as inﬁnite polynomials (i. Understanding when these objects are meaningful is also related to the issue of convergence. improper integrals. A second theme will be that of approximation of functions in terms of power series. and a better “higher order” approximation (HOA. In a previous 199 .e.Chapter 10 Inﬁnite series. thin solid curve). and Taylor series 10. The function y = f (x) (solid heavy curve) is shown together with its linear approximation (LA. integrals of functions over an inﬁnite domain. In this part of the discussion. so we use the background assembled in the ﬁrst part of the chapter to address such concepts arising in the second part. we will ﬁnd that the notion of convergence and divergence will be important.1 Introduction This chapter has several important and challenging goals.
This idea forms an important goal in this chapter. and Taylor series semester. Our goal is to increase the accuracy of the linear approximation by including higher order terms (quadratic. k=0 That is.2 Convergence and divergence of series Recall the geometric series discussed in Section 1. we say that the inﬁnite series converges58 to S. improper integrals. is Sn = 1 − rn+1 . Further away. we say that the series diverges. Otherwise it is divergent. we consider the inﬁnite series as the limit of partial sums Sn as the number of terms n is increased. This leads naturally to the question: can we do better in making this approximation if we include other terms to describe this “curving away”? Here we extend such linear approximation methods. The sum of a ﬁnite geometric series.6.1) We also review deﬁnitions discussed in Section 1.200 Chapter 10. We say that the sum of the inﬁnite series is S. 10. We noted in doing so that the approximation was good only close to the point of tangency.7 Deﬁnition: Convergence of inﬁnite series An inﬁnite series that has a ﬁnite sum is said to be convergent. . + r n = k=0 rk . . to ﬁnd a polynomial that approximates the given function. Then the partial sums. We ﬁrst review the idea of series introduced in Chapter 1. cubic.e. the graph of the functions curves away from that straight line. If this limit exists. Inﬁnite series. n Sn = 1 + r + r 2 + . Deﬁnition: Partial sums and convergence Suppose that S is an (inﬁnite) series whose terms are ak . we discussed a linear approximation to a function. This leads to the following conclusion: 58 If the limit does not exist. i. and write ∞ n S= k=0 ak . . 1−r (10. The idea was to approximate the value of the function close to a point on its graph using a straight line (the tangent line). provided that S = lim Sn = lim n→∞ n→∞ ak . Sn . of this series are n Sn = k=0 ak . etc).
In the bottom example. Divergent series (or series that diverge under certain conditions) must be handled with particular care. the sum of the steps gets closer and closer to some (ﬁnite) value. + rk + . each step is a term in the series.2. = k=0 rk = 1 . "convergence" "divergence" Figure 10. In order for the sum of ‘inﬁnitely many things’ to add up to a ﬁnite number. It is important to remember that an inﬁnite series. .) There are rigorous mathematical tests which help determine whether a series converges or not. the terms have to get smaller. can exhibit either one of these two very different behaviours. In the top example. . Here we show only a few terms of the inﬁnite series: from left to right. But just getting smaller is not. It is essential to be able to distinguish the two.e. 1−r provided r < 1. the steps lead to an ever increasing total sum. .}.9. . We will see examples of each of these trends again. . then we say that this sum does not exist (meaning that it is not ﬁnite). . . in itself. as the ﬁrst example shows. . for otherwise. a sum with inﬁnitely many terms added up. we may ﬁnd contradictions or “seemingly reasonable” calculations that have meaningless results. We discuss some of these tests in Appendix 11. . (10. S converges if that distance remains ﬁnite and if we approach some ﬁxed number. ∞ we can think of S = k=0 ak as the total distance we have travelled. If we start on the number line at the origin and take a sequence of steps {a0 .10. . ak .2) If this inequality is not satisﬁed. i. We can think of convergence or divergence of series using a geometric analogy. It may converge in some cases. or diverge (fail to converge) in other cases. Convergence and divergence of series 201 The sum of an inﬁnite geometric series. . . a2 .2. (We will show this later on by considering the harmonic series. An informal schematic illustrating the concept of convergence and divergence of inﬁnite series. a1 . ∞ S = 1 + r + r2 + . enough to guarantee convergence.
e.5. Deﬁnition When the limit shown above exists.5 and in the context of radioactive decay in Section 8. and then taking a limit as the endpoint b moves off to larger and larger values.4. a i.5 and 8. (We have seen this earlier.g.4. as the endpoint b moves to larger values. With this in mind. as given in the following deﬁnition: ∞ b f (x) dx = lim a b→∞ f (x) dx. Other wise we say that the improper integral diverges. and again in applications in Sections 4. i.e. improper integrals. ∞ f (x) dx. r b→∞ r b→∞ r 0 . The deﬁnite integral can be interpreted as an area under the graph of the function. Here we recap this important result in the context of our discussion of improper integrals. and Taylor series 10. in Section 3.3.) For some functions (whose values get small enough fast enough) the answer is “yes”. Recall the following deﬁnition: Deﬁnition An improper integral is an integral performed over an inﬁnite domain. we evaluate an improper integral by ﬁrst computing a deﬁnite integral over a ﬁnite domain a ≤ x ≤ b. We have already encountered an example of an improper integral in Section 3.3 Improper integrals We will see that there is a close connection between certain inﬁnite series and improper integrals.e. we say that the improper integral converges.8. The essential question being addressed here is whether that area remains bounded when we include the “inﬁnite tail” of the function (i. e. Inﬁnite series.1 Example: A decaying exponential: convergent improper integral Here we recall that the improper integral of a decaying exponential converges. 0 Then note that b > 0 so that 1 I = lim − e−rt b→∞ r b 0 =− 1 1 1 lim (e−rb − e0 ) = − ( lim e−rb −1) = .) Suppose that r > 0 and let ∞ b I= 0 e−rt dt ≡ lim b→∞ e−rt dt.202 Chapter 10.1.8. integrals over an inﬁnite domain. we compute a number of classic integrals: 10. a The value of such an integral is understood to be a limit.
we compute an improper integral for each one.1. Thus the limit exists (is ﬁnite) and the integral converges.3. ∞). x Examining the graph of this function for positive x. . f (x) = 1/x and f (x) = 1/x2 . In fact it converges to the value I = 1/r. ∞) because this function is undeﬁned at x = 0. We say that the improper integral of 1/x diverges (or does not converge). To do so.3. but also falls to arbitrarily small values as x increases. Improper integrals 203 We have used the fact that limb→∞ e−rb = 0 since (for r. e. ∞).2 and 10.3. Consider the function y = f (x) = 1 .3. The function is not only itself bounded. and one of the most important results in this chapter. but not the other encloses a ﬁnite (bounded) area over the interval (1. this is not enough to guarantee that the enclosed area remains ﬁnite! We show this in the following calculation. 59 We do not chose the interval (0. b > 0) the exponential function is decreasing with increasing b.4. that is the limit does not exist (is not ﬁnite). Nevertheless.3. ∞ I= 1 1 dx = lim b→∞ x b a 1 dx = lim ln(x) b→∞ x b→∞ b 1 = lim (ln(b) − ln(1)) b→∞ I = lim ln(b) = ∞ The fact that we get an inﬁnite value for this integral follows from the observation that ln(b) increases without bound as b increases. We show that one. We will use this result again in Section 10.3. not the blow up that occurs close to x = 0. Thus the area under the curve f (x) = 1/x over the interval 1 ≤ x ≤ ∞ is inﬁnite. In Sections 10. 10.10. we know that values decrease to zero as x increases59 . We want here to emphasize the behaviour at inﬁnity. y y= 1/x y=1/x 2 x 1 Figure 10. The heavy arrow is meant to remind us that we are considering areas over an unbounded domain. for the interval (1.2 Example: The improper integral of 1/x diverges We now consider a classic and counterintuitive result. we consider two functions whose values decrease along the x axis.g.
that the area under its graph does not become inﬁnite . Inﬁnite series. p. The former diverges. and Taylor series 10. improper integrals.3. in contrast to the Example 10. in fact.3. diverges if p ≤ 1. this integral converges.3).204 Chapter 10.3 Example: The improper integral of 1/x2 converges Now consider the related function y = f (x) = Then b b 1 . 10.3. = lim (−x−1 ) 1 b→∞ 1 = − lim b→∞ 1 −1 b = 1.3. Thus. We ask when the corresponding improper integral converges or diverges. p−1 ∞ 1 1 dx xp converges if p > 1.not an easy concept to digest!) This observations leads us to wonder what power p is needed to make the improper integral of a function 1/xp converge. The only difference between these functions is the power of x. = lim I = lim b→∞ 1 − p b→∞ (1 − p) 1 To summarize our result. Thus this integral converges provided that the term b1−p does not “blow up” as b increases. . xp For p = 1 we have already established that this integral diverges (Section 10. i. that power affects how rapidly the graph “falls off” to zero as x increases. We observe that the behaviours of the improper integrals of the functions 1/x and 1/x2 are very different.2). and for p = 2 we have seen that it is convergent (Section 10. In this case. As shown in Figure 10.2. The function 1/x2 decreases much faster than 1/x. For this to be true.4 When does the integral of 1/xp converge? Here we consider an arbitrary power. and. x2 ∞ and the corresponding integral I = 1 1 dx x2 I = lim b→∞ x−2 dx. Let ∞ I= 1 1 dx. the limit exists. that can be any real number. We answer this question below.3.e.3. 1 − p < 0 or p > 1. we have 1 I= . (Consequently 1/x2 has a sufﬁciently “slim” inﬁnite “tail”. we require that the exponent (1 − p) should be negative. I = 1. while the latter converges. we ﬁnd that b 1 x1−p b1−p − 1 . By a similar calculation. so.
) ∞ 2. √ 1 x = x 2 . 1 converges.10. If a ∞ g(x) dx converges. moreover.e. the ﬁrst function is smaller than the second.9. The following important result establishes how these comparisons work: Suppose we are given two functions. Improper integrals Examples: 1/xp that do or do not converge 205 1.. Thus.then” is important. The integral ∞ < 1. 60 The reader should notice the similarity of these ideas to the comparisons made for inﬁnite series in the Appendix 11. 0 ≤ f (x) ≤ g(x).3. i. so is the smaller one) 3.) a These statements have to be carefully noted. then a g(x) dx diverges. The integral ∞ 1 1 √ dx. (If the smaller area is inﬁnite.01 > 1. This similarity stems from the fact that there is a close connection between series and integrals. Suppose. so the result implies convergence of the integral. f (x) and g(x).2. (If the larger area is ﬁnite. 10. ∞). . so p = 1 2 We see this from the following argument: general result. 2. That is the order “if. Then the following conclusionsa can be made: ∞ ∞ 1. (This means that the area under f (x) is smaller than a the area under g(x). Reversing that order leads to a common error. What is assumed and what is concluded works “one way”. x diverges.01 dx. both continuous on some inﬁnite interval [a. at all points on this interval. so is the larger one.5 Integral comparison tests The integrals discussed above can be used to make comparisons that help us to identify when other improper integrals converge or diverge60.3. a recurring theme in this course. that. this integral diverges. a f (x) dx ≤ ∞ g(x) dx. then a ∞ f (x) dx converges. Here p = 1. by the x−1. If a f (x) dx diverges.
simply because the successive terms being added are getting smaller and smaller. Here we give an example of this type by establishing a connection between the harmonic series and a divergent improper integral.9. i. in Section 1.2. Many tests for convergence are provided in the Appendix 11. but this appearance is deceptive and actually wrong61 .e. . if x = k is an integer. . 2. and will not be discussed in detail due to time and space constraints.. Convergence of series and convergence of integrals is related. 62 This function is “related” since for integer values of x. At ﬁrst appearance. the function takes on values that are the same as successive terms in the series... k 2 3 4 k diverges We establish that the harmonic series diverges by comparing it to the improper integral of the related function62. and Taylor series Example: comparison of improper integrals We can determine that the integral ∞ 1 x dx 1 + x3 converges by noting that for all x > 0 0≤ Thus ∞ x x 1 ≤ 3 = 2. Inﬁnite series. However. This is the topic we examine here. as we show here using a comparison of the series and the integral. so does the smaller integral on the left. 1 y = f (x) = .1 The harmonic series The harmonic series is a sum of terms of the form 1/k where k = 1. These two “surprises” are closely related.206 Chapter 10.7 and here again in Section 10. . an interesting connection exists between convergence of series and integrals..+ + .4 Comparing integrals and series The convergence of inﬁnite series was discussed earlier. improper integrals.. 10. then f (x) = f (k) = 1/k .4. this series might seem to have the desired qualities of a convergent series. We can use the convergence/divergence of an integral/series to determine the behaviour of the other. x 61 We have already noticed a similar surprise in connection with the improper integral of 1/x. 10. 1 + x3 x2 1 1 Since the larger integral on the right is known to converge. The harmonic series ∞ k=1 1 1 1 1 1 = 1 + + + + . 1 + x3 x x ∞ 1 x dx ≤ dx.
0 <==== the function y=1/x The harmonic series 0.. Comparing integrals and series 207 1.0 11..} 2 3 4 Thus the area of (inﬁnitely many) of these steps can be expressed as the (inﬁnite) harmonic series.0 0. x 1 .10. k On the other hand. and a staircase area representing the ﬁrst few terms in the harmonic series.4 we show on one graph a comparison of the area under this curve. . and the heights form the sequence 1 1 1 {1..2. the area under the graph of the function y = f (x) = 1/x for 0 ≤ x ≤ ∞ is given by the improper integral ∞ 1 dx. = 1 + + + + .4. The harmonic series is a sum that corresponds to the area under the staircase shown above. This is essential in drawing the conclusion that the sum of the series is inﬁnite: It is larger than an area under 1/x that we already know to be inﬁnite. by Section 10. A= 1·1+1· 1 1 1 1 1 1 + 1 · + 1 · + . . .3. we note that the width of each step is 1.4. . Note that we have purposely shown the stairs arranged so that they are higher than the function.. In Figure 10. = 2 3 4 2 3 4 ∞ k=1 1 . .0 Figure 10. . For the area of the staircase.
exponential . Notice. and Taylor series We have seen previously in Section 10. plugging in an x value and determining the corresponding y value) can be done by simple multiplications and additions. however. so that this series diverges. We found long ago that it is easy to compute derivatives of polynominals. i. We needed only use a power rule to integrate each term. so is the larger (the sum of the harmonic series). Other comparisons: The “p” series More generally. since the smaller of the two (the improper integral) is inﬁnite. (i. This leads to the conclusion that The “p” series. ∞ k=1 1 kp converges if p > 1.e. Our introduction to differential calculus started with such functions for a reason: these functions are convenient and simple to handle. Af and under the staircase.4 we see that the areas under the function. Inﬁnite series. say. One of our ﬁrst examples. We have established.5 From geometric series to Taylor polynomials In studying calculus. k2 4 9 16 converges.e.e. For example. we explored a variety of functions.. using this comparison. that the the sum of the harmonic series cannot be ﬁnite. 10.3.. Thus. by basic operations easily handled by an ordinary calculator. diverges if p ≤ 1. Among the most basic are polynomials. trigonometric functions. satisfy 0 < Af < As . that the comparison does not give us a value to which the sum converges. An additional convenience of polynomials is that “evaluating” the function. It merely indicates that the series does converge.2 that this integral diverges! From Figure 10. The same can be said for integrals. This is not the case for. functions such as p(x) = x5 + 2x2 + 3x + 2. improper integrals.6. the series ∞ k=1 1 1 1 1 =1+ + + + . As . we can compare series of the form ∞ k=1 1 kp ∞ to the integral 1 1 dx xp in precisely the same way.1 was the integral of a polynomial. i. since p = 2 > 1. in Section 3.208 Chapter 10.
.1 without using a calculator.5)) Compute the value of the function f (x) given by Eqn. most other functions we considered63. .2 that the sum of an inﬁnite geometric series is ∞ S = 1 + r + r2 + . We use both the results for convergence of the geometric series (from Section 10.3).5. We can arrive at connections between several functions and their polynomial approximations by exploiting our familiarity with the geometric series. 1−r provided r < 1.10. n. since powerful handheld calculators are ubiquitous. the ease of evaluating polynomials made them even more important. 64 We say “haphazard” here because we are not yet at the point of a systematic procedure for computing a Taylor Series.4) Then for every x in −1 < x < 1.1 and 10.3) hold only provided r = x < 1. while remembering that the formula in Eqn (10. . . 1−x We can think of this result as follows: Let f (x) = 1 1−x (10. To emphasize that now r is our variable. to ﬁnd the decimal value of sin(2. 65 A Taylor polynomial contains ﬁnitely many terms. rewriting the above with this substitution.5) for x = 0. 63 For example. From geometric series to Taylor polynomials 209 functions. we need a “variable”.6) to approximate the function (10.6. . + rk + . This forms our main concern in the sections that follow. it will be helpful to change notation by substituting r = x into the above equation.5. Recall from Sections 1.3) To connect this result to a statement about a function. Example 10. That will be done in Section 10. for x < 1 the two expressions “are the same”. (10. . (10.2) and the formula for the sum of that series to derive a number of interesting. For this reason. 10. it is true that f (x) can be approximated by terms in the polynomial p(x) = 1 + x + x2 + . (somewhat haphazard) results64 . These days the distinction is blurred. in the sense that the polynomial converges to the value of the function.3).7. We refer to this p(x) as an (inﬁnite) Taylor polynomial65 or simply a Taylor series for the function f (x).6) In other words.1 Example 1: A simple expansion Substitute the variable x = r into the series (10. = k=0 rk = 1 .1 (Using the Taylor Series (10. Before such devices were available. . or for that matter. (10. . being able to approximate a function by a polynomial is an attractive proposition.5) (10. The usefulness of this kind of result can be illustrated by a simple example. Then formally. by (10.5) we would need a scientiﬁc calculator. Here we “take what we can get” using simple manipulations of a geometric series. leads to the conclusion that 1 = 1 + x + x2 + . whereas a Taylor series has n → ∞. . Let us consider the behaviour of this series when we vary the quantity r.
and Taylor series Solution: Plugging in the value x = 0.. 1 − (−t) 1 = 1 − t + t2 − t3 + t4 + . . .7) 66 This example is slightly “trivial”. = 1 + 0.5. This is an important restriction that we emphasize: Manipulation of inﬁnite series by integration. .. in the sense that evaluating the function itself is not very difﬁcult.2.5.1) = 1/0. = 1. We provide a few other examples based on substitutions of various sorts using the geometric series as a starting point. so that the formula (10. = 2 3 4 ∞ (−1)k+1 k=1 xk . provided t < 1 1+t This means we have produced a series expansion for the function 1/(1 + t).01 + . differentiation.3 Example 3: An expansion for the logarithm We will use the results of Example 10. 2 3 4 ln(1 + x) = x − This procedure has allowed us to ﬁnd a series representation for a new function. Provided t < 1. . . whereby we integrate both sides to arrive at a new function and its expansion.1 + 0. However. Using the polynomial representation.. . improper integrals. shown next. Inﬁnite series. then r < 1 means that  − t = t < 1.9. whose evaluation with no calculator requires long division66 . . .210 Chapter 10. addition. or any other “term by term” computation makes sense only so long as the original series converges. 10. we will ﬁnd that the polynomial expansion is the only way to ﬁnd the desired value. On the left.1) = 1 + 0. k (10..12 + . . ln(1 + x) = x − x2 x3 x4 + − + . we have that x 0 1 dt = 1+t x 0 (1 − t + t2 − t3 + t4 − .2 Example 2: Another substitution We make the substitution r = −t.) dt x3 x4 x2 + − + . multiplication.1 into the function directly leads to 1/(1 − 0. . . We can go farther with this example by a new manipulation.11 . in other cases.5. we have a simpler method: p(0.3) for the sum of a geometric series implies that: 1 = 1 + (−t) + (−t)2 + (−t)3 + . . but we follow our substitution by integration. 10. We are permitted to integrate the power series term by term provided that the series converges. we integrate the function f (t) = 1/(1 + t) (to arrive at a logarithm type integral) and on the right we integrate the power terms of the expansion.1 + 0. ln(1 + x). .
e. 2 3 so the approximation produced by the series is relatively good. This example illustrates that outside the interval of convergence. in the sense that (without a scientiﬁc calculator or log tables) it is not possible to easily calculate the value of this function at a given point.2231. . and recall that we need r < 1 for convergence. we have ln(1 + x) = ln(0) which is undeﬁned. We are usually interested only in the ﬁrst few terms of such a series in any approximation of practical value.25) = ln(1.4 Example 4: An expansion for arctan Suppose we make the substitution r = −t2 into the geometric series formula. and 3 2 addition (0. Example 10.. 2 3 4 We state without proof here that the alternating harmonic series converges to ln(2). Example 10. From geometric series to Taylor polynomials 211 The formula appended on the right is just a compact notation that represents the pattern of the terms. we should have ensured that we are inside this interval of convergence before we computed the last example.. we cannot ﬁnd ln(1 + 0.25) using simple operations.7) expected to converge? Retracing our steps from the beginning of Example 10. . .25 ≈ 0.5. Recall that in Chapter 1. Thus.10.25.5.3 (An expansion for ln(2)) Strictly speaking.4. We certainly cannot expect the series for ln(1 + x) to converge when x > 1. we must avoid x = −1. and converges. division. and neither is the function deﬁned.25) ≈ 0. for x = 0.2239). that 1 1 1 ln(2) = 1 − + − + . Then 1 = 1 + (−t2 ) + (−t2 )2 + (−t2 )3 + . for x = −1. 2 3 4 This is the recognizable harmonic series (multiplied by 1). Indeed. our analysis does not predict what happens if we substitute x = 1 into the expansion of the function found in Section 10. .2 (Evaluating the logarithm for x = 0. we have gotten thoroughly familiar with such summation notation67.25) An expansion for the logarithm is deﬁnitely useful.5. 68 Strictly speaking. 1 − (−t2 ) 67 The summation notation is not crucial and should certainly not be memorized. .) When is the series for ln(1 + x) in (10. For example.7) becomes 1 1 1 − 1 + + + + .2 we note that the value of t is not permitted to leave the interval t < 1 so we need also x < 1 in the integration step68 . whereas the value of the ﬁrst few terms of the series are computable by simple multiplication. Also note that for x = −1 the right hand side of (10.25 − 0. It takes some deeper mathematics (Abel’s theorem) to prove that the result of this substitution actually makes sense. i.3. the series and the function become “meaningless”.1 that the harmonic series diverges.25 + 0.5. But we already know from Section 10. . since the expansion will not converge there. because this value of x is outside of the permitted range −1 < x < 1 in which the Taylor series can be guaranteed to converge. (A scientiﬁc calculator gives ln(1. 10.
(−1)k+1 3 5 7 (2k − 1) k=1 While it is true that this series converges. ..) 10. and recall that the antiderivative of the function 1/(1 + t2 ) is arctan(t). the convergence is slow. = a0 .4 (An expansion for π) For a particular application of this expansion. ∞ f (x) = a0 + a1 x + a2 x2 + a3 x3 + . = 4 ..) dt x3 x5 x7 + − + . = 1 + t2 ∞ (−1)n t2n k=0 This series will converge provided t < 1. namely ∞ 1 1 1 1 π = 4 1 − + − + .5. (2k − 1) (10. if we are given a function that we want to approximate 69 . Inﬁnite series.) This means that it is not practical to use such a series as an approximation for π. Thus we have found a way of computing the irrational number π. Suppose we have a function which we want to represent by a power series.. Here we ask how such Taylor series can be constructed more systematically. . = 3 5 7 ∞ arctan(x) = x − (−1)k+1 k=1 x(2k−1) .8). and Taylor series 1 = 1 − t2 + t4 − t6 + t8 + . 3 5 7 But arctan(1) = π/4. We conclude that a0 = f (0). . . 69 The development of this section was motivated by online notes by David Austin.. . let x = 0 and note that f (0) = a0 + a1 0 + a2 02 + a3 03 + . .8) Example 10.212 Chapter 10. . To determine a0 ...6 Taylor Series: a systematic approach In Section 10. = k=0 ak xk . (There are other series that converge to π very rapidly that are used in any practical application. consider plugging in x = 1 into Equation (10. improper integrals. Now integrate both sides. (This can be seen by adding up the ﬁrst 100 or 1000 terms of this series with a spreadsheet. Here we will use the function to directly determine the coefﬁcients ak . we found a variety of Taylor series expansions directly from the formula for a geometric series. . Then x 0 1 dt = 1 + t2 x 0 (1 − t2 + t4 − t6 + t8 + . Then arctan(1) = 1 − 1 1 1 + − + . .
. . . ⇒ a1 = f (0) ⇒ a2 = ⇒ a3 = ⇒ ak = f (0) 2 f (0) 2·3 f (k) (0) k! This gives us a recipe for calculating all coefﬁcients ak . So that the coefﬁcients of the Taylor series are ak = f (k) (0) 1 = . . f (0) = 2 · 3a3 .+ +. = 2 6 ∞ k=0 xk k! . Further.1 Taylor series for the exponential function. Then f (0) = a1 . the function deﬁned by the series is in fact equal to ex that is. ex = 1 + x + x2 x3 + + . + kak xk−1 + . . . .10. This means that if we can compute all the derivatives of the function f (x). . . Because we have evaluated all the coefﬁcients by the substitution x = 0. 213 Here we have used the notation f (k) (x) to denote the k’th derivative of the function. = 1+x+ xk k! k=0 This is a very interesting series. f (0) = 2a2 . 2a2 + 2 · 3a3 x + . Taylor Series: a systematic approach By differentiating both sides we ﬁnd the following: f (x) f (x) f (x) f (k) (x) = = = = a1 + 2a2 x + 3a3 x2 + . We state here without proof that this series converges for all values of x. f (k) (0) = k!ak . . . 10.+ak xk +. + (k − 1)kak xk−2 + . + (k − 2)(k − 1)kak xk−3 + . . In particular.6. 1 · 2 · 3 · 4 .6. . All the derivatives of this function are equal to ex . . Now evaluate each of the above derivatives at x = 0. . k! k! x2 x3 x4 xk + + +. . then we know the coefﬁcients of the Taylor series as well. . ex Consider the function f (x) = ex . . . kak + .. . = 2 6 24 k! ∞ Therefore the Taylor series for ex about x = 0 is a0 +a1 x+a2 x2 +a3 x3 +. 2 · 3a3 + . f (k) (x) = ex ⇒ f (k) (0) = 1.. we say that the resulting power series is the Taylor series of the function about x = 0. . . . .
1 1 . Inﬁnite series. derivatives of all orders) at x = 0. a3 = − Thus. = (−1)n . Doing this kind of thing will be the subject of the last computer laboratory exercise in this course. the substitution u = x2 leads to ex = 1 + x2 + 2 (x2 )2 (x2 )3 + + .. = 2 6 ∞ k=0 (x2 )k k! 10. We can use the results of this example to establish the fact that the exponential function grows “faster” than any power function xn ..214 Chapter 10. and so on in a cyclic fashion. This means that f (0) = 0. = 2 6 ∞ k=0 uk k! Then. f (0) = −1. so that the expansion converges to the function for all x. . . .2 Taylor series of trigonometric functions In this example we determine the Taylor series for the sine function. the value of the function at x = 1. We can also easily obtain a Taylor series expansion for functions related to ex . 3! 5! sin x = x − x3 x5 x7 x2n+1 + − + . improper integrals. . We leave this as an exercise for the reader. a). 000 is determined by the behaviour of the function around x = 0. . In other words.6. a2 = 0. for example. as was the case here. It is instructive to demonstrate how successive terms in a Taylor series expansion lead to approximations that improve. a0 = 0. f (0) = 0. f (x) = − sin x. f (0) = 1. without assembling the derivatives.. The function and its derivatives are f (x) = sin x. and Taylor series The implication is that the function ex is completely determined (for all x values) by its behaviour (i. a4 = 0. f (x) = cos x. f (x) = − cos x. After this.e. . If a function f (x) agrees with its Taylor polynomial on a region (−a. 3! 5! 7! (2n + 1)! n=0 ∞ We state here without proof that the function sin(x) is analytic. 000. the cycle repeats. . We start with the result that eu = 1 + u + u3 u2 + + .. . f (4) (x) = sin x. . . a5 = . It is known that ex is analytic for all x. This means that ex is a very special function with superior “predictable features”. we say that f is analytic on this region.. In other words. That is the same as saying that the ratio of ex to xn (for any power n) increases with x.. a1 = 1.
5! 7! Then these polynomials provide a better and better approximation to the function sin(x) close to x = 0.5. together with some calculations as done in this section.0 T1 T3 T2 sin(x) T4 2. An approximation of the function y = sin(x) by successive Taylor polynomials. The higher Taylor polynomials do a better job of approximating the function on a larger interval about x = 0. 3! 3 x + T3 (x) = x − 3! x3 + T4 (x) = x − 3! T2 (x) = x − x5 .0 0.0 7.10. T3 . consider the sequence of polynomials T1 (x) = x.5 illustrates how the ﬁrst few Taylor polynomials approximate the function sin(x) near x = 0. Here we demonstrate this idea with the expansion for the function sin(x) that we just obtained. T2 . to produce a composite graph similar to Fig. The student will be asked to use the spreadsheet. Observe that as we keep more terms. 10. T4 . T1 . Taylor Series: a systematic approach 215 2. 5! x5 x7 − . The ﬁrst of these is just a linear (or tangent line) approximation that we had studied long ago. in the polynomial Tn (x).5 for some other function. the approximating curve “hugs” the graph of sin(x) over a longer and longer range. . The second improves this with a quadratic approximation. x3 . Figure 10. etc. To see this. n.0 Figure 10.6.
9333 that is much closer and T4 (2) ≈ .11. u = x2 ) will not work here. i. and we cannot ﬁnd an antiderivative. we can approximate the size of the error using the next term that would occur in the polynomial if we kept a higher order expansion.667 which is too small.g. In some cases. The details of estimating such errors is omitted from our discussion. its graph is symmetric to rotation about the origin.. Here is how we might approach the problem using Taylor series: We know that the . Inﬁnite series.2 and another in Appendix 11. We show this in Section 10. In general. = (−1)n . 10.) We leave as an exercise for the reader to show that cos(x) = 1 − x4 x6 x2n x2 + − + . so we can ﬁnd the Taylor series for cos(x) by simple differentiation term by term.7 Application of Taylor series In this section we illustrate some of the applications of Taylor series to problems that may be difﬁcult to solve using other conventional methods. But in this case. we ﬁnd that its Taylor series is composed of even powers of x only. Another application of Taylor series is to compute an approximate solution to a differential equation. as we cannot use the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus speciﬁes. 2 4! 6! (2n)! n=0 ∞ Since cos(x) has symmetry properties of an even function. 10.. A simple substitution (e. this is unnecessary: We already know the expansion for sin(x). the error in the approximation between the polynomials and the function is the vertical distance between the graphs of the polynomial and the function sin(x) (shown in black).5 (The error in successive approximations) For a given value of x close to the base point (at x = 0). We also note that all polynomials that approximate sin(x) contain only odd powers of x. which is very inaccurate.9079 that is closer still.e. a concept we discussed in an earlier term. and Taylor series Example 10. T2 (2) = 2 − 23 /3! ≈ 0.216 Chapter 10. Some functions do not have an antiderivative that can be expressed in terms of other simple functions. This stems from the fact that sin(x) is an odd function.1. T3 (2) ≈ 0.7. this is permitted for all x. we can approximate the value of the deﬁnite integral using a Taylor series. For example.7. (Since sin(x) is analytic. We provide one example of that sort in Section 10. The approximations are: T1 (2) = 2. Integrating these functions can be a problem.9093 (as found on a scientiﬁc calculator). at x = 2 radians sin(2) = 0.1 Example 1: using a Taylor series to evaluate an integral Evaluate the deﬁnite integral 1 0 sin(x2 ) dx. improper integrals. The Taylor series for cos(x) could be found by a similar sequence of steps.7.
the pattern becomes clear: the series converges to 0. dx y(0) = 1.7.. from previous work. . we can antidifferentiate the Taylor series. this option would have great practical value. In some cases. Differentiating this power series leads to dy = a1 + 2a2 x + 3a3 x2 + 4a4 x3 + . dy = y.. we know that the solution of this differential equation and initial condition is y(x) = ex . 3 7 · 3! 11 · 5! 15 · 7! This is an alternating series so we know that it converges. where separation of variables does not work. Let us express the “unknown” solution to the differential equation as y = a0 + a1 x + a2 x2 + a3 x3 + a4 x4 + . Application of Taylor series series expansion for sin(t) is sin t = t − Substituting t = x2 . . Our task is to determine values for the coefﬁcients ai Since this function satisﬁes the condition y(0) = 1..2 Example 2: Series solution of a differential equation We are already familiar with the differential equation and initial condition that describes unlimited exponential growth.. Indeed.7.10.. but we will pretend that we do not know this fact in illustrating the usefulness of Taylor series.. If we add up the ﬁrst four terms.. just as we would a polynomial: 1 1 sin(x2 ) dx = 0 0 (x2 − x6 x10 x14 + − + . we have sin(x2 ) = x2 − x10 x14 x6 + − + .31026.. 3! 5! 7! 217 In spite of the fact that we cannot antidifferentiate the function. 10. . 3 7 · 3! 11 · 5! 15 · 7! 1 1 1 1 − + − + .) dx 3! 5! 7! 1 0 = = x3 x7 x11 x15 − + − + . . . . we must have y(0) = a0 = 1. 3! 5! 7! t5 t7 t3 + − + . dx .
We computed some examples of improper integrals and discussed their convergence or divergence. . This can only happen if the coefﬁcients of like terms are the same. = y. This agrees with the solution we have been expecting. . a1 = 2a2 . a2 = 3a3 . = a1 + 2a2 x + 3a3 x2 + 4a4 x3 + .. x3 xn x2 + + . it must be true that the two Taylor a0 + a1 x + a2 x2 + a3 x3 + a4 x4 + . We recalled (from earlier chapters) that ∞ I= 0 e−rt dt converges.8 Summary The main points of this chapter can be summarized as follows: 1. whereas I= 1 ∞ 1 dx x diverges.e. Equating coefﬁcients.218 Chapter 10. i. series match.+ + . and so on for all powers of x. and Taylor series dy dx But according to the differential equation.. Inﬁnite series. y =1+x+ 10. is the expansion for the exponential function. 2 ⇒ a3 = ⇒ a4 = ⇒ an = a2 3 a3 4 = = 1 2·3 . but in the next example. 1 2·3·4 .. = ex . 2! 3! n! which. This equality hold for all values of x. This means that ⇒ a1 = 1. if the constant terms on either side of the equation are equal.. Thus. We reviewed the deﬁnition of an improper integral ∞ b f (x) dx = lim a b→∞ f (x) dx. an−1 n = 1 1·2·3. .11. if the terms of the form Cx2 on either side are equal.e. as we have seen.n = 1 n! . In the example here shown. . we obtain: a0 = a1 = 1. a3 = 4a4 . . . i. we would hardly need to use series to arrive at the right conclusion. 1 ⇒ a2 = a1 = 2 . We provide an example of a more complicated differential equation and its series solution in Appendix 11. . we would not ﬁnd it as easy to discover the solution by other techniques discussed previously. improper integrals. a 2. an−1 = nan .
. How good is that approximation? Another interesting question is: (c) If we include more and more such terms. our results led to the conclusion that the “p” series. we showed that the Taylor series for a function about x = 0. k 2 3 4 k diverges.e.. 4. ∞ f (x) = a0 + a1 x + a2 x + a3 x + . Two examples of Taylor series that were obtained in this way are ln(1 + x) = x − and arctan(x) = x − x2 x3 x4 + − + . to ﬁnd an approximation for a deﬁnite integral of a function. + + . diverges if p ≤ 1. ∞ k=1 1 1 1 1 1 = 1 + + + + . We studied Taylor series and showed that some can be found using the formula for convergent geometric series. More generally. does that approximation get better and better? (i. 5. We used Taylor series to approximate a function. . In discussing Taylor series... 2 3 4 x3 x5 x7 + − + ... We discussed some of the applications of Taylor series.8. . Using a comparison between integrals and series we showed that the harmonic series. More generally. More generally. ∞ k=1 1 kp converges if p > 1.. Summary 3.. 3 5 7 for x < 1 for x < 1 7. we considered some of the following questions: (a) For what range of values of x can we expect the series to converges? (b) Suppose we approximate the function on the right by a ﬁnite number of terms on the left.. we showed that ∞ 1 219 1 dx xp converges if p > 1.10. diverges if p ≤ 1. can be found by computing the coefﬁcients ak = f (k) (0) k! 9. = k=0 2 3 ak xk . 8. 6. does the series converge to the function?) (d) Is the convergence rate rapid? Some of these questions occupy the attention of career mathematicians. and to solve a differential equation. and are beyond the scope of this introductory calculus course. .
improper integrals. Inﬁnite series.220 Chapter 10. and Taylor series .
Proof by induction (optional) Here. the “sum” of just one or just two terms of the series).g. we prove the formula for the sum of square integers. also for purposes of illustration uses a “trick”. it has to also work for the next case (summing up to N + 1). Devising such tricks is not as straightforward. we verify that this formula works for a few test cases: N = 1: If there is only one term. N k2 = k=1 N (N + 1)(2N + 1) . The ﬁrst. The second argument. Here we provide a taste of how such careful arguments works. First. by inspection. While it is not hard to see that these formulae “work” for a few cases. The idea of the method is to check that the formula works for one or two simple cases (e. then clearly. and then show that whenever it works for one case (summing up to N ). 6 using a technique called induction. determining that they work in general requires more work.Chapter 11 Appendix 11. k=1 221 . We give two examples. 1 k 2 = 12 = 1.1 How to prove the formulae for sums of squares and cubes Mathematicians are concerned with rigorously establishing formulae such as sums of squared (or cubed) integers. based on mathematical induction provides a general method that could be used in many similar kinds of proofs. and depends to some degree on serendipity or experience with numbers.
222 The formula indicates that we should get
Chapter 11. Appendix
1(2)(3) 1(1 + 1)(2 · 1 + 1) = = 1, 6 6 so this case agrees with the prediction. N = 2: S=
2
k 2 = 12 + 22 = 1 + 4 = 5.
k=1
The formula would then predict that 2(2 + 1)(2 · 2 + 1) 2(3)(5) = = 5. 6 6 So far, elementary computation matches with the result predicted by the formula. Now we show that if this formula holds for any one case, e.g. for the sum of the ﬁrst N squares, then it is also true for the next case, i.e. for the sum of N + 1 squares. So we will assume that someone has checked that for some particular value of N it is true that S=
N
SN =
k=1
k2 =
N (N + 1)(2N + 1) . 6
Now the sum of the ﬁrst N + 1 squares will be just a bit bigger: it will have one more term added to it:
N +1 N
SN +1 =
k=1
k2 =
k=1
k 2 + (N + 1)2 .
Thus SN +1 = Combining terms, we get
N (N + 1)(2N + 1) + (N + 1)2 . 6 N (2N + 1) + (N + 1) , 6
SN +1 = (N + 1) SN +1 = (N + 1)
2N 2 + 7N + 6 2N 2 + N + 6N + 6 = (N + 1) . 6 6 Simplifying and factoring the last term leads to (2N + 3)(N + 2) . 6 We want to check that this still agrees with what the formula predicts. To make the notation simpler, we will let M stand for N + 1. Then, expressing the result in terms of the quantity M = N + 1 we get SN +1 = (N + 1)
M
SM =
k=1
k 2 = (N + 1)
[2(N + 1) + 1][(N + 1) + 1] [2M + 1][M + 1] =M . 6 6
This is the same formula as we started with, only written in terms of M instead of N . Thus we have veriﬁed that the formula works. By Mathematical Induction we ﬁnd that the result has been proved.
11.2. Riemann Sums: Extensions and other examples Another method using a trick70
n n
223
There is another method for determining the sums
k=1
k 2 or
k=1
k 3 . Write
(k + 1)3 − (k − 1)3 = 6k 2 + 2, so
n n
k=1
(k + 1)3 − (k − 1)3 =
(6k 2 + 2).
k=0
But looking more carefully at the left hand side (LHS), we see that
n
k=1
((k + 1)3 − (k − 1)3 ) = 23 − 03 + 33 − 13 + 43 − 23 + 53 − 33 ... + (n + 1)3 − (n − 1)3 .
most of the terms cancel, leaving only −1 + n3 + (n + 1)3 , so this means that
n n
−1 + n3 + (n + 1)3 = 6 so
n k=1
k2 +
k=1 k=1
2,
k 2 = (−1 + n3 + (n + 1)3 − 2n)/6 = (2n3 + 3n2 + n)/6.
n
Similarly, the formula for
k=1
k 3 , can be obtained by starting with (k + 1)4 − (k − 1)4 = 4k 3 + 4k.
11.2 Riemann Sums: Extensions and other examples
We take up some issues here that were not yet considered in the context of our examples of Riemann sums in Chapter 2 . First, we consider an arbitrary interval a ≤ x ≤ b. Then we comment on other ways of constructing the rectangular strip approximation (that eventually lead to the same limit when the true area is computed.)
11.2.1
Example 2: (Lu Fan)
A general interval: a ≤ x ≤ b
Find the area under the graph of the function y = f (x) = x2 + 2x + 1
70 I
a ≤ x ≤ b.
want to thank Robert Israel for contributing this material
224
Chapter 11. Appendix
Here the interval is a ≤ x ≤ b. Let us leave the values of a, b general for a moment, and consider how the calculation is set up in this case. Then we have length of interval = b − a number of segments = N b−a N (b − a) the k’th x value = xk = a + k N height of k’th rectangular strip = f (xk ) = x2 + 2xk + 1 k width of rectangular strips = ∆x = Combining the last two steps, the height of rectangle k is: f (xk ) = and its area is ak = f (xk ) × ∆x = f (xk ) × a+ k(b − a) N
2
+2 a+
k(b − a) N b−a N
+1
.
We use the last two equations to express ak in terms of k (and the quantities a, b, N ), then sum over k as before (A = ΣAk ). Some algebra is needed to simplify the sums so that summation formulae can be applied. The details are left as an exercise for the reader (see homework problems). Evaluating the limit N → ∞, we ﬁnally obtain
N
A = lim
N →∞
k=1
ak = (a + 1)2 (b − a) + (a + 1)(b − a)2 +
(b − a)3 . 3
as the area under the function f (x) = x2 + 2x + 1, over the interval a ≤ x ≤ b. Observe that the solution depends on a, and b. (The endpoints of the interval inﬂuence the total area under the curve.) For example, if the given interval happens to be 2 ≤ x ≤ 4. then, substituting a = 2, b = 4 into the above result for A, leads to A = (2 + 1)2 (4 − 2) + (2 + 1)(4 − 2)2 + 2 32 4−2 = 18 + 12 + = 3 3 3
In the next chapter, we will show that the tools of integration will lead to the same conclusion.
11.2.2 Using left (rather than right) endpoints
So far, we used the right endpoint of each rectangular strip to assign its height using the given function (see Figs. 2.2, 2.3, 2.4). Restated, we “glued” the top right corner of the rectangle to the graph of the function. This is the so called right endpoint approximation. We can just as well use the left corners of the rectangles to assign their heights (left endpoint approximation). A comparison of these for the function y = f (x) = x2 is shown in Figs. 11.1 and 11.2. In the case of the left endpoint approximation, we evaluate
11.2. Riemann Sums: Extensions and other examples
225
y y=f(x)
x a y y b
a=x 0
x1
x k−1 x k
x N=b
x
a=x 0
x1
x k−1 x k
x N=b
x
Figure 11.1. The area under the curve y = f (x) over an interval a ≤ x ≤ b could be computed by using either a left or right endpoint approximation. That is, the heights of the rectangles are adjusted to match the function of interest either on the right or on their left corner. Here we compare the two approaches. Usually both lead to the same result once a limit is computer to arrive at the “true ” area.
the heights of the rectangles starting at x0 (instead of x1 , and ending at xN −1 (instead of xN ). There are still N rectangles. To compare, sum of areas of the rectangles in the left versus the right endpoint approximation is
N
Right endpoints: AN strips =
k=1
f (xk )∆x.
N −1
Left endpoints: AN strips =
k=0
f (xk )∆x.
Details of one such computation is given in the box.
226 Example of left endpoint calculation
Chapter 11. Appendix
We here look again at a simple example, using the quadratic function, f (x) = x2 , 0 ≤ x ≤ 1,
We now compare the right and left endpoint approximation. These are shown in panels of Figure 11.2. Note that k 1 ∆x = , xk = , N N The area of the k’th rectangle is ak = f (xk ) × ∆x = (k/N ) (1/N ) , but now the sum starts at k = 0 so
N −1 N −1 2 N −1 2
AN strips =
k=0
f (xk )∆x =
k=0
k N
1 N
=
1 N3
k2 .
k=0
The ﬁrst rectangle corresponds to k = 0 in the left endpoint approximation (rather than k = 1 in the right endpoint approximation). But the k = 0 rectangle makes no contribution (as its area is zero in this example) and we have one less rectangle at the right endpoint of the interval, since the N’th rectangle is k = N − 1. Then the sum is AN strips = 1 N3 (2(N − 1) + 1)(N − 1)(N ) (2N − 1)(N − 1) = . 6 6N 2
The area, obtained by taking a limit for N → ∞ is A = lim AN strips = lim N →∞ N →∞ (2N − 1)(N − 1) 2 1 = = . 2 6N 6 3
We see that, after computing the limit, the result for the “true area” under the curve is exactly the same as we found earlier in this chapter using the right endpoint approximation.
11.3 Physical interpretation of the center of mass
We deﬁned the idea of a center of mass in Chapter 5. The center of mass has a physical interpretation for a real mass distribution. Loosely speaking, it is the position at which the mass “balances” without rotating to the left or right. In physics, we say that there is no net torque. The analogy with children sitting on a teetertotter is relevant: many children may sit along the length of the frame of a teeter totter, but if they distribute themselves in a way that the center of mass is at the fulcrum of the teeter totter, they will remain precariously balanced (until one of them ﬁdgets or gets off!). Notice that both the mass and the position of each child is important  a light child sitting on the very edge of the teeter totter can balance a heavier child sitting closer to the fulcrum (middle). The center of mass need not be the same as the median position. As we have see, the median is a position that
The approximation shown in pink is “missing” the largest rectangle shown in green.0 Comparison of Right Left approximations 0.0 0. the moment of mass of each of the beads relative to point x is given by the product of the mass and its distance away from the point . (However.0 100.0 Figure 11. However. the median and the mean are the same.0 10. the true area obtained is the same.0 0.0 0.as with the teeter totter. mass 1 contributes an amount m1 (x − x1 ) to the total moment of mass of the distribution about the point x. Altogether the moment of mass of the distribution about the .e.0 10. we speak of the “moment of mass” of a distribution about a point.3. greater mass) will contribute more torque than lighter beads. in the limit as the number of rectangles. for symmetric distributions. Physical interpretation of the center of mass 227 100.e.11. to make the object rotate. Rectangles with left or right corners on the graph of y = x2 are compared in this picture.0 0. i.) In physics. This quantity is related to the tendency of the mass to contribute a torque. and heavier beads (i.) The center of mass assigns a greater weight to parts of the distribution that are “far away” in the same sense. beads farther away will contribute more torque than beads closer to point x.2.0 100. Suppose we are interested in a particular point of reference x. In a discrete mass distribution. N → ∞. subdivides the distribution into two equal masses (or. for example.0 Right endpoint approximation Left endpoint approximation 0. more generally. produces equal sized areas under the graph of the density function. For example.0 10.
The center of mass of the distribution is the position at which the given mass distribution would balance. But we already know that the ﬁrst summation above is just the total mass. The center of mass is a special point x such that the moment of mass about that point is ¯ zero. so that n xM − ¯ mi xi i=1 = 0.3. Appendix n mi (x − xi ). x Now expanding the sum.228 point x is deﬁned as M1 (x) = i=1 Chapter 11.) m1 m2 m3 x1 x2 x x3 Figure 11. x ¯ i=1 mi − mi xi i=1 = 0. i=1 We have recovered precisely the deﬁnition of the center of mass or “average x coordinate”. m2 . Thus. (Loosely speaking the tendency to rotate to the left or the right are the same: thus the distribution would be balanced if it “rested on that point”. x2 . . m3 is distributed at positions x1 . we identify the center of mass as the point at which M1 (¯) = 0. taking the second term to the other side and dividing by M leads to x= ¯ 1 M n mi xi . we rewrite the above as n n mi x ¯ i=1 n − mi xi i=1 n = 0. here represented by the white triangle. x3 . A discrete set of masses m1 . so. x or n i=1 mi (¯ − xi ) = 0.
We will place these shells one inside the other so that their radii are parallel to the x axis (so r = x). Bottom: the cone showing one of the series of shells that are used in this example to calculate its volume.4.4. 11. The volume of a cylindrical shell of radius r. The heights of the shells are determined by their y value (i. Solution We show the cone and its generating curve in Figure 11. Here we show use an alternative dissection into shells. . It presents an alternative to the disk method.e.4 The shell method for computing volumes In Chapter 5. but there may not be enough time to cover this in detail. h = y = 1 − x = 71 Note to the instructor: This material may be skipped in the interest of time.1 y Example: Volume of a cone using the shell method y y=f(x)=1−x x y x y=1−x dx x Figure 11.4. Top: The curve that generates the cone (left) and the shape of the cone (right). together with a representative shell used in the calculation of total volume. We use the shell method71 to ﬁnd the volume of the cone formed by rotating the curve y =1−x about the y axis. we used dissection into small disks to compute the volume of solids of revolution. The shell method for computing volumes 229 11.4. height h and thickness τ is Vshell = 2πrhτ.11.
sec(x) tan2 (x) dx. but it can be checked by differentiation that sec(x) dx = ln  sec(x) + tan(x) + C Then the ﬁnal result is I= 1 (sec(x) tan(x) + ln  sec(x) + tan(x)) + C 2 . and dividing by 2) I= 1 2 sec(x) tan(x) + sec(x) dx . as ∆r → dr gets inﬁnitesimally small. We integrate over 0 ≤ r ≤ 1. we recognize this as a process of integration. This integral can be simpliﬁed to some extent by integration by parts as follows: Let u = sec(x). Then I = sec(x) tan(x) − sec3 (x) dx + sec(x) dx = sec(x) tan(x) − I + sec(x) dx so (taking both I’s to the left hand side. to obtain: 1 1 V = 2π 0 r(1 − r) dr = 2π 1 0 (r − r2 ) dr.5. = π . The integral can be transformed to I = sec(x) tan(x) − The latter can be rewritten: I1 = sec(x) tan2 (x) dx = sec(x)(sec2 (x) − 1). We are now in need of an antiderivative for sec(x).1 Secants and other “hard integrals” In a previous section. dv = sec2 (x) dx. No “obvious substitution” or further integration by parts helps here. The volume of the object is obtained by summing up these shell volumes. we encountered the integral I= sec3 (x) dx.230 Chapter 11. The thickness of the shell is ∆r. and for the ﬂattest shell r = 1. For the tallest shell r = 0. the volume of one shell is Vshell = 2πr(1 − r) ∆r. 3 We ﬁnd that V = 2π r3 r2 − 2 3 = 2π 0 1 1 − 2 3 11. Appendix 1 − r). Then du = sec(x) tan(x)dx while v = sec2 (x) dx = tan(x).5 More techniques of integration 11. where we have use a trigonometric identity for tan2 (x). Therefore. In the limit.
factor the denominator: 6x2 6x2 + 7x + 2 = (2x + 1)(3x + 2) Assign A and B in the following way: A B 7x + 4 7x + 4 + = = 2 2x + 1 3x + 2 (2x + 1)(3x + 2) 6x + 7x + 2 (Remember. B 3Ax + 2A + 2Bx + B A + = 2x + 1 3x + 2 (2x + 1)(3x + 2) Group like terms in the numerator.11.5. The denominator is a degree 2 polynomial function that has two roots and that can be factored easily. B = 2. ﬁnd the common denominator and rewrite it as a single fraction in terms of A and B. a ratio of two polynomials). Using this result. so: 3Ax + 2A + 2Bx + B (3A + 2B)x + (2A + B) 7x + 4 = = (2x + 1)(3x + 2) (2x + 1)(3x + 2) (2x + 1)(3x + 2) The above equation should hold true for all x values. 2A + B = 4 Solving the system of equations leads to A = 1. More techniques of integration 231 11. we rewrite the original expression in the form: 6x2 7x + 4 A B 1 2 7x + 4 = = + = + + 7x + 2 (2x + 1)(3x + 2) 2x + 1 3x + 2 2x + 1 3x + 2 Now we are ready to rewrite the integral: 2 I= 1 7x + 4 dx = 6x2 + 7x + 2 2 2 1 1 2 + 2x + 1 3x + 2 dx Simplify: 2 1 1 dx + 2 dx 2x + 1 3x + 2 1 1 Now the integral becomes a simple natural log integral that follows the pattern of Eqn. 6.1.5. First. 2 3 1 1 I= 72 This section was contributed by Lu Fan . Simplify: 2 2 2 1 I = ln 2x + 1 + ln 3x + 2 . therefore: 3A + 2B = 7. this is how we deﬁne A and B. we can use the following strategy. and note that this has to match the original fraction.2 A special case of integration by partial fractions 2 Evaluate this integral72 : 7x + 4 dx + 7x + 2 1 This integral involves a rational function (that is.) Next. the numerator is a degree 1 polynomial function. In this case.
for a class of 76 students.and yk the grade of student k. The value pi /N is the empirical probability of getting grade xi . k=1 11. This is just saying that the sum of the number of students in every one of the categories has to add up to the total class size. Then the average ¯ grade Y is computed by adding up the scores of all students and dividing by the number of students as follows: N 1 ¯ Y = yk . 11. and yk takes any value between 0 and 50 points). If the class consists of a total of N students.) The mean or average grade is: 1 ¯ X= N 50 xi pi . N (Dividing by N has normalized the distribution. N k=1 For example.6. Appendix 2 1 1 2 1 (ln 5 − ln 3) + (ln 8 − ln 5) = − ln 5 − ln 3 + ln 8. 2 3 6 2 3 This method can be used to solve any integral that contain a fraction with a degree 1 polynomial in the numerator and a degree 2 polynomial (that has two roots) in the denominator. i=0 .232 Simplify further: I= Chapter 11.1 Deﬁning an average grade Let N be the size of the class. then it follows that 10 N= i=1 pi .6 Analysis of data: a student grade distribution We study the distribution of student grades on a test written by 76 students and graded out of a maximum of 50 points.2 Fraction of students that scored a given grade Suppose that the number of students who got the grade xi is pi .6. we would have the sum 1 ¯ Y = 76 76 yk . Here k is the number of the student from 1 to N . The fraction of the class that scored grade xi is pi . 11.
the index i takes on values i = 1. grades in the the range 1620 can be described by the score18 up to an accuracy of ±2. . i. The bar graph shown in ˜ Figure 11.6. This is what we have done in Table 11.9 mean 50. etc). which is a fraction (pi /N ) of the whole ˜ class.e. Analysis of data: a student grade distribution 233 25. For example. ˜ (The notation xi is meant to remind us that we are approximating the grade value. There were a total of 76 students writing the test.g. .0 0. We could represent grades in each bin by some value up to a speciﬁed level of accuracy.0 Figure 11. We “lump together” scores into various categories (or “bins”) and create a distribution. test scores might be divided into ranges of bins in increments of 5 points: (15. 610. In that case.) For ˜ example.3 Frequency di